FCC ID: HN22011B-2 2011B Radio in 700C and 751G

 

Compliance Statement Insert Model Number: CN2 Device Name: Handheld Computer The responsible party for the compliance of this device is:

CAUTION: See users guide instructions for handling, charging, and replacing batteries. Failure to follow those instructions can result in personal injury, fire, or battery explosion. This product conforms to the following approvals. The user(s) of this product are cautioned to use accessories and peripherals approved by Intermec Technologies Corporation. The use of accessories other than those recommended, or changes to this product that are not approved by Intermec Technologies Corporation, may void the compliance of this product and may result in the loss of the users authority to operate the equipment. FCC Digital Emissions Compliance Intermec Technologies Corporation 6001 36th Avenue West Everett, WA 98203 USA

(425) 348-2600 This equipment is intended for operation in a commercial environment, in compliance with the requirements for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules, and it must not be used in a residential environment. It generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, it may cause interference to radio communications. If this equipment causes interference, the user will be required to correct the interference at the users own expense. This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. Canadian Digital Apparatus Compliance Radio Wave Exposure and Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Information for Model CN2 Cet appareil numrique de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. The Model CN2 Handheld Computer has been designed to comply with applicable safety requirements for exposure to radio waves. These requirements are based on scientific guidelines that include safety margins designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. The radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate or SAR. Tests for SAR are conducted using standardized methods with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level. While there may be differences between the SAR levels of various products, they are all designed to meet the relevant guidelines for exposure to the radio waves. For residents of Canada and the United States and other countries/regions that have adopted the SAR limit recommended by Industry Canada RSS-102 and Federal Communications Commission Office of Engineering and Technology (OET) Bulletin 65, which is 1.6W/kg averaged over one (1) gram of tissue for uncontrolled general population exposure, the highest SAR value for the Model CN2 Handheld Computer when worn on the body is 0.823 W/kg. The Model CN2 Handheld Computer has been tested and found to meet the FCC RF exposure guidelines when used with the Intermec accessories supplied or designated for this product. Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines. 578-100-117 Revision A

*578-100-117A*

*578-100-117A*

Page 1 of 3 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

(According to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014) PAGE ONE OF ONE THE PRODUCT HEREWITH COMPLIES WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF :

THE LOW-VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 73/23/EEC. THE EMC DIRECTIVE 89/336/EEC. THE R&TTE DIRECTIVE 1999/05/EC. IEC 60825-1 / EN 60825-1 ITE/Residential, Commercial, and Light Industrial Options: All Date Issued: January 5, 2005 EN 55024 : 1998 (CISPR 24) Information Technology Equipment Immunity Characteristics European Representative:

Intermec International Incorporated Sovereign House, Vastern Road Reading, Berkshire RG1 8BT England Manufacturers Name:

Intermec Technologies Corporation 6001 36th Avenue West Everett, WA 98203 Declares that the product listed below:

Product Type:

Product Name: CN2 Model Number: CN2 Beginning Serial Number: All Conforms to the following product specifications:

Safety: IEC 60950 / EN 60950 EMC: EN 55022 : 1998 / CISPR Publication 22 : 1997, Class A Limits and Methods Radio: ETSI EN 300 328-2 I, the undersigned, hereby declare that the equipment specified above conforms to the above Directive(s) and Standard(s). Company Official: Michael Abel Signature:

European Contact: Intermec International Incorporated, Sovereign House, Vastern Road, Reading, Berkshire, RG1 8BT England;

Phone INT+44 118 987 9400; Fax INT+44 118 987 9401 Limits and Methods of Measurement EN 61000-4-2 : 1995 Electrostatic Discharge EN 61000-4-3 : 1995 Radiated RF Field EN 61000-4-4 : 1995 Electrical Fast Transients EN 61000-4-5 : 1995 Voltage Surge EN 61000-4-6 : 1996 Conducted RF Field EN 61000-4-8 : 1995 Magnetic Field EN 61000-4-11 : 1994 Voltage Dips, Short Interruptions, and Variations EN61000-3-2 : 1995 + A1 : 1998 + A2 : 1998 + A14 : 2000 Harmonic Current Emissions EN61000-3-3 : 1994 Voltage Fluctuation and Flicker ETSI EN 301 489-17 Date: _05-JAN-2005_______ Position: Vice President Signed Copy on File 578-100-117 Revision A

*578-100-117A*

*578-100-117A*

Page 2 of 3 PROHLEN O DODROVN TECHNICKCH NAZEN

(V souladu se smrnic 22 ISO/IEC a EN 45014) STRNKA JEDNA Z JEDN STRNKY ZDE UVEDEN VROBEK SPLUJE POADAVKY:

SMRNICE 73/23/EEC PRO NZKONAPOV ZAZEN SMRNICE EMC 89/336/EEC SMRNICE R&TTE 1999/05/EC IEC 60825-1 / EN 60825-1 Varianty: Vechny Datum vydn: 05. Leden 2005 Vybaven informan technologie/rezidenn, komern a lehk prmyslov EN 55024: 1998 (CISPR 24) Vybaven informan technologie charakteristiky odolnosti Evropsk zstupce:

Intermec International Incorporated Sovereign House, Vastern Road Reading, Berkshire RG1 8BT England Jmno vrobce:

Intermec Technologies Corporation 6001 36th Avenue West Everett, WA 98203, USA prohlauje, e ne uveden vrobek:

Typ vrobku:

Nzev vrobku: CN2 slo vrobku: CN2 Poten sriov slo: Vechna Spluje nsledujc parametry vrobku:

Bezpenostn: IEC 60950 / EN 60950 EMC: EN 55022 : 1998 / CISPR vyhlka 22: 1997, Limity a metody tdy A Radio: ETSI EN 300 328-2 J, ne podepsan, tmto potvrzuji, e ve uveden vybaven spluje poadavky ve uvedench nazen a standard. Zstupce spolenosti: Michael Abel Podpis:

Evropsk kontakt: Intermec International Incorporated, Sovereign House, Vastern Road, Reading, Berkshire, RG1 8BT England;

Telefon: MEZIN. +44 118 987 9400; Fax MEZIN.+44 118 987 9401 Kontakt v esk republice: Global AmeriTech Corporation, Rytsk 10, 110 00, Praha 1, esk republika;

Telefon: MEZIN. +420-224 210 493; Fax MEZIN. +420-224 211 729 578-100-117 Revision A

*578-100-117A*

*578-100-117A*

Limity a metody men EN 61000-4-2 : 1995 Elektrostatick vboj EN 61000-4-3 : 1995 Vyzaovan vysokofrekvenn pole EN 61000-4-4: 1995 Rychl pechodov elektrick jevy EN 61000-4-5: 1995 Napov rz EN 61000-4-6: 1996 Veden vysokofrekvenn pole EN 61000-4-8: 1995 Magnetick pole EN 61000-4-11: 1994 Krtkodob poklesy napt, krtk peruen a pomal zmny napt EN61000-3-2: 1995 + A1: 1998 + A1: 1998 + A1: 2000 Vyzaovan harmonick proudy EN61000-3-3: 1994 Kolsn napt a blikn ETSI EN 301 489-17 Podepsan kopie v evidenci Datum: 05. Leden 2005 Pozice: viceprezident Page 3 of 3

 

 

Compliance Statement Insert Model Number: CN2NI Device Name: Handheld Computer The responsible party for the compliance of this device is:

CAUTION: See users guide instructions for handling, charging, and replacing batteries. Failure to follow those instructions can result in personal injury, fire, or battery explosion. This product conforms to the following approvals. The user(s) of this product are cautioned to use accessories and peripherals approved by Intermec Technologies Corporation. The use of accessories other than those recommended, or changes to this product that are not approved by Intermec Technologies Corporation, may void the compliance of this product and may result in the loss of the users authority to operate the equipment. FCC Digital Emissions Compliance Intermec Technologies Corporation 6001 36th Avenue West Everett, WA 98203 USA

(425) 348-2600 This equipment is intended for operation in a commercial environment, in compliance with the requirements for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules, and it must not be used in a residential environment. It generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, it may cause interference to radio communications. If this equipment causes interference, the user will be required to correct the interference at the users own expense. This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. Canadian Digital Apparatus Compliance Radio Wave Exposure and Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Information for Model CN2 Cet appareil numrique de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. The Model CN2NI Handheld Computer has been designed to comply with applicable safety requirements for exposure to radio waves. These requirements are based on scientific guidelines that include safety margins designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. The radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate or SAR. Tests for SAR are conducted using standardized methods with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level. While there may be differences between the SAR levels of various products, they are all designed to meet the relevant guidelines for exposure to the radio waves. For residents of Canada and the United States and other countries/regions that have adopted the SAR limit recommended by Industry Canada RSS-102 and Federal Communications Commission Office of Engineering and Technology (OET) Bulletin 65, which is 1.6W/kg averaged over one (1) gram of tissue for uncontrolled general population exposure, the highest SAR value for the Model CN2NI Handheld Computer when worn on the body is 0.823 W/kg. The Model CN2NI Handheld Computer has been tested and found to meet the FCC RF exposure guidelines when used with the Intermec accessories supplied or designated for this product. Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines. 578-100-118 Revision A

*578-100-118A*

*578-100-118A*

Page 1 of 3 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

(According to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014) PAGE ONE OF ONE THE PRODUCT HEREWITH COMPLIES WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF :

THE LOW-VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 73/23/EEC. THE EMC DIRECTIVE 89/336/EEC. THE R&TTE DIRECTIVE 1999/05/EC. IEC 60825-1 / EN 60825-1 ITE/Residential, Commercial, and Light Industrial Options: All Date Issued: January 5, 2005 EN 55024 : 1998 (CISPR 24) Information Technology Equipment Immunity Characteristics European Representative:

Intermec International Incorporated Sovereign House, Vastern Road Reading, Berkshire RG1 8BT England Manufacturers Name:

Intermec Technologies Corporation 6001 36th Avenue West Everett, WA 98203 Declares that the product listed below:

Product Type:

Product Name: CN2NI Model Number: CN2NI Beginning Serial Number: All Conforms to the following product specifications:

Safety: IEC 60950 / EN 60950 EMC: EN 55022 : 1998 / CISPR Publication 22 : 1997, Class A Limits and Methods Radio: ETSI EN 300 328-2 I, the undersigned, hereby declare that the equipment specified above conforms to the above Directive(s) and Standard(s). Company Official: Michael Abel Signature:

European Contact: Intermec International Incorporated, Sovereign House, Vastern Road, Reading, Berkshire, RG1 8BT England;

Phone INT+44 118 987 9400; Fax INT+44 118 987 9401 Limits and Methods of Measurement EN 61000-4-2 : 1995 Electrostatic Discharge EN 61000-4-3 : 1995 Radiated RF Field EN 61000-4-4 : 1995 Electrical Fast Transients EN 61000-4-5 : 1995 Voltage Surge EN 61000-4-6 : 1996 Conducted RF Field EN 61000-4-8 : 1995 Magnetic Field EN 61000-4-11 : 1994 Voltage Dips, Short Interruptions, and Variations EN61000-3-2 : 1995 + A1 : 1998 + A2 : 1998 + A14 : 2000 Harmonic Current Emissions EN61000-3-3 : 1994 Voltage Fluctuation and Flicker ETSI EN 301 489-17 Date: _05-JAN-2005_______ Position: Vice President Signed Copy on File 578-100-118 Revision A

*578-100-118A*

*578-100-118A*

Page 2 of 3 PROHLEN O DODROVN TECHNICKCH NAZEN

(V souladu se smrnic 22 ISO/IEC a EN 45014) STRNKA JEDNA Z JEDN STRNKY ZDE UVEDEN VROBEK SPLUJE POADAVKY:

SMRNICE 73/23/EEC PRO NZKONAPOV ZAZEN SMRNICE EMC 89/336/EEC SMRNICE R&TTE 1999/05/EC IEC 60825-1 / EN 60825-1 Varianty: Vechny Datum vydn: 05. Leden 2005 Vybaven informan technologie/rezidenn, komern a lehk prmyslov EN 55024: 1998 (CISPR 24) Vybaven informan technologie charakteristiky odolnosti Evropsk zstupce:

Intermec International Incorporated Sovereign House, Vastern Road Reading, Berkshire RG1 8BT England Jmno vrobce:

Intermec Technologies Corporation 6001 36th Avenue West Everett, WA 98203, USA prohlauje, e ne uveden vrobek:

Typ vrobku:

Nzev vrobku: CN2NI slo vrobku: CN2NI Poten sriov slo: Vechna Spluje nsledujc parametry vrobku:

Bezpenostn: IEC 60950 / EN 60950 EMC: EN 55022 : 1998 / CISPR vyhlka 22: 1997, Limity a metody tdy A Radio: ETSI EN 300 328-2 J, ne podepsan, tmto potvrzuji, e ve uveden vybaven spluje poadavky ve uvedench nazen a standard. Zstupce spolenosti: Michael Abel Podpis:

Evropsk kontakt: Intermec International Incorporated, Sovereign House, Vastern Road, Reading, Berkshire, RG1 8BT England;

Telefon: MEZIN. +44 118 987 9400; Fax MEZIN.+44 118 987 9401 Kontakt v esk republice: Global AmeriTech Corporation, Rytsk 10, 110 00, Praha 1, esk republika;

Telefon: MEZIN. +420-224 210 493; Fax MEZIN. +420-224 211 729 578-100-118 Revision A

*578-100-118A*

*578-100-118A*

Limity a metody men EN 61000-4-2 : 1995 Elektrostatick vboj EN 61000-4-3 : 1995 Vyzaovan vysokofrekvenn pole EN 61000-4-4: 1995 Rychl pechodov elektrick jevy EN 61000-4-5: 1995 Napov rz EN 61000-4-6: 1996 Veden vysokofrekvenn pole EN 61000-4-8: 1995 Magnetick pole EN 61000-4-11: 1994 Krtkodob poklesy napt, krtk peruen a pomal zmny napt EN61000-3-2: 1995 + A1: 1998 + A1: 1998 + A1: 2000 Vyzaovan harmonick proudy EN61000-3-3: 1994 Kolsn napt a blikn ETSI EN 301 489-17 Podepsan kopie v evidenci Datum: 05. Leden 2005 Pozice: viceprezident Page 3 of 3

 

 

Compliance Statement Insert Model Number: Model 700C (740/741, 750/751, & 760/761 Configurations) Intermec Technologies Corporation 6001 36th Avenue West Everett, WA 98203 USA

(425) 348-2600 Device Name: Pen Notepad Computer The responsible party for the compliance of this device is:

CAUTION: See users guide instructions for handling, charging, and replacing batteries. Failure to follow those instructions can result in personal injury, fire, or battery explosion. This product conforms to the following approvals. The user(s) of this product are cautioned to use accessories and peripherals approved by Intermec Technologies Corporation. The use of accessories other than those recommended, or changes to this product that are not approved by Intermec Technologies Corporation, may void the compliance of this product and may result in the loss of the users authority to operate the equipment. FCC Digital Emissions Compliance This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the radio or television receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the computer equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the radio or television receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio television technician for help. This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. Canadian Digital Apparatus Compliance Radio Wave Exposure and Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Information for Model 700C Configurations with GSM/GPRS Radio Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. The Model 700C Pen Notepad computer has been designed to comply with applicable safety requirements for exposure to radio waves. These requirements are based on scientific guidelines that include safety margins designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. The radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate or SAR. Tests for SAR are conducted using standardized methods with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level. While there may be differences between the SAR levels of various products, they are all designed to meet the relevant guidelines for exposure to the radio waves. For residents of the European Union and other countries/regions that have adopted the International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) SAR limit of 2W/Kg averaged over 10 grams of tissue for uncontrolled general population exposure, the highest SAR value for the Model 700C Pen Notepad computer, as tested by BABT/TV Product Service, for use at the ear is 0.544W/Kg (10g). For residents of Canada and the United States and other countries/regions that have adopted the SAR limit recommended by Industry Canada RSS-102 and Federal Communications Commission Office of Engineering and Technology (OET) Bulletin 65, which is 1.6W/kg averaged over one (1) gram of tissue for uncontrolled general population exposure, the highest SAR value for the Model 700C Pen Notepad computer, as tested by TV Product Service, for use at the ear is 0.355W/kg. Radio Wave Exposure and Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Information for Model 700C Configurations with CDMA Radio The Model 700C Pen Notepad computer has been designed to comply with applicable safety requirements for exposure to radio waves. These requirements are based on scientific guidelines that include safety margins designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. The radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate or SAR. Tests for SAR are conducted using standardized methods with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level. While there may be differences between the SAR levels of various products, they are all designed to meet the relevant guidelines for exposure to the radio waves. For residents of Canada and the United States and other countries/regions that have adopted the SAR limit recommended by Industry Canada RSS-102 and Federal Communications Commission Office of Engineering and Technology (OET) Bulletin 65, which is 1.6W/Kg averaged over one (1) gram of tissue for uncontrolled general population exposure, the highest SAR value for the Model 700C Pen Notepad computer, as tested by Celltech Lab Inc., for use at the ear is 1.47W/kg. 578-100-083 Revision F

*578-100-083F*

*578-100-083F*

Page 1 of 4 Compliance Statement Insert Model Number: Model 700C (740, 750, & 760 Configurations) Device Name: Pen Notepad Computer The responsible party for the compliance of this device is:

Laser Compliance and Precaution The 700C is registered with the CDRH as a Class II Laser Product (CFR 21 Subpart J). This product has a maximum output of 1.0 mW at 630-680 nm. Intermec Technologies Corporation 6001 36th Avenue West Everett, WA 98203 USA

(425) 348-2600 Warning There are no user serviceable parts inside the 700C. Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified herein, may result in hazardous laser light exposure of up to 1 mW at 630-680 nm. Avertissement Aucune des pices internes du modle 700C ne peut tre rpare par lutilisateur. Lutilisation dappareils de contrle et ajustement ainsi que lexcution de procdures dutilisation autres que celles qui sont indiques dans la prsente publication peuvent entraner une exposition dangereuse la lumire laser pouvant atteindre jusqu 1 mW 630-680 nm. Note: There are no controls or adjustments provided for routine operation or maintenance of the 700C. Remarque: Aucun appareil de contrle ou dajustement nest fourni pour les oprations de routine ou de maintenance de lappareil 700C. The label shown below is attached on the underside of the 700C devices containing a laser scanner. 578-100-083 Revision F

*578-100-083F*

*578-100-083F*

Page 2 of 4 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

(According to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014) PAGE ONE OF ONE THE PRODUCT HEREWITH COMPLIES WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF :

THE LOW-VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 73/23/EEC. THE EMC DIRECTIVE 89/336/EEC. THE R&TTE DIRECTIVE 1999/05/EC. ITE/Residential, Commercial, and Light Industrial Options: All Date Issued: September 24, 2004 EN 55024 : 1998 (CISPR 24) Information Technology Equipment Immunity Characteristics European Representative:

Intermec International Incorporated Sovereign House, Vastern Road Reading, Berkshire RG1 8BT England Limits and Methods of Measurement EN 61000-4-2 : 1995 Electrostatic Discharge EN 61000-4-3 : 1995 Radiated RF Field EN 61000-4-4 : 1995 Electrical Fast Transients EN 61000-4-5 : 1995 Voltage Surge EN 61000-4-6 : 1996 Conducted RF Field EN 61000-4-8 : 1995 Magnetic Field EN 61000-4-11 : 1994 Voltage Dips, Short Interruptions, and Variations Manufacturers Name:

Intermec Technologies Corporation 6001 36th Avenue West Everett, WA 98203 Declares that the product listed below:

Product Type:

Product Name: Model 700C Model Number: Model 700C Beginning Serial Number: All Conforms to the following product specifications:

Safety: IEC 950 / EN 60950 EMC: EN 55022 : 1998 / CISPR Publication 22 : 1997, Class B Limits and Methods Radio: ETSI EN 300 328-2 V1.1.1 (2000-7) Laser: IEC 60825-1 / EN 60825-1 Class 2 (630-680 nm 1.0W) Linear Imager:

I, the undersigned, hereby declare that the equipment specified above conforms to the above Directive(s) and Standard(s). Company Official: Michael Abel Signature:

European Contact: Intermec International Incorporated, Sovereign House, Vastern Road, Reading, Berkshire, RG1 8BT England;

Phone INT+44 118 987 9400; Fax INT+44 118 987 9401 Czech Republic Contact: Global AmeriTech Corporation, Rytirska 10, 110 00, Prague 1, Czech Republic;

Phone INT+420-224 210 493; Fax INT+420-224 211 729 578-100-083 Revision F

*578-100-083F*

*578-100-083F*

EN61000-3-2 : 1995 + A1 : 1998 + A2 : 1998 + A14 : 2000 Harmonic Current Emissions EN61000-3-3 : 1994 Voltage Fluctuation and Flicker IEC 60825-1 / EN 60825-1 Class 1 LED Product Date: September 24, 2004 Position: Vice President Signed Copy on File Page 3 of 4 PROHLEN O DODROVN TECHNICKCH NAZEN

(V souladu se smrnic 22 ISO/IEC a EN 45014) STRNKA JEDNA Z JEDN STRNKY ZDE UVEDEN VROBEK SPLUJE POADAVKY:

SMRNICE 73/23/EEC PRO NZKONAPOV ZAZEN SMRNICE EMC 89/336/EEC SMRNICE R&TTE 1999/05/EC Varianty: Vechny Datum vydn: 24. z 2004 Vybaven informan technologie/rezidenn, komern a lehk prmyslov EN 55024: 1998 (CISPR 24) Vybaven informan technologie charakteristiky odolnosti Evropsk zstupce:

Intermec International Incorporated Sovereign House, Vastern Road Reading, Berkshire RG1 8BT England Jmno vrobce:

Intermec Technologies Corporation 6001 36th Avenue West Everett, WA 98203, USA prohlauje, e ne uveden vrobek:

Typ vrobku:

Nzev vrobku: Model 700C slo vrobku: Model 700C Poten sriov slo: Vechna Spluje nsledujc parametry vrobku:

Bezpenostn: IEC 950 / EN 60950 EMC: EN 55022 : 1998 / CISPR vyhlka 22: 1997, Limity a metody tdy B Radio: ETSI EN 300 328-2 V1.1.1 (2000-7) Laser: IEC 60825-1 / EN 60825-1 Class 2 (630-680 nm 1.0W) Linear Imager:

J, ne podepsan, tmto potvrzuji, e ve uveden vybaven spluje poadavky ve uvedench nazen a standard. Zstupce spolenosti: Michael Abel Podpis:

Evropsk kontakt: Intermec International Incorporated, Sovereign House, Vastern Road, Reading, Berkshire, RG1 8BT England;

Telefon: MEZIN. +44 118 987 9400; Fax MEZIN.+44 118 987 9401 Kontakt v esk republice: Global AmeriTech Corporation, Rytsk 10, 110 00, Praha 1, esk republika;

Telefon: MEZIN. +420-224 210 493; Fax MEZIN. +420-224 211 729 Limity a metody men EN 61000-4-2 : 1995 Elektrostatick vboj EN 61000-4-3 : 1995 Vyzaovan vysokofrekvenn pole EN 61000-4-4: 1995 Rychl pechodov elektrick jevy EN 61000-4-5: 1995 Napov rz EN 61000-4-6: 1996 Veden vysokofrekvenn pole EN 61000-4-8: 1995 Magnetick pole EN 61000-4-11: 1994 Krtkodob poklesy napt, krtk peruen a pomal zmny napt EN61000-3-2: 1995 + A1: 1998 + A1: 1998 + A1: 2000 Vyzaovan harmonick proudy EN61000-3-3: 1994 Kolsn napt a blikn IEC 60825-1 / EN 60825-1 Class 1 LED Product Podepsan kopie v evidenci Pozice: viceprezident 578-100-083 Revision F

*578-100-083F*

*578-100-083F*

Page 4 of 4 Datum: 24. z 2004

 

 

Compliance Statement Insert Model Number: Model 700C (740/741, 750/751, & 760/761 Configurations) Device Name: Pen Notepad Computer The responsible party for the compliance of this device is:

th Intermec Technologies Corporation Avenue West 6001 36 Everett, WA 98203 USA

(425) 348-2600 CAUTION: See users guide instructions for handling, charging, and replacing batteries. Failure to follow those instructions can result in personal injury, fire, or battery explosion. This product conforms to the following approvals. The user(s) of this product are cautioned to use accessories and peripherals approved by Intermec Technologies Corporation. The use of accessories other than those recommended, or changes to this product that are not approved by Intermec Technologies Corporation, may void the compliance of this product and may result in the loss of the users authority to operate the equipment. FCC Digital Emissions Compliance This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the radio or television receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the computer equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the radio or television receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio television technician for help. Canadian Digital Apparatus Compliance This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. Radio Wave Exposure and Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Information for Model 700C Configurations with GSM/GPRS Radio The Model 700C Pen Notepad computer has been designed to comply with applicable safety requirements for exposure to radio waves. These requirements are based on scientific guidelines that include safety margins designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. The radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate or SAR. Tests for SAR are conducted using standardized methods with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level. While there may be differences between the SAR levels of various products, they are all designed to meet the relevant guidelines for exposure to the radio waves. For residents of the European Union and other countries/regions that have adopted the International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) SAR limit of 2W/Kg averaged over 10 grams of tissue for uncontrolled general population exposure, the highest SAR value for the Model 700C Pen Notepad computer, as tested by BABT/TV Product Service, for use at the ear is 0.544W/Kg (10g). For residents of Canada and the United States and other countries/regions that have adopted the SAR limit recommended by Industry Canada RSS-102 and Federal Communications Commission Office of Engineering and Technology (OET) Bulletin 65, which is 1.6W/kg averaged over one (1) gram of tissue for uncontrolled general population exposure, the highest SAR value for the Model 700C Pen Notepad computer, as tested by TV Product Service, for use at the ear is 0.355W/kg. For body worn operation, this radio has been tested and meets the FCC RF exposure guidelines when used with the Intermec accessories supplied or designated for this product. Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines. The highest SAR value for the Model 700C Pen Notepad computer, as tested by TUV Product Service, when worn on the body is 0.544 W/kg. Radio Wave Exposure and Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Information for Model 700C Configurations with CDMA Radio The Model 700C Pen Notepad computer has been designed to comply with applicable safety requirements for exposure to radio waves. These requirements are based on scientific guidelines that include safety margins designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. The radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate or SAR. Tests for SAR are conducted using standardized methods with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level. While there may be differences between the SAR levels of various products, they are all designed to meet the relevant guidelines for exposure to the radio waves. For residents of Canada and the United States and other countries/regions that have adopted the SAR limit recommended by Industry Canada RSS-102 and Federal Communications Commission Office of Engineering and Technology (OET) Bulletin 65, which is 1.6W/Kg averaged over one (1) gram of tissue for uncontrolled general population exposure, the highest SAR value for the Model 700C Pen Notepad computer, as tested by Celltech Lab Inc., for use at the ear is 1.47W/kg. For body worn operation, this radio has been tested and meets the FCC RF exposure guidelines when used with the Intermec accessories supplied or designated for this product. Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines. The highest SAR value for the Model 700C Pen Notepad computer, as tested by Celltech Lab Inc., when worn on the body is 1.0 W/kg. Page 1 of 4 Compliance Statement Insert Model Number: Model 700C (740, 750, & 760 Configurations) Device Name: Pen Notepad Computer The responsible party for the compliance of this device is:

Laser Compliance and Precaution The 700C is registered with the CDRH as a Class II Laser Product (CFR 21 Subpart J). This product has a maximum output of 1.0 mW at 630-680 nm. Intermec Technologies Corporation 6001 36th Avenue West Everett, WA 98203 USA

(425) 348-2600 Warning There are no user serviceable parts inside the 700C. Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified herein, may result in hazardous laser light exposure of up to 1 mW at 630-680 nm. Avertissement Aucune des pices internes du modle 700C ne peut tre rpare par lutilisateur. Lutilisation dappareils de contrle et ajustement ainsi que lexcution de procdures dutilisation autres que celles qui sont indiques dans la prsente publication peuvent entraner une exposition dangereuse la lumire laser pouvant atteindre jusqu 1 mW 630-680 nm. Note: There are no controls or adjustments provided for routine operation or maintenance of the 700C. Remarque: Aucun appareil de contrle ou dajustement nest fourni pour les oprations de routine ou de maintenance de lappareil 700C. The label shown below is attached on the underside of the 700C devices containing a laser scanner. 578-100-083 Revision F

*578-100-083F*

*578-100-083F*

Page 2 of 4 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

(According to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014) PAGE ONE OF ONE THE PRODUCT HEREWITH COMPLIES WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF :

THE LOW-VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 73/23/EEC. THE EMC DIRECTIVE 89/336/EEC. THE R&TTE DIRECTIVE 1999/05/EC. ITE/Residential, Commercial, and Light Industrial Options: All Date Issued: September 24, 2004 EN 55024 : 1998 (CISPR 24) Information Technology Equipment Immunity Characteristics European Representative:

Intermec International Incorporated Sovereign House, Vastern Road Reading, Berkshire RG1 8BT England Limits and Methods of Measurement EN 61000-4-2 : 1995 Electrostatic Discharge EN 61000-4-3 : 1995 Radiated RF Field EN 61000-4-4 : 1995 Electrical Fast Transients EN 61000-4-5 : 1995 Voltage Surge EN 61000-4-6 : 1996 Conducted RF Field EN 61000-4-8 : 1995 Magnetic Field EN 61000-4-11 : 1994 Voltage Dips, Short Interruptions, and Variations Manufacturers Name:

Intermec Technologies Corporation 6001 36th Avenue West Everett, WA 98203 Declares that the product listed below:

Product Type:

Product Name: Model 700C Model Number: Model 700C Beginning Serial Number: All Conforms to the following product specifications:

Safety: IEC 950 / EN 60950 EMC: EN 55022 : 1998 / CISPR Publication 22 : 1997, Class B Limits and Methods Radio: ETSI EN 300 328-2 V1.1.1 (2000-7) Laser: IEC 60825-1 / EN 60825-1 Class 2 (630-680 nm 1.0W) Linear Imager:

I, the undersigned, hereby declare that the equipment specified above conforms to the above Directive(s) and Standard(s). Company Official: Michael Abel Signature:

European Contact: Intermec International Incorporated, Sovereign House, Vastern Road, Reading, Berkshire, RG1 8BT England;

Phone INT+44 118 987 9400; Fax INT+44 118 987 9401 Czech Republic Contact: Global AmeriTech Corporation, Rytirska 10, 110 00, Prague 1, Czech Republic;

Phone INT+420-224 210 493; Fax INT+420-224 211 729 578-100-083 Revision F

*578-100-083F*

*578-100-083F*

EN61000-3-2 : 1995 + A1 : 1998 + A2 : 1998 + A14 : 2000 Harmonic Current Emissions EN61000-3-3 : 1994 Voltage Fluctuation and Flicker IEC 60825-1 / EN 60825-1 Class 1 LED Product Date: September 24, 2004 Position: Vice President Signed Copy on File Page 3 of 4 PROHLEN O DODROVN TECHNICKCH NAZEN

(V souladu se smrnic 22 ISO/IEC a EN 45014) STRNKA JEDNA Z JEDN STRNKY ZDE UVEDEN VROBEK SPLUJE POADAVKY:

SMRNICE 73/23/EEC PRO NZKONAPOV ZAZEN SMRNICE EMC 89/336/EEC SMRNICE R&TTE 1999/05/EC Varianty: Vechny Datum vydn: 24. z 2004 Vybaven informan technologie/rezidenn, komern a lehk prmyslov EN 55024: 1998 (CISPR 24) Vybaven informan technologie charakteristiky odolnosti Evropsk zstupce:

Intermec International Incorporated Sovereign House, Vastern Road Reading, Berkshire RG1 8BT England Jmno vrobce:

Intermec Technologies Corporation 6001 36th Avenue West Everett, WA 98203, USA prohlauje, e ne uveden vrobek:

Typ vrobku:

Nzev vrobku: Model 700C slo vrobku: Model 700C Poten sriov slo: Vechna Spluje nsledujc parametry vrobku:

Bezpenostn: IEC 950 / EN 60950 EMC: EN 55022 : 1998 / CISPR vyhlka 22: 1997, Limity a metody tdy B Radio: ETSI EN 300 328-2 V1.1.1 (2000-7) Laser: IEC 60825-1 / EN 60825-1 Class 2 (630-680 nm 1.0W) Linear Imager:

J, ne podepsan, tmto potvrzuji, e ve uveden vybaven spluje poadavky ve uvedench nazen a standard. Zstupce spolenosti: Michael Abel Podpis:

Evropsk kontakt: Intermec International Incorporated, Sovereign House, Vastern Road, Reading, Berkshire, RG1 8BT England;

Telefon: MEZIN. +44 118 987 9400; Fax MEZIN.+44 118 987 9401 Kontakt v esk republice: Global AmeriTech Corporation, Rytsk 10, 110 00, Praha 1, esk republika;

Telefon: MEZIN. +420-224 210 493; Fax MEZIN. +420-224 211 729 Limity a metody men EN 61000-4-2 : 1995 Elektrostatick vboj EN 61000-4-3 : 1995 Vyzaovan vysokofrekvenn pole EN 61000-4-4: 1995 Rychl pechodov elektrick jevy EN 61000-4-5: 1995 Napov rz EN 61000-4-6: 1996 Veden vysokofrekvenn pole EN 61000-4-8: 1995 Magnetick pole EN 61000-4-11: 1994 Krtkodob poklesy napt, krtk peruen a pomal zmny napt EN61000-3-2: 1995 + A1: 1998 + A1: 1998 + A1: 2000 Vyzaovan harmonick proudy EN61000-3-3: 1994 Kolsn napt a blikn IEC 60825-1 / EN 60825-1 Class 1 LED Product Podepsan kopie v evidenci Pozice: viceprezident 578-100-083 Revision F

*578-100-083F*

*578-100-083F*

Page 4 of 4 Datum: 24. z 2004

 

 

User's Manual 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Intermec Technologies Corporation Corporate Headquarters 6001 36th Ave. W. Everett, WA 98203 U.S.A. www.intermec.com Technical Communications Department 550 Second Street SE Cedar Rapids, IA 52401 U.S.A. The information contained herein is proprietary and is provided solely for the purpose of allowing customers to operate and service Intermec-manufactured equipment and is not to be released, reproduced, or used for any other purpose without written permission of Intermec. Information and specifications contained in this document are subject to change without prior notice and do not represent a commitment on the part of Intermec Technologies Corporation. E 2002 by Intermec Technologies Corporation. All rights reserved. The word Intermec, the Intermec logo, Norand, ArciTech, CrossBar, Data Collection Browser, dcBrowser, Duratherm, EasyCoder, EasyLAN, Enterprise Wireless LAN, EZBuilder, Fingerprint, i-gistics, INCA (under license), InterDriver, Intermec Printer Network Manager, IRL, JANUS, LabelShop, Mobile Framework, MobileLAN, Nor*Ware, Pen*Key, Precision Print, PrintSet, RoutePower, TE 2000, Trakker Antares, UAP, Universal Access Point, and Virtual Wedge are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Intermec Technologies Corporation. Throughout this manual, trademarked names may be used. Rather than put a trademark ( or ) symbol in every occurrence of a trademarked name, we state that we are using the names only in an editorial fashion, and to the benefit of the trademark owner, with no intention of infringement. There are U.S. and foreign patents pending. Microsoft, Windows, and the Windows logo are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Bluetooth is a trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc., U.S.A. This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit

(http://www.opensssl.org/). This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (EAY@cryptsoft.com). ii 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Document Change Record This page records changes to this document. The document was originally released as Revision A. Revision Date Description of Change B C D E F G 11/2002 04/2003 08/2003 01/2004 04/2004 10/2004 Added information about the Siemens MC45 radio module, the tethered scanner, CAB extraction, FTP Server parameters, and Data Collection control panel applet imager op-

tions. Added information about the ambient light sensor, the beeper, keypad sequences, the alphanumeric keypad, the vibrator, an accessories list, programming notifications, the MaxiCode symbology, the Utilities control panel applet, and the Wireless Network con-

trol panel applet. Upgraded Pocket PC 2002 information to Windows Mobile 2003, upgraded all illustra-

tions to gray-scale, added new Imager functions, moved the Automatic Data Collection COM Interface material to the SDK Users Manual. Added 730 Computer information, revised CDMA Setup information, and revised Wire-

less Area Network Printing information. Updated 802.11 security supplicant information. Added new network selection APIs. Incorporated information about the Intermec Settings control panel applet for PSM Builds 3.00 or newer. Added information about the PhoneUtility application. Revised Chapter 4, Network Support. Added tethered scanner and internal scanner configura-

tion and troubleshooting information to Chapter 6, Scanner Support. Added information about resetting the 700 Series Computer. Updated the Profile Wizard information in Appendix A, Configurable Settings. Revised information about using Sprint Watcher in Chapter 4, Network Support. Added information about the 700CXL Computer, including the Phone CDMA and Phone GSM applications. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual iii iv 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Contents Contents Before You Begin Safety Summary Do not repair or adjust alone First aid Resuscitation Energized equipment

. Warranty Information Web Support Telephone Support xvii xvii xvii xvii xvii xvii xviii xix xix xix xix xx xx Who Should Read this Manual?

Related Documents Safety Icons Global Services and Support 1 Introduction

. 1 Ambient Light Sensor

. 2 Audio System

. Speaker Microphone External Headset Jack 3 3 4 4 Battery

. 5 Beeper

. Enable the Beeper

. Disable the Scanner Mute

. Select a Beeper Volume Disable the Beeper

. 7 7 8 9 10 Keypad

. Backlight for Keypad

. Key Sequences

[Gold] or [Gold/White] Plane Keys Alpha (Blue) Plane Keys 11 11 12 12 14 Modem Support

. 16 PSM Build Version

. 16 Resetting Your 700 Series Computer

. 17 Software Build Version

. 18 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual v Contents Storage Media

. CompactFlash Cards Secure Digital Cards 19 19 19 Vibrator

. 20 Wireless Network Support

. 21 Accessories

. 22 Whats New

. 22 Windows Mobile 2003

. 23 Software Builds

. 24 Where to Find Information

. 25 2 Basic Skills Writing on the Screen Today Screen Programs Navigation Bar and Command Bar Pop-up Menus Notifications Entering Information Typing With the Onscreen Keyboard Using Block Recognizer Using Letter Recognizer Using Transcriber Selecting Typed Text

. Using My Text Finding and Organizing Information Customizing Your 700 Color Computer Adjusting Settings Adding or Removing Programs Selecting the Writing Converting Writing to Text Creating a Drawing Selecting a Drawing Drawing on the Screen Creating a Recording Recording a Message 26 26 27 28 29 29 30 31 32 33 33 33 34 34 35 37 37 37 38 38 39 40 41 41 41 Microsoft ActiveSync

. 44 vi 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Contents Microsoft Pocket Outlook Calendar: Scheduling Appointments and Meetings Contacts: Tracking Friends and Colleagues Synchronizing Calendar Why Use Categories in the Calendar?

Whats an All Day Event?

Whats a Recurrence Pattern?

Viewing Appointments Creating or Changing an Appointment Creating an All Day Event Setting a Reminder for an Appointment Adding a Note to an Appointment Making an Appointment Recurring Assigning an Appointment to a Category Sending a Meeting Request Finding an Appointment Deleting an Appointment Changing Calendar Options

. Creating a Contact Synchronizing Contacts Viewing Contacts Creating or Changing a Contact Adding a Note to a Contact Assigning a Contact to a Category Copying a Contact Sending a Message to a Contact Finding a Contact Deleting a Contact Changing Contacts Options Synchronizing E-mail Messages Managing E-mail Messages and Folders Connecting to a Mail Server Composing and Sending Messages Creating a Note Synchronizing Notes Creating a Task Synchronizing Tasks Tasks: Keeping a To Do List Notes: Capturing Thoughts and Ideas Inbox: Sending and Receiving E-mail Messages Companion Programs Pocket Word Creating a Document Typing Mode Writing Mode Recording Mode Drawing Mode Synchronizing Pocket Word Documents

. Creating a Workbook Tips for Working in Pocket Excel Pocket Excel 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 46 46 47 47 48 49 49 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 58 59 60 61 61 62 63 64 65 65 66 67 67 68 69 70 70 71 71 72 73 73 74 75 77 78 78 78 79 80 80 81 81 82 82 83 vii Contents MSN Messenger Windows Media Player for Windows Mobile Microsoft Reader Setting Up an Account Signing In and Out Working with Contacts Managing Contacts Sending a Message

. Getting Books on Your 700 Color Computer Using the Library Reading a Book Using Reader Features Removing a Book Pocket Internet Explorer The Mobile Favorites Folder Favorite Links Mobile Favorites Using AvantGo Channels Using Pocket Internet Explorer

. Viewing Mobile Favorites and Channels Browsing the Internet Getting Connected Connecting to Work Connecting to an Internet Service Provider Creating a Modem Connection to an ISP Creating an Ethernet Connection to an ISP

. Creating a Modem Connection to Work Creating a Wireless Network Connection to Work Creating a VPN Server Connection to Work Creating an Ethernet Connection to Work Ending a Connection Connecting Directly to an E-mail Server Setting Up an E-mail Account 84 85 85 86 87 88 89 90 90 91 92 93 93 94 94 94 95 96 96 97 97 98 98 98 103 104 106 108 111 113 114 114 114 3 Installing Applications

. 117 Packaging an Application

. 118 Installing Applications Using Microsoft ActiveSync Using the FTP Server Using a Storage Card

. Copying to a CompactFlash Card Copying to a Secure Digital Storage Card 119 119 120 120 120 121 Updating the System Software

. 121 viii 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Contents Application Migration

. 122 Migrating from a 700 Monochrome Computer

. 124 Cabinet File Installation

. 124 Network Support

. 125 CORE

. Activating CORE Install an Available Radio Module

. Loading a Radio Module Network Adapters 802.11b Radio CORE Module Ethernet Communications 802.11b Communications No Networking Network Selection APIs Network Connections WWAN Radio Options CDMA/1xRTT GSM/GPRS PhoneUtility AT Command Interface

. Documentation About the Application Wireless Personal Area Networking 126 126 126 126 127 128 129 129 132 132 133 134 134 164 166 169 174 174 174 AutoIP/DHCP

. 178 SNMP Configuration on the 700 Series Computer Management Information Base Object Identifiers Configuring with SNMP

. 179 179 180 180 Printer Support

. 181 Printing ASCII

. Directly to a Port Directly to a Generic Serial Port 182 182 182 4 5 IrDA Printer Driver

. 182 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual ix Contents NPCP Printer Driver About NPCP NPCP Driver Installation and Removal Opening the NPCP Driver Closing the NPCP Driver Reading from the NPCP Driver Writing to the NPCP Driver NPCP Driver I/O Controls NPCP Printer Communications Sample Code NPCP Error Codes

. ONeil Printer Driver DTR Driver Installation and Removal Opening the DTR Driver Closing the DTR Driver Writing to the DTR Driver DTR Printer Communications

. 183 183 183 184 184 184 184 185 186 186 187 188 188 189 189 189 189 6 Scanner Support

. 191 Scanner Control and Data Transfer

. 192 EasySet Software

. 192 Data Collection Configuration

. 193 Internal Scanners For Units With PSM Build 3.00 or Newer Scanner and Imager Settings Internal Scanner Supported Symbologies

. Tethered Scanners For Units With PSM Builds Older than 3.00 Enabling and Disabling Error Message Changing Comm Settings Scanner Cabling Limitations and Capabilities

. For Units With PSM Build 3.00 or Newer Configuring the Tethered Scanner Troubleshooting the 1551E/1553 Tethered Scanner Reset Factory Defaults Tethered Scanner Supported Symbologies 194 194 195 195 196 196 196 197 197 199 199 201 201 204 204 205 x 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Programming

. 207 7 Contents Creating CAB Files Creating Device-Specific CAB Files Creating an .INF File Sample .INF File

. Using Installation Functions in SETUP.DLL After the CAB File Extraction Creating CAB Files with CAB Wizard Troubleshooting the CAB Wizard 208 208 208 217 220 220 223 224 Customization and Lockdown

. 225 FTP Server Configurable Parameters Via the Registry Editor BlockSize DeviceName DeviceURL IDNATarget ManifestName PauseAtStartup Root

. Transferring Files Over TCP/IP Networks Stopping the FTP Server from Your Application Autostart FTP Kernel I/O Controls IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICE_INFO IOCTL_HAL_ITC_READ_PARM IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICEID IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOTLOADER_VERINFO IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT IOCTL_HAL_GET_RESET_INFO IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOT_DEVICE IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT IOCTL_PROCESSOR_INFORMATION IOCTL_GET_CPU_ID

. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 227 228 228 228 228 229 229 229 229 230 233 233 235 235 236 240 242 243 244 245 245 246 247 248 249 250 xi Contents Network Selection APIs Basic Connect/Disconnect Functions RadioConnect() RadioDisconnect() RadioDisassociate() Query Information Functions GetAssociationStatus() GetAuthenticationMode() GetBSSID() GetDiversity() GetLinkSpeed() GetMac() GetNetworkMode() GetNetworkType() GetSSID() GetPowerMode() GetRSSI() GetTXPower() GetWepStatus() GetRadioIpAddress() GetCCXStatus() Set Information Functions

. ConfigureProfile() EnableZeroConfig() isZeroConfigEnabled() isOrinoco() isSupplicantRunning() StartScanList() StartSupplicant() StopSupplicant() isDHCPEnabled() RenewDHCP() GetCurrentDriverName() ResetRadioToSystemSave() EnableSuppLogging() SwitchPacketDriver() AddWep() EnableWep() EncryptionStatus() SetAuthenticationMode() SetChannel() SetNetworkMode() SetPowerMode() SetSSID() SetCCXStatus() SetMixedCellMode() RemoveWep() Deprecated Functions Helper Functions 251 253 253 253 254 254 254 255 255 256 256 257 257 258 258 259 259 260 261 262 262 263 263 263 264 265 265 266 266 267 267 267 268 268 268 269 269 269 270 270 270 271 271 271 272 272 272 273 273 xii 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Contents Notifications

. NLEDGetDeviceInfo NLEDSetDevice Reboot Functions IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT

. Remapping the Keypad Unshifted Plane Gold Plane Alpha (Blue) Plane Key Values Numeric Keypad Alphanumeric Keypad

. How Key Values Are Stored in Registry Change Notification Advanced Keypad Remapping Scan Codes Numeric Keypad Alphanumeric Keypad Sample View of Registry Keys 274 275 275 276 276 276 276 277 277 277 278 278 278 278 279 279 279 280 280 281 283 Configurable Settings

. 285 A Configuration Parameters Changing a Parameter Setting About Configuration Parameters

. Data Collection Control Panel Applet Symbologies

. Code 39 Standard 2 of 5 Codabar UPC/EAN Code 93 Code 128 Plessey MSI PDF417 Interleaved 2 of 5 Matrix 2 of 5 Telepen Code 11 QR Code Data Matrix MaxiCode 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 286 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 298 299 300 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 xiii Contents Symbology Options Beeper/LED Imager Symbology ID Prefix Suffix

. Beeper

. Beeper Volume

. Beeper Frequency

. Good Read Beeps Good Read Beep Duration

. Aimer LED Duration Sticky Aimer Duration

. Image Dimension

. Lighting Mode 1D OmniDir Decode Enable

. Virtual Wedge Preamble Postamble Grid Code Page Virtual Wedge Intermec Settings Control Panel Applet

. 336 SNMP Control Panel Applet Security

. Read Only Community Read/Write Community

. Read Encryption

. Write Encryption Encryption Key

. Authentication Threshold Contact Name Location Traps Identification Unit Information Control Panel Applet Versions Battery Status CAB Files

. Utilities Control Panel Applet Dock Switch Registry Save Wakeup Mask App Launch

. xiv 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 310 310 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 324 325 326 327 328 329 329 330 332 334 335 337 338 338 339 340 341 342 343 343 344 345 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 353 354 355 356 357 Contents Wireless Network Control Panel Applet About the Wireless Network Terminology Configuring Your Wireless Network

. Basic Security Advanced Other Configurable Parameters Audio Volume Automatic Shutoff Backlight Timeout Date/Time Key Clicks

. Using Reader Commands Change Configuration Set Time and Date

. Configuration Bar Codes Audio Volume Automatic Shutoff Backlight Timeout Key Clicks Virtual Wedge Grid, Preamble, Postamble

. Grid Preamble Postamble 359 359 359 361 362 363 381 382 382 382 383 383 383 384 384 385 386 386 387 387 388 389 389 389 389 B Bar Code Symbologies

. 391 Codabar

. 392 Code 11

. 392 Code 39

. Encoded Code 39 (Concatenation)

. Encoded Code 39 (Full ASCII) 392 393 393 Code 93

. 393 Code 128

. 394 Data Matrix

. 395 EAN (European Article Numbering)

. 395 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual xv Contents I 2 of 5 (Interleaved)

. 396 Matrix 2 of 5

. 396 MaxiCode

. 396 PDF417

. Micro PDF417

. 396 397 Plessey

. MSI Code (Variant of Plessey)

. 397 398 QR Code (Quick Response Code)

. 398 S 2 of 5 (Standard 2 of 5)

. 398 Telepen

. 399 UPC (Universal Product Code)

. 399 I Index Classes and Functions

. 402 General Index

. 404 Files Index

. 423 xvi 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Before You Begin Before You Begin Safety Summary This section provides you with safety information, technical support information, and sources for additional product information. Your safety is extremely important. Read and follow all warnings and cautions in this document before handling and operating Intermec equipment. You can be seriously injured, and equipment and data can be damaged if you do not follow the safety warnings and cautions. Do not repair or adjust alone Do not repair or adjust energized equipment alone under any circumstances. Someone capable of providing first aid must always be present for your safety. First aid Always obtain first aid or medical attention immediately after an injury. Never neglect an injury, no matter how slight it seems. Resuscitation Begin resuscitation immediately if someone is injured and stops breathing. Any delay could result in death. To work on or near high voltage, you should be familiar with approved industrial first aid methods. Energized equipment Never work on energized equipment unless authorized by a responsible authority. Energized electrical equipment is dangerous. Electrical shock from energized equipment can cause death. If you must perform authorized emergency work on energized equipment, be sure that you comply strictly with approved safety regulations. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual xvii Before You Begin Safety Icons This section explains how to identify and understand dangers, warnings, cautions, and notes that are in this manual. You may also see icons that tell you when to follow ESD procedures and when to take special precautions for handling optical parts. A warning alerts you of an operating procedure, practice, condition, or statement that must be strictly observed to avoid death or serious injury to the persons working on the equipment. Avertissement: Un avertissement vous avertit dune procdure de fonctionnement, dune mthode, dun tat ou dun rapport qui doit tre strictement respect pour viter loccurrence de mort ou de blessures graves aux personnes manupulant lquipement. A caution alerts you to an operating procedure, practice, condition, or statement that must be strictly observed to prevent equipment damage or destruction, or corruption or loss of data. Attention: Une prcaution vous avertit dune procdure de fonctionnement, dune mthode, dun tat ou dun rapport qui doit tre strictement respect pour empcher lendommagement ou la destruction de lquipement, ou laltration ou la perte de donnes. Note: Notes either provide extra information about a topic or contain special instructions for handling a particular condition or set of circumstances. xviii 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Global Services and Support Before You Begin Warranty Information To understand the warranty for your Intermec product, visit the Intermec web site at http://www.intermec.com and click Service & Support. The Intermec Global Sales & Service page appears. From the Service &

Support menu, move your pointer over Support, and then click Warranty. Disclaimer of warranties: The sample code included in this document is presented for reference only. The code does not necessarily represent complete, tested programs. The code is provided as is with all faults. All warranties are expressly disclaimed, including the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Web Support Visit the Intermec web site at http://www.intermec.com to download our current manuals in PDF format. To order printed versions of the Intermec manuals, contact your local Intermec representative or distributor. Visit the Intermec technical knowledge base (Knowledge Central) at http://intermec.custhelp.com to review technical information or to request technical support for your Intermec product. Telephone Support These services are available from Intermec Technologies Corporation. Service Factory Repair and On-site Repair Technical Support Service Contract Status Schedule Site Surveys or Installations Ordering Products Description Request a return authorization number for authorized service center repair, or request an on-site repair technician. Get technical support on your Intermec product. Inquire about an existing contract, renew a contract, or ask invoicing questions. Schedule a site survey, or request a product or system installation. Talk to sales administration, place an order, or check the status of your order. In the U.S.A. and Canada call 1-800-755-5505 and choose this option 1 2 3 4 5 Outside the U.S.A. and Canada, contact your local Intermec representative. To search for your local representative, from the Intermec web site, click Contact. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual xix Before You Begin Who Should Read this Manual?

Related Documents This manual provides you with information about the features of the 700 Series Color Mobile Computer and how to configure, troubleshoot, and support it. You must be familiar with your host PC, your network, and your other Intermec equipment. This table contains a list of related Intermec documents and their part numbers. Document Title 700 Color with Windows Mobile 2003 Quick Start Guide 730 Mobile Computer Quick Start Guide Intermec Computer Command Reference Manual Intermec Developers Library CD 700C Recovery CD Windows Mobile 2003 Edition English Part Number 962-054-069 962-054-068 073529 235-114-001 (Kit) 235-110-001 (Kit) The Intermec web site at http://www.intermec.com contains many of our documents that you can download in PDF format. To order printed versions of the Intermec manuals, contact your local Intermec representative or distributor. xx 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 1 Introduction This chapter introduces the 700 Series Color Mobile Computer, devel-

oped by Intermec Technologies Corporation to enhance wireless connec-

tivity needs. This chapter contains hardware and software configuration information to assist you in making the most out of your 700 Color Computer. The com-

ponents include:

S Ambient light sensors (next page) S Audio system (page 3) S Battery (page 5) S Beeper (page 7) S Keypad (page 11) S Modem support (page 16) S PSM build version (page 16) S Resetting your 700 Series Computer (page 17) S Software build version (page 18) S Storage media (page 19) S Vibrator (page 20) S Wireless network support (page 21) Note: Desktop icons and control panel applet icons are shown to the left. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 1 Chapter 1 Introduction Ambient Light Sensor Note: This information does not apply to the 730 Computer. The ambient light sensor turns on the display lighting when conditions warrant but automatically turns if off again as surrounding light increases. This conserves your 700 Color and 700CXL battery power. Ambient Light Sensor Ambient Light Sensor This illustration shows the 700 Color Computer with a numeric keypad (left) and an alphanumeric keypad (right). To adjust the ambient light sensor, tap Start > Settings > the System tab >

the Backlight icon > the Both Power tab. Make your selections, then tap ok to exit this applet. 2 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 1 Introduction Audio System Speaker The audio system consists of the speaker, internal microphone, and the external headset jack. A speaker capable of variable volume levels is located on the back of the computer. This speaker has a transducer volume of 85 dB min at 10 CM and a frequency range of 18 KHz. Speaker Speaker 700 Color or 700CXL Computer 730 Computer 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 3 Chapter 1 Introduction Microphone The built-in microphone is located on the bottom of the unit next to the Hirose docking connector. Charging/Docking connector Microphone This is the bottom of the 700 Color Computer. Note that the keypad is to the bottom in this illustration. External Headset Jack The external headset jack connects a mobile phone style headset to your mobile computer for use in noisy environments. The jack is a 2.5 mm, three-conductor jack, with autosensing of the headset jack insertion which disables the internal speaker and microphone. The external headset jack is located on the bottom of the mobile computer next to the Hirose docking connector. Headset jack Charging/Docking connector This is the bottom of the 700 Color Computer. Note that the keypad is to the bottom in this illustration. 4 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Battery Chapter 1 Introduction The 700 Series and 700CXL Computers come with a 14.4 Watt-hour, 7.2V, replaceable Lithium-Ion (LiIon) battery. The 730 Computer comes with an 8.8 Watt-hour, 3.7V, replaceable LiIon battery. To view the status of this battery from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start

> Settings > the System tab > the Power icon > the Power tab to view the current status of both the main battery and the backup battery. Tap ok to exit this information. For Units With PSM Builds Older than 3.00 You can also view the battery status for the 700 Series Computer by accessing the Unit Information control panel applet. Tap Start > Settings

> the System tab > the Unit Information icon > the Battery Status tab to view the current status. Tap ok to exit this information. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 5 Chapter 1 Introduction If your computer shuts down because of low battery conditions, your com-

puter does not operate. This is done to ensure that data is protected. Al-

though the battery does protect the data against loss for several hours, you should connect your computer to a power source when you first detect a low battery condition. Your computer contains an internal super capacitor, a temporary power storage device, that protects data for up to ten minutes. This is to give you time to replace the main battery pack before that data is lost. Be sure to put the computer in a suspend mode before doing so. If you have at least one device in your 700 Series Computer (radio, scan-

ner, imager, or Ethernet), the battery power fail level is set so that after the system shuts down in a low battery condition, there is still sufficient charge to allow the unit to remain configured, keep proper time, and maintain DRAM (Dynamic Random Access Memory) for at least 23 to 32 hours at room temperature if the main battery remains in the mobile computer. The configuration and time are lost if:

S The battery discharges beyond this level. S The battery is removed when the computer is not in suspend mode. S A cold reset is performed on the computer. You can modify RAM maintenance in a limited way. On the 700 Com-

puter, tap Start > Settings > the System tab > the Power icon > the Bat-

tery tab. Drag the slider bar to the right to change the suspend voltage to favor suspend time over rundown time, then click ok to exit. 6 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Beeper Enable the Beeper Chapter 1 Introduction Note: Each time the 700 Computer is cold-booted, all default settings are restored. If the beeper is disabled on your 700 Color Computer, do the following instructions to enable the beeper. If you are not able to enable the beeper, then contact Customer Support. For information about setting volume levels for screen taps, ActiveSync alert noises, etc., tap Start > Help > Pocket PC Basics, then select Notifications. Do the following to enable the beeper:

1 Tap Start > Settings > the Personal tab > Sounds & Notifications > the Volume tab. 2 Drag the System volume slider bar to the right off the Silent position. 3 Tap ok to exit this applet. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 7 Chapter 1 Introduction Disable the Scanner Mute Note: This information does not apply to the 730 Computer. Do the following to disable the mute feature on the scanner. 1 Tap Start > Settings > the System tab > the Audio icon, then select User defined audio settings. 2 Tap the Input Mixing tab, then clear the SCAN Mute box. 3 Drag its slider bar (note the greyed slider bar) to the appropriate level of loudest, with the left side being the most quiet and the right side being the most loud. Tap ok to exit this applet. 8 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Select a Beeper Volume Chapter 1 Introduction Note: The 730 Computer does not support the laser scanner. To determine your PSM Build version, tap Start > Programs > File Ex-

plorer > the Flash File Store folder > the PSMinfo text file. For Units With PSM Builds Older than 3.00 Do the following to select a beeper volume. 700 Computers built with a laser scanner have three options: Off, High, or Medium. 700 Computers built with an imager have just two: Beeper or Vibrate. 730 Computers have just the Beeper option. See Appendix A, Configurable Settings, for more information about the Beeper Volume or Beeper option. 1 Tap Start > Settings > the System tab > the Data Collection icon to access its control panel applet. 2 Use the right and left arrows to scroll to the Beeper/LED tab, then tap this tab. 3 For units with laser scanners:

Tap Beeper Volume, select an option, then tap Apply to change the set-

ting. For units with imagers:

Select either option, then tap Apply to change the setting. For 730 Com-

puters, the Vibrate option is not supported. 4 Tap ok to confirm this change, then tap ok to exit the Data Collection control panel applet. 700 Color with Laser Scanner Screen 700 Color with Imager Screen 730 Screen 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 9 Chapter 1 Introduction For Units With PSM Build 3.00 or Newer To select a beeper volume for the 700 Color Computer, tap Start > Set-

tings > the System tab > the Intermec Settings icon. Tap the 700 Settings folder twice, tap (+) to expand the Beeper folder, then tap (+) to expand the Volume option. Select an item, then tap (+) to close this option. Disable the Beeper 700 Color Screen 730 Screen Note: Information about the settings you can configure with the Intermec Settings control panel applet is described in the Intermec Computer Com-

mand Reference Manual (P/N: 073529). The online manual is available from the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com. Do the following to disable the beeper:

1 Tap Start > Settings > the Personal tab > Sounds & Notification > the Volume tab. 2 Drag the System volume slider completely to the left to Silent. 3 Tap ok to exit this applet. 10 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 1 Introduction Keypad Instructions for the keypad include the backlight and keypress sequences. Backlight for Keypad Note: This information does not apply to the 730 Computer. You can configure your keypad to turn on a backlight to assist you when you are working in low lighting. To adjust the backlight for the keypad, tap Start > Settings > the System tab > Backlight. Use the left/right scroll arrows to move to and tap the Keyboard tab. Make your selection, then tap ok to exit this applet. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 11 Chapter 1 Introduction Key Sequences Use the following key sequences to enter characters into your 700 Color Computer using either a numeric keypad or an alphanumeric keypad.

[Gold] or [Gold/White] Plane Keys The [Gold] b plane key (numeric keypad) or the [Gold/White] c plane key (alphanumeric keypad) provides you access to display controls, special characters, and Pocket PC options. Press the [Gold] b key or the [Gold/White] c key for each gold plane key stroke you wish to make. For example to turn on the front light, press and hold the [Gold] b key plus the 3 key on the numeric keypad or press and hold the [Gold/White] c key plus the I key on the alphanu-

meric keypad. To turn the front light off, press the appropriate keys again. Below and on the next page are the key sequences. Numeric Keypad The following table lists sequences that use the [Gold] b plane key. See Chapter 2, Windows Mobile 2003, for information about the Pocket PC applications. Press the Keys

[Gold] b 3 Toggle the backlight on or off (also goes through backlight To Do This power levels if held down) Access the Pocket PC Record application (see Note).

[Gold] b a

[Gold] b 4 Access the Pocket PC Calendar application (see Note).

[Gold] b 5 Access the Pocket PC Contacts application (see Note).

[Gold] b 6 Access the Pocket PC Tasks application (see Note). Move up one page.

[Gold] b 7

[Gold] b 8 Enter an asterisk (*). Move down one page.

[Gold] b 9

[Gold] b 0

[Gold] b e

[Gold] b K

[Gold] b E Access the Pocket PC Start menu. Enter an at symbol (@). Enter a minus sign (). Enter a backslash (/). Enter a plus sign (+).

[Gold] b A

[Gold] b

[Gold] b Note: Pocket PC applications are accessible only if configured to do so in the App Launch portion of the Utilities control panel applet. See page 365 for more information. Tab to the right. Tab to the left. 12 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 1 Introduction Alphanumeric Keypad Note: This information does not apply to the 730 Computer. The following table lists sequences that use the [Gold/White] c plane key. See Chapter 2, Windows Mobile 2003, for information about the Pocket PC applications. Press the Keys

[Gold/White] c I Toggle the backlight on or off (also goes through backlight To Do This power levels if held down)

[Gold/White] c A Access the Pocket PC Record application (see Note).

[Gold/White] c B Access the Pocket PC Calendar application (see Note).

[Gold/White] c C Access the Pocket PC Contacts application (see Note).

[Gold/White] c D Access the Pocket PC Tasks application (see Note).

[Gold/White] c J Move up one page.

[Gold/White] c G Enter an asterisk (*).

[Gold/White] c P Move down one page.

[Gold/White] c E Access the Pocket PC Start menu.

[Gold/White] c K Enter an at symbol (@).

[Gold/White] c H Enter a backslash (/).

[Gold/White] c L Enter a minus sign ().

[Gold/White] c R Enter a plus sign (+).

[Gold/White] c l

[Gold/White] c j Note: Pocket PC applications are accessible only if configured to do so in the App Launch portion of the Utilities control panel applet. See page 365 for more information. Tab to the right. Tab to the left. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 13 Chapter 1 Introduction Alpha (Blue) Plane Keys The alphabet can be entered with either the numeric keypad or the alpha-

numeric keypad. Below and on the next page are the key sequences. Numeric Keypad When you press F, the Scanning/Alpha LED (C) shows red for the Alpha mode. The keypad stays in Alpha mode until you press F. To type a lowercase c, press F 2 2 2 (the [2] key three times). To type a letter on the same key as the last letter entered, wait two seconds, then enter the correct series of keystrokes to create the next letter. While you are in the Alpha mode and you press 1 to initiate the CAPS mode, you will render a CAPS LOCK until you press 1 again. Once you are in CAPS mode, you stay in CAPS until it is pressed again. Press 0 to enter a space. To Enter a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z Press the Keys F 2 F 2 2 F 2 2 2 F 3 F 3 3 F 3 3 3 F 4 F 4 4 F 4 4 4 F 5 F 5 5 F 5 5 5 F 6 F 6 6 F 6 6 6 F 7 F 7 7 F 7 7 7 F 7 7 7 7 F 8 F 8 8 F 8 8 8 F 9 F 9 9 F 9 9 9 F 9 9 9 9 To Enter A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Press the Keys F 1 2 F 1 2 2 F 1 2 2 2 F 1 3 F 1 3 3 F 1 3 3 3 F 1 4 F 1 4 4 F 1 4 4 4 F 1 5 F 1 5 5 F 1 5 5 5 F 1 6 F 1 6 6 F 1 6 6 6 F 1 7 F 1 7 7 F 1 7 7 7 F 1 7 7 7 7 F 1 8 F 1 8 8 F 1 8 8 8 F 1 9 F 1 9 9 F 1 9 9 9 F 1 9 9 9 9 14 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 1 Introduction Alphanumeric Keypad When you press d, the Scanning/Alpha LED (C) lights red to indi-

cate Alpha mode. The keypad stays in the Alpha mode until you press d again. If you want to type a lowercase c, press d C. If you want an uppercase C, press and hold the g key, then press C. Press b to enter a space. To Enter a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z Press the Keys d A d B d C d D d E d F d G d H d I d J d K d L d M d N d O d P d Q d R d S d T d U d V d W d X d Y d Z To Enter A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Press the Keys d g A d g B d g C d g D d g E d g F d g G d g H d g I d g J d g K d g L d g M d g N d g O d g P d g Q d g R d g S d g T d g U d g V d g W d g X d g Y d g Z 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 15 Chapter 1 Introduction Modem Support The 700 Series Computer has the following modem options:

S Modem dock that provides charging and includes a built-in modem and a serial port between which an application can switch. S Snap-on modem, a stand-alone product, that attaches to the bottom of your 700 Color Computer. Note that you cannot place this modem in a dock, printer, or other devices. Contact your Intermec representative for more information. PSM Build Version The Persistent Storage Manager (PSM) is an area of storage which is em-

bedded in a section of the systems FLASH memory. This storage area is not erased during a cold-boot. It may, however, be erased during the re-

flashing process. In addition to storing applications and data files, you do have the option to store a persistent registry to the PSM region. To determine what PSM Build is on your 700 Series Computer, tap Start

> Programs > File Explorer. Access the Flash File Store folder from the My Device root directory, then tap the PSMinfo text file. Take note of your information, then tap ok to exit. 16 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Resetting Your 700 Series Computer Chapter 1 Introduction In some cases where the 700 Series Computer completely stops respond-

ing, it may be necessary to perform a cold reset. Because cold resetting may result in data loss, it is not recommended unless all other recovery methods have failed. Note: Cold resetting deletes all programs and data stored in RAM includ-

ing the Object Store. Make sure data is backed up to your host computer or a storage card before performing a cold reset. 1 Release the lower clip of the hand strap. 2 Remove the battery pack. 3 Press the Reset button. 4 Reinstall the battery pack. Reset button Reset button 700 Series Computer 730 Computer This illustration shows the back of the 700 Series Computer on the left and of the 730 Computer on the right. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 17 Chapter 1 Introduction Software Build Version To check to see if your 700 Series Computer has the latest software build, select Start > Internet Explorer > the Intermec logo. The latest software build version is displayed beneath the Version Information title. This information would be useful should you need assistance. 700 Color Screen 730 Screen 700CXL Screen For Units With PSM Builds Older than 3.00 You can also view the latest software build by accessing the Unit Information control panel applet. Select Start > Settings > the System tab

> the Unit Information icon > the Versions tab to view the current build. 700 Color Screen 730 Screen 18 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Storage Media CompactFlash Cards Secure Digital Cards Chapter 1 Introduction Note: MultiMediaCards (MMCs) are not supported in 700 Series Com-

puters. The 700 Color Computer supports both CompactFlash and Secure Digital storage cards. To access either card slot, locate the access door at the top of the 700 Series Computer, remove its two screws, then remove the door. See the 700 Color with Windows Mobile 2003 Quick Start Guide (P/N:

962-054-069) for more information. The 730 Mobile Computer only supports the Secure Digital storage card. The CompactFlash card slot is embedded in the 730 Computer and can-

not be removed. To access the Secure Digital card slot, locate the access door at the top of the 730 Computer, remove its screws, then remove the door. See the Model 730 Mobile Computer Quick Start Guide (P/N:

962-054-068) for more information. On 700 Color Computers, the CompactFlash card slot accepts either a storage card or the 802.11b radio, which is factory-installed and cannot be removed. The 730 Computer does not support CompactFlash storage cards. The Secure Digital card slot accepts storage cards only. Storage Media Access Door 700 Color Computer 730 Computer This illustration shows the top of the 700 Color Computer on the left and of the 730 Computer on the right. Note that the keypad is to the bottom. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 19 Chapter 1 Introduction Vibrator Note: This information does not apply to the 730 Computer. If your 700 Color Computer is built with an imager or scanner and the vibrator is disabled, do the following instructions to enable the vibrator. If you are not able to enable the vibrator, then contact Customer Support. For information about setting volume levels for screen taps, ActiveSync alert noises, etc., tap Start > Help > Pocket PC Basics, then select Notifications. See Chapter 7, Programming, to see how to programmatically control the vibrator. See Appendix A, Configurable Settings, for more information about the Beeper Volume option. Note: Each time the 700 Computer is cold-booted, all default settings are restored. For Units With PSM Builds Older than 3.00 1 Tap Start > Settings > the System tab > Data Collection to access its control panel applet. 2 Use the right and left arrows to scroll to the Beeper/LED tab, then tap this tab. 3 Tap Beeper, select the Vibrate option, then tap Apply. 4 Tap ok to confirm this change, then tap ok to exit the Data Collection control panel applet. 20 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 1 Introduction For Units With PSM Build 3.00 or Newer Do the following to enable the vibrator for the 700 Color Computer. Tap Start > Settings > the System tab > the Intermec Settings icon. Tap the 700 Settings folder twice, tap (+) to expand the Beeper folder, then tap (+) to expand the Vibrate option. Select an item, then tap (+) to close this op-

tion. Note: Information about the settings you can configure with the Intermec Settings control panel applet is described in the Intermec Computer Com-

mand Reference Manual. The online manual is available from the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com Wireless Network Support Radios are installed at the factory and cannot be installed by a user. The 700 Color Computer must be serviced to install or replace radios. Contact your Intermec representative for more information. See Chapter 4, Net-

work Support for information about supported radios. Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Intermec Technologies Corporation could void the users authority to operate the equipment. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 21 Chapter 1 Introduction Accessories The following accessories are available for the 700 Series Computer. Note that this is not a complete list. Contact your Intermec representative for in-

formation about these and other accessories that are not in this list. Accessory Descriptions Single Dock Charger with Ethernet and Auxiliary Battery Charger Single Dock Charger with USB and Ethernet Quad Battery Charger Single Battery Charger Multidock Charge Only (holds four 700 Computers) Multidock Charging with Ethernet support (holds four units) Modem Dock Vehicle Dock Vehicle Cradle Snap-On Modem Long Range Tethered Scanning Adapter (3.3v to 5v) DEX Adapter Standard Scan Handle Option Dockable Scan Handle Belt Clip

** No Ethernet Support Whats New Intermec Part Number 225-681-001 225-683-001 852-060-001 852-054-001 852-060-002 225-682-004 225-682-003 225-683-002 225-685-001 225-680-101 225-687-001 225-686-002 225-683-001 714-525-001 714-502-001 714-525-002 805-612-001 700 Color 730 Computer X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X **

X **

X X X X X X X The newest functionality is available in PSM builds 3.40 or greater. These changes have occurred since the last release of this manual:

S Added information about resetting the 700 Series Computer to this chapter. S Updated information about the Profile Wizard in Appendix A, Confi-

gurable Settings. S Revised information about using Sprint Watcher in Chapter 4, Net-

work Support. S Added information about the 700CXL Computer, including the Phone application. 22 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 2 Windows Mobile 2003 This chapter introduces Microsoft Windows Mobile 2003 for Pocket PC. While using your 700 Color Computer, keep these key points in mind:

S Tap Start on the navigation bar, located at the top of the screen, to quickly move to programs, files, and settings. Use the command bar at the bottom of the screen to perform tasks in programs. The command bar includes menus, buttons, and the onscreen keyboard. S Tap and hold an item to see a pop-up menu containing a list of actions you can perform. Pop-up menus give you quick and easy access to the most common actions. Below is a list of Windows Mobile 2003 components described in this chapter. Additional information on these and other Windows Mobile components can be found on your 700 Color Computer by tapping Start

> Help. Windows Mobile 2003 Components Microsoft ActiveSync Client (page 44) Microsoft Pocket Outlook (page 46) Pocket Word (page 78) Pocket Excel (page 82) MSN Messenger (page 84) Windows Media Player for Pocket PC (page 89) Microsoft Reader (page 90) Pocket Internet Explorer (page 94) 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 23 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Software Builds Do the following to determine which Intermec build of Windows Mobile 2003 is on your unit. 1 Select Start > Internet Explorer > the Intermec logo. 2 Note the Software Build information displayed beneath the Version Information title. 700 Color Screen 730 Screen 700CXL Screen 3 Tap the Close icon in the top right corner to exit the Internet Explorer. 24 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Where to Find Information This chapter describes your 700 Color Computer hardware, provides an overview of the programs on your 700 Color Computer, and explains how to connect your 700 Color Computer to a desktop, a network, or the In-

ternet. For instructions on setting up your 700 Color Computer and installing ActiveSync, see the Quick Start Guide. The following is a guide to more information to assist you use your 700 Color Computer. For information on:

Programs on your mobile computer. Additional programs that can be installed on the mobile computer. Connecting to and synchronizing with a desktop. Last-minute updates and detailed technical information. Up-to-date information on your Windows Mobile. See this source:

This chapter and mobile computer Help. To view Help, tap Start > Help. The Windows Mobile Companion CD. The Quick Start Guide or AutoSync Help on your desk-

top. To view Help, click Help > Microsoft ActiveSync Help. The Read Me files, located in the Microsoft ActiveSync folder on the desktop and on the Windows Mobile Com-

panion CD. http://www.microsoft.com/windowsmobile/resources/

communities/default.mspx Windows Mobile and many of the technologies supported by the 700 Col-

or Computer are not from Intermec Technologies. Many of the utilities and features on a Windows Mobile device come directly from Microsoft without any modification from Intermec Technologies. There may be cer-

tain Microsoft-specific issues that Intermec Technologies would not be able to support, so contact our front-line support personnel to determine the best source of assistance. Use these URLs for additional information about Microsoft Windows Mobile (Pocket PC):

S http://msdn.microsoft.com/support/

S http://support.microsoft.com/

S news://news.microsoft.com (a free support option) 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 25 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Basic Skills Today Screen Learning to use your 700 Color Computer is easy. This section describes the basic concepts of using and customizing your 700 Color Computer. When you turn on your 700 Color Computer for the first time each day

(or after four hours of inactivity), you see the Today screen. You can also display it by tapping the Start flag (shown left) and then Today. On the Today screen, you can see important information for the day. Tap to start a program. Tap and hold to change time format. Tap to change date and time. Tap to change owner information. Your day at a glance. Tap to open the associated program. Tap to create a new item. Tap to disconnect from ActiveSync. To customize what is displayed on the Today screen, including the back-

ground image, tap Start > Settings > the Personal tab > Today. Status icons display information such as low batteries or when the 700 Color Computer is connected to a desktop or to the Internet. You can tap an icon to open the associated setting or program. 26 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Programs Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 You can switch from one program to another by selecting it from the Start menu. (You can customize which programs you see on this menu. For information, see Adjusting Settings on page 41.) To access some programs, tap Start > Programs, and then the program name. You can also switch to some programs by pressing a program button. Your 700 Color Computer has one or more program buttons located on the front or side of the computer. The icons on the buttons identify the pro-

grams to which they switch. Note: Some programs have abbreviated labels for check boxes and drop-

down menus. To see the full spelling of an abbreviated label, tap and hold the stylus on the label. Drag the stylus off the label so that the command is not carried out. The following is a partial list of programs that are on your 700 Color Computer. Look on the Windows Mobile Companion CD for additional programs that you can install onto your 700 Color Computer. Synchronize information between your 700 Color Computer and desktop. Keep track of your appointments and create meeting requests. Keep track of your friends and colleagues. Send and receive e-mail messages. Browse Web and WAP (Wireless Application Protocol) sites, and down-

load new programs and files from the Internet. Create handwritten or typed notes, drawings, and recordings. Keep track of your tasks. Play digital audio and video files that are stored on your 700 Series Com-

puter or on a network. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 27 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Navigation Bar and Command Bar The navigation bar is located at the top of the screen. It displays the active program and current time, and allows you to switch to programs and close screens. Tap to switch to a program that you recently used. Tap to switch to a program. Tap to see more programs. Tap to change device settings. Tap to see a Help topic for the current screen. Use the command bar at the bottom of the screen to perform tasks in pro-

grams. The command bar includes menu names, buttons, and the Input Panel button. To create a new item in the current program, tap New. To see the name of a button, tap and hold the stylus on the button. Drag the stylus off the button so that the command is not carried out. Tap to display the input panel. Tap to select menu commands. Tap to select button commands. 28 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Pop-up Menus Use pop-up menus to quickly perform an action on an item. For example, you can use a pop-up menu to delete or make a copy of an item. To access a pop-up menu, tap and hold the item on which you want to perform the action. When the menu appears, tap the action you want to perform, or tap anywhere outside the menu to close the menu without performing the action. Tap and hold to display the pop-up menu. Lift the stylus and tap the action you want. Tap outside the menu to close it without performing an action. Notifications When you have something to do, your device notifies you in a variety of ways. For example, if you have set up an appointment in Calendar, an e-

mail message arrives, or a friend sends you an instant message, you are no-

tified in any of the following ways:

S A message box appears on the screen. S A sound, which you can specify, is played. S A light flashes on your 700 Color Computer. S The 700 Color Computer vibrates. You can choose notification types. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 29 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Entering Information You can enter information on your 700 Color Computer in several ways, depending on the type of device you have and the program you are using:

S Synchronizing Using Microsoft ActiveSync, synchronize or copy information between your desktop and 700 Color Computer. For more information on Acti-

veSync, see ActiveSync Help on your desktop. S Typing Using the input panel, enter typed text into the 700 Color Computer. You can do this by tapping keys on the onscreen keyboard or by using handwriting recognition software. S Writing Using the stylus, write directly on the screen. S Drawing Using the stylus, draw directly on the screen. S Recording Create a stand-alone recording or embed a recording into a document or note. Use the input panel to enter information in any program on your 700 Color Computer. You can either type using the onscreen keyboard or write using Block Recognizer, Letter Recognizer, or Transcriber. In either case, the characters appear as typed text on the screen. To show or hide the input panel, tap the Input Panel button. Tap the ar-

row next to the Input Panel button to see your choices. Select an input method. Tap to see your choices. Input Panel button. 30 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 When you use the input panel, your 700 Color Computer anticipates the word you are typing or writing and displays it above the input panel. When you tap the displayed word, it is inserted into your text at the insertion point. The more you use your 700 Color Computer, the more words it learns to anticipate. Tap a text box to display the currently selected input panel (in this case, Keyboard). Tap to insert anticipated word. To enter characters, tap them on the onscreen keyboard. To change word suggestion options, such as the number of words sug-

gested at one time, tap Start > Settings > the Personal tab > Input > the Word Completion tab. Typing With the Onscreen Keyboard Tap the played, tap the keys with your stylus. arrow, then tap Keyboard. On the soft keyboard that is dis-

S To type lowercase letters, tap the keys with the stylus. S To type a single uppercase letter or symbol, tap the Shift key. To tap multiple uppercase letters or symbols, tap the CAP key. S To convert a letter to uppercase, tap and hold the stylus on the letter and drag up. S To add a space, drag the stylus to the right across at least two keys. S To backspace one character, drag the stylus to the left across at least two keys. S To insert a carriage return, tap and hold the stylus anywhere on the keyboard and drag down. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 31 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Note: If you want to use larger keys, tap the select Keyboard from the Input method drop-down list, then select Large keys. arrow, tap Options, Using Block Recognizer Character recognition software gives you a fast and easy method for enter-

ing information in any program on your 700 Color Computer. Letters, numbers, and punctuation you write are translated into typed text. arrow, then tap Block Recognizer. Write a letter in the box. Tap the When you write a letter, it is converted to typed text that appears on the screen. For specific instructions on using Block Recognizer, with Block Recogniz-

er open, tap the question mark next to the writing area. Tap for assistance. 32 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Using Letter Recognizer With Letter Recognizer, you can write letters using the stylus just as you would on paper. arrow, then tap Letter Recognizer. Write a letter in the box. Tap the When you write a letter, it is converted to typed text that appears on the screen. For specific instructions on using Letter Recognizer, with Letter Recognizer open, tap the question mark next to the writing area. Tap for assistance. Using Transcriber With Transcriber, you can write anywhere on the screen using the stylus just as you would on paper. Unlike Letter Recognizer and Block Recogniz-

er, you can write a sentence or more of information. Then, pause and let Transcriber change the written characters to typed characters. Tap the arrow, then tap Transcriber. Write anywhere on the screen. For specific instructions on using Transcriber, with Transcriber open, tap the question mark in the lower, right-hand corner of the screen. Tap for assistance. Selecting Typed Text If you want to edit or format typed text, you must select it first. S Drag the stylus across the text you want to select. You can cut, copy, and paste text by tapping and holding the selected words and then tapping an editing command on the pop-up menu, or by tapping the command on the Edit menu. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 33 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Writing on the Screen In any program that accepts writing, such as the Notes program, and in the Notes tab in Calendar, Contacts, and Tasks, you can use your stylus to write directly on the screen. Write the way you do on paper. You can edit and format what you have written and convert the information to text at a later time. S Tap the Pen button to switch to writing mode. This action displays lines on the screen to help you write. Tap to use your stylus like a pen. Note: Some programs that accept writing may not have the Pen button. See the documentation for that program to find out how to switch to writ-

ing mode. Selecting the Writing If you want to edit or format writing, you must select it first. 1 Tap and hold the stylus next to the text you want to select until the in-

sertion point appears. 2 Without lifting, drag the stylus across the text you want to select. If you accidentally write on the screen, tap Tools > Undo and try again. You can also select text by tapping the Pen button to deselect it and then dragging the stylus across the screen. You can cut, copy, and paste written text in the same way you work with typed text: tap and hold the selected words and then tap an editing com-

mand on the pop-up menu, or tap the command on the Edit menu. 34 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Converting Writing to Text You can convert words you write in print or cursive to text by tapping Tools > Recognize. If a word is not recognized, it stays in its written form. If you want to convert only certain words, tap Pen to disable the writing function, tap twice over the word or phrase to highlight, then tap Tools >

Recognize. Select the text you want to convert and tap Recognize on the pop-up menu. The writing is turned into text. Tap to disable the pen function. If the conversion is incorrect, you can choose different words from a list of alternates or return to the original writing. To do so, tap and hold the incorrect word (tap one word at a time). On the pop-up menu, tap Alternates. Tap the word you want to use from the menu with a list of alternate words, or tap the writing at the top of the menu to return to the original writing. Tap to return to your original writing. Or, tap the word you want to use. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 35 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Tips for getting good recognition:

S Write neatly. S Write on the lines and draw descenders below the line. Write the cross of the t and apostrophes below the top line so they are not confused with the word above. Write periods and commas above the baseline. S For better recognition, try increasing the zoom level to 300% by using the Tools menu. Recognition does not work well below a 150% zoom level. S Write the letters of a word closely and leave big gaps between words so that the 700 Color Computer can easily tell where words begin and end. S Hyphenated words, foreign words that use special characters such as ac-

cents, and some punctuation cannot be converted. S If you add writing to a word to change it (such as changing a 3 to an 8) after you attempt to recognize the word, the writing you add is not included if you attempt to recognize the writing again. 36 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Drawing on the Screen Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 You can draw on the screen in the same way that you write on the screen. The difference between writing and drawing on the screen is how you se-

lect items and how they are edited. For example, you can resize selected drawings, while you cannot resize writing. Creating a Drawing S Cross three ruled lines on your first stroke. A drawing box appears. Sub-

sequent strokes in or touching the drawing box become part of the dra-

wing. Drawings that do not cross three ruled lines are treated as writing. The drawing box indicates the boundaries of the drawing. Pen button. Note: You may want to change the zoom level so that you can more easily work on or view your drawing. Tap Tools and then a zoom level. Selecting a Drawing If you want to edit or format a drawing, you must select it first. S Tap and hold the stylus on the drawing until the selection handle ap-

pears. To select multiple drawings, deselect the Pen button and then drag to select the drawings you want. You can cut, copy, and paste selected drawings by tapping and holding the selected drawing and then tapping an editing command on the pop-up menu, or by tapping the command on the Edit menu. To resize a drawing, make sure the Pen button is not selected, and drag a selection handle. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 37 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Recording a Message In any program where you can write or draw on the screen, you can also quickly capture thoughts, reminders, and phone numbers by recording a message. In the Inbox program, you can add a recording to an e-mail message. In Calendar, Tasks, and Contacts, you can include a recording in the Notes tab. In the Notes program, you can create a stand-alone recording or add a recording to an open note. Creating a Recording 1 Hold the 700 Color Computers microphone near your mouth or source of sound. 2 Tap and make your recording. 3 Tap when finished. If you are recording in an open note, an icon appears in the note. If you are creating a stand-alone recording, it ap-

pears in the note list. 4 To play a recording, tap the recording icon in the open note or tap the recording in the note list. Note: To quickly create a recording, hold down the Record hardware but-

ton. When you hear the beep, begin your recording. Release the button when you are finished. The new recording is stored in the open note or as a stand-alone recording if no note is open. To play a recording, tap it in the list or tap its icon in the note. Indicates an em-

bedded recording. Tap to show or hide the Recording toolbar. Tap to begin recording. 38 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Using My Text Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 When using Inbox or MSN Messenger, use My Text to quickly insert pre-

set or frequently used messages into the text entry area. To insert a mes-

sage, tap My Text and tap a message. S To quickly add common messages, tap My Text and tap a desired mes-

sage. S To edit a My Text message, tap Tools > Edit My Text Messages. Tap the message you want to edit and enter new text at the bottom of the screen. Tap to select a prewritten message. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 39 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Finding and Organizing Information The Find feature on your 700 Color Computer helps you quickly locate information. Tap Start > Find. Enter the text you want to find, select a data type, and then tap Go to initiate the search. Note: To quickly find information that is taking up storage space on your 700 Color Computer, select Larger than 64 KB in Type. You can also use the File Explorer to find files on your 700 Color Com-

puter and to organize these files into folders. Tap Start > Programs > File Explorer. Tap the folder name to open it. Tap New Folder to create a new folder. Note: You can move files in File Explorer by tapping and holding the item you want to move, and then tapping Cut or Copy and Paste on the pop-

up menu. 40 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Customizing Your 700 Color Computer Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 You can customize your 700 Color Computer by adjusting settings and installing additional software. Adjusting Settings You can adjust settings to suit the way you work. To see available options, tap Start > Settings > either of the following tabs located at the bottom of the screen. You might want to adjust the following:

Personal Tab Menus:

To customize what appears on the Start menu, and to enable a pop-up menu from the New button. Owner Information:

To enter your contact information. Password:

To limit access to your 700 Color Computer. Today:

To customize the look and information displayed on the Today screen. System Tab Clock:

To change the time or to set alarms. Power:

To maximize battery life. Adding or Removing Programs Programs added to your 700 Color Computer at the factory are stored in ROM (Read Only Memory). You cannot remove this software, and you cannot accidentally lose ROM contents. ROM programs can be updated using special installation programs with a *.XIP extension. All other pro-

grams and data files added to your 700 Color Computer after factory installation are stored in RAM (Random Access Memory). You can install any program created for your 700 Color Computer, as long as your 700 Color Computer has enough memory. The most popular place to find software for your 700 Color Computer is on the Windows Mobile Web site (http://www.microsoft.com/windowsmobile/resources/

communities/default.mspx). 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 41 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Adding Programs Using ActiveSync Install the appropriate software for your 700 Color Computer on your desktop before installing it on your 700 Color Computer. 1 Determine your 700 Color Computer and processor type so that you know which version of the software to install. Tap Start > Settings > the System tab > About > the Version tab, then make a note of the information in Processor. 2 Download the program to your desktop (or insert the CD or disk that contains the program into your desktop). You may see a single *.XIP,

*.EXE, or *.ZIP file, a SETUP.EXE file, or several versions of files for different 700 Color Computer types and processors. Be sure to select the program designed for the Windows Mobile and your 700 Color Computer processor type. 3 Read any installation instructions, Read Me files, or documentation that comes with the program. Many programs provide special installation instructions. 4 Connect your 700 Color Computer and desktop. 5 Double-click the *.EXE file. S If the file is an installer, the installation wizard begins. Follow the di-

rections on the screen. Once the software is installed, the installer au-

tomatically transfers the software to your 700 Color Computer. S If the file is not an installer, an error message stating that the program is valid but it is designed for a different type of computer is displayed. Move this file to your 700 Color Computer. If you cannot find any installation instructions for the program in the Read Me file or docu-

mentation, use ActiveSync Explore to copy the program file to the Program Files folder on your 700 Color Computer. For more infor-

mation on copying files using ActiveSync, see ActiveSync Help. Once installation is complete, tap Start > Programs, and then the program icon to switch to it. Adding a Program Directly from the Internet 1 Determine your 700 Color Computer and processor type so that you know which version of the software to install. Tap Start > Settings > the System tab > About > the Version tab, then make a note of the information in Processor. 2 Download the program to your 700 Color Computer straight from the Internet using Pocket Internet Explorer. You may see a single *.XIP,

*.EXE, or *.ZIP file, a SETUP.EXE file, or several versions of files for different 700 Color Computer types and processors. Be sure to select the program designed for the Windows Mobile and your 700 Color Computer processor type. 3 Read program installation instructions, Read Me files, or other docu-

mentation. Many programs provide installation instructions. 4 Tap the file, such as a *.XIP or *.EXE file to start the installation wi-

zard. Follow the directions on the screen. 42 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Adding a Program to the Start Menu Tap Start > Settings > Menus > the Start Menu tab, and then the check box for the program. If you do not see the program listed, you can either use File Explorer on the 700 Color Computer to move the program to the Start Menu folder, or use ActiveSync on the desktop to create a shortcut to the program and place the shortcut in the Start Menu folder. Using File Explorer on the 700 Color Computer Tap Start > Programs > File Explorer, and locate the program (tap the folder list, labeled My Documents by default, and then My Device to see a list of all folders on the 700 Color Computer). Tap and hold the program and tap Cut on the pop-up menu. Open the Start Menu folder located in the Windows folder, tap and hold a blank area of the window, and tap Paste on the pop-up menu. The program now appears on the Start menu. For more information on using File Explorer, see Finding and Organizing Information on page 40. Using ActiveSync on the desktop Use the Explorer in ActiveSync to explore your 700 Color Computer files and locate the program. Right-click the program, and then click Create Shortcut. Move the shortcut to the Start Menu folder in the Windows folder. The shortcut now appears on the Start menu. For more informa-

tion, see ActiveSync Help. Removing Programs Tap Start > Settings > the System tab > Remove Programs. If the program does not appear in the list of installed programs, use File Explorer on your 700 Color Computer to locate the program, tap and hold the program, and then tap Delete on the pop-up menu. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 43 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Microsoft ActiveSync Visit the following Microsoft Web site for the latest in updates, technical information, and samples:

http://www.microsoft.com/windowsmobile/resources/communities/de-

fault.mspx Using Microsoft ActiveSync, you can synchronize the information on your desktop with the information on your 700 Color Computer. Synchroniza-

tion compares the data on your 700 Color Computer with your desktop and updates both computers with the most recent information. For exam-

ple:

S Keep Pocket Outlook data up-to-date by synchronizing your 700 Color Computer with Microsoft Outlook data on your desktop. S Synchronize Microsoft Word and Microsoft Excel files between your 700 Color Computer and desktop. Your files are automatically con-

verted to the correct format Note: By default, ActiveSync does not automatically synchronize all types of information. Use ActiveSync options to turn synchronization on and off for specific information types. With ActiveSync, you can also:

S Back up and restore your 700 Color Computer data. S Copy (rather than synchronize) files between your 700 Color Computer and desktop. S Control when synchronization occurs by selecting a synchronization mode. For example, you can synchronize continually while connected to your desktop or only when you choose the synchronize command. S Select which information types are synchronized and control how much data is synchronized. For example, you can choose how many weeks of past appointments you want synchronized. Before you begin synchronization, install ActiveSync on your desktop from the Windows Mobile Companion CD. For more information on installing ActiveSync, see your Quick Start card. ActiveSync is already installed on your 700 Color Computer. After installation is complete, the ActiveSync Setup Wizard helps you con-

nect your 700 Color Computer to your desktop, set up a partnership so you can synchronize information between your 700 Color Computer and your desktop, and customize your synchronization settings. Your first syn-

chronization process automatically begins when finished using the wizard. After your first synchronization, look at Calendar, Contacts, and Tasks on your 700 Color Computer. Notice that information you have stored in Microsoft Outlook on your desktop was copied to your 700 Color Com-

puter, and you did not have to type a word. Disconnect the 700 Color Computer from your computer and you are ready to go!

44 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Once you have set up ActiveSync and completed the first synchronization process, you can initiate synchronization from your 700 Color Computer. To switch to ActiveSync on your 700 Color Computer, tap Start >

ActiveSync. Note that if you have a wireless LAN card, you can synchronize remotely from your 700 Color Computer. For information about using ActiveSync on your desktop, start ActiveSync on your desktop, and then see ActiveSync Help. View connection status. Tap to connect and synchronize. Tap to stop synchronization. View synchronization status. Tap to synchronize via IR or change synchronization settings. For more information about ActiveSync on your 700 Color Computer, switch to ActiveSync, then tap Start > Help. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 45 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Microsoft Pocket Outlook Microsoft Pocket Outlook includes Calendar, Contacts, Tasks, Inbox, and Notes. You can use these programs individually or together. For example, you can use e-mail addresses stored in Contacts to address e-mail messages in Inbox. Using ActiveSync, you can synchronize information in Microsoft Outlook or Microsoft Exchange on your desktop with your 700 Color Computer. You can also synchronize this information directly with a Microsoft Ex-

change server. Each time you synchronize, ActiveSync compares the changes you made on your 700 Color Computer and desktop or server and updates both computers with the latest information. For information on using ActiveSync, see ActiveSync Help on the desktop. You can switch to any program by tapping it on the Start menu. Calendar: Scheduling Appointments and Meetings To switch to Calendar on the 700 Color Computer, tap Start > Calendar. Use Calendar to schedule appointments, including meetings and other events. You can check your appointments in one of several views (Day, Week, Month, Year, and Agenda) and set Calendar to remind you of ap-

pointments with a sound or other method. Appointments for the day can display on the Today screen. If you use Outlook on your desktop, you can synchronize appointments between your device and desktop. Tap to go to Today Tap to display or edit the appointment details. Tap to create a new appointment 46 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Synchronizing Calendar Calendar items stored on your device can be synchronized with calendar items on your desktop or Microsoft Exchange Server. (Note that you can only synchronize information directly with an Exchange Server if your company is running Microsoft Mobile Information Server 2002 or later.) Calendar synchronization is automatically selected in ActiveSync. Calendar items entered on one computer are copied to the other during synchronization. Handwritten notes and drawings are saved as metafiles

(pictures). For more information on synchronization, see ActiveSync Help on the desktop. Why Use Categories in the Calendar?

Use categories to group related tasks, contacts, and appointments. Then, use these groupings to quickly display only the information you want. For example, you can easily share your device with another by assigning your appointments to a category with a special projects name. You can then use this category to filter Calendar and only display appointments for that project. Note: In Month View, the day of an appointment assigned to the Holiday category appears in red. This day was assigned the Holiday category. Tap to access the Month view 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 47 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Whats an All Day Event?

An appointment can either be a normal appointment or an all day event, which lasts the full day or spans many days. Examples include a trade show, a vacation, or a seminar. You can also use all day events to schedule an annual event, such as a birthday or anniversary. In this case, change the Status box to Free (you may need to scroll to see it) so that it does not show time as busy in your calendar. All day events do not occupy blocks of time in Calendar; they appear in banners at the top of the calendar. Note: You cannot modify or create all day events with attendees on the device. If you create all day events with attendees on your desktop, use Ac-

tiveSync to copy such events to the device. Then, view them in Calendar. For more information on copying files, see ActiveSync Help. To use the device to schedule an appointment with attendees lasting all day, set type to Normal, then adjust the date and time appropriately. This describes the all day event. Tap to access the Day view 48 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Whats a Recurrence Pattern?

If you have an appointment or task that you do on a regular basis, such as a weekly team meeting or a monthly status report, enter the item once and set a recurrence pattern for it. If the default patterns in the list are not what you need, you can create your own pattern using the wizard. Select your recurrence pattern from this drop-

down list. Select <Edit pattern...>

to access the wizard with which to custom-

ize your recurrence. Viewing Appointments You can view appointments in one of several views (Agenda, Day, Week, and Month). In Agenda view, upcoming appointments are displayed in bold. To see detailed appointment information in any view, tap the ap-

pointment. To see a list of available actions for an appointment, tap and hold the appointment. This displays the ap-

pointment in bold. Tap to access the Agenda view Note: Tap Start > Today to quickly see your appointments for the day. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 49 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Month view displays symbols to indicate the types of appointments you have on a given day. An upward triangle indicates a morning appointment;

a downward triangle indicates an afternoon appointment. If you have ap-

pointments in the morning and afternoon, a solid square is displayed. If you have an all day event not marked Free, a hollow square is displayed. This displays an all day event not marked Free. This displays a morn-

ing appointment. This displays appoint-

ments in both morning and afternoon. This displays an after-

noon appointment. Tap to access the Month view 50 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Creating or Changing an Appointment To create an appointment, tap New. To select a new date from a pop-up calendar, tap the display date. To enter or select a new time, tap the dis-

play time. Enter the appointment details, and when finished, tap OK to return to the calendar. If you are working in Day view, tap the time slot for the new appointment and then tap New to have the time automatically entered for you. To change an appointment, tap it in the calendar, and then tap Edit. Change any appointment detail by tapping it and entering the new infor-

mation. Note: Tap the arrows to the right of the description and location boxes to choose from previous entries. When entering a time, you can type military and abbreviated time forms, such as 2300 (becomes 11:00 PM), 913pm (becomes 9:13 PM), 911 (be-

comes 9:11 AM), and 9p (becomes 9:00 PM). Tap to return to the calendar

(the appointment is saved automatically). Tap to choose from predefined text. Tap to choose from previously entered locations. Tap to select a time. Tap to select a date. Notes is a good place for maps and directions. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 51 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Creating an All Day Event To create an all day event, do the following:

1 Tap New. 2 Tap All Day, then select Yes. Tap to select either Yes or No whether this is an all day event. Note: To change an all day event, switch to Day or Agenda view, tap the event listed at the top of the calendar, and then tap Edit. Change any ap-

pointment detail by tapping it and entering the new information. You cannot modify or create all day events with attendees on the 700 Col-

or Computer. If you create all day events with attendees on your desktop, use ActiveSync to copy such events to the 700 Color Computer. Then, view them in Calendar. For more information on copying files, see Active-

Sync Help. To use the device to schedule an appointment with attendees lasting all day, set type to Normal, then adjust date and time accordingly. 52 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Setting a Reminder for an Appointment Do the following to set a reminder for an appointment in the calendar:

1 Tap the appointment, then tap Edit to change the appointment. 2 Tap Reminder and select Remind me. 3 To change how many minutes before the appointment you are re-

minded, tap the minutes displayed, then select the new minutes from a drop-down or enter the new minutes. Tap minutes to change hours, days, or weeks. Tap to select Remind me to enable the reminder feature. Note: To automatically set a reminder for all new appointments, in the calendar, tap Tools > Options, select Set reminders for new items, then tap the number and timeframe options to change the information given. Tap this to set reminders for new appointments automatically. To choose how you are reminded, for example by a sound, Tap Start >

Settings > the Personal tab > the Sounds & Notifications icon. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 53 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Adding a Note to an Appointment You can add written or typed notes and even recordings (if your device supports recordings) to an appointment. This is a good place for maps, drawings, and other detailed information. 1 In the calendar, tap the appointment, then tap Edit. 2 Tap the Notes tab to enter notes. For specific instructions, tap Start >

Help > Notes to see Notes Help. These are controls for the recorder. Use your stylus to write or draw your informa-

tion here. Tap to activate the keyboard. Tap to activate the writing pad. Tap to activate the recorder. Note: To edit an existing note, tap the appointment in the calendar, tap Edit, then tap the Notes tab. 54 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Making an Appointment Recurring Do the following to make a recurring appointment:

1 In the calendar, tap the appointment, then tap Edit 2 Tap Occurs and select a pattern from the list. Or, to create a new pat-

tern, tap <Edit pattern...>, and follow the steps in the wizard. Select your recurrence pattern from this drop-

down list. Select <Edit pattern...>

to access the wizard with which to custom-

ize your recurrence. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 55 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Assigning an Appointment to a Category 1 In the calendar, tap the appointment, then tap Edit. 2 Tap Categories. 3 On the Select tab, select the categories to which you want to assign the appointment. 4 To create a new category, tap the Add/Delete tab, enter the category name, then tap Add. The new category is automatically selected in the Select tab. 5 Tap ok to return to the appointment. A check mark indicates a selected category. Note: To find an appointment assigned to a category, tap Tools > Catego-

ries and select the type of appointment that you want displayed. To show all appointments again, tap Tools > Categories and clear all categories. 56 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Sending a Meeting Request Use Calendar to schedule meetings with people who use Outlook or Pock-

et Outlook. When attendees receive a meeting request, they can accept or decline the meeting. If they accept, the meeting is automatically added to their schedule. In addition, their response is sent back to you, and your calendar is updated. Before you can send a meeting request, you must enter e-mail addresses in Contacts Help and set up Inbox to send and receive messages. For more information on sending and receiving meeting requests, tap Start > Help >

Calendar to see Calendar Help, and tap Start > Help > Inbox to see Inbox Help. 1 Tap New, then enter the meeting information. 2 Hide the onscreen keyboard, if needed, then tap Attendees. Only those contacts with e-mail addresses are displayed. Select the contacts you want to invite, then tap ok to return to the appointment. 3 Select other desired options and then tap ok. 4 Inbox automatically creates a meeting request and sends it to the atten-

dees the next time you synchronize with your desktop. Textual notes entered in the Notes tab (excluding writing or recordings) are sent also. A check mark indicates a selected attendee. Note: If you are sending the meeting request through a connection to an ISP or the network, rather than through synchronization with your desk-

top, tap Tools > Options. From the Send meeting requests via drop-down list, tap the service to use to send the meeting request. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 57 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Finding an Appointment There are two ways to find an appointment:

S Tap Start > Find, enter the appointment name, tap the Type arrow and select Calendar from the drop-down list, and then tap Go. S In the calendar, tap Tools > Categories and select the type of appoint-

ment you want displayed. To show all appointments again, tap Tools >

Categories and clear all categories. Tap this to select from a drop-down list or enter a phrase. Tap this for a drop-down list of areas where to search this phrase. Tap this to see its details. Note: In Find, you can tap the Find arrow to select from a list of items of previously searched items or phrases. Deleting an Appointment 1 In the calendar, tap and hold the appointment. 2 On the pop-up menu, tap Delete Appointment. The next time you synchronize, the appointment is also deleted from the desktop. 58 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Changing Calendar Options In the calendar, tap Tools > Options. S To see appointment indicators, select icons to display in Show icons. You can choose to display indicators for such things as recurring ap-

pointments, appointments with notes, and appointments with remind-

ers. Tap and hold an icon to see its name. S If you are having trouble reading the calendar, select Use large font. You may see less appointment information. Tap this to view larger text. Tap to indicate private. Tap to indicate attendees. Tap to indicate locations. Tap to indicate notes. Tap to indicate recurrences. Tap to indicate reminders. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 59 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Contacts: Tracking Friends and Colleagues To switch to Contacts on the 700 Color Computer, tap Start > Contacts. Contacts maintains a list of your friends and colleagues so that you can easily find the information you are looking for, whether you are at home or on the road. You can enter both personal and business information. If you use Microsoft Outlook on your desktop, you can synchronize contacts between your 700 Color Computer and your desktop. Select the category of contacts you want displayed in the list. Tap and enter part of a name to quickly find it in the list. Tap to see additional phone numbers and e-mail addresses. Tap to display or edit the contact details. Tap and hold to display a pop-up menu of actions. Tap to toggle to By Company (note the Name view) Tap to create a new contact. 60 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Creating a Contact 1 Tap New. 2 Using the input panel, enter a name and other contact information. Scroll down to see all available fields. 3 To assign the contact to a category, scroll to and tap Categories and se-

lect a category from the list. In the contact list, you can display contacts by category. 4 To add notes, tap the Notes tab. You can enter text, draw, or create a recording. For more information on creating notes, see Notes: Captur-

ing Thoughts and Ideas on page 71. 5 When finished, tap OK to return to the contact list. Tap to return to the contact list (the contact is saved automatically). Scroll to see more fields. Notes is a good place for maps and directions. Synchronizing Contacts Contacts stored on your device can be synchronized with Outlook contacts stored on your desktop or with Mobile Information Server 2002 or later. New items entered in one location are copied to the other during synchro-

nization. Handwritten notes and drawings are saved as pictures when syn-

chronizing with your desktop, but are removed when synchronizing with a server. For more information on synchronization, see ActiveSync Help on the desktop. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 61 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Viewing Contacts The contact list displays the contact name and the first primary phone number or e-mail address specified for that contact. Contacts are ordered by name of contact or company. S Tap the default letter (home, w ork, mobile, or e-mail) to the right of the contact to see additional phone numbers and e-mail addresses. S Select a contact and press the Left/Right controls to change the default number, displayed as a letter to the right of the contact name. S To see more contact information, tap the contact. S To see a list of available actions for a contact via a pop-up menu, tap and hold the contact. S To see a list of contacts employed by a specific company, tap View > By Company. Then, tap the desired company name. Note: You can change the appearance of the contact list by tapping Tools

> Options. Tap for a list of phone num-

bers and e-mail addresses. Indicates the default number. Tap to toggle By Name and By Company views. 62 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Creating or Changing a Contact S To create a contact, tap New. To enter notes, tap the Notes tab. When finished, tap ok to return to the contact list. S To change a contact, tap it in the contact list, and then tap Edit. To cancel edits, tap Edit > Undo. When finished making changes, tap ok to return to the contact list. Note: If you enter a name with more than two words, the middle word is recorded as a middle name. If your contact has a double first or last name, tap the Name arrow and enter the names in the proper box. Tap to access the Name fields. Tap anywhere outside the box to close and return to details. Note: New contacts are added to the displayed category. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 63 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Adding a Note to a Contact You can add written or typed notes and even recordings (if your device supports recordings) to a contact. Notes are handy for maps and drawings. 1 In the contact list, tap the contact. 2 Tap the Notes tab. For specific instructions, tap Start > Help > Notes to see Notes Help. These are controls for the recorder. Use your stylus to write or draw your informa-

tion here. Tap to activate the keyboard. Tap to activate the writing pad. Tap to activate the recorder. Note: To edit an existing note, tap the contact, tap Edit, then tap the Notes tab. 64 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Assigning a Contact to a Category 1 In the contact list, tap the contact, and then tap Edit. 2 Scroll to and tap Categories. 3 On the Select tab, select the categories to which you want to assign the contact. 4 To create a new category, tap the Add/Delete tab, enter the category name, then tap Add. The new category is automatically selected in the Select tab. 5 Tap ok to return to the contacts. A check mark indicates a selected category. Copying a Contact 1 In the contact list, select the contact. To select multiple contacts, tap and drag. 2 Tap Tools, and then select Copy Contacts. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 65 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Sending a Message to a Contact 1 In the contact list, tap and hold the contact. To select multiple contacts, tap and drag. Then, tap and hold the selected contacts. 2 On the pop-up menu, select Send Email or Send SMS, depending upon the type of message to send. Note: To send an e-mail message, you must have an e-mail address config-

ured for the contact. To send an SMS (Short Messaging Service) message, you must have an SMS number for the contact, which is usually the mo-

bile phone number. 66 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Finding a Contact There are four ways to find a contact:

S Tap Start > Find, enter the contact name (first, last, or middle), phone number, or address, select Contacts for the type, then tap Go. S From Contacts, start typing a contact name until you see it displayed on the screen. To show all contacts again, tap the text box at the top of the screen and clear the text, or tap the arrow to the right of the text box. S In the contact list, tap the category list (labeled All Contacts by default) and tap the category to which you have assigned a contact. To show all contacts again, select All Contacts. S To view the names of companies for which your contacts work, in the contact list, tap View > By Company. The number of contacts that work for that company is displayed to the right of the company name. Note: To quickly move through a long list of contacts, tap one of the sets of letters displayed at the top of the contact list. This takes you to the con-

tact names beginning with those letters. Enter the first few letters of the contact in question here. Tap to jump to that por-

tion of the contacts list. Tap to toggle to By Name (note the Company view) Deleting a Contact 1 In the contact list, tap and hold the contact. To select multiple contacts, tap and drag. Then, tap and hold the selected contacts. 2 On the pop-up menu, tap Delete Contact. The next time you synchro-

nize, the contact is deleted from the desktop also. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 67 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Adding a Contact to Speed Dial You can create speed dials to call frequently-called numbers with a single tap. Before you can create a speed dial entry for a phone number, that number must already exist in Contacts. 1 From the Phone keypad, tap Speed Dial > New. 2 Tap the desired contact name and number. 3 In the Location field, tap the Up/Down arrows to select an available location to assign as the new speed dial entry. The first speed dial loca-

tion is reserved for your voice mail. To delete a speed dial entry, go to the Speed Dial list, tap and hold the contact name in the box to the right of the assigned speed dial number, then tap Delete. Changing Contacts Options In the contact list, tap Tools > Options. S The area code and country/region for new contacts are automatically entered based on the information in Country/Region settings. S If you are having trouble reading the contacts in the contact list, select Use large font. S To increase the available space for displaying contacts in the list, clear Show ABC tabs. Clear this to view more contacts per screen. Tap this to view larger text. Enter the three-digit area code. Select from a drop-down list. 68 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Tasks: Keeping a To Do List To switch to Tasks on your 700 Color Computer, tap Start > Tasks. Use Tasks to keep track of what you have to do. A variety of task informa-

tion can display on the Today screen. If you use Microsoft Outlook on your desktop, you can synchronize tasks between your device and desktop. Select the category of tasks you want displayed in the list. Select the sort order of the list. Use this entry bar to assign a task quickly. Indicates a high priority. Tap to display or edit the task details. Tap and hold to display a pop-up menu of actions. Tap to create a new task. Note: To change the way information is displayed in the list, tap Tools >

Options. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 69 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Creating a Task S To quickly create a task, enter text in the Tap here to add a new task box at the top of the screen. If you do not see this box, tap Tools >

Entry Bar. S To create a task with detailed information, such as start and due dates, tap New. To enter notes, tap the Notes tab. You can enter a start date and due date or enter other information by first tapping the field. If the input panel is open, you need to hide it to see all available fields. You can enter text, draw, or create a recording. For more information on creating notes, see Notes: Capturing Thoughts and Ideas on page 71. S To change a task, tap it in the task list, and then tap Edit. S Using the onscreen keyboard, enter a description. S To assign the task to a category, tap Categories and select a category from the list. In the task list, you can display tasks by category. S When finished, tap ok to return to the task list. Tap to return to the task list (the task is saved automatically). Tap to choose from predefined subjects. Notes is a good place for maps and drawings. Note: To quickly create a task with only a subject, tap Entry Bar on the Tools menu. Then, tap Tap here to add a new task and enter your task information. Synchronizing Tasks Tasks stored on your 700 Color Computer can synchronize with Micro-

soft Outlook on your desktop. Task synchronization is automatically se-

lected in ActiveSync. New items entered on one computer are copied to the other during syn-

chronization. Handwritten notes and drawings are saved as metafiles (pic-

tures). For more information on synchronization, see ActiveSync Help on the desktop. 70 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Notes: Capturing Thoughts and Ideas To switch to Notes on your 700 Color Computer, tap Start > Notes. Notes helps you quickly capture your ideas, notes, and thoughts. You can create a note using written and typed text, drawings, and recordings. You can also share your notes with others through e-mail, infrared, and syn-

chronization with your desktop. Tap to change the sort order of the list. Tap to open a note or play a recording. Tap and hold to display a pop-up menu of actions. Tap to record. Tap to show or hide the Recording toolbar. Tap to create a new item. Note: To create documents with advanced formatting or templates, such as bulleted lists and tabs, use word processing software developed for your device, such as Pocket Word. Creating a Note To create your note, tap New, then write, draw, type, or record your in-

formation. For information about using the input panel, writing and dra-

wing, and creating recordings, see Basic Skills on page 26. S Writing Using the stylus, write directly on the screen. S Drawing Using the stylus, draw directly on the screen. S Typing Using the input panel, enter typed text into the 700 Color Computer. Do this by tapping keys on the onscreen keyboard or by using hand-

writing recognition software. S Recording Create a stand-alone recording or embed a recording into a note. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 71 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Synchronizing Notes Notes can be synchronized between your desktop and device either through notes synchronization or file synchronization. Notes synchroniza-

tion synchronizes the notes on your 700 Color Computer with Outlook Notes on your desktop. File synchronization synchronizes all notes on your 700 Color Computer with the My Documents folder for the 700 Color Computer on your desktop. To synchronize your notes through notes synchronization, first select the Notes information type for synchronization in ActiveSync. The next time you synchronize, all notes in My Documents and its subfolder on your device appear in Outlook Notes on your desktop. Notes that contain only text appear as regular notes in Outlook on your desktop, while notes con-

taining written text or drawings appear in the device format. In addition, all notes in the Notes group in Outlook on the desktop appear in Notes on the device. To synchronize your notes as files, in ActiveSync, select the Files informa-

tion type for synchronization and clear the Notes information type. When you select Files, the My Documents folder for the 700 Color Computer is created on your desktop. All .PWI files placed in the My Documents fold-

er on your device and all .DOC files placed in the My Documents folder for the 700 Color Computer on your desktop are synchronized. Password-

protected files cannot be synchronized. ActiveSync converts documents during synchronization. For more infor-

mation on synchronization or file conversion, see ActiveSync Help on the desktop. Note: When you delete or change an item on either your desktop or 700 Color Computer, the item is changed or deleted in the other location the next time you synchronize. Note: If you synchronize your notes using file synchronization and then later decide to use notes synchronization, all of your notes are synchro-

nized with Outlook on your desktop and no longer store in the My Docu-

ments folder for the 700 Color Computer. 72 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Inbox: Sending and Receiving E-mail Messages Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 To switch to Inbox on your 700 Color Computer, tap Start > Inbox. You can receive Internet e-mail messages and SMS messages in Inbox. In-

ternet e-mail messages are sent by using an address you receive from your Internet service provider (ISP) or your employer. SMS messages are sent and received through your wireless phone service provider by using a phone number as the message address. You can send and receive e-mail by synchronizing with your desktop, or by connecting to a Post Office Protocol 3 (POP3) or Internet Message Ac-

cess Protocol 4 (IMAP4) mail server. You need to set up an e-mail account for each method that you use except for Microsoft ActiveSync, which is set up by default. The ActiveSync folder on your 700 Color Computer stores messages that you send and receive through synchronization with a desk-

top. Account names appear as folders in the folder list (located on the left, under the navigation bar) in the Inbox message list. With synchronization, messages are synchronized between the device In-

box and the PC Inbox by using ActiveSync and Microsoft Exchange or Microsoft Outlook. For more information, see Synchronizing E-mail Mes-

sages below. When connecting to a POP3 or IMAP4 server, you use a modem to con-

nect to your Internet service provider (ISP), or a modem or Ethernet card to connect to the local area network to which your e-mail server is connec-

ted. You can also use your phone to connect by using a cellular line con-

nection. For more information, see Connecting to a Mail Server on page 75. Synchronizing E-mail Messages After selecting Inbox for synchronization in ActiveSync, e-mail messages are synchronized as part of the general synchronization process. During synchronization:

S Messages are copied from the Inbox folder on your desktop or the Microsoft Exchange server to the Inbox folder on your 700 Color Com-

puter. (Note that you can only synchronize information directly with an Exchange Server if your company is running Microsoft Mobile Infor-

mation Server 2002 or later.) By default, you receive messages from the last three days only, the first 100 lines of each new message, and file at-

tachments of less than 100 KB in size. S Messages in the Outbox folder on your device are transferred to Ex-

change or Outlook and then sent from those programs. S The messages on the two computers are linked. When you delete a mes-

sage on your 700 Color Computer, it is deleted from your desktop the next time you synchronize. S Messages in subfolders in other e-mail folders in Outlook are synchro-

nized only if they were selected for synchronization in ActiveSync. For information on initiating Inbox synchronization or changing synchro-

nization settings, see ActiveSync Help on your desktop or select Start >

Help > Connections to see Connections Help. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 73 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Managing E-mail Messages and Folders Each e-mail account and SMS account has its own folder hierarchy with five default folders: Inbox, Outbox, Deleted Items, Drafts, and Sent Items. The messages you receive and send through the mail account are stored in these folders. You can also create additional folders within each hierarchy. The Deleted Items folder contains messages that were deleted on the de-

vice. The behavior of the Deleted Items and Sent Items folders depends on the Inbox options you have chosen. The behavior of the folders you create depends on whether you are using ActiveSync, SMS, POP3, or IMAP4. S If you use ActiveSync, e-mail messages in the Inbox folder in Outlook automatically synchro-

nize with your device. You can select to synchronize additional folders by designating them for ActiveSync. The folders you create and the messages you move are then mirrored on the server. For example, if you move two messages from the Inbox folder to a folder named Family, and you have designated Family for synchronization, the server creates a copy of the Family folder and copies the messages into that folder. You can then read the messages while away from your desktop. S If you use SMS, messages are stored in the Inbox folder. S If you use POP3 and you move e-mail messages to a folder you created, the link is broken between the messages on the device and their copies on the mail server. The next time you connect, the mail server sees that the messages are missing from the device Inbox and deletes them from the server. This prevents you from having duplicate copies of a message, but it also means that you no longer have access to messages that you move to fold-

ers created from anywhere except the 700 Color Computer. S If you use IMAP4, the folders you create and the e-mail messages you move are mirrored on the server. Therefore, messages are available to you anytime you con-

nect to your mail server, whether it is from your 700 Color Computer or desktop. This synchronization of folders occurs whenever you con-

nect to your mail server, create new folders, or rename or delete folders when connected. For all accounts except ActiveSync, you can access folder options by tap-

ping Tools > Manage Folders. 74 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Connecting to a Mail Server In addition to synchronizing e-mail messages with your desktop, you can send and receive e-mail messages by connecting to an e-mail server using a modem or network card connected to your 700 Color Computer. You need to set up a remote connection to a network or an ISP, and a connec-

tion to your e-mail server. For more information, see Getting Connected on page 98. When you connect to the e-mail server, new messages are downloaded to the 700 Color Computer Inbox folder, messages in the 700 Color Com-

puter Outbox folder are sent, and messages that were deleted on the e-mail server are removed from the 700 Color Computer Inbox folder. Messages that you receive directly from an e-mail server are linked to your e-mail server rather than your desktop. When you delete a message on your 700 Color Computer, it is also deleted from the e-mail server the next time you connect based on the settings selected in ActiveSync. You can work online or offline. When working online, you read and re-

spond to messages while connected to the e-mail server. Messages are sent as soon as you tap Send, which saves space on your 700 Color Computer. When working offline, once you have downloaded new message headers or partial messages, you can disconnect from the e-mail server and then de-

cide which messages to download completely. The next time you connect, Inbox downloads the complete messages you have marked for retrieval and sends the messages you have composed. Setting Up or Changing an Account To set up an account:

S To set up a POP3 or IMAP4 e-mail account, tap Accounts > New Ac-

count. Follow the instructions in the New Account Wizard. S To set up an SMS account, tap Accounts > Accounts, and then tap SMS. Follow the instructions on the screen. To change options for an account:

1 Tap Accounts > Accounts. 2 Tap the name of the account, and follow the instructions on the screen. To delete an account:

1 Tap Accounts > Accounts. 2 Tap and hold the name of the account, and then tap Delete. Note: You can set up several e-mail accounts including your ActiveSync account, but you can set up only one SMS account. Note: You cannot add a new account while connected. Tap Accounts >

Disconnect to disconnect. Note: You cannot delete your SMS account. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 75 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Downloading Messages from the Server In Inbox, tap Accounts > Connect to open a connection to the Internet or your corporate network, depending on the account. For more information, tap Start > Help > Connections to see Connections Help. 1 Tap Accounts and ensure that the account you want to use is selected

(marked by a bullet.) 2 Tap Connect. The messages on your 700 Color Computer and e-mail server are synchronized: new messages are downloaded to the 700 Color Inbox folder, messages in the 700 Color Outbox folder are sent, and messages that were deleted from the server are removed from the 700 Color Inbox. Tap a message in the message list to open it. 3 If you read a message and decide that you need the full copy, tap Edit >

Mark for Download while in the message window. If you are in the message list, tap and hold the message, and then tap Mark for Down-

load. This also downloads message attachments if you selected those op-

tions when you set up the e-mail account. You can also choose to down-

load full copies of messages by default. 4 When finished, tap Accounts > Disconnect. Note: Receiving entire messages consumes storage memory. Note: The size column in the message list displays the local size and server size of a message. Even when a message has downloaded fully, these num-

bers may differ because the size of a message can vary between the server and the device. 76 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Composing and Sending Messages To compose a message:

1 In the message list, tap New. 2 To select an account, tap the From list and select ActiveSync, SMS, or the desired e-mail account. 3 Enter the e-mail address or SMS address of one or more recipients, sepa-

rating them with semicolons. To access addresses and phone numbers from Contacts, tap To. 4 Enter your message. To quickly add common messages, tap My Text and tap a desired message. 5 To check spelling, tap Edit > Spell Check. 6 Tap Send. If you are working offline, the message is moved to the Out-

box folder and is sent the next time you connect. Tap to show or hide the complete header. Tap to show or hide the recording tool bar. Tap to display the Address Book. Tap to insert common (preset) messages. Note: If you are sending an SMS message and want to know if it was re-

ceived, before sending the message, tap Edit > Options > Request SMS text message delivery notification. You can directly call the sender of an SMS message by tapping the icon shown to the left, then Call. Note: Depending on the e-mail address options that you select, you can use a directory service in addition to your contact list to verify names. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 77 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Companion Programs Pocket Word The companion programs consist of Microsoft Pocket Word, Microsoft Pocket Excel, Windows Media Player, and Microsoft Reader. To switch to a companion program on your 700 Color Computer, tap Start >

Programs, then tap the program name. Pocket Word works with Microsoft Word on your desktop to give you access to copies of your documents. You can create new documents on your 700 Color Computer, or you can copy documents from your desktop to your 700 Color Computer. Synchronize documents between your desk-

top and your 700 Color Computer to have up-to-date content in both locations. Creating a Document Use Pocket Word to create documents, such as letters or meeting minutes. To create a new file, tap Start > Programs > Pocket Word > New. You get either a blank document or a template, depending on what you have se-

lected in the Tools > Options dialog box. Select an input mode from the View menu. You can open only one document at a time; when you open a second doc-

ument, you have to save the first. You can save a document you create or edit in formats such as Word (.DOC), Pocket Word (.PSW), Rich Text Format (.RTF), and Plain Text (.TXT). Pocket Word contains a list of files stored on your 700 Color Computer. Tap a file in the list to open it. To delete, make copies of, and send files, tap and hold a file in the list, then, select the action on the pop-up menu. Tap to change the sort order of the list. Tap to open a document. Tap and hold an item to see a pop-up menu of actions. Tap to create a new document. 78 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 You can enter information in Pocket Word in one of four modes (typing, writing, recording, and drawing), which are displayed on the View menu. Each mode has its own toolbar, which you can show and hide by tapping the Show/Hide Toolbar button on the command bar. You can change the zoom magnification by tapping View > Zoom, then select the percentage you want. Select a higher percentage to enter text and a lower one to see more of your document. If you are opening a Word document created on a desktop, you may select View > Wrap to Window so that you can see the entire document. To check spelling, select text, then tap Tools > Spell Check. To use your new document as a template, move the document to the Templates folder. You can insert the data in a document. First, make sure that no drawings are selected, tap and hold anywhere on the document, then tap Insert Date from the pop-up menu. Typing Mode Using the input panel, enter typed text into the document. For more in-

formation on entering typed text, see Basic Skills on page 26. To format existing text and to edit text, first select the text. You can select text as you do in a Word document, using your stylus instead of the mouse to drag through the text you want to select. You can search a document to find text by tapping Edit > Find/Replace. Tap and hold to see a pop-up menu of actions. Tap to return to the document list (changes are saved automatically). Tap to change formatting options. Tap to format text. Tap to show or hide the toolbar. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 79 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Writing Mode In writing mode, use your stylus to write directly on the screen. Ruled lines are displayed as a guide, and the zoom magnification is greater than in typing mode to allow you to write more easily. For more information on writing and selecting writing, see Basic Skills on page 26. With Space button selected, drag to insert space. An arrow appears showing the space direction and size. Tap to highlight selected text. Tap to select formatting options, such as pen weight and line color. Space button. Pen button. Note: If you cross three ruled lines in a single stylus stroke, the writing becomes a drawing, and can be edited and manipulated as described in Drawing Mode on the next page. Note: Written words are converted to graphics (metafiles) when a Pocket Word document is converted to a Word document on your desktop. Recording Mode In recording mode, embed a recording into your document. Recordings are saved as .WAV files. For more information on recording, see Basic Skills on page 26. For more information on using Pocket Word, tap Start > Help > Pocket Word to see Pocket Word Help. 80 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Drawing Mode In drawing mode, use your stylus to draw on the screen. Grid lines appear as a guide. When you lift your stylus off the screen after the first stroke, a drawing box indicating the boundaries of the drawing appears. Every sub-

sequent stroke within or touching the drawing box becomes part of the drawing. For more information on drawing and selecting drawings, see Basic Skills on page 26. Resize an object by dragging the selection handles. Tap to select formatting options, such as line weight, fill color, and line color. Tap an arrow to see your choices. Pen button. Synchronizing Pocket Word Documents Pocket Word documents can be synchronized with Word documents on your desktop. To synchronize files, first select the Files information type for synchronization in ActiveSync. When you select Files, the My Docu-

ments folder for the 700 Color Computer is created on your desktop. Place all files you want to synchronize with the device in this folder. Pass-

word-protected files cannot be synchronized. All Pocket Word files stored in My Documents and its subfolders are syn-

chronized with the desktop. ActiveSync converts documents during syn-

chronization. For more information on synchronization or file conversion, see ActiveSync Help on the desktop. Note: When you delete a file on either your desktop or your 700 Color Computer, the file is deleted in the other location the next time you syn-

chronize. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 81 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Pocket Excel You can create and edit workbooks and templates in Microsoft Pocket Ex-

cel as you do in Microsoft Excel on your desktop. Pocket Excel workbooks are usually saved as .PXL files, but you can also save them in .XLS format. When you close a workbook, it is automatically named and placed in the Pocket Excel workbook list. You can attach a password to a workbook to help ensure privacy. Creating a Workbook Use Pocket Excel to create workbooks, such as expense reports and mileage logs. To create a new file, tap Start > Programs > Pocket Excel > New. A blank workbook appears. Or, if you have selected a template for new workbooks in the Tools > Options dialog box, that template appears with appropriate text and formatting already provided. You can open only one workbook at a time; when you open a second workbook, save the first. You can save a workbook you create or edit in a variety of formats, including Pocket Excel (.PXL) and Excel (.XLS). You can also save a workbook as a template by moving the workbook to the Templates folder. Pocket Excel contains a list of the files stored on your 700 Color Comput-

er. Tap a file in the list to open it. To delete, make copies of, and send files, tap and hold a file in the list. Then select the appropriate action from the pop-up menu. Pocket Excel provides fundamental spreadsheet tools, such as formulas, functions, sorting, and filtering. To display the toolbar, tap View >

Toolbar. Cell contents appear here as you enter them. Zoom button. AutoSum button. Format button. Note: If your workbook contains sensitive information, you can protect it with a password. To do so, open the workbook, tap Edit > Password. Ev-

ery time you open the workbook, enter a password, preferably one that is easy for you to remember but hard for others to guess. 82 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Tips for Working in Pocket Excel Note the following when working in large worksheets in Pocket Excel:

S View in full-screen mode to see as much of your worksheet as possible. Tap View > Full Screen. To exit full-screen mode, tap Restore. S Tap View > Zoom and select a percentage so that you can easily read the worksheet. S Show and hide window elements. Tap View and then tap the elements you want to show or hide. S Freeze panes on a worksheet. First select the cell where you want to freeze panes. Tap View > Freeze Panes. You might want to freeze the top and leftmost panes in a worksheet to keep row and column labels visible as you scroll through a sheet. Tap View > Unfreeze Panes to undo this process. S Split panes to view different areas of a large worksheet. Tap View >

Split. Then drag the split bar to where you want it. To remove the split, tap View > Remove Split. S Show and hide rows. To hide a row, select a cell in the row you want to hide. Then tap Format > Row > Hide. To show a hidden row, tap Tools > Go To, and then type a reference that is in the hidden row. Then tap Format > Row > Unhide. S Do the same to show and hide columns. To hide a column, select a cell in the column you want to hide. Then tap Format > Column > Hide. To show a hidden column, tap Tools > Go To, and then type a refer-

ence that is in the hidden column. Then tap Format > Column > Un-

hide. For more information on using Pocket Excel, tap Start > Help > Pocket Excel to see Pocket Excel Help. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 83 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 MSN Messenger MSN Messenger on your 700 Color Computer provides the same chat environment as MSN Messenger on your desktop. These features include:

S Seeing who is online S Sending and receiving instant messages S Having an instant message conversation with a group of contacts S Telling contacts that you are unavailable S Blocking contacts from seeing your status or sending you messages To use MSN Messenger, you need a Microsoft Passport account, or a Microsoft Exchange e-mail account that your employer provides. Once you have one of these accounts, do the following:

1 Set up a connection on your 700 Color Computer, such as a modem or wireless connection, that enables you to connect to the Internet. 2 Set up an account in MSN Messenger. 3 Sign in to MSN Messenger. Note: To set up a free Hotmail account, go to http://www.hotmail.com. To set up a Microsoft Passport account, go to http://www.passport.com. To set up an Exchange account, see your network administrator. For more information on using MSN Messenger, tap Start > Help > MSN Messenger to see MSN Messenger Help. To switch to MSN Messenger, tap Start > Programs > MSN Messenger. 84 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Setting Up an Account Before you can use MSN Messenger, you must set up the instant messag-

ing accounts to use. For MSN Messenger Service, you must have a Micro-

soft Passport or Hotmail account. For Exchange Instant Messaging, you must have an Exchange account. 1 Create a connection for your device. To use MSN Messenger Service, set up a connection to the Internet; to use Exchange Instant Messaging, set up a connection to your corporate network. See page 98 for more information on getting connected. 2 In MSN Messenger, tap Tools > Options > the Accounts tab. 3 Select Enable MSN Messenger Service or Enable Exchange Instant Mes-

saging. 4 Enter your sign-in name and password for the selected accounts. Your sign-in name is usually in the username@domain.com form. 5 If you selected both accounts, under Sign in using this account first, se-

lect which account to sign in to first. Signing In and Out S To sign in, tap anywhere on the screen. Follow the directions on the screen. S To sign out, tap Tools > Sign Out. S To sign in upon connecting, tap Tools > Options > General and select the Run this program upon connection box. S Signing in to an Exchange account may take several minutes depending upon your connection speed. Reducing the number of Exchange con-

tacts decreases your sign-in time. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 85 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Working with Contacts The MSN Messenger window shows all of your messenger contacts at a glance, divided into Online and Not Online categories. From this view, while connected, you can chat, send e-mail, block the contact from chat-

ting with you, or delete contacts from your list using the pop-up menu. Tap a contact to start a chat. Tap and hold to display a pop-up menu of actions. To add a contact, tap Tools > Add a Contact and follow the directions on the screen. To delete a contact, tap and hold the contacts name, then tap Delete Contact from the pop-up menu. To see others online without being seen, tap Tools > My Status > Appear Offline. 86 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Managing Contacts To be alerted each time you are added to a contact list, tap Tools > Op-

tions > the Privacy tab. S To block a contact from seeing your status and sending you messages, tap the contact and tap the right arrow. This moves the contact to the My Block List. S To unblock a contact, tap the contact and tap the left arrow. This moves the contact to the My Allow List. S To receive an alert when someone adds you to their contacts list, select Alert me when I am added to a Passport contact list. S To see who has you listed as a contact, tap View. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 87 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Sending a Message S Tap a contact to whom you want to send a message. Enter your message in the text entry area at the bottom of the screen and tap Send. To quickly add common messages, tap My Text and tap a desired message. S To invite another contact to an ongoing chat, tap Tools > Invite and tap a contact. S To see who is already chatting or to switch between chats, tap Chats. Enter a message. Tap to send message. 88 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Windows Media Player for Windows Mobile Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Use Microsoft Windows Media Player for Windows Mobile to play digital audio and video files that are stored on your 700 Series Computer or on a network. To switch to Windows Media Player on your 700 Color Computer, tap Start > Windows Media. Use Microsoft Windows Media Player on your desktop to copy digital au-

dio and video files to your 700 Color Computer. You can play Windows Media and MP3 files on your Windows Mobile. Indicates the progress of the current track. Tap to adjust volume. Tap to skip to the next song. Tap to play a previous song. Tap to stop. Tap to play or pause. For more information about using Windows Media Player for Windows Mobile, tap Start > Help > Windows Media Player to see Windows Media Player Help. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 89 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Microsoft Reader Use Microsoft Reader to read eBooks on your 700 Color Computer. Download books to your desktop from your favorite eBook Web site. Then, use ActiveSync to copy the book files to your activated 700 Color Computer. The books appear in the Reader Library, where you can tap them in the list to open them. Each book consists of a cover page, an op-

tional table of contents, and the pages of the book. You can:

S Page through the book by using the Up/Down control on your 700 Color Computer or by tapping the page number on each page. S Annotate the book with highlighting, bookmarks, notes, and drawings. S Search for text and look up definitions for words. The Guidebook contains all the information needed to use the software. To open the Guidebook, tap Help on the Reader command bar. Or, on a book page, tap and hold on the book title, and then tap Help on the pop-

up menu. To switch to Microsoft Reader, tap Start > Programs > Microsoft Reader. Getting Books on Your 700 Color Computer You can download book files from the Web. Just visit your favorite eBook retailer and follow the instructions to download the book files. Sample books and a dictionary are also included in the MSReader folder in the Extras folder on the Windows Mobile Companion CD. Use ActiveSync to download the files from your desktop to your activated mobile computer as described in the Read Me file in the MSReader folder. 90 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Using the Library The Library is your Reader home page; it displays a list of all books stored on your 700 Color Computer or storage card. To open the Library:

1 On the Reader command bar, tap Library. 2 On a book page, tap the book title, then tap Library on the pop-up menu. 3 To open a book, tap its title in the Library list. Tap to scroll through the Library list. Tap to open a book. Tap to select a sort order. Tap here to navigate to other parts of the Reader. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 91 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Reading a Book Each book consists of a cover page, an optional table of contents, and the pages of the book. Navigation options are listed in the bottom portion of the cover page. The first time you open a book, go to the first page or to the table of con-

tents, if there is one. Subsequently, whenever you open the book, you are automatically taken to the last page read. In addition to the text, each book page includes a page number and book title. Tap to select a navigation option. Select an option after dragging to select a text. Drag to select text. Tap arrows to turn the page, or tap and hold page number to bring up page riffle. You can also page through a book by using the Up/Down/Left/Right con-

trols on your 700 Color Computer. 92 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Using Reader Features Reading a book electronically gives you several options not available with paper books. These options are available from any book page. Select text by dragging across the text on the page. Then, tap an option on the pop-up menu, as described here:

S Searching for Text Find text in a book by tapping Find on the pop-up menu. Enter the word you want to search for, and tap the desired Find option. Reader highlights found text on the page. To close Find, tap outside the box. To return to your original page, tap the title and then tap Return on the pop-up menu. S Copying Text You can copy text from books that support this feature into any pro-

gram that accepts text. On a book page, select the text you want to copy. Then, tap Copy Text on the pop-up menu. The text can be pasted into the program of your choice. S Adding Bookmarks When you add a bookmark to a book, a color-coded bookmark icon appears in the right margin. You can add multiple bookmarks to a book. Then, from anywhere in the book, tap the bookmark icon to go to the bookmarked page. S Highlighting Text When you highlight text, it appears with a colored background. S Attaching Notes to Text When you attach a note to text, you enter the text in a notepad that ap-

pears on top of the book page. A Note icon displays in the left margin. To show or hide the note, tap the icon. S Adding Drawings When you add a drawing, a Drawing icon appears in the bottom-left corner of the page, and drawing tools appear across the bottom of the page. Draw by dragging your stylus. S Annotations Index To see a list of a books annotations, including bookmarks, highlights, text notes, and drawings, tap Annotations Index on the books cover page. You can tap an entry in the list to go to the annotated page. Removing a Book When you finish reading a book, you can delete it to conserve space on your 700 Color Computer. If a copy of the book is stored on your desk-

top, you can download it again at any time. To remove a book from your 700 Color Computer, tap and hold the title in the Library list, and then tap Delete on the pop-up menu. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 93 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Pocket Internet Explorer Use Microsoft Pocket Internet Explorer to view Web or WAP pages in either of these ways:

S During synchronization with your desktop, download your favorite links and mobile favorites that are stored in the Mobile Favorites sub-

folder in Internet Explorer on the desktop. S Connect to an ISP or network and browse the Web. To do this, create the connection first, as described in Getting Connected on page 98. When connected to an ISP or network, you can also download files and programs from the Internet or intranet. To switch to Pocket Internet Explorer on your 700 Color Computer, tap Start > Internet Explorer. The Mobile Favorites Folder Favorite Links Only items stored in the Mobile Favorites subfolder in the Favorites folder in Internet Explorer on your desktop are synchronized with your 700 Col-

or Computer. This folder was created automatically when you installed ActiveSync. During synchronization, the list of favorite links in the Mobile Favorites folder on your desktop is synchronized with Pocket Internet Explorer on your 700 Color Computer. Both computers are updated with changes made to either list each time you synchronize. Unless you mark the favor-

ite link as a mobile favorite, only the link is downloaded to your 700 Color Computer. Connect to your ISP or network to view the content. 1 In ActiveSync on your desktop, click Tools > Options, and select Fa-

vorites from the Mobile Device list. For more information on using ActiveSync, see ActiveSync Help on the desktop. 2 In Internet Explorer on your desktop, save or move favorite links to the Mobile Favorites subfolder in the Favorites list via Favorites > Organize Favorites. For more information on using Internet Explorer, see Internet Explorer Help on the desktop. 3 Connect your 700 Color Computer to your desktop. If synchronization does not start automatically, in ActiveSync on your desktop, click Sync. 94 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Mobile Favorites Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 If you are using Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0 or later on your desktop, you can download mobile favorites to your 700 Color Computer. Syn-

chronizing mobile favorites downloads Web content to your 700 Color Computer so that you can view pages while you are disconnected from your ISP and desktop. Use the Internet Explorer plug-in installed with ActiveSync to create mo-

bile favorites quickly. To create a mobile favorite:

1 In ActiveSync on your desktop, click Tools > Options, and select Favorites from the Mobile Device list. For more information on using ActiveSync, see ActiveSync Help on the desktop. 2 In Internet Explorer 5.0 or greater on your desktop, browse to the page you want to view offline, then click Tools > Create Mobile Favorite. 3 To change the link name, enter a new name in the Name box. 4 In the Update box, select a desired update schedule to keep the page in the Mobile Favorites folder up to date. You can also update content by clicking Tools > Synchronize in Internet Explorer. 5 To save the link in a subfolder of Mobile Favorites, click Create In and select the desired subfolder. 6 Click OK. Internet Explorer downloads the latest version of the page to your desktop. 7 To download the pages that are linked to the mobile favorite you just created, in Internet Explorer on the desktop, right-click the mobile favorite, then click Properties. On the Download tab, specify the number of links deep you want to download. To conserve 700 Color Computer memory, go only one level deep. 8 Connect your 700 Color Computer to your desktop. If synchronization between your 700 Color Computer and desktop does not start, in Acti-

veSync on your desktop, click Sync. Mobile favorites take up storage memory on your 700 Color Computer. To minimize the amount of memory used:

S In the settings for the Favorites information, type in ActiveSync op-

tions, turn off pictures and sounds, or stop some mobile favorites from being downloaded to the 700 Color Computer. For more information, see ActiveSync Help. S Limit the number of downloaded linked pages. In Internet Explorer on the desktop, right-click the mobile favorite you want to change and then Properties. In the Download tab, specify 0 or 1 for the number of linked pages you want to download. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 95 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Using AvantGo Channels AvantGo is a free interactive service that gives you access to personalized content and thousands of popular Web sites. You subscribe to AvantGo channels directly from your 700 Color Computer. Then, you synchronize your 700 Color Computer and desktop, or connect to the Internet to download the content. For more information, visit the AvantGo Web site. To synchronize an AvantGo channel:

1 In Pocket Internet Explorer on your 700 Color Computer, tap display your list of favorites. to 2 Tap the AvantGo Channels link. 3 Tap Activate. 4 Follow the directions on the screen. Synchronize your 700 Series Com-

puter with your desktop, then tap My Channels to complete the Avant-

Go setup. 5 When synchronization is complete, tap the AvantGo Channels link in your list of favorites to see a few of the most popular channels. To add or remove channels, tap the Add or Remove link. Using Pocket Internet Explorer You can use Pocket Internet Explorer to browse mobile favorites and chan-

nels that were downloaded to your 700 Color Computer without connect-

ing to the Internet. You can also connect to the Internet through an ISP or a network connection and browse the Web. Favorites button Home button Refresh button 96 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Viewing Mobile Favorites and Channels 1 Tap the Favorites button to display your list of favorites. 2 Tap the page you want to view. Tap the favorite you want to view. Tap to add or delete a folder or favorite link. The page that was downloaded the last time you synchronized with your desktop opens. If the page is not on your 700 Color Computer, the favor-

ite is dimmed. Synchronize with your desktop again to download the page to your 700 Color Computer, or connect to the Internet to view the page. Browsing the Internet 1 Set up a connection to your ISP or corporate network using Connec-

tions, as described in Getting Connected on page 98. 2 To connect and start browsing, do one of the following:

S Tap the Favorites button, and then tap the favorite you want to view. S Tap View > Address Bar. In the address bar that appears at the top of the screen, enter the Web address you want to visit and then tap Go. Tap the arrow to choose from previously entered addresses. Note: To add a favorite link while using the 700 Color Computer, go to the page you want to add, tap and hold on the page, and tap Add to Favorites. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 97 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Getting Connected You can set up connections to the Internet and corporate network at work to do such activities as browsing the Internet or intranet, sending and re-

ceiving e-mail and instant messages, and synchronizing information using ActiveSync. Connections can be made using a modem, wireless network, or network

(Ethernet) card. You can use a modem connection to set up connections with an external modem, or through your mobile phone network using a cellular line or GPRS. Your 700 Color Computer has two groups of connection settings: My ISP and My Work Network. My ISP settings connect to the Internet, and My Work Network settings connect to any private network, such as a corpo-

rate network you use at work. S My ISP. Note: This is available only on 700 Color and 730 Computers. Once connected, you can send and receive e-mail messages by using In-

box and view Web or WAP pages by using Pocket Internet Explorer. The communication software for creating an ISP connection is already installed on your 700 Color or 730 Computer. Your service provider provides the software needed to install other services, such as paging and fax services. If this is the method you want to use, see Connecting to an Internet Service Provider on page 99. S My Work Network: Connect to the network at your company or orga-

nization where you work. Once connected, you can send and receive e-mail messages by using Inbox, view Web or WAP pages by using Pocket Internet Explorer, and synchronize with your desktop. If this is the method you want to use, see Connecting to Work on page 105. S PCS Vision: Note: This is available only on 700CXL Computers. Personal Communications System (PCS) Vision expands wireless possi-

bilities from rich, full-color graphic screens to a dynamic selection of advanced multimedia services. PCS Vision puts the power of crytsal clear wireless directly in your hand. With PCS Vision, you can get email, games, and Web access. If this is the method you want to use, see Connecting through PCS Vision on page 115. 98 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Connecting to an Internet Service Provider Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Note: This does not apply to the 700CXL Computer. You can connect to your ISP, and use the connection to send and receive e-mail messages and view Web or WAP pages. You can connect to your ISP in one of two ways:

S Create a modem connection. If this is the method you want to use, see Creating a Modem Connection to an ISP below. S Use an Ethernet card and a net tap to connect to the network. If this is the method you want to use, see Creating an Ethernet Connection to an ISP on page 103. Note: This does not apply to the 730 Computer. Creating a Modem Connection to an ISP Obtain the following information from your ISP. Some ISPs require infor-

mation in front of the user name, such as MSN/username. S ISP dial-up access telephone number S User name S Password If you do not have a built-in modem, install a modem card, or use a NULL modem cable and appropriate adapters to connect an external mo-

dem to your 700 Color Computer through the serial port. To view additional information for any screen in the wizard or while changing settings, tap the Help icon. 1 Tap Start > Settings > the Connections tab > the Connections icon. In My ISP, tap Add a new modem connection. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 99 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 2 Enter a name for the connection, such as ISP Connection. In the Select a modem list, select your modem type. If your modem type does not appear, try reinserting the modem card. If you are using an external modem that is connected to your 700 Color Computer with a cable, select Hayes Compatible on COM1. Tap Next to continue. 3 Enter the access phone number, then tap Next. 100 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 4 Enter the user name, password, and domain (if provided by an ISP or your network administrator). 5 You should not need to change any settings in Advanced. Most ISPs now use a dynamically-assigned address. If the ISP you are connecting to does not use a dynamically-assigned address, tap Advanced > the TCP/IP tab, tap Use specific IP address, then enter the address. Tap ok to close the Advanced page, then tap Finish. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 101 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 6 Tap the Advanced tab, then tap Select Location to specify your current location. These settings apply to all connections. Tap Edit to continue. 7 Specify your current phone type. If your phone type is pulse dialing, check the Pulse dialing box. If your type is tone dialing (as most phone lines are), then clear the Pulse dialing box. Continue to tap ok to close each page and return to the Settings page. To start the connection, start using one of the following programs. Once connected, you can:

S Send and receive e-mail messages by using Inbox. Before you can use Inbox, you need to provide the information it needs to communicate with the e-mail server. For specific instructions, see Connecting Directly to an E-mail Server on page 118. S Visit Web and WAP pages by using Pocket Internet Explorer. For more information, see Pocket Internet Explorer on page 94. 102 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 S Send and receive instant messages with MSN Messenger. For more in-

formation, see MSN Messenger on page 84. Note: To change modem connection settings in My ISP, tap Manage existing connections. Select the desired modem connection, tap Settings, and follow the instructions on the screen. Creating an Ethernet Connection to an ISP Note: This information does not apply to the 730 Computer. You do not need to create a new connection on your 700 Color Comput-

er. Instead, you must purchase a dock to enable on-board Ethernet. 1 Obtain your user name, password, and domain name from your ISP. 2 Place your 700 Color Computer in a dock, tap Start > Today, then look in the System Tray for the Ethernet icon (shown left). If not there, then tap the antenna icon for the NDISTRAY pop-up menu and select Built-

in Ethernet from the menu. 3 If using an on-board Ethernet, then tap Start > Settings > the Connec-

tions tab > Connections > the Advanced tab > Network Card. Tap Built-In Ethernet (10Mbps) from the list of adapters installed to ac-

cess and configure its properties. 4 Connect the dock to the network by using a network cable. For infor-

mation, see your owners manual. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 103 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 5 Tap ok three times to return to the Connections page. Select The In-

ternet from the My network card connects to drop-down list. To start the connection, simply start using one of the programs listed in the preceding section. Once connected, you can perform the same activi-

ties as listed in the preceding section. 104 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Connecting to Work Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 If you have access to a network at work, you can send e-mail messages, view intranet pages, synchronize your 700 Color or 700CXL Computer, and possibly access the Internet. You can connect to work in one of two ways:

S Create a modem connection by using a RAS (Remote Access Server) account. Before you can create this modem connection, your network administrator needs to set up a RAS account for you. If this is the meth-

od you want to use, see Creating a Modem Connection to Work below. Your network administrator may also give you Virtual Private Network

(VPN) settings. S Note: This does not apply to the 730 Computer. Use an embedded Ether-

net card and a net tap to connect to the network. To use this method, see Creating an Ethernet Connection to Work on page 114. Get the following information from your network administrator. S Dial-up access telephone number S User name S Password If your 700 Color or 700CXL Computer does not have access to a mobile phone network, insert a modem card. Tap Start > Settings > the Connections tab > the Connections icon. In My Work Network, set up a modem connection via work (page 106), wire-

less network (page 109), or VPN server (page 111). Note: To change modem connection settings in My Work Network, tap Manage existing connections. Select the desired modem connection, tap Edit, and follow the instructions on the screen. To view additional information for any screen in the wizard or while changing settings, tap the Help icon. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 105 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Creating a Modem Connection to Work 1 Tap Add a new modem connection beneath My Work Network to ini-

tiate this procedure. 2 Enter a name for the connection, such as Company Connection. In the Select a modem list, select your modem type. If your modem type does not appear, try reinserting the modem card. S If you are using an external modem connected to your 700 Computer with a cable, select Hayes Compatible on COM1. S If you are using any type of external modem, select the modem by name. If a listing does not exist for your external modem, select Hayes Compatible on COM1. S Wireless connections can be made via a mobile phone network or GPRS. If you are using a mobile phone network to connect, select Cellular Line. If you are using GPRS, tap Cellular Line (GPRS). Tap Next to continue. 106 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 3 Enter the access phone number, using some of the following guidelines. If you know part of the phone number changes frequently as you travel, create dialing rules to avoid creating numerous modem connections for the same phone number. For more information, tap Use Dialing Rules. S Enter the phone number exactly as you want it dialed. For example, if you call from a business complex or hotel that requires a nine be-

fore dialing out, enter 9 in front of the phone number. S Enter the APN provided by your mobile phone service provider. S When using dialing rules, phone numbers are entered differently. To use additional numbers, such as a 9 to dial from an office complex or hotel, you must use additional dialing rules or change dialing pat-

terns. See Create Dialing Rules via your online help for information. a In the Country/Region box, enter the appropriate code when dial-

ing internationally. For more information, contact an operator at your local phone company. b In the Area code box, enter the area code. Area codes are not need-

ed in all countries. In the Phone number box, enter the main phone number. c Tap Next to continue. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 107 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 4 Enter the user name, password, and domain (if provided by an ISP or your network administrator). If a domain name was not provided, try the connection without entering a domain name. 5 You should not need to change any advanced settings. Instances where you are to change advanced settings include the following. To change advanced settings, tap Advanced. Otherwise, tap Finish. S You want to change baud rate settings, dialing string commands, or credit card options. S You need to change port settings. S The server you are connecting to does not use dynamically-assigned addresses, and you need to enter your TCP/IP settings. Note: The following information applies when you have Enable Microsofts Wireless Zero Config checked via the Wireless Net-

work control panel applet. See page 373 for more information. 108 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Creating a Wireless Network Connection to Work Networks already configured are preferred networks and are listed in Wireless networks. You can connect to only preferred networks or search for and connect to any available network. A wireless network can be added either when the network is detected, or manually by entering settings information. To determine if authentication information is needed, see your network administrator. 1 Tap Start > Settings > the Connections tab > Connections > the Ad-

vanced tab > Network Card > the Wireless tab > Add New Settings. 2 Tap the General tab, then enter a network name. If the network was detected, the network name is entered and cannot be changed. From Connects to, select to what your network is to connect: Work or The Internet. To connect to an ad-hoc connection, select This is a device-to-computer (ad-hoc) connection. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 109 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 3 Tap the Authentication tab, then do the following:

S To use data encryption, tap Data encryption (WEP Enabled). S To use Shared Key authentication, tap Network Authentication

(Shared mode). Be sure to have a network key. S To automatically use a network key, tap The Key is provided for me automatically. Otherwise, enter the network key. S For increased security, select Enable network access using IEEE 802.1X. Then, select the appropriate EAP type. 4 Tap ok to return to the Configure Wireless Network screen. 5 From the Networks to access drop-down list, select All Available, Only access points, or Only computer-to-computer depending on the type of networks to which you connect. 6 To connect only to networks you have already configured, clear Auto-

matically connect to non-preferred networks. 7 Tap ok to close this screen. 110 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Note: If you select to automatically connect to non-preferred networks, your device detects any new networks and provide you the opportunity to configure them. Creating a VPN Server Connection to Work A VPN connection helps you to securely connect to servers, such as a cor-

porate network, via the Internet. Ask your network administrator for a user name, password, domain name, TCP/IP settings, and host name or IP address of the VPN server. To view additional information for any screen in the wizard or while changing settings, tap the Help icon. Note: To change existing settings in My Work Network, tap Manage existing connections > the VPN tab. Select the desired VPN connection, tap Settings, and follow the instructions on the screen. 1 Tap Add a new VPN server connection beneath My Work Network to initiate this procedure. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 111 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 2 In Name, enter a name for the connection, such as a companys name. In Host name/ IP, enter the VPN server name or IP address. Next to VPN type, select the type of authentication to use with your device: IPSec/L2TP or PPTP. If you are not sure which option to choose, ask your network administrator. Tap Next to continue. 3 Select the type of authentication. If you select A pre-shared key, enter the key provided by your network administrator. 112 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 4 Enter your user name, password, and domain name as provided by your ISP or network administrator. If a domain name was not provided, try the connection without entering a domain name. 5 You should not need to change any Advanced settings. Instances where you must change advanced settings include:

S The server to which you are connecting does not use dynamically-as-

signed addresses, and you need to enter your TCP/IP settings. S You need to change server DNS or WINS settings. To change advanced settings, tap Advanced. Otherwise, tap Finish. Insert necessary equipment, such as a network (Ethernet) card, into the device, and use a desired program to automatically begin connecting. For example, switch to Pocket Internet Explorer and browse to a Web page. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 113 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Creating an Ethernet Connection to Work Note: This information does not apply to the 730 Computer. You do not need to create a new connection on your 700 Color or 700CXL Computer. Instead, purchase a dock to enable on-board Ether-

net. Obtain the user name, password, and domain name from your ISP. 1 If using an on-board Ethernet, place your 700 Color or 700CXL Computer in a dock, tap Start > Today, then look for the Ethernet icon

(shown left) in the System Tray. If not there, tap the antenna icon for the NDISTRAY pop-up menu, then select Built-in Ethernet. 2 Tap Start > Settings > the Connections tab > Connections > the Ad-

vanced tab > Network Card. Tap Built-In Ethernet (10Mbps). 700 Color Screen 730 Screen 700CXL Screen 3 Connect the dock to the network by using a network cable. For infor-

mation, see your owners manual. 4 To synchronize your 700 Color or 700CXL Computer, tap Start > Ac-

tiveSync to access Microsoft ActiveSync, then tap Tools > Options >

the PC tab, check Sync with this PC during manual sync, and select your computers name from the Use this PC drop-down list. Remote synchronization with a desktop works only if a partnership is set up with that computer through ActiveSync set to allow remote connec-

tions. Other restrictions apply. See ActiveSync Help on your desktop. 114 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Use one of the programs listed in the preceding section to start a connec-

tion. Once connected, you can perform the activities listed previously. Connecting through PCS Vision Note: This option only applies to the 700CXL Computer. If you have access to a network, you can send e-mail messages, view intra-

net pages, play online games, synchronize your 700CXL Computer, and possibly access the Internet. You can connect to the network this way:

S Create a modem connection by using a PCS Vision account. Before you can create this modem connection, your network administrator needs to set up a PCS account for you. Get the following information from your network administrator. S Dial-up access telephone number S User name S Password If your 700CXL Computer does not have access to a mobile phone net-

work, insert a modem card. Note: To change modem connection settings in PCS Vision, tap Manage existing connections > the Modem tab. Select the desired modem connec-

tion, tap Edit, and follow the instructions on the screen. To view additional information for any screen in the wizard or while changing settings, tap the Help icon. 1 Tap Start > Settings > the Connections tab > the Connections icon. In PCS Vision, tap Add a new modem connection to set up a modem connection. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 115 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 2 Enter a name for the connection, such as My Connection. In the Se-

lect a modem list, select your modem type. If your modem type does not appear, try reinserting the modem card. S If you are using an external modem connected to your 700CXL Computer with a cable, select Hayes Compatible on COM1. S If you are using any type of external modem, select the modem by name. If a listing does not exist for your external modem, select Hayes Compatible on COM1. S Wireless connections can be made via a mobile phone network or GPRS. If you are using a mobile phone network to connect, select Cellular Line. If you are using GPRS, tap Cellular Line (GPRS). Tap Next to continue. 3 Enter the access phone number, using some of the following guidelines. If you know part of the phone number changes frequently as you travel, create dialing rules to avoid creating numerous modem connections for the same phone number. For more information, tap Start > Help , then click Use Dialing Rules near the bottom. S Enter the phone number exactly as you want it dialed. For example, if you call from a business complex or hotel that requires a nine be-

fore dialing out, enter 9 in front of the phone number. S Enter the APN provided by your mobile phone service provider. S When using dialing rules, phone numbers are entered differently. To use additional numbers, such as a 9 to dial from an office complex or hotel, you must use additional dialing rules or change dialing pat-

terns. See Create Dialing Rules via your online help for information. 116 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Tap Next to continue. 4 Enter the user name, password, and domain (if provided by an ISP or your network administrator). If a domain name was not provided, try the connection without entering a domain name. 5 You should not need to change any advanced settings. Instances where you are to change advanced settings include the following. To change advanced settings, tap Advanced. Otherwise, tap Finish. S You want to change baud rate settings, dialing string commands, or credit card options. S You need to change port settings. S The server you are connecting to does not use dynamically-assigned addresses, and you need to enter your TCP/IP settings. Note: If you select to automatically connect to non-preferred networks, your device detects any new networks and provide you the opportunity to configure them. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 117 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 Ending a Connection To disconnect, do one of the following:

S When connected via modem or VPN, tap the Connectivity icon on the navigation bar, and then tap Disconnect. S When connected via cable or cradle, detach your device. S When connected via Infrared, move the device away from the other computer or device. S When connected via a network (Ethernet) card, remove the card from your device. Note this does not apply to 730 Computers. S When connected via a wireless network, switch off the connection. Connecting Directly to an E-mail Server You can set up a connection to an e-mail server so that you can send and receive e-mail messages by using a modem or network connection and In-

box on your 700 Color Computer. Note: The ISP or network must use a POP3 or IMAP4 e-mail server and an SMTP gateway. You can use multiple e-mail services to receive your messages. For each e-mail service you intend to use, first set up and name the e-mail service. If you use the same service to connect to different mailboxes, set up and name each mailbox connection. Setting Up an E-mail Account Do the following to set up an e-mail service. Tap the question mark at the top of the screen for more assistance. 1 On your 700 Color Computer, tap Start > Inbox to access the Inbox application. Tap Accounts > New Account. 2 Enter an e-mail address, tap Next, then Skip after the status of the auto-

matic configuration is listed as Completed. 118 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 3 Enter your user name and password, then tap Next. 4 Select the appropriate service type from the Account type drop-down list, either POP3 or IMAP4, or enter a new account type, then tap Next. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 119 Chapter 2 Windows Mobile 2003 5 In Incoming mail, enter the name of your e-mail server. In Outgoing mail, enter the name of your Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) host. If you are using a network connection, enter your domain name in Domain. Tap Options to do additional configurations. Tap Finish to assign this service. When finished, to connect to your e-mail server, from the Inbox applica-

tion, tap Accounts > Connect. For more information on using the Inbox program, see Inbox: Sending and Receiving E-mail Messages on page 73. 120 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 3 Installing Applications There are multiple ways to get an application to your 700 Series Color Mobile Computer; just as there are multiple ways to package the applica-

tion for delivery. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 121 Chapter 3 Installing Applications Packaging an Application Use any of these methods to package an application for installation:

S For very simple applications, the application itself might be the only file that needs to be delivered. S It could be a directory structure that contains the application, support-

ing files like ActiveX controls, DLLs, images, sound files, and data files. S Or, you could package an application via a CAB file. Consider any of the following when choosing a location into which to store your application:

S In the basic 700 Color Computer, there are two built-in storage op-

tions: the Object Store and the Persistent Storage Manager (PSM). The Object Store is RAM that looks like a disk. Anything copied here is de-

leted when a cold-boot is performed on the 700 Color Computer. The PSM is an area of storage which is embedded in a section of the systems FLASH memory. This storage area is not erased during a cold-boot. It may, however, be erased during the reflashing process. In addition to storing applications and data files, you do have the option to store a per-

sistent registry to the PSM region. S If the optional Secure Digital or CompactFlash storage card is in the system, then consider this card the primary location for placing an ap-

plications install files. The following folders represent either card:

S The Secure Digital storage card creates the \SDMMC Disk folder. S The CompactFlash storage card creates the \Storage Card folder. Note: The 730 Mobile Computer does not support the Compact Flash storage card. S Use the small non-volatile Flash File Store region to hold CAB files that rebuild the system at cold-boot or install applications from a CAB file into the Flash File Store so they are ready-to-run when a cold-boot is performed. Since the FLASH in the system has a limited number of write cycles, do not use the Flash File Store for excessive writing pur-

poses; however, reading is okay. Files copied to any of these locations are safe when a cold-boot is performed on a 700 Color Computer providing the AutoRun system is installed in the appropriate location You can find this system in the 700 Color Management Tools portion of the Intermec Developers Library CD. Copying a CAB file to the \CABFILES folder on one of these cards automatically extracts that CAB file on every cold-boot to ensure that your system is properly set up (see page 128). 122 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 3 Installing Applications Installing Applications Consider any of the following options to get the package to the preferred location on your 700 Series Computer. S Microsoft ActiveSync S FTP Server (page 124) S Secure Digital or CompactFlash storage cards (page 124) Using Microsoft ActiveSync Note: These instructions assume the 700 Color Management Tools por-

tion of the Intermec Developers Library CD was installed on your desktop. The Microsoft ActiveSync tool is located on the 700 Color Companion CD. See Chapter 2, Windows Mobile 2003, for information about this tool as provided by Microsoft Corporation. This can be a serial, USB, Ethernet, InfraRed, or 802.11b ActiveSync con-

nection. Files can be copied using File Explorer on a desktop or a laptop computer. This is usually good when updating few 700 Color Computers. Note: The 730 Computer does not support Ethernet. These instructions assume that Microsoft ActiveSync was installed onto your desktop and is up and running. If not, go to Chapter 2, Windows Mobile 2003, for an URL from which to download the latest application. 1 Connect your 700 Color Computer to your desktop computer via an ActiveSync cable or IrDA. 2 Wait for a Connected message to appear in the Microsoft ActiveSync application to signal a connection to the 700 Series Computer. If neces-

sary, select File > Get Connected to initiate a connection. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 123 Chapter 3 Installing Applications 3 Click Explore to access the Mobile Device folder on your unit. 4 From your desktop, select Start > Windows Explorer, then browse the C:\Intermec\700C Mgmt Tools\CabFiles path for any CAB files needed for your 700 Color Computer. Select the appropriate file, right-

click the file for a pop-up menu, then select Copy. 5 Within the Mobile Device directory, go to the directory where you want the files located on the 700 Color Computer, do a right-click for a pop-up menu, then select Paste. 6 When all of the files are pasted, perform a warm-boot on the 700 Color Computer. When the computer reboots, wait for the LED on the top left of your keypad to stop blinking. Tap Start > Programs > File Explorer to locate the newly copied executable files, then tap these files to activate their utilities. Using the FTP Server The 700 Color Computer has a built-in FTP Server that connects to a net-

work via Ethernet, 802.11b, or WAN (Wireless Access Network). This allows connections to the 700 Color Computer to perform file transfers or computer management functions. Another benefit is you can create FTP scripts to automate the process of copying files to the 700 Color Comput-

er. This option is good for when a large number of 700 Color Computers need updating. See Chapter 7, Programming, for more information. Using a Storage Card Use the following steps to install an application using a storage card:

Copying to a CompactFlash Card Note: These instructions do not apply to the 730 Computer. 1 Suspend the 700 Color Computer and remove its CompactFlash drive, which holds a SanDisk CompactFlash storage card. 2 Using a CompactFlash Adapter card, place the CompactFlash drive in your desktop PC card drive. 3 Create a subdirectory on the PCMCIA CompactFlash drive in which to store your application. 4 Use the CEImager application to add the autorun system to the storage card. See the Software Tools Users Manual to learn about CEImager. 5 Copy your application, data files, and all required DLLs and drivers to the subdirectory created on the CompactFlash drive. 6 Add your application to the AUTOUSER.DAT file on the

\Storage Card\2577 directory with the following statement:

RUN=\<your directory>\<yourapp.exe>

where your directory is the directory on the CompactFlash storage card where the application was installed, and yourapp.exe is the name of your application. Finish the RUN= statement with a carriage return line-

feed combination. There may be multiple run statements in the file. 124 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 3 Installing Applications 7 Remove the CompactFlash card from your desktop and reinstall it into the 700 Color Computer. 8 Warm-boot the 700 Color Computer to add these files to the Compact-

Flash storage card. If the AUTOUSER.DAT file is found and the RUN= statement is cor-

rect, the task manager launches and executes your program on startup. Copying to a Secure Digital Storage Card 1 Suspend the 700 Color Computer and remove its Secure Digital drive, which holds a Secure Digital storage card. 2 Using a Secure Digital Adapter card, place the Secure Digital drive in your desktop PC card drive. 3 Create a subdirectory on the PCMCIA Secure Digital drive in which to store your application. 4 Use the CEImager application to add the autorun system to the storage card. See the Software Tools Users Manual to learn about CEImager. 5 Copy your application, data files, and all required DLLs and drivers to the subdirectory created on the Secure Digital drive. 6 Add your application to the AUTOUSER.DAT file on the

\SDMMC Disk\2577 directory with the following statement:

RUN=\<your directory>\<yourapp.exe>

where your directory is the directory on the Secure Digital storage card where the application was installed, and yourapp.exe is the name of your application. Finish the RUN= statement with a carriage return line-

feed combination. There may be multiple run statements in the file. 7 Remove the Secure Digital card from your desktop and reinstall it into the 700 Color Computer. 8 Warm-boot the 700 Color Computer to add these files to the Secure Digital storage card. If the AUTOUSER.DAT file is found and the RUN= statement is cor-

rect, the task manager launches and executes your program on startup. Updating the System Software You can use the Intermec Developers Library CD to reinstall or update the operating system software on the 700 Color Computer. For more informa-

tion, contact your Intermec representative. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 125 Chapter 3 Installing Applications Application Migration Note: These instructions assume that the 700 Color Management Tools portion of the Intermec Developers Library CD was installed on your desk-

top and that a storage card was added to the base configuration of the 700 Color Computer. Do the following required steps to ensure that CAB files are restored, ap-

plications automatically start, and registry is restored on cold-boot:

1 From your desktop, double-click the Intermec CE Imager desktop icon to access the Intermec CEImager application. If this icon is not on your desktop, then double-click the CEIMAGER.EXE executable from the C:\Intermec\700C Mgmt Tools\Tools\CEImager folder. 2 Click Default under Components List to activate the components. 3 Click (+) to expand the AutoRun System component, click (+) to ex-

pand the Destination Media option, then select either the CompactFlash Card option or the Secure Digital Card option. Do not select both storage cards, as the AutoRun files copied will work for one stor-

age card, but not work on the other storage card. Note: The 730 Computer does not support CompactFlash storage cards. 4 Click Install to install the AUTORUN files onto the storage card. 5 Create a \CabFiles folder on the storage card. Copy any CAB files that are to be extracted on every startup into this folder. 126 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 3 Installing Applications 6 In the \2577 directory, add your custom AUTOUSER.DAT file. See the Recovery Help for more information on how to set up an AUTOUSER.DAT file. 7 If you are using the RegFlushKey() API, the application must use a spe-

cial API to make sure the registry is written to the appropriate card; or you can use the Utilities control panel applet, as follows. See Appendix A, Configurable Settings, for more information about this applet. a From the 700 Series Computer, tap Start > Settings > the System tab

> the Utilities icon > the Registry Save tab. b Tap Enable Registry Storage to save the registry in the Flash File Sys-

tem (PSM) via the \Flash_File_Store\Registry path. c Tap ok to save your entry and exit the Utilities control panel applet. 700 Color and 700CXL Screens 730 Screen 8 Remove the storage card from the desktop PC and install the card into the 700 Color Computer. 9 Perform a cold-boot on the 700 Color Computer. Files automatically install from the storage card upon reboot. Any calls to the RegFlushKey() API automatically writes the registry to the appropriate location. Note: Both the warm-boot and the cold-boot procedures, via the software API, will also flush the registry. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 127 Chapter 3 Installing Applications Migrating from a 700 Monochrome Computer As you migrate from a 700 Monochrome Computer to a 700 Color Com-

puter, you need to consider the following: When converting a 700 Mono-

chrome Computer application to run on the 700 Color Computer, most APIs should work without changes. Below are a few exceptions:

S The 700 Monochrome Computer uses the \Storage Card folder for nonvolatile storage. You may need to change the application to store data onto the SDMMC Disk folder instead of the \Storage Card folder if a Secure Digital storage card is present in the system. S If the application uses the RegFlushKey() API, it must first verify that the proper media is available in the system and call the special API men-

tioned in Step 7 on the previous page. S If the application is using the 700 Color switchable dock, use the IOCTL_DOCK_SWITCH value from the IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM function to set the proper port on the dock before communications. See more information about this KernelIOControl function in Chapter 7, Programming. S Some WAN radio options have changed. Review the WAN radio infor-

mation in Chapter 4, Network Support,to determine if any changes are required in your application. S Arrow and tab keys are reversed from the 700 Monochrome Computer. Keyboard remapping is available on the 700 Color Computer should you need to map these keys like that of the 700 Monochrome Comput-

er (see page 125). S Special SDKs are not needed to compile applications for the Xscale pro-

cessor. Targeting the SA1110 processor creates applications that run on the 700 Color Computer. Cabinet File Installation CAB files (short form of cabinet files) are compressed folders as defined by Microsoft. A cabinet file is a single file, usually suffixed with .CAB, that stores compressed files in a file library. A compressed file can be spread over several cabinet files. During installation, the setup application decom-

presses the files stored in a cabinet and copies them to the users system. For the 700 Color Computer, CAB files register DLLs, create shortcuts, modify registry entries, and run custom setup programs. Tap a CAB file to extract that file or place the CAB file on one of the approved storage de-

vices in the \CabFiles folder, then perform a warm-boot on the 700 Col-

or Computer. There are two methods available to extract a CAB file:

S Tap a CAB file to extract it. With this method, the CAB file is automat-

ically deleted when the extraction process is successful, unless the CAB file is set with the read-only attribute. S Use the AUTOCAB method to extract all files when a cold-boot is per-

formed on the 700 Color Computer. This method is on the Intermec Developers Library CD, see its Software Tools Users Manual for informa-

tion. 128 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 4 Network Support The 700 Series Color Mobile Computer can integrate up to three radios in a single unit, and automatically installs the appropriate software for radio use when the unit is powered on. The Intermec CORE (Common Object Resource Environment) applica-

tion, which provides a framework for various modules that let you config-

ure and manage your Intermec products, defaults to the most recently used module. If a module is not yet used or set, CORE defaults to the first module as listed alphabetically. The following communication options on the 700 Series Computer pro-

vide wired and wireless connectivity:

S Onboard wired Ethernet (standard on 700 Color and 700CXL Comput-

ers, not available on 730 Computers) S Wireless Local Area Network (standard on 730 Computers) This 802.11b radio option provides up to 11 Mb/sec throughput. S Wireless Wide Area Network (not available on 730 Computers) Includes support for GSM/GPRS and CDMA/1xRTT radios. S Wireless Personal Area Network This allows for cable-free communications with peripheral devices, such as printers, over a ten-meter range. This compatibility is provided via a Bluetooth qualified module by Socket Communications. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 129 Chapter 4 Network Support CORE The Intermec CORE application provides a framework for various mod-

ules that let you configure and manage your Intermec products. These modules are software plug-ins that can be configuration tools, such as the 802.11b radio configuration module, or they can provide information on your environment, such as a battery life module. CORE modules are collections of specific information. Each module can display general and detailed information. Tap the General and Details tabs near the bottom to switch between general and detailed information. Note that not all modules have detailed information. CORE is built into the operating system of every 700 Color Computer. To run CORE for the first time, select Start > Programs > File Explorer, select \Flash File Store\Apps\CORE, then tap the CORE executable file. After CORE is run on the 700 Color Computer, tap Start > Programs >

Core to access this application henceforth. Activating CORE Install an Available Radio Module To install an available radio module onto your 700 Color Computer, tap Modules > Add/Remove, select a module from the bottom Available box, then tap Add to put the selected module in the upper Installed box. Click OK to exit the Add/Remove Modules screen. Loading a Radio Module To load or switch to another radio module installed on the 700 Color Computer, tap Modules > Choose Module, select a module from the Installed Modules box, then tap Choose to initialize and begin using that module. To learn more about this application, see its online help. Tap Start >

Programs > File Explorer and select \Flash File Store\Apps\CORE, then tap the corehelp .HTM file. 130 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Network Support Note: Once CORE is running, you can return to it by tapping its icon from the System Tray via the Today screen. Tap Start > Today > the Core three-ring icon (circled in the following illustration). 700 Color and 730 Screens 700CXL Screen Network Adapters Your 700 Color or 700CXL Computer can have up to three radios instal-

led. The default network adapter or radio is dependent on what radios are installed in your 700 Series Computer. The 730 Computer only has the 802.11b radio and wireless printing. Other radios are not supported. Below are the the network adapters that exist as of this publication. See the Developers Support web site for the latest information on network adapt-

ers for your unit. S Ethernet Communications page 132. S 802.11b Radios (802.11b Wireless LAN driver) page 133. S WWAN (Wireless WAN) page 138. S Wireless Personal Area Networking page 186. Note that the tip of the antenna attached to your 700 Color or 700CXL Computer is color-coded to identify its WWAN radio type. This does not apply to the 730 Computer. Refer to the following to determine your radio type:

S Red CDMA (non-Sprint networks) and GSM/GPRS US/Canada S White GPRS US/Canada and CDMA Sprint networks S Blue GPRS International 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 131 Chapter 4 Network Support Ethernet Communications Note: This section does not apply to the 730 Computer. Follow the steps below to start Ethernet communications on the 700 Color or 700CXL Computer. If your system does not contain an 802.11b radio, then Ethernet networking using DHCP is selected as the default. When Built-in Ethernet is selected from the NDISTRAY pop-up menu

(the Network Driver Interface Specification tray application), then the Ethernet icon shown to the left appears in the System Tray as circled in the following illustration. 700 Color and 730 Screens 700CXL Screen 132 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 802.11b Communications When Wireless 802.11 is selected via the NDISTRAY pop-up menu:

Chapter 4 Network Support the 802.11 antenna icon shown to the left appears in the system tray as circled in the following illustration. 700 Color and 730 Screens 700CXL Screen To configure 802.11b communications on the 700 Series Computer, tap Start > Settings > the System tab > Wireless Network to access the Profile Wizard for the 802.11b radio module. Go to Appendix A, Configurable Settings, for configuration information. 802.11b Radio CORE Module Note: See page 130 for information on loading this module in CORE. The 802.11b radio CORE module displays helpful information about the 802.11b radio option built into your 700 Series Computer. Note that you can configure the 802.11b radio module from this CORE application. Select Configure > Configure Intermec 802.11 CF from the bottom menu bar to access the Profile Wizard application. See Appendix A, Configurable Settings, for information about this application via the Wireless Network control panel applet. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 133 Chapter 4 Network Support General Below are descriptions and meanings for each piece of information pro-

vided via the General tab. Note that the information is listed alphabetically. Adapter MAC Identifies the MAC address for this 802.11b adapter. Antenna AP Mac Connected to Reports the connection status and to which SSID this 700 Series Computer is attached. Encryption Identifies the antenna used with the 802.11b radio: Primary, Secondary, or Diversity. Identifies the MAC address of the access point to which this 700 Series Computer is connected. Reports the encryption mode and the association mode (in parentheses). See page 375 for informa-

tion about WEP encryption. Identifies the type of network to which you are attached, either an ESS (Extended Service Set) 802.11 Station, or Ad-hoc. Provides the IP address which can be set as either DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) or statically. Indicates the speed at which a connection is made. Indicates the power status of this 802.11b profile. Identifies the radio signal strength (in dBm). Shows the transmit power (in milliwatts) at which transmissions are made. ESS IP Link Power Signal TX Power History:

This bar graph displays an active history of this radio modules quality of connections. Friendly Indicator:

This indicates the general quality of the 802.11b connection. Three filled dots indicates the best quality; two filled dots dictates good quality; one filled dot is of fair quality; and when all three dots are empty, the quality is considered poor. 134 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Network Support Details Below are descriptions and meanings for each piece of information pro-

vided via the Details tab. Note the information is listed alphabetically. Attach-Roam Cnt Includes the number of new associations made during the current session, including any found roaming. States the status of the CCX, either enabled or disabled. Identifies the preferred Service Set Identifier (SSID). Identifies the 802.1x driver installed on this 700 Series Computer. CCX Status Desired SSID Driver Name Last 5 Supp Msgs Monitors and reports the 802.1x Security Supplicant activity. Scanlist Supplicant Status Monitors the 802.1x security activity on the client: Running or Stopped. Watchdog Status Monitors the activity of the Scan List: Running or Stopped. Indicates whether the Scan List option was enabled or disabled. 700 Color Screen 730 and 700CXL Screens 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 135 Chapter 4 Network Support No Networking When No networking is selected from the NDISTRAY pop-up menu:

the disconnected icon shown to the left appears in the system tray as circled in the following illustration. Network Selection APIs The Network Selection APIs change the network adapter configuration programmatically. Both drivers support the same IOCTL function num-

bers for loading and unloading the drivers. Go to Chapter 7, Program-

ming, to see the APIs. 136 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Network Support Network Connections From the 700 Series Computer, tap Start > Settings > the Connections tab > Connections > the Advanced tab > Network Card to access the net-

work connections for this unit. Make the changes necessary for your net-

work, then tap ok when finished. 700 Color Screen 730 Screen 700CXL Screen Note: Built-In Ethernet (10Mbps) is for Ethernet, the 802.11b Wire-

less LAN is for 802.11b radios on 750 Computers, and the 802.11b PRISM Wireless LAN is for 802.11b radios on 730 and 700CXL Com-

puters. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 137 Chapter 4 Network Support WWAN Radio Options Note: This section does not apply to the 730 Computer. Go to the following pages to learn more about your radio module:

S CDMA/1xRTT radio module (see below) S GSM/GPRS radio module (page 169) CDMA/1xRTT Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) is a form of wide area wireless communications. 1XRTT supports up to 144 KB per second packet data transmission and doubles the voice capacity of current generation CDMA networks. The WAN radio CORE module displays helpful information about the CDMA/1xRTT radio option built into your 700 Series Computer. WAN Monitor General Note: See page 130 for information on loading this module in CORE. Below are descriptions and meanings for each piece of information pro-

vided via the General tab. Note that the information is listed alphabetically. Activated f/w Network Type On Phone Number Radio ESN Registered on home network RSSI Serial Status Verizon Network Indicates whether the ESN on this unit was activated by your service provider. Note a decimal version of your ESN is on the Details page. Identifies the firmware version, if available. The network type which would list CDMA-1XRTT. Indicates when activation was provided by your service provider. Identifies the telephone number (or MDN) assigned to the WAN Module installed in your unit. Lists the Electronic Serial Number (ESN) assigned to this radio module or Unavailable if a number cannot be read from the radio. This number is required for activation. You must provide this number to your service provider, such as Sprint, Verizon, Bell Mobility, etc., for activation. If the WAN radio module has registered with a service provider network, then one of the follow-

ing will appear:

S Registered on home network: Radio module is registered on its home network. S Registered on roamed network: Radio module registered on another service providers network. S Radio Not Registered: There is no network within range of this radio module. Displays the Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) frequency or lists Unavailable if there is no signal or the signal cannot be retrieved from the radio module. Indicates whether serial communications passed (Serial com OK) or failed (Serial com FAIL) in its last transaction. A status of Serial com FAIL typically indicates that the 700 Series Com-

puter is unable to establish communication with the radio module installed within. Identifies your network service provider. History:

This bar graph displays an active history of this radio modules quality of connections. 138 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Network Support Friendly Indicator:

Usually indicates the signal strength for this radio module. Three filled dots indicate a high quality or strong signal. Three empty dots indicate that the signal is out of range or there is no signal detected. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 139 Chapter 4 Network Support WAN Monitor Details Note: See page 130 for information on loading this module in CORE. Below are descriptions and meanings for each piece of information pro-

vided via the Details tab. Most of this is similar to what is shown under the General tab. Note that the information is listed alphabetically. ESN Firmware Rev Firmware Type Hardware Rev IMSI/MIN Manufacturer MDN Model Phone Number PRI Version Radio Temp Rx Tx Lists the Electronic Serial Number (ESN) assigned to this radio module or Unavailable if a num-

ber cannot be read from the radio. This number is required for activation. You must provide this number to your service provider, such as Sprint, Verizon, Bell Mobility, etc., for activation. Note that both the hex version and the decimal version of your ESN is provided. Identifies the firmware version, if available. Identifies the type of firmware installed in the WAN radio module. It should match the carrier you are using as your network provider. Identifies the hardware revision of the WAN radio module installed in your unit. Shows the IMSI (International Mobile Subscriber Identity) number assigned to the Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) card installed in this 700 Series Computer. Lists the name of the manufacturer that developed this radio module, such as Sierra Wireless. Shows the MDN (Mobile Directory Number) or DN (Directory Number) the number that identifies the account tied to your device. You can consider this the phone number. Note that the MDN and IMSI/MIN numbers can be the same. Lists the product name for this radio module, such as Model 72. Identifies the telephone assigned to the WAN radio module. Provides the version number of the Preferred Roaming List (PRL). Identifies the temperature of the radio module, or lists Unavailable degrees if no information or temperature cannot be measured.

(abbreviation for receive) Indicates the number of bytes received over the WAN connection since the CORE WAN Module was started.

(abbreviation for transmit) Indicates the number of bytes received over the WAN connection since the CORE WAN Module was started. 140 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Network Support CDMA Radio Set Up Note: Set up and provision information is also available in the 700 Color CDMA Radio Setup Quick Start Guide P/N: 962-054-063. This tells you how to set up your CDMA radio in your 760 Computer. Below are terms to familiarize you with CDMA radio technology:

Activation Data Provisioning The process of programming the radio with the lock code (MSL) and phone number (MIN) to allow it to communicate on the providers network. Once activation is complete you can make voice calls (if enabled by the carrier) with the mobile computer. The process of activating the ability for the CDMA radio to establish data connections, such as connecting to the Internet. The CDMA radio makes data connection only after it is activated and data provisioned. NID (Network ID) A numeric value programmed into the CDMA radio at the factory or during the activation SID (System ID) process. Your carrier may or may not use this value, but your carrier may provide this for ac-

tivation purposes. A numeric value programmed into the CDMA radio at the factory or during the activation process. This number is used by your carrier to determine if the radio belongs to its CDMA network. Your carrier may provide this number for activation purposes. Note: Descriptions in this chapter are for Sprint PCS, Bell Mobility, Te-

lus, and Verizon Networks versions of the SB555 Watcher program. Oth-

er carriers may be added pending regulatory and carrier approval. Copying CDMA Radio Module CAB Files from Intermec Web Site Copy CAB files from the Intermec web site at http://www.intermec.com onto your desktop. Note that this is subject to change. 1 Select Service & Support > Developers Support from the blue naviga-

tion bar on the Intermec home page. 2 Select 700 Color Support from the Developers Support navigation co-

lumn on the left side of the screen. 3 Select Downloads from beneath the 700 Color Support selection in the Developers Support navigation column on the left side of the screen. 4 Select WWAN from the center of the screen, beneath the Downloads title. 5 From beneath the Sierra Wireless Watcher Application title, down-

load any of the CAB files shown, then choose your carrier CAB files. Intermec recommends two methods with which to load these CAB files onto your 760 Computer: via the Microsoft ActiveSync application (next paragraph) or via a CompactFlash or Secure Digital storage card (next page). See Chapter 3, Installing Applications, for more information about these methods. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 141 Chapter 4 Network Support Via Microsoft ActiveSync You can transfer files from your desktop to your 760 Computer via Micro-

soft ActiveSync. See Chapter 2, Windows Mobile 2003 for more infor-

mation about ActiveSync. 1 Obtain software from the Intermec web site as described earlier. Down-

load the software to any location on your 760 Computer, such as the Temp folder via the My Device root location. 2 Tap the carrier CAB file to install the application. 3 Go to Finishing the Installation on page 143. Via a CompactFlash or Secure Digital Storage Card Note: These instructions are based on default locations. You can change the location to which to copy your CAB files. 1 Make sure the Registry Restore feature on your 760 Computer is dis-

abled. Select Start > Settings > the System tab. Tap the Utilities desk-

top icon, then the Registry Save tab. Clear the Enable Registry Save box. 2 Copy the CAB files for your carrier to your CompactFlash or Secure Digital storage card after downloading it from the web site. 3 Cold-boot your 760 Computer. Remove the battery pack and press the reset button in the bottom of the battery compartment. 4 Go through the normal getting started steps detailed in your 700 Color CDMA Radio Setup Quick Start Guide. 5 Install the CompactFlash or Secure Digital memory card into the card slot in your 760 Computer. Note that if you do not want the CAB files erased after installation, set the CAB file attributes to read-only after copy-

ing them to the storage card. 6 From the 760 Computer, tap Start > Programs > the File Explorer icon. 142 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Network Support 7 Tap the pull-down menu for My Documents and tap the My Device root location. 8 If you are using a CompactFlash storage card, tap Storage Card. If you are using an Secure Digital storage card, tap SDMMC Disk. 9 Scroll down, then tap the Sprint Watcher CAB file to install the ap-

plication. 10 Go to Finishing the Installation in the next paragraph. Finishing the Installation Do the following to run the SB555 Watcher application. Be sure to do step 1 as it is important to perform a warm-boot on your 760 Computer. Upon restart, the Watcher application sets up on the 760 Computer for activation. 1 Press and hold down the I button on your 760 Computer for about 12 seconds to warm start the terminal. 2 Tap Start > Programs > the Watcher icon. 3 Tap Yes, I accept to accept the license agreement, then tap OK to con-

tinue. Note that this license agreement does not appear again after this installation. 4 Tap OK for the 760 Computer to perform a warm-boot and complete the installation. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 143 Chapter 4 Network Support Activation Note: Set the date and time before doing this activation. SB555 Watcher is for activation and data provisioning. Once you enable voice capability, data capability, or both depending on the carrier, remove this program from the system by cold-booting your computer. Intermec Technologies does not recommend using the SB555 Watcher program to make data and voice calls on a daily basis for these reasons:

S The SB555 Watcher application is a third-party application unaware of certain power management methods used in your 760 Computer. Therefore, the application consumes more power than necessary. S The application size consumes memory better used for your application data. The process of setting up the account with your carrier and enabling the CDMA WAN radio in your 760 Computer is called activation. The CDMA radio is pre-programmed for a specific carrier, such as Sprint, Telus, Bell Mobility, Verizon, etc.). Therefore, information about your radio should already be in your carriers database. You need to notify the carrier and set up mobile accounts for each unit you are activating. The Electronic Serial Number (ESN hex 63xxxxxx) that you need to supply to your carrier is located in two places:

S On the outside of the 760 Computer shipping box. S On the inside of the 760 Computer battery compartment. The ESN comes in both decimal and hexadecimal formats. Most carriers accept either format, but with a preference for the decimal format. You only need to provide one number to your carrier. S The decimal format consists of 11 digits, beginning with 099. S The hexadecimal format is an 8-digit number, beginning with 63. Accounts for Verizon and Sprint carriers can be set up for data only. Cana-

dian carriers (Telus and Bell Mobility) can be set for data only, voice only, or both voice and data. This is determined by your application and the services your carrier offers. After the all ESNs are provided to the carrier and the carrier has estab-

lished the accounts, you will be provided with the lock codes and tele-

phone numbers needed to complete the activation process. You use the SB555 Watcher program to accomplish this task. Be sure to write down this information for future use. Note: Ensure that you receive a spreadsheet with your order that calls out all ESNs in both decimal and hexadecimal formats. 144 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Network Support Note: Not all of the elements listed are required by all service providers. ESN of the modem Lock/Activation Code (may be termed one of the following):

S MSL Master Subsidy Lock S OTSL OneTime Subsidy Lock S SPC Service Provisioning Code S OTKSL One Time Key Subsidy Lock SID (System ID) NID (Network ID) User Name Password MIN MSD MDN Note: The activation process for your Watcher version may vary from the following steps. Thus, you may not have to do all of them. 1 Tap Start > Programs > the Watcher icon or tap the Watcher icon from the NDISTRAY via the Today screen (circled in the following illustra-

tion) to launch the SB555 Watcher program. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 145 Chapter 4 Network Support 2 The Activation Wizard should start automatically. If not, then tap Admin > Activation Wizard from the bottom of the screen. 3 Follow the screen prompts, tapping Next to move from one screen to the next. 4 When you reach the Activation screen, select Manual Activation. 5 At the appropriate screen, enter the Activation Code (OTSL, MSL, OTKSL, or SPC) provided by your carrier and tap Next. 6 Enter the phone number provided when your 760 Computer was acti-

vated and tap Next. 146 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Network Support Verizon Automated Activation Process Note: This process takes approximately 60 seconds. Using Verizon Watcher Do the following to activate Verizon on your 760 Computer:

1 After initializing the Watcher program, tap Yes, I accept to accept the license agreement, then tap OK to perform a warm-start on the 760 Computer. Note that this license agreement does not appear again after the installation. 2 Start the Watcher program again, select Automated Activation, then click Next. Note: You must be in the Verizon coverage area to activate your 760 Computer and only in the location of intended use. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 147 Chapter 4 Network Support 3 Click Next, click Next again to dial the number displayed on the screen. 4 The activation process starts automatically. 148 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Network Support 5 You will see a series of unlock codes on your screen. 6 The following illustration shows the result of a successful activation. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 149 Chapter 4 Network Support 7 Click the Connect button (circled in the following illustration) to connect to the carriers network. 8 Select Start > Internet Explorer, then choose a web site. Your unit is now successfully activated. 9 Perform a cold-boot on your 760 Computer to uninstall the Watcher application. Watcher is intended for activation purposes only. Intermec recommends using the following for establishing and maintaining con-

nection to the WAN radio. S Custom application using Intermecs WWAN Toolkit API S WWANInit demo program (see page 161) S Custom customer application using Connection Manager Interface Note: When connecting to the WAN radio via Pocket PC Connection Manager, use the 10-digit phone number@vzw3g.com for the user name (such as 1234567890@vzw3g.com) and vzw for the password. 150 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Network Support Sprint Automated Activation Process Note: Sprint PCS uses a data provisioning method termed IOTA (Internet Over The Air) to complete its activation and data enablement. The follow-

ing steps detail how to properly activate and data provision your 760 Computer. Do the following to set up activation:

1 Provide Sprint with your ESN, rate plan, and account information. 2 Sprint provides you with the following for each ESN:

S MDN, such as 214-555-5555 S MSID, such as 214-555-5555 S MSL/OTKSL (Activation Code), such as 945614 S NAI (Network Access Identifier), such as the following:

CustomerNameo103@sprintpcs.com You must use a Secure Digital storage card with only the SPRINT_WATCHER.CAB file in the \SDMMC/Cabfiles directory. Note: Other CAB files in the SDMMC/Cabfiles directory may cause problems with testing remove or uninstall these before proceeding. You need at least 80% (4 of 5 bars) CDMA signal strength for a successful over-the-air activation. Download and Activate Sprint Watcher 1 Make sure the Registry Restore feature on your 760 Computer is dis-

abled. Select Start > Settings > the System tab. Tap the Utilities desk-

top icon, then the Registry Save tab. Clear the Enable Registry Save box. 2 Perform a cold-boot on your 760 Computer, then go through the nor-

mal Pocket PC set-up (i.e. Align Screen etc.). 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 151 Chapter 4 Network Support 3 Important! Set the Date and Time. 4 Tap the SPRINT_WATCHER.CAB file to perform the installation. 5 Perform a warm-boot on your 760 Computer to load the CAB file. 6 From the Today screen, tap the LAN Network icon in the System Tray

(circled in the following illustration). 7 In the NDISTRAY pop-up menu (the Network Driver Interface Speci-

fication tray application), select No Networking and Auto FTP Off. Tap anywhere on the screen to close the menu. 152 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Network Support 8 Tap Start > Programs > the Watcher icon or tap the Watcher icon from the NDISTRAY via the Today screen (circled in the following illustra-

tion) to launch the SB555 Watcher program. 9 Tap Yes, I accept to accept the license agreement, then tap OK to con-

tinue. Note that this license agreement does not appear again after this installation. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 153 Chapter 4 Network Support Tap OK for the 760 Computer to perform a warm-boot and complete the installation. Using Sprint Watcher Before you start using the Sprint Watcher application, make sure you match the correct ESN with each 760 Computer and that you have at least 80% CDMA signal strength. 1 Tap Start > Programs > the Watcher icon or tap the Watcher icon from the NDISTRAY via the Today screen (circled in the following illustra-

tion) to launch the SB555 Watcher program. 154 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Network Support 2 If your 760 Computer was not previously activated, Watcher automati-

cally starts the Activation Wizard. Otherwise, select Manual Activation to continue. 3 Enter the MSL or lock code received from Sprint. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 155 Chapter 4 Network Support 4 Enter the phone number (MIN) and MSID received from Sprint. These numbers may be the same. 5 After entering the phone number and MSID, the modem resets. Watch-

er displays the following two screens:

Note: If the searching for SB555 screen does not proceed to the next screen after 30-40 seconds, perform a warm-boot on your 760 Comput-

er, then restart the Watcher program. 156 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Network Support Data Provisioning At this point, the activation on the Sprint network is complete. It is rec-

ommended by Sprint to wait before you launch data provisioning to allow time for the activation to propagate through your Sprint network. Before you manually launch data provisioning, wait at least 30 minutes. In some cases, you may have to wait up to two hours. 1 If Data Provisioning does not start automatically, select Admin > Data Provisioning from the bottom menu bar. 2 Tap Yes to proceed with data provisioning. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 157 Chapter 4 Network Support Activation over the air typically takes 120 minutes. If data provisioning fails, do the following:

S If Data Provisioning fails and the message could not prepare data services, please contact Sprint displays, retry the Data Provisioning step by tapping the Admin menu icon at the bottom of the Watcher screen. Select Data Provi-

sioning... and answer yes to the request. S If after several attempts to complete the Data Provisioning over the air, it may be necessary to manually enter the data activation method. S Manual activation is beyond the scope of this guide, therefore, go to Intermec Knowledge Central (http://www.intermec.com, then select Service & Support

> Knowledge Central) The article (number 5749) is titled How to Manually Activate a Sprint CDMA WAN Radio in the 760 Device. 158 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Network Support 3 The following screen appears once data provisioning is complete:

4 Test the data connection by tapping on the connect button to make a data connection to the network. Watcher progresses through the follow-

ing two screens. Once you see the second screen you know that your mobile computer has successfully connected to the 1XRTT network. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 159 Chapter 4 Network Support 5 Select Start > Internet Explorer, then choose a web site. Your unit is now successfully activated. Perform a cold-boot on your 760 Computer to uninstall the Watcher ap-

plication. Watcher is intended for activation purposes only. Intermec rec-

ommends using the following for establishing and maintaining connection to the WAN radio. S Custom application using Intermecs WWAN Toolkit API S WWANInit demo program (see page 161) S Custom customer application using Connection Manager Interface 160 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Network Support Telus and Bell Mobility Activation Activation of Bell Mobility and Telus are similar to the first portion of the Sprint activation process. Follow the instructions for manual activation using the Bell Mobility Watcher.CAB or Telus Watcher.CAB file to install the applicable application. Enter the activation lock codes and phone num-

bers as requested. Username, Password, SID Information Username Password SID Bell Mobility 10 digit phone number@1xbell.ca Original Voice Mail system pass-

word (usually a 4 digit number) This is available from the activat-

ing organization. 16420 Telus 10-digit phone number@1x.telusmobility.com The 11-digit ESN printed inside the 760 Computer battery compartment, begins with 099. 16422 WWANInit Demo Program Make sure your 760 Computer with CDMA card is activated and data provisioned. You must use a Secure Digital storage card with only the WWANINITxxxxx.CAB file in the SDMMC/Cabfiles directory, where xxxxx is the version number. You can download this CAB file from the Intermec web site, via the fol-

lowing:

1 Select Service & Support > Developers Support from the blue naviga-

tion bar on the Intermec home page. 2 Select 700 Color Support from the Developers Support navigation co-

lumn on the left side of the screen. 3 Select Downloads from beneath the 700 Color Support selection in the Developers Support navigation column on the left side of the screen. 4 Under the Tools category, scroll down to WWANInit xxx Connection Program-WWAN Radios, then click Download Note: Other CAB files in the SDMMC/Cabfiles directory may cause problems with testing remove or uninstall these before proceeding. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 161 Chapter 4 Network Support Set Up the WWANInit Companion Program Do the following to set up the WWANInit xxx Companion Program:

1 Make sure the Registry Restore feature on your 760 Computer is dis-

abled. Select Start > Settings > the System tab. Tap the Utilities desk-

top icon, then the Registry Save tab. Clear the Enable Registry Save box. 2 Perform a cold-boot on your 760 Computer, then go through the nor-

mal Pocket PC set-up (i.e. Align Screen etc.). 3 Tap the WWANINITxxxxx.CAB file to perform the installation. 4 Perform a warm-boot on the 760 Computer. 5 From the Today screen, tap the Ethernet icon in the System Tray

(circled in the following illustration). 162 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Network Support 6 In the NDISTRAY pop-up menu (the Network Driver Interface Speci-

fication tray application), select No Networking and Auto FTP Off. Tap anywhere on the screen to close the menu. Create a New Connection Note: This does not apply to the 700CXL Computer. 1 Select Start > Settings > the Connections tab > Connetions. Under My ISP, tap Add a new modem connection. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 163 Chapter 4 Network Support 2 Enter 1XRTT as the name for the connection, select WANA on COM4 from the Select a modem drop-down list, then tap Next. 3 Enter #777 for the phone number as it should be dialed, then tap Next to continue. Select Start > Help for more information or tap use dialing rules to make modifications. Note that this screen may vary based on your dialing rules. 164 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Network Support 4 Tap Advanced to continue. 5 Tap the General tab, select 115200 from the Baud rate drop-down list, enter &C2 without the quotes in the Extra dial-string modem commands field, then tap ok to return to the 1xRTT settings. 6 Tap Finish to return to the Connections page. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 165 Chapter 4 Network Support Using the WWANInit Companion Program Do the following to run the WWANInit application:

1 From the Today screen, tap the WAN Network icon in the System Tray (circled in the following illustration) or select Start > WWANInit to start the application. 2 Tap Modem On. Let it step through process (usually about 30 seconds) until Modem Ready for use appears. 3 Tap Connect. 4 For Telus, Bell Mobility, and Verizon carriers, click Save password. For Sprint carriers, leave the field blank. 166 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Network Support Username and Password Information Username Password Verizon 10-digit phone number@vzw3g.com vzw Bell Mobility 10 digit phone number@1xbell.ca Original Voice Mail system pass-

word (usually a 4 digit number) This is available from the activat-

ing organization. Telus 10-digit phone number@1x.telusmobility.com The 11-digit ESN printed inside the 760 Computer battery compartment, begins with 099. 5 Click OK. You should see a pop-up message with Connecting to my connectionthen connected. 6 Tap Setup, then the Backup tab. Choose the location of the backup file, then tap Backup Pocket PC connection settings now. 7 Tap ok when prompted. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 167 Chapter 4 Network Support 8 Select Start > Internet Explorer, then tap the large MSN Mobile link. 9 Tap the small connect to MSN Mobile link. After about 20 seconds, you should connect to the web. 168 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Network Support GSM/GPRS GSM (Global System for Mobile communications) is an open, nonpro-

prietary wireless system. GPRS (General Packet Radio Service) is the high-

speed data evolution of GSM that supports Internet Protocol (IP), enab-

ling access to Internet and intranet content and applications from GPRS wireless devices. Note: See page 130 for information on loading this module in CORE. WAN Monitor General The WAN Monitor CORE module displays helpful information about the GSM/GPRS radio option built into your 700 Series Computer. The fol-

lowing illustrations are for a GSM/GPRS Siemens MC45 radio. Below are descriptions and meanings for each piece of information pro-

vided via the General tab. Note that the information is listed alphabetically. ATT Wireless Network Baud BER f/w h/w Network Type Phone Number Radio ESN Registered on home network RSSI Serial Status Lists the name of the service providing the network support. Identifies the frequency bandwidth used by the radio module.

(Bit Error Rate) The average number of bits transmitted in error. Identifies the firmware version, if available. Identifies the hardware version, if available. The network type which would list GSM-GPRS. Identifies the telephone number assigned to the SIM card. The Electronic Serial Number (ESN) assigned to this radio module. Unavailable appears if a number cannot be read from the radio. If the WAN radio module has registered with a service provider network, then one of the follow-

ing will appear:

S Registered on home network: Radio module is registered on its home network. S Registered on roamed network: Radio module registered on another service providers network. S Radio Not Registered: There is no network within range of this radio module. Displays the Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) frequency or lists Unavailable if there is no signal or the signal cannot be retrieved from the radio module. Indicates whether serial communications passed (Serial com OK) or failed (Serial com FAIL) in its last transaction. A status of Serial com FAIL typically indicates that the 700 Series Com-

puter is unable to establish communication with the radio module installed within. History:

This bar graph displays an active history of this radio modules quality of connections. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 169 Chapter 4 Network Support Friendly Indicator:

Usually indicates the signal strength for this radio module. Three filled dots indicate a high quality or strong signal. Three empty dots indicate that the signal is out of range or there is no signal detected. WAN Monitor Details Below are descriptions and meanings for each piece of information pro-

vided via the Details tab. Most of this is similar to what is shown under the General tab. Note that the information is listed alphabetically. Firmware Rev IMEI #

IMSI #

Manufacturer Model Net Provider RSSI SIM Status Identifies the firmware version, if available. The IMEI (International Mobile station Equipment Identity) serial number of the GSM/GPRS radio module. Shows the IMSI (International Mobile Subscriber Identity) number assigned to the SIM card installed in this 700 Series Computer. Lists the name of the manufacturer that developed this radio module, such as Siemens. Lists the product name for this radio module, such as MC45. Lists the name of the service providing the network support. Displays the RSSI frequency or lists Unavailable if there is no signal or the signal cannot be retrieved from the radio module. Identifies whether a SIM card is installed in this 700 Series Computer. 170 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Network Support PhoneUtility Note: This application is for GPRS radios only, due to E911 requirements issued by the FCC. CDMA radios no longer have voice activation. With the WAN radio module installed in your 700 Series Computer, you can send and receive telephone calls. Use the speaker on the back of the computer as your earpiece and use the connector on the bottom of the computer for your mouthpiece. Tap Start > PhoneUtility from the Today screen to access the application which will process your phone calls. Tap Exit or ok to close this application and return to the Today screen. Audio Mode Select either Handset or Speakerphone from the Audio Mode box, then do the following to send or answer a phone call:

S Tap the numbers for a phone call, using Clear to erase each digit, then tap Send to initiate the call. S Tap Answer to receive an incoming call. S Tap End to disconnect a transaction. S Drag the Vol slider up or down to adjust the speaker volume. S Drag the Mic slider up or down to adjust the microphone sensitivity. Handset Audio Mode Speakerphone Audio Mode 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 171 Chapter 4 Network Support Notification Tap Settings to set your 700 Series Computer to either ring or vibrate or do both, then tap OK or ok to return to the Audio Mode screen. If you need to adjust the audio settings, tap Advanced Audio to continue. Advanced Audio Tap ok to close the warning and continue. 172 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Network Support Drag the appropriate slider bars left or right to adjust the output and in-

put levels. Tap Defaults to return the handset or speakerphone levels to their factory defaults. Click OK or ok to return to the Notification screen. Handset Output/Input Levels Speakerphone Output/Input Levels Tap ? for more information on these level settings, then click ok or OK to return to the Output/Input Levels screen. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 173 Chapter 4 Network Support Phone Application for 700CXL Computers with GPRS Radios Note: This application is for 700CXL Computers with GPRS radios. With the WAN radio module installed in your 700CXL Computer, you can send and receive telephone calls. Use the speaker on the back of the computer as your earpiece and use the connector on the bottom of the computer for your mouthpiece. 174 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Network Support Phone Application for 700CXL Computers with CDMA Radios Note: This application is for 700CXL Computers with CDMA radios. With the WAN radio module installed in your 700CXL Computer, you can send and receive telephone calls. Use the speaker on the back of the computer as your earpiece and use the connector on the bottom of the computer for your mouthpiece. Tap Start > Programs > the Phone desktop icon from the Today screen to access the application which will process your phone calls. Tap the Close button in the upper right corner of this application to close this application. Activation Wizard When you reboot your 700CXL Computer, if your unit is not activated to use the PCS wireless, a Activation Wizard starts up. If you wish to do this activation another time, tap Cancel to close this wizard, then tap Yes. 1 Have your activation code, phone number (MDN), and MSID infor-

mation ready before you tap Next to continue. You can get this infor-

mation from your network provider. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 175 Chapter 4 Network Support 2 Enter your activation code, then tap Next to continue. Phone Application Tap the appropriate keys to enter a telephone number, then tap Talk to dial the number. Tap End to hang up the phone. Tap this to backspace one digit. Tap this to dial the phone number shown above the keypad. Tap this to select a previously dialed number. Tap this to view your previous calls. Tap this to hang up your current call. Tap this toggle the mute option. Tap this to access the Contacts application. Tap this to access the Notes application. 176 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Network Support Speed Dial Tap Speed Dial to select a telephone number with which the 700CXL Computer is to dial automatically. To add to this list, use the Contacts application. See Chapter 2, Windows Mobile 2003, for more informa-

tion. Call History Tap Call History to note the telephone numbers that were previously dialed from this 700CXL Computer. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 177 Chapter 4 Network Support Tools Use the Tools menu to send a voice mail, access the Activation Wizard, send an SMS email message, or other configurations. Select Start > Help for more online information about most of these features. S Tap Tools > Voice Mail to call and leave a voice message. S Tap Tools > Activation Wizard to access the wizard with which to acti-

vate your 700CXL Computer. Be sure to have an activation code, a phone number, and MSID information ready. See page 175 for instruc-

tions in using this wizard. S Tap Tools > Send SMS tab to access the Inbox application and send an SMS (Short Messaging Service) message. Be sure to have an SMS num-

ber ready to send the message this is usually the mobile phone num-

ber. See Chapter 2, Windows Mobile 2003, for information about the Inbox application. 178 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Network Support S Tap Tools > Options > the Phone tab to customize your phone settings such as the ring type and ring tone to use for incoming calls, and the keypad tone to use when entering phone numbers. Tap Other Settings to go to the Sounds & Notifications control panel applet. S Tap Tools > Options > the Location tab to toggle between letting your location be visible for everyone to detect and hiding your location from everyone except 911. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 179 Chapter 4 Network Support S Tap Tools > Options > the Data tab to either reset your connection settings for PCS Vision or update your PCS Vision profile. S Tap Tools > Options > the System tab to toggle between automatic or Sprint roaming and to enable the Call Guard alert when roaming. 180 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Network Support S Tap Tools > Options > the Phone Info tab to view the phone settings. AT Command Interface This interface specification is based on the following recommendation:

S ETSI GSM 07.05:

European Digital Cellular Telecommunication System (phase 2) Use of DTE-DCE interface for Short message and cell broadcast service. S ETSI GSM 07.07:

European Digital Cellular Telecommunication System (phase 2) AT command set for GSM Mobile Equipment. S ITU-T Recommendation V.25 ter Serial asynchronous automatic dialing and control. Note: You need the Adobe Acrobat Reader application to view a PDF do-

cument. Go to http://www.adobe.com/prodindex/acrobat/readstep.html to install or download the latest Adobe Acrobat Reader. Command Set for Sierra Wireless SB555 Use the AT command interface from Sierra Wireless to program the CDMA/1xRTT SB555 radio module. Documentation for this interface is available via the following URL. Click the General AT command refer-

ence link for a PDF document, which is 680 KB in size. Note that this URL is subject to change. http://www.sierrawireless.com/ProductsOrdering/embedded_docs.html Command Set for Siemens MC45 Use the MC45 AT command interface from Siemens AG to program the GPRS/GSM MC45 radio module. The MC45 Siemens Cellular Engine AT Command Set is available either from Intermec Technologies or from Siemens AG. Contact either your Intermec representative or the Siemens AG support personnel at the following URL for more information. Note this URL is subject to change. http://www.siemens-mobile.com/btob/CDA/presentation/

ap_btob_cda_presentation_frontdoor/0,2950,12,FF.html 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 181 Chapter 4 Network Support Testing the AT Commands Note: This does not apply to the 700CXL Computer. These commands can be sent to either WAN radio by setting up a dial-up networking connection to COM4. Do the following to initiate this con-

nection and test these commands to your radio:

1 From the 700 Series Computer, select Start > Settings > the Connections tab > Connections. Under My ISP, tap Add a new modem connection. 2 Enter a name for the connection, select WANA on COM4 from the Select a modem drop-down list, then tap Next to continue. 182 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Network Support 3 Enter a phone number as it should be dialed, then tap Next to continue. Select Start > Help for more information or tap use dialing rules to make modifications. Note that this screen may vary based on your dialing rules. 4 Tap Advanced to continue. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 183 Chapter 4 Network Support 5 Select 115200 from the Baud rate drop-down list via the General page. 6 Tap the Port Settings tab, check Enter dialing commands manually, then tap ok, then Finish to return to the Connections screen. 184 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Network Support 7 Press and hold the new connection for a pop-up menu, then tap Connect to initiate the connection. 8 Wait about ten seconds for the Network Log On screen, then tap OK. Note: You do not need to enter any information within the Network Log On screen. Use either the onscreen keyboard, or press the keys to type any of the AT commands provided. Press or tap Enter to send each command. The re-

sults of each command sent will print onscreen. Note that each AT com-

mand must start with the at characters. S To see what you typed onscreen, type ate1 to initiate the AT Echo command, then press Enter. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 185 Chapter 4 Network Support Wireless Personal Area Networking Bluetooth is the name given to a technology standard using short-range radio links, intended to replace the cables connecting portable and fixed electronic devices. The standard defines a uniform structure for a wide range of devices to communicate with each other, with minimal user ef-

fort. Its key features are robustness, low complexity, low power, and low cost. The technology also offers wireless access to LANs, the mobile phone network, and the internet for a host of home appliances and portable hand-held interfaces. Documentation Information about additional Bluetooth software is in the Wireless Print-

ing SDK and in the Wireless Printing Development Guide (on the Intermec Developers Library CD, via the \Wireless Printing SDK directory off the root). About the Application Bluetooth is not started automatically by default after a cold-boot is per-

formed. To run Bluetooth, tap Start > Settings > the Connections tab >

the Bluetooth icon. The 700 Series Computer retains the Bluetooth state when warm-boots are performed, for example:

S If Bluetooth is active, and a warm-boot was performed, the 700 Series Computer boots up with the Bluetooth state activated and Bluetooth virtual COM ports (such as printing) registered. However, you must reactivate connections, as the system does not do these automatically. S If Bluetooth is inactive, and a warm-boot was performed, the 700 Series Computer boots up with Bluetooth deactivated. Mode The default tab activates or deactivates Bluetooth. When Bluetooth is acti-

vated, the 700 Series Computer can discover and connect to remote de-

vices. 186 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Network Support Wireless Printing Use this tab to print via Bluetooth devices. Tap Device Discovery to disco-

ver (or scan) for remote Bluetooth devices. When the 700 Series Comput-

er is finished scanning, any newly discovered devices appear in the upper Devices box. Tap Clear Devices to remove the list from the Devices box. To print to a Bluetooth device, select any of the devices listed in the Devices box, then tap Connect. Once connected, the selected device moves to the lower Connected box. To view connection information or register a COM port for a device, from the lower Connected box, select a device, then tap Properties. See Properties on the next page for information. When done printing to a device, select that device in the Connected box, then tap Disconnect. This moves the device in question back to the upper Devices box. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 187 Chapter 4 Network Support Properties Select a COM Port from the Choose COM Port box to register for this device, then check Enable Wireless Printing to complete the COM port registration. To change your COM port selection, clear (uncheck) the En-

able Wireless Printing box, select a new COM port, then check Enable Wireless Printing again. COM ports that already are in use are grayed out. When you enable Wireless Printing, a status message is shown near the bottom of the screen to confirm your action. To print a test page to your printer, tap Print Test Page. Tap ok to return to the Wireless Printing page. 188 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Network Support File Transfer Use this page to enable your unit to receive files from another Bluetooth device, or from any device that supports this function. From this point, this transfer is similar to an IrDA file transfer. To transfer a file, tap Start > Programs > File Explorer and locate the file to transfer. Press and hold on the file for a pop-up menu, then select Beam File. The system searches for a list of Bluetooth devices that will accept a con-

nection from your unit. When the list is complete, tap on a device to which to send the file. Note: in some cases, the user of the target device has to accept the file before it is transmitted. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 189 Chapter 4 Network Support AutoIP/DHCP HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Comm\LAN9001\TcpIp HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Comm\NETWLAN1\TcpIp Automatic Private IP Addressing (AutoIP) is enabled by default in Windows Mobile 2003. To remain compatible with other versions of Pocket PC, this setting needs to be enabled. You can configure the registry settings in the following to set the required AutoIP/DHCP behavior:

S For Ethernet:

S Fot 802.11b:

Other registry keys that can modify the behavior of AutoIP are as follows. You can find the appropriate settings and behavior of each of these keys in Microsoft Help. S AutoInterval S AutoMask S AutoSubnet S AutoIP S AutoSeed When a TCP/IP client cannot find a DHCP server, it generates an AutoIP address from the 169.254.xxx.xxx block. The client then tries to check for a DHCP server every 300 seconds (5 minutes) and if a DHCP server is found, the client drops the AutoIP address and uses the address from the DHCP server. In the MSDN Windows CE documentation available out on the Micro-

soft Developer Network web site (http://www.msdn.com), see Automatic Client Configuration for more information on AutoIP. To disable AutoIP, set the AutoCfg registry entry to 0. If a DHCP serv-

er cannot be found, instead of using AutoIP, the system will display the Unable to obtain a server assigned IP address message. Note: If AutoIP is defined using CAB files, the EnableDHCP registry key must also be defined and set to 1 before the system will attempt to ob-

tain a DHCP address. Note: To extend the number of attempts that a DHCP client makes to get a DHCP address, use the DhcpRetryDialogue and DhcpMaxRetry registry settings. Note: Change the AutoInterval registry key value to make the client retry more often to obtain a DHCP address. 190 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual SNMP Configuration on the 700 Series Computer Chapter 4 Network Support In short, SNMP is an application-layer protocol that facilitates the ex-

change of management information between network devices. The 700 Series Computer is such an SNMP-enabled device. Use SNMP to control and configure the 700 Series Computer anywhere on an SNMP-enabled network. The 700 Series Computer supports four proprietary Management Infor-

mation Bases (MIBs) and Intermec Technologies provides SNMP support for MIB-II through seven read-only MIB-II (RFC1213-MIB) Object Identifiers (OIDs). Note: You can only query these seven OIDs through an SNMP manage-

ment station. Management Information Base The Management Information Base is a database that contains information about the elements to be managed. The information identifies the manage-

ment element and specifies its type and access mode (Read-Only, Read-

Write). MIBs are written in ASN.1 (Abstract Syntax Notation.1) a ma-

chine independent data definition language. Note: Elements to be managed are represented by objects. The MIB is a structured collection of such objects. You will find the following MIB files either in the 700 Color Management Tools portion of the Intermec Developers Library CD or on the web via http://www.intermec.com:

S INTERMEC.MIB Defines the root of the Intermec MIB tree. S ITCADC.MIB Defines objects for Automated Data Collection (ADC), such as bar code symbologies. S ITCSNMP.MIB Defines objects for Intermec SNMP parameters and security methods, such as an SNMP security IP address. S ITCTERMINAL.MIB Defines objects for 700 Series parameters, such as key clicks. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 191 Chapter 4 Network Support Object Identifiers Each object has a unique identifier called an OID, which consist of a se-

quence of integer values represented in dot notation. Objects are stored in a tree structure and OIDs are assigned based on the position of the object in the tree. For example, the internet OID is equal to 1.3.6.1. Seven MIB OIDs are shown in the following table:

MIB Object Identifiers MIB-II Item OID ifNumber 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.1.0 Group or Table Interfaces Group Description Indicates the number of adapters present in the system. For the 700 Series Computer, if one adapter is present in the system, then ifNum-

ber = 1 and ifIndex = 1. ifIndex 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.ifIndex Interfaces Table (ifTable) A unique value for each interface. 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.2.ifIndex Interfaces Table (ifTable) A textual string containing informa-

tion about the interface. The value ranges between 1 and the value of ifNumber. ifDescr ifType 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.3.ifIndex IP address Table

(ipAddrTable) Interfaces Table (ifTable) An integer containing information about the type of the interface. It is equal to 1 for Other. The IP address to which this entrys addressing information pertains

(same as 700 IP address), where IP Address is the valid non-zero IP ad-

dress of the 700 Series Computer. The index value that uniquely iden-

tifies the interface to which this entry is applicable (same as ifIndex). The subnet mask associated with the IP address of this entry (same as Subnet Mask). IP address Table

(ipAddrTable) IP address Table

(ipAddrTable) ipAdEntAddr 1.3.6.1.2.1.4.20.1.1.IpAddress ipAdEntIfIndex 1.3.6.1.2.1.4.20.1.2.IpAddress ipAdEntNetMask 1.3.6.1.2.1.4.20.1.3.IpAddress Configuring with SNMP The community string allows an SNMP manager to manage the 700 Series Computer with a specified privilege level. The default read-only commu-

nity string is public and private is the default read/write community string. See the specific configuration parameter to find its OID. To config-

ure the 700 Series Computers using SNMP:

1 Configure 700 Series Computers for RF or Ethernet communications. 2 Determine the OID (Object Identifier) for the parameter to be chan-

ged. The Intermec base OID is 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963. 3 Use your SNMP management station to get and set variables that are defined in the Intermec MIBs. You can set the traps, identification, or security configuration parameters for SNMP. See Appendix A, Confi-

gurable Settings, to learn more about these parameters. 192 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 5 Printer Support The 700 Series Color Mobile Computer works with the following printers from Intermec Technologies. Contact an Intermec representative for infor-

mation about these printers. S 6820 A full-page, 80-column printer. S 6808 A 4-inch belt-mount printer. S PB20 A 2-inch belt-mount printer with a Bluetooth compatible module from Socket Communications. S 782T A 2-inch workboard printer. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 193 Chapter 5 Printer Support Printing ASCII Directly to a Port The following methods for printing using Pocket PC at this time is as fol-

lows:

S Add port drivers to print ASCII directly to the port. S Use LinePrinter ActiveX Control from the Software Developers Kit

(SDK) see the SDK Users Manual for more information. S Via wireless printing - see the Wireless Printing Development Guide on the Intermec Developers Library CD for more information. Printing directly to the port sends RAW data to the printer. The format of this data depends upon your application and the printer capabilities. You must understand the printer commands available for your specific printer. Generally, applications just send raw ASCII text to the printer. Since you are sending data to the printer from your application directly to the port you are in complete control of the printers operations. This allows you to do line printing (print one line at a time) rather than the page for-

mat printing offered by the GDI approach. It is also much faster since data does not have to be converted from one graphics format to the other (dis-

play to printer). Most Intermec printers use Epson Escape Sequences to control print format operations. These commands are available in documentation you receive with your printers or from technical support. Win32 APIs are required to print di-

rectly to the port. Directly to a Generic Serial Port To print directly to a generic serial port printer (non-Intermec printers):

S Use CreateFile() to open ports - COM1: can be opened on most de-

vices. S Use WriteFile() to send data directly to the printer. S Use CloseHandle() when you are finished printing to close the port. IrDA Printer Driver IrDA printing is only available on the certain devices and is supported di-

rectly by the Windows CE load via the IrSock API provided by the Micro-

soft Win32 API without need for additional drivers. Intermec 6804, 6805, 6806, 6808 and 6820 and other IrDA printers are supported. 194 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual NPCP Printer Driver Chapter 5 Printer Support The NPCP printer communications driver (NPCPPORT.DLL) is a Stream Device Driver built into the operating system. The driver supports only NPCP communications to and from the 6820 and 4820 printers over a selected serial port. All applications use WIN32 API functions to access the drivers. Basic op-

erations are easily implemented by applications through the CreateFile(), WriteFile(), ReadFile(), DeviceIOControl(), and CloseHandle() Win32 APIs. Operations to upgrade printer modules, perform printer diagnostics, and get printer configuration are performed largely via DeviceIOControl() functions. NPCP (Norand Portable Communications Protocol) is a proprietary protocol that provides session, network, and datalink services for Intermec mobile computers in the Intermec LAN environment used with printers and data communications. About NPCP NPCP Driver Installation and Removal Use LPT9: for the NPCP printer device and COM1 for the last parame-

ter. COM1 is the connection available via the 700 Series Computer. Applications use the RegisterDevice() function to install the driver. DeregisterDevice() uninstalls the device driver and frees memory space when the driver is not required. Use the HANDLE returned by RegisterDevice() as the parameter to DeregisterDevice(). Use the RegisterDevice() function call as demonstrated below. Specify the full path name to the driver starting at the root for the RegisterDevice() function to work properly. The last parameter to RegisterDevice() is a DWORD that represents the name of the port for the NPCP stream driver to use. Build this parameter on the stack if it is not to be paged out during the call. The first parameter LPT (Device Name) and the second parameter 9 (index), indicate the name of the registered device, such as LPT9. This is used in the CreateFile() function call. Install()

HANDLE hDevice;

TCHAR port[6];

port[0] = TCHAR(C);

port[1] = TCHAR(O);

port[2] = TCHAR(M);

port[3] = TCHAR(1);

port[4] = TCHAR(:);

port[5] = TCHAR(0);

hDevice = RegisterDevice ( (TEXT(LPT), 9, TEXT(\\STORAGE CARD\\WINDOWS\\NPCPPORT.dll), (DWORD)port);

700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 195 Chapter 5 Printer Support Opening the NPCP Driver The application opens the NPCP driver by using the CreateFile() function. The call can be implemented as follows. The first parameter LPT9: must reflect the device name and index used in the RegisterDevice() function call and will fail for any of the following reasons:

hFile = CreateFile(_T(LPT9:), GENERIC_WRITE |

GENERIC_READ, 0, NULL, OPEN_ALWAYS, FILE_ATTRIBUTE_NORMAL, NULL);

S The port associated with the device during RegisterDevice() is in use. S The NPCP device is already open. S The share mode is not set to zero. The device cannot be shared. S Access permissions are not set to GENERIC_WRITE |

GENERIC_READ. Both modes must be specified. Closing the NPCP Driver Using the CloseHandle() (hFile) function closes the NPCP driver. Where hFile is the handle returned by the CreateFile() function call. S TRUE = the device is successfully closed. S FALSE = an attempt to close NULL HANDLE or an already closed de-

vice. Reading from the NPCP Driver Reading of the NPCP printers is not supported since all responses from the printer are the result of commands sent to the printer. DeviceIoControl() functions are provided where data is to be received from the printer. Writing to the NPCP Driver All Print data can be sent to the printer using the WriteFile() function. The print data written to the driver must contain the proper printer commands for formatting. If the function returns FALSE, the NPCP error may be retrieved using IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR. See the description on the next page. 196 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 5 Printer Support NPCP Driver I/O Controls An application uses the DeviceIoControl() function to specify an printer operation to be performed. Certain I/O controls are required to bind and close communication sessions with the printer, and must be completed before any other commands to the driver can execute properly. The function returns TRUE to indicate the device successfully completed its specified I/O control operation, otherwise it returns FALSE. The following I/O control codes are defined:

#define IOCTL_NPCP_CANCEL CTL_CODE(FILE_DEVICE_SERIAL_PORT,0x400,METHOD_BUFFERED,FILE_ANY_ACCESS)

#define IOCTL_NPCP_BIND CTL_CODE(FILE_DEVICE_SERIAL_PORT,0x401,METHOD_BUFFERED,FILE_ANY_ACCESS)

#define IOCTL_NPCP_CLOSE CTL_CODE(FILE_DEVICE_SERIAL_PORT,0x402,METHOD_BUFFERED,FILE_ANY_ACCESS)

#define IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR CTL_CODE(FILE_DEVICE_SERIAL_PORT,0x403,METHOD_BUFFERED,FILE_ANY_ACCESS)

#define IOCTL_NPCP_FLUSH CTL_CODE(FILE_DEVICE_SERIAL_PORT,0x404,METHOD_BUFFERED,FILE_ANY_ACCESS)

#define IOCTL_NPCP_IOCTL CTL_CODE(FILE_DEVICE_SERIAL_PORT,0x405,METHOD_BUFFERED,FILE_ANY_ACCESS)

#define IOCTL_NPCP_PRTVER CTL_CODE(FILE_DEVICE_SERIAL_PORT,0x406,METHOD_BUFFERED,FILE_ANY_ACCESS) S IOCTL_NPCP_CANCEL This cancels all printing at the printer. It flushes the printer buffers and reinitializes the printer to its default state. No parameters are required. S IOCTL_NPCP_BIND This command is required before any data is sent or received by the printer. Once the driver is opened, the application must bind the com-

munications session with the printer before any data can be sent or re-

ceived by the printer. If an error occurs during the bind, the application may use IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR to get the current extended error code. No parameters are required. S IOCTL_NPCP_CLOSE This command closes the current session with the printer. This function always returns TRUE. No parameters are required. S IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR This command returns the extended NPCP error code in PL/N format. The word returned will contain the PL/N compatible error code in the low byte and completion flags in the high byte. If the frame that re-

turned an error was not received correctly by the printer the FRAME_NOT_ACKED bit will be set in the high byte. This operation always returns TRUE. An output buffer of at least 2 bytes is required. See NPCP Error Codes on page 199. S IOCTL_NPCP_FLUSH This command allows the application to poll the printer for errors while the report is completing the print process at the printer. If an error oc-

curs during the polling process, the operation will return FALSE and the application can get the extended error code by using IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR. No parameters are required. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 197 Chapter 5 Printer Support NPCP Printer Communications All NPCP printer communications should be based on the following flow:

1 Use CreateFile(); to open the printer driver. 2 Use IOCTL_NPCP_BIND to bind a session with the printer;

IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR to check for errors on the bind to ensure suc-

cess; and IOCTL_NPCP_CANCEL to cancel any outstanding print jobs. 3 Use IOCTL_NPCP_FLUSH to poll the printer to free up printer buff-

er resources. Use IOCTL_NPCP_FLUSH to poll the printers status. If an error is reported by the IOCTL, then use IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR to get the error and determine the correct recovery procedure. 4 Use WriteFile(); to write your data to the printer. Check for errors and that all data were written. Use IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR to get the ex-

tended error. If the error is critical in nature, use IOCTL_NPCP_CLOSE, followed by CloseFile(), to end the commu-

nications session. Start a new session, beginning with step 1 to ensure proper printing. For noncritical errors display the error and retry the operation. 5 After all data is sent to the printer, ensure that the printer continues to print the report properly by polling the printers status. Use IOCTL_NPCP_FLUSH to poll the printers status. If an error is re-

ported by the IOCTL, then use IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR to get the error and determine the correct recovery procedure. See sample code in the \700C Dev Tools\Installable Drivers\Port Drivers\Npcp\NPCPPrint\ directory for more details on printing, printer communications and error code handling. Sample Code 198 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 5 Printer Support NPCP Error Codes Call the IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR I/O control function to receive PL/N compatible error codes. Applications must decide how to act upon the data returned.

// Definition of NPCP communications Errors and Printer Errors

#define PNRDY (BYTE)102 // link not ready error

#define RXTMO (BYTE)104 // link no receive error

#define TXTMO (BYTE)106 // link no transmit error

#define BADADR (BYTE)111 // frame address error

#define GAPERR (BYTE)112 // link gap error (timeout) in receive data

#define LSRPE (BYTE)113 // frame parity error on length field

#define IFTS (BYTE)120 // session layer - invalid frame this state

#define NS_NE_VR (BYTE)121 // session layer sequence error

#define NR_NE_VS (BYTE)122 // session layer sequence error

#define MAC_CRCERR (BYTE)124 // MAC CRC error

#define RLENERR (BYTE)123 // MAC too much data received

#define FRMERR (BYTE)200 // Frame Reject

#define FRMERR_IF (BYTE)201 // Frame Reject - Invalid Frame

#define FRMERR_NR (BYTE)202 // Frame Reject - NR Mismatch

#define FRMERR_NS (BYTE)203 // Frame Reject - NS Mismatch

#define NDMERR (BYTE)204 // Normal Disconnect mode error

#define BINDERR (BYTE)210 // bind error

#define IPLDUR (BYTE)221 // invalid presentation layer response

#define HEADJAM (BYTE)222 // printer head jam

#define PAPEROUT (BYTE)223 // printer paper out

#define LOWVOLTS (BYTE)224 // printer low voltage

#define HIVOLTS (BYTE)225 // printer over voltage

#define LOWBAT (BYTE)226 // printer low battery

#define COVEROFF (BYTE)227 // printer cover off error

#define HEADFAULT (BYTE)228 // printer head short or driver short error

#define PFFAULT (BYTE)229 // paper feed motor fault.

#define FRAME_NOT_ACKED 0x8000 // frame was not received by printer and need to be resent. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 199 Chapter 5 Printer Support ONeil Printer Driver The DTR printer communications driver is a Stream Device Driver named ONEIL.DLL. All applications use WIN32 API functions to access drivers. Basic operations are easily implemented by applications through the CreateFile(), WriteFile(), DeviceIOControl() and CloseHandle() Win32 APIs. The driver supports communications to 6804DM, 6804T, 6805A, 6806, 6808, 681T, and PB20 printers over a selected serial port. DTR Driver Installation and Removal Your application must install the device driver by using the RegisterDe-

vice() function. The driver name is ONEIL.DLL. We recommend that you use DTR for the Device Name parameter, 1 for the Device Driv-

er index parameter, and use any of the following strings for the last param-

eter:

S NULL (==0) Defaults to COM1 @ 9600 S COM1 only COM port specified defaults to 9600 S COM1:9600 sets to COM port and specified bit rate S COM1:19200 sets to COM port and specified bit rate Use the HANDLE returned by RegisterDevice() as the parameter to DeregisterDevice(). The correct usage of the RegisterDevice() function call is demonstrated below. You may use DeregisterDevice() to uninstall the driver. Install()

HANDLE hDevice;

TCHAR port[6];

port[0] = TCHAR(C);

port[1] = TCHAR(O);

port[2] = TCHAR(M);

port[3] = TCHAR(1);

port[4] = TCHAR(:);

port[5] = TCHAR(0);

hDevice = RegisterDevice ( (TEXT(DTR), 1, TEXT(\\WINDOWS\\ONEIL.DLL),

(DWORD)port);

200 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Opening the DTR Driver Chapter 5 Printer Support The application opens the DTR driver by using the CreateFile() function. The call can be implemented as follows:

hFile = CreateFile(_T(DTR1:), GENERIC_WRITE, 0, NULL, OPEN_ALWAYS, FILE_ATTRIBUTE_NORMAL, NULL);

The first parameter DTR1: must reflect the device name and index used in the RegisterDevice() function call. The function call will fail for any of the following reasons:

S The port associated with the device during RegisterDevice() is currently in use. S The DTR device is already open. S The share mode is not set to zero. The device cannot be shared. S Access permissions are not set to GENERIC_WRITE. Closing the DTR Driver Using the CloseHandle() (hFile) function closes the DTR driver. Where hFile is the handle returned by the CreateFile() function call. S TRUE indicates the device is successfully closed. S FALSE indicates an attempt to close a NULL HANDLE or an already closed device. Writing to the DTR Driver You can use the WriteFile() function to send all Print data to the printer. The print data being written must contain the proper formatting printer commands. DTR Printer Communications All DTR printer communications should be based on the following flow:

1 Use CreateFile(); to open the printer driver. 2 Use WriteFile() to write your data to the printer. Check for errors and that all data were written. 3 Use CloseHandle() to close the driver. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 201 Chapter 5 Printer Support 202 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual

 

 

6 Scanner Support The 700 Series Color Mobile Computer is available with imaging or laser scanning technologies, including the following:

APS Linear Imager: (standard for 730 Computers) includes the EV10 Scan Engine 2D Imager: (not supported on 730 Computers) includes the IT4000 Scan Engine Reads 1D symbologies and PDF417 bar codes. Linear imaging using Vista Scanning technology reads low-con-

trast bar codes, laminated bar codes, and bar codes dis-

played on CRT or TRT displays. This imaging uses harmless LEDs for illumination and does not require any warning labels. Vista Scanning is more reliable than la-

sers as it is a completely solid state with no moving parts or oscillating mirrors. This decodes several stacked 1D and 2D symbologies, including PDF417, Data Matrix, and MaxiCode without painting. It can also read 1D codes from any orienta-

tion, for example the scan beam does not need to align perpendicular to the symbol to read it. Photography is a secondary application; the lens in the device favors bar code reading. Photos are 640x480, 256 gray-scale. Traditional laser scanner that decodes 1D bar codes. 1D Laser Scanner: (not supported on 730 Computers) includes the SE900, SE900HS, SE900-S6, and SE900HS-S6 scan engines PDF417 Laser Scanner: (not supported on 730 Computers) Higher speed laser scanner that can read PDF417 labels by painting the label. A 700 Color Imager Demo application demonstrates the more common features of the 700 Color Computer imager. See the Imager Demo V1.0 Users Guide on the Intermec Developers Library CD for information. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 203 Chapter 6 Scanner Support Scanner Control and Data Transfer Note: To use the methods described below, enable Data Collection func-

tionality on the 700 Computer using the bootloader configuration menu. The Data Server and associated software provide several ways to manipu-

late scanner control and data transfer between the scanner subsystem and user applications:

S Automatic Data Collection COM Interfaces:

These COM interfaces allow user applications to receive bar code data, and configure and control the bar code reader engine. S ITCAxBarCodeReaderControl functions:

These ActiveX controls allow user applications to collect bar code data from the scanner, to configure the scanner, and to configure audio and visual notification when data arrives. S ITCAxReaderCommand functions:

Use these ActiveX controls to modify and retrieve configuration infor-

mation using the reader interface commands. S Scanning EasySet bar code labels:

You can use the EasySetR bar code creation software from Intermec Technologies Corporation to print configuration labels. Scan the labels to change the scanner configuration and data transfer settings. For more information, see the SDK Users Manual provided with your Windows CE/PocketPC SDK. EasySet Software Use the Intermec EasySet software to print configuration labels you can scan to change your configuration settings. For more information, see the EasySet online help. EasySet is available from the Intermec Data Capture web site. 204 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Data Collection Configuration Chapter 6 Scanner Support For Units with PSM Builds Older than 3.00 Scanner settings for the 700 Series Computer can be configured via the Data Collection control panel applet. From the 700 Series Computer, tap Start > Settings > the System tab > Data Collection. See Appendix A, Configurable Settings for more information about the following parame-

ters. Note that these are in alphabetical order. S Codabar (page 304) S Code 11 (page 318) S Code 128 (page 307) S Code 128 Options (page 308) S Code 128 FNC1 Character (page 309) S Code 39 (page 302) S Code 93 (page 306) S Code 93 Length (page 306) S Data Matrix (page 320) S Interleaved 2 of 5 (page 315) S Matrix 2 of 5 (page 316) S MaxiCode (page 321) S MSI (page 311) S PDF417 (page 312) S Macro PDF (page 312) S Micro PDF417 (page 314) S Plessey (page 310) S QR Code (page 319) S Standard 2 of 5 (page 303) S Telepen (page 317) S UPC/EAN (page 305) For Units With PSM Build 3.00 or Newer You can configure scanner settings for the 700 Series Computer via the Intermec Settings control panel applet. From the 700 Series Computer, tap Start > Settings > the System tab > the Intermec Settings icon. See the Intermec Computer Command Reference Manual (P/N: 073529) for infor-

mation about the settings you can configure with this applet. This online manual is available from the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 205 Chapter 6 Scanner Support Internal Scanners The Intermec Internal Scanner feature allows Automatic Data Collection

(ADC) by accepting data from the COM1 port and wedging it into the keyboard interface. You can enable or disable this feature from the Today screen on the 700 Series Computer. For Units With PSM Build 3.00 or Newer Do the following before you configure your internal scanner from the In-

termec Settings control panel applet. Information about the settings you can configure with this applet is described in the Intermec Computer Com-

mand Reference Manual. The online manual is available from the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com. 1 From the 700 Series Computer, tap Start > Settings > the System tab >

the Intermec Settings icon. 2 Double-tap the Scanners, Symbologies folder, then expand (+) the Internal Scanner option. This sample screen is for the IT4000 scan engine. 206 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Scanner Support Scanner and Imager Settings Depending on what is selected as the scanner model, image settings, de-

code security, scanner settings, and virtual wedge are configured from the Intermec Settings applet. See the the Intermec Computer Command Refer-

ence Manual, available from the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com, for more information about each enabled option. Internal Scanner Supported Symbologies See the following table for a guideline and Appendix B, Bar Code Symbol-

ogies for more information on each supported symbology:

EV10 IT4000 SE900 SE900HS SE900-S6 SE900HS-S6 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Available in f/w Available in f/w Sxxp304 Sxxp304 Available in f/w Available in f/w Sxxp304 Sxxp304 Available in f/w Available in f/w Sxxp304 Sxxp304 X X X X Symbologies Code39 UPC/EAN Code 128 Interleaved 2 of 5 Code 93 Codabar Code 2 of 5 MSI Plessey Code 11 Matrix 2 of 5 Telepen PDF417 Micro PDF417 MaxiCode Data Matrix QR Code RSS 14 RSS Limited RSS Expanded Codablock A Codablock F UCC Composite 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 207 Chapter 6 Scanner Support Tethered Scanners The Intermec Tethered Scanner feature allows Automatic Data Collection

(ADC) by accepting data from the COM1 port and wedging it into the keyboard interface. You can enable or disable this feature from the Today screen on the 700 Series Computer. The following information is divided between units with PSM Builds old-

er than 3.00 (next paragraph) or units with PSM Builds 3.00 or newer

(starting on page 213). For Units With PSM Builds Older than 3.00 Enabling and Disabling On the 700 Series Computer, tap Start > Today. Tap the bar code scanner icon in the System Tray (circled below). Initially, the bar code scanner icon indicates that this feature is disabled (shown to the left). S Select Comm Port Wedge to send any data, coming into the 700 Series Computer through the COM1 port from an external input device, as keyboard data to an application on the desktop. For example, if you have Pocket Word running on your 700 Series Computer desktop, information scanned with a scanner connected to the COM1 port appears in the Word document. If another data collec-

tion application is running and is active on the 700 Series Computer, the scanned information appears in that application. Note: When Comm Port Wedge is selected, regardless of the data sent by the external input device, you cannot control the device or the data format using any of the Intermec scanner control or data transfer APIs from the SDK or the internal Data Collection software. The external input device is governed by what software it has onboard to tell it how to scan, take pictures, or send the data elsewhere. 208 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Scanner Support S Select 1551/1553 to enable the Sabre 1551E or 1553 Tethered Scanner to scan, then send data as keyboard data. The 1551/1553 Tethered Scanner has software onboard that translates scanned data into charac-

ters, so the running/active application does not need to know how to do that. All the scanner control and data transfer APIs will work with the 1551/1553 Tethered Scanner, so you can control the device. S Select Disable All to disable this feature and use the COM1 port for another application, such as ActiveSync. An error message will result if this option were not selected, but this action was attempted. Similarly, if ActiveSync is using the COM1 port, and you select Comm Port Wedge or 1551/1553, an error message will result. See Error Message for more information. Error Message If the COM1 port is used by another application, such as ActiveSync, nei-

ther the Comm Port Wedge nor the 1551/1553 Tethered Scanner can be enabled. As a result, the following message may appear. Note that this mes-

sage is for the Comm Port Wedge. You must disable that application to free up the COM1 port before you can enable either the wedge or the scanner. Changing Comm Settings Tap Change Comm Settings to configure the settings for the COM1 port. Current settings are restored after a warm-boot is performed, but are lost after a cold-boot is performed. When these settings are not changed, the OK button is disabled (grayed out). When changes are made, tap OK after it is enabled to accept these changes. S Baud Rate:

1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 7 or 8 None, Odd, Even, Mark, Space 1 or 2 S Data Bits:

S Parity:

S Stop Bits:

S Flow Control: None or Hardware 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 209 Chapter 6 Scanner Support Tethered Scanner Default settings for the Tethered Scanner are shown in this illustration:

Sabre 1551E or 1553 Tethered Scanner The default communication configuration for the Sabre 1551E or 1553 Tethered Scanner is shown in the following illustration. Scan the EasySet Reset Factory Defaults label to set the Sabre 1551E or 1553 tethered scan-

ner communications settings to this configuration. The COM1 port con-

figuration settings must also match those of the scanner to scan labels. Welch Allyn 1470 Imager Settings You can set the Welch Allyn 1470 Imager to this configuration by scan-

ning the Factory Default Settings label. 210 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Scanner Support Scanner Cabling A null modem cable is required for the Welch Allyn 1470 Imager to com-

municate with the 700 Series Computer when using the 700 Series Serial Cable (P/N: 226-999-001). Sabre 1551E / 1553 Cables connect directly to the Model 700 COM Port. Limitations and Capabilities The Tethered Scanner has the following limitations:

S No auto detection of a scanners physical connection to COM1 port. User needs to ensure the communication settings of COM1 port matched the settings of the device. S The Pocket PC Pocket Office applications misbehave when control characters such as carriage return are wedged. This is a known Pocket PC problem, which is being worked with Microsoft and for which a work around is being developed. S Communications port is COM1 and cannot be changed. S A complete bar code label is detected when the time between bytes (the inter-byte gap) exceeds 100 ms. This allows that data could be concate-

nated if two labels were received while the Comm Port Wedge or the 1551/1553 Tethered Scanner was not performing a read. That is, it could be wedging data just read or the read thread could be preempted. Also, the labels could appear concatenated if the scanner itself were to buffer the labels before transmitting them. When enabled, the Comm Port Wedge menu option has this limitation:

S There is no bar code API to get bar code data from the bar code scan-

ner. The Comm Port Wedge transmits the data through the keyboard interface only. When enabled, the 1551/1553 menu option has these capabilities:

S Grid Data Editing is available. S The source of the symbology configurations is only available via the Easy Set command labels. You can only configure the Virtual Wedge configurations via the Data Collection control panel applet Virtual Wedge page. See Appendix A, Configurable Settings, for information. S May transmit the data through the keyboard interface (via the Virtual Wedge). 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 211 Chapter 6 Scanner Support S The bar code APIs, defined in the IADC interface, are available to get bar code data from the bar code scanner. The following example shows how to programmatically collects bar code data:

#include IADC.h

#include ITCAdcMgmt.h

// Linked with ITCUUID.LIB

// Linked with ITCAdcDevMgmt.lib IADC* pIADC;

HRESULT hrStatus = S_OK;

// Create a ADC COM interface to collect bar code data from the 1551E/1553

// when the 1551/1553 menu option is enabled. hrStatus =

ITCDeviceOpen(TEXT(ExtScanner), // Name of the ADC device. IID_IADC,

// COM interface to return

// Devices Flags ITC_DHDEVFLAG_READAHEAD,

// the returned interface

(LPVOID *) &pIADC);

if( SUCCEEDED(hrStatus) )

HRESULT hr = pIDC->Read(

BYTE byteBuffer[MAX_LABEL_SIZE];

DWORD dwLength = 0;

byteBuffer, MAX_LABEL_SIZE,

&dwLength, NULL, INFINITE

// Buffer to put the ADC data.

// Size of pDataBuffer in bytes.

// Number bytes returned.

// Time stamp of the received data. NULL.

// Number of milliseconds to wait.

ITCDeviceClose( (IUnknown **) pIADC);

when done using this COM interface, delete it:

212 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual For Units With PSM Build 3.00 or Newer Chapter 6 Scanner Support Configuring the Tethered Scanner Do the following before you configure your tethered scanner from the In-

termec Settings control panel applet. Information about the settings you can configure with this applet is described in the Intermec Computer Com-

mand Reference Manual. The online manual is available from the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com. 1 Connect your tethered scanner to the tethered scanner port. 2 From the 700 Series Computer, tap Start > Settings > the System tab >

the Intermec Settings icon. 3 Double-tap the Scanners, Symbologies folder, then expand (+) the Tethered Scanner option. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 213 Chapter 6 Scanner Support 4 Tap the Scanner model option for a drop-down list, then select the ap-

plicable scanner, such as 1551E or 1553 in this sample screen. 5 Make sure a scanner is connected to your 700 Computer properly. Then, tap to check Scanner Port State, then tap File > Save Settings from the bottom of the screen. These changes will take several moments to reset. 214 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Scanner Support 1551E or 1553 Selected for Scanner Model When 1551E or 1553 is selected from the Scanner model option (see step 4 above), and the port state is already enabled (see step 5), the process will take several moments to reset. When 1551E or 1553 is successfully connected during this step, the unit will emit some beeps. Here, the termi-

nal is initializing the scanner at 9600 for the baud rate, 7 data bits, even parity, and 2 stop bits and synchronizing the terminals configuration with the attached scanner. With 1551E or 1553 selected, Symbologies, Symbology Options, Hardware Trigger, and Scanner Port settings are configured from the In-

termec Settings applet. See the the Intermec Computer Command Reference Manual, available from the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com, for more information about each enabled option. ASCII Selected for Scanner Model To send data coming into the 700 Series Computer through the COM1 port from an external input device, as keyboard data to an application on the desktop, do the following:

1 Select ASCII from the Scanner model option. 2 Tap to check Scanner Port State. 3 Tap File > Save Settings from the bottom of the screen. With ASCII selected, Symbology Options, Hardware Trigger, and Scan-

ner Port settings are configured from the Intermec Settings applet. See the the Intermec Computer Command Reference Manual, available from the In-

termec web site at www.intermec.com, for more information about each enabled option. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 215 Chapter 6 Scanner Support Note: When selecting either the 1551E or the 1553 Scanner or enabling the scanner port for these scanners, the 700 Computer tries to communi-

cate with the attached scanner. If the scanner is not powered, if the cable is not connected properly, the wrong cable is used, or if the scanner firmware is older than 2.0, and the Failed to save one or more settings message appears, then this step failed. This process can take time as the terminal is going through a group of RS-232 settings to communicate with the scanner. After successful com-

municated with the scanner (about eight beeps are generated), it initializes the scanner with the 700 Computers current settings. This process might generate a series of beeps pending on the firmware version installed in the scanner. These beeps are suppressed in firmware versions 2.08 or greater. Troubleshooting the 1551E/1553 Tethered Scanner Do the following to troubleshoot your 1551/1553 Tethered Scanner:

1 Ensure the correct cable is used for the scanner on the tethered scanner port. Note the 700 Computer cannot supply power to the scanner. 2 Perform a quick test to determine whether the connection is good. Temporary select the scanner model as ASCII, then enable the scan-

ner port state. Go to a command prompt or a notepad and scan a data label. If a label is wedged into the command prompt or notepad, then the connection is good. 3 If step 2 passes, reset the scanner configurations to their defaults (scan the Reset Factory Defaults label on the next page) to prevent miscom-

munication, then reenable the scanner port state. 4 If step 2 fails, then the firmware installed in the tethered scanner may be older than version 2.0. Upgrade your scanner firmware. Reset Factory Defaults Scan the EasySet software bar code label Reset Factory Default to restore all of your scanners configurations to their factory defaults. When this command label is scanned, reinitialize the tethered scanner (such as disable the scanner port state, then enable it) on the 700 Computer. Otherwise, the online configuration and scanning on the 700 Computer are not func-

tional. In general, scan this label only to initially reset the scanner. Do not scan EasySet command labels to change the following settings:

S Symbologies code mark S Preamble and Postamble S Symbology ID transmit option In some cases, scanning EasySet Command labels cause the current setting on the user interface to be out of sync with the scanner settings. However, in some cases, scanning these labels does corrupt scanned data. The Open COMx error: 0x00000037 message appears if the COM port cannot open due to another application using the port. Disable that ap-

plication to free up the COM1 port before you can enable the scanner. x is the COM port number, such as 1, 2, or 3. S Code 128, EAN29 Identifier S Enable/Disable symbologies 216 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Tethered Scanner Supported Symbologies Chapter 6 Scanner Support The user interface may allow configuration of PDF417, Micro PDF417, RSS, and Codablock bar code symbologies. However, these symbologies are dependant on what scanner models and firmware versions are in use. See the following table for a guideline and Appendix B, Bar Code Symbol-

ogies for more information on each supported symbology:

You can use a generic ASCII scanner with the 700 Computer. Pending on the scanner, linear symbologies such as Code39, should decode correctly. However, 2D symbologies such as PDF417 may not decode correctly. 1551E 1553 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Available in 1551 0808 PDF Available in 1551 0808 PDF, Sxxp217_ or later F/w version 2.15 or later F/w version 2.15 or later F/w version 2.15 or later Available in 1551 0808 PDF Available in 1551 0808 PDF F/w version 2.15 or later F/w version 2.15 or later F/w version 2.15 or later Symbologies Code39 UPC/EAN Code 128 Interleaved 2 of 5 Code 93 Codabar Code 2 of 5 MSI Plessey Code 11 Matrix 2 of 5 Telepen PDF417 Micro PDF417 MaxiCode Data Matrix QR Code RSS 14 RSS Limited RSS Expanded Codablock A Codablock F UCC Composite 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 217 Chapter 6 Scanner Support 218 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 7 Programming The following programming information pertains to the 700 Series Color Mobile Computer:

S Creating CAB Files (page 220) S Customization and Lockdown (page 237) S FTP Server (page 239) S Kernel I/O Control Functions (page 247) S Network Selection APIs (page 263) S Notifications (page 286) S Reboot Functions (page 288) S Remapping the Keypad (page 289) 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 219 Chapter 7 Programming Creating CAB Files The Windows CE operating system uses a .CAB file to install an applica-

tion on a Windows CE-based device. A .CAB file is composed of multiple files that are compressed into one file. Compressing multiple files into one file provides the following benefits:

S All application files are present. S A partial installation is prevented. S The application can be installed from several sources, such as a desktop computer or a Web site. Use the CAB Wizard application (CABWIZ.EXE) to generate a .CAB file for your application. Creating Device-Specific CAB Files Do the following to create a device-specific .CAB file for an application, in the order provided:

1 Create an .INF file with Windows CE-specific modifications (page 220). 2 Optional Create a SETUP.DLL file to provide custom control of the installation process (page 232). 3 Use the CAB Wizard to create the .CAB file, using the .INF file, the optional SETUP.DLL file, and the device-specific application files as parameters (page 235). Creating an .INF File An .INF file specifies information about an application for the CAB Wi-

zard. Below are the sections of an .INF file:

[Version]

This specifies the creator of the file, version, and other relevant informa-

tion. Required? Yes S Signature:

signature_name

$Windows NT$

S Provider:

INF_creator The company name of the application, such as Microsoft. S CESignature

$Windows CE$

Example

[Version]

Signature = $Windows NT$

Provider = Intermec CESignature = $Windows CE$

220 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Programming

[CEStrings]

This specifies string substitutions for the application name and the default installation directory. Required? Yes S AppName:

app_name Name of the application. Other instances of %AppName% in the .INF file are replaced with this string value, such as RP32. S InstallDir:

default_install_dir Default installation directory on the device. Other instances of %Install-

Dir% in the .INF file are replaced with this string value. Example:

\SDMMC_Disk\%AppName%

Example

[CEStrings]

AppName=Game Pack InstallDir=%CE1%\%AppName%

[Strings]

This section is optional and defines one or more string keys. A string key represents a string of printable characters. Required? No S string_key:

value String consisting of letters, digits, or other printable characters. Enclose value in double quotation marks if the corresponding string key is used in an item that requires double quotation marks. No string_keys is okay. Example

[Strings]

reg_path = Software\Intermec\My Test App 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 221 Chapter 7 Programming

[CEDevice]

Describes the platform for the targeted application. All keys in this section are optional. If a key is nonexistent or has no data, Windows CE does not perform any checking with the exception being UnsupportedPlatforms. If the UnsupportedPlatforms key exists but no data, the previous value is not overridden. Required? Yes S ProcessorType :

processor_type The value that is returned by SYSTEMINFO.dwProcessorType.For example, the value for the ARM CPU is 2577 S UnsupportedPlatforms: platform_family_name This lists known unsupported platform family names. If the name specified in the [CEDevice.xxx] section is different from that in the

[CEDevice] section, both platform_family_name values are unsupported for the microprocessor specified by xxx. That is, the list of unsupported platform family names is appended to the previous list of unsupported names. Application Manager will not display the application for an unsupported platform. Also, a user will be warned during the setup process if the .CAB file is copied to an unsupported device. Example

[CEDevice]

UnsupportedPlatforms = pltfrm1 ; pltfrm1 is unsupported

[CEDevice.SH3]

UnsupportedPlatforms = ; pltfrm1 is still unsupported S VersionMin:

minor_version Numeric value returned by OSVERSIONINFO.dwVersionMinor. The

.CAB file is valid for the currently connected device if the version of this device is greater than or equal to VersionMin. S VersionMax:

major_version Numeric value returned by OSVERSIONINFO.dwVersionMajor. The

.CAB file is valid for the currently connected device if the version of this device is less than or equal to VersionMax. S BuildMin:

build_number Numeric value returned by OSVERSIONINFO.dwBuildNumber. The

.CAB file is valid for the currently connected device if the version of this device is greater than or equal to BuildMin. S BuildMax:

build_number Numeric value returned by OSVERSIONINFO.dwBuildNumber. The

.CAB file is valid for the currently connected device if the version of this device is less than or equal to BuildMax. 222 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Programming Example The following code example shows three [CEDevice] sections: one that gives basic information for any CPU and two that are specific to the SH3 and the MIPS microprocessors.

; A template for all platforms

; Does not support pltfrm1

[CEDevice]

UnsupportedPlatforms = pltfrm1

; The following specifies version 1.0 devices only. VersionMin = 1.0 VersionMax = 1.0

[CEDevice.ARM]

; This will create a .CAB file specific to ARM devices. ProcessorType = 2577 UnsupportedPlatforms =

; The following overrides the version settings so that no version checking is performed. VersionMin =

VersionMax =

[CEDevice.MIPS]

; This will create a .CAB file specific to MIPS devices. ProcessorType = 4000 microprocessor. UnsupportedPlatforms =pltfrm2 ; pltfrm1, pltfrm2 unsupported for MIPs .CAB file.

; Inherits all [CEDevice] settings

; ARM .cab file is valid for ARM microprocessors.

; pltfrm1 is still unsupported

; MIPS .CAB file is valid for MIPS

; Inherits all [CEDevice] settings Note: To create the two CPU-specific .CAB files for the SETUP.INF file in the previous example, run the CAB Wizard with the /cpu arm mips parameter. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 223 Chapter 7 Programming

[DefaultInstall]

This describes the default installation of your application. Note that under this section, you will list items expanded upon later in this description. Required? Yes S Copyfiles:

copyfile_list_section Maps to files defined later in the .INF file, such as Files.App, Files.Font, and Files.Bitmaps. S AddReg:

add_registry_section Example: RegSettings.All S CEShortcuts:

shortcut_list_section String that identifies one more section that defines shortcuts to a file, as defined in the [CEShortcuts] section. S CESetupDLL:

setup_DLL Optimal string that specifies a SETUP.DLL file. It is written by the In-

dependent Software Vendor (ISV) and contains customized functions for operations during installation and removal of the application. The file must be specified in the [SourceDisksFiles] section. S CESelfRegister:

self_reg_DLL_filename String that identifies files that self-register by exporting the DllRegister-

Server and DllUnregisterServer Component Object Model (COM) functions. Specify these files in the [SourceDiskFiles] section. During installation, if installation on the device fails to call the files exported DllRegisterServer function, the files exported DllUnregisterServer function will not be called during removal. Example

[DefaultInstall]

AddReg = RegSettings.All CEShortcuts = Shortcuts.All

[SourceDiskNames]

This section describes the name and path of the disk on which your ap-

plication resides. Required? Yes S disk_ordinal:

disk_label,,path 1=,App files , C:\Appsoft\RP32\... 2=,Font files,,C:\RpTools\... 3=,CE Tools ,,C:\windows ce tools... S CESignature:

$Windows CE$

Example

[SourceDisksNames]

1 = ,Common files,,C:\app\common

[SourceDisksNames.SH3]

2 = ,SH3 files,,sh3

[SourceDisksNames.MIPS]

2 = ,MIPS files,,mips

; Required section

; Using an absolute path

; Using a relative path

; Using a relative path 224 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Programming

[SourceDiskFiles]

This describes the name and path of the files in which your application resides. Required? Yes S filename:

disk_number[,subdir]

RPM.EXE = 1,c:\appsoft\... WCESTART.INI = 1 RPMCE212.INI = 1 TAHOMA.TTF = 2 Note: [,subdir] is relative to the location of the INF file. Example

; Required section

[SourceDisksFiles]

begin.wav = 1 end.wav = 1 sample.hlp = 1

[SourceDisksFiles.SH3]

sample.exe = 2

[SourceDisksFiles.MIPS]

sample.exe = 2

; Uses the SourceDisksNames.SH3 identification of 2.

; Uses the SourceDisksNames.MIPS identification of 2. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 225 Chapter 7 Programming

[DestinationDirs]

This describes the names and paths of the destination directories for the application on the target device. Note Windows CE does not support directo-

ry identifiers. Required? Yes S file_list_section:

0,subdir String that identifies the destination directory. The following list shows the string substitutions supported by Windows CE. Use these only for the beginning of the path. \

%CE1% \Program Files

%CE2% \Windows

%CE3% \My Documents

%CE4% \Windows\Startup

%CE5% \My Documents

%CE6% \Program Files\Accessories

%CE7% \Program Files\Communication

%CE8% \Program Files\Games

%CE9% \Program Files\Pocket Outlook

%CE10% \Program Files\Office

%CE11% \Windows\Start Menu\Programs

%CE12% \Windows\Start Menu\Programs\Accessories

%CE13% \Windows\Start Menu\Programs\Communications

%CE14% \Windows\Start Menu\Programs\Games

%CE15% \Windows\Fonts

%CE16% \Windows\Recent

%CE17% \Windows\Start Menu

%InstallDir%

Contains the path to the target directory selected during installation. It is declared in the [CEStrings] section

%AppName%

Contains the application name defined in the [CEStrings] section. Example

[DestinationDirs]

Files.Common = 0,%CE1%\My Subdir Files.Shared = 0,%CE2%

; \Program Files\My Subdir

; \Windows 226 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Programming

[CopyFiles]

This section, under the [DefaultInstall] section, describes the default files to copy to the target device. Within the [DefaultInstall] section, files were listed that must be defined elsewhere in the INF file. This section identi-

fies that mapping and may contain flags. Required? Yes S copyfile_list_section:

destination_filename,[source_filename]

The source_filename parameter is optional if it is the same as destina-

tion_filename. S copyfile_list_section:

flags The numeric value that specifies an action to be done while copying fi-

les. The following table shows values supported by Windows CE. Flag COPYFLG_WARN_IF_SKIP COPYFLG_NOSKIP COPYFLG_NO_OVERWRITE COPYFLG_REPLACEONLY Description Value 0x00000001 Warn user if skipping a file is attempted after error. 0x00000002 Do not allow a user to skip copying a file. 0x00000010 Do not overwrite files in destination directory. 0x00000400 Copy the source file to the destination directory only if the file is already in the destination directory. CE_COPYFLG_NO_DATE_DIALOG 0x20000000 Do not copy files if the target file is newer. CE_COPYFLG_NODATECHECK 0x40000000 Ignore date while overwriting the target file. 0x80000000 Create a reference when a shared DLL is counted. CE_COPYFLG_SHARED Example

[DefaultInstall.SH3]

CopyFiles = Files.Common, Files.SH3

[DefaultInstall.MIPS]

CopyFiles = Files.Common, Files.MIPS 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 227 Chapter 7 Programming

[AddReg]

This section, under the [DefaultInstall] section, is optional and describes the keys and values that the .CAB file adds to the device registry. Within the [DefaultInstall] section, a reference may have been made to this section, such as AddReg=RegSettings.All. This section defines the options for that setting. Required? No S add_registry_section:

registry_root_string String that specifies the registry root location. The following list shows the values supported by Windows CE. S HKCR Same as HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT S HKCU Same as HKEY_CURRENT_USER S HKLM Same as HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE S add_registry_section: value_name Registry value name. If empty, the default registry value name is used. S add_registry_section:

flags Numeric value that specifies information about the registry key. The following table shows the values that are supported by Window CE. Flag FLG_ADDREG_NOCLOBBER Value 0x00000002 If the registry key exists, do not overwrite it. Can be used Description with any of the other flags in this table. FLG_ADDREG_TYPE_SZ FLG_ADDREG_TYPE_MULTI_SZ 0x00010000 REG_MULTI_SZ registry data type. Value field that follows 0x00000000 REG_SZ registry data type. FLG_ADDREG_TYPE_BINARY can be a list of strings separated by commas. 0x00000001 REG_BINARY registry data type. Value field that follows must be a list of numeric values separated by commas, one byte per field, and must not use the 0x hexadecimal prefix. FLG_ADDREG_TYPE_DWORD 0x00010001 REG_DWORD data type. The noncompatible format in the Win32 Setup .INF documentation is supported. Example AddReg = RegSettings.All

[RegSettings.All]

HKLM,%reg_path%,,0x00000000,alpha HKLM,%reg_path%,test,0x00010001,3 HKLM,%reg_path%\new,another,0x00010001,6

; <default> = alpha

; Test = 3

; New\another = 6 228 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Programming

[CEShortCuts]

This section, a Windows CE-specific section under the [DefaultInstall]

section, is optional and describes the shortcuts that the installation applica-

tion creates on the device. Within the [DefaultInstall] section, a reference may have been made to this section, such as ShortCuts.All. This section defines the options for that setting. Required? No S shortcut_list_section:

shortcut_filename String that identifies the shortcut name. It does not require the .LNK extension. S shortcut_list_section:

shortcut_type_flag Numeric value. Zero or empty represents a shortcut to a file; any non-

zero numeric value represents a shortcut to a folder. S shortcut_list_section:

target_file_path String value that specifies the destination location. Use the target file name for a file, such as MyApp.exe, that must be defined in a file copy list. For a path, use a file_list_section name defined in the [Destination-

Dirs] section, such as DefaultDestDir, or the %InstallDir% string. S shortcut_list_section:

standard_destination_path Optional string value. A standard %CEx% path or %InstallDir%. If no value is specified, the shortcut_list_section name of the current section or the DefaultDestDir value from the [DestinationDirs] section is used. Example CEShortcuts = Shortcuts.All

[Shortcuts.All]

Sample App,0,sample.exe App,0,sample.exe,%InstallDir%

; Uses the path in DestinationDirs. Sample

; The path is explicitly specified. Sample .INF File

; Required section

; Required section

[Version]

Signature = $Windows NT$

Provider = Intermec Technologies Corporation CESignature = $Windows CE$

;[CEDevice]

;ProcessorType =

[DefaultInstall]

CopyFiles = Files.App, Files.Fonts, Files.BitMaps, Files.Intl, Files.TelecomNcsCE, Files.Windows, Files.Import, Files.Export, Files.Work, Files.Database, Files.WinCE AddReg = RegSettings.All ;CEShortcuts =

Shortcuts.All

[SourceDisksNames]

1 = ,App files ,,c:\appsoft\... 2 = ,Font files ,,c:\WinNT\Fonts 3 = ,CE Tools ,,c:\windows ce tools\wce400\700ie\mfc\lib\x86

[SourceDisksFiles]

rpm.exe wcestart.ini = 1

= 1,C:\Appsoft\program\wce400\WCEX86Rel700

; Required section

; Required section 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 229 Chapter 7 Programming rpmce212.ini = 1 intermec.bmp = 1 rpmlogo.bmp = 1 rpmname.bmp = 1 import.bmp = 1 export.bmp = 1 clock.bmp = 1 printer.bmp = 1 filecopy.bmp = 1 readme.txt = 1 lang_eng.bin = 1 rpmdata.dbd = 1,database\wce1 tahoma.ttf = 2 mfcce212.dll = 3 olece212.dll = 3 olece211.dll = 1,c:\windows ce tools\wce400\NMSD61102.11\mfc\lib\x86 rdm45wce.dll = 1,c:\rptools\rdm45wce\4_50\lib\wce400\wcex86rel picfmt.dll = 1,c:\rptools\picfmt\1_00\wce400\wcex86rel6110 fmtctrl.dll = 1,c:\rptools\fmtctrl\1_00\wce400\wcex86rel6110 ugrid.dll = 1,c:\rptools\ugrid\1_00\wce400\wcex86rel6110 simple.dll = 1,c:\rptools\pspbm0c\1_00\wce400\wcex86rel psink.dll = 1,c:\rptools\psink\1_00\wce400\WCEX86RelMinDependency pslpwce.dll =1,c:\rptools\pslpm0c\1_00\wce400\WCEX86RelMinDependency npcpport.dll = 1,c:\rptools\cedk\212_03\installable drivers\printer\npcp

;dexcom.dll = 1,c:\rptools\psdxm0c\1_00\x86 ncsce.exe = 1,c:\rptools\ncsce\1_04 nrinet.dll = 1,c:\rptools\ncsce\1_04

[DestinationDirs] ; Required section

;Shortcuts.All = 0,%CE3% ; \Windows\Desktop

= 0,%InstallDir%

Files.App Files.DataBase

= 0,%InstallDir%\DataBase

= 0,%InstallDir%\Bitmaps Files.BitMaps

= 0,%InstallDir%\Fonts Files.Fonts

= 0,%InstallDir%\Intl Files.Intl Files.TelecomNcsCE

= 0,%InstallDir%\Windows Files.Windows

= 0,%InstallDir%\Import Files.Import

= 0,%InstallDir%\Export Files.Export

= 0,%InstallDir%\Work Files.Work

= 0,\storage_card\wince Files.WinCE

[CEStrings]

; Required section AppName = Rp32 InstallDir = \storage_card\%AppName%

[Strings]

; Optional section

;[Shortcuts.All]

;Sample App,0,sample.exe

;Sample App,0,sample.exe,%InstallDir%

[Files.App]

rpm.exe,,,0 rpm.ini,rpmce212.ini,,0 mfcce212.dll,,,0 olece212.dll,,,0 olece211.dll,,,0 rdm45wce.dll,,,0 picfmt.dll,,,0

= 0,%InstallDir%\Telecom\NcsCE

; Uses the path in DestinationDirs.

; The path is explicitly specified. 230 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Programming fmtctrl.dll,,,0 ugrid.dll,,,0 simple.dll,,,0 psink.dll,,,0 pslpwce.dll,,,0 npcpport.dll,,,0

;dexcom.dll,,,0

[Files.DataBase]

rpmdata.dbd,,,0

[Files.Fonts]

tahoma.ttf,,,0

[Files.BitMaps]

intermec.bmp,,,0 rpmlogo.bmp,,,0 rpmname.bmp,,,0 import.bmp,,,0 export.bmp,,,0 clock.bmp,,,0 printer.bmp,,,0 filecopy.bmp,,,0

[Files.Intl]

lang_eng.bin,,,0

[Files.TelecomNcsCE]

ncsce.exe,,,0 nrinet.dll,,,0

[Files.Windows]

readme.txt,,,0

[Files.Import]

readme.txt,,,0

[Files.Export]

readme.txt,,,0

[Files.Work]

readme.txt,,,0

[Files.WinCE]

wcestart.ini,,,0

[RegSettings.All]

HKLM,SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Shell\AutoHide,,0x00010001,1

; Autohide the taskbar HKLM,SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Shell\OnTop,,0x00010001,0 HKLM,SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Clock,SHOW_CLOCK,0x00010001,0

; Shell is not on top

; Clock is not on taskbar 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 231 Chapter 7 Programming Using Installation Functions in SETUP.DLL SETUP.DLL is an optional file that enables you to perform custom opera-

tions during installation and removal of your application. The following list shows the functions that are exported by SETUP.DLL. Install_Init Install_Exit Uninstall_Init Uninstall_Exit Called before installation begins. Use this function to check the application version when reinstal-

ling an application and to determine if a dependent application is present. Called after installation is complete. Use this function to handle errors that occur during applica-

tion installation. Called before the removal process begins. Use this function to close the application, if the applica-

tion is running. Called after the removal process is complete. Use this function to save database information to a file and delete the database and to tell the user where the user data files are stored and how to rein-

stall the application. Note; Use [DefaultInstall] > CESelfRegister (page 224) in the .INF file to point to SETUP.DLL. After the CAB File Extraction Cab files that need to cause a warm reset after cab extraction will need to create the __RESETMEPLEASE__.TXT file in the \Windows directory. The preferred method to create this file is within the DllMain portion of the SETUP.DLL file. It looks like this:

// in the public SDK dir

#include <windows.h>

#include <Tlhelp32.h>

#include <winioctl.h>

#include <ce_setup.h>

#define IOCTL_TERMINAL_RESET CTL_CODE (FILE_DEVICE_UNKNOWN,FILE_ANY_ACCESS, 2050, METHOD_NEITHER) BOOL APIENTRY DllMain( HANDLE h, DWORD reason, LPVOID lpReserved )

} // DllMain return TRUE;

// $DOCBEGIN$

// BOOL IsProcessRunning( TCHAR * pname );

// Description: Get process table snapshot, look for pname running.

// Arguments: pname - pointer to name of program to look for.

// for example, app.exe.

// Returns: TRUE - process is running.

// $DOCEND$

BOOL IsProcessRunning( TCHAR * pname )

FALSE - process is not running. HANDLE hProcList;

232 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Programming PROCESSENTRY32 peProcess;

DWORD thDeviceProcessID;

TCHAR lpname[MAX_PATH];

if ( !pname || !*pname ) return FALSE;

_tcscpy( lpname, pname );

_tcslwr( lpname );

hProcList = CreateToolhelp32Snapshot( TH32CS_SNAPPROCESS, 0 );

if ( hProcList == INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE ) {

} // end if memset( &peProcess, 0, sizeof(peProcess) );

peProcess.dwSize = sizeof(peProcess);

if ( !Process32First( hProcList, &peProcess ) ) {

return FALSE;

CloseToolhelp32Snapshot( hProcList );

return FALSE;

} // end if thDeviceProcessID = 0;

do {

_tcslwr( peProcess.szExeFile );

if ( _tcsstr( peProcess.szExeFile, lpname ) ) {

thDeviceProcessID = peProcess.th32ProcessID;

break;

} // end if

} while ( Process32Next( hProcList, &peProcess ) );

if ( ( GetLastError() == ERROR_NO_MORE_FILES ) && ( thDeviceProcessID == 0

CloseToolhelp32Snapshot( hProcList );

return FALSE;

} // end if CloseToolhelp32Snapshot( hProcList );

return TRUE;

} // IsProcessRunning codeINSTALL_INIT Install_Init(

HWND hwndParent, BOOL fFirstCall, BOOL fPreviouslyInstalled, LPCTSTR pszInstallDir ) return codeINSTALL_INIT_CONTINUE;

codeINSTALL_EXIT Install_Exit (

HWND hwndParent, LPCTSTR pszInstallDir, WORD cFailedDirs, WORD cFailedFiles, WORD cFailedRegKeys, 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 233 Chapter 7 Programming

WORD cFailedRegVals, WORD cFailedShortcuts ) HANDLE h;

TCHAR srcfile[MAX_PATH];

TCHAR dstfile[MAX_PATH];

if (cFailedDirs || cFailedFiles || cFailedRegKeys ||

cFailedRegVals || cFailedShortcuts) return codeINSTALL_EXIT_UNINSTALL;

if ( IsProcessRunning( Lautocab.exe ) )

h = CreateFile( L\\Windows\\__resetmeplease__.txt,

(GENERIC_READ | GENERIC_WRITE), 0, NULL, CREATE_ALWAYS, FILE_ATTRIBUTE_HIDDEN, NULL );

if ( h != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE ) else

CloseHandle( h );

exists, it is not fatal. will have to

// Couldnt create the file. If it failed because the file already

// Otherwise, notify user of the inability to reset the device and they

// perform it manually after all of the installations are complete.

} // end if

else

DWORD dret;

h = CreateFile( LSYI1:,

(GENERIC_WRITE | GENERIC_READ), 0, NULL, OPEN_EXISTING, FILE_ATTRIBUTE_NORMAL, NULL );

// Force a warm start NOW. if ( h != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE )

NULL);

DeviceIoControl( h, IOCTL_TERMINAL_RESET, NULL, 0, NULL, 0, &dret,

// Wont return, but well show clean up anyway CloseHandle( h );

// Couldnt access SYSIO. Notify user.

else

} // end if

} // end if return codeINSTALL_EXIT_DONE;

codeUNINSTALL_INIT Uninstall_Init(

HWND hwndParent, LPCTSTR pszInstallDir ) {

234 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Programming

// TODO: Perform the reverse of INSTALL_INIT here return codeUNINSTALL_INIT_CONTINUE;

codeUNINSTALL_EXIT Uninstall_Exit(HWND hwndParent) {

// TODO: Perform the reverse of INSTALL_EXIT here return codeUNINSTALL_EXIT_DONE;

The system software looks for the following directory structure and files on the installed media card whether it be an SD card or CF card or embedded flash file system. No other folders need exist.

\2577\autorun.exe

\2577\autorun.dat

\2577\autocab.exe

\2577\autocab.dat

\cabfiles\*.cab Creating CAB Files with CAB Wizard After you create the .INF file and the optional SETUP.DLL file, use the CAB Wizard to create the .CAB file. The command-line syntax for the CAB Wizard is as follows:

cabwiz.exe inf_file [/dest dest_directory] [/err error_file] [/cpu cpu_type

[cpu_type]]

A batch file, located in <program> directory, with the following com-

mands, works well:

cabwiz.exe c:\appsoft\<program>\<inf_file_name>

cd \appsoft\<program>

inf_file dest_directory error_file cpu_type The SETUP.INF file path. The destination directory for the .CAB files. If no directory is specified, the .CAB files are created in the inf_file directory. The file name for a log file that contains all warnings and errors that are encountered when the

.CAB files are compiled. If no file name is specified, errors are displayed in message boxes. If a file name is used, the CAB Wizard runs without the user interface (UI); this is useful for automated builds. Creates a .CAB file for each specified microprocessor tag, which is a label used in the Win32 SE-

TUP.INF file to differentiate between different microprocessor types. The /cpu parameter, fol-

lowed by multiple cpu_type values, must be the last qualifier in the command line. Example This example creates .CAB files for the ARM and MIPS microprocessors, assuming the Win32 SETUP.INF file contains the ARM and MIPS tags:

cabwiz.exe c:\myfile.inf /err myfile.err /cpu arm mips Note: CABWIZ.EXE, MAKECAB.EXE, and CABWIZ.DDF (Windows CE files available on the Windows CE Toolkit) must be installed in the same directory on the desktop computer. Call CABWIZ.EXE using its full path for the CAB Wizard application to run correctly. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 235 Chapter 7 Programming Troubleshooting the CAB Wizard To identify and avoid problems that might occur when using the CAB Wizard, follow these guidelines:

S Use %% for a percent sign (%) character when using this character in an .INF file string, as specified in Win32 documentation. This will not work under the [Strings] section. S Do not use .INF or .CAB files created for Windows CE to install ap-

plications on Windows-based desktop platforms. S Ensure the MAKECAB.EXE and CABWIZ.DDF files, included with Windows CE, are in the same directory as CABWIZ.EXE. S Use the full path to call CABWIZ.EXE. S Do not create a .CAB file with the MAKECAB.EXE file included with Windows CE. You must use CABWIZ.EXE, which uses MAKECAB.EXE to generate the .CAB files for Windows CE. S Do not set the read-only attribute for .CAB files. 236 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Customization and Lockdown Chapter 7 Programming Pocket PC (Windows Mobile) is a hardware specification created by Microsoft Corporation. Devices that wish to carry the Pocket PC logo must meet the minimum hardware requirements set in the Pocket PC spe-

cification. Manufacturers are free to add extra hardware functionality. Pocket PC devices also use a specialized version of the CE operating sys-

tem. This OS is built from Windows CE 3.0 but contains customizations, most notably the lack of a desktop and the addition of the Today Screen. To carry the Pocket PC logo, all devices must be tested at an Independent Test Laboratory. The ITL testing is done based on Microsoft require-

ments. The test lab then reports the findings back to Microsoft Corpora-

tion and Intermec Technologies. If the 700 Series Computer passed all tests, Intermec is allowed to ship the device with the Pocket PC logo. Each time the operating system is modified, Intermec must resubmit to ITL testing. This means we cannot change the operating system much and still be a Pocket PC device. For example, if we remove Word from the Start menu, the device would fail ITL testing and we would not be able to ship devices with the Pocket PC logo. Although many customers want a Pocket PC device, some customers would prefer that their users not have access to all of the Pocket PC featu-

res. Intermec cannot customize the operating system in any way but a cus-

tom application can:

S Delete items from the Start menu, and Programs folder. These items are just shortcuts in the file system so the application is not really being deleted. Cold booting the device will bring these items back so the ap-

plication will need to be run on every cold boot. S Use the RegFlushKey() API to save a copy of the registry to a storage device. See the 700 Color Management Tools portion of the Intermec Developers Library CD for more information on how to do this. Saving a copy of the registry restores most system settings in a cold boot situa-

tion. S Use the SHFullScreen() API in conjunction with other APIs to make the application take up the entire display and prevent the start menu from being available. S Remap keys and disable keys on the keypad. S Create a custom SIP. S Make changes to the registry to configure the device. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 237 Chapter 7 Programming Should you want your 700 Series Computer to display a full screen, keep in mind that your computer is Pocket-PC certified by Microsoft Corpora-

tion. Check out resources on programming for the Pocket PC, using the following links. These instructions give full instructions on how to display full screen. S Instructions on how to create a full screen application for eVC++ ap-

plications using an SHFullScreen() API:

http://support.microsoft.com/support/kb/articles/Q266/2/44.ASP S Instructions on how to create a full screen application for eVB applica-

tions also using the SHFullScreen() API:

http://support.microsoft.com/support/kb/articles/Q265/4/51.ASP 238 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual FTP Server Chapter 7 Programming FTP support is provided through the FTP Server application FTPDCE.EXE (MS Windows CE Versions) which is provided as part the base system. FTPDCE is the Internet File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server process. The server can be invoked from an application or command line. Besides ser-

vicing FTP client requests the FTP Server also send a network announce-

ment to notify prospective clients of server availability. Note: You should consult the RFC959 specification for proper use of some of these commands at the following URL:

S http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc959.txt for the text version, or S http://www.w3.org/Protocols/rfc959/ for an html version Do the following to send commands:

1 Start an FTP client and connect to the device FTP server. 2 Log in with intermec as the user name and cr52401 for the pass-

word. 3 From the FTP client, send the command. 4 Wait for a response. Synopsis ftpdce [ options ]

Options Aaddr Bbyte Cname Fvalue Hsec Iaddr Llog Nsec Pport Qport Rdir Tscrip Uurl Zparms

(where addr is in the form of a.b.c.d) Sets the single target address to which to send the network an-

nouncement. Default is broadcast. Sets the FTP data block size. Smaller sizes may be useful over slower links. Default is 65536. Sets the device name. Used by Intermec management software. Disables the default Intermec account. A value of 0 disables the account. Default is 1. Note that disabling the default account without providing a working access control list on the server will result in a device that will not accept any FTP connections. Sets the interval between network announcements in seconds.A value of 0 turns the network an-

nouncement off. Default is 30 seconds.

(where addr is in the form of a.b.c.d) Sets the preferred 6920 Communications Server (optional).

(where log is either 0 or 1) Sets the state of logging. Default is 0 (disabled). Specifies the number of seconds to wait before initially starting FTP server services. Sets the UDP port on which the network announcement will be sent. Default port is 52401. Sets the port on which the FTP Server will listen for connections. Default port is 21. Sets the FTP mount point to this directory. Default is the root folder of the object store. Sets the script name for the 6920 Communications Server to process. Sets the default URL for this device. Sets extended parameters to be included in the network announcement. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 239 Chapter 7 Programming Configurable Parameters Via the Registry Editor The following parameters receive default values during the installation of the Intermec FTP Server components. A few of the parameters are visible in the registry by default, but most must be created in order to modify the default behavior of the FTP server. BlockSize Setting this parameter configures the Intermec FTP Server to transmit and receive Ethernet packets using the specified data block size. By default, the FTP server transmits and receives data using a 64K data block size. Adjust-

ing this value may be useful in certain wireless TCP/IP installations. Key Value Type Valid Range Default HKLM\Software\Intermec\IFTP REG_DWORD - data block size, in bytes. 0x100-0x10000 (256-65536 decimal). 65536 DeviceName This parameter configures the Intermec FTP Server to include the speci-

fied device name in the Intermec Device Network Announcement

(IDNA). Adjusting this value may be useful in assigning a symbolic name to this device for asset tracking. Key Value Type Valid Range Default HKLM\Software\Intermec\IFTP REG_SZ None. None. DeviceURL This parameter configures the Intermec FTP Server to transmit the speci-

fied URL in the IDNA. This can be used by Intermec management soft-

ware for asset management. Key Value Type Valid Range Default HKLM\Software\Intermec\IFTP REG_SZ None. None. 240 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Programming IDNATarget This parameter configures the Intermec FTP Server to transmit the IDNA to a specific destination instead of a general UDP broadcast. This parame-

ter is useful on networks that do not allow UDP broadcasts to be routed between subnets. The use of this parameter will restrict the reception of the IDNA to the target destination only. Key Value Type Valid Range Default HKLM\Software\Intermec\IFTP REG_SZ None. None. ManifestName This parameter configures the Intermec FTP Server to transmit the speci-

fied manifest name in the IDNA. This parameter is used by the Intermec 6920 Communications Server for communication transactions. See the 6920 Communications Server documentation for proper use of this pa-

rameter. Key Value Type Valid Range Default HKLM\Software\Intermec\IFTP REG_SZ None. iftp.ini PauseAtStartup This parameter configures the Intermec FTP Server to sleep for the speci-

fied number of seconds before making the FTP service available on the device. Key Value Type Valid Range Default HKLM\Software\Intermec\IFTP REG_DWORD - stored in seconds. None. 0 Root This parameter configures the Intermec FTP Server to set the root of the FTP mount point to the specified value. Note that this must map to an ex-

isting directory or you will not be able to log into the FTP Server. Key Value Type Valid Range Default HKLM\Software\Intermec\IFTP REG_SZ None.

700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 241 Chapter 7 Programming Transferring Files Over TCP/IP Networks The File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server transfers files over TCP/IP net-

works. The FTPDCE.EXE program is a version that does not display a window, but can run in the background. FTPDCE is the Internet File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server process. The server can be invoked from an application or command line. Besides ser-

vicing FTP client requests, the FTP Server also sends a network an-

nouncement to notify prospective clients of server availability. Remarks The FTP Server currently supports the following FTP requests:

CDUP CWD DELE HELP LIST MKD MODE NLST NOOP PASS PWD QUIT RETR RMD RNFR RNTO STOR SYST TYPE USER XCUP XCWD XMKD XPWD XRMD Changes to the parent directory of the current working directory. Changes working directory. Deletes a file. Gives help information.

(This FTP request is the same as the ls -lgA command). Gives list files in a directory. Makes a directory.

(Always Uses Binary). Specifies data transfer mode.

(Not supported) Gives a name list of files in directory (this FTP request is the same as the ls command). Does nothing. Specifies a password. Prints the current working directory. Terminates session. Retrieves a file. Removes a directory. Specifies rename-from file name. Specifies rename-to file name. Stores a file. Shows the operating system type of server system.

(Binary transfers only.) Specifies the data transfer type with the Type parameter. Specifies user name.

(Not Normally Used) Changes the parent directory of the current working directory.

(Not Normally Used) Changes the current directory.

(Not Normally Used) Creates a directory.

(Not Normally Used) Prints the current working directory.

(Not Normally Used) Removes a directory. 242 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Programming SITE The following extended OEM commands are supported by the SITE request. For Microsoft FTP cli-

ents, you can send site commands by preceding the command with quote such as quote site status. ATTRIB Gets or sets the attributes of a given file. (SITE ATTRIB) Usage QUOTE SITE ATTRIB [+R | -R] [+A | -A ] [+S | -S] [+H | -H] [[path]

filename]

+ Sets an attribute. Clears an attribute. R Read-only file attribute. A Archive file attribute. S System file attribute. H Hidden file attribute. To retrieve the attributes of a file, only specify the file. The server response will be:

200-AD SHRCEIX filename If the flag exists in its position shown above, it is set. Also, in addition to the values defined above, there is also defined:

C Compressed file attribute. E Encrypted file attribute. I INROM file attribute. X XIP file attribute (execute in ROM, not shadowed in RAM). Reboots the server OS. This will cause the system on which the server is executing to reboot. The FTP Server will shut down cleanly before reboot. All client connections will be terminated. Cold boot is default except for the PocketPC build in which the default is warm boot. (SITE BOOT) Usage:

Copies a file from one location to another. (SITE COPY) Usage:

Example: QUOTE SITE COPY \Storage Card\one.dat \Stor-

QUOTE SITE COPY [source] [destination]

QUOTE SITE BOOT [WARM | COLD]

age Card\two.dat QUOTE SITE EXIT QUOTE SITE KILL [program | pid]

Exits the FTP Server. This command will shut down the FTP Server thus termina-

ting all client connections. (SITE EXIT) Usage:

Gives site command help information. (SITE HELP) QUOTE SITE HELP [command]

Usage:

Terminates a running program. (SITE KILL) Usage:

Opens or closes the program log. (SITE LOG) Usage:

Lists the running processes (SITE PLIST) Usage:

Starts a program running. If the program to run has spaces in path or filename, wrapping the name with single quotes is required. Usage:

Example: QUOTE SITE RUN \Storage Card\app.exe QUOTE SITE LOG [open [filename]| close]

QUOTE SITE RUN [program]

QUOTE SITE PLIST BOOT COPY EXIT HELP KILL LOG PLIST RUN 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 243 Chapter 7 Programming STATUS TIMEOUT EKEY EVAL GVAL PVAL QUOTE SITE STATUS Returns the current settings of the FTP Server. MAC, serial number, model, IP ad-

dress, network announcement information as well as OS memory usage are returned.

(SITE STATUS) Usage:

Toggles idle timeout between 120 to 1200 seconds (2 to 20 minutes). If this timer expires with no activity between the client and the server, the client connection will be disconnected. If the optional seconds argument is supplied, the server will set the connection timeout to the number of seconds specified. Default is 120 seconds or 2 minutes. (SITE TIMEOUT) Usage:

Gives site command electronic key information. (SITE HELP) Usage:

Gives site command electronic value information. (SITE HELP) Usage:

Gives site command general value information. (SITE HELP) Usage:

Gives site command value information. (SITE HELP) Usage:

QUOTE SITE TIMEOUT [seconds]

QUOTE SITE GVAL [command]

QUOTE SITE PVAL [command]

QUOTE SITE EKEY [command]

QUOTE SITE EVAL [command]

The remaining FTP requests specified in RFC 959 are recognized, but not implemented. The banner returned in the parenthetical portion of its greeting shows the version number of the FTP Server as well as the MAC address, serial num-

ber and OS of the machine hosting the server. The FTP Server supports browsing from the latest Netscape and Microsoft web browsers. Drag-and-drop capability is available using this environ-

ment. The FTPDCMDS subdirectory contains commands to use from the web browser. S Click EXITME.BIN to execute a SITE EXIT command. S Click REBOOTME.BIN to execute SITE BOOT command. S Use the GET command on these files to have the FTP Server execute these commands. S Security:

A customer configurable access control list may be installed on the 700 Series Computer. This list will allow customers to restrict access via the FTP Server to users they wish and is in addition to default Intermec accounts that are disabled using the -F0 option at runtime. The access control list is named FTPDCE.TXT and is placed in the same directory on the 700 Series Computer as the FTPDCE.EXE server. The FTP Server will encrypt this file to keep the information safe from unauthorized users. This file is encrypted when the FTP Server is started so a file that is placed onto the 700 Series Computer after the FTP Server starts will require a restart of the FTP Server to take effect. 244 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Programming The format of the FTPDCE.TXT is as follows:

FTPDCE:user1!passwd1<cr><lf>user2!passwd2<cr><lf>user3

!passwd3<cr><lf>... Note: The user accounts and passwords are case sensitive. Once the access control list is encrypted on the 700 Series Computer, the FTP Server hides this file from users. Once an access control list is installed on the 700 Series Computer, a new one is not accepted by the FTP Server until the previous one is removed. Encrypted access control lists are not portable between 700 Series Computers. Stopping the FTP Server from Your Application To allow application programmers the ability to programmatically shut down the FTP Server, the FTP Server periodically tests to see if a named event is signaled. The name for this event is ITC_IFTP_STOP (no quotes). For examples on how to use events, consult the Microsoft Developer Net-

work Library at http://www.msdn.com. The MSDN Library is an essential resource for developers using Microsoft tools, products, and technologies. It contains a bounty of technical programming information, including sample code, documentation, technical articles, and reference guides. This automatically starts the FTP Server (FTPDCE.EXE) when the 700 Series Computer is powered on. This is provided with the NDISTRAY program (the Network Driver Interface Specification tray application), which displays the popup menu that currently allows you to load and un-

load the network drivers. Tap the antenna icon in the System Tray of the Today screen (a sample antenna icon is circled below) for this pop-up menu. Autostart FTP 700 Color and 730 Screens 700CXL Screen 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 245 Chapter 7 Programming The default is to start the FTP Server at boot time, unless the following registry entry is defined and set to 0 which disables AutoFTP. 1 en-

ables the AutoFTP. The entry can be set from the NDISTRAY pop-up menu by selecting either AutoFTP On or AutoFTP Off. HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Intermec\Ndistray\StartupIFTP These new entries are located below the selections to load the network drivers. If the StartupIFTP registry key is not defined, the FTP Server is loaded by default, to provide out-of-the-box capability for customers who want to begin loading files to the 700 Series Computer without any prior configuration. Note: If a network driver is unloaded using the NDISTRAY popup menu, and the FTP Server is running, the FTP Server is stopped. On a resume, if AutoFTP is enabled and the FTP Server is running, it is stopped and restarted. NDISTRAY uses a helper application named RESE-

TIFTP to implement the restart on resume feature. To do an AutoFTP Installation Check:

1 Ensure the FTP Server is running out-of-the-box the first time. 2 Tap Start > Today to access the Today screen, then tap the antenna icon in the System Tray to bring up the NDISTRAY pop-up menu. Select AutoFTP Off to disable AutoFTP. Do a warm boot and confirm the FTP Server is not running. 3 Tap Start > Today to access the Today screen, then tap the antenna icon in the System Tray to bring up the NDISTRAY pop-up menu. Select AutoFTP On to enable AutoFTP, reboot, confirm it is running. 4 Unload the network driver when the FTP Server is running and con-

firm that it is not running any more. 5 Load the FTP Server, establish a connection, then suspend and resume. The server should still run, but the FTP connection to the client should be dropped. 246 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Programming Kernel I/O Controls This describes the KernelIoControl() functions available to application programmers. Most C++ applications will need to prototype the function as the following to avoid link and compile errors. extern C BOOL KernelIoControl(DWORD dwIoControlCode, LPVOID lpInBuf, DWORD nInBufSize, LPVOID lpOutBuf, DWORD nOutBufSize, LPDWORD lpBytesReturned);

IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICE_INFO This IOCTL returns either the platform type or the OEMPLATFORM name based on an input value. Syntax BOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICE_INFO, LPVOID lpInBuf, DWORD nInBufSize, LPVOID lpOutBuf, DWORD nOutBufSize, LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );

Parameters lpInBuf lpInBufSize lpOutBuf nOutBufSize lpBytesReturned Points to a DWORD containing either the SPI_GETPLAT-

FORMTYPE or SPI_GETOEMINFO value. Must be set to sizeof(DWORD). Must point to a buffer large enough to hold the return data of the function. If SPI_GETPLATFORMTYPE is specified in lpInBuf, then the PocketPC\0 Unicode string is returned. If SPI_GE-

TOEMINFO is specified in lpInBuf, then the Intermec 700\0 Unicode string is returned. The size of lpOutBuf in bytes. Must be large enough to hold the string returned. The actual number of bytes returned by the function for the data requested. Return Values Returns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails. GetLastError() may be used to get the extended error value. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 247 Chapter 7 Programming IOCTL_HAL_ITC_READ_PARM Usage

#include oemioctl.h Syntax BOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_ITC_READ_PARM,LPVOID lpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORD nOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );

Parameters lpInBuf nInBufSize lpOutBuf Points to this structure. See ID Field Values below. struct PARMS {

BYTE id;

BYTE ClassId;

Must be set to the size of the PARMS structure. Must point to a buffer large enough to hold the return data of the function. If this field is set to NULL and nOutBufSize is set to zero when the function is called the function will return the number bytes required by the buffer. The size of lpOutBuf in bytes. nOutBufSize lpBytesReturned Number of bytes returned by the function for the data requested. Return Values Returns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails. GetLastError() may be used to get the error value. Either ERROR_INVALID_PARAMETER or ERROR_INSUFFICIENT_BUFFER may be returned when this function is used to get the error. ID Field Values The id field of the PARMS structure may be one of the following values:

ID Field Values ITC_NVPARM_ETHERNET_ID This IOCTL returns the Ethernet 802.11 MAC Address. Six bytes are returned in the buffer pointed to by the lpOutBuffer parameter. ITC_NVPARM_SERIAL_NUM This IOCTL returns the serial number of the device in BCD format. Six bytes are returned in the buffer pointed to by the lpOutBuffer parameter. ITC_NVPARM_MANF_DATE This IOCTL returns the device date of manufacture in the BCD YYYY/MM/DD format. Four bytes are returned in the buffer pointed to by the lpOutBuffer parameter. ITC_NVPARM_SERVICE_DATE This IOCTL returns the devices date of last service in BCD YYYY/MM/DD format. Four bytes are returned in the buffer pointed to by the lpOutBuffer parameter. 248 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Programming ID Field Values (continued) ITC_NVPARM_DISPLAY_TYPE This IOCTL returns the devices display type. One byte is returned in the buffer pointed to by the lpOutBuffer parameter. ITC_NVPARM_EDG_IP This IOCTL returns the device Ethernet debug IP address. Four bytes are returned in the buffer pointed to by the lpOutBuffer parameter. ITC_NVPARM_EDBG_SUBNET This IOCTL returns the device Ethernet debug subnet mask. Four bytes are returned in the buffer pointed to by the lpOutBuffer parameter. ITC_NVPARM_ECN This IOCTL returns ECNs applied to the device in a bit array format. Four bytes are returned in the buffer pointed to by the lpOutBuffer parameter. ITC_NVPARM_CONTRAST This IOCTL returns the device default contrast setting. Two bytes are returned in the buffer pointed to by the lpOutBuffer parameter. ITC_NVPARM_MCODE This IOCTL returns the manufacturing configuration code for the device. Sixteen bytes are returned in the buffer pointed to by the lpOutBuffer parameter. ITC_NVPARM_VERSION_NUMBER This IOCTL returns the firmware version for various system components. These values for the ClassId field of the PARMS structure are allowed when ITC_NVPARM_VERSION_NUMBER is used in the id field:

S VN_CLASS_KBD Returns a five-byte string, including null terminator, that contains an ASCII value which represents the keypad microprocessor version in the system. The format of the string is x.xx with a terminating null character. S VN_CLASS_ASIC Returns a five-byte string, including null terminator, that contains an ASCII value which represents the version of the FPGA firmware in the system. The format of the string is x.xx with a terminating null character. S VN_CLASS_BOOTSTRAP Returns a five-byte string, including null terminator, that contains an ASCII value which represents the version of the Bootstrap Loader firmware in the system. The format of the string is x.xx with a terminating null character. ITC_NVPARM_INTERMEC_SOFTWARE_CONTENT This IOCTL reads the manufacturing flag bits from the non-volatile data store that dictates certain software parameters. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by lpOutBuffer that indicates if Intermec Content is enabled in the XIP regions. TRUE indicates that it is enabled. FALSE indicates that it is not enabled. ITC_NVPARM_ANTENNA_DIVERSITY This IOCTL reads the state of the antenna diversity flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by lpOutBuffer that indicates if there is a diversity antenna installed. TRUE indicates that it is installed. FALSE indicates that it is not installed. ITC_NVPARM_WAN_RI This IOCTL reads the state of the WAN ring indicator flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by lpOutBuffer that indicates the polarity of the WAN RI signal. TRUE indicates active high. FALSE indicates active low. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 249 Chapter 7 Programming ID Field Values (continued) ITC_NVPARM_RTC_RESTORE This IOCTL reads the state of the real-time clock restore flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by lpOutBuffer. TRUE indicates that the RTC is restored upon a cold boot. FALSE indicates that the RTC is not restored. ITC_NVPARM_INTERMEC_DATACOLLECTION_SW This IOCTL reads the state of the data collection software enabled flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointer to by lpOutBuffer that indicates the data collection software is to install at boot time. FALSE indicates the data collection software should not install. ITC_NVPARM_INTERMEC_DATACOLLECTION_HW This IOCTL reads the data collection hardware flags. A BYTE is returned in the buffer pointer to by lpOutBuffer that indicates the type of data collection hardware installed. The maximum possible value returned is ITC_DEVID_SCANHW_MAX. S ITC_DEVID_SCANHW_NONE No scanner hardware is installed. S ITC_DEVID_OEM2D_IMAGER OEM 2D imager is installed. S ITC_DEVID_INTERMEC2D_IMAGER Intermec 2D imager is installed. S ITC_DEVID_SE900_LASER SE900 laser is installed. S ITC_DEVID_SE900HS_LASER SE900HS laser is installed. S ITC_DEVID_INTERMEC_EVIO EVIO linear imager is installed. The high bit indicates whether the S6 scanning engine is installed. The bit mask for this is ITC_DEVID_S6ENGINE_MASK. A non-zero value indicates that the S6 scanning engine is installed. ITC_NVPARM_WAN_INSTALLED This IOCTL reads the state of the WAN radio installed flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by lpOutBuffer. TRUE indicates that the WAN radio is installed. FALSE indicates that no WAN radio is installed. ITC_NVPARM_WAN_FREQUENCY This IOCTL reads the state of the WAN radio frequency flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by lpOutBuffer. TRUE indicates that the WAN radio frequency is United States. FALSE indicates that the WAN radio frequency is European. ITC_NVPARM_WAN_RADIOTYPE This IOCTL reads the WAN radio ID installed by manufacturing. A BYTE is returned in the buffer pointer to by lpOutBuffer which indicates the type of WAN radio hardware installed. The maximum possible value returned is ITC_DEVID_WANRADIO_MAX. The current definitions are:

S ITC_DEVID_WANRADIO_NONE No WAN radio installed. S ITC_DEVID_WANRADIO_SIERRA_SB555 CDMA Sierra Wireless radio. S ITC_DEVID_WANRADIO_XIRCOM_GEM3503 GSM/GPRS Intel (Xircom) radio. S ITC_DEVID_WANRADIO_SIEMENS_MC45 GSM/GPRS Siemens radio. ITC_NVPARM_80211_INSTALLED This IOCTL reads the state of the 802.11b radio installed flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by lpOutBuffer. TRUE indicates that the 802.11b radio is installed. FALSE indicates that no 802.11b radio is installed. ITC_NVPARM_80211_RADIOTYPE This IOCTL reads the 802.11b radio ID installed by manufacturing. A BYTE is returned in the buffer pointer to by lpOutBuffer that indicates the type of 802.11b radio hardware installed. The maximum possible value returned is ITC_DEVID_80211RADIO_MAX. The current definitions are:

S ITC_DEVID_80211RADIO_NONE No 802.11b radio installed. S ITC_DEVID_80211RADIO_INTEL_2011B Intel 2011B radio installed. 250 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Programming ID Field Values (continued) ITC_NVPARM_BLUETOOTH_INSTALLED This IOCTL reads the state of the Bluetooth radio installed flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by lpOutBuffer. TRUE indicates that the Bluetooth radio is installed. FALSE indicates that no Bluetooth radio is installed. ITC_NVPARM_SERIAL2_INSTALLED This IOCTL reads the state of the serial 2 (COM2) device installed flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by lpOutBuffer. TRUE indicates that the serial 2 device is installed. FALSE indicates that no serial 2 device is installed. ITC_NVPARM_VIBRATE_INSTALLED This IOCTL reads the state of the vibrate device installed flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by lpOutBuffer. TRUE indicates that the vibrate device is installed. FALSE indicates that no vibrate device is installed. ITC_NVPARM_LAN9000_INSTALLED This IOCTL reads the state of the Ethernet device installed flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by lpOutBuffer. TRUE indicates that the Ethernet device is installed. FALSE indicates that no Ethernet device is installed. ITC_NVPARM_SIM_PROTECT_HW_INSTALLED This IOCTL reads the state of the SIM card protection hardware installed flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by lpOutBuffer. TRUE indicates that the SIM card protection hardware is installed. FALSE indicates that no SIM card protection hardware is installed. ITC_NVPARM_SIM_PROTECT_SW_INSTALLED This IOCTL reads the state of the SIM card protection software installed flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by lpOutBuffer. TRUE indicates that the SIM card protection software is installed. FALSE indicates that no SIM card protection software is installed. ITC_NVPARM_SIM_PROTECT_SW_INSTALLED This IOCTL reads the state of the SIM card protection software installed flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by lpOutBuffer. TRUE indicates that the SIM card protection software is installed. FALSE indicates that no SIM card protection software is installed. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 251 Chapter 7 Programming IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM Describes and enables the registry save location. Usage

#include oemioctl.h Syntax BOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM,LPVOID lpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize, LPVOID lpOutBuf, DWORD nOutBufSize, LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );

Parameters lpInBuf A single byte that may be one of the id values. See ID Field Values on the next page. Must be set to the size of the lpInBuf in bytes. Must point to a buffer large enough to hold the data to be written to the non-volatile data store. The size of lpOutBuf in bytes. nOutBufSize lpBytesReturned The number of bytes returned by the function. nInBufSize lpOutBuf Return Values Returns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails. GetLastError() may be used to get the error value. Either ERROR_INVALID_PARAMETER or ERROR_INSUFFICIENT_BUFFER may be returned when this function is used to get the error. 252 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Programming ID Field Values The id field of lpInBuf may be one of the following values:

ID Field Values ITC_REGISTRY_SAVE_ENABLE This function enables or disables the save registry to non-volatile media feature of the RegFlushKey() function. lpOutBuf must be set to zero (FALSE) if the feature is to be disabled or one (TRUE) if the feature is to be enabled. ITC_ DOCK_SWITCH This IOCTL sets a position of the dock switch. The dock switch may be set to either modem or serial positions. lpOutBuf must point to a buffer that contains a byte value of either DOCK_MODEM or DOCK_SERIAL as defined in OEMIOCTL.H; the value specifies the position the switch is to be set. The call appears as follows:

// port = DOCK_MODEM or DOCK_SERIAL as defined in oemioctl.h BOOL SetDockSwitch( BYTE port)

DWORD cmd = ITC_DOCK_SWITCH;

DWORD cbRet;

return KernelIoControl(IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM,&cmd, sizeof(cmd),

&port,sizeof(port),&cbRet)

ITC_ WAKEUP_MASK This IOCTL sets a bit mask that represents the mask for the five programmable wakeup keys. The I/O key is not a programmable wakeup key. By default it is always the system resume key and all other keys are set to disable key wakeup. A zero in a bit position masks the wakeup for that key. A one in a bit position enables wakeup for that key. lpOutBuf must point to a buffer that contains a byte value of a wakeup mask consisting of the ORed constants as defined in OEMIOCTL.H. Only the following keys are programmable as wakeup events.

#define SCANNER_TRIGGER 1

#define SCANNER_LEFT 2

#define SCANNER_RIGHT 4 8

#define GOLD_A1

#define GOLD_A2 0x10 ITC_AMBIENT_KEYBOARD (does not apply to the 730 Computer) This IOCTL sets the threshold for the keypad ambient sensor. This can be a value from 0 (always off) to 255 (always on). lpOutBuf must point to a buffer that contains a byte value of the desired setting. ITC_AMBIENT_FRONTLIGHT (does not apply to the 730 Computer) This IOCTL sets the threshold for the frontlight ambient sensor. This can be a value from 0 (always off) to 255. lpOutBuf must point to a buffer that contains a byte value of the desired setting. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 253 Chapter 7 Programming IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICEID This IOCTL returns the device ID. There are two types of device IDs supported, which are differentiated based on the size of the output buffer. The UUID is returned if the buffer size is set to sizeof(UNIQUE_DEVICEID), otherwise the oldstyle device ID is re-

turned. Usage

#include pkfuncs.h

#include deviceid.h Syntax BOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICEID,LPVOID lpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORD nOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );

Parameters lpInBuf lpInBufSize lpOutBuf nOutBufSize Should be set to NULL. STRICT_ID settings are not supported. Should be set to zero. Must point to a UNIQUE_DEVICEID structure as defined by DEVICEID.H if the UUID is to be returned The size of the UNIQUE_DEVICEID in bytes if the UUID is to be returned. A DEVICE_ID as defined by PKFUNCS.H is re-

turned if the size in bytes is greater than or equal to sizeof(DE-

VICE_ID). lpBytesReturned The number of bytes returned by the function. Return Values Returns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails. GetLastError() may be used to get the extended error value. 254 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Programming IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO Returns the HAL version information of the Pocket PC image. Usage

#include oemioctl.h Syntax BOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO,LPVOID lpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORD nOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );

Parameters lpInBuf lpInBufSize lpOutBuf Should be set to NULL. Should be set to zero. Must point to a VERSIONINFO structure as defined by OEMIOCTL.H. The fields should have these values:

S cboemverinfo sizeof (tagOemVerInfo);

S verinfover 1 S sig;

ITC\0 S id;

N S tgtcustomer S tgtplat SeaRay S tgtplatversion Current build version number S tgtcputype[8]; Intel\0 S tgtcpu S tgtcoreversion S date Build time S time Build date The size of VERSIONINFO in bytes. PXA255\0;

nOutBufSize lpBytesReturned Returns sizeof(PVERSIONINFO). Return Values Returns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails. GetLastError() may be used to get the extended error value. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 255 Chapter 7 Programming IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOTLOADER_VERINFO Returns the HAL version information of the Pocket PC image. Usage

#include oemioctl.h Syntax BOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO,LPVOID lpInBuf, DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORD nOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );

Parameters lpInBuf nInBufSize lpOutBuf Should be set to NULL. Should be set to zero. Must point to a VERSIONINFO structure as defined by OEMIOCTL.H. The fields should have these values:

S cboemverinfo Sizeof (tagOemVerInfo);

S verinfover 1 S sig;

ITC\0 S id;

B S tgtcustomer S tgtplat SeaRay S tgtplatversion Current build version number of the S tgtcputype[8]; Intel\0;

S tgtcpu S tgtcoreversion S date Build time S time Build date The size of VERSIONINFO in bytes. bootstrap loader PXA255\0 nOutBufSize lpBytesReturned The number of bytes returned to lpOutBuf. Return Values Returns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails. GetLastError() may be used to get the extended error value. 256 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT Causes the system to perform a warm-boot. The object store is retained. Chapter 7 Programming Usage

#include oemioctl.h Syntax BOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT,LPVOID lpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORD nOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );

Parameters lpInBuf lpInBufSize lpOutBuf nOutBufSize Should be set to NULL. Should be set to zero. Should be NULL. Should be zero. Return Values None. IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT Causes the system to perform a cold-boot. The object store is cleared. Usage

#include oemioctl.h Syntax BOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT,LPVOID lpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORD nOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );

Parameters lpInBuf lpInBufSize lpOutBuf nOutBufSize Return Values None. Should be set to NULL. Should be set to zero. Should be NULL. Should be zero. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 257 Chapter 7 Programming IOCTL_HAL_GET_RESET_INFO This IOCTL code allows software to check the type of the most recent reset. Usage

#include oemioctl.h Syntax BOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_GET_RESET_INFO,LPVOID lpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORD nOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );

Parameters lpInBuf lpInBufSize lpOutBuf nOutBufSize lpBytesReturned The number of bytes returned by the function. Should be set to NULL. Should be set to zero. Must point to a HAL_RESET_INFO structure. See sample below. The size of HAL_RESET_INFO in bytes. Return Values Returns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails. GetLastError() may be used to get the extended error value. Sample typedef struct {

DWORD ResetReason;

DWORD ObjectStoreState;

} HAL_RESET_INFO, * PHAL_RESET_INFO;

// Reset reason types

#define HAL_RESET_TYPE_UNKNOWN

#define HAL_RESET_REASON_HARDWARE

#define HAL_RESET_REASON_SOFTWARE

#define HAL_RESET_REASON_WATCHDOG

#define HAL_RESET_BATT_FAULT

#define HAL_RESET_VDD_FAULT

// Object store state flags

#define HAL_OBJECT_STORE_STATE_UNKNOWN

#define HAL_OBJECT_STORE_STATE_CLEAR

// most recent reset type

// state of object store 0 1 // cold 2 // suspend 4 8 // power fail 16 // warm boot 0 1 258 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Programming IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOT_DEVICE This IOCTL code allows software to check which device CE booted from. Usage

#include oemioctl.h Syntax BOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOT_DEVICE,LPVOID lpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORD nOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );

Parameters lpInBuf lpInBufSize lpOutBuf Should be set to NULL. Should be set to zero. Must point to a buffer large enough to hold a DWORD (4 bytes) that contains the boot device. The following boot devices are sup-

ported:

0

#define HAL_BOOT_DEVICE_UNKNOWN 1

#define HAL_BOOT_DEVICE_ROM_XIP

#define HAL_BOOT_DEVICE_ROM 2 3

#define HAL_BOOT_DEVICE_PCMCIA_ATA

#define HAL_BOOT_DEVICE_PCMCIA_LINEAR 4

#define HAL_BOOT_DEVICE_IDE_ATA 5

#define HAL_BOOT_DEVICE_IDE_ATAPI 6 The size of lpOutBuf in bytes (4). nOutBufSize lpBytesReturned The number of bytes returned by the function. Return Values Returns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails. GetLastError() may be used to get the extended error value. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 259 Chapter 7 Programming IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT Causes the system to perform a warm-boot. The object store is retained. Usage

#include oemioctl.h Syntax BOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT,LPVOID lpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORD nOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );

Parameters lpInBuf lpInBufSize lpOutBuf nOutBufSize Should be set to NULL. Should be set to zero. Should be NULL. Should be zero. Return Values None. 260 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Programming IOCTL_PROCESSOR_INFORMATION Returns processor information. Usage

#include pkfuncs.h Syntax BOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_PROCESSOR_INFORMATION,LPVOID lpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORD nOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );

Parameters lpInBuf nInBufSize lpOutBuf Should be set to NULL. Should be set to zero. Should be a pointer to the PROCESSOR_INFO structure. The PROCESSOR_INFO structure stores information that describes the CPU more descriptively.

// Set to value 1 wVersion;

szProcessorCore[40]; // ARM\0

// 4 wCoreRevision;

szProcessorName[40]; // PXA255\0

// 0 wProcessorRevision;

szCatalogNumber[100]; // 0

// Intel Corporation\0 szVendor[100];

dwInstructionSet;

// 0 dwClockSpeed;

// 400 typedef __PROCESSOR_INFO {

WORD WCHAR WORD WCHAR WORD WCAHR WCHAR DWORD DWORD

nOutBufSize lpBytesReturned Returns sizeof(PROCESSOR_INFO);

Should be set to sizeof(PROCESSOR_INFO) in bytes. Return Values Returns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails. GetLastError() may be used to get the extended error value. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 261 Chapter 7 Programming IOCTL_GET_CPU_ID Returns Xscale processor ID. Usage

#include oemioctl.h Syntax BOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_GET_CPU_ID,LPVOID lpInBuf, DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORD nOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );

Parameters lpInBuf lpInBufSize lpOutBuf nOutBufSize lpBytesReturned Returns sizeof(PROCESSOR_INFO);

Should point to a CPUIdInfo structure defined in OEMIOCTL.H. Should be sizeof(CPUIdInfo). Should be NULL. Should be set to 0. Return Values Returns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails. GetLastError() may be used to get the extended error value. 262 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Network Selection APIs Chapter 7 Programming The Network Selection APIs change the network adapter configuration programmatically. Both drivers support the same IOCTL function num-

bers for loading and unloading the drivers. Loading and unloading of the 802.11b driver is performed by the FWL1:

device in the system by performing DeviceIOControl() calls to the driver. Loading and unloading of the driver for the built-in Ethernet adapter is performed by the SYI1: device in the system by performing DeviceIOControl() calls to the driver. S For loading an NDIS driver associated with an adapter, the IOCTL is IOCTL_LOAD_NDIS_MINIPORT. S For unloading NDIS drivers associated with an adapter the IOCTL is IOCTL_UNLOAD_NDIS_MINIPORT. Example

#include <winioctl.h>

#include sysio.h void DoLoad(int nDevice) {

LPTSTR devs[] = { _T(SYI1:), _T(FWL1:) };

HANDLE hLoaderDev;

DWORD bytesReturned;

hLoaderDev = CreateFile(devs[nDevice], GENERIC_READ|GENERIC_WRITE, 0, NULL, OPEN_EXISTING, 0, NULL);

if (hLoaderDev != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE) {

if (!DeviceIoControl( hLoaderDev, IOCTL_LOAD_NDIS_MINIPORT, NULL, -1, NULL, 0,

&bytesReturned, NULL)){

MessageBox(NULL, TEXT(SYSIO IoControl Failed), TEXT(Network loader),MB_ICONHAND);

if (hLoaderDev!=INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE) CloseHandle(hLoaderDev);

hLoaderDev = INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE; // bad handle

}else {

CloseHandle(hLoaderDev);

void DoUnload(int nDevice) {

LPTSTR devs[] = { _T(SYI1:), _T(FWL1:) };

HANDLE hLoaderDev;

DWORD bytesReturned;

hLoaderDev = CreateFile(devs[nDevice], GENERIC_READ|GENERIC_WRITE, 0, NULL, OPEN_EXISTING, 0, NULL);

if (hLoaderDev != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE) {

if (!DeviceIoControl( hLoaderDev, IOCTL_UNLOAD_NDIS_MINIPORT, NULL, -1, NULL, 0,

&bytesReturned, NULL)){

MessageBox(NULL, TEXT(SYSIO IoControl Failed),TEXT(Network loader),MB_ICONHAND);

if (hLoaderDev!=INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE) CloseHandle(hLoaderDev);

hLoaderDev = INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE; // bad handle

}else {

CloseHandle(hLoaderDev);

700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 263 Chapter 7 Programming The API provided by Intermec Technologies exposes a limited set of rou-

tines that allows a programmer to access and affect the 802.11b network interface card from within their application. The routines provided also reads/writes values to the CE registry that pertain to the 802.11b radio driver. By using the provided functions, a programmer can alter the 802.11b parameters of Network Name (SSID), WEP keys, infrastructure modes, radio channel, and power management modes. A programmer can also retrieve network connect status and signal strength indication from the RF network card. The API is contained within the 80211API.DLL file that should be pres-

ent in any load with the 802.11b networking installed. NETWLAN.DLL PRISMNDS.DLL 80211API.DLL MOD80211.DLL This file is the 802.11b driver. It is present in all 700 CE loads that use the 802.11b network interface card. This file is an Intermec authored file that provides the programmer with a set of API calls to configure or monitor status of the 802.11b network. The CORE module for the 802.11b NIC. It provides the 802.11b status information dis-

played when the CORE application is running. 80211CONF.EXE This is the Control Panel for configuring the 802.11b network parameters. Note that it is an EXE file and is actually called by CPL802.CPL (see below). It is also called by the CORE ap-

plication when the Configuration button is pressed. A control panel application that does nothing but call 80211CONF.EXE. Internally manages the Scan List activity. This handles profile management for radio configurable values. CPL802.CPL 80211SCAN.EXE 802PM.DLL URODDSVC.EXE This handles radio configuration and security authentication based on a selected profile. The Profile Manager supports up to four radio configuration profiles. These profiles are the same as those set by the Wireless Network control panel applet that runs on the Windows CE unit. You can configure different 802.11b profiles and switch between them using the 802.11 API. See the ConfigureProfile() function on page 280 for more information. 264 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Basic Connect/Disconnect Functions Chapter 7 Programming Below are functions available for the 700 Series Color Computer when enabled with the 802.11b radio module. RadioConnect() Connects to the available radio. Use this function if you plan on using a lot of API calls that talk directly to the radio. Note that the 802.11b radio must be enabled via NDISTRAY before you can connect to it. Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions UINT RadioConnect( );

None. ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, otherwise ERR_CONNECT_FAILED Call this function before you call any other function found within this API. It hunts out and connects to the 802.11b radio available on the system. Check extended error codes if it returns anything else for information.

#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING typedef UINT (*PFN_RadioConnect)();

#else UINT RadioConnect();

#endif RadioDisconnect() Call this function when done using the 802.11 API to clean up a connection from a previous RadioConnect() call. If you do not call this function, you may leave memory allocated. Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions UINT RadioDisconnect( );

None. ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, otherwise ERR_CONNECT_FAILED. None.

#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING typedef UINT (*PFN_RadioDisconnect)();

#else UINT RadioDisconnect();

#endif 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 265 Chapter 7 Programming RadioDisassociate() Call this function to have the 802.11b radio disassociate from the current service set. The radio then enters an off mode until it is woken again by setting the Service Set Identifier (SSID). Also, the NDIS driver generates an NDIS media disconnect event. Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions UINT RadioDisassociate( );

None. ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, otherwise ERR_CONNECT_FAILED. None.

#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING typedef UINT (*PFN_RadioDisassociate)();

#else UINT RadioDisassociate();

#endif Query Information Functions Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions GetAssociationStatus() Call this function to obtain the radios current association status with a service set. UINT GetAssociationStatus( ULONG & );

NDIS_RADIO_ASSOCIATED NDIS_RADIO_SCANNING Indicates the radio is associated with an access point Indicates the radio is looking for an access point with which to associate ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed. Data is only valid if the function returns ERROR_SUCCESS. Also, if ERROR_SUCCESS is re-

turned, your ULONG reference is populated by one of the parameters listed above.

#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING typedef UINT (*PFN_GetAssociationStatus)(ULONG &);

#else UINT GetAssociationStatus(ULONG &);

#endif 266 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Programming GetAuthenticationMode() Call this function to obtain the radios current authentication mode. UINT GetAuthenticationMode( ULONG & );

NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_OPEN NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_SHARED NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_AUTO NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_ERROR 802.11b Open Authentication. Indicates that the radio is using an open system. 802.11b Shared Authentication. Indicates that the radio is using a shared key. Auto switch between Open/Shared. Indicates automatic detection is used when available. Defined as error value. Indicates the authen-

tication mode was not determined at this time or is unknown. WPA Authentication WPA Preshared Key Authentication NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_WPA NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_WPA_PSK NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_WPA_NONE WPA None ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed. Data is only valid if ERROR_SUCCESS is returned. Also, if ERROR_SUCCESS is returned, your USHORT reference is populated with one of the parameters listed above.

#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING typedef UINT (*PFN_GetAuthenticationMode)(ULONG &);

#else UINT GetAuthenticationMode(ULONG &);

#endif Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions GetBSSID() Call this function to get the current MAC address (BSSID) of the service set. In ESS mode, this is the MAC address of the access point the radio is associated with. In IBSS mode, this is a randomly generated MAC address, and serves as the ID for the IBSS. Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions UINT GetBSSID( TCHAR * );

Pointer to a character array, which is populated with the current BSSID after a successful call. ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed. If ERROR_SUCCESS is returned, your TCHAR array is populated with the BSSID of the cur-

rent service set: xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx

#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING typedef UINT (*PFN_GetBSSID)(TCHAR *);

#else UINT GetBSSID(TCHAR *);

#endif 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 267 Chapter 7 Programming Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions GetDiversity() Call this function to get the current diversity setting of your 802.11b ra-

dio. This uses an optional NDIS5.1 OID to query the radio, of which a large number of 802.11b devices do not support. This may be inaccurate. The primary antenna is selected. The secondary antenna is selected. The radio is in diversity mode, and uses both antennas UINT GetDiversity(USHORT *);

ANT_PRIMARY ANT_SECONDARY ANT_DIVERSITY ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed. If ERROR_SUCCESS is returned, your USHORT reference is populated with one of the parame-

ters listed above.

#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING typedef UINT (*PFN_GetDiversity)(USHORT *);

#else UINT GetDiversity(USHORT *);

#endif GetLinkSpeed() Call this function to get the current link speed of the 802.11b radio. UINT GetLinkSpeed( int & );

This function accepts an int reference, and your int is populated with the current link speed, in Mbps, rounded to the nearest whole integer, for example: 1, 2, 5, 11, etc. ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed. Data returned is valid if ERROR_SUCCESS is returned.

#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING typedef UINT (*PFN_GetLinkSpeed)(int &);

#else UINT GetLinkSpeed(int &);

#endif 268 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Programming Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions GetMac() Call this function to get the MAC address of the 802.11b radio. UINT GetMac( TCHAR * );

Pointer to a character array, which is populated with the MAC address after a successful call. ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed. If ERROR_SUCCESS is returned, your TCHAR array is populated with the formatted MAC address of the adapter, as follows: xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx

#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING typedef UINT (*PFN_GetMac)(TCHAR *);

#else UINT GetMac(TCHAR *);

#endif Note: Be sure to call RadioConnect() before calling this function for this function to work properly. GetNetworkMode() Call this function to get the current Network Mode (SSID) for the 802.11b radio. Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions UINT GetNetworkMode( ULONG & );

NDIS_NET_MODE_IBSS NDIS_NET_MODE_ESS NDIS_NET_MODE_UNKNOWN Anything Else/Unknown Error NDIS_NET_AUTO_UNKNOWN 802.11 Ad-Hoc Mode. 802.11 Infrastructure Mode. Automatic Selection. Use of this option is not supported or recommended. 5 Gigahertz 54 Mbps 802.11g 2.4 Gigahertz NDIS_NET_TYPE_OFDM_5G NDIS_NET_TYPE_OFDM_2_4G ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed. If ERROR_SUCCESS is returned, your ULONG reference is populated with one of the parame-

ters listed above.

#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING typedef UINT (*PFN_GetNetworkMode)(ULONG &);

#else UINT GetNetworkMode(ULONG &);

#endif 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 269 Chapter 7 Programming Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions GetNetworkType() Call this function to get the current network type of the radio. Do not confuse this with GetNetworkMode(). Indicates this is a frequency hopping radio. Indicates that this is a direct sequence radio. Indicates this radio type is unknown or undefined. UINT GetNetworkType( ULONG & );

NDIS_NET_TYPE_FH NDIS_NET_TYPE_DS NDIS_NET_TYPE_UNDEFINED ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed. If ERROR_SUCCESS is returned, your ULONG reference is populated with one of the parame-

ters listed above.

#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING typedef UINT (*PFN_GetNetworkType)(ULONG &);

#else UINT GetNetworkType(ULONG &);

#endif GetSSID() Call this function to get the desired SSID of the 802.11b radio. UINT GetSSID( TCHAR * );

Pointer to a character array, which is populated with the current SSID when successful. ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed. If ERROR_SUCCESS is returned, your TCHAR array is populated with the desired SSID.

#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING typedef UINT (*PFN_GetSSID)(TCHAR *);

#else UINT GetSSID(TCHAR *);

#endif Note: Call RadioConnect() before this function for this function to work properly. 270 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Programming Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions GetPowerMode() Call this function to get the current power savings mode of the radio. Continuous Access Mode (ie: always on). Power Saving Mode. Unknown power mode. Auto. (Available for 730 Mobile Computers) UINT GetPowerMode( ULONG & );

NDIS_RADIO_POWER_MODE_CAM NDIS_RADIO_POWER_MODE_PSP NDIS_RADIO_POWER_UNKNOWN NDIS_RADIO_POWER_AUTO NDIS_RADIO_POWER_MODE_FAST_PSP Fast PSP, good savings, fast ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed. If ERROR_SUCCESS is returned, your ULONG reference is populated with one of the parame-

ters listed above.

#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING typedef UINT (*PFN_GetPowerMode)(ULONG &);

#else UINT GetPowerMode(ULONG &);

#endif Note: Do not use Automatic Switching mode at this time. GetRSSI() Call this function to get the current RSSI (Radio Signal Strength Indica-

tor), in Dbm. UINT GetRSSI( ULONG & );

References a ULONG that is populated with the current RSSI after a successful call. ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed. If ERROR_SUCCESS is returned, your ULONG reference contains the RSSI. Valid RSSI range is from 100 Dbm to 30 Dbm.

#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING typedef UINT (*PFN_GetRSSI)(ULONG &);

#else UINT GetRSSI(ULONG &);

#endif 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 271 Chapter 7 Programming Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions GetTXPower() Call this function to get the current transmit power of the radio. 63 mW 30 mW 15 mW 5 mW 1 mW Unknown Value or Error. UINT GetTXPower( ULONG & );

NDIS_POWER_LEVEL_63 NDIS_POWER_LEVEL_30 NDIS_POWER_LEVEL_15 NDIS_POWER_LEVEL_5 NDIS_POWER_LEVEL_1 NDIS_POWER_LEVEL_UNKNOWN ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed. If ERROR_SUCCESS is returned, your ULONG reference is populated with the TX power in milliwatts (mW). Valid ranges are from 5 mW to 100 mW.

#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING typedef UINT (*PFN_GetTXPower)(ULONG &);

#else UINT GetTXPower(ULONG &);

#endif 272 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Programming GetWepStatus() Call this function to get the current state of the radios WEP and encryp-

tion levels. Syntax Parameters UINT GetWepStatus( ULONG & );

NDIS_ENCRYPTION_1_ENABLED NDIS_ENCRYPTION_DISABLED WEP is enabled; TKIP and AES are not enabled, and a transmit key may or may not be available.

(same as NDIS_RADIO_WEP_ENABLED) Indicates that AES, TKIP, and WEP are disabled, and a transmit key is available. (Same as NDIS_RADIO_WEP_DISABLED) NDIS_ENCRYPTION_NOT_SUPPORTED Indicates encryption (WEP, TKIP, AES) is not NDIS_ENCRYPTION_1_KEY_ABSENT NDIS_ENCRYPTION_2_ENABLED NDIS_ENCRYPTION_2_KEY_ABSENT NDIS_ENCRYPTION_3_ENABLED NDIS_ENCRYPTION_3_KEY_ABSENT supported. (Same as NDIS_RADIO_WEP_NOT_SUPPORTED) Indicates that AES, TKIP, and WEP are disabled, and a transmit key is not available.

(Same as NDIS_RADIO_WEP_ABSENT) Indicates that TKIP and WEP are enabled; AES is not enabled, and a transmit key is available. Indicates that there are no transmit keys available for use by TKIP or WEP, TKIP and WEP are enabled; and AES is not enabled. Indicates that AES, TKIP, and WEP are enabled, and a transmit key is available. Indicates that there are no transmit keys available for use by AES, TKIP, or WEP, and AES, TKIP, and WEP are enabled. Return Values Remarks Definitions ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed. If ERROR_SUCCESS is returned, your ULONG reference is populated with one of the parameters listed above.

#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING typedef UINT (*PFN_GetWepStatus)(ULONG &);

#else UINT GetWepStatus(ULONG &);

#endif 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 273 Chapter 7 Programming GetRadioIpAddress() Call this function to obtain a formatted string indicating whether DHCP is enabled, and what is the current adapters IP address. Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions UINT GetRadioIpAddress( TCHAR * );

Pointer to a character array that contains the formatted string of the IP address and static/DHCP information. ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed. If ERROR_SUCCESS is returned, your TCHAR array contains a string formatted as follows:

IP: DHCP Enabled\nxxx.xxx.xxx.xxx\n or IP: DHCP Disabled\nxxx.xxx.xxx.xxx\n

#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING typedef UINT (*PFN_GetRadioIpAddress)(TCHAR *);

#else UINT GetRadioIpAddress(TCHAR *);

#endif GetCCXStatus() Call this function to get information about the current CCX status of the adapter. Disable EAP mode. Enable EAP mode. UINT GetCCXStatus( ULONG & );

NDIS_NETWORK_EAP_MODE_OFF NDIS_NETWORK_EAP_MODE_ON ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed. If ERROR_SUCCESS is returned, your ULONG reference is populated with one of parameters listed above.

#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING typedef UINT (*PFN_GetCCXStatus)(ULONG &);

#else UINT GetCCXStatus(ULONG &);

#endif 274 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Programming Set Information Functions AddWep() Call this function to add a WEP key to the radio. Call this function multi-

ple times when adding more than one WEP key. Save the default key for last. For example, when adding four keys, and the second key is the default transmit key, add keys 1, 3 and 4 before you add key 2. Note: Add the default transmit key last. Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions UINT AddWep( ULONG, BOOL, TCHAR * );

ULONG BOOL TCHAR Specifies the key index to be set. Valid values are 03. When set to TRUE, specifies that this key is the default transmit key. Pointer to a character array that specifies the key data in either HEX (length of 10 or 26) or ASCII (length of 5 or 13). This string must be null-terminated. ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed. When adding WEP keys to the radio, turn off encryption before you add the keys, then turn en-

cryption back on afterwards. Also, be sure to add the TRANSMIT KEY last.

#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING typedef UINT (*PFN_AddWep)(ULONG, BOOL, TCHAR *);

#else UINT AddWep(ULONG, BOOL, TCHAR *);

#endif EnableWep() Enables or disables WEP encryption on the radio (TRUE/FALSE). UINT EnableWep( BOOL );

Set BOOL to TRUE to enable WEP encryption, or FALSE to disable WEP encryption. ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed. Call this function with TRUE as the parameter to enable WEP encryption. Call this function with the FALSE parameter to disable WEP encryption. This call is an alias for EncryptionStatus(). See the following:

EnableWEP(TRUE) = EncryptionStatus(NDIS_ENCRYPTION_1_ENABLED) EnableWEP(FALSE) = EncryptionStatus(NDIS_ENCRYPTION_DISABLED)

#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING typedef UINT (*PFN_EnableWep)(BOOL);

#else UINT EnableWep(BOOL);

#endif 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 275 Chapter 7 Programming EncryptionStatus() Call this function to set the desired encryption status. Syntax Parameters UINT EncryptionStatus( UINT mode );

NDIS_ENCRYPTION_1_ENABLED NDIS_ENCRYPTION_DISABLED WEP is enabled; TKIP and AES are not enabled, and a transmit key may or may not be available. (same as NDIS_RADIO_WEP_ENABLED) Indicates that AES, TKIP, and WEP are disabled, and a transmit key is available. (Same as NDIS_RADIO_WEP_DISABLED) NDIS_ENCRYPTION_NOT_SUPPORTED Indicates that encryption (WEP, TKIP, and NDIS_ENCRYPTION_1_KEY_ABSENT NDIS_ENCRYPTION_2_ENABLED NDIS_ENCRYPTION_2_KEY_ABSENT NDIS_ENCRYPTION_3_ENABLED NDIS_ENCRYPTION_3_KEY_ABSENT AES) is not supported. (Same as NDIS_RADIO_WEP_NOT_SUPPORTED) Indicates that AES, TKIP, and WEP are disabled, and a transmit key is not available.

(Same as NDIS_RADIO_WEP_ABSENT) Indicates that TKIP and WEP are enabled; AES is not enabled, and a transmit key is available. Indicates that there are no transmit keys available for use by TKIP or WEP, TKIP and WEP are enabled; and AES is not enabled. Indicates that AES, TKIP, and WEP are enabled, and a transmit key is available. Indicates that there are no transmit keys available for use by AES, TKIP, or WEP, and AES, TKIP, and WEP are enabled. Return Values Remarks Definitions ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed. None.

#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING typedef UINT (*PFN_EncryptionStatus)(UINT mode);

#else UINT EncryptionStatus(UINT mode);

#endif 276 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Programming SetAuthenticationMode() Call this function to set the desired authentication mode. UINT SetAuthenticationMode( ULONG );

NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_OPEN NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_SHARED NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_AUTO NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_ERROR 802.11b Open Authentication. Indicates that the radio is using an open system. 802.11b Shared Authentication. Indicates that the radio is using a shared key. Auto switch between Open/Shared. Indicates automatic detection is used when available. Defined as error value. Indicates the authenti-

cation mode was not determined at this time or is unknown. WPA Authentication WPA Preshared Key Authentication NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_WPA NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_WPA_PSK NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_WPA_NONE WPA None ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed. None.

#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING typedef UINT (*PFN_SetAuthenticationMode)(ULONG);

#else UINT SetAuthenticationMode(ULONG);

#endif Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions SetChannel() This function is currently not implemented. Ad-hoc networks automatical-

ly select a channel or use the already existing channel. Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions UINT SetChannel( USHORT );

USHORT value that should populate with the desired channel (114). None. None.

#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING typedef UINT (*PFN_SetChannel)(USHORT);

#else UINT SetChannel(USHORT);

#endif 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 277 Chapter 7 Programming SetNetworkMode() Call this function to set the desired Network Mode. Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions UINT SetNetworkMode( ULONG );

NDIS_NET_MODE_IBSS NDIS_NET_MODE_ESS NDIS_NET_MODE_UNKNOWN Anything Else/Unknown Error NDIS_NET_AUTO_UNKNOWN 802.11 Ad-Hoc Mode. 802.11 Infrastructure Mode. Automatic Selection. Use of this option is not supported or recommended. 5 Gigahertz 54 Mbps 802.11g 2.4 Gigahertz NDIS_NET_TYPE_OFDM_5G NDIS_NET_TYPE_OFDM_2_4G ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed. None.

#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING typedef UINT (*PFN_SetNetworkMode)(ULONG);

#else UINT SetNetworkMode(ULONG);

#endif SetPowerMode() Call this function to set the desired power mode. Continuous Access Mode (ie: always on). Power Saving Mode. Unknown power mode. Auto. (Available for 730 Computers) UINT SetPowerMode( ULONG mode );

NDIS_RADIO_POWER_MODE_CAM NDIS_RADIO_POWER_MODE_PSP NDIS_RADIO_POWER_UNKNOWN NDIS_RADIO_POWER_AUTO NDIS_RADIO_POWER_MODE_FAST_PSP Fast PSP, good savings, fast ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed. None.

#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING typedef UINT (*PFN_SetPowerMode)(ULONG mode);

#else UINT SetPowerMode(ULONG mode);

#endif 278 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Programming SetSSID() Call this function with a pointer to a null-terminated TCHAR array con-

taining the desired SSID to set the desired SSID of the adapter. Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions UINT SetSSID( TCHAR * );

Pointer to a character array that contains the desired SSID. This should be null-terminated. ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed. If an ANY network is desired, pass in _T(ANY).

#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING typedef UINT (*PFN_SetSSID)(TCHAR *);

#else UINT SetSSID(TCHAR *);

#endif Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions SetCCXStatus() Call this function to set the desired CCX / Network EAP status. Disable Network EAP / CCX Enable Network EAP / CCX UINT SetCCXStatus( ULONG );

NDIS_NETWORK_EAP_MODE_OFF NDIS_NETWORK_EAP_MODE_ON ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed. None.

#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING typedef UINT (*PFN_SetCCXStatus)(ULONG);

#else UINT SetCCXStatus(ULONG);

#endif SetMixedCellMode() Call this function to set the desired mixed cell mode. Disable Mixed Cell Enable Mixed Cell UINT SetMixedCellMode( ULONG );

NDIS_MIXED_CELL_OFF NDIS_MIXED_CELL_ON ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed. None.

#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING typedef UINT (*PFN_SetMixedCellMode)(ULONG);

#else UINT SetMixedCellMode(ULONG);

#endif 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 279 Chapter 7 Programming Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions RemoveWep() Call this function with a key index of 03 to remove the WEP key at that index. UINT RemoveWep( ULONG );

ULONG value that specifies the key index to set. Valid values are 03. ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed. On disassociation with all BSSIDs of the current service set, WEP key is removed by the adapter.

#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING typedef UINT (*PFN_RemoveWEP)(ULONG);

#else UINT RemoveWEP(ULONG);

#endif Helper Functions Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions ConfigureProfile() If using the Intermec 802.11b Profile Management system, you can pro-

gram the API to configure the radio to a specific profile by passing the profile name. UINT ConfigureProfile( TCHAR * );

Pointer to a character array that contains the profile name. This should be null-terminated. ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed. Call this function with a pointer to a null-terminated TCHAR array that contains the name of the profile you wish to configure. This function reads profile data from the profile manager, sets that profile as the default active profile, and configures the radio appropriately. If needed, the supplicant and any other related services are automatically started and stopped.

#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING typedef UINT (*PFN_ConfigureProfile)(TCHAR *);

#else UINT ConfigureProfile(TCHAR *);

#endif 280 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Programming EnableZeroConfig() This enables or disables the Wireless Zero Configuration Wizard from Microsoft. After calling this function, a warm-boot is required for the change to take effect. Note: Enabling this function effectively disables all the SET commands in this API. Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions Enable Wireless Zero Config Disable Wireless Zero Config UINT EnableZeroConfig( USHORT );

TRUE FALSE ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_ZERO_CONFIG_CHANGE_FAILED when the query failed. Call this function to set the desired Zero Config status.

#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING typedef UINT (*PFN_EnableZeroConfig)(USHORT);

#else UINT EnableZeroConfig(USHORT);

#endif isZeroConfigEnabled() Call this function to determine whether Zero Config is currently enabled. Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions UINT isZeroConfigEnabled( );

None. TRUE if ZeroConfig is enabled, and FALSE if it is disabled. None.

#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING typedef UINT (*PFN_isZeroConfigEnabled)();

#else UINT isZeroConfigEnabled();

#endif isOrinoco() Call this function to determine whether the current radio is an ORiNOCO, Lucent, or WaveLAN radio. Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions UINT isOrinoco( );

None. TRUE if this is an ORiNOCO radio, and FALSE if it is not. None.

#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING typedef UINT (*PFN_isOrinoco)();

#else UINT isOrinoco();

#endif 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 281 Chapter 7 Programming isSupplicantRunning() Call this function to determine whether the security supplicant is running. Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions UINT isSupplicantRunning( );

None. TRUE if the security supplicant is running, FALSE if it is not running. None.

#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING typedef UINT (*PFN_isSupplicantRunning)();

#else UINT isSupplicantRunning();

#endif StartScanList() If a scan list is configured on the system, this causes the API to begin the process of scanning for an available network. This call can take quite a while to process (depending upon the length of the scan list and how long it takes to find a valid network), you may wish to call it from a separate thread. Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions UINT StartScanList( );

None. ERROR_SUCCESS when successful. Call this function to start the scan list functionality of the system.

#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING typedef UINT (*PFN_StartScanList)();

#else UINT StartScanList();

#endif StartSupplicant() Call this function to start the supplicant service if it is installed on the sys-

tem. Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions UINT StartSupplicant( );

None. ERROR_SUCCESS when successful. None.

#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING typedef UINT (*PFN_StartSupplicant)();

#else UINT StartSupplicant();

#endif 282 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Programming StopSupplicant() Call this function to stop the supplicant service. Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions UINT StopSupplicant( );

None. ERROR_SUCCESS when successful. None.

#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING typedef UINT (*PFN_StopSupplicant)();

#else UINT StopSupplicant();

#endif isDHCPEnabled() Call this function to determine whether DHCP is enabled on the current adapter. Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions UINT isDHCPEnabled( );

None. TRUE if DHCP is enabled, FALSE if it is not. None.

#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING typedef UINT (*PFN_isDHCPEnabled)();

#else UINT isDHCPEnabled();

#endif Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions RenewDHCP() Call this function to force a DHCP renewal on the current network adap-

ter. UINT RenewDHCP( );

None. ERROR_SUCCESS when successful. You should not have to call this function on Microsoft PocketPC 2003 or Microsoft Windows CE 4.2 .NET and later devices.

#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING typedef UINT (*PFN_RenewDHCP)();

#else UINT RenewDHCP();

#endif 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 283 Chapter 7 Programming Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions GetCurrentDriverName() Call this function to populate the TCHAR array with the driver name. UINT GetCurrentDriverName( TCHAR * );

Pointer to a TCHAR array which contains the name of the driver when successful. ERROR_SUCCESS when successful. This function is called with a pointer to a TCHAR array that is large enough to hold the name of the driver PLUS the null terminator.

#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING typedef UINT (*PFN_GetCurrentDriverName)(TCHAR *);

#else UINT GetCurrentDriverName(TCHAR *);

#endif ResetRadioToSystemSave() Call this function to force the radio to reset to the last desired active pro-

file. Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions UINT ResetRadioToSystemSave( );

None. ERROR_SUCCESS when successful. None.

#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING typedef UINT (*PFN_ResetRadioToSystemSave)();

#else UINT ResetRadioToSystemSave();

#endif Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions EnableSuppLogging() Call this function to set the desired supplicant logging mode. UINT EnableSuppLogging( ULONG );

NDIS_SUPP_LOGGING_ON NDIS_SUPP_LOGGING_OFF ERROR_SUCCESS when successful. None.

#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING typedef UINT (*PFN_EnableSuppLogging)(ULONG);

#else UINT EnableSuppLogging(ULONG);

#endif Supplicant Logging Enabled Supplicant Logging Disabled 284 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Programming SwitchPacketDriver() Call this function to switch between available packet drivers on the system. Syntax Parameters Return Values Remarks Definitions Intermec Packet Driver (ZNICZIO) Microsoft Packet Driver (NDISUIO) UINT SwitchPacketDriver( USHORT );

INTERMEC_PACKET_DRIVER NDISUIO_PACKET_DRIVER ERROR_SUCCESS when successful. After switching to a new packet driver, perform a warm boot for changes to take effect.

#ifdef DYNAMIC_LOADING typedef UINT (*PFN_SwitchPacketDriver)(USHORT);

#else UINT SwitchPacketDriver(USHORT);

#endif Deprecated Functions The following functions are deprecated. While these are not removed from the API, these are no longer supported. Their parameters are no longer applicable and the return value for all of these functions is:

ERR_FUNCTION_DEPRECATED Function GetRTSThreshold(Deprecated) GetMedia(Deprecated) GetMedium(Deprecated) GetNicStats(Deprecated) SetRTSThreshold(Deprecated) SetTXRate(Deprecated) EncryptWepKeyForRegistry(Deprecated) UINT EncryptWepKeyForRegistry( TCHAR * szDest, Syntax UINT GetRTSThreshold( USHORT & );

UINT GetMedia( ULONG & );

UINT GetMedium( ULONG & );

UINT GetNicStats( NDIS_802_11_STATISTICS & );

UINT SetRTSThreshold( USHORT & );

UINT SetTXRate( UCHAR );

TCHAR * szSource );

UINT SetDiversity( USHORT );

SetDiversity(Deprecicated) 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 285 Chapter 7 Programming Notifications Use the following information to programmatically control the vibrator, to write an application to turn on the vibrator when a message is received via the WLAN radio link, and turn it off when the user hits a key. Vibrator support is implemented in the NLED driver as a false LED. The vibrator is LED 5 and is identified with an CycleAdjust of 1. The vibrate option is only available in the notifications panel when the vibrator is pres-

ent in the system. Regarding an applications interface to NLED.DLL, LEDs must be avail-

able for use by applications. This is possible via two functions exported by the COREDLL.DLL file. To use the LED functions, declare these as ex-

tern C as follows:

extern C BOOL WINAPI NLEDGetDeviceInfo(UINT nInfoId, void *pOutput);

extern C BOOL WINAPI NLEDSetDevice( UINT nDeviceId, void

*pInput);

The LEDs are enumerated for access through the data structures associated with these APIs:

S Notification LED 0 S Radio On LED S Alpha Lock LED S Scanner LED S Low Battery S Vibrator 1 (does not apply to the 730 Computer) 2 3 4 5 (does not apply to the 730 Computer) 286 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Programming NLEDGetDeviceInfo Usage

#include nled.h Syntax BOOL NLEDGetDeviceInfo ( UINT nInfoId, void *pOutput );

Parameters nInfoId pOutput Integer specifying the information to return. These values are defined:

NLED_COUNT_INFO NLED_SUPPORTS_INFO_ID NLED_SETTINGS_INFO_ID Indicates the pOutput buffer specifies the number of LEDs on the device. Indicates the pOutput buffer specifies information about the capabilities supported by the LED. Indicates the pOutput buffer contains information about the LED current settings. Pointer to the buffer to which the information is returned. The buffer points to various structure types defined in nled.h, depending on the value of nId, as detailed in the following table:

Value of nID LED_COUNT_INFO NLED_SUPPORTS_INFO NLED_SETTINGS_INFO Structure in pOutput NLED_COUNT_INFO NLED_SUPPORTS_INFO NLED_SETTINGS_INFO NLEDSetDevice Usage

#include nled.h Syntax BOOL NLEDSetDevice ( UINT nDeviceId, void *pInput );

Parameters nDeviceId pInput Integer specifying the device identification. The following is defined:

NLED_SETTINGS_INFO_ID Pointer to the buffer that contains the NLED_SETTINGS_INFO structure. Contains information about the desired LED settings. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 287 Chapter 7 Programming Reboot Functions There are several methods, via Kernel I/O Control functions, that an ap-

plication program can use to force the 700 Series Computer to reboot. IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT performs a warm-boot. See page 260. IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT Invoking the KernelIOControl function with IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT forces a cold reboot. This resets the 700 Series Computer and reloads Windows CE as if a power-up had been performed. The contents of the Windows CE RAM-based object store are discarded. See page 257. IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT This function is supported on the 700 Series Computers. It performs a warm boot of the system, preserving the object store. See page 257. 288 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Remapping the Keypad Chapter 7 Programming Note; Use caution when remapping the keypad. Improper remapping may render the keypad unusable. Data within the 700 Series Computer could also be lost, should any problems occur. Applications have the ability to remap keys on the 700 Color Numeric Keypad and 700 Color Alphanumeric Keypad. This will allow applications to enable keys that would otherwise not be available, such as the [F1]

function key. Also, to disable keys that should not be available, such as the alpha key because no alpha entry is required. Care should be exercised when attempting to remap the keypad because improper remapping may cause the keypad to become unusable. This can be corrected by cold boot-

ing the device which will cause the default keymap to be loaded again. Note that remapping the keys in this way affects the key mapping for the entire system, not just for the application that does the remapping. There are three planes supported for the 700 Color Numeric Keypad and Alphanumeric Keypad. Keys that are to be used in more than one shift plane must be described in each plane. The unshifted plane contains values from the keypad when not pressed with other keys, such as the following:

Press the Keys Numeric Keypad Alphanumeric Keypad 1 5 9 M T Y To Enter This 1 5 9 The gold plane contains values from the keypad when a key is simulta-

neously pressed with the [Gold] b key on the numeric keypad or the

[Gold/White] c key on the alphanumeric keypad, such as the following:

Press the Keys Numeric Keypad

[Gold] b 1

[Gold] b 5

[Gold] b 9 To Enter This Alphanumeric Keypad

[Gold/White] c e Send

[Gold/White] c C A3

[Gold/White] c P PgDn Unshifted Plane Gold Plane 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 289 Chapter 7 Programming Alpha (Blue) Plane The alpha plane contains values from the keypad when the keypad has been placed in alpha mode by pressing the blue alpha key, such as the fol-

lowing:

Press the Keys Alphanumeric Keypad To Enter This Numeric Keypad

[Alpha] F 1 [Alpha] d g

[Alpha] F 5 [Alpha] d J

[Alpha] F 9 [Alpha] d W Caps j w Key Values Key values for each plane are stored in the registry. All units ship with a default key mapping already loaded in the registry. Applications that wish to change the default mapping need to read the appropriate key from the registry into an array of Words, modify the values required and then write the updated values back into the registry. The registry access can be done with standard Microsoft API calls, such as RegOpenKeyEx(), RegQueryValueEx(), and RegSetValueEx(). Numeric Keypad For the 700 Color Numeric Keypad, the following registry keys contain the plane mappings:

S The unshifted plane mapping can be found in the registry at:

HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\HARDWARE\DEVICEMAP\KEYBD\Vkey S The gold plane mapping can be found in the registry at:

HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\HARDWARE\DEVICEMAP\KEYBD\VkeyGold S The alpha plane mapping can be found in the registry at:

HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\HARDWARE\DEVICEMAP\KEYBD\VkeyAlpha Alphanumeric Keypad For the 700 Color Alphanumeric Keypad, the following registry keys con-

tain the plane mappings:

S The unshifted plane mapping can be found in the registry at:

HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\HARDWARE\DEVICEMAP\KEYBD\ALPHA\Vkey S The gold plane mapping can be found in the registry at:

HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\HARDWARE\DEVICEMAP\KEYBD\ALPHA\VkeyGold S The alpha plane mapping can be found in the registry at:

HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\HARDWARE\DEVICEMAP\KEYBD\ALPHA\VkeyAlpha 290 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual How Key Values Are Stored in Registry Chapter 7 Programming To know which fields to update in the registry, you must know what Scan Codes are assigned to each physical key (see the Keypad Scan Codes and Meanings table on the next page). The Scan Code is used at the lowest level of the system to let the keypad driver know which physical key has been pressed. The keypad driver takes that scan code and looks it up in a table (a copy of the one stored in the registry) to determine which values to pass on to the operating system. Each registry key is just an array that describes to the keypad driver what value needs to be passed for each physical key. The key values are indexed by the scan code, this is a zero-based index. For example in the unshifted plane, the [4] key has a scan code of 0x06. This means that the seventh word under the Vkey registry key will have the value for the [4] key. Taking a sample of the Vkey registry key shows the following values:

00,00,0B,05,02,03,C1,07,04,03,BE,00,34,00,00,00,. The value is 34,00. The values are in reverse byte order because that is the way the processor handles data. When writing an application, nothing needs to be done to swap the bytes, as this will happen automatically when the data is read into a byte value. This is something you just need to be aware of this when looking at the registry. Knowing this, we can see that the value that the keypad driver will pass to the system is a hex 34. Look-

ing that up on an UNICODE character chart, we see that it maps to a 4. If you wanted the key, labeled 4, to output the letter A instead, you would need to change the seventh word to 41 (the hexadecimal repre-

sentation of A from the UNICODE chart), then put the key back into the registry. Note: Do not remap scan codes 0x01, 0x41, 0x42, 0x43, 0x44. Remap-

ping these scan codes could render your 700 Series Computer unusable until a cold-boot is performed. If you wish to disable a certain key, remap its scan code to 0x00. Just changing the registry keys will not immediately change the key mappings. To notify the keypad driver that the registry has been updated, signal the ITC_KEYBOARD_CHANGE named event using the CreateEvent() API. Change Notification Advanced Keypad Remapping It is also possible to map multiple key presses to one button and to map named system events to a button. The multiple key press option could be useful to cut down on the number of keys needed to press in a given situa-

tion or to remap which key behaves like the action key. Mapping events to a button could be useful to change which buttons will fire the scanner, control volume, and allow for suspending and resuming the device. If you need help performing one of these advanced topics please contact Intermec Technical Support. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 291 Chapter 7 Programming Scan Codes At the lowest driver level, the 700 Color Numeric Keypad and the 700 Color Alphanumeric Keypad identifies keys as scan codes. These scan codes are sent via the keypad microcontroller, and cannot be changed without modifying the keypad firmware. Numeric Keypad The following scan codes pertain to the 700 Color Numeric keypad:

Numeric Keypad Scan Codes and Meanings Press this Key Meaning Reserved ScanCode 0x00 I 4 L K b E D 1 7 F U R 2 8 0 5 A 3 9 I/O button Scanner Handle Trigger Scanner Left Scanner Right 4/GHI/A2 None Left arrow/Back Tab None BkSp// (forward slash)

[Gold] key None Esc/ (minus sign) Down arrow/Volume decrease 1/Caps/Send 7/PQRS/PgUp

[Alpha] key None Up arrow/Volume increase Right arrow/Tab 2/ABC/End 8/TUV/* (asterisk) 0/Win 5/JKL/A3 None Action/+ (plus symbol) 3/DEF/backlight 9/WXYZ/PgDn 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x04 0x06 0x07 0x08 0x09 0x0A 0x0B 0x0C 0x0D 0x0E 0x0F 0x10 0x11 0x12 0x13 0x14 0x15 0x16 0x17 0x18 0x19 0x1A 0x1B 0x1C 292 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Numeric Keypad Scan Codes and Meanings (continued) Press this Key Chapter 7 Programming Meaning Enter/@ (at symbol) 6/MNO/A4 None Charge Detect LCD frontlight Ambient light Threshold crossed Headset detected Keypad Backlight Ambient Light Threshold Crossed ScanCode 0x1D 0x1E 0x1F0x40 0x41 0x42 0x42 0x42 0x43 0x44 0x44 0x44 e 6 B C b b Alphanumeric Keypad The following scan codes pertain to the 700 Color Alphanumeric keypad:

Alphanumeric Keypad Scan Codes and Meanings Press this Key Meaning Reserved ScanCode 0x00 i A B e j k m l a E F G C H D I/O button Scanner Handle Trigger Scanner Left Scanner Right A/A1 key B/A2 key Escape/Send Left arrow/Back Tab Up arrow/Volume increase Down arrow/Volume decrease Right arrow/Tab Action/End E/Win F/= (equal sign) G/* (asterisk) C/A3 H// (forward slash) D/A4 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x04 0x05 0x06 0x07 0x08 0x09 0x0A 0x0B 0x0C 0x0D 0x0E 0x0F 0x10 0x11 0x12 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 293 Chapter 7 Programming Alphanumeric Keypad Scan Codes and Meanings (continued) Press this Key J K L M N I P Q R S T O g h V W X U c b Z f Y B C b b Meaning J/PgUp ScanCode 0x13 K/@ (as symbol) L/ (minus sign) M/1 N/2 I/backlight P/PgDn Q/, (comma) R/+ (plus sign) S/4 T/5 O/3 Caps/Lock BkSp V/. (period) W/7 X/8 U/6 Gold/White NumLock Space Z/0 Enter Y/9 None Charge Detect LCD frontlight Ambient light Threshold crossed Headset detected Keypad Backlight Ambient Light Threshold Crossed 0x14 0x15 0x16 0x17 0x18 0x19 0x1A 0x1B 0x1C 0x1D 0x1E 0x1F 0x20 0x21 0x22 0x23 0x24 0x25 0x26 0x27 0x28 0x29 0x2A 0x2B0x40 0x41 0x42 0x42 0x42 0x43 0x44 0x44 0x44 294 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Programming Sample View of Registry Keys The following is a sample view of the current default key mapping for the 700 Color Numeric Keypad. See the registry on your device for the latest key mappings.

[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\HARDWARE\DEVICEMAP\KEYBD]

ResumeMask=dword:7 Vkey=hex:00,00,0B,05,02,03,C1,07,04,03,BE,00,34,00,00,00,\

25,00,00,00,08,00,03,02,00,00,1B,00,28,00,31,00,\

37,00,01,02,00,00,26,00,27,00,32,00,38,00,30,00,\

35,00,00,00,01,03,33,00,39,00,0D,00,36,00,00,00,\

00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\

00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\

00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\

00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\

00,00,07,05,01,05,03,05,02,05 VkeyGold=hex: 00,00,0B,05,02,03,C1,07,04,03,BE,00,34,00,00,00,\

09,01,00,00,BF,00,03,02,00,00,BD,00,75,00,72,00,\

21,00,01,02,00,00,76,00,09,00,73,00,38,01,5B,00,\

35,00,00,00,BB,01,09,05,22,00,32,01,36,00,00,00,\

00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\

00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\

00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\

00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\

00,00,07,05,01,05,03,05,02,05 VkeyAlpha=hex: 00,00,0B,05,02,03,C1,07,04,03,BE,00,47,00,00,00,\

25,00,00,00,08,00,03,02,00,00,1B,00,28,00,02,02,\

50,00,01,02,00,00,26,00,27,00,41,00,54,00,20,00,\

4A,00,00,00,01,03,44,00,57,00,0D,00,4D,00,00,00,\

00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\

00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\

00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\

00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\

00,00,07,05,01,05,03,05,02,05 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 295 Chapter 7 Programming 296 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Configurable Settings A This appendix contains information about the Data Collection, Intermec Settings, SNMP, Unit Information, Utilities, and Wireless Network con-

trol panel applets that may be on the 700 Series Color Mobile Computer. SNMP, Intermec Settings, and Data Collection settings that can appear under Settings are dependent on what hardware configuration is done for each 700 Series Computer at the time of shipment. These settings will cur-

rently only appear if a scanner or an imager option is present. Likewise, other control panel applets that are specifically related to the 802.11b radio module will appear when a 802.11b radio module is installed in a 700 Series Computer. Control panel applets that are specific for Wireless Printing, CDMA/1xRTT, and GSM/GPRS radio modules will only appear when each respective hardware configuration is done on the 700 Series Computer. See Chapter 4, Network Support, for more infor-

mation about the radio modules or the wireless printing. Information about using reader commands and configuration bar codes to configure some of your settings is also in this appendix. Note: Information about the settings you can configure with the Intermec Settings control panel applet is described in the Intermec Computer Com-

mand Reference Manual (P/N: 073529). The online manual is available from the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 297 Appendix A Configurable Settings Configuration Parameters A configuration parameter changes the way the 700 Series Color Mobile Computer operates, such as configuring a parameter to have the 700 Series Computer emit a very loud beep in a noisy environment. Use any of the following methods to execute configuration parameters:

S Change Data Collection and SNMP parameters via control panel ap-

plets later in this appendix. S Send parameters from an SNMP management station. See SNMP Con-

figuration on the 700 Series Computer starting on page 191. S Scan EasySet bar codes. You can use the EasySet bar code creation soft-

ware from Intermec Technologies Corporation to print configuration labels. Scan the labels to change the scanner configuration and data transfer settings. Changing a Parameter Setting Menus of available parameters for each group are listed. Use the scroll bars to go through the list. Expand each menu (+) to view its parameter set-

tings. Tap a parameter to select, or expand a parameter (+) to view its sub-

parameters. Note that each parameter or subparameter is shown with its default setting or current setting in (< >) brackets. Tap a parameter or subparameter to select that parameter, then do any of the following to change its setting:

Tap Apply to apply any changes. Note that these illustrations are from a Symbologies parameter. S Typing a new value in an entry field. S Choosing a new value from the drop-down list. S Selecting a different option. The selected option contains a bullet. S Tap Defaults, then Apply to restore factory-default settings. Tap Yes when you are prompted to verify this action. 298 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings S Tap Refresh to discard changes and start again. Tap Yes when you are prompted to verify this action. About Configuration Parameters You can find this information about each configuration parameter:

S Name and Purpose:

Describes the parameter and its function. S Action:

Describes what to do with a parameter once that parameter is selected. S SNMP OID:

Lists the SNMP OID for the parameter. S Syntax or Options:

Syntax lists the two-character code for the parameter, if the parameter is configurable by scanning a bar code or by sending parameters through a network. Both Syntax and Options list acceptable values for the para-

meter. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 299 Appendix A Configurable Settings Data Collection Control Panel Applet Note: This applet is not available in units with PSM Build 3.00 or newer. To determine your PSM Build version, tap Start > Programs >

File Explorer > the PSMinfo text file. If your unit has PSM Build 3.00 or newer, then you may have the Intermec Settings control panel applet in place of the Data Collection applet. Information about the settings you can configure with the Intermec Settings applet is described in the Intermec Computer Command Reference Manual. The online manual is available from the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com. See Scanner Control and Data Transfer in the Intermec Windows CE/

Pocket PC Software Developers Kit (SDK) Users Manual shipped with the Software Developers Kit (SDK) for information about data collection functions. Note that icons are shown to the left. To access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start > Settings

> the System tab > Data Collection to access its control panel applet. Use the left and right arrows to scroll through the tabs along the bottom of the control panel applet, then tap a tab to access its menus. These tabs rep-

resent the following groups of settings or parameters:

S Symbologies (starting on page 301) S Symbology Options (starting on page 322) S Beeper/LED (starting on page 330) S Imager (starting on page 336) S Virtual Wedge (starting on page 341) 300 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Symbologies Appendix A Configurable Settings You can change bar code symbology parameter settings in your 700 Series Computer via the Data Collection control panel applet. The following parameters are for bar code symbologies. Additional information about the more common bar code symbologies are in Appendix B, Bar Codes. Note that these parameters are listed in the order of their appearance within this tab. Most of these symbologies apply to both the imager and the laser scanner tools. However, when using an imager, the Macro PDF (page 312), Micro PDF417 (page 314), Matrix 2 of 5 (page 316), Telepen (page 317), and Code 11 (page 318) symbologies are not supported. Likewise, when using a laser scanner, the QR Code (page 319), Data Matrix (page 320), and MaxiCode (page 321) symbologies are not supported. Note: The 730 Computer uses the EV10 APS linear imager which sup-

ports 1D symbologies. The following table shows which bar code symbologies are supported by an imager, a laser scanner, or the EV10 APS Linear Imager Bar Code Symbology Code 39 Interleaved 2 of 5 Standard 2 of 5 Matrix 2 of 5 Code 128 Code 93 Codabar MSI Plessey UPC EAN/EAN 128 Code 11 PDF417 Micro PDF417 Telepen Data Matrix QR Code MaxiCode Imager X X X X X X X X X X X X Laser Scanner X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X EV10 APS Linear Imager X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 301 Appendix A Configurable Settings Code 39 Code 39 is a discrete, self-checking, variable length symbology. The char-

acter set is uppercase AZ, 09, dollar sign ($), period (.), slash (/), per-

cent (%), space ( ), plus (+), and minus (-). Action Tap (+) to expand the Code 39 parameter, select the setting to be changed, then tap an option to change this setting or select an option from the drop-down list. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.3.1 Options Decoding Format Start/Stop Start/Stop characters

(Not supported when us-

ing an imager) Check digit Bar code length Minimum length 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 001254 Not active Active (default) Standard 43 characters (default) Full ASCII Not transmitted (default) Transmitted

$ (dollar sign) only

* (asterisk) only (default)

$ and * (dollar sign and asterisk) Not used (default) Mod 43 transmitted Mod 43 not transmitted French CIP transmitted French CIP not transmitted Italian CPI transmitted Italian CPI not transmitted Any length (default) Minimum length Minimum length 1254 (default is 6) Note: If Bar code length = 1 then Minimum length is entered. 302 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Standard 2 of 5 Standard 2 of 5 is a discrete and self-checking symbology that uses the bars to encode information and the spaces to separate the individual bars. Action Tap (+) to expand the Standard 2 of 5 parameter, select the setting to be changed, then tap an option to change this setting or select an option from the drop-down list. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.4.1 Options Decoding Format Check digit Bar code length Minimum length Fixed length 1 Fixed length 2 Fixed length 3 0 1 0 1 0 1 2 0 1 2 001254 000254 000254 000254 Not active (default) Active Identicon, 6 start/stop bars (default) Computer Identics, 4 start/stop bars Not used (default) Mod 10 transmitted Mod 10 not transmitted Any length Minimum length (default) Fixed lengths Minimum length 1254 (default is 6) Fixed bar code length 0254 (default is 0) Fixed bar code length 0254 (default is 0) Fixed bar code length 0254 (default is 0) Note: If Bar code length = 1 then Minimum length is entered. If Bar code length = 2 then Fixed length 1, Fixed length 2, or Fixed length 3 is entered. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 303 Appendix A Configurable Settings Codabar Codabar is a self-checking, discrete symbology. Action Tap (+) to expand the Codabar parameter, select a setting to be changed, then select an option from the drop-down list to change this setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.5.1 Options Decoding Start/Stop CLSI library system

(Not supported when us-

ing an imager) Check digit Bar code length Minimum length Fixed length 1 Fixed length 2 Fixed length 3 0 1 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 Not active (default) Active Not transmitted (default) abcd transmitted ABCD transmitted abcd/tn*e transmitted DC1DC4 transmitted Not active (default) Active 0 1 2 0 1 2 003254 000254 000254 000254 Not used (default) Transmitted Not transmitted Any length Minimum length (default) Fixed lengths Minimum length 3254 (default is 6) Fixed bar code length 0254 (default is 0) Fixed bar code length 0254 (default is 0) Fixed bar code length 0254 (default is 0) Note: If Bar code length = 1 then Minimum length is entered. If Bar code length = 2 then Fixed length 1, Fixed length 2, or Fixed length 3 is entered. 304 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings UPC/EAN UPC/EAN are fixed-length, numeric, continuous symbologies that use four element widths. Action Tap (+) to expand the UPC/EAN parameter, select the setting to be changed, then select an option to change this setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.6.1 Options UPC A UPC E EAN 8 EAN 13 Add-on digits Add-on 2 digits Add-on 5 digits

(Not supported when us-

ing an imager) UPC A check digit UPC E check digit EAN 8 check digit EAN 13 check digit UPC A number system UPC E number system UPC A re-encoding UPC E re-encoding EAN 8 re-encoding 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Not Active Active (default) Not Active Active (default) Not Active Active (default) Not Active Active (default) Not required (default) Required Not active (default) Active Not active (default) Active Not transmitted Transmitted (default) Not transmitted Transmitted (default) Not transmitted Transmitted (default) Not transmitted Transmitted (default) Not transmitted Transmitted (default) Not transmitted Transmitted (default) UPC A transmitted as UPC A UPC A transmitted as EAN 13 (default) UPC E transmitted as UPC E (default) UPC E transmitted as UPC A EAN 8 transmitted as EAN 8 (default) EAN 8 transmitted as EAN 13 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 305 Appendix A Configurable Settings Code 93 Code 93 is a variable length, continuous symbology that uses four element widths. Action Tap the Code 93 parameter, then select an option to change this parame-

ter setting. Tap (+) to access the Code 93 Lengths parameter. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.7.1 Options 0 1 Not active (default) Active Code 93 Length Sets the Code 93 bar code length. Action Tap (+) to expand the Code 93 parameter, then tap (+) to expand the Code 93 Lengths parameter. Tap the setting to be changed, then tap an option to change this setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.19.1 Options Bar code length Minimum length 0 1 001254 Any length Minimum length (default) Minimum length 1254 (default is 6) Note: If Bar code length = 1 then Minimum length is entered. 306 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Code 128 Code 128 is a variable-length, continuous, high-density, alphanumeric symbology that uses multiple element widths and supports the extended ASCII character set. Action Tap the Code 128 parameter, then select an option to change this parame-

ter setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.9.1 Options 0 1 Not active (default) Active This illustration is from a 700 Series Computer using a laser scanner. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 307 Appendix A Configurable Settings Code 128 Options Set the following for the Code 128 parameter. Note that the EAN 128 ]C1 and CIP 128 French Pharmaceutical options are not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer. Action Tap (+) to expand the Code 128 Options parameter, select a setting, then select an option to change this setting. SNMP OID None. Options EAN 128 ]C1 Identifier

(Not supported when using an imager) CIP 128 French Pharmaceutical

(Not supported when using an imager) Bar code length Minimum length 0 1 0 1 Remove (default) Include Not active (default) Active 0 1 001254 Any length (default) Minimum length Minimum length 1254 (default is 6) This illustration is from a 700 Series Computer using a laser scanner. 308 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Code 128 FNC1 Character The Code 128 FNC1 character (EAN 128 norms) can be any ASCII char-

acter and is used as a separator when multiple identifiers and their fields are concatenated. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer. Non-printable ASCII characters can be entered using the following syntax where HH is the hexadecimal value of the character.

\xHH For example, the GS character, whose hexadecimal value is 1D, would be entered as \x1D. In addition,the following characters have their own identifiers:

S BEL \a

\b S BS S FF

\f

\n S LF S CR

\r S HT \t S VT

\v Action Tap (+) to expand the Code 128 parameter, then type the ASCII charac-

ters to be set for the Code 128 FNC1 character parameter. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.21.1 Options Any ASCII character (default is the GS function character ID hex) 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 309 Appendix A Configurable Settings Plessey Plessey is a pulse-width modulated symbology like most other bar codes. It includes a start character, data characters, an eight-bit cyclic check digit, and a termination bar. The code is continuous and not self-checking. You need to configure two parameters for Plessey code: Start Code and Check Digit. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer. Action Tap (+) to expand the Plessey parameter, select the setting to be changed, then select an option to change this setting or select an option from the drop-down list. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.10.1 Options Decoding Check digit Bar code length Minimum length 0 1 0 1 0 1 001254 Not active (default) Active Not transmitted (default) Transmitted Any length Minimum length (default) Minimum length 1254 (default is 6) Note: If Bar code length = 1 then Minimum length is entered. 310 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings MSI MSI is a symbology similar to Plessey code (page 310) that includes a start pattern, data characters, one or two check digits, and a stop pattern. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Com-

puter. Action Tap (+) to expand the MSI parameter, select the setting to be changed, then select an option to change this setting or select an option from the drop-down list. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.15.1 Options Decoding Check digit Bar code length Minimum length 0 1 0 1 2 3 0 1 001254 Not active (default) Active Mod 10 transmitted (default) Mod 10 not transmitted Double Mod 10 transmitted Double Mod 10 not transmitted Any length Minimum length (default) Minimum length 1254 (default is 6) Note: If Bar code length = 1 then Minimum length is entered. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 311 Appendix A Configurable Settings PDF417 PDF417 is a stacked two-dimensional symbology that provides the ability to scan across rows of code. Each row consists of start/stop characters, row identifiers, and symbol characters, which consist of four bars and four spaces each and contain the actual data. This symbology uses error correc-

tion symbol characters appended at the end to recover loss of data. Because the virtual wedge translates incoming data into keypad input, the size of the keypad buffer limits the effective length of the label to 128 characters. Longer labels may be truncated. For PDF417 labels of more than 128 characters, you can develop an application that bypasses the key-

pad buffer. Action Tap the PDF417 parameter, then select an option to change this parame-

ter setting. Tap (+) to access either the Macro PDF options parameter or the Micro PDF417 parameter. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.17.1 Options 0 1 Not active Active (default) This illustration is from a 700 Series Computer using a laser scanner. Macro PDF options Macro PDF is used when a long message requires more than one PDF417 label. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer. S Select Buffered to store a multi-label PDF417 message in the Sabre buffer, thus transmitting the entire message when all labels are read. 312 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings S Select Unbuffered for multi-label PDF417 messages that are too long for the Sabre buffer (memory overflow). Each part of the PDF417 label is transmitted separately, and the host application must then assemble the message using the macro PDF control header transmitted with each label. Control Header is only present in macro PDF codes and is always transmitted with unbuffered option. Action Tap (+) to expand the PDF417 parameter, tap (+) to expand the Macro PDF parameter, select a setting to be changed, then select an option to change this setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.22.1 Options Macro PDF Control header File name Segment count Time stamp Sender Addressee File size Checksum 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Unbuffered Buffered (default) Not transmitted (default) Transmitted Not transmitted (default) Transmitted Not transmitted (default) Transmitted Not transmitted (default) Transmitted Not transmitted (default) Transmitted Not transmitted (default) Transmitted Not transmitted (default) Transmitted Not transmitted (default) Transmitted 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 313 Appendix A Configurable Settings Micro PDF417 Micro PDF417 is a multi-row symbology derived from and closely based on PDF417 (page 312). A limited set of symbology sizes is available, to-

gether with a fixed level of error correction for each symbology size. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Com-

puter. Action Tap (+) to expand the PDF417 parameter, tap (+) to expand the Micro PDF417 parameter, select a setting to be changed, then select an option to change this setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.27.1 Options Decoding Code 128 Emulation 0 1 0 1 Not active (default) Active Not active (default) Active 314 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Interleaved 2 of 5 Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5) is a high-density, self-checking, continuous, numeric symbology used mainly in inventory distribution and the automo-

bile industry. Note: An Interleaved 2 of 5 bar code label must be at least three characters long for the 700 Series Computer to scan and decode correctly. Action Tap (+) to expand the Interleaved 2 of 5 parameter, select the setting to be changed, then tap an option to change this setting or select an option from the drop-down list. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.23.1 Options Decoding Check digit Bar code length Minimum length Fixed length 1 Fixed length 2 Fixed length 3 0 1 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 003254 003254 003254 003254 Not active (default) Active Not used (default) Mod 10 transmitted Mod 10 not transmitted French CIP transmitted French CIP not transmitted Any length Minimum length (default) Fixed lengths Minimum length 3254 (default is 6) Fixed bar code length 3254 (default is 3) Fixed bar code length 3254 (default is 3) Fixed bar code length 3254 (default is 3) Note: If Bar code length = 1 then Minimum length is entered. If Bar code length =2 then Fixed length 1, Fixed length 2, or Fixed length 3 is entered. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 315 Appendix A Configurable Settings Matrix 2 of 5 Matrix 2 of 5 is a numerical symbology. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer. Action Tap (+) to expand the Matrix 2 of 5 parameter, select the setting to be changed, then tap an option to change this setting or select an option from the drop-down list. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.24.1 Options Decoding Bar code length Minimum length 0 1 0 1 001254 Not active (default) Active Any length Minimum length (default) Minimum length 1254 (default is 6) Note: If Bar code length = 1 then Minimum length is entered. 316 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Telepen Telepen is an alphanumeric, case-sensitive, full ASCII symbology. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Com-

puter. Action Tap (+) to expand the Telepen parameter, select the setting to be changed, then tap an option to change this setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.25.1 Options Decoding Format 0 1 0 1 Not active (default) Active ASCII (default) Numeric 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 317 Appendix A Configurable Settings Code 11 Code 11 is a high density, discrete numeric symbology that is extensively used in labeling telecommunications components and equipment. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Com-

puter. Action Tap (+) to expand the Code 11 parameter, select the setting to be changed, then tap an option to change this setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.26.1 Options Decoding Check digit verification Check digit transmit 0 1 1 2 0 1 Not active (default) Active 1 digit (default) 2 digits Disable Enable (default) 318 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings QR Code QR Code (Quick Response Code) is a two-dimensional matrix symbology containing dark and light square data modules. It has position detection patterns on three of its four corners and features direct encodation of the Japanese Kana-Kanji character set. It can encode up to 2509 numeric or 1520 alphanumeric characters and offers three levels of error detection. Note that this is not available when you use a laser scanner with your 700 Se-

ries Computer or if you are using a 730 Computer. Action Tap (+) to expand the QR Code parameter, select the setting to be changed, then tap an option to change this setting or select an option from the drop-down list. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.35.1 Options Decoding 0 1 Not active Active (default) 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 319 Appendix A Configurable Settings Data Matrix A two-dimensional matrix symbology, which is made of square modules arranged within a perimeter finder pattern. The symbology utilizes Error Checking and Correcting (ECC) algorithm with selectable levels for data error recovery and Cyclic Redundancy Check algorithm to validate the data. The character set includes either 128 characters conforming to ISO 646 (ANSI X3.4 - 1986) or 256 extended character set. Maximum capac-

ity of a symbol is 2335 alphanumeric characters, 1556 8-bit byte charac-

ters or 3116 numeric digits. Note that this is not available when you use a laser scanner with your 700 Series Computer or if you are using a 730 Com-

puter. Action Tap (+) to expand the Data Matrix parameter, select the setting to be changed, then tap an option to change this setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.34.1 Options Decoding 0 1 Not active Active (default) 320 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings MaxiCode MaxiCode is a fixed-size 2-D matrix symbology which is made up of offset rows of hexagonal elements arranged around a unique circular finder pat-

tern. ASCII data is encoded in six-bit symbol characters. The symbol con-

tains 33 rows which are alternately 30 and 29 elements wide. There are five different code sets. A single MaxiCode symbol can encode up to 93 characters of data. Note that this is not available when you use a laser scanner with your 700 Series Computer or if you are using a 730 Computer. Action Tap (+) to expand the MaxiCode parameter, select the setting to be changed, then tap an option to change this setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.33.1 Options Decoding 0 1 Not active Active (default) 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 321 Appendix A Configurable Settings Symbology Options To access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start > Settings

> the System tab > the Data Collection icon to access its control panel applet. Use the right and left arrows to scroll to the Symbology Options tab, then tap this tab to access its parameters. The following are parameters for bar code symbology options. Note that these are listed in the order of their appearance within the Symbology Options tab. Symbology ID Identifies the bar code symbology in which data is encoded by prepending a user-specified symbology identifier to the data. You can prepend one of these types of character strings to identify the symbology:

S User-defined ASCII Character (Option 1):

A user-defined symbology identifier is a single ASCII character. You can assign a custom identifier character to each bar code symbology. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer. S AIM ISO/IEC Standard (Option 2 Required to define symbology IDs):

The AIM Standard has a three-character structure which indicates the symbology and optional features. See the AIM ISO/IEC Standard for information. Action Select Symbology ID, then select an option to change this parameter set-

ting. Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, then select any of the user ID parameters listed. See the top of the next page for a sample screen of the Code 39 user ID. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.22.1 Options 0 1 2 Disable (default) User defined (disabled when using an imager) ISO/IEC Standard 322 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Code 39 User ID If 1 was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own ASCII character to identify Code 39 bar code data. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer. Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Code 39 user ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.3.1 Options:

x where x is a single ASCII character. Default is asterisk (*). Code 128 User ID If 1 was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own ASCII character to identify Code 128 bar code data. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer. Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Code 128 user ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.5.1 Options:

x where x is a single ASCII character. Default is asterisk (*). Codabar User ID If 1 was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own ASCII character to identify Codabar bar code data. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer. Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Codabar user ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.2.1 Options:

x where x is a single ASCII character. Default is D. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 323 Appendix A Configurable Settings Code 93 User ID If 1 was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own ASCII character to identify Code 93 bar code data. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer. Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Code 93 user ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.4.1 Options:

x where x is a single ASCII character. Default is asterisk (*). Interleaved 2 of 5 User ID If 1 was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own ASCII character to identify Interleaved 2 of 5 bar code data. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer. Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Interleaved 2 of 5 user ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parame-

ter setting. SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.10.1 Options:

x where x is a single ASCII character. Default is I (not lowercase L). PDF417 User ID If 1 was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own ASCII character to identify PDF417 bar code data. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer. Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the PDF417 user ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.12.1 Options:

x where x is a single ASCII character. Default is an asterisk (*). MSI User ID If 1 was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own ASCII character to identify MSI bar code data. Note that this is not avail-

able when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer. Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the MSI user ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.11.1 Options:

x where x is a single ASCII character. Default is D. 324 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Plessey User ID If 1 was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own ASCII character to identify Plessey bar code data. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer. Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Plessey user ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.13.1 Options:

x where x is a single ASCII character. Default is D. Standard 2 of 5 User ID If 1 was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own ASCII character to identify Standard 2 of 5 bar code data. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer. Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Standard 2 of 5 user ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.23.1 Options:

x where x is a single ASCII character. Default is D. UPC A User ID If 1 was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own ASCII character to identify UPC-A (Universal Product Code) bar code data. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer. Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the UPC A user ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.6.1 Options:

x where x is a single ASCII character. Default is A. UPC E User ID If 1 was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own ASCII character to identify UPC-E bar code data. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer. Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the UPC E user ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.7.1 Options:

x where x is a single ASCII character. Default is E. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 325 Appendix A Configurable Settings EAN 8 User ID If 1 was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own ASCII character to identify EAN-8 bar code data. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer. Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the EAN 8 user ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.8.1 Options:

x where x is a single ASCII character. Default is \xFF. EAN 13 User ID If 1 was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own ASCII character to identify EAN-13 (European Article Numbering) bar code data. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer. Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the EAN 13 user ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.9.1 Options:

x where x is a single ASCII character. Default is F. Matrix 2 of 5 User ID If 1 was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own ASCII character to identify Matrix 2 of 5 bar code data. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer. Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Matrix 2 of 5 user ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.24.1 Options:

x where x is a single ASCII character. Default is D. Telepen User ID If 1 was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own ASCII character to identify Telepen bar code data. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer. Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Telepen user ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.25.1 Options:

x where x is a single ASCII character. Default is an asterisk (*). 326 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Code 11 User ID If 1 was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own ASCII character to identify Code 11 bar code data. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer. Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Code 11 user ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.16.1 Options:

x where x is a single ASCII character. Default is asterisk (*). 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 327 Appendix A Configurable Settings Prefix Prepends a string of up to 20 ASCII characters to all scanned data. Action Tap the Prefix parameter, then enter a prefix value to change this parame-

ter setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.29.1 Options Acceptable values are up to 20 ASCII characters. Embedded null

(<NUL >) characters are not allowed. Default is no characters (disabled). 328 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Suffix Appends a string of up to 20 ASCII characters to all scanned data. Action Tap the Suffix parameter, then enter a suffix value to change this parame-

ter setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.30.1 Options Acceptable values are up to 20 ASCII characters. Embedded null

(<NUL >) characters are not allowed. Default is no characters (disabled). 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 329 Appendix A Configurable Settings Beeper/LED To access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start > Settings

> the System tab > the Data Collection icon to access its control panel applet. Use the right and left arrows to scroll to the Beeper/LED tab, then tap this tab to access its parameters. Most of these functions are not available when using an imager. The following table shows which functions are supported either by an imager or by a laser scanner. Beeper Function Beeper Beeper Volume Beeper Frequency Good Read Beeps Good Read Beep Duration Imager X Laser Scanner X X X X The following are parameters for features on the 700 Series Computer. Note that these are listed in the order of their appearance. 330 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Beeper Sets the volume for the good read beep. Note that this is not available when you use a laser scanner with your 700 Series Computer. Action Tap the Beeper parameter, then select an option to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.1.4.1.6.1 Options 1 4 Beeper (default) Vibrate (not supported on 730 Computers) 700 Color with Imager Screen 730 Screen 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 331 Appendix A Configurable Settings Beeper Volume Sets the volume for the good read beep. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer. Action Tap the Beeper volume parameter, then select an option to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.1.4.1.6.1 Low High (default) Options 0 1 2 Medium 3 4 Off Vibrate Disabling the Volume To disable the beeper, tap Start > Settings > the Personal tab > Sounds &

Notifications > the Volume tab, drag the System volume slider bar to the left Silent position, then tap ok to exit this applet. See Chapter 1, Introduction for more information. 332 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Beeper Frequency Sets the frequency for the good read beep. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer. Action Tap the Beeper frequency parameter, then enter a frequency value to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.1.4.1.7.1 Options 10004095 (default is 2090) 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 333 Appendix A Configurable Settings Good Read Beeps Sets the number of good read beeps. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer. Action Tap the Good read beeps parameter, then select an option to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.1.4.1.8.1 Options 0 1 2 No beeps One beep (default) Two beeps 334 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Good Read Beep Duration Sets the duration of the good read beep. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer. Action Tap the Good read beep duration parameter, then enter a duration value to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.1.4.1.9.1 Options 02550 Beep duration in milliseconds. (default is 80) 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 335 Appendix A Configurable Settings Imager Note: These instructions do not apply to the 730 Computer. To access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start > Settings

> the System tab > Data Collection to access its control panel applet. Use the right and left arrows to scroll to the Imager tab, then tap this tab to access its parameters. The following are parameters for the imager. Note that these are listed in the order of their appearance within the Imager tab. Aimer LED Duration The Aimer LED Duration controls the time the Aimer LED is turned on when the scan button is pressed. After this time, images are captured for decoding. The purpose is to position the Aimer LED on the bar code sym-

bol before attempting to decode the bar code. Note that this is not available when you use a laser scanner with your 700 Series Computer. Action Tap the Aimer LED Duration parameter, then enter a value to change this setting. Note that values must be in 50 ms increments, such as 500, 650, or 32500. Values not entered in 50 ms increments are rounded down. For example, 2489 ms is rounded down to 2450 ms, 149 ms is rounded down to 100 ms, etc.. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.3.1.1.21.1 Options 065500 ms (Default is 0) 336 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Sticky Aimer Duration The Sticky Aimer Duration controls the time the Aimer LED stays on af-

ter the a bar code read completes or after the trigger button is released. Note that this is not available when you use a laser scanner with your 700 Se-

ries Computer. Action Tap the Sticky Aimer Duration parameter, then enter a value to change this setting. Note that values must be in 50 ms increments, such as 500, 650, or 32500. Values not entered in 50 ms increments are rounded down. For example, 2489 ms is rounded down to 2450 ms, 149 ms is rounded down to 100 ms, etc.. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.3.1.1.24.1 Options 065535 ms (Default is 1000) 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 337 Appendix A Configurable Settings Image Dimension The image dimensions control the vertical size of the image for decoding. This can restrict the image to one bar code when otherwise, there might be more than one bar code in the image to be decoded. Note that this is not available when you use a laser scanner with your 700 Series Computer. Action Tap the Image dimension parameter, select the position to be changed, then tap an option or enter a value to change this position. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.3.1.1.22.1 Options Left position Right position Top position Bottom position 0 0 0478 0479 Not supported Not supported Position in pixels (Default is 0) Position in pixels (Default is 479) 338 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Lighting Mode The Lighting Mode sets the lighting mode of the imager. When set to LED Priority, the imager depends more on ambient lighting to illumi-

nate the bar code for reading. When set to Aperture Priority, the imager uses its built-in LED to illuminate the bar code for reading. Note that this is not available when you use a laser scanner with your 700 Series Computer. Action Tap the Lighting Mode parameter, then select an option to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.3.1.1.23.1 Options 0 1 LED Priority (default) Aperture Priority 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 339 Appendix A Configurable Settings 1D OmniDir Decode Enable The 1D OmniDir Decode Enable affects the scanning abilities of the IT4000 Imager. With 1D omni directional enabled, the imager is able to decode images and bar code labels regardless of the orientation of the label. With 1D omni directional disabled, the imager only decodes labels in the direction of the aimer LED. Note that this is not available when you use a laser scanner with your 700 Series Computer. Action Tap the 1D OmniDir Decode Enable parameter,then select an option to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.3.1.1.25.1 Options 0 1 Disabled Enabled (default) 340 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Virtual Wedge Appendix A Configurable Settings To access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start > Settings

> the System tab > Data Collection to access its control panel applet. Use the right and left arrows to scroll to the Virtual Wedge tab, then tap this tab to access its parameters. The following are parameters for the virtual wedge scanner. Note that these are listed in the order of their appearance within the Virtual Wedge tab. Virtual Wedge Enables or disables the virtual wedge for the internal scanner. The virtual wedge retrieves scanned Automatic Data Collection (ADC) data and sends it to the keypad driver so that the 700 Series Computer can receive and interpret the data as keypad input. Because the virtual wedge translates incoming data into keypad input, the size of the keypad buffer limits the effective length of the label to 128 characters. Longer labels may be truncated. For labels of more than 128 characters, you need to develop an application that bypasses the keypad buffer. Action Tap the Virtual Wedge parameter, then tap an option to change this pa-

rameter setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.2.1.1.2.1 Options 0 1 Disable Enable (default) 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 341 Appendix A Configurable Settings Preamble Sets the preamble that precedes any data you scan with the 700 Series Computer. Common preambles include a data location number or an op-

erator number. Action Tap the Preamble parameter, then enter a preamble value to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.2.1.1.3.1 Syntax ADdata where data is any acceptable values up to 31 ASCII characters. Embedded null (<NUL >) characters are not allowed. Below are the non-printing characters you can use for Virtual Wedge Preambles. Default is blank.

\a

\b

\f

\n

\r

\t

\v

\xnnnn Alert (bell) Backspace Form Feed New line/line feed Carriage return Horizontal tab Vertical tab nnnn is up to four HEX digits. Use leading zeros to fill out to four digits to ensure proper conversion. For example, to prepend the character M to scanned data, set the Preamble to either 1) M, or 2) x004D, where 4D is the HEX equivalent for an uppercase M. 342 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Note: When you enter the AD command without data, the preamble is disabled. If you want to use quotation marks or the following combina-

tions of characters as part of the appended data, separate those characters from the AD command with quotes. If you do not use quotes as described here, the 700 Series Computer will interpret the characters as another con-

figuration command:

AD AE AF KC BV EX DF Example To use the two-character string BV as a preamble, scan this command (as a Code 39 label) or send this command through the network: $+ADBV 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 343 Appendix A Configurable Settings Postamble Sets the postamble that is appended to any data you scan with the 700 Se-

ries Computer. Common postambles include cursor controls, such as tabs or carriage return line feeds. Action Tap the Postamble parameter, then enter a postamble value to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.2.1.1.4.1 Syntax AEdata where data is any acceptable values up to 31 ASCII characters. Embedded null (<NUL >) characters are not allowed. Below are the non-printing characters you can use for Virtual Wedge Postambles:

\a

\b

\f

\n

\r

\t

\v

\xnnnn Alert (bell) Backspace Form Feed New line/line feed Carriage return Horizontal tab (default) Vertical tab nnnn is up to four HEX digits. Use leading zeros to fill out to four digits to ensure proper conversion. For example, to prepend the character M to scanned data, set the Preamble to either 1) M, or 2) x004D, where 4D is the HEX equivalent for an uppercase M. 344 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Note: When you enter the AE command without data, the postamble is disabled. If you want to use quotation marks or the following combina-

tions of characters as part of the appended data, separate those characters from the AE command with quotes. If you do not use quotes as described here, the 700 Series Computer will interpret the characters as another con-

figuration command. AD AE AF KC BV EX DF Example To use the two-character string BV as a postamble, scan this command (as a Code 39 label) or send this command through the network: $+AEBV 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 345 Appendix A Configurable Settings Grid Sets the virtual wedge grid, which filters the data coming from this 700 Series Computer. The data server supports data filtering, which allows you to selectively send scanned data. The virtual wedge grid is similar to the format argument of the C Runtime Library scan function. Action Tap the Grid parameter, then enter a grid value to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.2.1.1.5.1 Syntax AF<symID> filter-expression= > editing-expression where:

S <symID>

The AIM symbology ID (optional). S filter-expression Any character string that includes valid filter expression values. Go to the SDK Users Manual provided with your Windows CE/PocketPC SDK for a list of valid filter expression values. S editing-expression Any character string that includes valid editing expression values. Go to the SDK Users Manual provided with your Windows CE/PocketPC SDK for a list of valid editing expression values. 346 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Code Page Sets the virtual wedge code page. The code page controls the translation from the character set of the raw collected data to Unicode, which is the character set expected by Windows CE applications. The default code page is 1252, which is the Windows Latin 1 (ANSI) character set. Action Tap the Code Page parameter, then select an option to change this param-

eter setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.2.1.1.6.1 Options The only acceptable value for the code page parameter is 1252, which is the default. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 347 Appendix A Configurable Settings Intermec Settings Control Panel Applet You may have the Intermec Settings control panel applet. Information about the settings you can configure with this applet is described in the Intermec Computer Command Reference Manual. The online manual is available from the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com. See Scanner Control and Data Transfer in the Intermec Windows CE/

Pocket PC Software Developers Kit (SDK) Users Manual shipped with the Software Developers Kit (SDK) for information about data collection functions. To access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start > Settings

> the System tab > Intermec Settings to access its control panel applet. 348 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual SNMP Control Panel Applet Appendix A Configurable Settings Note: This applet is not available in units with PSM Build 3.00 or newer. To determine your PSM build version, tap Start > Programs >

File Explorer > the PSMinfo text file. If your unit has PSM Build 3.00 or newer, then you may have the Intermec Settings control panel applet in place of the SNMP applet. Information about the settings you can configure with the Intermec Settings applet is described in the Intermec Computer Command Reference Manual. The online manual is available from the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com. Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) parameters include iden-

tification information, security encryption, security community strings, and traps. To access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start > Settings

> the System tab > SNMP to access its control panel applet. Tap a tab to access its menus. These tabs represent three groups of settings or parameters:

S Security (starting on the next page) S Traps (starting on page 355) S Identification (starting on page 357) 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 349 Appendix A Configurable Settings Security To access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start > Settings

> the System tab > SNMP > the Security tab to access its parameters. The following are parameters that affect encryption and community strings. Note that these are listed in the order of their appearance within the Security tab. Read Only Community Sets the read-only community string for this 700 Series Computer, which is required for processing of SNMP get and get next requests. Action Tap the Read Only Community parameter, then enter a community string to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.10.5.1.2.0 Options The read-only community string can be up to 128 ASCII characters. De-

fault is Public. 350 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Read/Write Community Sets the read/write community string, which is required for processing of SNMP set requests by this 700 Series Computer. An SNMP packet with this name as the community string will also process SNMP get and next requests. Action Tap the Read/Write Community parameter, then enter a community string to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.10.5.1.3.0 Options The read/write community string can be up to 128 ASCII characters. De-

fault is Private. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 351 Appendix A Configurable Settings Read Encryption Sets the packet-level mode of security for SNMP read-only requests. If you enable read encryption, all received SNMP get and get next packets have to be encrypted or the packet will not be authorized. If encryption is en-

abled, you can only use software provided by Intermec Technologies. Note: To enable security encryption, you also need to set the Security En-

cryption Key (page 354). Action Tap the Read Encryption parameter, then select an option to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.10.5.1.4.0 Options 1 2 On Off SNMP get and get next packets must be encrypted SNMP packets do not have to be encrypted (default) 352 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Write Encryption Sets the packet-level mode of security for SNMP read/write requests. If you enable write encryption, all SNMP packets that are received with the read/write community string have to be encrypted or the packet will not be authorized. You need to use software from Intermec Technologies that supports encryption. Note: To enable security encryption, you also need to set the Security En-

cryption Key (page 354). Action Tap the Write Encryption parameter, then select an option to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.10.5.1.5.0 Options 1 2 On Off SNMP packets must be encrypted SNMP packets do not have to be encrypted (default) 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 353 Appendix A Configurable Settings Encryption Key Identifies the key that this 700 Series Computer uses to encrypt or deci-

pher SNMP packets. Encryption is used only by software provided by In-

termec Technologies. If encryption is enabled, SNMP management plat-

forms will not be able to communicate with the 700 Series Computer. The encryption key is returned encrypted. Action Tap the Encryption Key parameter, then enter a security encryption key value to change this parameter setting. Note: You also need to set either Read Encryption (page 352) or Write Encryption (page 353) or both. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.10.5.1.6.0 Options The encryption key can be from 4 to 20 ASCII characters. Default is NULL. 354 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Traps Appendix A Configurable Settings To access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start > Settings

> the System tab > SNMP > the Traps tab to access its parameters. The following are authentication and threshold parameters for traps. Note that these are listed in the order of their appearance within the Traps tab. Authentication Determines whether to send authentication traps. When trap authentica-

tion is enabled, an authentication trap is sent if an SNMP packet is re-

ceived by the master agent with an invalid community string. Action Tap the Authentication parameter, then select an option to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.10.5.2.2.0 Options 1 2 On (default) Off 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 355 Appendix A Configurable Settings Threshold Determines the maximum number of traps per second that the master agent generates. If the threshold is reached, the trap will not be sent. Action Tap the Threshold parameter, then enter a threshold value to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.10.5.2.3.0 Options Any positive integer value. Default is 10. 356 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Identification Appendix A Configurable Settings To access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start > Settings

> the System tab > SNMP > the Identification tab to access its parameters. The following are parameters for contact, location, and name information for support purposes. Note that these are listed in the order of their appear-

ance within the Identification tab. Contact Sets the contact information for the person responsible for this 700 Series Computer. Action Tap the Contact parameter, then enter the name of your contact represen-

tative to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.4.0 Options The identification contact may be up to 255 ASCII characters. Default is no characters or blank. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 357 Appendix A Configurable Settings Name Sets the assigned name for this 700 Series Computer. Action Tap the Name parameter, then enter the name of your 700 Series Com-

puter to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.5.0 Options The identification name may be up to 255 ASCII characters. Default is no characters or blank. 358 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Location Sets the identification location for this 700 Series Computer, such as Shipping. Action Tap the Location parameter, then enter the location of where your 700 Series Computer to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.6.0 Options The identification location may be up to 255 ASCII characters. Default is no characters or blank. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 359 Appendix A Configurable Settings Unit Information Control Panel Applet Note: This applet is not available in units with PSM Build 3.00 or newer. To determine your PSM build version, tap Start > Programs >

File Explorer > the PSMinfo text file. If your unit has PSM Build 3.00 or newer, then you may have the Intermec Settings control panel applet in place of the Unit Information applet. Information about the settings you can configure with the Intermec Settings applet is described in the Intermec Computer Command Reference Manual. The online manual is available from the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com. Unit Information is a read-only control panel applet that provides infor-

mation about your 700 Series Computer, such as software version builds, available CAB files, and the internal battery status. To access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start > Settings

> the System tab > Unit Information to access its control panel applet. 700 Color Screen 730 Screen Tap a tab to access its menus. These tabs represent three groups of settings or parameters:

S Versions (starting on the next page) S Battery Status (starting on page 362) S CAB Files (starting on page 363) 360 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Versions You can view the latest software build version on your 700 Series Computer by accessing the Unit Information control panel applet. To access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start > Settings

> the System tab > Unit Information > the Versions tab to view the latest software build version. Tap ok to exit this information. 700 Color Screen 730 Screen Below are some of the software applications you may find on this screen:

S 700 Platform Build:

Shows the latest development or released version of the software build for the 700 Series Computer. S S9C:

Provides the name and version of the scanner file built into this 700 Se-

ries Computer, along with the current CPU version. S DataCollection Build:

Shows the latest development or released version of the software build for the Data Collection control panel applet. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 361 Appendix A Configurable Settings Battery Status You can view the battery status for your 700 Series Computer by accessing the Unit Information control panel applet. To access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start > Settings

> the System tab > Unit Information > the Battery Status tab to view the current status. Tap ok to exit this information. 362 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual CAB Files Appendix A Configurable Settings You can view the latest developer or released version of each CAB file from Intermec Technologies Corporation that are installed in your 700 Series Computer via the Unit Information control panel applet. Custom CAB files are not displayed in this applet. See the Software Tools Users Manual for more information about these files. To access the information from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start >

Settings > the System tab > Unit Information > the CAB Files tab to view the current CAB file versions. Tap ok to exit this information. When a CAB file is built, a registry entry is created with a build number for that file. This CAB Files control panel applet looks for a registry key for each CAB file installed. When the registry entry is found, the CAB file name and version number information are displayed. If a CAB file has not been installed, then its information is not displayed. Below is a list of CAB files from Intermec Technologies that are available for your 700 Series Computer with their latest developer or released ver-

sion of the software build. Should you need to add any of these to your 700 Series Computer, contact an Intermec representative. S BtMainStack:

Installation of the Main Bluetooth Stack is handled automatically as part of the operating system boot-up procedure. See Chapter 4, Network Support, for more information about Bluetooth wireless printing. S Comm Port Wedge:

The software build for the Comm Port Wedge. Note that the Comm Port Wedge CAB file is available on the Intermec Developers Library CD. S NPCPTest:

This installs a Norand Portable Communications Protocol (NPCP) Printing test application which will print to an Intermec 4815, 4820, or 6820 Printer. See Chapter 5, Printer Support, for more information. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 363 Appendix A Configurable Settings S S9C Upgrade:

Installs the files needed to upgrade the S9C scanner firmware. See the 700 Color Management Tools portion of the Intermec Developers Library CD for more information about upgrading the firmware. S SDK:

Installs the Intermec Software Developers Kit (SDK). See the SDK Users Manual for more information. S WinCfg:

Configures the NRINET.INI file, launches the NRINet client, and loads and unloads the LAN and WLAN device drivers. S Wireless Printing Sample:

Installs a sample application that developers can use for reference when they are developing their own Wireless Printing applications. The source code for this application is included as part of the Wireless Print-

ing SDK on the Intermec Developers Library CD. See the SDK Users Manual for more information. S ActiveX Control Tools:

This lists some of the CAB files that may be available with which to install ActiveX Control Tools. See the SDK Online Help for more infor-

mation. S AXCommunication:

Communication controls that transmit or receive messages from in-

put connections. S AXFileTransfer:

File transfer controls that transmit and receive files using the Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP). S AXReaderCommand:

Reader command functions that modify and retrieve configuration information from your 700 Series Computer. S AXVWedge:

The virtual wedge control that retrieves scanned ADC data and sends it to the keyboard driver to interpret data as keyboard input. 364 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Utilities Control Panel Applet The Utilities control panel applet examines and modifies settings and op-

erational modes of specific hardware and software on the 700 Color Com-

puter, including the dock switch, registry storage, wakeup mask, and ap-

plication launch keys. To access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start > Settings

> the System tab > Utilities to access its control panel applet. Use the left and right arrows to scroll through the tabs along the bottom of the control panel applet, then tap a tab to access its menus. These tabs rep-

resent the following groups of settings or parameters:

S Dock Switch (next page) S Registry Save (page 367) S Wakeup Mask (page 368) S App Launch (page 369) 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 365 Appendix A Configurable Settings Dock Switch From the 700 Series Computer, tap Start > Settings > the System tab >

Utilities > the Dock Switch tab to access the Dock Switch control panel applet. Use this applet to control the position of the dock switch. This can be set either to a COM A (phone jack for a modem) position or to a COM B

(serial) position. If switched to COM B and suspended the terminal will have the following behavior:

S If the 700 Series Computer is on charge, the dock switch will remain switched to COM B. S If the 700 Series Computer is off charge, the dock switch will switch to COM A and remain in this position until the 700 Series Computer re-

sumes charge. 366 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Registry Save Appendix A Configurable Settings From the 700 Series Computer, tap Start > Settings > the System tab >

Utilities > the Registry Save tab to access the Registry Save control panel applet. For Windows Mobile 2003, the only medium available for saving the reg-

istry is the Flash File System (PSM). Registry data is stored in the

\Flash_File_Store\Registry path. Check Enable Registry Storage to en-

able this function. To ensure that the 700 Series Computer restores the real-time clock after a cold-boot, check the Enable RTC Restore option. Note that this does not apply to the 730 Computer. 700 Color or 700CXL Screen 730 Screen 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 367 Appendix A Configurable Settings Wakeup Mask From the 700 Series Computer, tap Start > Settings > the System tab >

Utilities > the Wakeup Mask tab to access the Wakeup Mask control pan-

el applet. This applet programs three scanner buttons and the A1 and A2 application keys to be wakeup or resume keys. That is, to prompt the 700 Series Computer to wake up or resume activity after going to sleep as a result of being inactive after a length of time. This information will remain be-

tween warm and cold boots. Check the appropriate box, then tap ok to apply your settings. Based on your setting, do the following to wake up the 700 Series Com-

puter. If you select:

Middle Scanner Button Left Scanner Button Right Scanner Button GOLD + A1 (Application 1) GOLD + A2 (Application 2) Then do this on Numeric Keyboard Squeeze the button on the Scan Handle Squeeze the left scanner button Squeeze the right scanner button Press [Gold] b a Press [Gold] b 4 Then do this on Alphanumeric Keyboard Squeeze the button on the Scan Handle Squeeze the left scanner button Squeeze the right scanner button Press [Gold/White] c A Press [Gold/White] c B 368 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual App Launch Appendix A Configurable Settings From the 700 Series Computer, tap Start > Settings > the System tab >

Utilities , then scroll to the right to tap the App Launch tab to access the Application Launch control panel applet. This applet programs or maps two scanner buttons and four application keys to start up to six applications. Note that the left scanner button also acts as the record button. For 700 Series Computers with either a laser scanner or an imager, applications are as follows and default mappings are shown in the follow-

ing illustration:

S Left Scanner Trigger S Right Scanner Trigger S Record (see Note) S Calendar (see Note) S Contacts (see Note) S Tasks (see Note) For 700 Series Computers without either a laser scanner or an imager, the default maps the Record, Calendar, Contacts, and Tasks applications the top four and the A3 and A4 buttons are unassigned or available for two more applications. Note: Record, Calendar, Contacts, and Tasks are Pocket PC applications. See Chapter 2, Windows Mobile 2003, for more information about these applications. S To assign an application to a button, select an application from the ap-

plicable drop-down list box. S To assign a new application, select the Add new application option, which brings up an Open File dialog and browse SD or CF storage cards for new applications. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 369 Appendix A Configurable Settings S To disable or unmap a currently mapped application from a correspon-

ding button, select unassigned from the applicable drop-down list. S To restore these buttons to their defaults, tap Defaults in the lower right corner. Note; You cannot map an application to more than one button. Should you assign the same application to two buttons, a verification prompt will appear after the second button to confirm whether you want to remap the application. If you tap Yes, the applet changes the first button to unas-

signed and map the application to the second button. Note: All changes are activated immediately upon selection. 370 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Wireless Network Control Panel Applet Note: See Chapter 4, Network Support, for information about the 802.11b radio module. About the Wireless Network Your wireless adapter (network interface card) connects to wireless net-

works of two types: access point networks and peer-to-peer networks. S Access point networks get you onto your corporate network and the in-

ternet. Your 700 Series Computer establishes a wireless connection to an access point, which links you to the rest of the network. When you connect to a network via an access point, you are using the 802.1x infra-

structure mode. S Peer-to-peer networks are private networks shared between two or more people, even with no access point. Each wireless network is assigned a name (or Service Set Identifier - SSID) to allow multiple networks to coexist in the same area without infringe-

ment. With multiple networks within range of each other, security is a necessity, to avoid outside eavesdropping. To make a network safe, the following are required:

S Authentication by both the network and the user S Authentication is cryptographically protected S Wireless connection is encrypted There are two basic mechanisms for providing secure encryption over a wireless network: preconfigured secrets called WEP keys and authentica-

tion using the 802.1x protocol. Below are terms you may encounter as you configure your wireless net-

work:

S CKIP (Cisco Key Integrity Protocol) This is a light version of the TKIP protocol developed by Cisco. S EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) 802.1x uses this protocol to perform authentication. This is not neces-

sarily an authentication mechanism, but is a common framework for transporting actual authentication protocols. Intermec Technologies provides a number of EAP protocols for you to choose the best for your network. Terminology 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 371 Appendix A Configurable Settings S TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) This protocol is part of the IEEE 802.11i encryption standard for wire-

less LANs., which provides per-packet key mixing, a message integrity check and a re-keying mechanism, thus fixing the flaws of WEP. This protocol provides stronger encryption than WEP, by dynamically updating the encryption keys every 10,000 packets. It eliminates attacks on WEP, which is based on a cryptographic algorithm called RC4, leav-

ing WLANs open to various security attacks. TKIP is an interim addition to WEP that addresses some security con-

cerns. It provides per-packet key mixing, a MIC (Message Integrity Check), and a rekeying mechanism designed to fix WEP flaws. S WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) encryption With preconfigured WEP, both the client 700 Series Computer and access point are assigned the same key, which can encrypt all data be-

tween the two devices. WEP keys also authenticate the 700 Series Com-

puter to the access point unless the 700 Series Computer can prove it knows the WEP key, it is not allowed onto the network. WEP keys are only needed if they are expected by your clients. There are two types available: 64-bit (5-character strings, 12345) (default) and 128-bit (13-character strings, 1234567890123). Enter these as either ASCII (12345) or Hex (0x3132333435). S WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access) This is an enhanced version of WEP that does not rely on a static, shared key. It encompasses a number of security enhancements over WEP, including improved data encryption via TKIP and 802.1x au-

thentication with EAP. 372 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Configuring Your Wireless Network Appendix A Configurable Settings To start 802.11b communications on the 700 Series Computer, tap Start

> Settings > the System tab > Wireless Network to access the Profile Wizard for the 802.11b radio module. A profile contains all the information necessary to authenticate you to the network, such as login name, password or certificate, and protocols by which you are authenticated. You can have up to four profiles for different networks. For example, you may have different login names or passwords on different networks, or you may use a password on one network, and a certificate on another. Use the Profiles page to select and configure between the networking envi-

ronments assigned to this 802.11b radio. S Profile:

Tap the drop-down list to choose between four different profiles as-

signed to this unit, then tap Edit Select Profile, make the changes need-

ed for this profile (starting on the next page), then tap OK to return to the Profiles page. S Enable Microsofts Wireless Zero Config Check this box to enable Microsofts Wireless Zero Config application. This effectively disables the Intermec software solution for 802.11b, in-

cluding configuration via the CORE application and the Wireless Net-

work control panel applet. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 373 Appendix A Configurable Settings Basic Use the Basic page to set the network type, name, and manage battery power for this profile. Tap ok or OK to return to the Profiles page. S Profile Label:

Enter a unique name for your profile. S Network type:

Tap the drop-down list to select either Infrastructure if your network uses access points to provide connectivity to the corporate network or internet; or Ad-Hoc to set up a private network with one or more par-

ticipants. S Channel:

If you selected Ad-Hoc for the network type, select the channel on which you are communicating with others in your network. There are up to 11 channels available. S SSID (Network Name):

This assumes the profile name unless another name is entered in this field. If you want to connect to the next available network or are not familiar with the network name, enter ANY in this field. Consult your LAN administrator for network names. S Enable Power Management:

Check this box to conserve battery power (default), or clear this box to disable this feature. 374 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Security The following are available from the 8021x Security drop-down list. Note that the last four methods are available if you have purchased the security pack-

age. Contact your Intermec representative for information. S None (next page) S PEAP (page 379) S TLS (page 383) S TTLS (page 387) S LEAP (page 390) 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 375 Appendix A Configurable Settings None Use None to disable 802.1x Security and enable either WEP or WPA-

PSK encryption. To Disable 802.1x Security 1 Set 8021x Security as None. 2 Set Association to Open. 3 Set Encryption to None. 376 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings To Enable WEP Encryption 1 Set 8021x Security as None. 2 Set Association to either Open if WEP keys are not required; or Shared when WEP keys are required for association. 3 Set Encryption to WEP. See page 372 for information about WEP encryption. 4 If you had set Association to Shared, then select a data transmission key from the Data TX Key drop-down list near the bottom of this screen, then enter the encryption key for that data transmission in the appropriate Key # field. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 377 Appendix A Configurable Settings To Enable WPA Encryption Using a Preshared Key 1 Set 8021x Security as None. 2 Set Association to WPA. See page 372 for information about WPA encryption. 3 Skip Encryption as it is automatically set to TKIP. See page 372 for more information about TKIP. 4 Enter the temporal key as ASCII (12345) in the Pre-Shared Key field. 378 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings PEAP (Protected EAP) This protocol is suitable for performing secure authentication against Win-

dows domains and directory services. It is comparable to EAP-TTLS (see page 387), both in its method of operation and its security, though not as flexible. This does not support the range of inside-the-tunnel authentica-

tion methods supported by EAP-TTLS. Microsoft and Cisco both support this protocol. Use PEAP to configure the use of PEAP as an authentication protocol and to select Open, WPA, or Network EAP as an association mode. To Enable PEAP with an Open Association 1 Set 8021x Security as PEAP. 2 Set Association to Open. 3 Skip Encryption as it is automatically set to WEP. See page 372 for information about WEP encryption. 4 Enter your unique user name and password to use this protocol. Select Prompt for password to have the user enter this password each time to access the protocol; or leave Use following password as selected to auto-

matically use the protocol without entering a password. 5 Tap Additional Settings to assign an inner PEAP authentication and set options for server certificate validation and trust. See page 382 for more information. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 379 Appendix A Configurable Settings To Enable PEAP with WPA Encryption 1 Set 8021x Security as PEAP. 2 Set Association to WPA. See page 372 for information about WPA encryption. 3 Skip Encryption as it is automatically set to TKIP. See page 372 for more information about TKIP. 4 Enter your unique user name and password to use this protocol. Select Prompt for password to have the user enter this password each time to access the protocol, or leave Use following password as selected to auto-

matically use the protocol without entering a password. 5 Tap Additional Settings to assign an inner PEAP authentication and set options for server certificate validation and trust. See page 382 for more information. 380 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings To Enable PEAP with Network EAP 1 Set 8021x Security as PEAP. 2 Set Association to Network EAP. See page 371 for information about EAP. 3 Set Encryption to either WEP or CKIP. See page 371 for informa-

tion about CKIP and page 372 for information about WEP encryption. 4 Enter your unique user name and password to use this protocol. Select Prompt for password to have the user enter this password each time to access the protocol, or leave Use following password as selected to auto-

matically use the protocol without entering a password. 5 Tap Additional Settings to assign an inner PEAP authentication and set options for server certificate validation and trust. See page 382 for more information. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 381 Appendix A Configurable Settings Additional Settings 1 Select an authentication method from the Inner PEAP Authentication drop-down list. EAP/MS-CHAP-V2 EAP/Token Card Authenticates against a Windows Domain Controller and other non-Windows user databases. This is Microsofts implementation of PEAP. Use with token cards. The password value entered is never cached. This is Ciscos implementation of PEAP. EAP/MD5-Challenge Message Digest 5. A secure hashing authentication algo-

rithm. 2 Check Validate Server Certificate to verify the identity of the authenti-

cation server based on its certificate when using TTLS, PEAP, and TLS. 3 Enter the Common Names of trusted servers. Note that if these fields are left blank, the server certificate trust validation is not performed or required. 4 Click ok to return to the Security page. 382 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings TLS (EAP-TLS) EAP-TLS is a protocol that is based on the TLS (Transport Layer Security) protocol widely used to secure web sites. This requires both the user and authentication server have certificates for mutual authentication. While cryptically strong, this requires corporations that deploy this to maintain a certificate infrastructure for all their users. Use TLS to configure the use of EAP-TLS as an authentication protocol, and select either Open or WPA as an association mode. To Enable TLS with an Open Association 1 Set 8021x Security as TLS. 2 Set Association to Open. 3 Skip Encryption as it is automatically set to WEP. See page 372 for information about WEP encryption. 4 Enter your unique Subject Name and User Name to use this protocol. 5 Tap Get Certificates to obtain or import server certificates. See page 385 for more information. 6 Tap Additional Settings to set options for server certificate validation and trust. See page 386 for more information. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 383 Appendix A Configurable Settings To Enable TLS with WPA Encryption 1 Set 8021x Security as TLS. 2 Set Association to WPA. See page 372 for information about WPA encryption. 3 Skip Encryption as it is automatically set to TKIP.See page 372 for more information about TKIP. 4 Enter your unique Subject Name and User Name as credentials for this profile. 5 Tap Get Certificates to obtain or import server certificates. See page 385 for more information. 6 Tap Additional Settings to set options for server certificate validation and trust. See page 386 for more information. 384 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings To Get Certificates Certificates are pieces of cryptographic data that guarantee a public key is associated with a private key. They contain a public key and the entity name that owns the key. Each certificate is issued by a certificate authority. Use this page to import a certificate onto the 700 Series Computer. Root Certificates 1 Tap the <<< button next to the Import Root Certificate field to select the root certificate (DER-encoded .CER file) to import. 2 Click Import Root Cert to install the selected certificate. User Certificate 1 Tap the <<< button next to the Certificate Path field to select the user certificate (DER-encoded .CER file without the private key) to import. 2 Tap the <<< button next to the Key Path field to select the private key

(.PVK file) which corresponds to the user certificate chosen in step 1. 3 Tap Import User Cert to install the selected certificate. Web Enrollment Tap Web Enrollment to obtain a user certificate over the network from an IAS Server. Tap ok to return to the Security page. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 385 Appendix A Configurable Settings Additional Settings 1 Check Validate Server Certificate to verify the identity of the authenti-

cation server based on its certificate when using TTLS, PEAP, and TLS. 2 Enter the Common Names of trusted servers. Note that if these fields are left blank, the server certificate trust validation is not performed or required. 3 Click ok to return to the Security page. 386 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings TTLS (EAP-Tunneled TLS) This protocol provides authentication like EAP-TLS (see page 383) but does not require certificates for every user. Instead, authentication servers are issued certificates. User authentication is done using a password or oth-

er credentials that are transported in a securely encrypted tunnel estab-

lished using server certificates. EAP-TTLS works by creating a secure, encrypted tunnel through which you present your credentials to the authentication server. Thus, inside EAP-TTLS there is another inner authentication protocol that you must configure via Additional Settings. Use TTLS to configure the use of EAP-TTLS as an authentication pro-

tocol, and select either Open or WPA as an association mode. To Enable TTLS with an Open Association 1 Set 8021x Security as TTLS. 2 Set Association to Open. 3 Skip Encryption as it is automatically set to WEP. See page 372 for information about WEP encryption. 4 Enter your unique user name and password to use this protocol. Select Prompt for password to have the user enter this password each time to access the protocol, or leave Use following password as selected to auto-

matically use the protocol without entering a password. 5 Tap Additional Settings to assign an inner TTLS authentication and an inner EAP, and set options for server certificate validation and trust. See page 389 for more information. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 387 Appendix A Configurable Settings To Enable TTLS with WPA Encryption 1 Set 8021x Security as TTLS. 2 Set Association to WPA. See page 372 for information about WPA encryption. 3 Skip Encryption as it is automatically set to TKIP. See page 372 for more information about TKIP. 4 Enter your unique user name and password to use this protocol. Select Prompt for password to have the user enter this password each time to access the protocol, or leave Use following password as selected to auto-

matically use the protocol without entering a password. 5 Tap Additional Settings to assign an inner TTLS authentication and an inner EAP, and set options for server certificate validation and trust. See page 389 for more information. 388 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Additional Settings 1 Select an authentication protocol from the Inner TTLS Authentication drop-down list:

PAP CHAP Password Authentication Protocol. A simple authentication protocol that sends security information in the clear. Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol. Use of Radius to authenticate a terminal without sending security data in the clear. Authenticates against non-Windows user databases. You cannot use this if authenticating against a Windows NT Domain or Active Directory. Authenticates against a Windows Domain Controller and other non-Windows user databases. MS-CHAP;

MS-CHAP-V2 PAP/Token Card Use with token cards. The password value entered is never EAP cached. Extensible Authentication Protocol. See page 371 for informa-

tion about EAP. 2 If you select EAP for the inner authentication protocol, then an inner EAP protocol from the Inner EAP drop-down list. 3 Enter the Common Names of trusted servers. Note that if these fields are left blank, the server certificate trust validation is not performed or required. 4 Check Validate Server Certificate to verify the identity of the authenti-

cation server based on its certificate when using TTLS, PEAP, and TLS. 5 Enter the Anonymous EAP-TTLS Name as assigned for public usage. Use of this outer identity protects your login name or identity. 6 Click ok to return to the Security page. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 389 Appendix A Configurable Settings LEAP (Cisco Lightweight EAP) LEAP is the Cisco Lightweight version of EAP. See page 371 for informa-

tion about EAP. Use LEAP to configure the use of LEAP as an authentication protocol, select Open, WPA, or Network EAP as an association mode, or as-

sign Network EAP. Note that this defaults to the Network EAP. To Enable LEAP with an Open Association 1 Set 8021x Security as LEAP. 2 Set Association to Open. 3 Skip Encryption as it is automatically set to WEP. See page 372 for information about WEP encryption. 4 Enter your unique User Name to use this protocol. 5 Select Prompt for password to have the user enter this password each time to access the protocol, or leave Use following password as selected to automatically use the protocol without entering a password. 390 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings To Enable LEAP with WPA Encryption 1 Set 8021x Security as LEAP. 2 Set Association to WPA. See page 372 for information about WPA encryption. 3 Skip Encryption as it is automatically set to TKIP. See page 372 for more information about TKIP. 4 Enter your unique User Name to use this protocol. 5 Select Prompt for password to have the user enter this password each time to access the protocol, or leave Use following password as selected to automatically use the protocol without entering a password. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 391 Appendix A Configurable Settings To Enable LEAP with Network EAP 1 Set 8021x Security as LEAP. 2 Set Association to Network EAP, an EAP protocol for the network. See page 371 for information about EAP. 3 Set Encryption to either WEP or CKIP. See page 371 for informa-

tion about CKIP and page 372 for information about WEP encryption. 4 Enter your unique User Name to use this protocol. 5 Select Prompt for password to have the user enter this password each time to access the protocol, or leave Use following password as selected to automatically use the protocol without entering a password. 392 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Advanced Use this page to configure additional settings for this profile. Tap ok or OK to return to the Profiles page. S Enable mixed cell:

Mixed cell is a profile-dependent setting. If enabled, you can connect to mixed cell without using WEP, then you can query the cell to deter-

mine whether you can use encryption. S Enable Logging:

Check this to log what activity incurs for this profile. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 393 Appendix A Configurable Settings Other Configurable Parameters The following parameters can be configured by sending reader commands through the network or from an application. See Using Reader Com-

mands on page 396 for more information. Audio Volume Changes the volume of all audio signals. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.1.3.0 Options (Syntax Data for Reader Commands) 0 1 2 3 4 5 Off Very quiet Quiet Normal (default) Loud Very loud Automatic Shutoff Sets the length of time the 700 Series Computer remains on when there is no activity. When you turn on the 700 Computer, it either resumes exact-

ly where it was when you turned it off or boots and restarts your applica-

tion. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.11.3.0 Options (Syntax Data for Reader Commands) 1 2 3 4 5 1 minute 2 minutes 3 minutes (default) 4 minutes 5 minutes 394 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Backlight Timeout Sets the length of time that the display backlight remains on. If you set a longer timeout value, you use the battery power at a faster rate. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.13.1.0 Options (Syntax Data for Reader Commands) 10 30 60 120 180 240 300 10 seconds 30 seconds 1 minute (default) 2 minutes 3 minutes 4 minutes 5 minutes Sets the current date and time. SNMP OID Date:

Time:

1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.501.2.1.0 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.501.2.2.0 Date/Time Options (Syntax Data for Reader Commands) Date 00009999 (1999) Year Month 112 (6) 131 (1) Day 023 (0) Hour Minute 059 (00) Second 059 (00) Time Key Clicks Enables or disables the keypad clicks. The 700 Series Computer emits a click each time you press a key or decode a row of a two-dimensional symbology. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.12.1.0 Options (Syntax Data for Reader Commands) 0 1 2 Disable clicks Enable soft key clicks Enable loud key clicks (default) 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 395 Appendix A Configurable Settings Using Reader Commands After the 700 Series Computer is connected to your network, you can send the 700 Series Computer a reader command from an application to per-

form a task, such as changing the time and date. Some reader commands temporarily override the configuration settings and some change the con-

figuration settings. Change Configuration The Change Configuration command must precede any configuration command. If you enter a valid string, the 700 Series Computer configura-

tion is modified and the computer emits a high beep. To send the Change Configuration command through the network, use the $+ [command]

syntax where command is the two-letter command syntax for the configu-

ration command followed by the value to be set for that command. You can also make changes to several different commands by using the

$+ [command]...[command n] syntax. There are seven configuration command settings that can be changed in this way. See each command for information on respective acceptable data values. Command Audio Volume Automatic Shutoff Backlight Timeout Key Clicks Virtual Wedge Grid Virtual Wedge Postamble Virtual Wedge Preamble Syntax BVdata EZdata DFdata KCdata AFdata AEdata ADdata Note: See pages 342 and 344 for more information about the Virtual Wedge Postamble and Virtual Wedge Preamble commands. Example 1 To change the Beep Volume to Off, you can send this string to the 700 Series Computer through the network:

where:

BV 0 Indicates Change Configuration. Specifies the Audio Volume parameter. Specifies a value of Off.

$+BV0 Example 2 To change the Beep Volume to Very Quiet and the Virtual Wedge Grid to 123: $+BV1AF123 where:

BV1 AF123 Indicates Change Configuration Specifies Audio Volume, set to Very Quiet (1) Specifies Virtual Wedge Grid, set to a value of 123. 396 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Set Time and Date Appendix A Configurable Settings This command sets the date and time on the 700 Series Computer. The default date and time is June 1, 1999 at 12:00 AM. From the network, send the following:

/+ yyyymmddhhmmss where acceptable values for the date are:

yyyy mm dd hh mm ss 00009999 Year 0112 0131 0023 0059 0059 Month of the year Day of the month Hour Minutes Seconds You can also set the time and date by using Configuration Management in Unit Manager, or by using the Clock control panel applet in the Settings menu. To access this control panel applet, tap Start > Settings > the System tab > the Clock icon to access its control panel applet. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 397 Appendix A Configurable Settings Configuration Bar Codes You can change some settings on your 700 Series Computer by scanning the following Code 39 bar code labels. S You can use the Data Collection control panel to set the three Virtual Wedge parameters (starting on page 341). Note: When you use a bar code creation utility to make a scannable bar code label, the utility probably adds opening and closing asterisks automat-

ically. Asterisks are included here for translation purposes. Audio Volume Note: The Audio Volume parameter information is on page 394. Turn Audio Off

*$+BV0*

*$+BV0*

Set Audio Volume to very quiet

*$+BV1*

*$+VB1*

Set Audio Volume to quiet

*$+BV2*

*$+BV2*

Set Audio Volume to normal (default)

*$+BV3*

*$+BV3*

Set Audio Volume to loud

*$+BV4*

*$+BV4*

Set Audio Volume to very loud

*$+BV5*

*$+BV5*

398 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Configurable Settings Automatic Shutoff Note: The Automatic Shutoff parameter information is on page 394. Set Automatic Shutoff to 1 minute

*$+EZ1*

*$+EZ1*

Set Automatic Shutoff to 2 minutes

*$+EZ2*

*$+EZ2*

Set Automatic Shutoff to 3 minutes (default)

*$+EZ3*

*$+EZ3*

Set Automatic Shutoff to 4 minutes

*$+EZ4*

*$+EZ4*

Set Automatic Shutoff to 5 minutes

*$+EZ5*

*$+EZ5*

Backlight Timeout Note: The Backlight Timeout parameter information is on page 395. Backlight Timeout 10 seconds

*$+DF10*

*$+DF10*

Backlight Timeout 30 seconds

*$+DF30*

*$+DF30*

Backlight Timeout 1 minute (default)

*$+DF60*

*$+DF60*

700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 399 Appendix A Configurable Settings Backlight Timeout 2 minutes

*$+DF120*

*$+DF120*

Backlight Timeout 3 minutes

*$+DF180*

*$+DF180*

Backlight Timeout 4 minutes

*$+DF240*

*$+DF240*

Backlight Timeout 5 minutes

*$+DF300*

*$+DF300*

Key Clicks Note: The Key Clicks parameter information is on page 395. Disable key clicks

*$+KC0*

*$+KC0*

Enable soft key clicks

*$+KC1*

*$+KC1*

Enable loud key clicks (default)

*$+KC2*

*$+KC2*

400 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Virtual Wedge Grid, Preamble, Postamble Appendix A Configurable Settings The following parameters are user-configurable strings. Refer to a full ASCII chart for more information. Grid For Virtual Wedge Grid, the first part of the bar code would be the fol-

lowing, which can include a string of up to 240 characters. Parameter in-

formation starts on page 346.

*$+AF

*$+AF Preamble For Virtual Wedge Preamble, the first part of the bar code would be be-

low, followed by a string of up to 31 characters (no <NUL>) and an aster-

isk. Default is no characters. Parameter information is on page 342.

*$+AD

*$+AD Postamble For Virtual Wedge Postamble, the first part of the bar code would be be-

low, followed by a string of up to 31 characters (no <NUL>) and an aster-

isk. Default is no characters. Parameter information is on page 344.

*$+AE

*$+AE 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 401 Appendix A Configurable Settings 402 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Bar Code Symbologies B This appendix contains a brief explanation of some of the bar code symbologies that the 700 Series Color Mobile Computer decodes and ex-

plains some of the general characteristics and uses of these bar code types. The 700 Series Computer recognizes eleven of the most widely used bar code symbologies. With bar code symbologies, like languages, there are many different types. A bar code symbology provides the required flexibil-

ity for a particular inventory tracking system. A symbology may be for particular industries, such as food and beverage, automotive, railroad, or aircraft. Some of these industries have established their own bar code symbology because other symbologies did not meet their needs. Without going into great detail on the bar code structure, note that no two products use the same bar code. Each product gets a unique bar code. Industries that use a particular type of bar code symbology have formed regulating committees or are members of national institutes that issue and keep track of bar codes. This ensures that each organization that contrib-

utes to a particular industry conforms to its standard. Without some form of governing body, bar coding would not work. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 403 Appendix B Bar Code Symbologies Codabar Codabar was for retail price-labeling systems. Today it is widely accepted by libraries, medical industries, and photo finishing services. Codabar is a discrete, self-checking code with each character represented by a stand-alone group of four bars and three intervening spaces. Four different start or stop characters get defined and designated a, b, c, and d. These start and stop characters are constructed using one wide bar and two wide spaces. A complete Codabar symbol begins with one of the start or stop characters followed by some number of data char-

acters and ending in one of the start or stop characters. Any of the start or stop characters may be used on either end of the sym-

bol. It is possible to use the 16 unique start or stop combinations to identi-

fy label type or other information. Since Codabar is variable-length, discrete, and self-checking, it is a versa-

tile symbology. The width of space between characters is not critical and may vary significantly within the same symbol. The character set consists of 0 through 9, -, $, :, /, ., and +. The specific dimensions for bars and spaces in Codabar optimize perfor-

mance of certain early printing and reading equipment. Codabar has 18 different dimensions for bar and space widths. So many different dimen-

sions often result in labels printed out of specification and cause Codabar printing equipment to be more expensive. Code 11 satisfies the requirements for a very high density, discrete numer-

ic bar code. The name Code 11 derives from 11 different data characters that can be represented, in addition to a start or stop character. The character set includes the 10 digits and the dash symbol. Each charac-

ter is represented by a stand-alone group of three bars and two intervening spaces. Although Code 11 is discrete, it is not self-checking. A single print-

ing defect can transpose one character into another valid character. One or two check digits obtain data security. The specifications for Code 11 suggest that this code should have a narrow element width of 7.5 mils. This results in an information density of 15 characters per inch. Code 39 (C39) is the most widely used symbology among the industrial bar codes. Most major companies, trade associations, and the federal gov-

ernment find this code to fit their needs. The main feature of this symbol-

ogy is the ability to encode messages using the full alphanumeric character set, seven special characters, and ASCII characters. Programming for this symbology can be for any length that the application requires. The application program for the 751G Computer handles symbology at least one character but no more than 32 characters in length. Code 11 Code 39 404 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix B Bar Code Symbologies When programming the computer for Code 39, it is important to set the symbology limit as close as possible (minimum and maximum bar code lengths being scanned). Doing so keeps the computer bar code processing time to a minimum and conserves battery power. Bar code readers can respond to Uniform Symbology Specification sym-

bols in non-standard ways for particular applications. These methods are not for general applications, because of the extra programming required. Code 39 Full ASCII is one example of non-standard code. Note: See page 398 to scan several Code 39 bar code labels available to change settings on your 751G Computer. Encoded Code 39 (Concatenation) If the first data character of a symbol is a space, the reader may be pro-

grammed to append the information contained in the remainder of the symbol to a storage buffer. This operation continues for all successive sym-

bols that contain a leading space, with messages being added to the end of previously stored ones. When a message is read which does not contain a leading space, the contents are appended to the buffer, the entire buffer is transmitted, and the buffer is cleared. Encoded Code 39 (Full ASCII) If the bar code reader is programmed for the task, the entire ASCII charac-

ter set (128 characters) could be coded using two character sequences: a symbol ($,.,%,/) followed by a letter of the alphabet. Code 93 The introduction of Code 93 provided a higher density alphanumeric symbology designed to supplement Code 39. The set of data characters in Code 93 is identical with that offered with Code 39. Each character con-

sists of nine modules arranged into three bars and three spaces. Code 93 uses 48 of the 56 possible combinations. One of these characters, represented by a square, is reserved for a start or stop character, four are used for control characters, and the remaining 43 data characters coincide with the Code 39 character set. An additional single module termination bar after the stop character concludes the final space. Code 93 is a variable length, continuous code that is not self-checking. Bar and spaces widths may be one, two, three, or four modules wide. Its struc-

ture uses edge-to-similar-edge decoding. This makes the bar code immune to uniform ink spread, which allows liberal bar width tolerances. Code 93 uses two check characters. Its supporters believes this makes it the highest density alphanumeric bar code. The dual check digit scheme pro-

vides for high data integrity. All substitution errors in a single character are detected for any message length. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 405 Appendix B Bar Code Symbologies Code 128 Code 128 (C128) is one of the newest symbologies used by the retail and manufacturing industries. It responds to the need for a compact alphanu-

meric bar code symbol that could encode complex product identification. The fundamental requirement called for a symbology capable of being printed by existing data processing printers (primarily dot-matrix printers) that produce daily, work-in-progress, job, and product traceability docu-

ments. The ability to print identification messages between 10 and 32 characters long, on existing forms and labels deemed an important require-

ment. Code 128 uniquely addresses this need as the most compact, complete, alphanumeric symbology available. Additionally, the Code 128 design with geometric features, improves scan-

ner read performance, does self-checking, and provides data message man-

agement function codes. Code 128 encodes the complete set of 128 ASCII characters without ad-

ding extra symbol elements. Code 128 contains a variable-length symbolo-

gy and the ability to link one message to another for composite message transmission. Code 128, being a double-density field, provides two numer-

ic values in a single character. Code 128 follows the general bar code format of start zone, data, check digit, stop code, and quiet zone. An absolute minimum bar or space di-

mension of nine mils (0.010 inch minimum nominal 0.001 inch toler-

ance) must be maintained. Characters in Code 128 consist of three bars and three spaces so that the total character set includes three different start characters and a stop char-

acter. UCC/EAN-128 Shipping Container Labeling is a versatile tool that can ease movement of products and information. The Shipping Container La-

beling bar code can take any form and usually has meaning only within the company or facility where applied. Because this random data can get mistaken later for an industry standard code format, the UCC and EAN chose a symbology uniquely identified from these other bar codes. This standard is for maximum flexibility, to handle the diversity of distribution in global markets by cost efficiency. The UCC/EAN-128 Container Labeling specification calls for a FUNC1 to immediately follow the bar codes start character. FUNC1 also follows any variable-length application field. The specification also calls for the computer to send ]C1 for the first FUNC1. The specification requires that the computer send a <GS> (hex 1D) for subsequent FUNC1 codes in the bar code. Because <GS> is not compatible with computer emulation data streams, the Uniform Code Council has been asked to change the specification. This change is made to send the same three character sequence ]C1 to identify the embedded FUNC1 codes. 406 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix B Bar Code Symbologies This implementation should provide for clean application coding by iden-

tifying the same sequences for the same scanned codes. If the communica-

tion of Norand bar code types is enabled, the Shipping Container Label codes precede with a J. These strings will appear on the computer dis-

play. The application may have to allow for strings longer than 48 charac-

ters (maximum length indicated in the specification). Actual length vari-

ance depends on the number of variable-length data fields. Allowing for 60 characters should be sufficient. Within the Code 128 specification, the computer can link bar codes together. If this is to happen, allow for more characters (computer limit is 100 characters). The Application Identifier Standard, that is part of the UCC/EAN Ship-

ping Label concept, complements, rather than replaces, other UCC/EAN standards. Most UCC/EAN standards primarily identify products. Several industries expressed the need to standardize more than product identification. The UCC/EAN Code 128 Application Identifier Standard supplies this tool. The standard adds versatility for inter-enterprise ex-

changes of perishability dating, lot and batch identification, units of use measure, location codes, and several other information attributes. For more detailed information on Code 128 UCC/EAN Shipping Label bar code and Application Identifier Standard, refer to the UCC/EAN-128 Application Identifier Standard specification. Data Matrix is a high density 2D matrix code that can store a large amount of information. It has excellent error correction abilities and is mostly used for marking and tracking parts. Data Matrix can store from 1 to about 2000 characters. The symbol is square and can range from 0.001 inch per side up to 14 inches per side. As an example of density, 500 numeric-only characters can encode in a 1-inch square using a 24-pin dot matrix printer. Data Matrix is used to encode product and serial number information on electrical rating plates; to mark of surgical instruments in Japan; to identify lenses, circuit boards, and other items during manufacturing. Data Matrix EAN (European Article Numbering) EAN symbology is similar to UPC symbology, except that it contains 13 characters and uses the first two to identify countries. The EAN symbology is used in the retail environment throughout most of Europe. Though similar to UPC symbology, these are not interchangeable. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 407 Appendix B Bar Code Symbologies I 2 of 5 (Interleaved) I 2 of 5 (Interleaved 2 of 5 Code) is an all-numeric symbology, widely used for warehouse and heavy industrial applications. Its use has been par-

ticularly prevalent in the automobile industry. The I 2 of 5 symbology can be placed on smaller labels than what the standard UPC symbology re-

quires. I 2 of 5 also provides a little more flexibility on the type of material it can print on. Interleaved 2 of 5 Code has its name because of the way the bar code is configured. I 2 of 5 bars and spaces both carry information. The bars represent the odd number position digits, while spaces represent the even number posi-

tion digits. The two characters are interleaved as one. Messages encoded with this symbology have to use an even number of characters since two numeric characters always get interleaved together. Matrix 2 of 5 is a derivitive of Code 11 and is a linear bar code that is only read by linear imagers. It is limited to the ten digits and start/stop charac-

ter. Discrete but not self-checking. Matrix 2 of 5 is used with a single Mmodulo 10 check digit. Compared with Code 11 (using two check dig-

its) and the other industrial symbologies, Matrix 2 of 5 is somewhat more subject to substitution errors and offers no particular advantage. MaxiCode is a fixed-size code which holds up to 93 data characters. The symbol is composed of a central bulls-eye locator and offset rows of hexag-

onal elements; the overall dimensions of the symbol are approximately 1.11 x 1.054 inches. Each element measures 0.035 x 0.041 inches. Created by United Parcel Service, the MaxiCode symbol was designed for quick automated scanning of packages on high-speed conveyor lines (spe-

cial cameras can read a MaxiCode on a carton travelling at up to 500 feet per minute). The PDF417 symbology is a stacked 2D symbology that allows you to scan across rows of code. Each row consists of start/stop characters, row identifiers, and symbol characters, which consist of four bars and four spaces each and contain the actual data. This symbology uses error correc-

tion symbol characters appended at the end to recover loss of data. PDF417 can store up to about 1800 printable ASCII characters or 1100 binary characters per symbol. The symbol is rectangular; the shape of the symbol can be adjusted to some extent by setting the width and allowing the height to grow with the data. It is also possible to break large amounts Matrix 2 of 5 MaxiCode PDF417 408 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix B Bar Code Symbologies of data into several PDF417 symbols which are logically linked. There is no theoretical limit on the amount of data that can store in a group of PDF417 symbols. The capacity of PDF417 can be helpful in applications where the data must travel with the labeled item, where a host database is not always avail-

able for quick look-up. PDF417 is used for hazardous materials labeling;

storing technical specifications, and calibration data on electronic instru-

ments; encoding fingerprints and photographs on the backs of drivers li-

censes. The maximum data density is determined by the smallest elements which can be reliably printed and scanned. Using the smallest recommended ele-

ment size of 0.0075 inch wide and 0.010 inch high, the maximum data density in the binary mode is 686 bytes per square inch (106.2 bytes per square centimeter). In the printable ASCII mode the density is 1144 char-

acters per square inch (177.2 characters per square centimeter). Micro PDF417 is derived from PDF417. The code has a limited set of symbol sizes and a fixed level of error correction for each symbol size. Module dimensions are user-specified so that the symbol may be printed with a variety of printers. The symbology allows up to 150 bytes, 250 al-

phanumeric characters, or 366 numeric digits to be stored. This is done by specifying one of three compaction modes: data, text or numeric. Text Compaction mode permits all printable ASCII characters to be encoded

(values 32 to 126 inclusive) as well as selected control characters. Byte Compaction mode permits all 256 possible 8-bit byte values to be en-

coded. This includes all ASCII characters value 0 to 127 inclusive and pro-

vides for international character set support Micro PDF417 is designed for applications where the symbol must be smaller than PDF417 will allow. Plessey finds its origin in the pulse width modulated (PWM) code devel-

oped in England. It is widely used for shelf markings in grocery stores. Pulse width modulated codes represent each bit of information by a bar and space pair. A zero bit consists of a narrow bar followed by a wide space, while a one bit consists of a wide bar followed by a narrow space. It is mainly a numeric symbology (0-9) with six extra characters available for assigning any symbol or letter desired. Plessey codes employ a variety of check characters and a polynomial-based Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC). For start and stop characters, Plessey employs a 1101 and previously used a 0101. This symbology is very limited about what information can be encoded. It is not considered for new applications. Micro PDF417 Plessey 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 409 Appendix B Bar Code Symbologies MSI Code (Variant of Plessey) The MSI Plessey bar code is a variant of the Plessey bar code. It is a pulse-

width modulated non-self checking code, and is used primarily in store shelf labeling. Each character consists of eight elements, four bars and four spaces. The character set includes the digits 0 through 9. A Modulo 10 checksum is appended to the end of the code. For start and stop checks, MSI employs a single bit pair of 1 as a start symbol and a single bit pair of 0 as a stop symbol. MSI reverses the 1-2-4-8 BCD pattern for bit pair weighting to 8-6-2-1. QR Code (Quick Response Code) QR Code is a 2D matrix symbology containing dark and light square data modules. It has position detection patterns on three of its for corners and features direct encodation of the Japanese Kana-Kanji character set. A 2D imaging device such as a CCD camera is necessary to scan the symbology. QR Code is designed with selectable levels of error correction. It supports industry standard escape sequences to define international code pages and special encodation schemes. QR Code is used for small item marking ap-

plications using a wide variety of printing and marking technologies. This document includes descriptions of the character encodation, symbol struc-

ture, reference decode algorithm, and symbol quality measurements for QR Code. S 2 of 5 (Standard 2 of 5) The code S 2 of 5 (Standard 2 of 5 Code) is designed primarily for:

S Warehouse inventory handling S Identification of photo finishing envelopes S Airline tickets S Baggage and cargo handling The code S 2 of 5 is simple and straightforward. All information is con-

tained in the widths of the bars, with the spaces serving only to separate the individual bars. Bars can either be wide or narrow, and the wide bars are usually three times the widths of the narrow bars. Spaces may be any reasonable width but are typically equal to the narrow bars. Narrow bars are identified as zero bits and wide bars as one bits. Remember the code structure by associating the bar positions from left to right with weighting factors 1, 2, 4, 7, and parity. Exceptions to this rule are zero, start, and stop. This code is a discrete code, since the white spaces between the characters are not part of the code. Because the white spaces carry no information, their dimensions are not critical. The S 2 of 5 code is self-checking, meaning a scanner passing through a printing void would detect the proper ratio of wide bars to total bars. When the scanner spots an error, a non-read will occur. 410 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix B Bar Code Symbologies Telepen Telepen was devised by George Sims, Managing Director of SB Electronic Systems Limited, in early 1972, this is the only symbology to directly rep-

resent the full ASCII character set without shift characters.Telepen carries the double-density numeric-only mode and is very compact. The Telepen symbol is up to 8 ASCII characters or16 digit per inch, and is easy to print. It has a fixed 3:1 ratio, with a tolerance at least 0.4x. This symbolo-

gy is extremely secure, with negligible risk of misreading. It is supported by most leading manufacturers. UPC (Universal Product Code) The UPC (Universal Product Code) is the symbology used throughout the grocery and retail industries. This bar code symbology contains two pieces of numerical information encoded on the bar code, producer identifica-

tion, and product identification information. The UPC symbol is 12 characters long. The first character of the UPC symbol is a number system character, such as 0 for grocery items and 3 for drug- and health-related items. The UPC symbology is for retail environments such as grocery stores, con-

venience stores, and general merchandise stores. Some retail items are so small that a standard UPC bar code cannot fit on the packaging. When this occurs there is a permitted shorter version of the UPC symbology, referred to as UPC-E. UPC-E is six characters long

(eight including number system and check digit), approximately half the size of a standard UPC bar code. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 411 Appendix B Bar Code Symbologies 412 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Index I The Classes and Functions Index covers classes and functions for the 700 Series Color Mobile Computer. The General Index covers all topics. Those in italics are figures, those in bold are tables. The Files Index is to assist you in locating descriptions for device drivers, applica-

tions, utilities, batch files, or other files within this publication. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 413 Index Classes and Functions A add_registry_section, [AddReg]

flags, 216 registry_root_string, 216 value_name, 216 AddReg, [DefaultInstall], 212

[AddReg], add_registry_section flags, 216 registry_root_string, 216 value_name, 216 AddWep(), 263 AppName, [CEStrings], 209 B BuildMax, [CEDevice], 210 BuildMin, [CEDevice], 210 C

[CEDevice]

BuildMax, 210 BuildMin, 210 ProcessorType, 210 UnsupportedPlatforms, 210 VersionMax, 210 VersionMin, 210 shortcut_filename, 217 shortcut_type_flag, 217 target_file/path, 217 target_file_path, 217 CESignature

[SourceDiskNames], 212

[Version], 208

[CEStrings]

AppName, 209 InstallDir, 209 CloseHandle() DTR printing, 188, 189 IrDA printing, 182 NPCP printing, 183, 184 ConfigureProfile(), 268 Copyfiles, [DefaultInstall], 212

[CopyFiles], file_list_section destination_filename, 215 flags, 215 source_filename, 215 CreateEvent(), 279 CreateFile() DTR printing, 188, 189 IrDA printing, 182 CESelfRegister, [DefaultInstall], 212 CESetupDLL, [DefaultInstall], 212 CEShortcuts, [DefaultInstall], 212

[CEShortcuts], shortcut_list_section NPCP printing, 183, 184 D

[DefaultInstall]

AddReg, 212 CESelfRegister, 212 CESetupDLL, 212 CEShortcuts, 212 Copyfiles, 212 DeregisterDevice(), 183 DTR printing, 188

[DestinationDirs], file_list_section, 214 DeviceIOControl(), 251 DTR printing, 188 NPCP printing, 183 DeviceIoControl(), NPCP printing, 184, 185 disk_ordinal, [SourceDiskNames], 212 DllRegisterServer, 212 DllUnregisterServer, 212 E EnableSuppLogging(), 272 EnableWep(), 263 EnableZeroConfig(), 269 EncryptionStatus(), 264 EncryptWepKeyForRegistry(Deprecated), 273 F file_list_section

[CopyFiles]

destination_filename, 215 flags, 215 source_filename, 215

[DestinationDirs], 214 filename, [SourceDiskFiles], 213 G GetAssociationStatus(), 254 GetAuthenticationMode(), 255 GetBSSID(), 255 GetCCXStatus(), 262 GetCurrentDriverName(), 272 GetDiversity(), 256 GetLinkSpeed(), 256 GetMac(), 257 GetMedia(Deprecated), 273 GetMedium(Deprecated), 273 GetNetworkMode(), 257 GetNetworkType(), 258 GetNicStats(Deprecated), 273 GetPowerMode(), 259 GetRadioIpAddress(), 262 GetRSSI(), 259 GetRTSThreshold(Deprecated), 273 GetSSID(), 258 GetTXPower(), 260 GetWepStatus(), 261 414 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual I InstallDir, [CEStrings], 209 isDHCPEnabled(), 271 isOrinoco(), 269 isSupplicantRunning(), 270 isZeroConfigEnabled(), 269 K KernelIoControl(), 235 N NLEDGetDeviceInfo, 275 NLEDSetDevice, 275 O OSVERSIONINFO.dwBuildNumber, 210 OSVERSIONINFO.dwVersionMajor, 210 OSVERSIONINFO.dwVersionMinor, 210 P ProcessorType, [CEDevice], 210 Provider, [Version], 208 R RadioConnect(), 253 RadioDisassociate(), 254 RadioDisconnect(), 253 ReadFile(), NPCP printing, 183 RegFlushKey(), 123, 225 RegisterDevice(), 183 DTR printing, 188 RegOpenKeyEx(), 278 RegQueryValueEx(), 278 RegSetValueEx(), 278 RemoveWep(), 268 RenewDHCP(), 271 ResetRadioToSystemSave(), 272 S SetAuthenticationMode(), 265 SetCCXStatus(), 267 SetChannel(), 265 SetDiversity(Deprecated), 273 Index SetMixedCellMode(), 267 SetNetworkMode(), 266 SetPowerMode(), 266 SetRTSThreshold(Deprecated), 273 SetSSID(), 267 SetTXRate(Deprecated), 273 SHFullScreen(), 225, 226 shortcut_list_section, [CEShortcuts]

shortcut_filename, 217 shortcut_type_flag, 217 target_file/path, 217 target_file_path, 217 Signature, [Version], 208

[SourceDiskFiles], filename, 213

[SourceDiskNames]

CESignature, 212 disk_ordinal, 212 SourceDisksNames.MIPS, 213 SourceDisksNames.SH3, 213 StartScanList(), 270 StartSupplicant(), 270 StopSupplicant(), 271 string_key, [Strings], 209

[Strings], string_key, 209 SwitchPacketDriver(), 273 SYSTEMINFO.dwProcessorType, 210 U UnsupportedPlatforms, [CEDevice], 210 V

[Version]

CESignature, 208 Provider, 208 Signature, 208 VersionMax, [CEDevice], 210 VersionMin, [CEDevice], 210 W WriteFile() DTR printing, 188, 189 IrDA printing, 182 NPCP printing, 183, 184 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 415 1D laser scanner, about, 191 1D OmniDir Decode Enable, configuration parameter, Index General Index Numbers 1470 Imager. See Imager 1551/1553 Tethered Scanner See also Tethered scanner configuring, 201 reset to factory defaults, 204 troubleshooting, 204 328 2D Imager, about, 191 4820 printer, NPCP driver, 183 6804DM printer DTR driver, 188 IrDA driver, 182 6804T printer DTR driver, 188 IrDA driver, 182 6805A printer DTR driver, 188 IrDA driver, 182 6806 printer DTR driver, 188 IrDA driver, 182 6808 printer DTR driver, 188 IrDA driver, 182 printer support, 181 681T printer, DTR driver, 188 6820 printer IrDA driver, 182 NPCP driver, 183 printer support, 181 229 700 Platform Build, version number, 349 740 Color Computer, 277 781 printers, DTR driver, 188 782T printer, printer support, 181 802.11 CR radio CORE module, 129 installing available modules, 126 loading a module, 126 802.11b antenna color code, 127 API, 252 channel, 362 communications setup, 129, 361 configuration profiles, 252 CORE module, 129 LEAP network EAP, 380 WPA encryption, 379 network type, 362 PEAP network EAP, 369 WPA encryption, 368 6920 Communications Server, ManifestName parameter, profile label, 362 profile security information, WEP encryption, 365 profiles, 361 advanced settings, 381 basic information, 362 security information, 363 SSID (network name), 362 TTLS, WPA encryption, 376 WPA encryption, 366 A Abstract Syntax Notation.1. See ASN.1 Accessory list, 22 Accounts, via Inbox, 75 ActiveSync ActiveSync Help, 45 adding programs, 42 adding programs to Start menu, 43 Folder behavior connected to e-mail server, 74 installing applications, 119 Microsoft Reader, 90 Pocket Internet Explorer favorite links, 94 mobile favorites, 95 Mobile Favorites folder, 94 Start menu icon, 27 URL, 44 Windows Mobile, 44 files, 352 ActiveX control tools, unit information control panel, CAB AD command, with/without data, 331 Adding bookmarks, Microsoft Reader, 93 Adding drawings to text, Microsoft Reader, 93 Adding programs ActiveSync, 42 Pocket Internet Explorer, 42 to the Start menu, 43 via ActiveSync, 43 via File Explorer, 43 Windows Mobile, 41 Adjusting settings, Windows Mobile, 41 Adobe Acrobat Reader, URL, 169 AE command, with/without data, 333 Aimer LED Duration, configuration parameter, 324 All-Day events, Calendar, 48 creating, 52 Alpha plane on keypad, 278 Alphanumeric keypad alpha (blue) key sequences, 15

[gold/white] key sequences, 13 registry settings alpha plane, 278 gold plane, 278 unshifted plane, 278 scan codes, 281 Ambient lighting, 2 Annotations index, Microsoft Reader, 93 ANT_DIVERSITY, GetDiversity(), 256 ANT_PRIMARY, GetDiversity(), 256 ANT_SECONDARY, GetDiversity(), 256 416 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Antenna, radio type, 127 APIs 802.11b, 252 AT command interface, 169 IrSock, 182 App launch, control panel applet, 357 Application keys app launch control panel applet, 357 wakeup mask control panel applet, 356 Appointments Calendar adding a note, 54 assigning to a category, 56 changing, 51 creating, 51 deleting, 58 finding, 58 making recurring, 55 setting a reminder, 53 viewing, 49 via Calendar, 46 APS linear imager, about, 191 ASCII printing, 182 printing to a port, port print method, 182 raw text to printer, 182 ASN.1, 179 Asset management, DeviceURL parameter, 228 AT command interface, 169 testing, 170 Attaching notes to text, Microsoft Reader, 93 Audio, phone application, 167 Audio control panel applet, input mixing, 8 Audio files, Windows Media Player, 89 Audio system external headset jack, 4 microphone, 4 speaker, 3 AutoCab, command line syntax, 124 AutoFTP, 233 AutoIP, 178 Automatic Private IP. See AutoIP Automatic shutoff bar code configuration, 382, 387 configuration parameter, 382 Autostart FTP, 233 AvantGo channels, Pocket Internet Explorer, 96 AXCommunication, 352 AXFileTransfer, 352 AXReaderCommand, 352 AXVWedge, 352 B Backlight control panel applet ambient light sensor, 2 keypad, 11 Backlight timeout bar code configuration, 383, 387 configuration parameter, 383 Index Bar code configuration audio volume, 382 automatic shutoff, 382 backlight timeout, 383 key clicks, 383 Bar codes configuration audio volume, 386 automatic shutoff, 387 backlight timeout, 387 Code 39, 386 key clicks, 388 internal scanner supported symbologies, 195 scanning labels, 386 supported symbologies, 289 symbologies Codabar, 392 Code 11, 392 Code 128, 394 Code 39, 392 Code 39 concatenation, 393 Code 39 full ASCII, 393 Code 93, 393 Data Matrix, 395 EAN, 395 I 2 of 5, 396 Matrix 2 of 5, 396 MaxiCode, 396 Micro PDF417, 397 MSI code, 398 PDF417, 396 Plessey, 397 QR Code, 398 S 2 of 5, 398 Telepen, 399 UPC, 399 ambient lighting, 2 low battery conditions, 6 RAM maintenance, 6 status, 5 configuration parameter frequency, 321 volume, 319, 320 disabling the volume, 320 selecting a volume, 9 silencing the volume, 10 supported functions, 318 volume, turning it on, 7 when not available tethered scanner supported symbologies, 205 Basic connect/disconnect functions, 253 Battery Battery status, unit information control panel applet, 350 Beeper beeper frequency, 321 good read beep duration, 323 good read beeps, 322 Bell Mobility activation process, 157 Block recognizer, Windows Mobile input panel, 32 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 417 Index BlockSize, FTP Server, 228 Bluealps CORE module installing available modules, 126 loading a module, 126 Bluetooth accessing, 174 activating, 174 unit information control panel, main stack CAB file, 351 Bluetooth compatibility, network support, 174 Books, Microsoft Reader adding bookmarks, 93 adding drawings, 93 annotations index, 93 attaching notes, 93 copying, 93 downloading, 90 highlighting, 93 reading, 92 removing, 93 searching, 93 Browsing the Internet, Pocket Internet Explorer, 97 Build information, software, 18 installation functions, SETUP.DLL, 220 placing files onto storage card, 122 unit information control panel applet, 351 C CAB files after the extraction, 220 creating, 208 INF files, 208 with CAB Wizard, 223 Cabinet Wizard creating CAB files, 223 troubleshooting, 224 using the application, 208 Cabling, scanner, 199 Calendar all day events, 48 creating, 52 appointments adding a note, 54 assigning to a category, 56 changing, 51 creating, 51 deleting, 58 finding, 58 making recurring, 55 setting a reminder, 53 viewing, 49 categories, 47 meetings, sending a request, 57 options, changing, 59 Pocket Outlook, 46 recurrence pattern, 49 Start menu icon, 27 synchronizing, 47 Capacitor, internal super, 6 Capturing thoughts and ideas, via Notes, 71 Card support CompactFlash cards, 19 MultiMediaCards, 19 radios, 21 Secure Digital cards, 19 Carrier, location of ESN, 140 Categories calendar, 47 contacts, assigning to, 65 CDMA/1xRTT, 134 activation with SB555 Watcher, 140 Bell Mobility, 157 Sprint, 147 Telus, 157 Verizon, 143 WWANInit demo program, 157 antenna color code, 127 AT command set, 169 copying files from web site, 137 via Microsoft ActiveSync, 138 via storage cards, 138 CORE module, 134 location of ESC, 140 setting up, 137 terminology, 137 CEImager location of the executable file, 122 migrating AUTORUN.DAT files, 122 Channel, 802.11 radio module, 362 ClassID field values VN_CLASS_ASIC, 237 VN_CLASS_BOOTSTRAP, 237 VN_CLASS_KBD, 237 Clock restore real-time after cold-boot, 355 setting date and time, 385 Windows Mobile settings, 41 Closing drivers, NPCP, 184 Codabar, 392 configuration parameter, 292 user ID, 311 Code 11, 392 user ID, 315 Code 128, 394 configuration parameter, 306 configuration parameter, 295 FNC1 character, 297 user ID, 311 Code 39, 392 configuration parameter, 290 user ID, 311 Code 93, 393 configuration parameter, 294 length, 294 user ID, 312 Code Division Multiple Access. See CDMA/1xRTT 418 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Index Codes 11, 392 128, 394 39, 392 39 concatenation, 393 39 full ASCII, 393 93, 393 Cold boot, IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT, 245 Cold boot, performing, 17 COM A, modem position, 354 COM B, serial position, 354 COM port configuration, 197 wedge settings, 197 COM1, NPCP parameter, 183 COM1 port, 182 Comm port wedge disabling, 197 enabling, 196 error messages, 197 limitations, 199 settings, 197 unit information control panel, 351 Command line syntax, AutoCab, 124 Common Object Resource Environment. See CORE Communications DTR, 189 NPCP, 186 Communications options, 125 CompactFlash cards card support, 19 installing applications, 120 migrating applications, 122 packaging an application, 118 Computer shutdown, 6 Concatenation, 393 Configuration parameters 1D OmniDir decode enable, 328 aimer LED duration, 324 automatic shutoff, 382 backlight timeout, 383 beeper, 319 FNC1 character, 297 user ID, 311 frequency, 321 volume, 320 codabar, 292 user ID, 311 code 11, 306 user ID, 315 code 128, 295 code 39, 290 user ID, 311 code 93, 294 length, 294 user ID, 312 datamatrix, 308 date/time, 383 EAN 13 user ID, 314 8 user ID, 314 good read beep duration, 323 beeps, 322 identification contact, 345 location, 347 name, 346 image dimension, 326 interleaved 2 of 5, 303 user ID, 312 key clicks, 383 lighting mode, 327 macro PDF, 300 matrix 2 of 5, 304 user ID, 314 maxicode, 309 micro PDF417, 302 MSI, 299 user ID, 312 PDF417, 300 user ID, 312 plessey, 298 user ID, 313 prefix, 316 QR code, 307 security encryption key, 342 read encryption, 340 read-only community string, 338 read/write community string, 339 write encryption, 341 SNMP, security subnet mask, 310 standard 2 of 5, 291 user ID, 313 sticky aimer duration, 325 suffix, 317 telepen, 305 user ID, 314 trap UPC authentication, 343 threshold, 344 A user ID, 313 E user ID, 313 UPC/EAN, 293 virtual wedge, 329 code page, 335 grid, 334 postamble, 332 preamble, 330 volume, 382 Connecting to an ISP, 98 e-mail server, 114 work, 104 Connecting to a mail server, via Inbox, 75 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 419 Index Connections See also Getting connected directly to e-mail server, 114 ending, 114 setting up an e-mail account, 114 to an ISP, 98 via Ethernet, 103 via modem, 98 to work, 104 via Ethernet, 113 via modem, 106 via VPN server, 111 via wireless network, 108 via Ethernet to an ISP, 103 to work, 113 via modem to an ISP, 98 to work, 106 via VPN server, to work, 111 via wireless network, to work, 108 Conserving battery power, 2 Contacts adding a note, 64 assigning to a category, 65 changing, 63 changing options, 68 copying, 65 creating, 61, 63 deleting, 67 finding, 67 MSN Messenger managing, 87 sending messages, 88 working with, 86 Pocket Outlook, 60 sending a message, 66 Start menu icon, 27 synchronizing, 61 viewing, 62 Audio, 8 backlight, 2, 11 clock, 385 data collection, 288 beeper volume, 9 beeper/LED, 318 imager, 324 symbologies, 289 symbology options, 310 vibrator, 20 virtual wedge, 329 intemec settings beeper volume, 10 vibrator, 21 Control panel applets intermec settings, 288, 336 power battery status, 5 RAM maintenance, 6 SNMP, 337 identification, 345 security, 338 traps, 343 system, wireless network, 129, 361 unit information, 348 battery status, 5, 350 CAB files, 351 versions, 18, 349 utilities, 353 app launch, 357 dock switch, 354 registry save, 123, 355 wakeup mask, 356 wireless network, 359 Converting writing to text, 35 Copying, contacts, 65 Copying text, Microsoft Reader, 93 CORE, 126 802.11b radio module, 129 details, 131 general, 130 accessing from Programs panel, 126 Today screen, 127 activating, 126 installing available modules, 126 loading a module, 126 module for 802.11b NIC, 252 WAN monitor, GSM/GPRS, 164 WAN radio module CDMA/1xRTT, 134 general, 164 Creating a modem connection to an ISP, 98 to work, 106 a VPN server connection, to work, 111 a wireless network connection, to work, 108 an Ethernet connection to an ISP, 103 to work, 113 CAB files, 208 with CAB Wizard, 223 contacts via Contacts, 61 document via Pocket Word, 78 drawing via Notes, 37 INF files, 208 note via Notes, 71 task via Tasks, 70 workbook via Pocket Excel, 82 420 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual D Data collection build version number, 349 configuration parameters 1D OmniDir decode enable, 328 aimer LED duration, 324 beeper, 319 beeper frequency, 321 beeper volume, 320 codabar, 292 codabar user ID, 311 code 11, 306 code 11 user ID, 315 code 128, 295 code 128 FNC1 character, 297 code 128 user ID, 311 code 39, 290 code 39 user ID, 311 code 93, 294 code 93 length, 294 code 93 user ID, 312 datamatrix, 308 EAN-13 user ID, 314 EAN-8 user ID, 314 good read beep duration, 323 good read beeps, 322 image dimension, 326 interleaved 2 of 5, 303 interleaved 2 of 5 user ID, 312 lighting mode, 327 macro PDF, 300 matrix 2 of 5, 304 matrix 2 of 5 user ID, 314 maxicode, 309 micro PDF417, 302 MSI, 299 MSI user ID, 312 PDF417, 300 PDF417 user ID, 312 plessey, 298 plessey user ID, 313 prefix, 316 QR code, 307 standard 2 of 5, 291 standard 2 of 5 user ID, 313 sticky aimer duration, 325 suffix, 317 telepen, 305 telepen user ID, 314 UPC-E user ID, 313 UPC-A user ID, 313 UPC/EAN, 293 virtual wedge, 329 virtual wedge code page, 335 virtual wedge grid, 334 virtual wedge postamble, 332 virtual wedge preamble, 330 vibrator, 20 Index Data Matrix, 395 configuration parameter, 308 Date, setting, 385 Date/Time, configuration parameter, 383 Deprecated functions, 273 DeviceName, FTP Server, 228 DeviceURL, FTP Server, 228 DHCP, 178 Display full screen, 226 Dock switch, control panel applet, 354 Docks, modem support, 16 DRAM low battery shutdown, 6 maintenance, 6 Drawing mode, Pocket Word, 81 Drawing on the screen See also Notes Pocket Word, 81 Drivers DTR NPCP communications, 189 installing, 188 opening, 189 removing, 188 writing to, 189 closing, 184 communications, 186 I/O controls, 185 installing, 183 opening, 184 reading from, 184 removing, 183 writing to, 184 ONeil. See DTR printing DTR printing, 188 closing driver, 189 communications, 189 opening driver, 189 removing driver, 188 writing to driver, 189 E E-mail account, setting up an account, 114 E-mail server, getting connected, 114 EAN, configuration parameter, 293 13 user ID, 314 8 user ID, 314 Editing a profile, 361 Edition information, 24 Encoded Code 39 concatenation, 393 full ASCII, 393 Ending a connection, 114 Epson Escape Sequences, 182 Error messages comm port wedge, 197 tethered scanner, 197 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 421 Index ERROR_INSUFFICIENT_BUFFER IOCTL_HAL_ITC_READ_PARM, 236 IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM, 240 ERROR_INVALID_PARAMETER IOCTL_HAL_ITC_READ_PARM, 236 IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM, 240 ESN, location on computer, 140 Ethernet communications setup, 128 creating a connection to an ISP, 103 to work, 113 ETSI GSM 07.05 interface specifications, 169 ETSI GSM 07.07 interface specifications, 169 European Article Numbering. See EAN European Article Numbering code. See EAN F Favorite links, Pocket Internet Explorer, 94 File Explorer adding programs to Start menu, 43 removing programs, 43 Windows Mobile, 40 File Transfer Protocol. See FTP Find feature, Windows Mobile, 40 Flash File Store migrating applications, 122 packaging an application, 118 Flash file system, control panel applet, 355 Folder behavior connected to e-mail server ActiveSync, 74 IMAP4, 74 POP3, 74 SMS, 74 FRAME_NOT_ACKED, 185 FTP client, 230 configurable parameters, 228 BlockSize, 228 DeviceName, 228 DeviceURL, 228 IDNATarget, 229 ManifestName, 229 PauseAtStartup, 229 Root, 229 FTPDCMDS subdirectory, 232 heartbeat, 230 RTC 959, 232 server, 230 installing applications, 120 server requests CDUP, 230 CWD, 230 DELE, 230 HELP, 230 LIST, 230 MKD, 230 MODE, 230 NLST, 230 NOOP, 230 PASS, 230 PWD, 230 QUIT, 230 RETR, 230 RMD, 230 RNFR, 230 RNTO, 230 SITE, 231 SITE ATTRIB, 231 SITE BOOT, 231 SITE COPY, 231 SITE EKEY, 232 SITE EVAL, 232 SITE EXIT, 231 SITE GVAL, 232 SITE HELP, 231 SITE KILL, 231 SITE LOG, 231 SITE PLIST, 231 SITE PVAL, 232 SITE RUN, 231 SITE STATUS, 232 SITE TIMEOUT, 232 STOR, 230 SYST, 230 TYPE, 230 USER, 230 XCUP, 230 XCWD, 230 XMKD, 230 XPWD, 230 XRMD, 230 stopping server from application, 233 support, 230 web browsers, 232 FTPDCMDS subdirectory, FTP support, 232 Full screen display, 226 G GDI approach, 182 General Packet Radio Service. See GSM/GPRS Getting connected directly to an e-mail server, 114 ISP, 98 setting up an e-mail account, 114 to an ISP, 98 creating a modem connection, 98 creating an Ethernet connection, 103 to work, 104 creating a modem connection, 106 creating a VPN server connection, 111 creating a wireless network connection, 108 creating an Ethernet connection, 113 Windows Mobile, 98 Gold plane on keypad, 277 Good read, configuration parameter beep duration, 323 beeps, 322 Grid data, configuration parameter, 334 422 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOTLOADER_VERINFO, 244 IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO, 243 GSM/GPRS, 164 antenna color code, 127 AT command set, MC45, 169 CORE module, 164 phone application, 166 H HAL, verion of Pocket PC Handset phone application, 166 volume, 168 Headset jack, external, 4 Helper functions, 268 Highlighting text, Microsoft Reader, 93 I I 2 of 5. See Interleaved 2 of 5 I/O controls, NPCP driver, 185 ID field values IOCTL_HAL_ITC_READ_PARM ITC_NVPARM_80211_INSTALLED, 238 ITC_NVPARM_80211_RADIOTYPE, 238 ITC_NVPARM_ANTENNA_DIVERSITY, 237 ITC_NVPARM_BLUETOOTH_INSTALLED, 239 ITC_NVPARM_CONTRAST, 237 ITC_NVPARM_DISPLAY_TYPE, 237 ITC_NVPARM_ECN, 237 ITC_NVPARM_EDBG_SUBNET, 237 ITC_NVPARM_EDG_IP, 237 ITC_NVPARM_ETHERNET_ID, 236 ITC_NVPARM_INTERMEC_DATACOLLEC-

ITC_NVPARM_INTERMEC_DATACOLLEC-

TION_HW, 238 TION_SW, 238 ITC_NVPARM_INTERMEC_SOFT-

WARE_CONTENT, 237 ITC_NVPARM_LAN9000_INSTALLED, 239 ITC_NVPARM_MANF_DATE, 236 ITC_NVPARM_MCODE, 237 ITC_NVPARM_RTC_RESTORE, 238 ITC_NVPARM_SERIAL_NUM, 236 ITC_NVPARM_SERIAL2_INSTALLED, 239 ITC_NVPARM_SERVICE_DATE, 236 ITC_NVPARM_SIM_PRO-

TECT_HW_INSTALLED, 239 ITC_NVPARM_SIM_PRO-

TECT_SW_INSTALLED, 239 ITC_NVPARM_VERSION_NUMBER, 237 Index ITC_NVPARM_VIBRATE_INSTALLED, 239 ITC_NVPARM_WAN_FREQUENCY, 238 ITC_NVPARM_WAN_INSTALLED, 238 ITC_NVPARM_WAN_RADIOTYPE, 238 ITC_NVPARM_WAN_RI, 237 IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM ITC_ DOCK_SWITCH, 241 ITC_ WAKEUP_MASK, 241 ITC_AMBIENT_FRONTLIGHT, 241 ITC_AMBIENT_KEYBOARD, 241 ITC_REGISTRY_SAVE_ENABLE, 241 Identification, configuration parameter contact, 345 location, 347 name, 346 IDNA DeviceName, 228 DeviceURL, 228 IDNATarget, 229 ManifestName, 229 IDNATarget, FTP Server, 229 Image dimension, configuration parameter, 326 Imager beeper functions not available beeper frequency, 321 good read beep duration, 323 good read beeps, 322 beeper/LED parameters, beeper, 319 control panel appet, data collection, 324 data collection parameters 1D OmniDir decode enable, 328 aimer LED duration, 324 datamatrix, 308 image dimension, 326 lighting mode, 327 maxicode, 309 QR code, 307 sticky aimer duration, 325 settings, 198 supported beeper functions, 318 functions, 324 symbologies, 289 symbologies not available CIP 128 French Pharmaceutical, 296 Code 11, 306 Code 128 FNC1 character, 297 EAN 128 ]C1, 296 Macro PDF, 300 Matrix 2 of 5, 304 micro PDF417, 302 Telepen, 305 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 423 Index symbology user IDs not available Codabar, 311 Code 11, 315 Code 128, 311 Code 39, 311 Code 93, 312 EAN 13, 314 EAN 8, 314 Interleaved 2 of 5, 312 Matrix 2 of 5, 314 MSI, 312 PDF417, 312 Plessey, 313 Standard 2 of 5, 313 Telepen, 314 UPC A, 313 UPC E, 313 vibrator, enabling, 20 IMAP4, Folder behavior connected to e-mail server, 74 Inbox accounts, 75 composing/sending messages, 77 connecting to a mail server, 75 downloading messages from server, 76 getting connected, 98 managing e-mail messages and folders, 74 Pocket Outlook, 73 Start menu icon, 27 synchronizing e-mail messages, 73 using My Text, 39 INF files, creating, 208 Input Mixing, Audio control panel applet, 8 Input panel block recognizer, 32 keyboard, 31 letter recognizer, 33 Pocket Word, 79 selecting typed text, 33 transcriber, 33 Windows Mobile, 28 word suggestions, 31 Installation functions, SETUP.DLL, 220 Installing applications using a storage card, 120 using CompactFlash cards, 120 using Secure Digital cards, 121 with ActiveSync, 119 with FTP Server, 120 Installing drivers DTR, 188 NPCP, 183 Instant messaging, 84 Integrated scanners. See Internal scanners Interface specifications, ETSI GSM 07.0x, 169 Interleaved 2 of 5, 396 configuration parameter, 303 user ID, 312 Intermec Device Network Announcement. See IDNA Intermec part numbers, 22 INTERMEC_PACKET_DRIVER, SwitchPacketDriver(), Intermec settings, 288, 336 beeper volume, 10 vibrator, 21 273 Internal scanners configuring, 194 supported symbologies, 195 Internet explorer software build version, 18 Windows Mobile 2003 edition, 24 Internet Service Provider. See ISP IOCTL_GET_CPU_ID, 250 IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT, 245, 276 IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOT_DEVICE, 247 IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOTLOADER_VERINFO, 244 IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICE_INFO, 235 IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICEID, 242 IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO, 243 IOCTL_HAL_GET_RESET_INFO, 246 IOCTL_HAL_ITC_READ_PARM, 236 IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM, 240 IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT, 248, 276 IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT, 245, 276 IOCTL_LOAD_NDIS_MINIPORT, 251 IOCTL_NPCP_BIND, 185 IOCTL_NPCP_CANCEL, 185 IOCTL_NPCP_CLOSE, 185 IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR, 185 IOCTL_NPCP_FLUSH, 185 IOCTL_PROCESSOR_INFORMATION, 249 IOCTL_UNLOAD_NDIS_MINIPORT, 251 IrDA printing, 182 ISP connecting to via Windows Mobile, 98 creating a modem connection, 98 an Ethernet connection, 103 Pocket Internet Explorer, 94 Windows Mobile, 98 ITC_ DOCK_SWITCH, 241 ITC_ WAKEUP_MASK, 241 ITC_AMBIENT_FRONTLIGHT, 241 ITC_AMBIENT_KEYBOARD, 241 ITC_DEVID_80211RADIO_INTEL_2011B, 238 ITC_DEVID_80211RADIO_MAX values ITC_DEVID_80211RADIO_INTEL_2011B, 238 ITC_DEVID_80211RADIO_NONE, 238 ITC_DEVID_80211RADIO_NONE, 238 ITC_DEVID_INTERMEC_EVIO, 238 ITC_DEVID_INTERMEC2D_IMAGER, 238 ITC_DEVID_OEM2D_IMAGER, 238 ITC_DEVID_SCANHW_MAX values ITC_DEVID_INTERMEC_EVIO, 238 ITC_DEVID_INTERMEC2D_IMAGER, 238 ITC_DEVID_OEM2D_IMAGER, 238 ITC_DEVID_SCANHW_NONE, 238 ITC_DEVID_SE900_LASER, 238 ITC_DEVID_SE900HS_LASER, 238 424 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual ITC_DEVID_SCANHW_NONE, 238 ITC_DEVID_SE900_LASER, 238 ITC_DEVID_SE900HS_LASER, 238 ITC_DEVID_WANRADIO_NONE, 238 ITC_DEVID_WANRADIO_SIEMENS_MC45, 238 ITC_DEVID_WANRADIO_SIERRA_SB555, 238 ITC_DEVID_WANRADIO_XIRCOM_GEM3503, 238 ITC_IFTP_STOP, 233 ITC_KEYBOARD_CHANGE, CreateEvent(), 279 ITC_NVPARM_80211_INSTALLED, 238 ITC_NVPARM_80211_RADIOTYPE, 238 ITC_NVPARM_ANTENNA_DIVERSITY, 237 ITC_NVPARM_BLUETOOTH_INSTALLED, 239 ITC_NVPARM_CONTRAST, 237 ITC_NVPARM_DISPLAY_TYPE, 237 ITC_NVPARM_ECN, 237 ITC_NVPARM_EDBG_SUBNET, 237 ITC_NVPARM_EDG_IP, 237 ITC_NVPARM_ETHERNET_ID, 236 ITC_NVPARM_INTERMEC_DATACOLLEC-

ITC_NVPARM_INTERMEC_DATACOLLEC-

ITC_NVPARM_INTERMEC_SOFTWARE_CON-

TION_HW, 238 TION_SW, 238 TENT, 237 ITC_NVPARM_LAN9000_INSTALLED, 239 ITC_NVPARM_MANF_DATE, 236 ITC_NVPARM_MCODE, 237 ITC_NVPARM_RTC_RESTORE, 238 ITC_NVPARM_SERIAL_NUM, 236 ITC_NVPARM_SERIAL2_INSTALLED, 239 ITC_NVPARM_SERVICE_DATE, 236 ITC_NVPARM_SIM_PROTECT_HW_INSTALLED, ITC_NVPARM_SIM_PROTECT_SW_INSTALLED, 239 239 ITC_NVPARM_VERSION_NUMBER, 237 ITC_NVPARM_VIBRATE_INSTALLED, 239 ITC_NVPARM_WAN_FREQUENCY, 238 ITC_NVPARM_WAN_INSTALLED, 238 ITC_NVPARM_WAN_RADIOTYPE, 238 ITC_NVPARM_WAN_RI, 237 ITC_REGISTRY_SAVE_ENABLE, 241 ITU-T interface specifications, 169 K Keeping a to-do list, via Tasks, 69 KernelIoControl IOCTL_GET_CPU_ID, 250 IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT, 245, 276 IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOT_DEVICE, 247 IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOTLOADER_VERINFO, 244 IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICE_INFO, 235 IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICEID, 242 IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO, 243 IOCTL_HAL_GET_RESET_INFO, 246 IOCTL_HAL_ITC_READ_PARM, 236 IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM, 240 IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT, 248, 276 Index IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT, 245, 276 IOCTL_PROCESSOR_INFORMATION, 249 Key clicks bar code configuration, 383, 388 configuration parameter, 383 Key sequences alpha (blue) keys alphanumeric, 15 numeric, 14

[gold] keys, numeric, 12

[gold/white] keys, alphanumeric, 13 Keyboard Keypad See also Keypad Windows Mobile input panel, 31 advanced remapping, 279 alphanumeric alpha (blue) key sequences, 15

[gold/white] key sequences, 13 scan codes, 281 backlight control panel applet, 11 change notification, 279 driver registry settings, 279 numeric alpha (blue) key sequences, 14

[gold] key sequences, 12 scan codes, 280 planes, 277 remapping, 277 sample registry keys, 283 L Laser scanner configuration parameters, 286 data collection parameters beeper frequency, 321 beeper volume, 320 codabar, 292 codabar user ID, 311 code 11, 306 code 11 user ID, 315 code 128, 295 code 128 FNC1 character, 297 code 128 user ID, 311 code 39, 290 code 39 user ID, 311 code 93, 294 code 93 length, 294 code 93 user ID, 312 EAN-13 user ID, 314 EAN-8 user ID, 314 good read beep duration, 323 good read beeps, 322 interleaved 2 of 5, 303 interleaved 2 of 5 user ID, 312 macro PDF, 300 matrix 2 of 5, 304 matrix 2 of 5 user ID, 314 micro PDF417, 302 MSI, 299 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 425 Index MSI user ID, 312 PDF417, 300 PDF417 user ID, 312 plessey, 298 plessey user ID, 313 prefix, 316 standard 2 of 5, 291 standard 2 of 5 user ID, 313 suffix, 317 telepen, 305 telepen user ID, 314 UPC-E user ID, 313 UPC-A user ID, 313 UPC/EAN, 293 virtual wedge, 329 virtual wedge code page, 335 virtual wedge grid, 334 virtual wedge postamble, 332 virtual wedge preamble, 330 SNMP configuration parameters identification contact, 345 identification location, 347 identification name, 346 security encryption key, 342 security read encryption, 340 security read-only community string, 338 security read/write community string, 339 security subnet mask, 310 security write encryption, 341 trap authentication, 343 trap threshold, 344 supported beeper functions, 318 symbologies, 289 symbologies not available Datamatrix, 307 datamatrix, 308 maxicode, 309 LEAP 802.11 radio module network EAP, 380 WPA encryption, 379 profile security information, 378 WEP encryption, 378 Letter recognizer, Windows Mobile input panel, 33 Library, Microsoft Reader, 91 Lighting Mode, configuration parameter, 327 Line printing, 182 lpBytesReturned IOCTL_GET_CPU_ID, 250 IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOT_DEVICE, 247 IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOTLOADER_VERINFO, 244 IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICE_INFO, 235 IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICEID, 242 IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO, 243 IOCTL_HAL_GET_RESET_INFO, 246 IOCTL_HAL_ITC_READ_PARM, 236 IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM, 240 IOCTL_PROCESSOR_INFORMATION, 249 lpInBuf IOCTL_GET_CPU_ID, 250 IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT, 245 IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOT_DEVICE, 247 IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOTLOADER_VERINFO, 244 IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICE_INFO, 235 IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICEID, 242 IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO, 243 IOCTL_HAL_GET_RESET_INFO, 246 IOCTL_HAL_ITC_READ_PARM, 236 IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM, 240 IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT, 248 IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT, 245 IOCTL_PROCESSOR_INFORMATION, 249 lpInBufSize IOCTL_GET_CPU_ID, 250 IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT, 245 IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOT_DEVICE, 247 IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICE_INFO, 235 IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICEID, 242 IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO, 243 IOCTL_HAL_GET_RESET_INFO, 246 IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT, 248 IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT, 245 lpOutBuf IOCTL_GET_CPU_ID, 250 IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT, 245 IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOT_DEVICE, 247 IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOTLOADER_VERINFO, 244 IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICE_INFO, 235 IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICEID, 242 IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO, 243 IOCTL_HAL_GET_RESET_INFO, 246 IOCTL_HAL_ITC_READ_PARM, 236 IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM, 240 IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT, 248 IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT, 245 IOCTL_PROCESSOR_INFORMATION, 249 LPT9 printer device, 183 M Macro PDF, configuration parameter, 300 Managing e-mail messages and folders, via Inbox, 74 ManifestName, FTP Server, 229 Matrix 2 of 5, 396 configuration parameter, 304 user ID, 314 MaxiCode, 396 configuration parameter, 309 Meetings Calendar, sending a request, 57 via Calendar, 46 Menus, Windows Mobile settings, 41 Messages sending to, contacts, 66 via Inbox composing/sending, 77 downloading from server, 76 426 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Microsoft Developer Network Library. See MSDN library Microsoft Exchange e-mail account, 84 Microsoft Passport account, 84 Microsoft Reader MIBs ASN.1, 179 files, 179 object identifier, 180 OIDs, 180 Micro PDF417, 397 configuration parameter, 302 Microphone, 4 phone application, 166 books downloading, 90 reading, 92 removing, 93 features, 93 adding bookmarks, 93 adding drawings, 93 annotations index, 93 attaching notes, 93 copying text, 93 highlighting text, 93 searching for text, 93 using the library, 91 Windows Mobile, 90 Microsofts Wireless Zero Config, 361 Migrating applications Flash File Store, 122 CompactFlash storage cards, 122 Secure Digital storage cards, 122 Migrating to a 700 Color Computer, 124 Mobile Favorites, Pocket Internet Explorer, 95 Mobile Favorites folder, Pocket Internet Explorer, 94 Modem position, COM A, 354 Modems, creating a connection to an ISP, 98 to work, 106 MP3 files, Windows Media Player, 89 MSDN library, 233 MSDN Windows CE documentation, 178 MSI, 398 configuration parameter, 299 user ID, 312 MSN Messenger about, 84 accounts Microsoft Exchange e-mail, 84 Microsoft Passport, 84 contacts managing, 87 sending messages, 88 working with, 86 setting up an account, 85 using My Text, 39 MultiMediaCards, card support, 19 N nDeviceId, NLEDGetDeviceInfo, 275 Index NDIS_ENCRYPTION_1_ENABLED NDIS_ENCRYPTION_1_KEY_ABSENT NDIS_ENCRYPTION_2_ENABLED NDIS_ENCRYPTION_2_KEY_ABSENT EncryptionStatus(), 264 GetWepStatus(), 261 EncryptionStatus(), 264 GetWepStatus(), 261 EncryptionStatus(), 264 GetWepStatus(), 261 EncryptionStatus(), 264 GetWepStatus(), 261 EncryptionStatus(), 264 GetWepStatus(), 261 EncryptionStatus(), 264 GetWepStatus(), 261 EncryptionStatus(), 264 GetWepStatus(), 261 EncryptionStatus(), 264 GetWepStatus(), 261 NDIS_ENCRYPTION_3_KEY_ABSENT NDIS_ENCRYPTION_3_ENABLED NDIS_ENCRYPTION_DISABLED NDIS_ENCRYPTION_NOT_SUPPORTED NDIS_MIXED_CELL_OFF, SetMixedCellMode(), 267 NDIS_MIXED_CELL_ON, SetMixedCellMode(), 267 NDIS_NET_AUTO_UNKNOWN GetNetworkMode(), 257 SetNetworkMode(), 266 NDIS_NET_MODE_ESS GetNetworkMode(), 257 SetNetworkMode(), 266 NDIS_NET_MODE_IBSS GetNetworkMode(), 257 SetNetworkMode(), 266 NDIS_NET_MODE_UNKNOWN GetNetworkMode(), 257 SetNetworkMode(), 266 NDIS_NET_TYPE_DS, GetNetworkType(), 258 NDIS_NET_TYPE_FH, GetNetworkType(), 258 NDIS_NET_TYPE_OFDM_2_4G GetNetworkMode(), 257 SetNetworkMode(), 266 NDIS_NET_TYPE_OFDM_5G GetNetworkMode(), 257 SetNetworkMode(), 266 NDIS_NET_TYPE_UNDEFINED, GetNetworkType(), 258 NDIS_NETWORK_EAP_MODE_OFF NDIS_NETWORK_EAP_MODE_ON GetCCXStatus(), 262 SetCCXStatus(), 267 GetCCXStatus(), 262 SetCCXStatus(), 267 NDIS_POWER_LEVEL_1, GetTXPower(), 260 NDIS_POWER_LEVEL_15, GetTXPower(), 260 NDIS_POWER_LEVEL_30, GetTXPower(), 260 NDIS_POWER_LEVEL_5, GetTXPower(), 260 NDIS_POWER_LEVEL_63, GetTXPower(), 260 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 427 NDIS_POWER_LEVEL_UNKNOWN, GetTXPower(), wireless printing, 174 WWAN radio options, 134 NDIS_RADIO_ASSOCIATED, GetAssocationStatus(), Network EAP Index 260 254 NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_AUTO GetAuthenticationMode(), 255 SetAuthenticationMode(), 265 NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_ERROR GetAuthenticationMode(), 255 SetAuthenticationMode(), 265 NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_OPEN GetAuthenticationMode(), 255 SetAuthenticationMode(), 265 NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_SHARED GetAuthenticationMode(), 255 SetAuthenticationMode(), 265 NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_WPA GetAuthenticationMode(), 255 SetAuthenticationMode(), 265 NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_WPA_NONE GetAuthenticationMode(), 255 SetAuthenticationMode(), 265 NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_WPA_PSK GetAuthenticationMode(), 255 SetAuthenticationMode(), 265 NDIS_RADIO_POWER_AUTO NDIS_RADIO_POWER_MODE_CAM NDIS_RADIO_POWER_MODE_FAST_PSP GetPowerMode(), 259 SetPowerMode(), 266 GetPowerMode(), 259 SetPowerMode(), 266 GetPowerMode(), 259 SetPowerMode(), 266 GetPowerMode(), 259 SetPowerMode(), 266 GetPowerMode(), 259 SetPowerMode(), 266 NDIS_RADIO_POWER_MODE_PSP LEAP security method, 380 PEAP security method, 369 Network type, 802.11 radio module, 362 nInBufSize IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOTLOADER_VERINFO, 244 IOCTL_HAL_ITC_READ_PARM, 236 IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM, 240 IOCTL_PROCESSOR_INFORMATION, 249 nInfoId, NLEDGetDeviceInfo, 275 NLED driver, vibrator, 274 NLED_COUNT_INFO, NLEDGetDeviceInfo, 275 NLED_SETTINGS_INFO_ID NLEDGetDeviceInfo, 275 NLEDSetDevice, 275 NLED_SUPPORTS_INFO_ID, NLEDGetDeviceInfo, 275 Notes adding to appointments, 54 contacts, 64 creating a note, 71 drawing on the screen, 37 creating a drawing, 37 selecting a drawing, 37 Pocket Outlook, 71 recording a message, 38 Start menu icon, 27 synchronizing notes, 72 writing on the screen, 34 alternate writing, 35 converting writing to text, 35 selecting the writing, 34 tips for good recognition, 36 NDIS_RADIO_POWER_UNKNOWN nOutBufSize NDIS_RADIO_SCANNING, GetAssociationStatus(), 254 NDIS_SUPP_LOGGING_OFF, EnableSuppLogging(), NDIS_SUPP_LOGGING_ON, EnableSuppLogging(), NDISUIO_PACKET_DRIVER, SwitchPacketDriver(), 272 272 273 Network adapters 802.11b, 129 antenna color code, 127 Ethernet communications, 128 no networking, 132 IOCTL_GET_CPU_ID, 250 IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT, 245 IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOT_DEVICE, 247 IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOTLOADER_VERINFO, 244 IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICE_INFO, 235 IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICEID, 242 IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO, 243 IOCTL_HAL_GET_RESET_INFO, 246 IOCTL_HAL_ITC_READ_PARM, 236 IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM, 240 IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT, 248 IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT, 245 IOCTL_PROCESSOR_INFORMATION, 249 428 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual NPCP printing, 183 about, 183 closing driver, 184 COM1 parameters, 183 communications, 186 driver I/O controls, 185 installation, 183 LPT9, 183 opening driver, 184 reading from driver, 184 removal, 183 sample code, 186 unit information control panel, NPCPTEST CAB file, 351 writing to driver, 184 Numeric keypad alpha (blue) key sequences, 14

[gold] key sequences, 12 registry settings alpha plane, 278 gold plane, 278 unshifted plane, 278 scan codes, 280 O ONeil printing See also DTR printer installing driver, 188 Object Store, packaging an application, 118 Object store IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT, 245 IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT, 248 IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT, 245 Oldstyle device ID, 242 Opening drivers DTR, 189 NPCP, 184 Owner information, Windows Mobile settings, 41 P Packaging an application CompactFlash storage cards, 118 Flash File Store, 118 Object Store, 118 Persistent Storage Manager, 118 Secure Digital storage cards, 118 Page format printing, 182 Password Pocket Excel, 82 Windows Mobile settings, 41 PauseAtStartup, FTP Server, 229 PB20 printers, printer support, 181 PDF417, 396 about the laser scanner, 191 configuration parameter, 300 user ID, 312 PEAP 802.11 radio module network EAP, 369 Index WPA encryption, 368 profile security information, 367 WEP encryption, 367 Performing a cold boot, 17 Persistent Storage Manager. See PSM Phone jack position, control panel applet, 354 PhoneUtility, 166 ring, 167 vibrate, 167 pInput, NLEDSetDevice, 275 Planes, keypad, 277 Plessey, 397 configuration parameter, 298 user ID, 313 Pocket Excel about, 82 creating a workbook, 82 Pocket Internet Explorer about, 94 adding programs, 42 AvantGo channels, 96 browsing the Internet, 97 favorite links, 94 getting connected, 98 mobile favorites, 95 Mobile Favorites folder, 94 software build, 18 Start menu icon, 27 viewing mobile favorites and channels, 97 IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOTLOADER_VERINFO, IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO, 243 Pocket Outlook, 46 Calendar, 46 Pocket PC 244 Pocket Word about, 78 creating a document, 78 drawing mode, 81 recording mode, 80 synchronizing, 81 tips, 83 typing mode, 79 writing mode, 80 POP3, Folder behavior connected to e-mail server, 74 Postamble configuration parameter, 332 with/without data, 333 pOutput, NLEDGetDeviceInfo, 275 Power control panel battery status, 5 RAM maintenance, 6 Windows Mobile settings, 41 configuration parameter, 330 with/without data, 331 Preamble Prefix, configuration parameter, user ID, 316 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 429 Index Printer support, 182 IrDA printer driver, 182 NPCP printer driver, 183 ONeil printer driver, 188 Processor information, IOCTL_PROCESSOR_IN-

FORMATION, 249 Profile label, 802.11 radio module, 362 Profiles 802.11 radio module, 361 advanced settings, 381 basic information, 362 security information, 363 editing, 361 Programs, adding or removing, Windows Mobile, 41 PSM determining build version, 16 packaging an application, 118 PSM build, 288 Q QR Code, 398 QR code, configuration parameter, 307 Query Information functions, 254 Quick Response Code. See QR Code Quick Response code. See QR code R Radios See also Network adapters card support, 21 Reader commands, 384 configuration change, 384 date and time settings, 385 Reading from drivers, NPCP, 184 Real-Time Clock, restore after cold-boot, 355 Reboot methods IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT, 276 IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT, 276 IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT, 276 Record button, recording a message, 38 Recording, via Notes, 38 Recording a message, Pocket Word, 80 Recording mode, Pocket Word, 80 Recovery CD AutoCab method, 124 AUTOUSER.DAT file, 123 RegFlushKey() API, 225 S9C upgrade, 352 updating the system software, 121 Recurrence pattern, Calendar, 49 RegFlush utility, 123 Registry FTP Server parameters, 228 keypad remapping, 279 sample view of key mapping, 283 save location, IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM, 240 writing to a storage card, 123 Registry Save, control panel applet, 355 Registry settings AutoCfg, 178 AutoFTP, 234 AutoInterval, 178 AutoIP/DHCP, 178 DhcpMaxRetry, 178 DhcpRetryDialogue, 178 EnableDHCP, 178 keypad driver, 279 keypad planes alpha, 278 gold, 278 unshifted, 278 Removing drivers DTR, 188 NPCP, 183 Removing programs, Windows Mobile, 41, 43 Reset button, 17 RFC 959, 232 Root, FTP Server, 229 RTC. See Real-Time Clock S S 2 of 5. See Standard 2 of 5 S9C unit information control panel, upgrade files, 352 version number, 349 Sabre 1551E or 1553 See also Tethered scanner cabling, 199 settings, 198 Sample code, NPCP printing, 186 SB555 Watcher activation, 140 Bell Mobility, 157 Sprint, 147 Telus, 157 Verizon, 143 WWANInit demo program, 157 copying files to computer, 137 via Microsoft ActiveSync, 138 via storage cards, 138 location of ESN, 140 Scan codes alphanumeric keypad, 281 numeric keypad, 280 SCAN Mute, Audio control panel applet, 8 Scanner beeper volume selecting, 9 turning it off, 10 turning it on, 7 mute feature, turning it off, 8 unit configuration parameters automatic shutoff, 382 backlight timeout, 383 date/time, 383 key clicks, 383 volume, 382 utilities configuration, button wakeup mask, 356 430 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Scanner cabling, 199 Scheduling appointments and meetings, via Calendar, 46 SDK, unit information control panel, 352 SDMMC Disk, 122 Searching for text, Microsoft Reader, 93 Secure Digital cards card support, 19 installing applications, 120, 121 migrating applications, 122 packaging an application, 118 Security, configuration parameter encryption key, 342 read encryption, 340 read-only community string, 338 read/write community string, 339 subnet mask, 310 write encryption, 341 Selecting, drawing via Notes, 37 Sending and receiving messages, via Inbox, 73 Serial port, modem support, 16 Serial position, COM B, 354 Set information functions, 263 Setting date and time, 385 Setting up an e-mail account, 114 SETUP.DLL, installation functions, 220 SIM cards IMSI assigned CDMA/1xRTT, 136 GSM/GPRS, 165 installation status, GSM/GPRS, 165 phone number assigned, GSM/GPRS, 164 protection hardware, 239 protection software, 239 software installed, 239 Simple Network Management Protocol. See SNMP SMS, Folder behavior connected to e-mail server, 74 Snap-on modems, 16 SNMP, 179 configuration parameters identification contact, 345 identification location, 347 identification name, 346 security encryption key, 342 security read encryption, 340 security read-only community string, 338 security read/write community string, 339 security subnet mask, 310 security write encryption, 341 trap authentication, 343 trap threshold, 344 SNMP OIDs 1D OmniDir decode enable, 328 aimer LED duration, 324 automatic shutoff, 382 backlight timeout, 383 beeper, 319 frequency, 321 volume, 320 codabar, 292 user ID, 311 Index FNC1 character, 297 user ID, 311 code 11, 306 user ID, 315 code 128, 295 code 39, 290 user ID, 311 code 93, 294 length, 294 user ID, 312 datamatrix, 308 date/time, 383 EAN 13 user ID, 314 8 user ID, 314 good read beep duration, 323 beeps, 322 identification contact, 345 location, 347 name, 346 image dimension, 326 interleaved 2 of 5, 303 user ID, 312 key clicks, 383 lighting mode, 327 macro PDF, 300 matrix 2 of 5, 304 user ID, 314 maxicode, 309 micro PDF417, 302 MSI, 299 user ID, 312 PDF417, 300 user ID, 312 plessey, 298 user ID, 313 prefix, 316 QR code, 307 security encryption key, 342 read encryption, 340 read-only community string, 338 read/write community string, 339 write encryption, 341 security subnet mask, 310 standard 2 of 5, 291 user ID, 313 sticky aimer duration, 325 suffix, 317 telepen, 305 user ID, 314 trap UPC authentication, 343 threshold, 344 A user ID, 313 E user ID, 313 UPC/EAN, 293 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 431 Index virtual wedge, 329 code page, 335 grid, 334 postamble, 332 preamble, 330 volume, 382 Software Developers Kit. See SDK Software versions, 18, 349 700 Series Computer, 18 unit information control panel applet, 349, 351 Speaker, 3 Speakerphone phone application, 166 volume, 168 Sprint activation process, 147 SSID (network name), 802.11 radio module, 362 Standard 2 of 5, 398 configuration parameter, 291 user ID, 313 Start Menu, adding programs, 43 via ActiveSync, 43 via File Explorer, 43 Status icons, Windows Mobile, 26 Sticky Aimer Duration, configuration parameter, 325 Storage media, 19 Stream device driver NPCPPORT.DLL, 183 ONEIL.DLL, 188 Suffix, configuration parameter, 317 Symbologies internal scanner supported symbologies, 195 scanning labels, 386 tethered scanner supported symbologies, 205 user IDs Codabar, 311 Code 11, 315 Code 128, 311 Code 39, 311 Code 93, 312 EAN 13, 314 EAN 8, 314 Interleaved 2 of 5, 312 Matrix 2 of 5, 314 MSI, 312 PDF417, 312 Plessey, 313 Standard 2 of 5, 313 Telepen, 314 UPC A, 313 UPC E, 313 when not available imager, 298, 299, 300, 302, 304, 305, 306 laser scanner, 307, 308, 309 Synchronizing AvantGo channels, 96 Calendar, 47 contacts, 61 e-mail messages, 73 favorite links, 94 mobile favorites, 95 notes, 72 Pocket Word, 81 Tasks, 70 T Tasks creating a task, 70 Pocket Outlook, 69 Start menu icon, 27 synchronizing, 70 TCP/IP client, DHCP server, 178 Telepen, 399 configuration parameter, 305 user ID, 314 Telus activation process, 157 Testing AT commands, 170 Tethered scanner capabilities, 199 disabling, 197 enabling, 197 error messages, 197 limitations, 199 settings, 197 supported symbologies, 205 Text messages, Windows Mobile, 39 Time, setting, 385 Tips for working, Pocket Excel, 83 TLS 802.1x profile certificates, 373 WPA encryption, 372 profile security information WEP encryption, 371 WPA encryption, 372 Today, Windows Mobile settings, 41 Today screen, Windows Mobile, 26 Tools CD Bluetooth documentation, 174 CAB files, 120, 351 CE Imager, 122 Comm Port Wedge CAB file, 351 management tools installed on desktop, 119 MIB files, 179 sample NPCP code, 186 Wireless Printing Development Guide, 174 wireless printing sample, 352 wireless printing SDK, 174 Tracking people, via Contacts, 60 Transcriber, Windows Mobile input panel, 33 Trap configuration parameters authentication, 343 threshold, 344 Traps, control panel appet, SNMP, 343 Troubleshooting 1551/1553 Tethered Scanners, 204 CAB Wizard, 224 TTLS 802.11 radio module, WPA encryption, 376 profile security information, WEP encryption, 375 Typing mode, Pocket Word, 79 432 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Typing on the screen, Pocket Word, 79 U UDP, FTPDCE, 230 UDP broadcasts, IDNATarget parameter, 229 Unit, configuration parameters automatic shutoff, 382 backlight timeout, 383 date/time, 383 key clicks, 383 volume, 382 Unit information battery status, 350 CAB files, 351 ActiveX control tools, 352 Bluetooth stack, 351 Comm Port Wedge, 351 NPCP printer, 351 S9C Upgrade, 352 SDK, 352 Windows configuration, 352 wireless printing sample, 352 versions, 18, 349 700 Platform Build, 349 DataCollection Build, 349 S9C, 349 Unit Manager, date/time, 383 Universal Product Code. See UPC Unshifted plane on keypad, regular keypad, 277 UPC, 399 configuration parameter, 293 A user ID, 313 E user ID, 313 Updating, bootloader, 119 URLs ActiveSync, 44 Adobe Acrobat Reader, 169 AT command interface CDMA/1xRTT SB555, 169 GPRS/GSM MC45, 169 full screen display, 226 MIBs, 179 Microsoft Exchange e-mail account, 84 Microsoft Passport account, 84 Microsoft support, 25 MSDN library, 233 MSDN Windows CE documentation, 178 Windows Mobile, 25 Windows Mobile support, 25 Utilities control panel applet app launch, 357 dock switch, 354 registry save, 355 wakeup mask, 356 UUID, 242 V Verizon activation process, 143 Index Video files, Windows Media Player, 89 Viewing mobile favorites and channels, Pocket Internet Vibrator enabling, 20 phone application, 167 programming, 274 Explorer, 97 Virtual wedge bar code configuration configuration parameter, 329 grid, 389 postamble, 389 preamble, 389 code page, 335 grid, 334 postamble, 332 preamble, 330 VN_CLASS_ASIC, 237 VN_CLASS_BOOTSTRAP, 237 VN_CLASS_KBD, 237 Volume bar code configuration, 382, 386 configuration parameter, 382 phone application, 166, 168 VPN server, creating a connection, to work, 111 W Wakeup mask, control panel applet, 356 WAN monitor CORE module CDMA/1xRTT, 134 GSM/GPRS, 164 installing available modules, 126 loading a module, 126 WAN radio IDs ITC_DEVID_WANRADIO_NONE, 238 ITC_DEVID_WANRADIO_SIEMENS_MC45, 238 ITC_DEVID_WANRADIO_SIERRA_SB555, 238 WAN rado CORE module installing available modules, 126 loading a module, 126 WAP pages, 94 connecting to an ISP, 98 Warm boot IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT, 248 IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT, 245 Watcher applications activating, Sprint, 147 downloading, Sprint, 147 using Sprint, 150 Verizon, 143 Web browsers, FTP support, 232 Web pages, 94 connecting to an ISP, 98 Welch Allyn 1470 Imager cabling, 199 settings, 198 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 433 Index WEP encryption LEAP security method, 378 PEAP security method, 367 profile security information, 364, 365 TLS security method, 371 TTLS security method, 375 Windows CE documentation (MSDN), 178 Windows configuration, unit information control panel, WinCfg CAB file, 352 Windows Media files, Windows Media Player, 89 Windows Media Player Start menu icon, 27 Windows Mobile, 89 Windows Mobile ActiveSync, 44 basic skills, 26 Calendar, 46 command bar, 28 Contacts, 60 edition information, 24 getting connected, 98 Inbox, 73 MSN Messenger, 84 navigation bar, 28 Notes, 71 notifications, 29 Pocket Excel, 82 Pocket Word, 78 pop-up menus, 29 programs, 27 status icons, 26 support URLs, 25 Tasks, 69 Today screen, 26 where to find information, 25 Windows Media Player, 89 writing on the screen, 34 Wireless printing Bluetooth compatible module, 174 unit information control panel, WP_SAMPLE.CAB file, 352 Wireless TCP/IP installations, BlockSize parameter, 228 Wireless WAN AT command interface CDMA/1xRTT SB555, 169 GPRS/GSM MC45, 169 CDMA/1xRTT, 134 GSM/GPRS, 164 testing AT commands, 170 Work creating a modem connection, 106 a VPN server connection, 111 a wireless network connection, 108 an Ethernet connection, 113 getting connected, 104 WPA encryption 802.11 radio module, 366 LEAP security method, 379 PEAP security method, 368 TLS security method, 372 TTLS security method, 376 Writing mode, Pocket Word, 80 Writing on the screen See also Notes Pocket Word, 80 Writing to drivers DTR, 189 NPCP, 184 WWAN. See Wireless WAN WWANInit demo program, 157 creating a new connection, 159 setting up, 158 using the program, 161 Wireless Network, creating a connection, to work, 108 Wireless network, 129, 361 X Xscale processor ID, IOCTL_GET_CPU_ID, 250 434 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Files Index Numbers 80211API.DLL, 252 80211CONF.EXE, 252 80211SCAN.EXE, 252 802PM.DLL, 252 A AUTOUSER.DAT, 120, 121 C CABWIZ.DDF, 223 CABWIZ.EXE, 208, 223 CEIMAGER.EXE, 122 COREDLL.DLL, 274 CPL802.CPL, 252 D DEVICEID.H, 242 E EXITME.BIN, 232 F FTPDCE.EXE, 230, 232 AutoFTP, 234 FTP Server, 227 FTPDCE.TXT, 232 I INTERMEC.MIB, 179 ITCADC.MIB, 179 ITCSNMP.MIB, 179 ITCTERMINAL.MIB, 179 M MAKECAB.EXE, 223 MOD80211.DLL, 252 N NETWLAN.DLL, 252 NLED.H, 275 NLEDGetDeviceInfo, 275 Index NLEDSetDevice, 275 NPCPPORT.DLL, 183 NRINET.INI, 352 O OEMIOCTL.H IOCTL_GET_CPU_ID, 250 IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT, 245 IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOT_DEVICE, 247 IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOTLOADER_VERINFO, 244 IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO, 243 IOCTL_HAL_GET_RESET_INFO, 246 IOCTL_HAL_ITC_READ_PARM, 236 IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM, 240 IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT, 248 IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT, 245 ONEIL.DLL, 188 P PKFUNCS.H IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICEID, 242 IOCTL_PROCESSOR_INFORMATION, 249 PRISMNDS.DLL, 252 R REBOOTME.BIN, 232 __RESETMEPLEASE__.TXT, 220 RPM.EXE, 213 RPMCE212.INI, 213 S SETUP.DLL, 212, 220 DllMain, 220 T TAHOMA.TTF, 213 U URODDSVC.EXE, 252 W WCESTART.INI, 213 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 435 Index 436 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Corporate Headquarters 6001 36th Avenue West Everett, Washington 98203 U.S.A. tel 425.348.2600 fax 425.355.9551 www.intermec.com 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User's Manual - October 2004

*961-054-031G*

P/N 961-054-031 REV G

 

 

Exhibit L: User Manual - Part 1 of 2 FCC ID: HN22011B-2 P/N 072719-002 Important Radio Information!

Contents For Users in the United States and Canada ...................................................................................................................................2 For 700C-802.11b Configuration...................................................................................................................................2 For ABTM3 (Bluetooth-Compatible Wireless Module by Socket Communications) Configuration ...............................2 For MC45 (Wireless WAN, GSM/GPRS) Configuration ...............................................................................................3 For SB555 (Wireless WAN, CDMA/1x) Configuration..................................................................................................3 For Users Outside of the United States and Canada ......................................................................................................................4 For 700C-802.11b Configuration...................................................................................................................................4 For ABTM3 (Bluetooth-Compatible Wireless Module by Socket Communications) Configuration ...............................5 For MC45 (Wireless WAN, GSM/GPRS) Configuration ...............................................................................................6 Pour les utilisateurs en dehors du Canada et des Etat-unis .............................................................................................................7 Pour la configuration 700C-802.11b ..............................................................................................................................7 Pour la configuration ABTM3 (Module sans fil compatible avec la norme Bluetooth de Socket Communications) .........8 Pour la configuration MC45...........................................................................................................................................8 Fr Benutzer auerhalb von Kanada und den Vereinigten Staaten ................................................................................................9 700C-802.11b................................................................................................................................................................9 ABTM3 (Bluetooth-kompatibles Funkmodul von Socket Communications) ................................................................10 MC45 ..........................................................................................................................................................................10 Per gli utenti al di fuori del Canada o degli Stati Uniti ................................................................................................................11 Per la configurazione di 700C-802.11b.........................................................................................................................11 Per la configurazione di ABTM3 (modulo wireless Bluetooth-compatibile della Socket Communications)....................11 Per la configurazione di MC45 .....................................................................................................................................12 Para Usuarios Fuera de Canada o de los Estados Unidos .............................................................................................................12 Para configurao do 700C-802.11b.............................................................................................................................12 Para configurao do ABTM3 (Mdulo sem fio compatvel com Bluetooth da Socket Communications) .....................13 Para configurao do MC45 .........................................................................................................................................14 Para Usurios Fora do Canad ou dos Estados Unidos ................................................................................................................14 Para la configuracin de 700C-802.11b........................................................................................................................14 Para la configuracin de ABTM3 (Mdulo inalmbrico compatible con Bluetooth de Socket Communications) ..........15 Para la configuracin de MC45.....................................................................................................................................16 For Users in the United States and Canada Place this supplement in your manual. For 700C-802.11b Configuration This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that can cause undesired operation. Federal Communications Commission Compliance FCC Digital Emissions Compliance: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the radio or television receiving antenna.

Increase the separation between the computer equipment and receiver.

Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the radio or television receiver is connected.

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio television technician for help. Operation Warning: To comply with the FCCs RF exposure requirements and minimize health hazards:

The user shall not touch the antenna of this device when the device is in use. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Intermec could void the users authority to operate this equipment. Industry Canada Compliance This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. This device requires a radio license unless it is used totally inside a building. (The user must obtain this license.) Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. Cet appareil exige une license radio moins dtre entirement install dans un btiment. (Lutilisateur doit obtenir cette license.) Agency Approvals This device is UL Listed. For ABTM3 (Bluetooth-Compatible Wireless Module by Socket Communications) Configuration This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Cet appareil est conforme la Partie 15 des rglements du FCC et la norme RSS-210 dIndustrie Canada. 2 Operation Warning: To comply with the FCCs RF exposure requirements and minimize health hazards:

The user shall not touch the antenna of this device when the device is in use. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Intermec could void the users authority to operate this equipment. This device requires a radio license unless it is used totally inside a building. (The user must obtain this license.) Cet appareil exige une license radio moins dtre entirement install dans un btiment. (Lutilisateur doit obtenir cette license.) Agency Approvals This device is UL Listed. For MC45 (Wireless WAN, GSM/GPRS) Configuration This device complies with Part 24 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-133 of Industry Canada. Cet appareil est conforme la Partie 24 des rglements du FCC et la norme RSS-133 dIndustrie Canada. Antennas must be supplied and installed as recommended by Intermec Technologies Corporation to ensure compliance to RF exposure requirements. The user shall not touch the antenna of this device when the device is in use. Agency Approvals: See users guide instructions for handling, charging, and replacing batteries. Failure to follow those instructions can result in personal injury, fire, or battery explosion. For SB555 (Wireless WAN, CDMA/1x) Configuration This device complies with Parts 22 and 24 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-1383 of Industry Canada. Cet appareil est conforme aux Parties 22 et 24 des rglements du FCC et la norme RSS-1383 dIndustrie Canada. Antennas must be supplied and installed as recommended by Intermec Technologies Corporation to ensure compliance to RF exposure requirements. Agency Approvals: See users guide instructions for handling, charging, and replacing batteries. Failure to follow those instructions can result in personal injury, fire, or battery explosion. 3 For Users Outside of the United States and Canada Place this supplement in your manual. For 700C-802.11b Configuration The Intermec product you purchased transmits and receives data using a 2.4 GHz Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum system. Programming and configuration information for the transceivers is also provided in the host device documentation. Please check the Intermec Web site for additional documentation at www.intermec.com. Hereby, Intermec Technologies Corporation declares that this Model 700C-802.11b is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of R&TTE Directive (1999/5/EC). This product has been assessed to the following standards:

ETSI EN 300 328-2 v1.2.1 (2001-12)

ETSI EN 301 489-17 v1.1.1 (2001-09)

EN 60950:1992 (incl. Amdt. 1-4, 11)

SP/DGPT/ATAS 23 (1995-02) The original Declaration of Conformity is available on the Intermec Technologies Corporation Web site at www.intermec.com. This product transmits electromagnetic waves at 2.4 GHz frequency range. It has been tested and found compliant with U.S. (OET Guide 65) and Canadian (RSS 102) RF exposure regulations. There are no regulations covering this product type in the EU at this time. The transmitter modules output power is 89 mW. The products using this module are intended for business and industrial environments. They should not be used in residential environments and by children. This product is marked with this logo and uses radio frequency bands that are not harmonized throughout the European Community. The following table indicates the areas of intended use of the equipment and any known restrictions. Country of Intended Use Yes License Required No Austria Belgium Denmark Finland France Germany Greece Ireland Italy Luxembourg The Netherlands Portugal Spain Sweden United Kingdom X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 4 Restrictions Details X Frequency operation restricted to 2446.5 MHz to 2483.5 MHz. Country of Intended Use Yes License Required No Restrictions Details Other non-EU:

Iceland Liechtenstein Norway Slovenia Switzerland X X X X X Additional EMI/RFI Compliance This device meets the Class B limit requirements of CISPR 22. For ABTM3 (Bluetooth-Compatible Wireless Module by Socket Communications) Configuration The Intermec product you purchased transmits and receives data using a 2.4 GHz Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum system. Programming and configuration information for the transceivers is also provided in the host device documentation. Please check the Intermec Web site for additional documentation at www.intermec.com. Hereby, Intermec Technologies Corporation declares that this Model 700C-ABTM3 is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of R&TTE Directive (1999/5/EC). This product has been assessed to the following standards:

ETSI EN 300 328-2 v1.2.1 (2001-12)

ETSI EN 301 489-17 v1.1.1 (2001-09)

EN 60950:1992 (incl. Amdt. 1-4, 11)

SP/DGPT/ATAS 23 (1995-02) The original Declaration of Conformity is available on the Intermec Technologies Corporation Web site at www.intermec.com. This product transmits electromagnetic waves at 2.4 GHz frequency range. It has been tested and found compliant with U.S. (OET Guide 65) and Canadian (RSS 102) RF exposure regulations. There are no regulations covering this product type in the EU at this time. The transmitter modules output power is 1 mW. The products using this module are intended for business and industrial environments. They should not be used in residential environments and by children. This product is marked with this logo and uses radio frequency bands that are not harmonized throughout the European Community. 5 The following table indicates the areas of intended use of the equipment and any known restrictions. Country of Intended Use Yes License Required No Restrictions Details X Frequency operation restricted to 2446.5 MHz to 2483.5 MHz. Austria Belgium Denmark Finland France Germany Greece Ireland Italy Luxembourg The Netherlands Portugal Spain Sweden United Kingdom Other non-EU:

Iceland Liechtenstein Norway Slovenia Switzerland X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Additional EMI/RFI Compliance This device meets the Class B limit requirements of CISPR 22. For MC45 (Wireless WAN, GSM/GPRS) Configuration The Intermec product you purchased transmits and receives data using a 900/1800/1900 MHz GSM/GPRS radio module. Programming and configuration information for the transceivers is also provided in the host device documentation. Please check the Intermec Web site for additional documentation at www.intermec.com. Hereby, Intermec Technologies Corporation declares that this Model 700C-MC45 is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of R&TTE Directive (1999/5/EC). This product has been assessed to the following standards:

ETSI TS 51.010

ETSI EN 301 489-7 v1.1.1 (2001-09)

EN 60950:1992 (incl. Amdt. 1-4, 11) The original Declaration of Conformity is available on the Intermec Technologies Corporation Web site at www.intermec.com. This product transmits electromagnetic waves at 900/1800/1900 MHz. It has been tested and found compliant with U.S. (OET Guide 65), Canadian (RSS 102), European (EN 50360/EN 50361), and Australian/New Zealand

(AS/NZA 2772.1) RF exposure regulations. 6 The transmitter modules output power is 0.933 mW. The products using this module are intended for business and industrial environments. They should not be used in residential environments and by children. This product is marked with this logo. Additional EMI/RFI Compliance This device meets the Class B limit requirements of CISPR 22. Pour les utilisateurs en dehors du Canada et des Etat-unis Veuillez placer ce supplment dans votre manuel. Pour la configuration 700C-802.11b Le produit Intermec que vous avez achet peut transmettre et recevoir des donnes laide dun systme dtalement du spectre en squence directe de 2,4 GHz. Les informations de programmation et de configuration pour les metteurs-rcepteurs sont galement fournies dans la documentation de lappareil hte. Pour obtenir toute documentation supplmentaire, veuillez consulter le site Web dIntermec, ladresse www.intermec.com. Par la prsente, Intermec Technologies Corporation dclare que ce modle 700C-802.11b est conforme aux exigences de base et autres exigences pertinentes de la Directive R&TTE (1999/5/EC). Ce produit a t valu par rapport aux normes suivantes :

ETSI EN 300 328-2 v1.2.1 (2001-12)

ETSI EN 301 489-17 v1.1.1 (2001-09)

EN 60950:1992 (comprenant lamendement 1-4, 11)

SP/DGPT/ATAS 23 (1995-02) La Dclaration de conformit originale est disponible sur le site Web dIntermec Technologies Corporation, ladresse www.intermec.com. Ce produit met des ondes lectromagntiques une plage de frquences de 2,4 GHz. Il a t valu et reconnu conforme aux rglements concernant lexposition la radiofrquence des tats-Unis (OET Guide 65) et du Canada

(RSS 102). Il ny a actuellement aucun rglement couvrant ce type de produit pour lUnion europenne. La puissance de sortie du module metteur-rcepteur est de 89 mW. Les produits utilisant ce module sont destins des environnements commerciaux et industriels. Ils ne doivent pas tre utiliss dans des environnements rsidentiels et par des enfants. Ce produit est marqu de ce logo et il utilise des bandes de frquence radio qui ne sont pas harmonises sur le territoire de la Communaut europenne. Le tableau suivant rpertorie les zones dutilisation prvues pour lquipement et les restrictions connues. Pays dutilisation prvu Oui Licence requise Non Restrictions Dtails Belgique France X X X La frquence dopration est limite une valeur variant entre 2 446,5 MHz et 2 483,5 MHz. Conformit additionelle la norme EMI/RFI Cet appareil respecte les limites imposes pour la Classe B par le CISPR 22. 7 Pour la configuration ABTM3 (Module sans fil compatible avec la norme Bluetooth de Socket Communications) Le produit Intermec que vous avez achet peut transmettre et recevoir des donnes laide dun systme dtalement du spectre en bond de frquence de 2,4 GHz. Les informations de programmation et de configuration pour les metteurs-rcepteurs sont galement fournies dans la documentation de lappareil hte. Pour obtenir toute documentation supplmentaire, veuillez consulter le site Web dIntermec, ladresse www.intermec.com. Par la prsente, Intermec Technologies Corporation dclare que ce modle 700C-ABTM3 est conforme aux exigences de base et autres exigences pertinentes de la Directive R&TTE (1999/5/EC). Ce produit a t valu par rapport aux normes suivantes :

ETSI EN 300 328-2 v1.2.1 (2001-12)

ETSI EN 301 489-17 v1.1.1 (2001-09)

EN 60950:1992 (comprenant lamendement 1-4, 11)

SP/DGPT/ATAS 23 (1995-02) La Dclaration de conformit originale est disponible sur le site Web dIntermec Technologies Corporation, ladresse www.intermec.com. Ce produit met des ondes lectromagntiques une plage de frquences de 2,4 GHz. Il a t valu et reconnu conforme aux rglements concernant lexposition la radiofrquence des tats-Unis (OET Guide 65) et du Canada

(RSS 102). Il ny a actuellement aucun rglement couvrant ce type de produit pour lUnion europenne. La puissance de sortie du module metteur-rcepteur est de 1 mW. Les produits utilisant ce module sont destins des environnements commerciaux et industriels. Ils ne doivent pas tre utiliss dans des environnements rsidentiels et par des enfants. Ce produit est marqu de ce logo et il utilise des bandes de frquence radio qui ne sont pas harmonises sur le territoire de la Communaut europenne. Le tableau suivant rpertorie les zones dutilisation prvues pour lquipement et les restrictions connues. Pays dutilisation prvu Oui Licence requise Non Restrictions Dtails Belgique France X X X La frquence dopration est limite une valeur variant entre 2 446,5 MHz et 2 483,5 MHz. Conformit additionelle la norme EMI/RFI Cet appareil respecte les limites imposes pour la Classe B par le CISPR 22. Pour la configuration MC45 Le produit Intermec que vous avez achet peut transmettre et recevoir des donnes laide dun module radio GSM/GPRS de 900/1800/1900 MHz. Les informations de programmation et de configuration pour les metteurs-rcepteurs sont galement fournies dans la documentation de lappareil hte. Pour obtenir toute documentation supplmentaire, veuillez consulter le site Web dIntermec, ladresse www.intermec.com. Par la prsente, Intermec Technologies Corporation dclare que ce modle 700C-MC45est conforme aux exigences de base et autres exigences pertinentes de la Directive R&TTE (1999/5/EC). Ce produit a t valu par rapport aux normes suivantes :

ETSI TS 51.010

ETSI EN 301 489-7 v1.1.1 (2001-09) 8

EN 60950:1992 (incl. Amdt. 1-4, 11) La Dclaration de conformit originale est disponible sur le site Web dIntermec Technologies Corporation, ladresse www.intermec.com. Ce produit met des ondes lectromagntiques une frquence de 900/1800/1900 MHz. Il a t valu et reconnu conforme aux rglements concernant lexposition la radiofrquence des tats-Unis (OET Guide 65), du Canada

(RSS 102), de lEurope (EN 50360/EN 50361) ainsi que de lAustralie et de la Nouvelle-Zlande (AS/NZA 2772.1). La puissance de sortie du module metteur-rcepteur est de 0.933 mW. Les produits utilisant ce module sont destins des environnements commerciaux et industriels. Ils ne doivent pas tre utiliss dans des environnements rsidentiels et par des enfants. Ce produit est marqu de ce logo. Conformit additionelle la norme EMI/RFI Cet appareil respecte les limites imposes pour la Classe B par le CISPR 22. Fr Benutzer auerhalb von Kanada und den Vereinigten Staaten Legen Sie diese Ergnzung in Ihr Handbuch. 700C-802.11b Das Intermec-Produkt, das Sie gekauft haben sendet und empfngt Daten mit Hilfe eines 2,4-GHz-Direktsequenz-

Spreizspektrumsystems. Dieses Produkt bermittelt elektromagnetische Wellen in einem Frequenzbereich von 2,4 GHz. Es wurde getestet und in bereinstimmung mit U.S. (OET Anleitung 65) und kanadischen (RSS 102) RF-Bestrahlungsvorschriften befunden. Zur Zeit gibt es in der EU keine Richtlinien, die diesen Produkttyp abdecken. In der Dokumentation des Hostgertes finden Sie auerdem Informationen zum Programmieren und Konfiguriern der Sende-Empfangs-Gerte. Weitere Hinweise erhalten Sie auf der Intermec-Website unter www.intermec.com. Hiermit erklrt Intermec Technologies Corporation, dass das Modell 700C-802.11b mit den wesentlichen Anforderungen und anderen sachdienlichen Vorschriften der R&TTE-Richtlinie (1999/5/EC) bereinstimmt. Dieses Produkt wurde gem der folgenden Normen bewertet:

ETSI EN 300 328-2 v1.2.1 (2001-12)

ETSI EN 301 489-17 v1.1.1 (2001-09)

EN 60950:1992 (einschl. Amdt. 1-4, 11)

SP/DGPT/ATAS 23 (1995-02) Die Originalkonformittserklrung steht auf der Website der Intermec Technologies Corporation unter www.intermec.com zur Verfgung. Die Ausgangsleistung des Sende-Empfangs-Moduls betrgt 89 mW. Die Produkte, die dieses Modul verwenden, sind fr geschftliche und industrielle Umgebungen gedacht. Sie sollten nicht in Wohngegenden und in der Nhe von Kindern verwendet werden. Das Produkt ist mit diesem Markenzeichen versehen und verwendet Radiofrequenzbreiten, die in der Europischen Gemeinschaft nicht berall aufeinander abgestimmt sind. Zustzliche Elektromagnetische Strung-bereinstimmung Dieses Gert entspricht den Grenzbestimmungen der Klasse B von CISPR 22. 9 ABTM3 (Bluetooth-kompatibles Funkmodul von Socket Communications) Das Intermec-Produkt, das Sie gekauft haben sendet und empfngt Daten mit Hilfe eines 2,4-GHz-

Frequenzspringend-Spreizspektrumsystems. Dieses Produkt bermittelt elektromagnetische Wellen in einem Frequenzbereich von 2,4 GHz. Es wurde getestet und in bereinstimmung mit U.S. (OET Anleitung 65) und kanadischen (RSS 102) RF-Bestrahlungsvorschriften befunden. Zur Zeit gibt es in der EU keine Richtlinien, die diesen Produkttyp abdecken. In der Dokumentation des Hostgertes finden Sie auerdem Informationen zum Programmieren und Konfiguriern der Sende-Empfangs-Gerte. Weitere Hinweise erhalten Sie auf der Intermec-Website unter www.intermec.com. Hiermit erklrt Intermec Technologies Corporation, dass das Modell 700C- ABTM3 mit den wesentlichen Anforderungen und anderen sachdienlichen Vorschriften der R&TTE-Richtlinie (1999/5/EC) bereinstimmt. Dieses Produkt wurde gem der folgenden Normen bewertet:

ETSI EN 300 328-2 v1.2.1 (2001-12)

ETSI EN 301 489-17 v1.1.1 (2001-09)

EN 60950:1992 (einschl. Amdt. 1-4, 11)

SP/DGPT/ATAS 23 (1995-02) Die Originalkonformittserklrung steht auf der Website der Intermec Technologies Corporation unter www.intermec.com zur Verfgung. Die Ausgangsleistung des Sende-Empfangs-Moduls betrgt 1 mW. Die Produkte, die dieses Modul verwenden, sind fr geschftliche und industrielle Umgebungen gedacht. Sie sollten nicht in Wohngegenden und in der Nhe von Kindern verwendet werden. Das Produkt ist mit diesem Markenzeichen versehen und verwendet Radiofrequenzbreiten, die in der Europischen Gemeinschaft nicht berall aufeinander abgestimmt sind. Zustzliche Elektromagnetische Strung-bereinstimmung Dieses Gert entspricht den Grenzbestimmungen der Klasse B von CISPR 22. Das Intermec-Produkt, das Sie gekauft haben, sendet und empfngt Daten mit Hilfe eines 900/1800/1900 MHz GSM/GPRS-Funkmoduls. In der Dokumentation des Hostgertes finden Sie auerdem Informationen zum Programmieren und Konfiguriern der Sende-Empfangs-Gerte. Weitere Hinweise erhalten Sie auf der Intermec-Website unter www.intermec.com. Hiermit erklrt Intermec Technologies Corporation, dass das Modell 700C-MC45 mit den wesentlichen Anforderungen und anderen sachdienlichen Vorschriften der R&TTE-Richtlinie (1999/5/EC) bereinstimmt. Dieses Produkt wurde gem der folgenden Normen bewertet:

ETSI TS 51.010

ETSI EN 301 489-7 v1.1.1 (2001-09)

EN 60950:1992 (incl. Amdt. 1-4, 11) Die Originalkonformittserklrung steht auf der Website der Intermec Technologies Corporation unter www.intermec.com zur Verfgung. Dieses Produkt bermittelt elektromagnetische Wellen in Frequenzbereichen von 900/1800/1900 MHz. Es wurde getestet und in bereinstimmung mit U.S. (OET Anleitung 65), kanadischen (RSS 102), europischen (EN 50360/EN 50361) und australischen/neuseelndischen (AS/NZA 2772.1) RF-Strahlungsvorschriften befunden. Die Ausgangsleistung des Sende-Empfangs-Moduls betrgt 0.933 mW. Die Produkte, die dieses Modul verwenden, sind fr geschftliche und industrielle Umgebungen gedacht. Sie sollten nicht in Wohngegenden und in der Nhe von Kindern verwendet werden. MC45 10 Das Produkt ist mit diesem Markenzeichen versehen. Zustzliche Elektromagnetische Strung-bereinstimmung Dieses Gert entspricht den Grenzbestimmungen der Klasse B von CISPR 22. Per gli utenti al di fuori del Canada o degli Stati Uniti Si prega di collocare questo supplemento nel manuale. Per la configurazione di 700C-802.11b Il prodotto Intermec che avete acquistato trasmette e riceve i dati tramite un sistema a 2,4 GHz che utilizza la tecnologia DSSS (sequenza diretta, spettro esteso). La documentazione del dispositivo host fornisce inoltre le informazioni sulla programmazione e la configurazione dei transceiver. Per altre informazioni, consultate il sito Web Intermec allindirizzo www.intermec.com. Con la presente Intermec Technologies Corporation dichiara che questo Modello 700C-802.11b conforme ai requisiti essenziali e alle altre clausole importanti della direttiva R&TTE (1999/5/EC). Questo prodotto stato valutato in base ai seguenti standard:

ETSI EN 300 328-2 v1.2.1 (2001-12)

ETSI EN 301 489-17 v1.1.1 (2001-09)

EN 60950:1992 (incluso Amdt. 1-4, 11)

SP/DGPT/ATAS 23 (1995-02) La dichiarazione di conformit originale disponibile presso il sito Web di Intermec Technologies Corporation a www.intermec.com. Questo prodotto trasmette onde elettromagnetiche con una frequenza intorno ai 2,4 GHz. Dai collaudi ai quali stato sottoposto risultato conforme alle norme statunitensi (OET Guide 65) e a quelle canadesi (RSS 102) relative allesposizione alle radiofrequenze. Attualmente non esistono norme relative a questo prodotto nellUnione Europea. La potenza di uscita del modulo trasmittente di 89 mW. I prodotti che utilizzano questo modulo sono destinati ad ambienti industriali e commerciali e non debbono essere utilizzati in ambienti residenziali e dai bambini. Questo prodotto reca questo marchio ed utilizza bande di radiofrequnza che non sono armonizzate nellambito della Comunit Europea. Ulteriore conformit con EMI/RFI Questo dispositivo conforme ai limiti stabiliti in CISPR 22 per la Classe B. Per la configurazione di ABTM3 (modulo wireless Bluetooth-compatibile della Socket Communications) Il prodotto Intermec che avete acquistato trasmette e riceve i dati tramite un sistema a 2,4 GHz che utilizza la tecnologia FHSS (salto di frequenze, spettro esteso). La documentazione del dispositivo host fornisce inoltre le informazioni sulla programmazione e la configurazione dei transceiver. Per altre informazioni, consultate il sito Web Intermec allindirizzo www.intermec.com. Con la presente Intermec Technologies Corporation dichiara che questo Modello 700C- ABTM3 conforme ai requisiti essenziali e alle altre clausole importanti della direttiva R&TTE (1999/5/EC). Questo prodotto stato valutato in base ai seguenti standard:

ETSI EN 300 328-2 v1.2.1 (2001-12)

ETSI EN 301 489-17 v1.1.1 (2001-09) 11

EN 60950:1992 (incluso Amdt. 1-4, 11)

SP/DGPT/ATAS 23 (1995-02) La dichiarazione di conformit originale disponibile presso il sito Web di Intermec Technologies Corporation a www.intermec.com. Questo prodotto trasmette onde elettromagnetiche con una frequenza intorno ai 2,4 GHz. Dai collaudi ai quali stato sottoposto risultato conforme alle norme statunitensi (OET Guide 65) e a quelle canadesi (RSS 102) relative allesposizione alle radiofrequenze. Attualmente non esistono norme relative a questo prodotto nellUnione Europea. La potenza di uscita del modulo trasmittente di 1 mW. I prodotti che utilizzano questo modulo sono destinati ad ambienti industriali e commerciali e non debbono essere utilizzati in ambienti residenziali e dai bambini. Questo prodotto reca questo marchio ed utilizza bande di radiofrequnza che non sono armonizzate nellambito della Comunit Europea. Ulteriore conformit con EMI/RFI Questo dispositivo conforme ai limiti stabiliti in CISPR 22 per la Classe B. Per la configurazione di MC45 Il prodotto Intermec acquistato trasmette e riceve dati mediante un modulo radio GSM/GPRS a 900/1800/1900 MHz. La documentazione del dispositivo host fornisce inoltre le informazioni sulla programmazione e la configurazione dei transceiver. Per altre informazioni, consultate il sito Web Intermec allindirizzo www.intermec.com. Con la presente Intermec Technologies Corporation dichiara che questo Modello 700C-MC45 conforme ai requisiti essenziali e alle altre clausole importanti della direttiva R&TTE (1999/5/EC). Questo prodotto stato valutato in base ai seguenti standard:

ETSI TS 51.010

ETSI EN 301 489-7 v1.1.1 (2001-09)

EN 60950:1992 (incl. Amdt. 1-4, 11) La dichiarazione di conformit originale disponibile presso il sito Web di Intermec Technologies Corporation a www.intermec.com. Questo prodotto trasmette onde elettromagnetiche a 900/1800/1900 MHz. Esso stato collaudato ed risultato conforme alle norme statunitensi (OET Guide 65), canadesi (RSS 102), europee (EN 50360/EN 50361) e australiane/neozelandesi (AS/NZA 2772.1) relative all'esposizione alle radiofrequenze. La potenza di uscita del modulo trasmittente di 0.933 mW. I prodotti che utilizzano questo modulo sono destinati ad ambienti industriali e commerciali e non debbono essere utilizzati in ambienti residenziali e dai bambini. Questo prodotto reca questo marchio. Ulteriore conformit con EMI/RFI Questo dispositivo conforme ai limiti stabiliti in CISPR 22 per la Classe B. Para Usuarios Fuera de Canada o de los Estados Unidos Por favor, coloque este suplemento dentro de su manual. Para configurao do 700C-802.11b Este producto de Intermec transmite y recibe datos por medio de un sistema de espectro ensanchado en secuencia directa de 2,4 GHz. 12 Para obtener informacin sobre la configuracin y programacin del transceptor, consulte la documentacin provista con el dispositivo host. Para obtener documentacin adicional, visite el sitio web de Intermec: www.intermec.com. Por la presente, Intermec Technologies Corporation declara que el Modelo 700C-802.11b cumple con los requisitos esenciales de acuerdo con la directiva (1999/5/EC) de R&TTE. Este producto ha sido evaluado de acuerdo con los siguientes estndares o normas:

ETSI EN 300 328-2 v1.2.1 (2001-12)

ETSI EN 301 489-17 v1.1.1 (2001-09)

EN 60950:1992 (incl. Enmienda 1-4, 11)

SP/DGPT/ATAS 23 (1995-02) La Declaracin de Conformidad original est disponible en el sitio web de Intermec Technologies Corporation:

www.intermec.com. Este producto transmite ondas electromagnticas de radio en la gama de frecuencias de 2,4 GHz. Ha sido probado y se ha determinado que cumple con las reglamentaciones de los EE.UU. (OET Guide 65) y del Canad (RSS 102), referentes a la exposicin de RF. En este momento, no existen reglamentaciones que abarquen este producto en la UE. La potencia de salida del mdulo transmisor es de 89 mW. Los productos que usan este mdulo estn destinados para uso en ambientes comerciales e industriales. No deben ser usados en ambientes residenciales o en la proximidad de nios. Este producto est marcado con este logotipo y usa bandas de frecuencia de radio que no han sido armonizadas a lo largo de la Unin Europea. Conformidad adicional con EMI/RFI Este dispositivo cumple con los lmites requeridos para la Clase B de CISPR 22. Para configurao do ABTM3 (Mdulo sem fio compatvel com Bluetooth da Socket Communications) Este producto de Intermec transmite y recibe datos por medio de un sistema de espectro ensanchado en lupulizacin de frecuencia de 2,4 GHz. Para obtener informacin sobre la configuracin y programacin del transceptor, consulte la documentacin provista con el dispositivo host. Para obtener documentacin adicional, visite el sitio web de Intermec: www.intermec.com. Por la presente, Intermec Technologies Corporation declara que el Modelo 700C- ABTM3 cumple con los requisitos esenciales de acuerdo con la directiva (1999/5/EC) de R&TTE. Este producto ha sido evaluado de acuerdo con los siguientes estndares o normas:

ETSI EN 300 328-2 v1.2.1 (2001-12)

ETSI EN 301 489-17 v1.1.1 (2001-09)

EN 60950:1992 (incl. Enmienda 1-4, 11)

SP/DGPT/ATAS 23 (1995-02) La Declaracin de Conformidad original est disponible en el sitio web de Intermec Technologies Corporation:

www.intermec.com. Este producto transmite ondas electromagnticas de radio en la gama de frecuencias de 2,4 GHz. Ha sido probado y se ha determinado que cumple con las reglamentaciones de los EE.UU. (OET Guide 65) y del Canad (RSS 102), referentes a la exposicin de RF. En este momento, no existen reglamentaciones que abarquen este producto en la UE. La potencia de salida del mdulo transmisor es de 1 mW. Los productos que usan este mdulo estn destinados para uso en ambientes comerciales e industriales. No deben ser usados en ambientes residenciales o en la proximidad de nios. 13 Este producto est marcado con este logotipo y usa bandas de frecuencia de radio que no han sido armonizadas a lo largo de la Unin Europea. Conformidad adicional con EMI/RFI Este dispositivo cumple con los lmites requeridos para la Clase B de CISPR 22. Para configurao do MC45 O produto Intermec que voc adquiriu transmite e recebe dados utilizando um mdulo de rdio GSM/GPRS de 900/1800/1900 MHz . Para obtener informacin sobre la configuracin y programacin del transceptor, consulte la documentacin provista con el dispositivo host. Para obtener documentacin adicional, visite el sitio web de Intermec: www.intermec.com. Por la presente, Intermec Technologies Corporation declara que el Modelo 700C-MC45 cumple con los requisitos esenciales de acuerdo con la directiva (1999/5/EC) de R&TTE. Este producto ha sido evaluado de acuerdo con los siguientes estndares o normas:

ETSI TS 51.010

ETSI EN 301 489-7 v1.1.1 (2001-09)

EN 60950:1992 (incl. Amdt. 1-4, 11) La Declaracin de Conformidad original est disponible en el sitio web de Intermec Technologies Corporation:

www.intermec.com. Este produto transmite ondas eletromagnticas a 900/1800/1900 MHz. Ele foi testado e mostrou-se compatvel com as regulamentaes sobre exposio a RF dos Estados Unidos (OET Guide 65), do Canad (RSS 102), da Europa (EN 50360/EN 50361) e da Austrlia/Nova Zelndia (AS/NZA 2772.1). La potencia de salida del mdulo transmisor es de 0.933 mW. Los productos que usan este mdulo estn destinados para uso en ambientes comerciales e industriales. No deben ser usados en ambientes residenciales o en la proximidad de nios. Este producto est marcado con este logotipo. Conformidad adicional con EMI/RFI Este dispositivo cumple con los lmites requeridos para la Clase B de CISPR 22. Para Usurios Fora do Canad ou dos Estados Unidos Coloque este suplemento no seu manual. Para la configuracin de 700C-802.11b O produto Intermec que voc comprou transmite e recebe dados usando um sistema DSSS (Espectro de Difuso de Seqncia Direta) de 2,4 GHz . As informaes sobre programao e configurao dos transceptores tambm so fornecidas na documentao do dispositivo hospedeiro. Consulte tambm o site da Intermec na web, no endereo www.intermec.com, para documentao complementar. Por este documento, a Intermec Technologies Corporation declara que o Modelo 700C-802.11b atende aos requisitos essenciais e outras condies relevantes da Diretiva R&TTE (1999/5/EC). Esse produto foi avaliado em relao aos seguintes padres:

ETSI EN 300 328-2 v1.2.1 (2001-12)

ETSI EN 301 489-17 v1.1.1 (2001-09) 14

EN 60950:1992 (includa Amdt. 1-4, 11)

SP/DGPT/ATAS 23 (1995-02) A Declarao de Conformidade original est disponvel no site da web da Intermec Technologies Corporation no endereo www.intermec.com. Este produto transmite ondas eletromagnticas na faixa de freqncia de 2,4 GHz. Ele foi testado e aprovado quanto sua conformidade com os regulamentos de exposio RF dos EUA (OET Guide 65) e do Canad (RSS 102). No existem regulamentos cobrindo esse tipo de produto atualmente na UE. A potncia de sada do mdulo transmissor de 89 mW. Os produtos que usam este mdulo so destinados aos ambientes comerciais e industriais. Eles no devem ser utilizados em ambientes residenciais e por crianas. Este produto identificado por esta logomarca e utiliza bandas de freqncia de rdio que no esto harmonizadas na Comunidade Europia. Conformidades EMI/RFI Adicionais Este produto atende aos requisitos de limite Classe B do CISPR22. Para la configuracin de ABTM3 (Mdulo inalmbrico compatible con Bluetooth de Socket Communications) O produto Intermec que voc comprou transmite e recebe dados usando um sistema FHSS (Espectro de Difuso de Seqncia Hopping) de 2,4 GHz . As informaes sobre programao e configurao dos transceptores tambm so fornecidas na documentao do dispositivo hospedeiro. Consulte tambm o site da Intermec na web, no endereo www.intermec.com, para documentao complementar. Por este documento, a Intermec Technologies Corporation declara que o Modelo 700C- ABTM3 atende aos requisitos essenciais e outras condies relevantes da Diretiva R&TTE (1999/5/EC). Esse produto foi avaliado em relao aos seguintes padres:

ETSI EN 300 328-2 v1.2.1 (2001-12)

ETSI EN 301 489-17 v1.1.1 (2001-09)

EN 60950:1992 (includa Amdt. 1-4, 11)

SP/DGPT/ATAS 23 (1995-02) A Declarao de Conformidade original est disponvel no site da web da Intermec Technologies Corporation no endereo www.intermec.com. Este produto transmite ondas eletromagnticas na faixa de freqncia de 2,4 GHz. Ele foi testado e aprovado quanto sua conformidade com os regulamentos de exposio RF dos EUA (OET Guide 65) e do Canad (RSS 102). No existem regulamentos cobrindo esse tipo de produto atualmente na UE. A potncia de sada do mdulo transmissor de 1 mW. Os produtos que usam este mdulo so destinados aos ambientes comerciais e industriais. Eles no devem ser utilizados em ambientes residenciais e por crianas. Este produto identificado por esta logomarca e utiliza bandas de freqncia de rdio que no esto harmonizadas na Comunidade Europia. Conformidades EMI/RFI Adicionais Este produto atende aos requisitos de limite Classe B do CISPR22. 15 Para la configuracin de MC45 El producto de Intermec adquirido transmite y recibe datos utilizando un mdulo de radio GSM/GPRS de 900/1800/1900 MHz. As informaes sobre programao e configurao dos transceptores tambm so fornecidas na documentao do dispositivo hospedeiro. Consulte tambm o site da Intermec na web, no endereo www.intermec.com, para documentao complementar. Por este documento, a Intermec Technologies Corporation declara que o Modelo 700C-MC45 atende aos requisitos essenciais e outras condies relevantes da Diretiva R&TTE (1999/5/EC). Esse produto foi avaliado em relao aos seguintes padres:

ETSI TS 51.010

ETSI EN 301 489-7 v1.1.1 (2001-09)

EN 60950:1992 (incl. Amdt. 1-4, 11) A Declarao de Conformidade original est disponvel no site da web da Intermec Technologies Corporation no endereo www.intermec.com. Este producto transmite ondas electromagnticas en 900/1800/1900 MHz. Ha sido evaluado y cumple con las regulaciones de exposicin a RF (radio frecuencias) de EE.UU. (OET Guide 65), Canad (RSS 102), Comunidad Europea (EN 50360/EN 50361) y Australia-Nueva Zelanda (AS/NZA 2772.1). A potncia de sada do mdulo transmissor de 0.933 mW. Os produtos que usam este mdulo so destinados aos ambientes comerciais e industriais. Eles no devem ser utilizados em ambientes residenciais e por crianas. Este produto identificado por esta logomarca. Conformidades EMI/RFI Adicionais Este produto atende aos requisitos de limite Classe B do CISPR22. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Radio Manual Supplement

*072719-002*

*072719-002*

6001 36th Avenue West Everett, WA 98203 U.S.A. www.intermec.com 2002 Intermec Technologies Corp. All Rights Reserved Users Manual 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 700 Series Color Mobile Computer S NOTICE The information contained herein is proprietary and is provided solely for the purpose of allowing customers to operate and service Intermec manufactured equipment and is not to be released, reproduced, or used for any other purpose without written permission of Intermec. Disclaimer of Warranties. The sample source code included in this document is presented for reference only. The code does not necessarily represent complete, tested programs. The code is provided AS IS WITH ALL FAULTS. ALL WARRANTIES ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. We welcome your comments concerning this publication. Although every effort has been made to keep it free of errors, some may occur. When reporting a specific problem, please describe it briefly and include the book title and part number, as well as the paragraph or figure number and the page number. Send your comments to:

Intermec Technologies Corporation Publications Department 550 Second Street SE Cedar Rapids, IA 52401 ANTARES, INTERMEC, NORAND, NOR*WARE, PEN*KEY, ROUTEPOWER, TRAKKER, and TRAKKER ANTARES are registered trademarks and ArciTech, ENTERPRISE WIRELESS LAN, i-gistics, INCA, Mobile Framework, MobileLAN, TE 2000, UAP, and UNIVERSAL ACCESS POINT are trademarks of Intermec Technologies Corporation. 2002 Intermec Technologies Corporation. All rights reserved. Acknowledgments ActiveSync, ActiveX, Microsoft, MS, MS-DOS, Outlook, Pocket Outlook, Pocket PC, Windows, Windows NT, and the Windows logo are registered trademarks and MSDN, SQL Server, Visual Basic, Visual C++, and Windows for Pen are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Microsoft products are licensed to OEMs by Microsoft Licensing, Inc., a wholly owned subsidiary of Microsoft Corporation. Bluetooth is a trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc., U.S.A. CDMA2000 is a trademark of the Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA). GSM is a registered trademark of the GSM Association. Microclean II is a registered trademark of Foresight International. MultiMediaCard is a trademark of Infineon Technologies AG, Germany, and is licensed to MMCA (MultiMediaCard Association). SanDisk is a trademark of SanDisk Corporation. Siemens is a registered trademark of Siemens AG. Siemens product names are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Siemens or Siemens AG. Sprint is a registered trademark of Sprint Communications Company L.P. This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/) This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) ii Contents Contents Before You Begin

. Warranty Information Safety Summary Warnings, Cautions, and Notes About This Manual Format Conventions for Input From a Keyboard or Keypad Related Publications Global Services and Support Web Support xv xv xv xvi xvi xvii xviii xviii xviii 1 Introduction About the 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Battery Audio System Low Battery Shutdown System Status Maintained Speaker Internal Microphone External Headset Jack

. CompactFlash Cards SecureDigital Cards MultiMediaCards CAB Files Within 700C Software Tools CD Modem Support Network Support Removeable Card Support Software Build Version 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 What s New

. 6 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual iii Contents 2 Pocket PC 2002 Introduction

. 8 Premium versus Professional Editions

. 8 Where to Find Information

. 10 Basic Skills Buttons and Stylus Today Screen Programs Navigation Bar and Command Bar Pop-up Menus Notifications Enter Information on Your 700 Series Computer Typing With the Soft Keyboard Using Block Recognizer Using Letter Recognizer Using Transcriber Selecting Typed Text

. Creating a Recording

. Using My Text Finding and Organizing Information Customizing Your 700 Series Computer Adjusting Settings Adding or Removing Programs Selecting the Writing Converting Writing to Text Creating a Drawing Selecting a Drawing Drawing on the Screen Writing on the Screen Recording a Message 11 11 11 13 14 15 15 16 17 17 18 18 18 19 19 20 22 22 22 23 23 24 25 26 26 26 Microsoft ActiveSync

. 29 Microsoft Pocket Outlook Calendar: Scheduling Appointments and Meetings Contacts: Tracking Friends and Colleagues Creating an Appointment Using the Summary Screen Creating Meeting Requests Scheduling a Meeting

. Creating a Contact Finding a Contact Using the Summary Screen Creating a Task Using the Summary Screen Creating a Note 31 31 32 33 33 33 34 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 Tasks: Keeping a To Do List Notes: Capturing Thoughts and Ideas iv 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Contents Inbox: Sending and Receiving E-mail Messages Synchronizing E-mail Messages Connecting Directly to an E-mail Server Using the Message List Composing Messages Managing E-mail Messages and Folders Folder Behavior With a Direct Connection to an E-mail Server

. Companion Programs Pocket Word Pocket Excel MSN Messenger Creating a Document Typing Mode Writing Mode Drawing Mode Recording Mode

. Creating a Workbook Tips for Working in Pocket Excel

. Setting Up Working with Contacts

. Chatting with Contacts

. Getting Books on Your 700 Series Computer Using the Library Reading a Book Using Reader Features Removing a Book Windows Media Player for Pocket PC Microsoft Reader Pocket Internet Explorer The Mobile Favorites Folder Favorite Links Mobile Favorites Using AvantGo Channels Using Pocket Internet Explorer

. Viewing Mobile Favorites and Channels Browsing the Internet Getting Connected Transferring Items Using Infrared Connecting to an Internet Service Provider Sending Information Receiving Information

. Ending a Connection Connecting Directly to an E-mail Server Setting Up an E-mail Service Creating a Modem Connection to an ISP Creating an Ethernet Connection to an ISP Creating a Modem Connection to Work Creating an Ethernet Connection to Work Connecting to Work 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 42 42 42 43 45 46 46 47 47 47 49 50 51 51 52 52 53 53 54 54 55 57 58 58 59 60 61 61 62 62 62 62 64 65 66 66 67 67 67 67 68 68 69 70 70 71 72 72 73 v Contents 3 4 Installing Applications Packaging an Application

. 76 Installing Applications Using Microsoft ActiveSync Using the FTP Server Using the Application Manager in Unit Manager Using a Storage Card

. Copying to a CompactFlash Card Copying to a SecureDigital Storage Card 76 77 78 78 78 78 79 Updating the System Software

. 79 Application Migration

. 80 Cabinet File Installation

. 82 Network Support CORE

. 84 Network Adapters Ethernet Communications 802.11b Communications Profiles Import/Export Scan List Network Selection APIs Function Summary 802.11b Radio CORE Module

. GSM/GPRS CDMA/1xRTT SB555 WAN Radio CORE Module AT Command Interface Documentation Bluealps CORE Module 85 86 87 87 96 97 98 101 107 110 110 110 111 115 120 120 120 WWAN Radio Options Wireless Printing AutoIP/DHCP

. 122 SNMP Configuration The Focus was Simple Using SNMP Retrieval of Management Information An Early Approach to Getting More than One Item at a Time Conclusion SNMP Configuration on the 700 Series Computer

. Management Information Base Object Identifiers Configuring with SNMP 123 123 123 124 124 124 125 125 126 126 vi 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Contents Printer Support Printing ASCII

. Directly to a Port

. Directly to a Generic Serial Port 128 128 128 IrDA Printer Driver

. 128 NPCP Printer Driver

. About NPCP NPCP Driver Installation and Removal Opening the NPCP Driver Closing the NPCP Driver Reading from the NPCP Driver Writing to the NPCP Driver NPCP Driver I/O Controls NPCP Printer Communications Sample Code NPCP Error Codes O Neil Printer Driver

. DTR Driver Installation and Removal Opening the DTR Driver Closing the DTR Driver Writing to the DTR Driver DTR Printer Communications 129 129 129 130 130 130 130 131 132 132 133 134 134 135 135 135 135 Scanner Support Scanner Control and Data Transfer

. 138 5 6 Automatic Data Collection COM Interfaces Multiple ADC COM Object Support How to Create and Use the ADC COM Interfaces Read-Ahead Bar Code Data Access Grid Data Filtering Filter Expression Values Editing Expression Values ADC Connection

. Data Collection Features Image Acquisition Features Create and Delete ADC COM Object Functions ITCDeviceOpen ITCDeviceClose 2D Imager Overview 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 138 139 140 140 141 142 144 145 146 146 147 149 149 150 vii Contents IADC Functions IBarCodeReaderControl Functions IS9CConfig Functions IADC::CancelReadRequest IADC::Initialize IADC::QueryAttribute IADC::QueryData IADC::Read IADC::SetAttribute IBarCodeReaderControl::CancelReadRequest IBarCodeReaderControl::ControlLED IBarCodeReaderControl::Initialize IBarCodeReaderControl::IssueBeep IBarCodeReaderControl::QueryAttribute IBarCodeReaderControl::Read IBarCodeReaderControl::SetAttribute IBarCodeReaderControl::TriggerScanner

. IS9CConfig::GetCodabar IS9CConfig::SetCodabar Codabar Default Settings Codabar Enumerations IS9CConfig::GetCode39 IS9CConfig::SetCode39 Code 39 Default Settings Code 39 Enumerations IS9CConfig::GetCode93 IS9CConfig::SetCode93 Code 93 Default Settings Code 93 Enumerations IS9CConfig::GetCode128 IS9CConfig::SetCode128 Code 128/EAN 128 Default Settings Code 128 Enumerations IS9CConfig::GetI2of5 IS9CConfig::SetI2of5 Interleaved 2 of 5 Default Settings Interleaved 2 of 5 Enumerations IS9CConfig::GetMatrix2of5 IS9CConfig::SetMatrix2of5 Matrix 2 of 5 Default Settings Matrix 2 of 5 Enumerations IS9CConfig::GetMSI IS9CConfig::SetMSI MSI Default Settings MSI Enumerations IS9CConfig::GetPDF417 IS9CConfig::SetPDF417 PDF 417 Default Settings PDF 417 Enumerations IS9CConfig::GetPlessey IS9CConfig::SetPlessey Plessey Default Settings Plessey Enumerations IS9CConfig::GetStandard2of5 IS9CConfig::SetStandard2of5 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 167 171 172 173 174 175 175 176 177 177 178 179 179 179 180 180 181 181 182 183 184 184 185 185 186 186 186 187 187 187 188 188 189 190 190 192 192 193 193 194 195 viii 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual IS9CConfig2 Functions Standard 2 of 5 Default Settings Standard 2 of 5 Enumerations IS9CConfig::GetTelepen IS9CConfig::SetTelepen Telepen Default Settings Telepen Enumerations IS9CConfig::GetUpcEan IS9CConfig::SetUpcEan UPC/EAN Default Settings UPC/EAN Enumerations

. IS9CConfig2::GetCode11 IS9CConfig2::SetCode11 Code 11 Default Settings Code 11 Enumerations IS9CConfig2::GetCustomSymIds IS9CConfig2::SetCustomSymIds Custom Identifier Assignments Custom Identifier Default Settings Custom Identifier Example IS9CConfig2::GetGlobalAmble IS9CConfig2::SetGlobalAmble Postamble and Preamble Defaults IS9CConfig2::GetPDF417Ext IS9CConfig2::SetPDF417Ext PDF 417 Extended: Micro PDF 417 Default Settings IS9CConfig2::GetSymIdXmit IS9CConfig2::SetSymIdXmit Symbology ID Transmission Option ISCP Commands ISCP::GetConfig ISCP::SetConfig IS9CConfig3 Functions AIM Symbology ID Defaults Contents 196 196 197 197 197 198 198 200 201 201 204 205 205 206 206 207 208 209 210 210 211 212 212 213 213 214 214 214 215 216 216 217 218 219 221 221 224 225 226 226 227 227 228 IImage Interface

. IImage::ReadSigCapBuffer IImage::ReadSigCapFile

. IImage::ReadImage IImage::CancelReadImage

. IImage::Start IImage::Stop

. IImage::Open IImage::Close

. Data Collection Configuration

. 229 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual ix Contents Tethered Scanner Enabling and Disabling Changing Comm Settings

. Tethered Scanner Sabre 1551E or 1553 Tethered Scanner Welch Allyn 1470 Imager Settings Error Message Scanner Cabling Limitations and Capabilities

. 7 Programming Creating CAB Files Creating Device-Specific CAB Files Creating an .INF File Sample .INF File

. Using Installation Functions in SETUP.DLL After the CAB File Extraction Creating CAB Files with CAB Wizard Troubleshooting the CAB Wizard FTP Server Configurable Parameters Via the Registry Editor

. Transferring Files Over TCP/IP Networks Stopping the FTP Server from Your Application Autostart FTP BlockSize DeviceName DeviceURL IDNATarget ManifestName PauseAtStartup Root 230 230 231 231 232 232 232 232 233 236 236 236 245 248 248 249 250 251 252 252 253 253 254 254 255 255 256 260 260 Full Screen

. 262 Kernel I/O Controls

. IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICE_INFO IOCTL_HAL_ITC_READ_PARM IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICEID IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOTLOADER_VERINFO IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT IOCTL_HAL_GET_RESET_INFO IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOT_DEVICE IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT IOCTL_PROCESSOR_INFORMATION IOCTL_GET_CPU_ID 264 264 265 270 272 273 274 275 275 276 277 278 279 280 x 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Contents Reboot Functions

. IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT Remapping the Keypad

. Unshifted Plane Gold Plane Alpha Plane Key Values How Key Values Are Stored in Registry Change Notification Advanced Keypad Remapping Scan Codes Sample View of Registry Keys Control Panel Applets A Configuration Parameters Changing a Parameter Setting About Configuration Parameters

. Data Collection Control Panel Applet Symbologies Code 39 Standard 2 of 5 Codabar UPC/EAN Code 93 Code 128 Plessey MSI PDF 417 Interleaved 2 of 5 Matrix 2 of 5 Telepen Code 11 QR Code Data Matrix

. Beeper Volume Beeper Frequency Good Read Beeps Good Read Beep Duration Symbology ID Prefix Suffix Aimer LED duration Image Dimension Symbology Options Beeper/LED Imager 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 280 280 280 280 281 281 281 281 282 282 283 283 283 284 286 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 298 299 300 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 309 315 316 317 318 320 321 322 323 323 324 xi Contents Virtual Wedge

. Virtual Wedge

. Preamble

. Postamble Grid

. Code Page SNMP Control Panel Applet Security Read Only Community Read/Write Community Read Encryption Write Encryption Encryption Key

. Authentication Threshold Contact Name Location Traps Identification Unit Information Control Panel Applet Versions Battery Status CAB Files

. 325 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 331 332 333 334 335 336 336 337 338 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 B Unit Manager Data Collection

. Symbologies Symbology ID

. Beeper/LED

. Imager Virtual Wedge

. 348 348 349 349 350 350 SNMP

. Security Traps Identification 350 350 351 351 Unit

. Date/Time Backlight Timeout Key Clicks Automatic Shutoff Volume Using Reader Commands Change Configuration Set Time and Date

. 352 352 353 354 355 356 357 357 358 xii 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Contents C I Bar Codes Bar Code Symbologies UPC EAN Codabar Code 11 Code 39 Encoded Code 39 (Concatenation) Encoded Code 39 (Full ASCII) Code 93 Code 128 I 2 of 5 (Interleaved) S 2 of 5 (Standard 2 of 5) Plessey MSI Code (Variant of Plessey)

. Bar Code Labels

. Audio Volume

. Automatic Shutoff

. Backlight Timeout

. Key Clicks Virtual Wedge Grid, Preamble, Postamble

. Grid Preamble Postamble 360 362 362 362 363 363 363 363 364 364 366 366 367 367 368 368 369 369 370 371 371 371 371 Index Classes and Functions

. 374 General Index

. 377 Files Index

. 398 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual xiii Contents xiv 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Before You Begin Before You Begin This section introduces you to standard warranty provisions, safety precautions, warnings and cautions, document formatting conventions, and sources of additional product information. A documentation roadmap is also provided to guide you in finding the appropriate information. Warranty Information Safety Summary To receive a copy of the standard warranty provision for this product, con-

tact your local Intermec support services organization. In the U.S. call 1-800-755-5505, and in Canada call 1-800-668-7043. If you live outside of the U.S. or Canada, you can find your local Intermec support services organization on the Intermec Web site at www.intermec.com. Note: Opening this product may void the warranty. The internal workings of this product can only be accessed by Intermec service personnel. Radio replacements and upgrades require Intermec service personnel. Your safety is extremely important. Follow these guidelines:

S Read and follow all warnings and cautions in this book before handling and operating Intermec equipment. You can be seriously injured, and equipment and data can be damaged if you do no follow the safety warnings and cautions. S Do not repair or adjust energized equipment alone under any circum-

stances. Someone capable of providing first aid must always be present for your safety. S Always obtain first aid or medical attention immediately after an injury. Never neglect an injury, no matter how slight it seems. S Begin resuscitation immediately if someone is injured and stops breath-

ing. Any delay could result in death. To work on or near high voltage, you should be familiar with approved industrial first aid methods. S Never work on energized equipment unless authorized by a responsible authority. Energized electrical equipment is dangerous. Electrical shock from energized equipment can cause death. If you must perform autho-

rized emergency work on energized equipment, be sure that you comply strictly with approved safety regulations. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual xv Before You Begin Warnings, Cautions, and Notes About This Manual The warnings, cautions, and notes in this manual use this format:

A warning alerts you of an operating procedure, practice, condition, or statement that must be strictly observed to avoid death or serious injury to the persons working on the equipment. Attention Danger: Un avertissement vous avertit dune procdure de fonctionnement, dune mthode, dun tat ou dun rapport qui doit tre strictement respect pour viter loccurrence de mort ou de blessures graves aux personnes manupulant lquipement. A caution alerts you to an operating procedure, practice, condition, or statement that must be strictly observed to prevent equipment damage or destruction, or corruption or loss of data. Attention: Une prcaution vous avertit dune procdure de fonctionnement, dune mthode, dun tat ou dun rapport qui doit tre strictement respect pour empcher lendommagement ou la destruction de lquipement, ou laltration ou la perte de donnes. Note: Notes are statements that either provide extra information about a topic or contain special instructions for handling a particular condition or set of circumstances. The 700 Series Color Mobile Computer User s Manual provides you with information about the features of the 700 Series Color Mobile Computer and how to configure, troubleshoot, and support it. You must be familiar with your host PC, your network, and your other Intermec equipment. S Chapter 1 Introduction Introduces the 700 Series Color Mobile Computer. S Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 Introduces the Pocket PC 2002 operating system from Microsoft Cor-

poration, and explains how to use its Outlook, ActiveSync, Internet Ex-

plorer, and other companion programs. S Chapter 3 Installing Applications Provides methods to install applications and CAB files, also covers ap-

plication migration. S Chapter 4 Network Support Introduces the CORE application, network adapters such as Ethernet, 802.11b radios, GSM/GPRS or CDMA/1xRTT embedded radio mod-

ules, and wireless printing equipped with a Bluetooth module, SNMP configuration, and Network Selection APIs. S Chapter 5 Printer Support Provides information on printing ASCII to either a port or to a generic serial port, and on working with IrDA, NPCP, and O Neil printer driv-

ers. xvi 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Before You Begin S Chapter 6 Scanner Support Provides Automatic Data Collection COM and IImage interfaces and lists settings via Data Collection parameters. S Chapter 7 Programming Programming information that includes creating CAB files, the FTP Server, Full Screen, Kernel I/O Control Functions, Reboot Functions, and remapping the keypad. S Appendix A Control Panel Applets Contains detailed information about the Data Collection, SNMP, and Unit Information control panel applets. S Appendix B Unit Manager Describes how to configure some parameters via the Unit Manager ap-

plication and includes reader commands. S Appendix C Bar Codes Describes some of the more common bar code symbologies and includes bar code labels that can be scanned to configure your 700 Series Com-

puter. Format Conventions for Input From a Keyboard or Keypad This table describes the formatting conventions for input from PC or host computer keyboards and device keypads. Description Format Conventions Convention Special text Italic text Bold text where Shows the command as you should enter it into the device. Indicates a variable that you must replace the parameter with a value. Indicates the keys you must press on a PC or host computer key-

board. For example, press Enter means you press the key labeled Enter on the PC or host computer keyboard. This word introduces a list of parameters and explains the values you can specify for them. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual xvii Before You Begin Related Publications To order printed versions of the Intermec manuals, contact your local In-

termec representative or distributor. Following are related Intermec manuals, CD-ROMs, and part numbers (P/N). For other versions and languages, consult your Intermec sales representative. S 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Quick Start Guide

(P/N: 962-054-053) S 700 Color Recovery CD PPC 2002 Professional Edition WWE

(P/N: 235-100-001 Kit) S 700 Color Recovery CD PPC 2002 Premium Edition WWE

(P/N: 235-101-001 Kit) S 700 Series Color Software Tools CD (P/N: 235-099-001) S Windows 95 and Windows CE Configuration Utilities Reference Manual

(P/N: 978-054-010) Global Services and Support Select any of the following services available from Intermec Technologies Corporation:

S Factory Repair and On-site Repair To request a return authorization number for one of our authorized ser-

vice centers, or to request an on-site repair technician, call 1-800-755-5505, then select option 1. S Technical Support For technical support on your Intermec product, call 1-800-755-5505, then select option 2. S Service Contract Status To inquire about an existing contract, or to renew a contract, call 1-800-755-5505, then select option 3. S Schedule Site Surveys or Installations To schedule a site survey, or to request a product or system installation, call 1-800-755-5505, then select option 4. Web Support Visit our Web site at http://www.intermec.com to download many of our current manuals in PDF format. Visit our technical knowledge base (Knowledge Central) at http://intermec.custhelp.com to review technical information or to request technical help for all Intermec products. xviii 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Introduction 1 This chapter introduces the 700 Series Color (700C) Mobile Computer, developed by Intermec Technologies Corporation to enhance wireless con-

nectivity needs. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 1 Chapter 1 Introduction About the 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Audio System Speaker A speaker capable of variable volume levels is located on the back of the computer. This speaker has a transducer volume of 85 dB min at 10 CM and a frequency range of 1-8 KHz. Internal Microphone The internal microphone is located on the bottom of the unit to the left of the hirose connector. External Headset Jack The external headset jack connects a mono headset to your mobile com-

puter for use in noisy environments. The jack is a 2.5 mm, three-conduc-

tor jack, with autosensing of the headset jack insertion which disables the internal speaker and microphone. The external headset jack is located on the bottom of the mobile computer to the right of the hirose connector. The 700 Series Computer comes equipped with a nominal 14.4 Watt-hour, 7.2V (two 2000 mAh cells), replaceable Lithium-Ion (LiIon) battery. To view the status of this battery from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start Settings the System tab the Power icon to view the current status of both the main battery and the backup battery. Tap ok to exit this information. Battery 2 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 1 Introduction Note: The Unit Information control panel applet is only available in the 700 Series Computer if Intermec Content is enabled, the Plus region is enabled and installed, and a laser scanner is installed. You can also view the battery status for the 700 Series Computer by accessing the Unit Information control panel applet. Tap the Unit Information icon, then tap the Battery Status tab to view the current status. Tap ok to exit this information. Low Battery Shutdown If your computer shuts down because of low battery conditions, your com-

puter will not operate. This is done to ensure that data is protected. Al-

though the battery will protect the data against loss for several hours, you should connect your computer to a power source when you first detect a low battery condition. Your computer contains an internal super capacitor, a temporary power storage device, that protects data for up to ten minutes. This is to give you time to replace the main battery pack before that data is lost. Be sure to put the computer in a suspend mode before doing so. The battery power fail level is set so that after the system shuts down in a low battery condition, there is still sufficient charge to allow the unit to remain configured, keep proper time, and maintain DRAM (Dynamic Random Access Memory) for at least 72 hours at room temperature if the main battery remains in the mobile computer. The configuration and time are lost if:

S The battery discharges beyond this level. S The battery is removed when the computer is not in suspend mode. S A cold reset is performed on the computer. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 3 Chapter 1 Introduction System Status Maintained System status is maintained in suspend when the main battery is re-

moved:

S 10 minutes for 64 MB low-power chips S 5 minutes for 128 MB low-power chips CAB Files Within 700C Software Tools CD Modem Support Network Support If you leave the default destination while you install the \700 Color Mgmt Tools directory onto your desktop PC, then C:\Intermec\Inter-

mec 700 Color Mgmt Tools\Cab Files will be the default directory. There are folders within the \Cab Files directory that contain demos and pro-

gram files. See the 700 Series Color Software Tools CD User s Manual for more information about these files. Modem PC Cards are not supported by the 700 Series Computer. Howev-

er, modem options do include the following:

S Switchable dock that includes a built-in modem and a serial port be-

tween which an application can switch. S Mini-Landline Modem that can be tethered to the port on the bottom of the 700 Series Computer. S Other external modems that may be connected to the bottom of the 700 Series Computer or to the dock. Radio CompactFlash Cards cannot be installed by a user. The 700 Series Computer must be serviced to install or replace radios. See Chapter 4, Network Support for more information. S 802.11b radio S Integrated GSM/GPRS radio S CDPM/1xRTT radio S Wireless printing equipped with a Bluetooth qualified module by Socket Communications 4 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Removeable Card Support Chapter 1 Introduction To access either the CompactFlash (CF) or SecureDigital (SD) card slot, locate the access door at the top of the 700 Series Computer, remove its two screws, then remove the door. CompactFlash Cards Support is limited to one CompactFlash (CF) Storage Card in the 700 Se-

ries Computer, either for storage or for the 802.11b radio. SecureDigital Cards Support is limited to one SecureDigital (SD) Storage Card in the 700 Se-

ries Computer for storage. MultiMediaCards MultiMediaCards (MMCs) are not supported in the 700 Series Comput-

ers because current technology shows that SD cards will quickly surpass MMC cards in storage capacity. Software Build Version To check to see if your 700 Series Computer has the latest build, select Start Internet Explorer the Intermec logo. The latest software build version is displayed beneath the Patent Informa-

tion title. This information will be useful should you need customer assis-

tance. Note: The Unit Information control panel applet is only available in the 700 Series Computer if Intermec Content is enabled, the Plus region is enabled and installed, and a laser scanner is installed. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 5 Chapter 1 Introduction You can also view the latest software build version on your 700 Series Computer by accessing the Unit Information control panel applet. Select Start Settings the System tab the Unit Information icon the Versions tab to view the current build version on your 700 Series Computer. Whats New The newest functionality is available in software build versions 1.30 or greater. The following changes have occurred since the last release of this manual:

S Applied new publications standards to this manual. S Adapted instructions using Ethernet connections to fit Intermec require-

ments in Chapter 2, Pocket PC 2002. S Moved Updating System Software and EFlash information to the Re-

covery CD User s Manual from Chapter 3, Installing Applications. S Removed several 802.11 APIs not related to the 700 Series Color Com-

puter from Chapter 4, Network Support. S Added the Siemens MC45 radio module to Chapter 4, Network Sup-

port. S Added tethered scanner information to Chapter 6, Scanner Support. S Added CAB extraction information and FTP Server parameters to Chapter 7, Programming. S Added imager option information via the Data Collection control panel applet to Appendix A, Control Panel Applets. Note that this is for 700 Series Computers using an imager. 6 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Pocket PC 2002 2 This chapter introduces the Pocket PC 2002 operating system from Microsoft Corporation. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 7 Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 Introduction Congratulations on purchasing a Pocket PC. Due to the size and capabili-

ties of this 700 Series Color Mobile Computer, you can keep your most important business and personal information up-to-date and close at hand. Microsoft ActiveSync increases the power of your 700 Series Computer by allowing you to synchronize the information on your desktop or laptop computer with your 700 Series Computer. Picture yourself in the follow-

ing situations:

S A Calendar reminder alerts you that it is time to catch the bus. You grab your 700 Color Pocket PC Mobile Computer and catch the bus just in time. Because ActiveSync keeps the information on your 700 Series Computer up-to-date, you leisurely review your task list, make notes about the new books and CDs you want to buy, and read and respond to e-mail messages. When you get back to the office, ActiveSync trans-

fers any task changes you made, your notes, and your e-mail message responses to your desktop computer. For more information on Active-

Sync, see Microsoft ActiveSync on page 29. S While walking with a colleague, your 700 Color Pocket PC Mobile Computer rings. You look at the caller ID and see it is your manager who is calling. She asks if you two are free this afternoon for an emer-

gency meeting. While your colleague fumbles through his paper orga-

nizer, you press a button on your 700 Series Computer and instantly see a list of today s appointments and meetings. You are quickly able to tell your manager your available times, and make a note of the new meeting while on the call. You hang up, send an e-mail with a schedule request for the three of you at the desired location. For more information on scheduling appointments and meetings, see Microsoft Pocket Outlook on page 31. S You are meeting your friends tonight for dinner and a movie. You download the latest movie information from the Internet to your desk-

top computer and then synchronize it with your 700 Series Computer. At dinner, you pull out your 700 Color Pocket PC Mobile Computer and review your movie options with your friends. For more information on downloading Web pages to your 700 Series Computer, see Pocket Internet Explorer on page 62. Premium versus Professional Editions Your 700 Series Computer will have either the Premium Edition or the Professional Edition of Pocket PC 2002. Do the following to determine which edition of Pocket PC 2002 is on your unit. 1 Select Start Internet Explorer the Intermec logo. 8 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 2 Note the Software Build information displayed beneath the Version Information title. Note: If you have an older software build, your unit may say either PREM (which indicates the Premium Edition) or PRO (which indicates the Professional Edition). 3 Tap the Close icon in the top right corner to exit the Internet Explorer. Below is a list of components for each edition of Pocket PC 2002:

Component Microsoft ActiveSync Client (page 29) Microsoft Pocket Outlook (page 31) Pocket Word (page 47) Pocket Excel (page 52) MSN Messenger (page 53) Windows Media Player for Pocket PC (page 57) Microsoft Reader (page 58) Pocket Internet Explorer (page 62) Premium Edition Professional Edition X X X X X X X X X X X X RAM RAM X Note: Components marked with RAM are provided on a Companion CD for download into RAM rather than burned into Flash ROM. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 9 Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 Where to Find Information This chapter describes your 700 Series Computer hardware, provides an overview of the programs on your 700 Series Computer, and explains how to connect your 700 Series Computer to a desktop computer, a network, or the Internet. For instructions on setting up your 700 Series Computer and installing ActiveSync, see the Quick Start Card. The following is a guide to more information to assist you use your 700 Series Computer. For information on:

Programs on your mobile computer. Additional programs that can be installed on the mobile computer. Connecting to and synchronizing with a desktop com-

puter. Last-minute updates and detailed technical information. Up-to-date information on your Pocket PC. See this source:

This chapter and mobile computer Help. To view Help, tap Start Help. The Pocket PC Companion CD. The Quick Start Card or AutoSync Help on your desktop computer. To view Help, click Help Microsoft Acti-

veSync Help. The Read Me files, located in the Microsoft ActiveSync folder on the desktop computer and on the Pocket PC Companion CD. http://www.microsoft.com/mobile/pocketpc Pocket PC and many of the technologies supported by the 700 Series Computer are not from Intermec Technologies. Many of the utilities and features on a Pocket PC device come directly from Microsoft without any modification from Intermec Technologies. There may be certain Micro-

soft-specific issues that Intermec Technologies would not be able to sup-

port, so you will have to contact Microsoft Corporation. Use these URLs to determine your Microsoft support options:

S http://msdn.microsoft.com/support/

S http://support.microsoft.com/

S news://news.microsoft.com (a free support option) 10 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Basic Skills Buttons and Stylus Today Screen Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 Learning to use your 700 Series Computer is easy. This describes the basic concepts of using and customizing your 700 Series Computer. Your 700 Series Computer has hardware buttons that control actions and scroll functions, and a stylus for selecting items and entering information. On the 700 Series Computer, the stylus replaces the mouse. S Tap:

Touch the screen once with the stylus to open items and select options. S Drag:

Hold the stylus on the screen and drag across the screen to select text and images. Drag in a list to select multiple items. S Tap and hold:

Tap and hold the stylus on an item to see a list of actions available for that item. On the pop-up menu that appears, tap the action to be per-

formed. When you turn on your 700 Series Computer for the first time each day

(or after four hours of inactivity), you will see the Today screen. You can also display it by tapping the Start flag (shown left) and then Today. On the Today screen, you can see at a glance important information for the day. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 11 Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 Following are some of the status icons you may see:

Status Icon Meaning:

Turns all sounds on and off. Backup battery is low. Main batteries are charging. Main batteries are low. Main batteries are very low. Main batteries are full. Connection is active. Synchronization is beginning or ending. Synchronization is occurring. Notification or one or more instant messages received. Notification of one or more e-mail messages received. If more notification icons need to be displayed than there is room to display them, the Notification icon (shown left) will display. Tap the icon to view all notification icons. 12 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Programs Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 You can switch from one program to another by selecting it from the Start menu. (You can customize which programs you see on this menu. For information, see Adjusting Settings on page 26.) To access some programs, tap Start Programs, and then the program name. You can also switch to some programs by pressing a program button. Your 700 Series Computer has one or more program buttons located on the front or side of the computer. The icons on the buttons identify the pro-

grams to which they switch. Note: Some programs have abbreviated labels for check boxes and drop-

down menus. To see the full spelling of an abbreviated label, tap and hold the stylus on the label. Drag the stylus off the label so that the command is not carried out. The following is a partial list of programs that are on your 700 Series Computer. Look on the Pocket PC Companion CD for additional pro-

grams that you can install onto your 700 Series Computer. ActiveSync Synchronize information between your 700 Series Computer and desktop computer. Calendar Keep track of your appointments and create meeting requests. Contacts Keep track of your friends and colleagues. Inbox Send and receive e-mail messages. Pocket Internet Explorer Browse Web and WAP (Wireless Application Protocol) sites, and download new programs and files from the Internet. Notes Create handwritten or typed notes, drawings, and recordings. Tasks Keep track of your tasks. Pocket Excel Create new workbooks or view and edit Excel workbooks created on your desktop computer. MSN Messenger Send and receive instant messages with your MSN Messenger contacts. Pocket Word Create new documents or view and edit Word documents created on your desktop computer. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 13 Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 Navigation Bar and Command Bar The navigation bar is located at the top of the screen. It displays the active program and current time, and allows you to switch to programs and close screens. Use the command bar at the bottom of the screen to perform tasks in pro-

grams. The command bar includes menu names, buttons, and the Input Panel button. To create a new item in the current program, tap New. To see the name of a button, tap and hold the stylus on the button. Drag the stylus off the button so that the command is not carried out. 14 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Pop-up Menus Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 With pop-up menus, you can quickly choose an action for an item. For example, you can use the pop-up menu in the contact list to quickly delete a contact, make a copy of a contact, or send an e-mail message to a con-

tact. The actions in the pop-up menus vary from program to program. To access a pop-up menu, tap and hold the stylus on the item name that you want to perform the action on. When the menu appears, lift the stylus, and tap the action you want to perform. Or tap anywhere outside the menu to close the menu without performing an action. Notifications Your 700 Series Computer reminds you in a variety of ways when you have something to do. For example, if you have set up an appointment in Calendar, a task with a due date in Tasks, or an alarm in Clock, you will be notified in any of the following ways:

S A message box appears on the screen. S A sound, which you can specify, is played. S A light flashes on your 700 Series Computer. S A vibrator resonates from the 700 Series Computer. To choose reminder types and sounds for your 700 Series Computer, tap Start Settings the Personal tab Sounds & Notifications. The options you choose here apply throughout the 700 Series Computer. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 15 Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 Enter Information on Your 700 Series Computer You have several options for entering new information:

S Use the input panel to enter typed text, either by using the soft key-

board or other input method. S Write directly on the screen. S Draw pictures on the screen. S Speak into your 700 Series Computer microphone to record a message. S Use Microsoft ActiveSync to synchronize or copy information from your desktop computer to your 700 Series Computer. For more infor-

mation on ActiveSync, see ActiveSync Help on your desktop computer. Use the input panel to enter information in any program on your 700 Series Computer. You can either type using the soft keyboard or write using Block Recognizer, Letter Recognizer, or Transcriber. In either case, the characters appear as typed text on the screen. To show or hide the input panel, tap the Input Panel button. Tap the arrow next to the Input Panel button to see your choices. 16 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 When you use the input panel, your 700 Series Computer anticipates the word you are typing or writing and displays it above the input panel. When you tap the displayed word, it is inserted into your text at the insertion point. The more you use your 700 Series Computer, the more words it learns to anticipate. Note: To change word suggestion options, such as the number of words suggested at one time, tap Start Settings the Personal tab Input the Word Completion tab. Typing With the Soft Keyboard 1 Tap the arrow next to the Input Panel button, and then Keyboard. 2 On the soft keyboard that is displayed, tap the keys with your stylus. Using Block Recognizer With Block Recognizer, you can input character strokes using the stylus that are similar to those used on other 700 Series Computers. 1 Tap the arrow next to the Input Panel button, then Block Recognizer. 2 Write a letter in the box. When you write a letter, it is converted to typed text that appears on the screen. For specific instructions on using Block Recognizer, with Block Recognizer open, tap the question mark next to the writing area. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 17 Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 Using Letter Recognizer With Letter Recognizer, you can write letters using the stylus just as you would on paper. 1 Tap the arrow next to the Input Panel button, then Letter Recognizer. 2 Write a letter in the box. When you write a letter, it is converted to typed text that appears on the screen. For specific instructions on using Letter Recognizer, with Letter Recognizer open, tap the question mark next to the writing area. Using Transcriber With Transcriber, you can write anywhere on the screen using the stylus just as you would on paper. Unlike Letter Recognizer and Block Recogniz-

er, you can write a sentence or more of information. Then, pause and let Transcriber change the written characters to typed characters. 1 Tap the arrow next to the Input Panel button, and then Transcriber. 2 Write anywhere on the screen. For specific instructions on using Transcriber, with Transcriber open, tap the question mark in the lower right hand corner of the screen. Selecting Typed Text If you want to edit or format typed text, you must select it first. S Drag the stylus across the text you want to select. You can cut, copy, and paste text by tapping and holding the selected words and then tapping an editing command on the pop-up menu, or by tapping the command on the Edit menu. 18 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 Writing on the Screen In any program that accepts writing, such as the Notes program, and in the Notes tab in Calendar, Contacts, and Tasks, you can use your stylus to write directly on the screen. Write the way you do on paper. You can edit and format what you have written and convert the information to text at a later time. S Tap the Pen button to switch to writing mode. This action displays lines on the screen to help you write. Note: Some programs that accept writing may not have the Pen button. See the documentation for that program to find out how to switch to writ-

ing mode. Selecting the Writing If you want to edit or format writing, you must select it first. 1 Tap and hold the stylus next to the text you want to select until the in-

sertion point appears. 2 Without lifting, drag the stylus across the text you want to select. If you accidentally write on the screen, tap Tools Undo and try again. You can also select text by tapping the Pen button to deselect it and then dragging the stylus across the screen. You can cut, copy, and paste written text in the same way you work with typed text: tap and hold the selected words and then tap an editing com-

mand on the pop-up menu, or tap the command on the Edit menu. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 19 Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 Converting Writing to Text S Tap Tools Recognize. If you want to convert only certain words, select them before tapping Rec-

ognize on the Tools menu (or tap and hold the selected words and then tap Recognize on the pop-up menu). If a word is not recognized, it is left as writing. 20 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 If the conversion is incorrect, you can select different words from a list of alternates or return to the original writing. To do so, tap and hold the in-

correct word (tap one word at a time). On the pop-up menu, tap Alterna-

tes. A menu with a list of alternate words appears. Tap the word you want to use, or tap the writing at the top of the menu to return to the original writing. Tips for getting good recognition:

S Write neatly. S Write on the lines and draw descenders below the line. Write the cross of the t and apostrophes below the top line so that they are not con-

fused with the word above. Write periods and commas above the line. S For better recognition, try increasing the zoom level to 300% using the Tools menu. S Write the letters of a word closely and leave big gaps between words so that the 700 Series Computer can easily tell where words begin and end. S Hyphenated words, foreign words that use special characters such as ac-

cents, and some punctuation cannot be converted. S If you add writing to a word to change it (such as changing a 3 to an 8) after you attempt to recognize the word, the writing you add will not be included if you attempt to recognize the writing again. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 21 Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 Drawing on the Screen You can draw on the screen in the same way that you write on the screen. The difference between writing and drawing on the screen is how you se-

lect items and how they can be edited. For example, selected drawings can be resized, while writing cannot. Creating a Drawing S Cross three ruled lines on your first stroke. A drawing box appears. Sub-

sequent strokes in or touching the drawing box become part of the dra-

wing. Drawings that do not cross three ruled lines will be treated as writing. Note: You may want to change the zoom level so that you can more easily work on or view your drawing. Tap Tools and then a zoom level. Selecting a Drawing If you want to edit or format a drawing, you must select it first. S Tap and hold the stylus on the drawing until the selection handle ap-

pears. To select multiple drawings, deselect the Pen button and then drag to select the drawings you want. You can cut, copy, and paste selected drawings by tapping and holding the selected drawing and then tapping an editing command on the pop-up menu, or by tapping the command on the Edit menu. To resize a drawing, make sure the Pen button is not selected, and drag a selection handle. 22 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Recording a Message Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 In any program where you can write or draw on the screen, you can also quickly capture thoughts, reminders, and phone numbers by recording a message. In Calendar, Tasks, and Contacts, you can include a recording in the Notes tab. In the Notes program, you can create a stand-alone record-

ing or include a recording in a written note. If you want to include the re-

cording in a note, open the note first. In the Inbox program, you can add a recording to an e-mail message. Creating a Recording 1 Hold your computer s microphone near your mouth or source of sound. 2 Press and hold the Record hardware button on your 700 Series Com-

puter until you hear a beep. 3 While holding down the Record button, make your recording. 4 To stop recording, release the Record button. Two beeps will sound. The new recording appears in the note list or as an embedded icon. Note: You can also make a recording by tapping the Record button on the Recording toolbar. To play a recording, tap it in the list or tap its icon in the note. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 23 Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 Using My Text When using Inbox or MSN Messenger, use My Text to quickly insert pre-

set or frequently used messages into the text entry area. To insert a mes-

sage, tap My Text and tap a message. Note: You can add text after inserting a My Text message before sending it. To edit a My Text message, in the Tools menu, tap Edit My Text Mes-

sages. Select the message you wish to edit and make desired changes. 24 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Finding and Organizing Information Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 The Find feature on your 700 Series Computer helps you quickly locate information. Tap Start Find. Enter the text you want to find, select a data type, and then tap Go to initiate the search. Note: To quickly find information that is taking up storage space on your 700 Series Computer, select Larger than 64 KB in Type. You can also use the File Explorer to find files on your 700 Series Comput-

er and to organize these files into folders. Tap Start Programs File Explorer. Note: You can move files in File Explorer by tapping and holding the item you want to move, and then tapping Cut or Copy and Paste on the pop-

up menu. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 25 Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 Customizing Your 700 Series Computer You can customize your 700 Series Computer by adjusting settings and installing additional software. Adjusting Settings You can adjust settings to suit the way you work. To see available options, tap Start Settings either the Personal tab or the System tab located at the bottom of the screen. You might want to adjust the following:

S Clock:

To change the time or to set alarms. S Menus:

To customize what appears on the Start menu, and to enable a pop-up menu from the New button. S Owner Information:

To enter your contact information. S Password:

To limit access to your 700 Series Computer. S Power:

To maximize battery life. S Today:

To customize the look and information displayed on the Today screen. Adding or Removing Programs Programs added to your 700 Series Computer at the factory are stored in ROM (Read Only Memory). You cannot remove this software, and you will never accidentally lose ROM contents. ROM programs can be up-

dated using special installation programs with a *.XIP extension. All other programs and data files added to your 700 Series Computer after factory installation are stored in RAM (Random Access Memory). You can install any program created for your 700 Series Computer, as long as your 700 Series Computer has enough memory. The most popular place to find software for your 700 Series Computer is on the Pocket PC Web site (http://www.microsoft.com/mobile/pocketpc). Adding Programs Using ActiveSync You will need to install the appropriate software for your 700 Series Com-

puter on your desktop computer before installing it on your 700 Series Computer. 1 Determine your 700 Series Computer and processor type so that you know which version of the software to install. Tap Start Settings the System tab About the Version tab, then make a note of the information in Processor. 2 Download the program to your desktop computer (or insert the CD or disk that contains the program into your desktop computer). You may see a single *.XIP, *.EXE, or *.ZIP file, a SETUP.EXE file, or several versions of files for different 700 Series Computer types and processors. Be sure to select the program designed for the Pocket PC and your 700 Series Computer processor type. 26 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 3 Read any installation instructions, Read Me files, or documentation that comes with the program. Many programs provide special installation instructions. 4 Connect your 700 Series Computer and desktop computer. 5 Double-click the *.EXE file. S If the file is an installer, the installation wizard will begin. Follow the directions on the screen. Once the software has been installed on your desktop computer, the installer will automatically transfer the soft-

ware to your 700 Series Computer. S If the file is not an installer, you will see an error message stating that the program is valid but it is designed for a different type of comput-

er. You will need to move this file to your 700 Series Computer. If you cannot find any installation instructions for the program in the Read Me file or documentation, use ActiveSync Explore to copy the program file to the Program Files folder on your 700 Series Comput-

er. For more information on copying files using ActiveSync, see Acti-

veSync Help. Once installation is complete, tap Start Programs, and then the pro-

gram icon to switch to it. Adding a Program Directly from the Internet 1 Determine your 700 Series Computer and processor type so that you know which version of the software to install. Tap Start Settings the System tab About the Version tab, then make a note of the information in Processor. 2 Download the program to your 700 Series Computer straight from the Internet using Pocket Internet Explorer. You may see a single *.XIP,

*.EXE, or *.ZIP file, a SETUP.EXE file, or several versions of files for different 700 Series Computer types and processors. Be sure to select the program designed for the Pocket PC and your 700 Series Computer processor type. 3 Read any installation instructions, Read Me files, or documentation that comes with the program. Many programs provide installation instruc-

tions. 4 Tap the file, such as a *.XIP or *.EXE file. The installation wizard will begin. Follow the directions on the screen. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 27 Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 Adding a Program to the Start Menu Tap Start Settings Menus the Start Menu tab, and then the check box for the program. If you do not see the program listed, you can either use File Explorer on the 700 Series Computer to move the program to the Start Menu folder, or use ActiveSync on the desktop computer to create a shortcut to the program and place the shortcut in the Start Menu folder. S Using File Explorer on the 700 Series Computer:

Tap Start Programs File Explorer, and locate the program (tap the folder list, labeled My Documents by default, and then My Device to see a list of all folders on the 700 Series Computer). Tap and hold the program and tap Cut on the pop-up menu. Open the Start Menu fold-

er located in the Windows folder, tap and hold a blank area of the win-

dow, and tap Paste on the pop-up menu. The program will now appear on the Start menu. For more information on using File Explorer, see Finding and Organizing Information on page 25. S Using ActiveSync on the desktop computer:

Use the Explorer in ActiveSync to explore your 700 Series Computer files and locate the program. Right-click the program, and then click Create Shortcut. Move the shortcut to the Start Menu folder in the Windows folder. The shortcut now appears on the Start menu. For more information, see ActiveSync Help. Removing Programs S Tap Start Settings the System tab Remove Programs. If the program does not appear in the list of installed programs, use File Explorer on your 700 Series Computer to locate the program, tap and hold the program, and then tap Delete on the pop-up menu. 28 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Microsoft ActiveSync Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 Visit the following Microsoft Web site for the latest in updates, technical information, and samples:

S http://www.microsoft.com/mobile/pocketpc/downloads/activesync.asp Using Microsoft ActiveSync, you can synchronize the information on your desktop computer with the information on your 700 Series Computer. Synchronization compares the data on your 700 Series Computer with your desktop computer and updates both computers with the most recent information. For example:

S Keep Pocket Outlook data up-to-date by synchronizing your 700 Series Computer with Microsoft Outlook data on your desktop computer. S Synchronize Microsoft Word and Microsoft Excel files between your 700 Series Computer and desktop computer. Your files are automatically converted to the correct format Note: By default, ActiveSync does not automatically synchronize all types of information. Use ActiveSync options to turn synchronization on and off for specific information types. With ActiveSync, you can also:

S Back up and restore your 700 Series Computer data. S Copy (rather than synchronize) files between your 700 Series Computer and desktop computer. S Control when synchronization occurs by selecting a synchronization mode. For example, you can synchronize continually while connected to your desktop computer or only when you choose the synchronize com-

mand. S Select which information types are synchronized and control how much data is synchronized. For example, you can choose how many weeks of past appointments you want synchronized. Before you begin synchronization, install ActiveSync on your desktop computer from the Pocket PC Companion CD. For more information on installing ActiveSync, see your Quick Start card. ActiveSync is already installed on your 700 Series Computer. After installation is complete, the ActiveSync Setup Wizard helps you con-

nect your 700 Series Computer to your desktop computer, set up a part-

nership so you can synchronize information between your 700 Series Computer and your desktop computer, and customize your synchroniza-

tion settings. Your first synchronization process will automatically begin when you finish using the wizard. After your first synchronization, take a look at Calendar, Contacts, and Tasks on your 700 Series Computer. You will notice that information you have stored in Microsoft Outlook on your desktop computer has been copied to your 700 Series Computer, and you did not have to type a word. Disconnect your 700 Series Computer from your computer and you are ready to go!

700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 29 Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 Once you have set up ActiveSync and completed the first synchronization process, you can initiate synchronization from your 700 Series Computer. To switch to ActiveSync on your 700 Series Computer, tap Start ActiveSync. Note that if you have a wireless LAN card, you can synchronize remotely from your 700 Series Computer. For information about using ActiveSync on your desktop computer, start ActiveSync on your desktop computer, and then see ActiveSync Help. For more information about ActiveSync on your 700 Series Computer, switch to ActiveSync, then tap Start Help. 30 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Microsoft Pocket Outlook Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 Note: The Professional Edition of Microsoft Pocket Outlook does not in-

clude a spell checker. Microsoft Pocket Outlook includes Calendar, Contacts, Tasks, Inbox, and Notes. You can use these programs individually or together. For example, e-mail addresses stored in Contacts can be used to address e-mail messages in Inbox. Using ActiveSync, you can synchronize information in Microsoft Outlook or Microsoft Exchange on your desktop computer with your 700 Series Computer. You can also synchronize this information directly with a Microsoft Exchange server. Each time you synchronize, ActiveSync compares the changes you made on your 700 Series Computer and desk-

top computer or server and updates both computers with the latest in-

formation. For information on using ActiveSync, see ActiveSync Help on the desktop computer. You can switch to any of these programs by tapping them on the Start menu. Calendar: Scheduling Appointments and Meetings Use Calendar to schedule appointments, including meetings and other events. You can check your appointments in one of several views (Agenda, Day, Week, Month, and Year) and easily switch views by using the View menu. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 31 Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 Note: You can customize the Calendar display, such as changing the first day of the week, by tapping Options on the Tools menu. Creating an Appointment 1 If you are in Day or Week view, tap the desired date and time for the appointment. 2 Tap New. 3 Using the input panel, enter a description and a location. Tap first to select the field. 4 If needed, tap the date and time to change them. 5 Enter other desired information. You will need to hide the input panel to see all available fields. 6 To add notes, tap the Notes tab. You can enter text, draw, or create a recording. For more information on creating notes, see Notes: Capturing Thoughts and Ideas on page 40. 7 When finished, tap OK to return to the calendar. Note: If you select Remind me in an appointment, your 700 Series Com-

puter will remind you according to the options set in Start Settings the Personal tab Sounds & Reminders. 32 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 Using the Summary Screen When you tap an appointment in Calendar, a summary screen is displayed. To change the appointment, tap Edit. Creating Meeting Requests You can use Calendar to set up meetings with users of Outlook or Pocket Outlook. The meeting request will be created automatically and sent either when you synchronize Inbox or when you connect to your e-mail server. Indicate how you want meeting requests sent by tapping Tools Options. If you send and receive e-mail messages through ActiveSync, select ActiveSync. Scheduling a Meeting 1 Create an appointment. 2 In the appointment details, hide the input panel, and then tap Attendees. 3 From the list of e-mail addresses you have entered in Contacts, select the meeting attendees. The meeting notice is created automatically and placed in the Outbox folder. For more information on sending and receiving meeting requests, see Cal-

endar Help and Inbox Help on the 700 Series Computer. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 33 Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 Contacts: Tracking Friends and Colleagues Contacts maintains a list of your friends and colleagues so that you can easily find the information you are looking for, whether you are at home or on the road. Using the 700 Series Computer infrared (IR) port, you can quickly share Contacts information with other 700 Series Computer users. Note: To change the way information is displayed in the list, tap Tools Options. Creating a Contact 1 Tap New. 2 Using the input panel, enter a name and other contact information. You will need to scroll down to see all available fields. 3 To assign the contact to a category, scroll to and tap Categories and se-

lect a category from the list. In the contact list, you can display contacts by category. 4 To add notes, tap the Notes tab. You can enter text, draw, or create a recording. For more information on creating notes, see Notes: Capturing Thoughts and Ideas on page 40. 34 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 5 When finished, tap OK to return to the contact list. Finding a Contact There are four ways to find a contact:

S In the contact list, enter a contact name in the box under the navigation bar. To show all contacts again, clear text from the box or tap the button to the right of the box. S In the contact list, tap the category list (labeled All Contacts by default) and select the type of contact that you want displayed. To show all con-

tacts again, select All Contacts. To view a contact not assigned to a cate-

gory, select None. S To view the names of companies your contacts work for, in the contact list, tap View By Company. The number of contacts that work for that company will be displayed to the right of the company name. S Tap Start Find, enter the contact name, select Contacts for the type, and then tap Go. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 35 Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 Using the Summary Screen When you tap a contact in the contact list, a summary screen is displayed. To change the contact information, tap Edit. 36 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Tasks: Keeping a To Do List Use Tasks to keep track of what you have to do. Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 Note: To change the way information is displayed in the list, tap Tools Options. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 37 Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 Creating a Task 1 Tap New. 2 Using the input panel, enter a description. 3 You can enter a start date and due date or enter other information by first tapping the field. If the input panel is open, you will need to hide it to see all available fields. 4 To assign the task to a category, tap Categories and select a category from the list. In the task list, you can display tasks by category. 5 To add notes, tap the Notes tab. You can enter text, draw, or create a recording. For more information on creating notes, see Notes: Capturing Thoughts and Ideas on page 40. 6 When finished, tap OK to return to the task list. Note: To quickly create a task with only a subject, tap Entry Bar on the Tools menu. Then, tap Tap here to add a new task and enter your task information. 38 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 Using the Summary Screen When you tap a task in the task list, a summary screen is displayed. To change the task, tap Edit. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 39 Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 Notes: Capturing Thoughts and Ideas Quickly capture thoughts, reminders, ideas, drawings, and phone numbers with Notes. You can create a written note or a recording. You can also in-

clude a recording in a note. If a note is open when you create the record-

ing, it will be included in the note as an icon. If the note list is displayed, it will be created as a stand-alone recording. 40 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 Creating a Note 1 Tap New. 2 Create your note by writing, drawing, typing, and recording. For more information about using the input panel, writing and drawing on the screen, and creating recordings, see Basic Skills on page 11. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 41 Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 Inbox: Sending and Receiving E-mail Messages Use Inbox to send and receive e-mail messages in either of these ways:

S Synchronize e-mail messages with Microsoft Exchange or Microsoft Outlook on your desktop computer. S Send and receive e-mail messages by connecting directly to an e-mail server through an Internet Service Provider (ISP) or a network. Synchronizing E-mail Messages E-mail messages can be synchronized as part of the general synchronization process. You will need to enable Inbox synchronization in ActiveSync. For information on enabling Inbox synchronization, see ActiveSync Help on the desktop computer. During synchronization:

S Messages are copied from the mail folders of Exchange or Outlook on your desktop computer to the ActiveSync folder in Inbox on your 700 Series Computer. By default, you will receive messages from the past three days only, the first 100 lines of each message, and file attachments of less than 100 KB in size. S E-mail messages in the Outbox folder on your 700 Series Computer are transferred to Exchange or Outlook, and then sent from those pro-

grams. S E-mail messages in subfolders must be selected in ActiveSync on your desktop computer in order to be transferred. Connecting Directly to an E-mail Server In addition to synchronizing e-mail messages with your desktop computer, you can send and receive e-mail messages by connecting to an e-mail server using a modem or network card connected to your 700 Series Computer. You will need to set up a remote connection to a network or an ISP, and a connection to your e-mail server. For more information, see Getting Con-

nected on page 67. When you connect to the e-mail server, new messages are downloaded to the 700 Series Computer Inbox folder, messages in the 700 Series Com-

puter Outbox folder are sent, and messages that have been deleted on the e-mail server are removed from the 700 Series Computer Inbox folder. Messages that you receive directly from an e-mail server are linked to your e-mail server rather than your desktop computer. When you delete a mes-

sage on your 700 Series Computer, it is also deleted from the e-mail server the next time you connect based on the settings selected in ActiveSync. You can work online or offline. When working online, you read and re-

spond to messages while connected to the e-mail server. Messages are sent as soon as you tap Send, which saves space on your 700 Series Computer. When working offline, once you have downloaded new message headers or partial messages, you can disconnect from the e-mail server and then de-

cide which messages to download completely. The next time you connect, Inbox downloads the complete messages you have marked for retrieval and sends the messages you have composed. 42 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 Using the Message List Messages you receive are displayed in the message list. By default, the most recently received messages are displayed first in the list. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 43 Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 When you receive a message, tap it to open it. Unread messages are dis-

played in bold. When you connect to your e-mail server or synchronize with your desktop computer, by default, you will receive messages from the last five days only, the first 100 lines of each new message, and file attachments of less than 100 KB in size. The original messages remain on the e-mail server or your desktop computer. You can mark the messages that you want to retrieve in full during your next synchronization or e-mail server connection. In the message list, tap and hold the message you want to retrieve. On the pop-up menu, tap Mark for Download. The icons in the Inbox message list give you visual indications of message status. You specify your downloading preferences when you set up the service or select your synchronization options. You can change them at any time:

S Change options for Inbox synchronization using ActiveSync options. For more information, see ActiveSync Help. S Change options for direct e-mail server connections in Inbox on your 700 Series Computer. Tap Tools Options the Service tab, then tap the service you want to change. Tap and hold the service and select Delete to remove a service. 44 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 Composing Messages To compose a message:

1 Tap New. 2 In the To field, enter an e-mail or SMS address of one or more recipi-

ents, separating them with a semicolon, or select a name from the con-

tact list by tapping the Address Book button. All e-mail addresses en-

tered in the e-mail fields in Contacts appear in the Address Book. 3 Compose your message. To enter preset or frequently used messages, tap My Text and select a message. 4 Tap Send when you have finished the message. If you are working of-

fline, the message is moved to the Outbox folder and will be sent the next time you connect. If you are sending an SMS message and want to know if it was received, tap Edit Options Request SMS text message delivery notification before sending the message. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 45 Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 Managing E-mail Messages and Folders By default, messages are displayed in one of five folders for each service you have created: Inbox, Deleted Items, Drafts, Outbox, and Sent Items. The Deleted Items folder contains messages that have been deleted on the 700 Series Computer. The behavior of the Deleted and Sent Items folders depends on the options you have chosen. In the message list, tap Tools Options the Message tab, then select your options. If you want to organize messages into additional folders, tap Tools Manage Folders to create new folders. To move a message to another fold-

er, in the message list, tap and hold the message and then tap Move to on the pop-up menu. Folder Behavior With a Direct Connection to an E-mail Server The behavior of the folders you create depends on whether you are using ActiveSync, SMS, POP3, or IMAP4. S If you use ActiveSync:

E-mail messages in the Inbox folder in Outlook will automatically be synchronized with your 700 Series Computer. You can select to syn-

chronize additional folders by designating them for ActiveSync. The folders you create and the messages you move will then be mirrored on the server. For example, if you move two messages from the Inbox fold-

er to a folder named Family, and you have designated Family for syn-

chronization, the server creates a copy of the Family folder and copies the messages into that folder. You can then read the messages while away from your desktop computer. S If you use SMS:

Messages are stored in the Inbox folder. S If you use POP3:

and you move e-mail messages to a folder you created, the link is broken between the messages on the 700 Series Computer and their copies on the mail server. The next time you connect, the mail server will see that the messages are missing from the 700 Series Computer Inbox and de-

lete them from the server. This prevents you from having duplicate cop-

ies of a message, but it also means that you will no longer have access to messages that you move to folders created from anywhere except the 700 Series Computer. S If you use IMAP4:

The folders you create and the e-mail messages you move are mirrored on the server. Therefore, messages are available to you anytime you con-

nect to your mail server, whether it is from your 700 Series Computer or desktop computer. This synchronization of folders occurs whenever you connect to your mail server, create new folders, or rename/delete folders when connected. 46 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Companion Programs Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 Pocket Word The companion programs consist of Microsoft Pocket Word, Microsoft Pocket Excel, Windows Media Player for Pocket PC, and Microsoft Reader. To switch to a companion program on your 700 Series Computer, tap Start Programs, then tap the program name. Pocket Word works with Microsoft Word on your desktop computer to give you easy access to copies of your documents. You can create new doc-

uments on your 700 Series Computer, or you can copy documents from your desktop computer to your 700 Series Computer. Synchronize docu-

ments between your desktop computer and your 700 Series Computer so that you have the most up-to-date content in both locations. Creating a Document Use Pocket Word to create documents, such as letters, meeting minutes, and trip reports. To create a new file, tap Start Programs Pocket Word New. A blank document appears. Or, if you have selected a tem-

plate for new documents in the Options dialog box, that template appears with appropriate text and formatting already provided. You can open only one document at a time; when you open a second document, you will be asked to save the first. You can save a document you create or edit in a va-

riety of formats, including Word (.DOC), Pocket Word (.PSW), Rich Text Format (.RTF), and Plain Text (.TXT). 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 47 Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 Pocket Word contains a list of the files stored on your 700 Series Comput-

er. Tap a file in the list to open it. To delete, make copies of, and send files, tap and hold a file in the list. Then, select the appropriate action on the pop-up menu. You can enter information in Pocket Word in one of four modes (typing, writing, drawing, and recording), which are displayed on the View menu. Each mode has its own toolbar, which you can show and hide by tapping the Show/Hide Toolbar button on the command bar. Note: You can change the zoom magnification by tapping View Zoom, then select the percentage you want. Select a higher percentage to enter text and a lower one to see more of your document. If you are opening a Word document created on a desktop computer, select Wrap to Window on the View menu so that you can see the entire document. 48 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 Typing Mode Using the input panel, enter typed text into the document. For more infor-

mation on entering typed text, see Basic Skills on page 11. To format existing text and to edit text, first select the text. You can select text as you do in a Word document, using your stylus instead of the mouse to drag through the text you want to select. You can search a document to find text by tapping Edit Find/Replace. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 49 Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 Writing Mode In writing mode, use your stylus to write directly on the screen. Ruled lines are displayed as a guide, and the zoom magnification is greater than in typing mode to allow you to write more easily. For more information on writing and selecting writing, see Basic Skills on page 11. Note: If you cross three ruled lines in a single stylus stroke, the writing becomes a drawing, and can be edited and manipulated as described in Drawing Mode on the next page. Written words are converted to graphics (metafiles) when a Pocket Word document is converted to a Word document on your desktop computer. 50 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 Drawing Mode In drawing mode, use your stylus to draw on the screen. Grid lines appear as a guide. When you lift your stylus off the screen after the first stroke, you will see a drawing box indicating the boundaries of the drawing. Every subsequent stroke within or touching the drawing box becomes part of the drawing. For more information on drawing and selecting drawings, see Basic Skills on page 11. Recording Mode In recording mode, embed a recording into your document. Recordings are saved as .WAV files. For more information on recording, see Basic Skills on page 11. For more information on using Pocket Word, tap Start Help. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 51 Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 Pocket Excel Pocket Excel works with Microsoft Excel on your desktop computer to give you easy access to copies of your workbooks. You can create new workbooks on your 700 Series Computer, or you can copy workbooks from your desktop computer to your 700 Series Computer. Synchronize workbooks between your desktop computer and your 700 Series Comput-

er so that you have the most up-to-date content in both locations. Creating a Workbook Use Pocket Excel to create workbooks, such as expense reports and mileage logs. To create a new file, tap Start Programs Pocket Excel New. A blank workbook appears. Or, if you have selected a template for new workbooks in the Options dialog box, that template appears with appropriate text and formatting already provided. You can open only one workbook at a time; when you open a second workbook, you will be asked to save the first. You can save a workbook you create or edit in a variety of formats, including Pocket Excel (.PXL) and Excel (.XLS). Pocket Excel contains a list of the files stored on your 700 Series Comput-

er. Tap a file in the list to open it. To delete, make copies of, and send files, tap and hold a file in the list. Then select the appropriate action from the pop-up menu. Pocket Excel provides fundamental spreadsheet tools, such as formulas, functions, sorting, and filtering. To display the toolbar, tap View Toolbar. 52 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 Note: If your workbook contains sensitive information, you can protect it with a password. To do so, open the workbook, tap Edit Password. Ev-

ery time you open the workbook, you will need to enter the password, so choose one that is easy for you to remember but hard for others to guess. Tips for Working in Pocket Excel Note the following when working in large worksheets in Pocket Excel:

S View in full-screen mode to see as much of your worksheet as possible. Tap View Full Screen. To exit full-screen mode, tap Restore. S Show and hide window elements. Tap View and then tap the elements you want to show or hide. S Freeze panes on a worksheet. First select the cell where you want to freeze panes. Tap View Freeze Panes. You might want to freeze the top and leftmost panes in a worksheet to keep row and column labels visible as you scroll through a sheet. S Split panes to view different areas of a large worksheet. Tap View Split. Then drag the split bar to where you want it. To remove the split, tap View Remove Split. S Show and hide rows and columns. To hide a hidden row or column, se-

lect a cell in the row or column you want to hide. Then tap Format , Row or Column Hide. To show a hidden row or column, tap Tools Go To, and then type a reference that is in the hidden row or co-

lumn. Then tap Format Row or Column Unhide. For more information on using Pocket Excel, tap Start Help. Note: MSN Messenger is only available on the Premium Edition of Pocket PC 2002. MSN Messenger on your 700 Series Computer is an instant messaging program that lets you:

S See who is online. S Send and receive instant messages. S Have instant message conversations with groups of contacts. To use MSN Messenger, you must have a Microsoft Passport account or a Microsoft Exchange e-mail account. You must have a Passport to use MSN Messenger Service. If you have a Hotmail or MSN account, you already have a Passport. Once you have obtained either a Microsoft Passport or a Microsoft Exchange account, you are ready to set up your account. S Sign up for a Microsoft Passport account at http://www.passport.com. S Get a free Microsoft Hotmail e-mail address at http://www.hotmail.com. To switch to MSN Messenger, tap Start Programs MSN Messenger. MSN Messenger 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 53 Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 Setting Up Before you can connect, you must enter Passport or Exchange account in-

formation. To set up an account and sign in:

1 In the Tools menu, tap Options. 2 In the Accounts tab, enter your Passport or Exchange account informa-

tion. 3 To sign in, tap the sign-in screen and enter your e-mail address and pass-

word. Note: If you already use MSN Messenger on your desktop computer, your contacts will show up on your 700 Series Computer without being added again. Working with Contacts The MSN Messenger window shows all of your messenger contacts at a glance, divided into Online and Not Online categories. From this view, while connected, you can chat, send e-mail, block the contact from chat-

ting with you, or delete contacts from your list using the pop-up menu. Note: To see others online without being seen, in the Tools menu, tap My Status Appear Offline. If you block a contact, you will appear offline but will remain on the blocked contact s list. To unblock a contact, tap and hold the contact, then tap Unblock on the pop-up menu. 54 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 Chatting with Contacts Tap a contact name to open a chat window. Enter your message in the text entry area at the bottom of the screen, or tap My Text to enter a preset message, and tap Send. To invite another contact to a multi-user chat, in the Tools menu, tap Invite and tap the contact you want to invite. Note: To switch back to the main window without closing a chat, tap the Contacts button. To revert back to your chat window, tap Chats and select the person whom you were chatting with. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 55 Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 To know if the contact you are chatting with is responding, look for the message under the text entry area. For more information on using MSN Messenger, tap Start Help. 56 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 Windows Media Player for Pocket PC Use Microsoft Windows Media Player for Pocket PC to play digital audio and video files that are stored on your 700 Series Computer or on a net-

work. To switch to Windows Media Player for Pocket PC, tap Start Programs Windows Media. Use Microsoft Windows Media Player on your desktop computer to copy digital audio and video files to your Pocket PC. You can play Windows Media and MP3 files on your Pocket PC. For more information about using Windows Media Player for Pocket PC, tap Start Help. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 57 Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 Microsoft Reader Use Microsoft Reader to read eBooks on your 700 Series Computer. Download books to your desktop computer from your favorite eBook Web site. Then, use ActiveSync to copy the book files to your activated 700 Se-

ries Computer. The books appear in the Reader Library, where you can tap them in the list to open them. Each book consists of a cover page, an op-

tional table of contents, and the pages of the book. You can:

S Page through the book by using the Up/Down control on your 700 Se-

ries Computer or by tapping the page number on each page. S Annotate the book with highlighting, bookmarks, notes, and drawings. S Search for text and look up definitions for words. The Guidebook contains all the information you will need to use the soft-

ware. To open the Guidebook, tap Help on the Reader command bar. Or, on a book page, tap and hold on the book title, and then tap Help on the pop-up menu. To switch to Microsoft Reader, tap Start Programs Microsoft Reader. Getting Books on Your 700 Series Computer You can download book files from the Web. Just visit your favorite eBook retailer and follow the instructions to download the book files. Sample books and a dictionary are also included in the MSReader folder in the Extras folder on the Pocket PC Companion CD. Use ActiveSync to download the files from your desktop computer to your activated mobile computer as described in the Read Me file in the MSReader folder. 58 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 Using the Library The Library is your Reader home page; it displays a list of all books stored on your 700 Series Computer or storage card. To open the Library:

1 On the Reader command bar, tap Library. 2 On a book page, tap the book title, then tap Library on the pop-up menu. 3 To open a book, tap its title in the Library list. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 59 Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 Reading a Book Each book consists of a cover page, an optional table of contents, and the pages of the book. Navigation options are listed in the bottom portion of the cover page. The first time you open a book, you will probably want to go to the first page or to the table of contents, if there is one. Subsequently, whenever you open the book, you will be automatically taken to the last page read. In addition to the text, each book page includes a page number and book title. You can also page through a book by using the Up/Down control on your 700 Series Computer. 60 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 Using Reader Features Reading a book electronically gives you several options not available with paper books. These options are available from any book page. Select text by dragging across the text on the page. Then, tap an option on the pop-up menu, as described here:

S Searching for Text Find text in a book by tapping Find on the pop-up menu. Enter the word you want to search for, and tap the desired Find option. Reader highlights found text on the page. To close Find, tap outside the box. To return to your original page, tap the title and then tap Return on the pop-up menu. S Copying Text You can copy text from books that support this feature into any pro-

gram that accepts text. On a book page, select the text you want to copy. Then, tap Copy Text on the pop-up menu. The text can be pasted into the program of your choice. S Adding Bookmarks When you add a bookmark to a book, a color-coded bookmark icon appears in the right margin. You can add multiple bookmarks to a book. Then, from anywhere in the book, tap the bookmark icon to go to the bookmarked page. S Highlighting Text When you highlight text, it appears with a colored background. S Attaching Notes to Text When you attach a note to text, you enter the text in a notepad that ap-

pears on top of the book page. A Note icon will display in the left mar-

gin. To show or hide the note, tap the icon. S Adding Drawings When you add a drawing, a Drawing icon appears in the bottom-left corner of the page, and drawing tools appear across the bottom of the page. Draw by dragging your stylus. S Annotations Index To see a list of a book s annotations, including bookmarks, highlights, text notes, and drawings, tap Annotations Index on the book s cover page. You can tap an entry in the list to go to the annotated page. Removing a Book When you finish reading a book, you can delete it to conserve space on your 700 Series Computer. If a copy of the book is stored on your desktop computer, you can download it again at any time. To remove a book from your 700 Series Computer, tap and hold the title in the Library list, and then tap Delete on the pop-up menu. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 61 Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 Pocket Internet Explorer Note: The Professional Edition of Pocket Internet Explorer does not sup-

port WAP pages. Use Microsoft Pocket Internet Explorer to view Web or WAP pages in ei-

ther of these ways:

S During synchronization with your desktop computer, download your favorite links and mobile favorites that are stored in the Mobile Favor-

ites subfolder in Internet Explorer on the desktop computer. S Connect to an ISP or network and browse the Web. To do this, you will need to create the connection first, as described in Getting Connected on page 67. When connected to an ISP or network, you can also download files and programs from the Internet or intranet. To switch to Pocket Internet Explorer, tap Start Internet Explorer. The Mobile Favorites Folder Favorite Links Mobile Favorites Only items stored in the Mobile Favorites subfolder in the Favorites folder in Internet Explorer on your desktop computer will be synchronized with your 700 Series Computer. This folder was created automatically when you installed ActiveSync. During synchronization, the list of favorite links in the Mobile Favorites folder on your desktop computer is synchronized with Pocket Internet Ex-

plorer on your 700 Series Computer. Both computers are updated with changes made to either list each time you synchronize. Unless you mark the favorite link as a mobile favorite, only the link will be downloaded to your 700 Series Computer, and you will need to connect to your ISP or network to view the content. For more information on synchronization, see ActiveSync Help on the desktop computer. If you are using Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0 or later on your desktop computer, you can download mobile favorites to your 700 Series Comput-

er. Synchronizing mobile favorites downloads Web content to your 700 Series Computer so that you can view pages while you are disconnected from your ISP and desktop computer. Use the Internet Explorer plug-in installed with ActiveSync to create mo-

bile favorites quickly. To create a mobile favorite:

1 In Internet Explorer on your desktop computer, click Tools Create Mobile Favorite. 2 To change the link name, enter a new name in the Name box. 3 Optionally, in Update, select a desired update schedule. 62 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 4 Click OK. Internet Explorer downloads the latest version of the page to your desktop computer. 5 If you want to download the pages that are linked to the mobile favorite you just created, in Internet Explorer on the desktop computer, right-click the mobile favorite just created and then click Properties. In the Download tab, specify the number of links deep you want to download. To conserve 700 Series Computer memory, go only one level deep. 6 Synchronize your 700 Series Computer and desktop computer. Mobile favorites that are stored in the Mobile Favorites folder in Internet Ex-

plorer are downloaded to your 700 Series Computer. Note: If you did not specify an update schedule in step 3 above, you will need to manually download content to keep the information updated on your desktop computer and 700 Series Computer. Before synchronizing with your 700 Series Computer, in Internet Explorer on your desktop computer, click Tools Synchronize. You will see the last time content was downloaded to the desktop computer, and you can manually download content if needed. You can add a button to the Internet Explorer toolbar for creating mobile favorites. In Internet Explorer on your desktop computer, click View Toolbars Customize. Mobile favorites take up storage memory on your 700 Series Computer. To minimize the amount of memory used:

S In the settings for the Favorites information, type in ActiveSync options, turn off pictures and sounds, or stop some mobile favorites from being downloaded to the 700 Series Computer. For more information, see Ac-

tiveSync Help. S Limit the number of downloaded linked pages. In Internet Explorer on the desktop computer, right-click the mobile favorite you want to change and then Properties. In the Download tab, specify 0 or 1 for the number of linked pages you want to download. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 63 Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 Using AvantGo Channels AvantGo is a free interactive service that gives you access to personalized content and thousands of popular Web sites. You subscribe to AvantGo channels directly from your 700 Series Computer. Then, you synchronize your 700 Series Computer and desktop computer, or connect to the Inter-

net to download the content. For more information, visit the AvantGo Web site. To sign up for AvantGo:

1 In ActiveSync options on the desktop computer, turn on synchroniza-

tion for the AvantGo information type. 2 In Pocket Internet Explorer on your 700 Series Computer, tap the Fa-

vorites button to display your list of favorites. 3 Tap the AvantGo Channels link. 4 Tap the Activate button. 5 Follow the directions on the screen. You will need to synchronize your 700 Series Computer with your desktop computer and then tap the My Channels button to complete the AvantGo setup. When synchronization is complete, tap the AvantGo Channels link in your list of favorites to see a few of the most popular channels. To add or remove channels, tap the Add or Remove link. 64 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 Using Pocket Internet Explorer You can use Pocket Internet Explorer to browse mobile favorites and chan-

nels that have been downloaded to your 700 Series Computer without connecting to the Internet. You can also connect to the Internet through an ISP or a network connection and browse the Web. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 65 Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 Viewing Mobile Favorites and Channels 1 Tap the Favorites button to display your list of favorites. 2 Tap the page you want to view. You will see the page that was downloaded the last time you synchronized with your desktop computer. If the page is not on your 700 Series Com-

puter, the favorite will be dimmed. You will need to synchronize with your desktop computer again to download the page to your 700 Series Comput-

er, or connect to the Internet to view the page. Browsing the Internet 1 Set up a connection to your ISP or corporate network using Connec-

tions, as described in Getting Connected on page 67. 2 To connect and start browsing, do one of the following:

S Tap the Favorites button, and then tap the favorite you want to view. S Tap View Address Bar. In the address bar that appears at the top of the screen, enter the Web address you want to visit and then tap Go. Tap the arrow to choose from previously entered addresses. Note: To add a favorite link while using the 700 Series Computer, go to the page you want to add, tap and hold on the page, and tap Add to Favorites. 66 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Getting Connected Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 You can use your 700 Series Computer to exchange information with oth-

er 700 Series Computers as well as your desktop computer, a network, or the Internet. You have the following connection options:

S Use the infrared (IR) port on your 700 Series Computer to send and receive files between two 700 Series Computers. If this is the method you want to use, see Transferring Items Using Infrared below. S Connect to your ISP. Once connected, you can send and receive e-mail messages by using Inbox and view Web or WAP pages by using Pocket Internet Explorer. The communication software for creating an ISP con-

nection is already installed on your 700 Series Computer. Your service provider will provide software needed to install other services, such as paging and fax services. If this is the method you want to use, see Con-

necting to an Internet Service Provider on page 68. S Connect to the network at your company or organization where you work. Once connected, you can send and receive e-mail messages by using Inbox, view Web or WAP pages by using Pocket Internet Explorer, and synchronize with your desktop computer. If this is the method you want to use, see Connecting to Work on page 70. S Connect to your desktop computer to synchronize remotely. Once con-

nected, you can synchronize information such as your Pocket Outlook information. If this is the method you want to use, see ActiveSync Help on your desktop computer or Connections Help on the 700 Series Computer. Transferring Items Using Infrared Using infrared (IR), you can send and receive information, such as con-

tacts and appointments, between two 700 Series Computers. Sending Information 1 Switch to the program where you created the item you want to send and locate the item in the list. 2 Align the IR ports so that they are unobstructed and within a close range. 3 Tap and hold the item, and tap Beam Item on the pop-up menu. Note: You can also send items, but not folders, from File Explorer. Tap and hold the item you want to send, and then tap Beam File on the pop-

up menu. Receiving Information 1 Align the IR ports so that they are unobstructed and within a close range. 2 Have the owner of the other 700 Series Computer send the information to you. Your 700 Series Computer will automatically receive it. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 67 Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 Connecting to an Internet Service Provider You can connect to your ISP, and use the connection to send and receive e-mail messages and view Web or WAP pages. You can connect to your ISP in one of two ways:

S Create a modem connection. If this is the method you want to use, see Creating a Modem Connection to an ISP below. S Use an Ethernet card and a net tap to connect to the network. If this is the method you want to use, see Creating an Ethernet Connection to an ISP on page 69. Creating a Modem Connection to an ISP 1 Obtain the following information from your ISP. Some ISPs require in-

formation in front of the user name, such as MSN/username. S ISP dial-up access telephone number S User name S Password S TCP/IP settings 2 If your 700 Series Computer does not have a built-in modem, install a modem card, or use or use a NULL modem cable and appropriate adapters to connect an external modem to your 700 Series Computer through the serial port. 3 Tap Start Settings the Connections tab Connections. Under The Internet settings, select Internet Settings Modify. 4 In the Modem tab, tap New. 5 Enter a name for the connection, such as ISP Connection. 6 In Select a modem list, select your modem type. If your modem type does not appear, try reinserting the modem card. If you are using an ex-

ternal modem that is connected to your 700 Series Computer with a cable, select Hayes Compatible on COM1. 7 You should not need to change any settings in Advanced. Most ISPs now use a dynamically-assigned address. If the ISP you are connecting to does not use a dynamically-assigned address, tap Advanced the TCP/IP tab, then enter the address. When finished, tap OK Next. 8 Enter the access phone number, and tap Next. 9 Select other desired options, and tap Finish. 10 In the Dialing Locations tab, specify your current location and phone type (most phone lines are tone). These settings will apply to all connec-

tions you create. 68 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 To start the connection, simply start using one of the following programs. Your 700 Series Computer will automatically begin connecting. Once con-

nected, you can:

S Send and receive e-mail messages by using Inbox. Before you can use Inbox, you need to provide the information it needs to communicate with the e-mail server. For specific instructions, see Connecting Directly to an E-mail Server on page 72. S Visit Web and WAP pages by using Pocket Internet Explorer. For more information, see Pocket Internet Explorer on page 62. S Send and receive instant messages with MSN Messenger. For more in-

formation, see MSN Messenger on page 53. Creating an Ethernet Connection to an ISP 1 You do not need to create a new connection on your 700 Series Com-

puter. Instead, you must purchase a dock to enable on-board Ethernet or purchase a CompactFlash Ethernet card that is compatible with your 700 Series Computer. 2 Obtain the following information from your ISP:

S User name S Password S Domain name 3 Insert the Ethernet card into your 700 Series Computer. For instruc-

tions on inserting and using the Ethernet card, see the owner s manual. If using an on-board Ethernet, place your 700 Series Computer in a dock, tap Start Today, then look in the System Tray for the Ethernet icon

(shown left). If not there, then tap the antenna icon for the NDISTRAY pop-up menu and select Built-in Ethernet from the menu. 4 The first time you insert the card, Network Settings will appear automatically so that you can configure the Ethernet card. Most networks use DHCP, so you should not have to change these settings unless your network administrator instructs you to do so. Tap OK. (If it does not appear or to change settings later, tap Start Settings the Connections tab Network, tap the adapter you want to change, and then tap Properties.) S If using an on-board Ethernet, then select Start Settings the Connections tab Network Adapters. Select NE2000 Compatible Ethernet Driver from the list of adapters installed, then tap Proper-

ties to configure the Ethernet driver. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 69 Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 Connecting to Work 5 Connect the Ethernet card or dock to the network by using a network cable. For information, see your owner s manual. 6 Tap Start Settings the Connections tab Connections. From the My network card connects to list, select Internet. To start the connection, simply start using one of the programs listed in the preceding section. Once connected, you can perform the same activi-

ties as listed in the preceding section. If you have access to a network at work, you can send e-mail messages, view intranet pages, synchronize your 700 Series Computer, and possibly access the Internet. You can connect to work in one of two ways:

S Create a modem connection by using a RAS (Remote Access Server) ac-

count. Before you can create this modem connection, your network ad-

ministrator will need to set up a RAS account for you. If this is the method you want to use, see Creating a Modem Connection to Work below. Your network administrator may also give you VPN settings. S Use an Ethernet card and a net tap to connect to the network. If this is the method you want to use, see Creating an Ethernet Connection to Work on page 71. Creating a Modem Connection to Work 1 Get the following information from your network administrator:

S Dial-up access telephone number S User name S Password S Domain name S TCP/IP settings 2 If your 700 Series Computer does not have a built-in modem, install a modem card. 3 Tap Start Settings the Connections tab Connections. Under The Internet settings, select Internet Settings and tap Modify. 4 In the Modem tab, tap New. 5 Enter a name for the connection, such as Company Connection. 6 In the Select a modem list, select your modem type. If your modem type does not appear, try reinserting the modem card. If you are using an external modem that is connected to your 700 Series Computer with a cable, select Hayes Compatible on COM1. 7 You should not need to change any settings in Advanced. Most servers now use a dynamically-assigned address. If the server you are connecting to does not use a dynamically-assigned address, tap Advanced the TCP/IP tab and then enter the address. When finished, tap OK Next. 70 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 8 Enter the access phone number, and tap Next. 9 Select other desired options, and tap Finish. 10 In the Dialing Locations tab, specify your current location and phone type (most phone lines are tone). These settings will apply to all connec-

tions you create. To start the connection, start using one of the following programs. Your 700 Series Computer will automatically begin connecting. Once con-

nected, you can:

S Send and receive e-mail messages by using Inbox. Before you can use Inbox, you need to provide the information it needs to communicate with the e-mail server. For specific instructions, see Connecting Directly to an E-mail Server on page 72. S Visit Internet or intranet Web or WAP pages via Pocket Internet Explor-

er. S Send and receive instant messages with MSN Messenger. For more in-

formation, see MSN Messenger on page 53. S Synchronize. For more information, see ActiveSync Help on the desktop computer. Creating an Ethernet Connection to Work 1 You do not need to create a new connection on your 700 Series Com-

puter. Instead, you must purchase a dock to enable on-board Ethernet or purchase a CompactFlash Ethernet card that is compatible with your 700 Series Computer. 2 Obtain the following information from your ISP:

S User name S Password S Domain name 3 Insert the Ethernet card into your 700 Series Computer. For instruc-

tions on inserting and using the Ethernet card, see the owner s manual. S If using an on-board Ethernet, place your 700 Series Computer in a dock, tap Start Today, then look in the System Tray for the Ether-

net icon (shown left). If not there, then tap the antenna icon for the NDISTRAY pop-up menu and select Built-in Ethernet from the menu. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 71 Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 4 The first time you insert the card, Network Settings will appear automatically so that you can configure the Ethernet card. Most networks use DHCP, so you should not have to change these settings unless your network administrator instructs you to do so. Tap OK. (If it does not appear or to change settings later, tap Start Settings the Connections tab Network, tap the adapter you want to change, and then tap Properties.) S If using an on-board Ethernet, then select Start Settings the Connections tab Network Adapters. Select NE2000 Compatible Ethernet Driver from the list of adapters installed, then tap Proper-

ties to configure the Ethernet driver. 5 Connect the Ethernet card or dock to the network by using a network cable. For information, see your owner s manual. 6 To synchronize your 700 Series Computer, tap Start ActiveSync. In the Tools menu, tap Options. the PC tab, select Include PC when synchronizing remotely and connect to, and select your computer s name. Remote synchronization with a desktop computer will work only if a partnership is set up with that computer through ActiveSync and ActiveSync is set to allow remote connections. Other restrictions apply. For more information, see ActiveSync Help on the desktop computer. To start the connection, simply start using one of the programs listed in the preceding section. Once connected, you can perform the same activi-

ties as listed in the preceding section. To disconnect, do one of the following:

S When connected via dial-up or VPN, tap the Connection icon (shown left) on your navigation bar, and then tap End. S When connected via cable or cradle, detach your 700 Series Computer from the cable or cradle. S When connected via Infrared, move the 700 Series Computer away from the PC. S When connected via a network (Ethernet) card, remove the card from your 700 Series Computer. Ending a Connection Connecting Directly to an E-mail Server You can set up a connection to an e-mail server so that you can send and receive e-mail messages by using a modem or network connection and In-

box on your 700 Series Computer. Note: The ISP or network must use a POP3 or IMAP4 e-mail server and an SMTP gateway. You can use multiple e-mail services to receive your messages. For each e-

mail service you intend to use, first set up and name the e-mail service. If you use the same service to connect to different mailboxes, set up and name each mailbox connection. 72 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 Setting Up an E-mail Service S In Inbox on your 700 Series Computer, tap Services New Service. Follow the directions in the New Service wizard. For an explanation of a screen, tap Start Help. When finished, to con-

nect to your e-mail server, tap Services Connect. For more information on using the Inbox program, see Inbox: Sending and Receiving E-mail Mes-

sages on page 42. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 73 Chapter 2 Pocket PC 2002 74 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Installing Applications 3 There are multiple ways to get an application to your 700 Series Color Mobile Computer; just as there are multiple ways to package the applica-

tion for delivery. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 75 Chapter 3 Installing Applications Packaging an Application Use any of the following methods to package an application for installa-

tion:

S For very simple applications, the application itself might be the only file that needs to be delivered. S It could be a directory structure that contains the application, support-

ing files like ActiveX controls, DLLs, images, sound files, and data files. S Via a CAB file. Consider either of the following when choosing a location into which to store your application:

S In the basic 700 Series Computer, there are no built-in storage options other than the Object Store. The Object Store is RAM that looks like a disk. Anything copied here will be deleted when a cold-boot is per-

formed on the 700 Series Computer. S If the optional SecureDigital or CompactFlash storage card is in the sys-

tem, then consider this card the primary location for placing an applica-

tions install files. The following folders represent either card:

S The SecureDigital storage card creates the \SDMMC Disk folder. S The CompactFlash storage card creates the \Storage Card folder. S Files copied to either of these locations will be safe when a cold-boot is performed on a 700 Series Computer - providing the AutoRun system is installed onto the storage card. You can find this system on the Recovery CD. Copying a CAB file to the \CABFILES folder on one of these cards will automatically extract that CAB file on every cold boot to en-

sure that your system is properly set up. See page 82 for more details on how this works. Installing Applications Consider any of the following options to get the package to the preferred location on your 700 Series Computer. S Microsoft ActiveSync S FTP Server (page 78) S Application Manager in Unit Manager (page 78) S SecureDigital or CompactFlash storage card (page 78) 76 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Using Microsoft ActiveSync Chapter 3 Installing Applications Note: These instructions assume that the 700 Color Management Tools portion of the 700 Series Color Software Tools CD was installed onto your desktop. The Microsoft ActiveSync tool is located on the 700C Companion CD, which contains Microsoft products, such as Outlook and ActiveSync. See Chapter 2, Pocket PC 2002, for information about this tool as provided by Microsoft Corporation. This can be a serial, USB, Ethernet, InfraRed, or 802.11b ActiveSync con-

nection. Files can then be copied using File Explorer on a PC or a laptop computer. This option is usually only good when updating a few 700 Se-

ries Computers. These instructions assume that Microsoft ActiveSync had been installed onto your desktop computer and is up and running. If not, go to Chapter 2, Pocket PC 2002, for an URL from which you can download the latest application. 1 Connect your 700 Series Computer to your desktop computer via an ActiveSync cable or IrDA. 2 Wait for a Connected message to appear in the Microsoft ActiveSync application to signal a connection to the 700 Series Computer. If neces-

sary, select File Get Connected to initiate a connection. 3 Click Explore to access the Mobile Device directory on your 700 Series Computer. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 77 Chapter 3 Installing Applications 4 From your desktop, select Start Windows Explorer, then browse the applicable path for any of the system files needed for your 700 Series Computer (listed with their paths). Select to highlight the appropriate file, right-click the file for a pop-up menu, then select Copy. S Base operating system files:

C:\Intermec\Intermec 700 Color Mgmt Tools\Drive Images S CAB files:

C:\Intermec\Intermec 700 Color Mgmt Tools\Cab Files 5 Within the Mobile Device directory, go to the directory where you want the files located on the 700 Series Computer, do a right-click for a pop-

up menu, then select Paste. 6 When all of the files are pasted, perform a warm-boot on the 700 Series Computer. When the computer reboots, wait for the LED on the top left of your keypad to stop blinking. Tap Start Programs File Ex-

plorer to locate the newly copied executable files, then tap these files to activate their utilities. The 700 Series Computer has a built-in FTP Server that connects to a net-

work via Ethernet or 802.11b. This ftps to the IP address of the 700 Se-

ries Computer and places files. The benefit of using FTP is that a script can be created that will automate the process of copying files to the 700 Series Computer. This option is good for when a large number of 700 Se-

ries Computers need to be updated. See Chapter 7, Programming, for more information. Using the FTP Server Using the Application Manager in Unit Manager Using a Storage Card This requires the 700 Series Computer to connect to the network via Ethernet or 802.11b. The process is still manual so it would take longer than the FTP method but it would still be a better option than ActiveSync where many 700 Series Computers need to be updated. The Unit Manager applications are available on the 700 Series Color Unit Manager CD-ROM. For more information, consult your Intermec sales representative. The following steps pertain to installing an application using a storage card. Copying to a CompactFlash Card Follow the steps below to install your application on the device using a CompactFlash storage card:

1 Suspend the 700 Series Color Mobile Computer and remove its Com-

pactFlash drive, which holds a SanDisk CompactFlash storage card. 2 Using a CompactFlash Adapter card, place the CompactFlash Drive in your desktop PC card drive. 78 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 3 Installing Applications 3 Create a subdirectory on the PCMCIA CompactFlash drive in which to store your application. 4 Add the autorun system to the storage card using the CEImager application. See the Software Tools User s Manual for information about CEImager. 5 Copy your application, data files, and all required DLLs and drivers to the subdirectory created on the CompactFlash drive. 6 Add your application to the AUTOUSER.DAT file on the

\Storage Card\2577 directory that contains the following statement, where your directory is the directory on the CompactFlash storage card where the application was installed, and yourapp.exe is the name of your application. Finish the RUN= statement with a carriage return line-

feed combination. There may be multiple run statements in the file. RUN=\<your directory>\<yourapp.exe>

7 Remove the CompactFlash drive from your desktop computer and rein-

stall it into the 700 Series Computer. 8 Warm-boot the 700 Series Computer to add these files to the Compact-

Flash storage card. If the AUTOUSER.DAT file is found and the RUN= statement is cor-

rect, then the task manager will launch and execute your program on start-

up. Copying to a SecureDigital Storage Card Do the same steps as for the CompactFlash storage Card, except replace the \Storage Card\2577 directory with the \SDMMC Disk\2577 direc-

tory. Updating the System Software You can use the Recovery CD to reinstall or update the operating system software on the 700 Series Color Computer. For more information, con-

tact your Intermec sales representative. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 79 Chapter 3 Installing Applications Application Migration Note: These instructions assume that the 700 Color Management Tools portion of the 700C Software Tools CD was installed onto your desktop and that a storage card has been added to the base configuration of the 700 Color Computer. The following steps are required to ensure that the following will happen on a cold-boot:

S CAB files can be restored, S applications will automatically start, S and the registry will be restored. Do the following for the cold-boot procedure:

1 From your desktop, double-click the Intermec CE Imager desktop icon to access the Intermec CEImager application. If this icon is not on your desktop, then double-click the CEIMAGER.EXE executable from the C:\Intermec\Intermec 700 Color Mgmt Tools\Tools\CEImager folder. 2 Click Default under Components List to activate the components. 3 Click (+) to expand the AutoRun System component, click (+) to ex-

pand the Destination Media option, then select either the Compact-

Flash Card option or the SecureDigital Card option. Do not select both storage cards, as the AutoRun files copied will work for one storage card, but not work on the other storage card. 80 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 3 Installing Applications 4 Click Install to install the AUTORUN files onto the storage card. 5 Create a \Cabfiles folder on the storage card. Copy any CAB files that are to be extracted on every startup into this folder. 6 In the \2577 directory, add your custom AUTOUSER.DAT file. See the Recovery Help for more information on how to set up an AUTOUSER.DAT file. 7 If you are using the RegFlushKey() API, the application must use a spe-

cial API to make sure the registry is written to the appropriate card; or you can use the Utilities control panel applet, as follows:

a From the 700 Series Computer, tap Start Settings the System tab the Utilities icon the Registry Save tab. b Tap Enable Registry Storage, then tap either of the following:

S SD To write the registry to the SecureDigital storage card. S CF To write the registry to the CompactFlash storage card. c Tap ok to save your entry and exit the Utilities control panel applet. Note: If you are using a SecureDigital storage card, you must change any disk access from Storage Card to SDMMC Disk. 8 Remove the storage card from the desktop PC and install the card into the 700 Series Color Computer. 9 Perform a cold-boot on the 700 Series Color Computer. Files will automatically install from the storage card upon reboot. Any calls to the RegFlushKey() API will automatically write the registry to the appropriate location. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 81 Chapter 3 Installing Applications When converting a 700 Series Monochrome Computer application to run on the 700 Series Color Computer, most APIs should work without chan-

ges. Below are a few exceptions:

S The 700 Series Monochrome Computer used the \Storage Card folder for nonvolatile storage. You may need to change the application to store data in a volatile location or onto the SDMMC Disk if a SecureDigi-

tal storage card is present in the system. S If the application uses the RegFlushKey() API, it must first verify that the proper media is available in the system and call the special API men-

tioned in Step 7 on the previous page. S If the application will be using the 700 Color switchable dock, use the API to set the proper port on the dock before communications. S Some WAN radio options have changed. Review the WAN radio section to determine if any changes will be required in your application. S The arrow and tab keys are swapped from the way they were on the 700 Series Monochrome Computers. Keyboard remapping is available on the 700 Series Color Computer if these keys need to be changed. See page 79 for more details. S No special SDK is needed to compile applications for the Xscale proces-

sor. Targeting the SA1110 processor will create applications that run on the 700 Series Color Computer. Cabinet File Installation CAB files (short for cabinet files) are like .ZIP files, plus they register DLLs, create shortcuts, modify registry entries, and run custom set up programs. Tap a CAB file to extract that file or place the CAB file on one of the ap-

proved storage devices in the \Cab Files folder, then perform a warm-

boot on the 700 Series Computer. There are two methods available to ex-

tract a CAB file:

S Tap a CAB file to extract it. When using this method, the CAB file is automatically deleted when the extraction process is successful, unless the CAB file is set with the read-only attribute. S Use the AUTOCAB method where all files are extracted when a cold-

boot is performed on the 700 Series Computer. This AutoCab applica-

tion is on the Recovery CD, see its Recovery Help for more informa-

tion. 82 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Network Support 4 The 700 Series Color Mobile Computer can integrate up to three radios in a single unit, and will automatically install the appropriate software for ra-

dio use when the unit is powered on. The Intermec CORE application defaults to the most recently used module. If a module has not yet been used or set, CORE will default to the first module as listed alphabetically. The following communication options on the 700 Series Computer pro-

vide wired and wireless connectivity:

S Onboard wired Ethernet (standard) S Wireless Local Area Network (LAN) This 802.11b radio option provides up to 11 Mb/sec throughput. S Wireless Wide Area Network (WAN) Includes support for GSM/GPRS and CDMA/1xRTT radios. S Wireless Printing This allows for cable-free communications with peripheral devices, such as printers, over a ten-meter range. This compatibility is provided via a Bluetooth qualified module by Socket Communications. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 83 Chapter 4 Network Support CORE The Intermec Common Object Resource Environment (CORE) applica-

tion provides a framework for various modules that let you configure and manage your Intermec products. These modules are software plug-ins that can be configuration tools, such as the 802.11b radio configuration mod-

ule, or they can provide information on your environment, such as a bat-

tery life module. CORE is built into the operating system of every 700 Series Computer. On the 700 Series Computer, tap Start Programs the Intermec CORE icon to access this application. CORE modules are collections of specific information. This information is usually related to a particular radio technology, but not always. Each module can display general and detailed information. Tap the General and Details tabs near the bottom to switch between general and detailed information. Note that not all modules will have detailed information. To learn more about this application, see its online help. Tap Start Help from the menu to see the CORE online help. Note: Once CORE is running, you can return to it by tapping its icon from the System Tray via the Today screen. Tap Start Today the Intermec CORE three-ring icon (circled in the following illustration). 84 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Network Adapters Chapter 4 Network Support Your 700 Series Computer can have up to three radios installed. The de-

fault network adapter or radio is dependent on what card is inserted in your 700 Computer. Below are the the network adapters that exist as of this publication. See the Developers Support web site for the latest infor-

mation on network adapters for your unit. S Ethernet Communications (LAN9000) - page 86. S 802.11b Radios (802.11b Wireless LAN driver) - page 87. S WWAN (Wireless WAN) - page 110. S Wireless Printing (PAN) - page 120. Note that the tip of the antenna attached to your 700 Series Computer is color-coded to identify its radio type. Refer to the following to determine your radio type:

S Green 802.11b diversity S Red CDMA (non-Sprint networks) S White GPRS US/Canada and CDMA Sprint networks S Blue GPRS International 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 85 Chapter 4 Network Support Ethernet Communications Follow the steps below to start Ethernet communications on the 700 Series Computer. If your system does not contain an 802.11b radio, then Ethernet networking using DHCP will be selected as the default. When Built-in Ethernet is selected from the NDISTRY pop-up menu, then the antenna shown to the left will appear in the System Tray. When No networking is selected, then this icon will appear with a red X above it. From the 700 Series Computer, tap Start Settings the Connections tab Network Adapters to access the network connections for this unit. Make the changes necessary for your network, then tap ok when finished. Note: LAN9000 is for Ethernet and 802.11b Wireless LAN is for 802.11b radios. 86 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Network Support 802.11b Communications The 700 Series Computer can integrate the 802.11b radio module along with either the GSM/GPRS or the CDMA/1xRTT radio and the Wireless Printing option. The 802.11b radio module accommodates any Wireless LAN (WLAN) requirements, such as using WLAN access points for cross-

docking or load-planning applications. When Wireless 802.11 is selected via the NDISTRY pop-up menu, then the antenna shown to the left will appear in the System Tray. To start 802.11b communications on the 700 Series Computer, tap Start Settings the System tab the Wireless Network icon to access the Profile Wizard for the 802.11b radio module. The Profile Wizard defaults to the Profiles page. Profiles Use the Profiles page to add, edit, or delete multiple networking environ-

ments for this 802.11b radio. To add a profile from this screen, enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters in the Profile field, then tap Add. See Basic on page 89 and Security on page 90 for more information. Leave Use Profile Name for SSID checked for the SSID (or Network Name) to use this profile name. If this is cleared (check mark removed), the SSID will default to using the factory-assigned INTERMEC net-

work name. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 87 Chapter 4 Network Support S To add a profile:

Tap Add, enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters to name this profile if you have not already entered a description in the Profiles page, configu-

re the basic and security information for this profile, then click Done to configure its basic and security information. S Leave Use Profile Name for SSID checked for the SSID to use this as-

signed profile name. If this is cleared (check mark removed), the SSID will default to using the factory-assigned INTERMEC network name. Go to the next page to continue. S To edit a profile:

Select an existing profile from the Profile drop-down list, tap Edit, make the changes needed for this profile (starting in the next para-

graph), then tap OK to return to the Profiles page. S To delete a profile:

Select a profile from the Profile drop-down list, tap Delete, then tap Yes to remove the selected profile. 88 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Network Support Basic Use the Basic page to set the network type and radio channel for this pro-

file. Click OK to return to the Profiles page. S Network type:

Tap the drop-down list to select either Infrastructure or Ad-hoc. S SSID (Network Name):

This assumes the profile name when Use Profile Name for SSID is checked on the previous screen, unless another name is entered in this field. If you want to connect to the next available network or are not familiar with the network name, enter ANY in this field. Consult your LAN administrator for network names. S Channel:

If Ad-hoc were selected as the network type, then this is enabled. Tap the drop-down list to select a channel, from 1-15, through which to handle connections (default is 3). S Enable Power Management:

Check this box to conserve battery power (default), or clear this box to disable this feature. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 89 Chapter 4 Network Support Security Use the Security page to set this profile as read-only or to enable WEP

(Wired Equivalent Privacy) encryption. Click OK to return to the Profiles page. The following securities are available from the Security Method drop-down list. Note that the last three methods are available if you have pur-

chased the security package. Contact your Intermec Representative for more in-

formation. S 802.11 WEP Encryption (next page) S 802.1x TLS (page 92) S 802.1x TTLS (page 93) S LEAP (page 93) 90 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Network Support 802.11 WEP Encryption:

WEP keys are only needed if they are expected by your clients. There are two types available: 64-bit (5-character strings, 12345) (default) and 128-bit (13-character strings, 1234567890123). These can be entered as either ASCII (12345) or Hex (0x3132333435). To enter WEP keys, select 802.11 WEP Encryption from the Security Method drop-down list. Select a data transmission key from the Data TX Key drop-down list near the bottom of this screen, then enter the encryp-

tion key for that data transmission in the appropriate Key # field. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 91 Chapter 4 Network Support 802.1x TLS (Transport Layer Security):

TLS is a protocol that ensures privacy between communicating applica-

tions and their users on the Internet. To use this protocol, select 802.1x TLS from the Security Method drop-down list, then enter the following:

S Client Key File:

Enter the file location where the certificate for your identity is stored. S Password:

Enter the password for the certificate in this field. S Supplicant ID:

Enter the user ID associated with this certificate. S Server Cert CN (Certificate Common Name):

Enter the common name of your authentication server. S CA List (Certificate Authority):

Enter the file location, or path, of the server certificates. 92 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Network Support 802.1x TTLS (EAP-Tunneled TLS):

To use this protocol, select 802.1x TTLS from the Security Method drop-down list, then enter the following:

S Username:

Enter your user name for this security protocol. S Password:

Enter your password for this security protocol. S Supplicant ID:

Enter anonymous unless your administrator indicates otherwise. S Server Cert CN (Certificate Common Name):

Enter the common name of your authentication server. S CA List:

Enter the file location, or path, of the server certificates. LEAP (Cisco Wireless EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol)):

Enter your unique user name and password to use this protocol. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 93 Chapter 4 Network Support Advanced Use this page to secure the configuration for this profile or to make all fields read-only. S Make Profile Read-Only:

Check this box, then enter and reenter a password to lock or render read-only all configurations for this profile. To reverse this step, clear the check box, then enter the password assigned with the read-only status. S Certificates:

If 802.1x TLS, 802.1x TTLS, or LEAP were enabled via the Se-

curity tab, then this button will appear. Tap this button to configure the available certificates. See Certificates on the next page for more infor-

mation. 94 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Network Support Certificates Use this page to view, modify, or remove certificates assigned to your particular security method. Note that you can also access this page by tapping Start certificates from the Today screen. S CA Name/IP:

Enter a valid CA name or IP address assigned to the certificate in ques-

tion. This allows you to enroll the certificate or to browse for its latest information. S Enroll File Name:

Enter the file name of the certificate to be enrolled. S Store Location:

Enter the path where the certificate is to be stored within your 700 Se-

ries Computer. S Enroll:

Tap this to assign the file entered in Enroll File Name to the location specified in Store Location. S CA Vert:

Tap this to view the contents of the certificate via the Internet Explorer. S View:

Tap this to view information about the certificate, such as to whom this certificate was issued, who issued the certificate, and the span of time the certificate is valid. S Remove:

Select a file from the list, then tap this button to delete that file. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 95 Chapter 4 Network Support Import/Export Use this page to send a profile or to retrieve a profile to or from another location within your 700 Series Computer. S To export a profile:

Select to highlight a profile, then tap Export. Select from the drop-down lists, the folder, type of files, and location within the folder where the profile is to go, tap OK to export the profile, tap ok to close the con-

firmation screen, then tap OK again to exit the Profile Wizard. 96 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Network Support S To import a profile:

Tap Import to access the Open screen, from the drop-down lists, select a folder and file type, then tap a profile from the list provided. Tap ok to close the confirmation screen, then tap OK again to exit the Profile Wizard. Scan List Use this Scan List page to monitor network connections, and if lost, to at-

tempt to reestablish connections with these networks. Selected Profile Select this option to use the profile defined in the Profiles page, then tap OK to exit the Profile Wizard. When connections are lost, attempts will be made to connect to the specified profile. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 97 Chapter 4 Network Support Scan List Use this option to select a number of profiles with which to establish con-

nections. When connections are lost, attempts will be made to contact each of the profiles listed, in the order they appear in the list. 1 Tap this option, then tap Edit Scan List. 2 Select profiles from the Available Profiles drop-down list, then tap Add to include each selection in the Scan List. 3 To arrange the hierarchy of profiles, tap to select a profile, then tap ei-

ther Move Up or Move Down to move each profile. To remove a pro-

file from the list, tap to select that profile, then tap Delete. 4 Click either ok or Close to return to the Scan List page, then click OK to exit the Profile Wizard. Network Selection APIs The Network Selection APIs allow the user to change network adapter configuration programmatically. Both drivers support the same IOCTL function numbers for loading and unloading the drivers. Loading and unloading of the 802.11b driver is performed by the FWV1:

device in the system by performing DeviceIOControl() calls to the driver. Loading and unloading of the driver for the built-in Ethernet adapter is performed by the SYI1: device in the system by performing DeviceIO-

Control() calls to the driver. S For loading an NDIS driver associated with an adapter, the IOCTL is IOCTL_LOAD_NDIS_MINIPORT. S For unloading NDIS drivers associated with an adapter the IOCTL is IOCTL_UNLOAD_NDIS_MINIPORT. 98 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Network Support

#include <winioctl.h>

#include sysio.h void DoLoad(int nDevice) {

LPTSTR devs[] = { _T(SYI1:), _T(FWV1:) };

HANDLE hLoaderDev;

DWORD bytesReturned;

hLoaderDev = CreateFile(devs[nDevice], GENERIC_READ|GENERIC_WRITE, 0, NULL, OPEN_EXISTING, 0, NULL);

if (hLoaderDev != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE) {

if (!DeviceIoControl( hLoaderDev, IOCTL_LOAD_NDIS_MINIPORT, NULL, -1, NULL, 0,

&bytesReturned, NULL)){

MessageBox(NULL, TEXT(SYSIO IoControl Failed), TEXT(Network loader),MB_ICONHAND);

if (hLoaderDev!=INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE) CloseHandle(hLoaderDev);

hLoaderDev = INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE; // bad handle

}else {

CloseHandle(hLoaderDev);

void DoUnload(int nDevice) {

LPTSTR devs[] = { _T(SYI1:), _T(FWV1:) };

HANDLE hLoaderDev;

DWORD bytesReturned;

hLoaderDev = CreateFile(devs[nDevice], GENERIC_READ|GENERIC_WRITE, 0, NULL, OPEN_EXISTING, 0, NULL);

if (hLoaderDev != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE) {

if (!DeviceIoControl( hLoaderDev, IOCTL_UNLOAD_NDIS_MINIPORT, NULL, -1, NULL, 0,

&bytesReturned, NULL)){

MessageBox(NULL, TEXT(SYSIO IoControl Failed),TEXT(Network loader),MB_ICONHAND);

if (hLoaderDev!=INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE) CloseHandle(hLoaderDev);

hLoaderDev = INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE; // bad handle

}else {

CloseHandle(hLoaderDev);

700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 99 Chapter 4 Network Support The API provided by Intermec Technologies exposes a limited set of rou-

tines that allows a programmer to access and affect the 802.11b network interface card from within their application. The routines provided will also read/write values to the CE registry that pertain to the 802.11b radio driver. By using the provided functions, a programmer can alter the 802.11b parameters of Network Name (SSID), WEP Keys, Infrastructure Modes, Radio Channel, and Power Management Modes. A programmer can also retrieve network connect status and signal strength indication from the RF network card. The API is contained within the 80211API.DLL file that should be pres-

ent in any load that has the 802.11b networking installed. S NETWLAN.DLL This file is the 802.11b driver. It will be present in all 700 CE loads that use the 802.11b network interface card. S 80211API.DLL This file is an Intermec authored file that provides the programmer with a set of API calls to configure or monitor status of the 802.11b network. S MOD80211.DLL The CORE module for the 802.11b NIC. It provides the 802.11b sta-

tus information displayed when the CORE application is running. S 80211CONF.EXE This is the Control Panel for configuring the 802.11b network para-

meters. Note that it is an EXE file and is actually called by CPL802.CPL (see below). It is also called by the CORE application when the Configuration button is pressed. S CPL802.CPL A control panel application that does nothing but call 80211CONF.EXE. S 80211SCAN.EXE Internally manages the Scan List activity. The 80211API.DLL supports an unlimited number of radio configuration profiles. These profiles are the same as those set by the Wireless Network control panel applet that runs on the Windows CE unit. You can configure different 802.11b profiles and switch between them using the 802.11 API. See the ConfigureProfile() function on page 106 for more information. 100 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Network Support Function Summary Below are functions available for the 700 Series Color Computer when enabled with the 802.11b radio module. RadioConnect() Connects to the available radio. Use this function if you plan on using a lot of API calls that talk directly to the radio. Syntax: UINT RadioConnect( );

Parameters: None. Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, otherwise ERR_CONNECT_FAILED. RadioDisconnect() Cleans up the connection from the RadioConnect() function after an ap-

plication closes. Syntax: UINT RadioDisconnect( );

Parameters: None. Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, otherwise ERR_CONNECT_FAILED. GetMac() Gets the radio MAC address. Syntax: UINT GetMac( TCHAR * );

Parameters: Pointer to a character array, which is populated with MAC addresses. Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed. GetBSSID() Gets the associated access point name, the BSSID. Syntax: UINT GetBSSID( TCHAR * );

Parameters: Pointer to a character array, which is populated with the current BSSID. Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed GetSSID() Gets the current SSID (network name). Syntax: UINT GetSSID( TCHAR * );

Parameters: Pointer to a character array, which is populated with the current SSID. Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 101 Chapter 4 Network Support GetLinkSpeed() Retrieves the current link speed of the radio connection. Syntax: UINT GetLinkSpeed( int & );

Parameters: &

References an integer. Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed. GetNetworkType() Retrieves the network type. Syntax: UINT GetNetworkType( ULONG & );

Parameters: & References a ULONG value, populated with one of the following:

NDIS_NET_TYPE_FH Frequency Hopping Radio NDIS_NET_TYPE_DS Direct Sequence Radio NDIS_NET_TYPE_UNDEFINED Unknown or information not available. Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed. GetTXPower() Gets the current TX power of the radio in milliwatts. Syntax: UINT GetTXPower( ULONG & );

Parameters: & References a ULONG value, populated with one of the following in milliwatts (mW):

NDIS_POWER_LEVEL_63 NDIS_POWER_LEVEL_30 NDIS_POWER_LEVEL_15 NDIS_POWER_LEVEL_5 NDIS_POWER_LEVEL_1 NDIS_POWER_LEVEL_UNKNOWN 63 mW. 30 mW. 15 mW. 5 mW. 1 mW. Unknown Value or Error. Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed. 102 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Network Support GetNetworkMode() Retrieves the network mode. Syntax: UINT GetNetworkMode( ULONG & );

Parameters: & References a ULONG value, populated with one of the following:

NDIS_NET_MODE_IBSS NDIS_NET_MODE_ESS NDIS_NET_MODE_UNKNOWN NDIS_NET_AUTO_UNKNOWN 802.11 Ad-Hoc Mode. 802.11 Infrastructure Mode. Unknown Value or Error. Automatic Selection. Use of this option is not recommended. Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed. SetNetworkMode() Sets the radio and updates the CE registry. Syntax: UINT SetNetworkMode( ULONG & );

Parameters: & References a ULONG value, populated with one of the values defined in GetNetworkMode(). Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed. AddWep() Adds a WEP key to the radio configuration. Syntax: UINT AddWep( ULONG 1, BOOL 2, TCHAR * 3 );

Parameters: ULONG BOOL TCHAR Pointer that identifies what key to be set. Specifies whether the key being set is the default TX key. Pointer that specifies the key data either in hex (string lengths of 10 or 26) or ASCII (string lengths of 5 or 13). Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed. GetRSSI() Sets the current RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication). Syntax: UINT GetRSSI( ULONG & );

Parameters: &

References a ULONG value. Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 103 Chapter 4 Network Support GetAssociationStatus() Gets the current connection, or association status. Syntax: UINT GetAssociationStatus( ULONG & );

Parameters: & References a ULONG value, a current connection status as follows:

NDIS_RADIO_ASSOCIATED Radio is associated w/access point. NDIS_RADIO_SCANNING Radio is scanning for network. Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed. GetWepStatus() Gets the current WEP status. Syntax: UINT GetWepStatus( ULONG & );

Parameters: & References a ULONG status value which include the following:

NDIS_RADIO_WEP_ENABLED NDIS_RADIO_WEP_DISABLED NDIS_RADIO_WEP_ABSENT NDIS_RADIO_WEP_NOT_SUPPORTED WEP is currently enabled. WEP is currently disabled. WEP key is absent. WEP is not supported. Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed. GetAuthenticationMode() Gets the current authentication mode. Syntax: UINT GetAuthenticationMode( ULONG & );

Parameters: & References a ULONG value which include the following current authentication mode:

NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_OPEN NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_SHARED Shared Key is in use. NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_AUTO Automatic Detection. NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_ERROR Unknown value/Error. Open System is in use. Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed. SetAuthenticationMode() Sets the radio authentication mode with a value defined in the GetAuthenticationMode() function. Syntax: UINT SetAuthenticationMode( ULONG );

Parameters: Passes in a ULONG set to one of the values as defined in GetAuthenticationMode(). Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed. 104 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Network Support SetChannel() Sets the radio channel, ranging from 1 to 14. Syntax: UINT SetChannel( USHORT );

Parameters: USHORT set to a desired channel (1-14). Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed. EnableWep() Enables or disables WEP encryption. Syntax: UINT EnableWep( BOOL );

Parameters: Set to TRUE (0) to enable WEP encryption or FALSE (1) to disabled WEP encryption. Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed. GetPowerMode() Gets the current power management mode of the radio. Syntax: UINT GetPowerMode( ULONG & );

Parameters: & References a ULONG value which include the following current radio power management mode:

NDIS_RADIO_POWER_MODE_CAM Continuous Access Mode (uses most power). NDIS_RADIO_POWER_MODE_MAX Maximum Power Savings. NDIS_RADIO_POWER_MODE_PSP Power Saving Mode, best balance of power and performance. NDIS_RADIO_POWER_UNKNOWN Unknown mode reported or error. Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed. SetSSID() Passes the desired SSID (network name). Syntax: UINT SetSSID( TCHAR * );

Parameters: Pointer to a character array that contains the desired SSID. Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 105 Chapter 4 Network Support isOrinoco() Confirms whether the present radio is an ORiNOCO radio. Syntax: UINT isOrinoco( );

Parameters: None. Returns: TRUE when an ORiNOCO radio. FALSE when other than an ORiNOCO radio. EncryptWepKeyForRegistry() Encrypts a key for registry storage. Requires TCHAR pointers for a des-

tination and a source. Syntax: UINT EncryptWepKeyForRegistry( TCHAR * szDest, TCHAR *

szSource );

szDest szSource Parameters:

String for the destination. String for the source. Returns: ERROR_SUCCESS when successful, ERR_QUERY_FAILED when the query failed, or ERR_CONNECT_FAILED if a connection with the radio failed. SetRTSThreshold() Sets the radio RTS (Request To Send) threshold. Syntax: UINT SetRTSThreshold( USHORT & );

Parameters: &

References a USHORT value. Returns: None. GetRTSThreshold() Gets the radio RTS threshold. Syntax: UINT GetRTSThreshold( USHORT & );

Parameters: &

References a USHORT value. Returns: None. ConfigureProfile() If using the Intermec 802.11b Profile Management system, you can pro-

gram the API to configure the radio to a specific profile by passing the pro-

file name. Syntax: UINT ConfigureProfile( TCHAR * );

Parameters: Pointer to a string that contains the name of the profile to be activated. Returns: None. 106 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Network Support StartScanList() If a scan list is configured, this will start the API looking for a network on that scan list and configuring the radio appropriately. This call can take a long time to process. Syntax: UINT StartScanList( );

Parameters: None. Returns: None. 802.11b Radio CORE Module The 802.11b radio CORE module displays helpful information about the 802.11b radio option built into your 700 Series Computer. Note that you can configure the 802.11b radio module from this CORE application. Select Configure Configure 802.11 CF from the bottom menu bar to access the Profile Wizard application. Information about this application starts on page 87. Select Modules Intermec 802.11 CF Help for more information on the contents of this CORE module. General Below are descriptions and meanings for each piece of information pro-

vided via the General tab, reading from top to bottom starting on the left. S ESS 802.11 Station:

This identifies the type of network to which you are attached, either an ESS (Embedded Security Subsystem) Station, or Ad-hoc. S Adapter MAC:

This identifies the MAC address for this 802.11b adapter. S Scanning:

Status of association. When connected to a network, this changes to Connected to NET with NET being the name of the network to which you are connected. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 107 Chapter 4 Network Support S Encryption:

This indicates whether WEP encryption is Enabled or Disabled

(Open). See page 90 for more information. S Link:

This indicates the speed at which a connection is made. S TX Power:

This shows the speed (in milliwatts) at which transmissions are made. S Signal:

This identifies the radio signal strength (in dBm). S Antenna:

This identifies the antenna being used with the assigned profile. S AP Mac:

This identifies the MAC address of the access point to which this 700 Series Computer is connected. S IP:

This provides the IP address which can be set as either DHCP (Dynam-

ic Host Configuration Protocol) or statically. S Power:

This indicates the power status of this 700 Series Computer: Always On is the default. S History:

This bar graph displays an active history of this radio module s quality of connections. S Friendly Indicator:

If the radio stack is loaded, then all three dots are filled. These dots are left empty if the stack is not loaded. These dots do vary based on the CORE application s perception of the overall connection quality. 108 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Network Support Details Below are descriptions and meanings for each piece of information pro-

vided via the Details tab, reading from top to bottom. S Attach-Roam Cnt:

This includes the number of new associations made during the current session, including any found roaming. S Scanlist:

This indicates whether the Scan List option was enabled or disabled. See page 97 for more information. S Watchdog Status:

This monitors the activity of the Scan List: Running or Stopped. S Supplicant:

This monitors the 802.1x security activity on the client: Running or Stopped. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 109 Chapter 4 Network Support WWAN Radio Options The 700 Series Computer can integrate either the GSM/GPRS or the CDMA/1xRTT radio along with the 802.11b radio and the Wireless Printing option. The WWAN radio option accommodates any Wireless WAN requirements, such as taking the 700 Series Computer off the prem-

ises in a delivery vehicle to cover a much larger area. GSM/GPRS The GSM (Global System for Mobile communications) and GPRS (Gen-

eral Packet Radio Service) wireless infrastructure increases voice capacity, enables personalized user-aware services, and creates networking efficien-

cies to help wireless service providers drive reduced operating costs. S GSM is an open, nonproprietary system. One of its great strengths is the international roaming capability. This provides seamless and same-

standardized same-number contactability world-wide. GSM satellite roaming has extended service access to areas with unavailable terrestrial coverage. S GPRS is the high-speed data evolution of GSM. GPRS supports Inter-

net Protocol (IP), enabling access to Internet and intranet content and applications from GPRS wireless devices. The anticipated data rate for GPRS is 115 Kbps and throughput rates of 30-60 Kbps have been achieved initially. This high speed capability enables vehicle applications to become real-time and to use the Internet for access to corporate data or information in the form of traffic or navigation. CDMA/1xRTT SB555 Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) is a form of spread-spectrum, a family of digital communication techniques used in military applications for years. The core principle of spread-spectrum is the use of noise-like carrier waves, and, as the name implies, bandwidths much wider than that required for simple point-to-point communication at the same data rate. S 1XRTT, the first phase of CDMA2000, is designed to support up to 144 KB per second packet data transmission and to double the voice capacity of current generation CDMA networks. S SB555 Embedded Module, from Sierra Wireless, provides complete wireless functionality and integrates easily into the most compact and slender mobile applications with its small flexible design. The SB555 offers maximum coverage and access to entire CDMA networks. 110 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Network Support WAN Radio CORE Module The WAN radio CORE module displays helpful information about either the GSM/GPRS radio or the CDMA/1xRTT radio option built into your 700 Series Computer. The following illustrations are for a GSM/GPRS GEM350X radio. General Below are descriptions and meanings for each piece of information pro-

vided via the General tab, reading from top to bottom starting on the left. The information applies to both the GSM/GPRS and the CDMA/1xRTT ra-

dio modules unless otherwise indicated. S Network Type:

This is the network type which would list either GSM-GPRS or CDMA-1XRTT. Scatternets are not supported. S IWS (GSM/GPRS) or Sprint PCS Network (CDMA/1xRTT):

This lists the name of the wireless network provider, such as T-Mobile, Voicestream, AT&T Wireless, etc. IWS is short for the Iowa Wireless Service carrier. S Registered on home network:

If the WAN radio module has registered with a service provider net-

work, then one of the following will appear:

S Registered on home network:

The radio module is registered on its home network. S Registered on roamed network:

The radio module is registered on another service provider s network. S Radio Not Registered:

There is no network within range of this radio module. S Radio ESN:

This displays the Electronic Serial Number (ESN) assigned to this radio module or lists Unavailable if a number cannot be read from the ra-

dio. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 111 Chapter 4 Network Support S RSSI:

This displays the Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) frequency or lists Unavailable if there is no signal or the signal cannot be retrieved from the radio module. S BER (GSM/GPRS GEM 350X, CDMA/1xRTT):

This shows the Bit Error Rate (BER), the percentage of bits with errors divided by the total number of bits transmitted, received, or processed over a given period of time. S f/w:

This identifies the firmware version, if available. S h/w:

This identifies the hardware version, if available. S Serial Status:

This indicates whether serial communications passed (Serial com OK) or failed (Serial com FAIL) in its last transaction. A status of Serial com FAIL typically indicates that the 700 Series Computer is unable to establish communication with the radio module installed within. S Xircom GEM3503 (GSM/GPRS), Siemens MC45 (GSM/GPRS), or Sierra Wireless SB555 (CDMA/1xRTT):

This identifies the product name for this radio module. S Band (GSM/GPRS) or Channel (CDMA/1xRTT):

This identifies the bandwidth or channel available for this radio module, if any. S History:

This bar graph displays an active history of this radio module s quality of connections. S Friendly Indicator:

Usually indicates the signal strength for this radio module. Three filled dots indicate a high quality or strong signal. Three empty dots indicate that the signal is out of range or there is no signal detected. 112 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Network Support Details Below are descriptions and meanings for each piece of information pro-

vided via the Details tab, reading from top to bottom. Most of this is simi-

lar to what is shown under the General tab. The information applies to both the GSM/GPRS and the CDMA/1xRTT radio modules unless otherwise indi-

cated. S Serial Status:

This indicates whether serial communications passed (PASS) or failed

(FAIL) in its last transaction. A status of FAIL typically indicates that the 700 Series Computer is unable to establish communication with the radio module installed within. S Manufacturer:

This lists the name of the manufacturer that developed this radio mod-

ule, such as Xircom, an Intel Corporation, Siemens, or Sierra Wire-

less. S Model:

This identifies the product name for this radio module, such as SB555, GEM350X, or MC45. S IMEI # (GSM/GPRS):

This is the IMEI (International Mobile station Equipment Identity) se-

rial number of the GSM/GPRS radio module. S RSSI:

This displays the RSSI frequency or lists Unavailable if there is no sig-

nal or the signal cannot be retrieved from the radio module. S Operator:

This lists the name of the service providing the network support. S SIM Status (GSM/GPRS MC45):

Identifies whether a Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) card is installed in this 700 Series Computer. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 113 Chapter 4 Network Support S Band (CDMA/1xRTT):

This identifies the frequency bands used by this radio module. S IMSI # (GSM/GPRS):

This shows the IMSI (International Mobile Subscriber Identity) number assigned to the SIM card installed in this 700 Series Computer. S Radio Temp (CDMA/1xRTT):

This identifies the temperature of the radio module, or lists Unavail-

able degrees if there is no information or the temperature cannot be measured. S Firmware Rev:

This identifies the firmware version, if available. S Firmware Date (GSM/GPRS):

This provides the last date when this firmware was updated, if available. Terminal Application Tap Terminal App from the Details page to send standard AT commands. Information about these AT commands are available under AT Command Interface on page 115. Select an AT command from the drop-down list, then tap Send. The re-

sults of each test appears in the text box. Tap Exit or ok to close this screen and return to the Details page. 114 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Network Support Phone Application With the WAN radio module installed in your 700 Series Computer, you can send and receive telephone calls. Use the speaker on the back of the computer as your earpiece and use the connector on the bottom of the computer for your mouthpiece. Tap Phone App from the Details page to access the application which will process your phone calls. Tap Exit or ok to close this application and return to the Details page. S Tap the numbers for a phone call, using Clear to erase each digit, then tap Send to initiate the call. S Tap Answer to receive an incoming call. S Tap End to disconnect a transaction. S Tap Vol ^ or Vol v to adjust the speaker volume. S Tap Mic ^ or Mic v to adjust the microphone sensitivity. AT Command Interface This interface specification is based on the following recommendation:

S ETSI GSM 07.05:

European Digital Cellular Telecommunication System (phase 2) Use of DTE-DCE interface for Short message and cell broadcast service. S ETSI GSM 07.07:

European Digital Cellular Telecommunication System (phase 2) AT command set for GSM Mobile Equipment. S ITU-T Recommendation V.25 ter Serial asynchronous automatic dialing and control. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 115 Chapter 4 Network Support Note: You will need the Adobe Acrobat Reader application to view a PDF document. Go to http://www.adobe.com/prodindex/acrobat/readstep.html to install or download the latest Adobe Acrobat Reader according to Adobe s instructions. Command Set for Sierra Wireless SB555 Use the AT command interface from Sierra Wireless to program the CDMA/1xRTT SB555 radio module. Documentation for this interface is available via the following URL. Click the General AT command refer-

ence link for a PDF document, which is 680 KB in size. Note that this URL is subject to change. http://www.sierrawireless.com/ProductsOrdering/embedded_docs.html Command Set for Xircom/Intel GEM350X Use the GEM350X AT command list from Intel Corporation to program the GPRS/GSM GEM350X radio module. The GEM350X Programmer s Reference is available either from Intermec Technologies or from Intel Corporation. Contact either your Intermec representative or the Intel Cor-

poration support personnel at the following URL for more information. Note that this URL is subject to change. http://support.intel.com/sites/support/index.htm?iid=intelhome1+support&

Command Set for Siemens MC45 Use the MC45 AT command interface from Siemens AG to program the GPRS/GSM MC45 radio module. The MC45 Siemens Cellular Engine AT Command Set is available either from Intermec Technologies or from Siemens AG. Contact either your Intermec representative or the Siemens AG support personnel at the following URL for more information. Note that this URL is subject to change. http://www.siemens-mobile.com/btob/CDA/presentation/ap_btob_cda_presentation_fron tdoor/0,2950,12,FF.html 116 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Network Support Testing the AT Commands These commands can be sent to either WAN radio by setting up a dial-up networking connection to COM4. Do the following to initiate this con-

nection and test these commands to your radio:

1 From the 700 Series Computer, select Start Settings the Connections tab the Connections icon. 2 Tap Modify beneath the Internet Settings drop-down list. 3 Tap New.. to make a new connection. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 117 Chapter 4 Network Support 4 Enter a name for the connection, select WANA on COM4 from the Select a modem drop-down list, and select 115200 from the Baud rate drop-down list. Tap Advanced to continue. 5 On the Port Settings tab, check Enter dialing commands manually, then tap ok, Next, then Finish to return to the Internet Settings screen with your new connection. 118 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Network Support 6 Press and hold the new connection for a pop-up menu, then tap Connect to initiate the connection. Wait for about ten seconds for the Network Log On screen, then tap OK. Note: You do not need to enter any information within the Network Log On screen. 7 Use either the onscreen keyboard, or press the keys to type any of the AT commands provided by Sierra Wireless. Press or tap Enter to send each command. The results of each command sent will print onscreen -

see the sample illustration below. Note that each AT command must start with either the at or at+ characters. S To see what you typed onscreen, type ate1 to initiate the AT Echo command, then press Enter. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 119 Chapter 4 Network Support Wireless Printing The 700 Series Computer can integrate the Wireless Printing option

(which is equipped with a Bluetooth qualified module by Socket Communica-

tions) along with either the GSM/GPRS or the CDMA/1xRTT radio and the 802.11b radio. This option uses the network to print information stored on the 700 Series Computer. Bluetooth is the name given to a technology standard using short-range radio links, intended to replace the cables connecting portable and fixed electronic devices. The standard defines a uniform structure for a wide range of devices to communicate with each other, with minimal user ef-

fort. Its key features are robustness, low complexity, low power, and low cost. The technology also offers wireless access to LANs, the mobile phone network, and the internet for a host of home appliances and portable hand-held interfaces. Documentation Information about additional Bluetooth software, including the Blue-

tooth Device Manager and the BTctrl program, can be found within the Wireless Printing SDK. This is located on the 700C Software Tools CD, via the directory off the root of the toolkit called Wireless Printing SDK. It also can be found in the Wireless Printing Development Guide, also on the 700C Tools CD. Bluealps CORE Module The Bluealps CORE module displays helpful information about this Wire-

less Printing option within your 700 Series Computer. Below are descrip-

tions and meanings for each piece of information provided via the General tab, reading from top to bottom starting on the left. 120 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Network Support S Bluetooth Point to Point:

This is the network type. Point to Point is the type of connection sup-

ported as of this publication. Scatternets are not supported. The only sup-

ported application is wireless printing to Intermec wireless printers, such as the 781T Belt-Mount Printer. S Device Address:

This provides the network address, which in this case, will be replaced by the device address of the Bluetooth compatible module within your 700 Series Computer. Note that this address is universally unique. S Discoverable:

The following is displayed depending on whether the 700 Series Com-

puter is configured to be discoverable:

Gen Generally discoverable Lim No Limited discovery Not discoverable S Connectable:

This defines whether the 700 Series Computer is able to accept other devices with Bluetooth compatible modules connecting to it. Yes if the connection is doable, No if not. S Bondable:

This defines the security element of the 700 Series Computer, which is the bondable setting. If the unit is bondable, then Yes is displayed, otherwise No is displayed. S Module Firmware:

This reflects the firmware (hardware) version of the 700 Series Comput-

er. When the CORE module first installs onto the unit, the firmware level is unknown, thus ...reading is displayed. Once the firmware level is read from the unit, then a three-digit decimal is displayed. S Stack [Stack Version] [loaded/not loaded]:

[Stack Version] displays the Bluetooth stack version, which appears in the 1.2.3.4 format. If the stack is loaded, then loaded is displayed after the stack version, otherwise not loaded is displayed. S Device Name:

This displays the device name as assigned to the Bluetooth compatible module by the end-user. If the configured name is longer than the space allowed, it will be truncated. S BTpak Version:

This displays the driver version of additional Bluetooth components within the 700 Series Computer and is usually presented in the 1.2.3 format. The version may also contain a letter at either end. S History:

This bar graph displays an active history of this wireless printer driver s quality of connections. S Friendly Indicator:

If the Bluetooth stack is loaded, then all three dots are filled. These dots are left empty if the stack is not loaded. These dots do vary based on the CORE application s perception of the overall connection quality. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 121 Chapter 4 Network Support AutoIP/DHCP HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Comm\LAN9001\TcpIp HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Comm\NETWLAN1\TcpIp Automatic Private IP Addressing (AutoIP) is enabled by default in Pocket PC 2002. To remain compatible with other Pocket PC devices, this setting needs to be enabled. You can configure the registry settings in the following to set the required AutoIP/DHCP behavior:

S For Ethernet:

S Fot 802.11b:

Other registry keys that can modify the behavior of AutoIP are as follows. You can find the appropriate settings and behavior of each of these keys in Microsoft Help. S AutoInterval S AutoMask S AutoSubnet S AutoIP S AutoSeed When a TCP/IP client cannot find a DHCP server, it generates an AutoIP address from the 169.254.xxx.xxx block. The client then tries to check for a DHCP server every 300 seconds (5 minutes) and if a DHCP server is found, the client drops the AutoIP address and uses the address from the DHCP server. In the MSDN Windows CE documentation, see Automatic Client Config-

uration for more information on AutoIP. To disable AutoIP, set the AutoCfg registry entry to 0. If a DHCP server cannot be found, instead of using AutoIP, the system will display the Un-

able to obtain a server assigned IP address message. Note: If AutoIP is defined using CAB files, the EnableDHCP registry key must also be defined and set to 1 before the system will attempt to ob-

tain a DHCP address. To extend the number of attempts that a DHCP client makes to get a DHCP address, use the DhcpRetryDialogue and DhcpMaxRetry registry settings. Change the AutoInterval registry key value to make the client retry more often to obtain a DHCP address. 122 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Network Support SNMP Configuration Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) was developed in the late 1980s to provide a general-purpose internetworking management protocol. Its primary goal was to be simple so nothing would stand in the way of its ubiquitous deployment. To this end, it has been very successful as it is cur-

rently deployed in almost every major internetworking product on the market. However, like many achieved goals, the primary strength can also become a weakness. The Focus was Simple An extreme example of simplicity versus power can be realized by compar-

ing SNMP against the Common Management Information Protocol

(CMIP), the ISO entry to the standard management protocol world. CMIP has a very rich set of primitives and a core set of data elements. However, to implement CMIP, a subset of the protocol must be selected. Then, to achieve interoperability, this subset must be agreed upon with other implementors. As SNMP was specified completely and with no op-

tions, one implemented what was there and interoperability was assured. Returning to simplicity, SNMP was built simply for a number of reasons other than time to market: robustness in the face of network failure, low overhead in the devices running the protocol; and ease of debugging the protocol itself (the last thing you want to debug is the management protocol that is supposed to be helping you debug your network). Thus, the SNMP limited itself to the User Datagram Protocol (UDP). This gave the implementor the ability and responsibility to manage lost packets and perform any necessary retransmissions. As network debugging in the face of changing routes will certainly mean losing packets, retaining this control from the transport service (layer 4) was considered essential. Since a network management protocol will run continuously, it is mandatory that it consume as minimal a network resource as possible. UDP allows the necessary control over packet transmissions, packet size and content

(packetization). It is a natural choice. SNMP has three control primitives that initiate data flow from the requester (get, get-next, and set). There are two control primitives the responder uses to reply. One is used in response to the requester s direct query (get-response) and the other is an asynchronous response to obtain the requester s attention (trap). All five of these primitives are carried by UDP and are thus limited in size by the amount of data that can fit into a single UDP packet. The relatively small message size was a goal of the design but for some reasonable set of network management functions, it imposes a limitation. Often in network management, it is necessary to obtain bulk information without knowing at first what is in that bulk. In one case, there is a set of problems having to do with packets not going where they are supposed to, due to device misconfiguration that prevents proper protocol operation where one needs to view the entire set of data. Using SNMP 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 123 Chapter 4 Network Support Retrieval of Management Information SNMP has the get-next primitive which permits the viewing of data without requiring prior knowledge. If you know what you are looking for, the get primitive will return it. When you want an entire table of information, the get-next primitive will obtain it. However, unless employed with care, the get-next primitive can be extremely resource-intensive in real time, network bandwidth, and the agent s CPU time. The simplest use of the get-next primitive is to start at the beginning of a table, await the response and then issue another get-next with the name returned. As an example, say you wanted the next-hop address, next-hop interface, and route-type from a routing table containing 1000 entries. Using the simplest form of get-next, this would require 2x3x1000 or 6000 packets (get-next and get-response packets, columns, and rows). A straight-forward optimization would be to request the three columns in a single packet. This puts the number of packets at 2x1000 or 2000 packets. In real time, it is the product of the round trip by the number of request. In agent CPU time, this is still 6000 lookups in the routing table for both cases. An Early Approach to Getting More than One Item at a Time Conclusion The ability to retrieve only one piece or object at a time has been a problem for SNMP. This is particularly an issue with the use of this protocol in wireless environments where the wireless datapipe is small and overhead due to network management it is considered overhead. One approach creates multiple get-next requests running concurrently. A second algorithm, reduces the packet count by combining the multiple concurrent get-nexts into a single packet. Neither approach has been implemented which makes network management in wireless environment, though essential to the success of the operation, tenuous. The issue has been resolved in SNMP V2 protocol where a get-bulk primitive has been defined. Software development moves forward by evolving the unknown into the known and wireless environments are moving from vertical only application to wide spread implementation. At the time of the SNMP inception, it was not possible to conceive of a reliable transport based network management protocol. Today s problems require more sophisticated data to analyze a problem. This puts the burden back on the protocol to send and receive data quickly and efficiently. Work continues in subcommittees to improve SNMP and resolve the issues that are developing with new applications and new network architectures. 124 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual SNMP Configuration on the 700 Series Computer Chapter 4 Network Support In short, SNMP is an application-layer protocol that facilitates the ex-

change of management information between network devices. The 700 Series Computer is such an SNMP-enabled device. Use SNMP to control and configure the 700 Series Computer anywhere on an SNMP-enabled network. The 700 Series Computer supports four proprietary Management Infor-

mation Bases (MIBs) and Intermec Technologies provides SNMP support for MIB-II through seven read-only MIB-II (RFC1213-MIB) Object Identifiers (OIDs). Note: You can only query these seven OIDs through an SNMP manage-

ment station, these are not available in the Unit Manager applications. Management Information Base The Management Information Base is a database that contains information about the elements to be managed. The information identifies the manage-

ment element and specifies its type and access mode (Read-Only, Read-

Write). MIBs are written in ASN.1 (Abstract Syntax Notation.1) - a ma-

chine independent data definition language. Note: Elements to be managed are represented by objects. The MIB is a structured collection of such objects. You will find the following MIB files either on the 700C Tools CD or on the web via http://www.intermec.com:

S INTERMEC.MIB Defines the root of the Intermec MIB tree. S ITCADC.MIB Defines objects for Automated Data Collection (ADC), such as bar code symbologies. S ITCSNMP.MIB Defines objects for Intermec SNMP parameters and security methods, such as an SNMP security IP address. S ITCTERMINAL.MIB Defines objects for 700 Series parameters, such as key clicks. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 125 Chapter 4 Network Support Object Identifiers Each object has a unique identifier called an OID. OIDs consist of a se-

quence of integer values represented in dot notation. Objects are stored in a tree structure. OIDs are assigned based on the position of the object in the tree. Seven MIB OIDs are shown in the followig table. Example The internet OID = 1.3.6.1. MIB Object Identifiers MIB-II Item OID ifNumber 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.1.0 Group or Table Interfaces Group Description Indicates the number of adapters present in the system. For the 700 Series Computer, if one adapter is present in the system, then ifNum-

ber = 1 and ifIndex = 1. ifIndex 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.ifIndex Interfaces Table (ifTable) A unique value for each interface. 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.2.ifIndex Interfaces Table (ifTable) A textual string containing informa-

tion about the interface. The value ranges between 1 and the value of ifNumber. ifDescr ifType 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.3.ifIndex ipAdEntAddr 1.3.6.1.2.1.4.20.1.1.IpAddress ipAdEntIfIndex 1.3.6.1.2.1.4.20.1.2.IpAddress ipAdEntNetMask 1.3.6.1.2.1.4.20.1.3.IpAddress IP address Table

(ipAddrTable) Interfaces Table (ifTable) An integer containing information about the type of the interface. It is equal to 1 for Other. The IP address to which this entry s addressing information pertains

(same as 700 IP address), where IP Address is the valid non-zero IP ad-

dress of the 700 Series Computer. The index value that uniquely iden-

tifies the interface to which this entry is applicable (same as ifIndex). The subnet mask associated with the IP address of this entry (same as Subnet Mask). IP address Table

(ipAddrTable) IP address Table

(ipAddrTable) Configuring with SNMP The community string allows an SNMP manager to manage the 700 Series Computer with a specified privilege level. The default read-only communi-

ty string is public and private is the default read/write community string. See the specific configuration parameter to find its OID. To config-

ure the 700 Series Computers using SNMP:

1 Configure 700 Series Computers for RF or Ethernet communications. 2 Determine the OID (Object Identifier) for the parameter to be chan-

ged. The Intermec base OID is 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963. 3 Use your SNMP management station to get and set variables that are defined in the Intermec MIBs. You can set the traps, identification, or security configuration parameters for SNMP. See Appendix A, Control Panel Applets, to learn more about these parameters. 126 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Printer Support 5 The 700 Series Color Mobile Computer works with the following printers from Intermec Technologies. Contact an Intermec Representative for in-

formation about these printers. S 6820 A full-page, 80-column printer. S 6808 A 4-inch belt-mount printer. S 781T A 2-inch belt-mount printer with a Bluetooth compatible module from Socket Communications. S 782T A 2-inch workboard printer. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 127 Chapter 5 Printer Support Printing ASCII Directly to a Port The following methods for printing using Pocket PC at this time is as fol-

lows:

S Add port drivers to print ASCII directly to the port. S Use LinePrinter ActiveX Control from the Software Developer s Kit

(SDK) - see the SDK User s Manual for more information. S Via wireless printing - see the Wireless Printing Development Guide on the 700C Software Tools CD for more information. Printing directly to the port sends RAW data to the printer. The format of this data depends upon your application and the printer capabilities. You must understand the printer commands available for your specific printer. Generally, applications just send raw ASCII text to the printer. Since you are sending data to the printer from your application directly to the port you are in complete control of the printers operations. This allows you to do line printing (print one line at a time) rather than the page for-

mat printing offered by the GDI approach. It is also much faster since data does not have to be converted from one graphics format to the other (dis-

play to printer). Most Intermec printers use Epson Escape Sequences to control print format operations. These commands are available in documentation you receive with your printers or from technical support. Win32 APIs are required to print di-

rectly to the port. Directly to a Generic Serial Port To print directly to a generic serial port printer (non-Intermec printers):

S Use CreateFile() to open ports - COM1: can be opened on most de-

vices. S Use WriteFile() to send data directly to the printer. S Use CloseHandle() when you are finished printing to close the port. IrDA Printer Driver IrDA printing is only available on the certain devices and is supported di-

rectly by the Windows CE load via the IrSock API provided by the Micro-

soft Win32 API without need for additional drivers. Intermec 6804, 6805, 6806, 6808 and 6820 and other IrDA printers are supported. 128 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual NPCP Printer Driver Chapter 5 Printer Support The NPCP printer communications driver (NPCPPORT.DLL) is a Stream Device Driver built into the operating system. The driver supports only NPCP communications to and from the 6820 and 4820 printers over a selected serial port. All applications use WIN32 API functions to access the drivers. Basic op-

erations are easily implemented by applications through the CreateFile(), WriteFile(), ReadFile(), DeviceIOControl(), and CloseHandle() Win32 APIs. Operations to upgrade printer modules, perform printer diagnostics, and get printer configuration are performed largely via DeviceIOControl() functions. NPCP (Norand Portable Communications Protocol) is a proprietary pro-

tocol that provides session, network, and datalink services for Intermec mobile computers in the Intermec LAN environment used with printers and data communications. About NPCP NPCP Driver Installation and Removal Use LPT9: for the NPCP printer device and COM1 for the last parameter. COM1 is the connection available via the 700 Series Computer. Applications use the RegisterDevice() function to install the driver. DeregisterDevice() uninstalls the device driver and frees memory space when the driver is not required. Use the HANDLE returned by RegisterDevice() as the parameter to DeregisterDevice(). Use the RegisterDevice() function call as demonstrated below. Specify the full path name to the driver starting at the root for the RegisterDevice() function to work properly. The last parameter to RegisterDevice() is a DWORD that represents the name of the port for the NPCP stream driver to use. Build this parameter on the stack if it is not to be paged out during the call. The first parameter LPT (Device Name) and the second parameter 9 (index), indicate the name of the registered device, such as LPT9. This is used in the CreateFile() function call. Install()

HANDLE hDevice;

TCHAR port[6];

port[0] = TCHAR(C);

port[1] = TCHAR(O);

port[2] = TCHAR(M);

port[3] = TCHAR(1);

port[4] = TCHAR(:);

port[5] = TCHAR(0);

hDevice = RegisterDevice ( (TEXT(LPT), 9, TEXT(\\STORAGE CARD\\WINDOWS\\NPCPPORT.dll), (DWORD)port);

700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 129 Chapter 5 Printer Support Opening the NPCP Driver The application opens the NPCP driver by using the CreateFile() function. The call can be implemented as follows. The first parameter LPT9: must reflect the device name and index used in the RegisterDevice() function call and will fail for any of the following reasons:

hFile = CreateFile(_T(LPT9:), GENERIC_WRITE |

GENERIC_READ, 0, NULL, OPEN_ALWAYS, FILE_ATTRIBUTE_NORMAL, NULL);

S The port associated with the device during RegisterDevice() is in use. S The NPCP device is already open. S The share mode is not set to zero. The device cannot be shared. S Access permissions are not set to GENERIC_WRITE |

GENERIC_READ. Both modes must be specified. Closing the NPCP Driver Using the CloseHandle() (hFile) function closes the NPCP driver. Where hFile is the handle returned by the CreateFile() function call. S TRUE = the device is successfully closed. S FALSE = an attempt to close NULL HANDLE or an already closed de-

vice. Reading from the NPCP Driver Reading of the NPCP printers is not supported since all responses from the printer are the result of commands sent to the printer. DeviceIoControl() functions are provided where data is to be received from the printer. Writing to the NPCP Driver All Print data can be sent to the printer using the WriteFile() function. The print data written to the driver must contain the proper printer commands for formatting. If the function returns FALSE, the NPCP error may be retrieved using IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR. See the description on the next page. 130 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 5 Printer Support NPCP Driver I/O Controls An application uses the DeviceIoControl() function to specify an printer operation to be performed. Certain I/O controls are required to bind and close communication sessions with the printer, and must be completed before any other commands to the driver can execute properly. The function returns TRUE to indicate the device successfully completed its specified I/O control operation, otherwise it returns FALSE. The following I/O control codes are defined:

#define IOCTL_NPCP_CANCEL CTL_CODE(FILE_DEVICE_SERIAL_PORT,0x400,METHOD_BUFFERED,FILE_ANY_ACCESS)

#define IOCTL_NPCP_BIND CTL_CODE(FILE_DEVICE_SERIAL_PORT,0x401,METHOD_BUFFERED,FILE_ANY_ACCESS)

#define IOCTL_NPCP_CLOSE CTL_CODE(FILE_DEVICE_SERIAL_PORT,0x402,METHOD_BUFFERED,FILE_ANY_ACCESS)

#define IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR CTL_CODE(FILE_DEVICE_SERIAL_PORT,0x403,METHOD_BUFFERED,FILE_ANY_ACCESS)

#define IOCTL_NPCP_FLUSH CTL_CODE(FILE_DEVICE_SERIAL_PORT,0x404,METHOD_BUFFERED,FILE_ANY_ACCESS)

#define IOCTL_NPCP_IOCTL CTL_CODE(FILE_DEVICE_SERIAL_PORT,0x405,METHOD_BUFFERED,FILE_ANY_ACCESS)

#define IOCTL_NPCP_PRTVER CTL_CODE(FILE_DEVICE_SERIAL_PORT,0x406,METHOD_BUFFERED,FILE_ANY_ACCESS) S IOCTL_NPCP_CANCEL This cancels all printing at the printer. It flushes the printer buffers and reinitializes the printer to its default state. No parameters are required. S IOCTL_NPCP_BIND This command is required before any data is sent or received by the printer. Once the driver is opened, the application must bind the com-

munications session with the printer before any data can be sent or re-

ceived by the printer. If an error occurs during the bind, the application may use IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR to get the current extended error code. No parameters are required. S IOCTL_NPCP_CLOSE This command closes the current session with the printer. This function always returns TRUE. No parameters are required. S IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR This command returns the extended NPCP error code in PL/N format. The word returned will contain the PL/N compatible error code in the low byte and completion flags in the high byte. If the frame that re-

turned an error was not received correctly by the printer the FRAME_NOT_ACKED bit will be set in the high byte. This operation always returns TRUE. An output buffer of at least 2 bytes is required. See NPCP Error Codes on page 133. S IOCTL_NPCP_FLUSH This command allows the application to poll the printer for errors while the report is completing the print process at the printer. If an error oc-

curs during the polling process, the operation will return FALSE and the application can get the extended error code by using IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR. No parameters are required. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 131 Chapter 5 Printer Support NPCP Printer Communications All NPCP printer communications should be based on the following flow:

1 Use CreateFile(); to open the printer driver. 2 Use IOCTL_NPCP_BIND to bind a session with the printer;

IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR to check for errors on the bind to ensure suc-

cess; and IOCTL_NPCP_CANCEL to cancel any outstanding print jobs. 3 Use IOCTL_NPCP_FLUSH to poll the printer to free up printer buff-

er resources. Use IOCTL_NPCP_FLUSH to poll the printer s status. If an error is reported by the IOCTL, then use IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR to get the error and determine the correct recovery procedure. 4 Use WriteFile(); to write your data to the printer. Check for errors and that all data were written. Use IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR to get the ex-

tended error. If the error is critical in nature, use IOCTL_NPCP_CLOSE, followed by CloseFile(), to end the commu-

nications session. Start a new session, beginning with step 1 to ensure proper printing. For noncritical errors display the error and retry the operation. 5 After all data is sent to the printer, ensure that the printer continues to print the report properly by polling the printer s status. Use IOCTL_NPCP_FLUSH to poll the printer s status. If an error is re-

ported by the IOCTL, then use IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR to get the er-

ror and determine the correct recovery procedure. See sample code in the \700 Color Dev Tools\Installable Drivers\Port Drivers\Npcp\NPCPPrint\ directory for more details on printing, printer communications and error code handling. Sample Code 132 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 5 Printer Support NPCP Error Codes Call the IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR I/O control function to receive PL/N compatible error codes. Applications must decide how to act upon the data returned.

// Definition of NPCP communications Errors and Printer Errors

#define PNRDY (BYTE)102 // link not ready error

#define RXTMO (BYTE)104 // link no receive error

#define TXTMO (BYTE)106 // link no transmit error

#define BADADR (BYTE)111 // frame address error

#define GAPERR (BYTE)112 // link gap error (timeout) in receive data

#define LSRPE (BYTE)113 // frame parity error on length field

#define IFTS (BYTE)120 // session layer - invalid frame this state

#define NS_NE_VR (BYTE)121 // session layer sequence error

#define NR_NE_VS (BYTE)122 // session layer sequence error

#define MAC_CRCERR (BYTE)124 // MAC CRC error

#define RLENERR (BYTE)123 // MAC too much data received

#define FRMERR (BYTE)200 // Frame Reject

#define FRMERR_IF (BYTE)201 // Frame Reject - Invalid Frame

#define FRMERR_NR (BYTE)202 // Frame Reject - NR Mismatch

#define FRMERR_NS (BYTE)203 // Frame Reject - NS Mismatch

#define NDMERR (BYTE)204 // Normal Disconnect mode error

#define BINDERR (BYTE)210 // bind error

#define IPLDUR (BYTE)221 // invalid presentation layer response

#define HEADJAM (BYTE)222 // printer head jam

#define PAPEROUT (BYTE)223 // printer paper out

#define LOWVOLTS (BYTE)224 // printer low voltage

#define HIVOLTS (BYTE)225 // printer over voltage

#define LOWBAT (BYTE)226 // printer low battery

#define COVEROFF (BYTE)227 // printer cover off error

#define HEADFAULT (BYTE)228 // printer head short or driver short error

#define PFFAULT (BYTE)229 // paper feed motor fault.

#define FRAME_NOT_ACKED 0x8000 // frame was not received by printer and need to be resent. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 133 Chapter 5 Printer Support ONeil Printer Driver The DTR printer communications driver is a Stream Device Driver named ONEIL.DLL. All applications use WIN32 API functions to access drivers. Basic operations are easily implemented by applications through the CreateFile(), WriteFile(), DeviceIOControl() and CloseHandle() Win32 APIs. The driver supports communications to 6804DM, 6804T, 6805A, 6806, 6808, 681T, and 781 printers over a selected serial port. DTR Driver Installation and Removal Your application must install the device driver by using the RegisterDe-

vice() function. The driver name is ONEIL.DLL. We recommend that you use DTR for the Device Name parameter, 1 for the Device Driver index parameter, and use any of the following strings for the last parame-

ter:

S NULL (==0) Defaults to COM1 @ 9600 S COM1 only COM port specified defaults to 9600 S COM1:9600 sets to COM port and specified bit rate S COM1:19200 sets to COM port and specified bit rate Use the HANDLE returned by RegisterDevice() as the parameter to DeregisterDevice(). The correct usage of the RegisterDevice() function call is demonstrated below. You may use DeregisterDevice() to uninstall the driver. Install()

HANDLE hDevice;

TCHAR port[6];

port[0] = TCHAR(C);

port[1] = TCHAR(O);

port[2] = TCHAR(M);

port[3] = TCHAR(1);

port[4] = TCHAR(:);

port[5] = TCHAR(0);

hDevice = RegisterDevice ( (TEXT(DTR), 1, TEXT(\\WINDOWS\\ONEIL.DLL),

(DWORD)port);

134 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Opening the DTR Driver Chapter 5 Printer Support The application opens the DTR driver by using the CreateFile() function. The call can be implemented as follows:

hFile = CreateFile(_T(DTR1:), GENERIC_WRITE, 0, NULL, OPEN_ALWAYS, FILE_ATTRIBUTE_NORMAL, NULL);

The first parameter DTR1: must reflect the device name and index used in the RegisterDevice() function call. The function call will fail for any of the following reasons:

S The port associated with the device during RegisterDevice() is currently in use. S The DTR device is already open. S The share mode is not set to zero. The device cannot be shared. S Access permissions are not set to GENERIC_WRITE. Closing the DTR Driver Using the CloseHandle() (hFile) function closes the DTR driver. Where hFile is the handle returned by the CreateFile() function call. S TRUE indicates the device is successfully closed. S FALSE indicates an attempt to close a NULL HANDLE or an already closed device. Writing to the DTR Driver You can use the WriteFile() function to send all Print data to the printer. The print data being written must contain the proper formatting printer commands. DTR Printer Communications All DTR printer communications should be based on the following flow:

1 Use CreateFile(); to open the printer driver. 2 Use WriteFile() to write your data to the printer. Check for errors and that all data were written. 3 Use CloseHandle() to close the driver. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 135 Chapter 5 Printer Support 136 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Scanner Support 6 The 700 Series Color Mobile Computer is available with imaging or laser scanning technologies, including the following:

S APS linear imager:

Reads 1D symbologies and PDF 417 bar codes. Linear imaging using Vista Scanning technology reads low-contrast bar codes, laminated bar codes, and bar codes displayed on CRT or TRT displays. This imaging uses harmless LEDs for illumination and does not require any warning labels. Vista Scanning is more reliable than lasers as it is a completely solid state with no moving parts or oscillating mirrors. S 2D Imager:

This decodes several stacked 1D and 2D symbologies, including PDF 417 and Data Matrix without painting. It can also read 1D codes from any orientation, for example the scan beam does not need to be aligned perpendicular to the symbol in order to read it. Photography is a secondary application; the lens in the device will favor bar code reading. Photos are 640x480, 256 gray-scale. S 1D laser scanner:

Traditional laser scanner that decodes 1D bar codes. S PDF 417 laser scanner:

Higher speed laser scanner that can read PDF 417 labels by painting the label. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 137 Chapter 6 Scanner Support Scanner Control and Data Transfer Note: To use the methods described below, enable Data Collection func-

tionality on the 700 Computer using the bootloader configuration menu. See Chapter 3, Installing Applications for more information. The Data Server and associated software provide several ways to manipu-

late scanner control and data transfer between the scanner subsystem and user applications:

S Automatic Data Collection COM Interfaces:

These COM interfaces allow user applications to receive bar code data, and configure and control the bar code reader engine. S ITCAxBarCodeReaderControl functions:

These ActiveX controls allow user applications to collect bar code data from the scanner, to configure the scanner, and to configure audio and visual notification when data arrives. For more information, see the SDK User s Manual. S ITCAxReaderCommand functions:

Use these ActiveX controls to modify and retrieve configuration infor-

mation using the reader interface commands. For more information, see the SDK User s Manual. S Scanning EasySet bar code labels:

You can use the EasySet bar code creation software from Intermec Technologies Corporation to print configuration labels. Scan the labels to change the scanner configuration and data transfer settings. Automatic Data Collection COM Interfaces Data collection configuration and functionality cannot be accessed by any means (including control panel applets or remote management applications) until after the 700 Series Computer has completed initialization, which occurs during a warm- or cold-boot or after a firmware upgrade. When initialization is complete, the green LED on the 700 Series Com-

puter stops flashing. Changes made to configuration settings remain after a warm boot. After a cold-boot, all configuration settings are reset to their defaults with the exception of scanner configurations, which remain except for the Symbology Identifier transmission option or the Preamble and Postamble strings. To reset all configuration settings to the factory defaults, the S9C scanner firmware must be reloaded. 138 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Scanner Support The Automatic Data Collection (ADC) functions are accessed through custom COM interfaces. These interfaces allow the application to receive bar code data and configure and control the bar code reader engine. The COM interfaces include the following functions:

S IADC (starting on page 151) S IBarCodeReaderControl (starting on page 159) S IS9CConfig (starting on page 172) S IS9CConfig2 (starting on page 204) S IS9CConfig3 (starting on page 216) S IImage Interface (starting on page 221) Multiple ADC COM Object Support A 700 Series Computer may have multiple reader engines to decode differ-

ent types of ADC data. For example, a bar code reader engine decodes raw bar code data and passes it to a bar code reader COM object. An RFID reader engine decodes raw RFID tag data and passes it to an RFID tag reader COM object. ADC COM interfaces are implemented as in-process COM objects. An instance of the ADC COM object creates a logical connection to access or control the reader engine. Specifically, the IBarCodeReadConfig or IBar-

CodeReaderControl COM objects can manage the bar code scanner con-

figuration while the ADC COM object can gather data simultaneously. These ADC COM objects or connections can be created in a single ap-

plication or multiple applications. Up to seven instances of a COM object can be created for a reader engine. For more information, see How to Create and Use the ADC COM Interfaces below. For data collection features, ADC COM objects also provide for read ahead and non-read ahead data access and grid data editing. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 139 Chapter 6 Scanner Support How to Create and Use the ADC COM Interfaces You can also use the Input Device Functions (starting on page 149) to create and use the ADC COM interfaces. 1 Create and initialize the in-process Bar Code Reader object using ITCDeviceOpen() (see page 149). This function returns a COM Interface pointer to the Bar Code Reader Object created by the function. 2 Set the data grid if data filtering is desired (default grid gives the applica-

tion all the data). Below is a sample code of how to set the grid to accept Code 39 data that starts with the letter A and is not a reader com-

mand. ITC_BARCODEREADER_GRID stBCGrid;

stBCGrid.stDIGrid.szDataMask = TEXT(A%s);

stBCGrid.stDDGrid.dwSymbologyMask = BARCODE_SYMBOLOGY_CODE39;

stBCGrid.dwDataSourceTypeMask = ITC_DATASOURCE_USERINPUT;

HRESULT hrStatus = pIBCControl->SetAttribute(

ITC_RDRATTR_GRID, reinterpret_cast<BYTE *>(&stBCGrid), sizeof(stBCGrid)

3 Issue a read to accept the bar code data. The timestamp, symbology, and data type are put into the ITC_BARCODE_DATA_DETAILS struc-

ture. Passing in a pointer to this structure is optional. The following sample code uses an infinite timeout. ITC_BARCODE_DATA_DETAILS stBCDetails;

BYTE rgbBCData[1024]; // Buffer used to accept the bar code data DWORD dwBytesReceived; // Number of bytes in the return data. HRESULT hrStatus = pIBCControl->Read(

rgbBCData, sizeof(rgbBCData),

&dwBytesReceived,

& stBCDetails, INFINITE

4 Compile and link the application. Read-Ahead Bar Code Data Access The Bar Code Reader COM object delivers ADC data to the connection in read-ahead mode. In this mode, the data is queued until a COM con-

nection is ready to read it. Read-ahead mode decouples reader device per-

formance from the application performance. That is, data is read as fast as the user can scan it, independent of the connection processing load. No data will be scanned until the first Read() function is posted. 140 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Scanner Support Grid Data Filtering The virtual wedge retrieves scanned Automatic Data Collection (ADC) data and sends it to the keypad driver so that the 700 Series Computer can receive and interpret the data as keypad input. The data can be filtered so that only data conforming to a certain text pattern or symbology will be sent to an application. After the data is filtered, it can be edited by adding, deleting, or rearranging portions of the text or by extracting portions of text for further editing. To filter and edit data, you need to define the virtual wedge grid parameters. S Grid Processing:

Grid processing takes place in two steps:

S Compilation:

In which the user s grid expressions are checked for errors and reduced to a binary form for faster matching. This is done whenever the virtual wedge grid is set or changed by configuration software. S Matching:

In which data is tested against the grids set in compilation. Matching can be performed multiple times after a compilation. The AIM symbology ID of the data being tested, including the enclosing angle brackets, must be prepended to the incoming data. Syntax The basic syntax of each grid expression is:

<symID> filter-expression= > editing-expression where:

S symID Is the AIM symbology ID (see the AIM Symbology ID Defaults table starting on page 219). S filterexpression Is any character string that includes valid filter expression values (see the Filter Expression Values table on the next page). S editing-expression Is any character string that includes valid editing expression values (see the Editing Expression Values table on page 144). 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 141 Chapter 6 Scanner Support Filter Expression Values A filter-expression can be any string of text containing the operators listed below. Filter Expression Values Operator Any character string not containing the special characters: . ? [ ] { } or \

(period, question mark, left/right brackets, left/right curly brackets, back-

slash).

\c where c is any of the special char-

acters: . ? [ ] { } or \

(period, question mark, left/right brackets, left/right curly brackets, back-

slash)

. (period)

^ (tarot)

$ (dollar sign)

? (question mark)

* (asterisk)

+ (plus symbol)

[characterclass]

[rangel`rangeh]

[^characterclass]

[characterclass_tag]

{num}

{min,}

142 Meaning Example Match the string literally. super20 matches super20 Remove any special meaning of c.

\* matches *

Any character. Anchor the match at the beginning of the string. Anchor the match at the end of the string. Repeat the preceding expression zero or one time. Repeat the preceding expression zero or more times. Repeat the preceding expression one or more times. A series of nonrepeating characters denoting a class. A sequential range of nonrepeating characters denoting a class. Any character except those denoted by a character class.

[:alnum:] - Alphanumeric characters

[:alpha:] - Alphabetic characters

[:blank:] - Tab and space

[:cntrl:] - Control characters

[:digit:] - Numeric characters

[:graph:] - All printable characters ex-

cept space

[:lower:] - Lowercase letters

[:print:] - All printable characters

[:punct:] - Punctuation

[:space:] - White space characters

[:upper:] - Uppercase letters

[:xdigit:] - Hexadecimal digits Matches exactly num repetitions. Matches at least num repetitions. matches x

^abc matches abc, but not aabc abc$ matches abc but not abcc aa? matches a or aa ab*c matches ac, abc, abbc, etc. ab+c matches abc, abbc, etc.

[abcdefhijklmnopqrstuvwxyz] is the class of all lowercase alphas.

[a-z] is the class of all lowercase al-

phas.

[^a-z] matches a numeric digit or a punctuation mark.

[[:alpha:]]* matches Dynaction, Selmer, or NewWonder but not Su-

per20 a{3} matches only aaa a{3,} matches aaaa but not aa 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Scanner Support Example

[a-z]{1,3} matches a, ab, or aab, but not aabc a|b matches a or b Overriding evaluation order: (ab)*c matches c, abc, ababc, etc. Back-referencing: (aa)bb\1 matches aabbaa. Filter Expression Values (continued) Operator Meaning

{min,max}

(expr1)|(expr2)

(subexpression) A repetition operator like + or *, ex-

cept the number of repetitions is spe-

cified by min and max. Matches expr1 or expr2. Grouping operator to consolidate terms into a subexpression, which can override the order of evaluation. The subexpression is available for lat-

er matching or editing by means of

\index, where \index is between 1-9 and refers to the index-th group in the string, counting from left to right. \0 refers to the whole expres-

sion. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 143 Chapter 6 Scanner Support Editing Expression Values This table lists the valid operators for editing expressions. Operator

\index

& or \0

\xhh any character string Meaning The index-th subexpression (reading left-right) in the matched string. index must be between 0`9. The matched expression itself.

\0 is the matched expression itself. A concise representation of the lower 256 characters in the Unicode set. When con-

verted, this is still a 16-bit value. Inserts any character string in the output string. Example M([0-9]{6})= > \1 produces 270494 when M270494 is scanned, stripping off the first character. M[0-9]{6}= > \0-Conn and M[0-9]{6}= > &-Conn both produce M270494-Conn when M270494 is scanned.

\x0d inserts a carriage return. See previous examples. S <symID> is optional. If present, only data in the indicated symbology is accepted. S If the entire expression is blank, all data is passed unchanged. If = >

editing-expression is omitted, then all data that passes through the filter is returned unchanged. If = > editing expression is present, the data is trans-

formed by editing-expression. S Multiple grid expressions can be compiled and are related in a logical OR fashion. These are expressed as single grid expressions separated by semicolons. When matching is attempted, the first grid expression from left to right that achieves a match will cause the data to be accepted. S All pattern expressions and parsed data are in Unicode. Grid Filter Example 1 This accepts a serial number in which the encoded number is a six-charac-

ter string beginning with M followed by six numeric characters. S Filter M[0-9]{6}

S Effect When a bar code, such as M270494, is scanned, all data is passed. Grid Filter Example 2 This formats a scanned Social Security number and forms it into an XML element tagged SSN. S Filter

([0-9]{3})([0-9]{2})([0-9]{4})= > <SSN > \1-\2-\3</SSN >

S Effect A bar code, such as 123456789, is passed and reformatted to

<SSN > 123-45-6789</SSN >

144 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Scanner Support Grid Filter Example 3 This deletes the first three and last five characters of a 21-character Code 128 label and deletes the first two characters of a 10-character Interleaved 2 of 5 label. S Filter

<]C > ...(.{13}).....= > \1; <]I > ..(........)= > \1 S Effect If Code 128, AAA1234567890123BBBBB becomes 1234567890123 If Interleaved 2 of 5, AA12345678 becomes 12345678 Grid Filter Example 4 This inverts data such that the first alphabetic string (like a first name) and second alphabetic string (like a last name) are reversed and separated by a comma and a space. S Filter

([[:alpha:]])+ ([[:alpha:]])+= > \2, \1 S Effect When a bar code with the data Dexter Gordon is scanned, the data is modified to read Gordon, Dexter. ADC Connection A 700 Series Computer can have both Bar Code and RFID reader engines with each engine supporting multiple connections. Each connection allows an application to access data or manage a configuration. An application could have multiple connections.

// Get an instance of the ADC COM object that corresponds integrated scanner

// Pointer to the Bar Code Reader object

// If the ADC object was successfully created and initialized, accept bar IBarCodeReaderControl *pIBCControl;

HRESULT hrStatus = ITCDeviceOpen( TEXT(default), IID_IBarCodeReaderControl, ITC_DHDEVFLAG_READAHEAD,

(LPVOID *) &pIBCControl);

code data. ITC_BARCODE_DATA_DETAILS stBCDetails;

stBCDetails.wStructSize = sizeof(stBCDetails);

BYTE rgbBCData[1024];

DWORD dwBytesReceived;

HRESULT hrStatus = pIBCControl->Read(

rgbBCData, sizeof(rgbBCData),

&dwBytesReceived,

& stBCDetails, INFINITE

//Buffer used to accept the bar code data

// Number of bytes in the return data. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 145 Chapter 6 Scanner Support 2D Imager Overview The 700 Color optional integrated 2D Imager captures 640x480 256-grayscale images at 20 frames per second. The imager features can be categorized into data collection features and image acquisition features as follows:

Data Collection Features The imager includes a decode engine capable of decoding 2D matrix symbologies such as Data Matrix as well as the traditional 1D and stacked symbologies (see the table on the next page for supported symbologies). The application programming interfaces used to collect bar code data and con-

figure the imager are the same as those used for the laser scanner. This in-

cludes the keyboard wedge as well as the ADC COM interfaces and in-

cludes functionality such as data editing and data filtering. In addition, the imager has the following configuration features (see IS9CConfig3 Func-

tions starting on page 216 for configuration details):

S Aimer LED:

A small, rectangular-aiming LED is displayed periodically during the image capture and decoding process. The initial duration (after scan but-

tons are pressed) of the aimer LED can be configured. This helps to select the specific bar code to be scanned with multiple bar codes in the image. S Scaled Illumination LED:

When the ambient light is not sufficient to decode the bar code, the red illumination LEDs will be turned on to brighten the image. The inten-

sity of the illumination LEDs is scaled to brighten the image just enough for decode. The reduces power consumption and the effect of specular reflection. S Window size and position:

The default window size (640x480) can be reduced in size and posi-

tioned. This is useful in applications where multiple bar codes may be present in the image and the specific bar code must be selected to be read. For example, the window can be sized and positioned around the aimer LED. The entire bar code must reside in the configured window for a good decode. Omni-directional scanning is a feature that does not require configuration. 1D and stacked symbologies as well as 2D matrix symbologies can be scanned with the 700 Series Computer in any orientation. Thus, time is not needed to orient the 700 horizontal as with laser scanners. 146 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Scanner Support The following table shows which bar code symbologies are supported ei-

ther by an imager or by a laser scanner. Bar Code Symbology Imager Laser Scanner Code 39 Interleaved 2 of 5 Standard 2 of 5 Matrix 2 of 5 Code 128 Code 93 Codabar MSI Plessey UPC EAN/EAN 128 Code 11 PDF 417 Micro PDF 417 Telepen Data Matrix QR Code X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Image Acquisition Features The integrated imager provides the following image acquisition features:

S Real-time and Still Image Acquisition:

This includes functions that start and stop image acquisition and read acquired images. S Signature Capture:

This allows the application to retrieve an image of the normalized signa-

ture. This means the image is always oriented as if the picture were tak-

en at right angles to the signature, at the same distance, and in the cen-

ter of the image no matter in what orientation the picture was taken. Signature capture requires a PDF 417 or Code 128 bar code symbology to be present in the image and requires the application to identify the X,Y offsets relative to the center the bar code, the X,Y dimension of image to be captured, and the aspect ratio of the bar code. Note the units are in terms of the narrow element width of the bar code. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 147 Chapter 6 Scanner Support See the following example signature capture label and dimensions. These image acquisition features are provided through the IImage Interface defined on page 221. Bar code height X Intelligent bar code units Y-axis Y 148 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Create and Delete ADC COM Object Functions Chapter 6 Scanner Support Use these functions to create and release ADC COM interfaces. ITCDEVMGMT.H is the header file and ITCDEVMGMT.LIB is the library. ITCDeviceOpen This function opens and initializes a communication channel to the de-

vice. In C++, this function returns a pointer to an interface on which the methods are called. In C, this function returns a handle, which is the first parameter in each of the interface function calls. Syntax HRESULT ITCDeviceOpen( LPCTSTR pszDeviceName, REFIID iid, ITC_DEVICE_FLAGS eDeviceFlags, void** ppvObject );

Parameters pszDevice

[in]

iid eDeviceFlags

[in]

[in]

Pointer to a string that contains the device name on which to initialize the logical connection. The device name (Merlin 1) identifies a communications port. Use default for all internal scanners, such as Imager, SE900, etc. Use ExtScanner for tethered scanners. The identifier of the interface being requested. Enumeration that identifies the read characteristics as follows:

S ITC_DHDEVFLAG_READAHEAD Data is buffered on behalf of the calling applications. Data Buffering starts after the first call to IADC::Read (). S ITC_DHDEVFLAG_NODATA The client application is managing the device to set its configuration or control its interface but not to collect data from the device. ppvObject

[out]

A pointer to the interface pointer identified by iid. If the object does not support this interface, ppvObject is set to NULL. Return Values HRESULT that indicates success or failure. Remarks None. See Also S ITCDeviceClose 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 149 Chapter 6 Scanner Support ITCDeviceClose This function closes the interface opened with ITCDeviceOpen. Syntax:

HRESULT ITCDeviceClose( IUnknown** ppvObject );

Parameters ppvObject

[in,out]

Return Values None. A pointer to the interface pointer created by ITCDeviceOpen. If successful on output, this pointer is set to NULL. Remarks On Windows, this interface decrements the reference count. So alterna-

tively, IUnknown::Release() could be used and must be used if reference counting is performed with IUnknown::AddRef(). On DOS, this function closes all resources associated with the channel. See Also None. 150 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual IADC Functions Chapter 6 Scanner Support IADC functions provide ADC data in an input device independent man-

ner. This interface can receive bar code data, RFID data, and other ADC data from data collection engines, such as a bar code scanner. Use IADC functions if bar code specifics such as symbology are not important to the application. IADC functions are the following. IADC.H is the header file and ITCUUID.LIB contains the IID_IADC Interface GUID value used to obtain the interface. S IADC::CancelReadRequest (page 152) S IADC::Initialize (page 153) S IADC::QueryAttribute (page 154) S IADC::QueryData (page 155) S IADC::Read (page 156) S IADC::SetAttribute (page 157) 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 151 Chapter 6 Scanner Support IADC::CancelReadRequest This function cancels a pending Read() request. This call can be made on a separate thread as a Read() or on the same thread. On a separate thread, the function is useful in unblocking a blocked Read() so that other opera-

tions can be performed. On the same thread, this function is useful in stopping data from being collected on behalf of a Read Ahead Client. Syntax HRESULT IADC::CancelReadRequest( BOOL FlushBufferedData,WORD

*pwTotalDiscardedMessages, DWORD *pdwTotalDiscardedBytes );

Parameters FlushBufferedData

[in] True Flush and discard all already buffered data. False Do not discard data, data will be returned on the next read call. Total number of discarded buffered labels or tags. Total number of discarded bytes. pwTotalDiscardedMessages [in/out]

pdwTotalDiscardedBytes Return Values HRESULT that indicates success or failure. Remarks The return value indicates whether a read was pending. See Also S IADC::Initialize S IADC::QueryAttribute S IADC::QueryData S IADC::Read S IADC::SetAttribute 152 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Scanner Support IADC::Initialize This function initializes a connection by opening a communications chan-

nel with a logical reader engine. The communications port is implicitly identified. This communication channel is required to collect data or con-

figure the device. Syntax HRESULT IADC::Initialize ( LPCTSTR pszDeviceName, ITC_DEVICE_FLAGS eDeviceFlags ) ;

Parameters pszDeviceName eDeviceFlags

[in] Pointer to a string that contains the device name on which to initialize the logical connection. The device name (Merlin 1) identifies a communications port. Use default for all internal scanners, such as Imager, SE900, etc. Use ExtScanner for tethered scanners.

[in] Enumeration that identifies the read characteristic as follows:

S ITC_DHDEVFLAG_READAHEAD Data is buffered on behalf of the calling application. Data buffering starts after the first call to IADC::Read (). Return Values HRESULT that indicates success or failure. Remarks None. See Also S IADC::CancelReadRequest S IADC::QueryAttribute S IADC::QueryData S IADC::Read S IADC::SetAttribute 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 153 Chapter 6 Scanner Support IADC::QueryAttribute This function retrieves a specified attribute that is device-independent. The specified attribute can be a grid or multiclient enable status. Syntax HRESULT IADC::QueryAttribute (

ITC_ADC_ATTRIBUTE_ID eAttribID, BYTE rgbBuffer[], DWORD dwBufferSize, DWORD *pnBufferData );

Parameters eAttribID rgbBuffer

[in]

[out]

dwBufferSize

[in]

pnBufferData [out]

Specifies the attribute. Only one attribute can be queried at a time. See IADC::SetAttribute. Contains buffer for the attribute to be queried. The structure of lpBuffer depends on the attribute being queried. See IADC::SetAttribute for a description of these structures. The maximum number of bytes rgbBuffer can store. Pointer to the DWORD location to put the number of bytes stored in rgbBuffer. Return Values HRESULT that indicates success or failure. Remarks None. See Also S IADC::CancelReadRequest S IADC::Initialize S IADC::QueryData S IADC::Read S IADC::SetAttribute 154 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Scanner Support IADC::QueryData This function returns the status of user input data that has been buffered. Syntax HRESULT IADC::QueryData ( DWORD *dwTotalBufferedBytes, WORD

*wNumberOfMessages, DWORD *dwNextMessageSize );

Parameters dwTotalBufferedBytes wNumberOfMessages

[out]

[out]

dwNextMessageSize

[out]

Total bytes buffered for connection. Total messages buffered. For example, each buffer contains a single bar code scan. Size (in bytes) of the next buffered message. Return Values A standard status code that indicates success or failure. Remarks None. See Also S IADC::CancelReadRequest S IADC::Initialize S IADC::QueryAttribute S IADC::Read S IADC::SetAttribute 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 155 Chapter 6 Scanner Support IADC::Read This function requests user input data from the reader engine. This is a blocking function that returns either when there is data or after a timeout. Syntax HRESULT IADC::Read ( BYTE rgbDataBuffer[], DWORD dwDataBufferSize, DWORD pnBytesReturned, SYSTEMTIME pSystemTime, DWORD dwTimeout );

Parameters rgbDataBuffer dwDataBufferSize

[in]

[in]

pnBytesReturned

[out]

pSystemTime

[out]

dwTimeout

[in]

Pointer to the buffer that receives the data from the device. Maximum number of bytes that can be stored in rgbDataBuffer. Pointer to the DWORD location to store the number of bytes returned in rgbDataBuffer. Pointer to a SYSTEMTIME structure that will hold the time stamp of the received data. This can be NULL if a timestamp is not needed. Number of milliseconds caller waits for data. This parameter is ignored if the Read Ahead flag is not set. S 0 If data is not available, returns quickly. S INFINITE Waits until data is available. Return Values HRESULT that indicates success or failure. Remarks None. See Also S IADC::CancelReadRequest S IADC::Initialize S IADC::QueryAttribute S IADC::QueryData S IADC::SetAttribute 156 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Scanner Support IADC::SetAttribute This function changes an attribute such as a grid specification. Syntax HRESULT IADC::SetAttribute ( ITC_ADC_ATTRIBUTE_ID eAttribID, BYTE rgbData[], DWORD nBufferSize );

Parameters eAttribID

[in]

Identifies the attribute to set. Only one attribute can be set at a time. The attribute is:

S ITC_MULTICLIENT_ENABLE Indicates whether this client can coexist with other clients. rgbData

[in] Contains data for the attribute to be set. Depending on the eAttribID, this will be mapped to the appropriate structure as follows:

S ITC_MULTICLIENT_ENABLE BOOL is the rgbData Data Structure. S TRUE, Client can receive data with other clients (default). S FALSE, Data stream to this client is turned off when there are other clients. S ITC_DHATTR_READFILTER ITC_READFILTER is the rgbData Data Structure. The ITC_READFILE structure is defined in IADCDEVICE.H as follows:

typedef struct

#define ITC_MAXFILTER_CHARS 240 WORD TCHAR nFilterChars;

szFilter[ITC_MAXFILTER_CHARS];

} ITC_READFILTER;

where:

S ITC_MAXFILTER_CHARS Maximum number of characters in a filter specification. Includes NULL termination. S nFilterChars Number of characters in S szFilter pszDataMask. Data mask specification. See Grid Data Filtering.

[in] Number of bytes in rgbData. nBufferSize ITC_DHATTR_READFILTER Regular expression that performs data filtering and data editing. See Grid Data Filtering on page 141 for more information. Return Values A standard status code that indicates success or failure. Remarks None. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 157 Chapter 6 Scanner Support See Also S IADC::CancelReadRequest S IADC::Initialize S IADC::QueryAttribute S IADC::QueryData S IADC::Read 158 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual IBarCodeReaderControl Functions Chapter 6 Scanner Support IBarCodeReaderControl functions provide functionality for bar code collection and control only. These functions allow an application to:

S Trigger the bar code laser scanner S Disable the scanner S Receive a bar code with details such as symbology scanned, data type

(Unicode, ASCII), and the time the data was received. These functions include the following. IBARCODEREADER.H is the header file and ITCUUID.LIB contains the IID_IADC Interface GUID value used to obtain the interface. S IBarCodeReaderControl::CancelReadRequest (page 160) S IBarCodeReaderControl::ControlLED (page 161) S IBarCodeReaderControl::Initialize (page 162) S IBarCodeReaderControl::IssueBeep (page 163) S IBarCodeReaderControl::QueryAttribute (page 164) S IBarCodeReaderControl::Read (page 165) S IBarCodeReaderControl::SetAttribute (page 167) S IBarCodeReaderControl::TriggerScanner (page 171) 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 159 Chapter 6 Scanner Support IBarCodeReaderControl::CancelReadRequest This function cancels a pending IBarCodeReaderControl::Read request. If the read request is blocked, issue the CancelReadRequest from a separate thread. Syntax HRESULT IBarCodeReaderControl::CancelReadRequest( BOOL FlushBufferedData, WORD *pwTotalDiscardedMessages,WORD

*pwTotalDiscardedBytes );

Parameters FlushBufferedData

[in] TRUE pwTotalDiscardedMessages [in/out]

pwTotalDiscardedBytes Flushes and discards all buffered data. FALSE Does not discard data; data will be returned on the next read call. Total number of discarded buffered labels or tags. Total number of discarded bytes. Return Values HRESULT that indicates success or failure. Remarks None. See Also S IBarCodeReaderControl::ControlLED S IBarCodeReaderControl::Initialize S IBarCodeReaderControl::IssueBeep S IBarCodeReaderControl::QueryAttribute S IBarCodeReaderControl::Read S IBarCodeReaderControl::SetAttribute S IBarCodeReaderControl::TriggerScanner 160 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Scanner Support IBarCodeReaderControl::ControlLED This function controls LED illumination on a tethered scanner. The good read LED and any valid LEDs will be turned on and off based on defined parameters. Syntax HRESULT IBarCodeReaderControl::ControlLED(

ITC_BARCODE_LASER_LED_ID eLED, BOOL fLedOn );

Parameters eLED

[in] The specified LED identifier. S ITC_BARCODE_LASER_GOOD_READ_LED Identifies the good read LED. fLedOn

[in] TRUE turns on the LED. FALSE turns off the LED. Return Values HRESULT that indicates success or failure. Remarks This function does not coordinate LED control with the scanner. If the scanner LED control is enabled, function results will be unpredictable. See Also S IBarCodeReaderControl::CancelReadRequest S IBarCodeReaderControl::Initialize S IBarCodeReaderControl::IssueBeep S IBarCodeReaderControl::QueryAttribute S IBarCodeReaderControl::Read S IBarCodeReaderControl::SetAttribute S IBarCodeReaderControl::TriggerScanner 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 161 Chapter 6 Scanner Support IBarCodeReaderControl::Initialize This function opens and initializes a communications channel with a log-

ical bar code reader engine. Syntax HRESULT IBarCodeReaderControl::Initialize ( LPCTSTR pszDeviceName, ITC_DEVICE_FLAGS eDeviceFlags ) ;

Parameters pszDeviceName eDeviceFlags

[in] Pointer to a string with device on which to initialize the logical connection. The device identifies a communications port. Use default for all internal scanners, such as Imager, SE900, etc. Use ExtScanner for tethered scanners.

[in] Enumeration that identifies the read characteristic as follows:

S ITC_DHDEVFLAG_READAHEAD Data is buffered on behalf of the calling applications. Data Buffering starts after the first call to IADC::Read (). Return Values HRESULT that indicates success or failure. Remarks None. See Also S IBarCodeReaderControl::CancelReadRequest S IBarCodeReaderControl::ControlLED S IBarCodeReaderControl::IssueBeep S IBarCodeReaderControl::QueryAttribute S IBarCodeReaderControl::Read S IBarCodeReaderControl::SetAttribute S IBarCodeReaderControl::TriggerScanner 162 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Scanner Support IBarCodeReaderControl::IssueBeep This function causes the reader engine to generate a high beep, a low beep, or a custom beep. The high beep and low beep are preconfigured beep tones and durations. The custom beep allows the client to specify the fre-

quency and duration. The volume is the current volume setting. Note this is not implemented. Syntax HRESULT IBarCodeReaderControl::IssueBeep( ITC_BEEP_SPEC rgBeepRequests[], DWORD dwNumberOfBeeps );

Parameters rgBeepRequests

[in] Array of ITC_BEEP_SPEC structures that identifies the beep type. The beep structure is:

typedef struct tagITCBeepSpec

ITC_BEEP_TYPE eBeepType; // Identifies the type of beep

// Following fields used only if the beep type is ITC_CUSTOM_BEEP. WORD wPitch; // Frequency, in Hz, of the beep. WORD wOnDuration; // Duration, in milliseconds, of Beep On. WORD wOffDuration; // Duration, in milliseconds, of Beep Off

// Beep Off is used to separate individual beeps

} ITC_BEEP_SPEC;

typedef enum tagITCBeepType

ITC_LOW_BEEP, // Issue the default low beep. ITC_HIGH_BEEP, // Issue the default high beep. ITC_CUSTOM_BEEP, // Issue a custom beep.

} ITC_BEEP_TYPE;

dwNumberOfBeeps

[in]

Identifies the total number of beeps in rgBeepRequests. Return Values E_NOTIMPL as this function is not implemented. Remarks None. See Also S IBarCodeReaderControl::CancelReadRequest S IBarCodeReaderControl::ControlLED S IBarCodeReaderControl::Initialize S IBarCodeReaderControl::QueryAttribute S IBarCodeReaderControl::Read S IBarCodeReaderControl::SetAttribute S IBarCodeReaderControl::TriggerScanner 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 163 Chapter 6 Scanner Support IBarCodeReaderControl::QueryAttribute This function retrieves the device-specific grid, the scanner enable status, and the LED control status for the current bar code reader engine. Syntax HRESULT IBarCodeReaderControl::QueryAttribute (

ITC_BARCODEREADER_ATTRIBUTE_ID eAttr, BYTE rgbAttrBuffer[], DWORD dwAttrBufferSize );

Parameters eAttr

[in]

rgbAttrBuffer

[out]

dwAttrBufferSize

[in]

Specifies the attribute. See IBarCodeReaderControl::SetAttribute on page 167 for the attributes. Contains buffer for the attribute to be queried. The structure of rgbAttrBuffer depends on the attribute being queried. See IBarCodeReaderControl::SetAttritbute for a description of these structures. The maximum number of bytes that rgbAttrBuffer can store. Return Values A standard status code that indicates success or failure. Remarks The following attributes are not supported on the imager:

S ITC_RDRATTR_TONE_ENABLE S ITC_RDRATTR_VOLUME_LEVEL S ITC_RDRATTR_TONE_FREQUENCY S ITC_RDRATTR_GOOD_READ_BEEPS_NUMBER S ITC_RDRATTR_GOOD_READ_BEEP_DURATION See Also S IBarCodeReaderControl::CancelReadRequest S IBarCodeReaderControl::ControlLED S IBarCodeReaderControl::Initialize S IBarCodeReaderControl::IssueBeep S IBarCodeReaderControl::Read S IBarCodeReaderControl::SetAttribute S IBarCodeReaderControl::TriggerScanner 164 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Scanner Support IBarCodeReaderControl::Read This function reads data from the bar code input device. This method per-

forms the same function as IADC::Read () except that it provides addition-

al information about data received such as bar code symbology used, data type, and time stamp of received data. Syntax HRESULT IBarCodeReaderControl::Read ( BYTE rgbDataBuffer[],DWORD dwDataBufferSize, DWORD pnBytesReturned,ITC_BARCODE_DATA_DETAILS pBarCodeDataDetails, DWORD dwTimeout );

Parameters rgbDataBuffer

[in]

Pointer to the buffer that receives data from the device. Maximum number of bytes that can be stored in rgbDataBuffer. Pointer to the DWORD location that will store the bytes returned in rgbDataBuffer. Address of data structure in which to put the data details. This may be NULL. The ITC_BARCODE_DATA_DETAILS is:

dwDataBufferSize

[in]

pnBytesReturned

[out]

pBarCodeDataDetails

[in]

typedef struct tagITCBarCodeDetails

WORD wStructSize, ITC_BARCODE_SYMBOLOGY_ID eSymbology, ITC_BARCODE_DATATYPE eDataType, SYSTEMTIME stTimeStamp,

}ITC_BARCODE_DATA_DETAILS;

typedef enum tagBarCodeDataType

BARCODE_DATA_TYPE_UNKNOWN = 1, BARCODE_DATA_TYPE_ASCII, BARCODE_DATA_TYPE_UNICODE,

}ITC_BARCODE_DATATYPE;

Size of structure. Used for versioning structure. Symbology of the returned data. Identifies data types as ASCII, UNICODE, etc. Timestamp of the received data. where:

S wStructSize S eSymbology S eDataType S stTimeStamp S BARCODE_DATA_TYPE_UNKNOWN Data in unknown. S BARCODE_DATA_TYPE_ASCII S BARCODE_DATA_TYPE_UNICODE Data is ASCII. Data is UNICODE. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 165 Chapter 6 Scanner Support dwTimeout

[in]

Number of milliseconds caller waits for data. If you set a timeout, the call will be blocked until data is received. S 0 If data not available, returns quickly. S INFINITE Waits until data is available. Return Values HRESULT that indicates success or failure. Remarks None. See Also S IBarCodeReaderControl::CancelReadRequest S IBarCodeReaderControl::ControlLED S IBarCodeReaderControl::Initialize S IBarCodeReaderControl::IssueBeep S IBarCodeReaderControl::QueryAttribute S IBarCodeReaderControl::SetAttribute S IBarCodeReaderControl::TriggerScanner 166 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Scanner Support IBarCodeReaderControl::SetAttribute This function enables and disables the laser scanner, sets the bar code read-

er engine specific grid, and enables or disables the reader engine LED con-

trol. Syntax HRESULT IBarCodeReaderControl::SetAttribute (

ITC_BARCODEREADER_ATTRIBUTE_ID eAttr, BYTE rgbAttrBuffer[], DWORD dwAttrBufferSize );

Parameters eAttr

[in]

Identifies the attribute to set. Only one attribute can be set at a time. The attributes are:

S ITC_RDRATTR_SCANNER_ENABLE Enable or disable scanner for all connections. S ITC_RDRATTR_GOOD_READ_LED_ENABLE Enables and disables the reader engine from controlling the good read LED. S ITC_RDRATTR_TONE_ENABLE Enables and disables the reader engine from issuing beeps. S ITC_RDRATTR_VOLUME_LEVEL Sets beep volume level. S ITC_RDRATTR_TONE_FREQUENCY Sets beep frequency. S ITC_RDRATTR_GOOD_READ_BEEPS_NUMBER Sets number of beeps for a good read. S ITC_RDRATTR_GOOD_READ_BEEP_DURATION Sets duration of beeps for a good read. S ITC_DHATTR_READFILTER The ITC_READFILTER is the rgbData Data Structure. The ITC_READFILE structure is defined in IADCDEVICE.H as follows:

typedef struct

#define ITC_MAXFILTER_CHARS 240 WORD nFilterChars;

TCHAR szFilter[ITC_MAXFILTER_CHARS];

} ITC_READFILTER;

where:

S nFilterChars Number of characters in pszDataMask. S szFilter Data mask specification. See Grid Data Filtering. S ITC_MAXFILTER_CHARS Maximum number of characters in a filter specification. Includes NULL termination. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 167 Chapter 6 Scanner Support rgbAttrBuffer [in] Contains data for the attribute to be set. Depending on eAttr, the rgbAttrData will be mapped to the appropriate structure as shown in the following table . rgbAttrBuffer Data Structures eAttr ITC_RDRATTR_GRID ITC_RDRATTR_SCANNER_ENABLE Data Structure contained in rgbAttrBuffer ITC_BARCODEREADER_READER_GRID Reader Engine specific grid only. BOOL TRUE Enable scanner. FALSE Disable scanner. ITC_RDRATTR_GOOD_READ_LED_ENABLE BOOL TRUE Reader Engine controls good read LED. FALSE Good read LED is not controlled. ITC_RDRATTR_DATA_VALID_LED_ENABLE BOOL TRUE Reader Engine controls data valid LED. FALSE Data valid LED is not controlled. ITC_RDRATTR_TONE_ENABLE BOOL ITC_RDRATTR_VOLUME_LEVEL ITC_RDRATTR_TONE_FREQUENCY TRUE Reader Engine issues beeps. FALSE Beeps are not issued. ITC_BEEP_VOLUME An enumerator that identifies the beep volume level con-

trol. Valid range for S9C:

typedef enum tagBeepVolume

ITC_BEEP_VOLUME_LOW = 0, ITC_BEEP_VOLUME_MEDIUM = 2, ITC_BEEP_VOLUME_HIGH = 1 //Default

}ITC_BEEP_VOLUME Note: Due to the hardware design on this 700 Series Com-

puter, the volume level can be either OFF (ITC_BEEP_VOLUME_LOW) or ON (ITC_BEEP_VOLUME_MEDIUM/HIGH). DWORD A value that identifies the tone frequency in Hz. Valid range for S9C: 1000`4095 Hz (default: 2090). Note: Value is divided by 10 for storage. On retrieval, the scanner rounds off the value to the nearest 10 Hz, then mul-

tiplies the value by 10. For example, the value sent to the scanner is 2095. On retrieval, the value returned is 2090. 168 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual rgbAttrBuffer Data Structures (continued) eAttr ITC_RDRATTR_GOOD_READ_BEEPS_NUMBER Chapter 6 Scanner Support Data Structure contained in rgbAttrBuffer ITC_GOOD_READ_BEEPS_NUMBER An enumerator identifying the good read beeps number. Valid range for S9C:

typedef enum tagGoodReadBeepsNumber

ITC_NUM_BEEPS_NONE = 0, ITC_NUM_BEEPS_ONE = 1, // Default ITC_NUM_BEEPS_TWO = 2

}ITC_GOOD_READ_BEEPS_NUMBER ITC_RDRATTR_GOOD_READ_BEEP_DURATION DWORD Value identifying the good read beep duration in ms. Valid range for S9C: 0`2550 ms (Default: 80). Note: Value is divided by 10 for storage. On retrieval, the scanner rounds the value to the nearest 10 ms, then multi-

plies the value by 10. dwAttrBufferSize

[in] The size of rgbAttrBuffer in bytes. Return Values HRESULT that indicates success or failure. Remarks Read ahead and non-read ahead clients can change the grid. Since changing the grid changes the entire reader engine grid, use IBarCodeReaderControl::QueryAttribute to retrieve the current reader engine grid and grid changes before sending back using SetAttribute. The grid structure is typedef struct tagBarCodeReaderGrid.

ITC_DI_GRID stDIGrid; // Device independent grid. ITC_DDBARCODE_GRID stDDGrid; // Reader engine dependent grid DWORD dwDataSourceTypeMask;

} ITC_BARCODEREADER_GRID;

ITC_DI_GRID typedef struct tagItcBarCodeGrid

DWORD dwSymbologyMask; // Symbologies to be received.

} ITC_DDBARCODE_GRID;

When the scanner is enabled, it scans when the scan button is pressed or the trigger is pulled. When the scanner is disabled, it does not respond when the scan button is pressed or the trigger is pulled. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 169 Chapter 6 Scanner Support The following attributes are not supported on the imager:

S ITC_RDRATTR_TONE_ENABLE S ITC_RDRATTR_VOLUME_LEVEL S ITC_RDRATTR_TONE_FREQUENCY S ITC_RDRATTR_GOOD_READ_BEEPS_NUMBER S ITC_RDRATTR_GOOD_READ_BEEP_DURATION See Also S IBarCodeReaderControl::CancelReadRequest S IBarCodeReaderControl::ControlLED S IBarCodeReaderControl::Initialize S IBarCodeReaderControl::IssueBeep S IBarCodeReaderControl::QueryAttribute S IBarCodeReaderControl::Read S IBarCodeReaderControl::TriggerScanner 170 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Scanner Support IBarCodeReaderControl::TriggerScanner This function turns the scanner on and off. The client application must coordinate control of the scanner with the user. Syntax HRESULT IBarCodeReaderControl::TriggerScanner ( BOOL fScannerOn );

Parameters fScannerOn

[in] Set TRUE to turn the scanner on. Set FALSE to turn the scanner off. Return Values HRESULT that indicates success or failure. Remarks The scanner will be turned on or off independent of the actions of the us-

ers. The client application must coordinate control of the scanner with the user. When the scanner is turned on, its behavior is controlled by the trig-

ger mode. That is, in one shot mode, the laser turns off when a label is scanned; in auto-trigger mode, the laser remains on. See Also S IBarCodeReaderControl::CancelReadRequest S IBarCodeReaderControl::ControlLED S IBarCodeReaderControl::Initialize S IBarCodeReaderControl::IssueBeep S IBarCodeReaderControl::QueryAttribute S IBarCodeReaderControl::Read S IBarCodeReaderControl::SetAttribute 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 171 Chapter 6 Scanner Support IS9CConfig Functions This interface provides methods to set and retrieve the 700 Series Com-

puter bar code configuration. All supported symbologies are initialized to their defaults when the S9C firmware is loaded. GET/SET functions use enumerations as their parameters. In most enu-

merations, there is an enumerator xx_NO_CHANGE (such as ITC_CODE39_NO_CHANGE), where xx refers to a particular enum-

eration. This enumerator can be used during a call to a SET to indicate that no change is to be made to that particular parameter. This prevents the called function from having to format the same S9C command and send down to the S9C scanner. For all symbologies, to set a bar code length of any length, use a value of 0 for the bar code length argument. IS9CConfig functions are the following. IS9CCONFIG.H is the header file and ITCUUID.LIB contains the IID_IADC Interface GUID value used to obtain the interface. S IS9CConfig::GetCodabar (page 173) S IS9CConfig::SetCodabar (page 174) S IS9CConfig::GetCode39 (page 176) S IS9CConfig::SetCode39 (page 177) S IS9CConfig::GetCode93 (page 179) S IS9CConfig::SetCode93 (page 179) S IS9CConfig::GetCode128 (page 180) S IS9CConfig::SetCode128 (page 181) S IS9CConfig::GetI2of5 (page 183) S IS9CConfig::SetI2of5 (page 184) S IS9CConfig::GetMatrix2of5 (page 185) S IS9CConfig::SetMatrix2of5 (page 186) S IS9CConfig::GetMSI (page 187) S IS9CConfig::SetMSI (page 187) S IS9CConfig::GetPDF417 (page 188) S IS9CConfig::SetPDF417 (page 189) S IS9CConfig::GetPlessey (page 192) S IS9CConfig::SetPlessey (page 192) S IS9CConfig::GetStandard2of5 (page 194) S IS9CConfig::SetStandard2of5 (page 195) S IS9CConfig::GetTelepen (page 197) S IS9CConfig::SetTelepen (page 197) S IS9CConfig::GetUpcEan (page 198) S IS9CConfig::SetUpcEan (page 200) 172 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Scanner Support IS9CConfig::GetCodabar This function retrieves the current settings of Codabar symbology. Syntax HRESULT IS9CConfig::GetCodabar( ITC_CODABAR_DECODING*

peDecode, ITC_CODABAR_START_STOP* peSS, ITC_CODABAR_CLSI*

peCLSI, ITC_CODABAR_CHECK_DIGIT* peCheck, ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH_ID* peLengthId, BYTE rgbLengthBuff[], DWORD* pdwNumBytes );

Parameters peDecode peSS peCLSI peCheck

[out]

[out]

[out]

[out]

peLengthId

[out]

Pointer to the ITC_CODABAR_DECODING location to receive the decoding for Codabar symbology. Pointer to the ITC_CODABAR_START_STOP location to receive the Start/Stop option. Pointer to the ITC_CODABAR_CLSI location to receive the CLSI library system. Pointer to the ITC_CODABAR_CHECK_DIGIT location to receive the check digit. Pointer to the ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH_ID location to receive an indicator of either ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH or ITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH. rgbLengthBuff

[out,size_is(3)]

pdwNumBytes

[out]

An array of bytes to receive 1 byte of data for ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH, or 3 bytes of data for ITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH. Pointer to the DWORD location to receive a number indicating number of bytes in rbgLengthBuff[]: 1 byte for ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH or 3 bytes for ITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH. Return Values HRESULT that indicates success or failure. Remarks None. See Also None. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 173 Chapter 6 Scanner Support IS9CConfig::SetCodabar This function updates the Codabar settings with new values. Syntax HRESULT IS9CConfig::SetCodabar( ITC_CODABAR_DECODING eDecode, ITC_CODABAR_START_STOP eSS, ITC_CODABAR_CLSI eCLSI,ITC_CODABAR_CHECK_DIGIT eCheck, ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH_ID eLengthId, BYTE rgbLengthBuff[],DWORD dwNumBytes );

Parameters eDecode eSS eCLSI eCheck eLengthId Identifies the decoding for Codabar symbology. Identifies the Start/Stop option. Identifies the CLSI library system. Identifies the check digit.

[in]

[in]

[in]

[in]

[in] Use ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE to indicate no change for bar code length. Use ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH for any length and minimum length, and set rgbLengthBuff[0] to a valid length value. Use ITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH to compose 1 or 2 or 3 fixed lengths, and set 3 bytes:

rgbLengthBuff[0], rgbLengthBuff[1], rgbLengthBuff[2] with valid values. rgbLengthBuff dwNumBytes

[in,size_is(dwNumBytes)]

An array of bytes containing bar code lengths when eLengthId = ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH or ITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH.

[in] Number of bytes in rbgLengthBuff[]. For S9C, this value is 1 when eLengthId = ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH or 3 when eLengthId =

ITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH Return Values HRESULT that indicates success or failure. Remarks None. See Also None. 174 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Scanner Support Codabar Default Settings Parameter Default Valid Range Not Active Decode CLSI Library System Not Active Start/Stop Check Digit Bar Code Length Not Transmitted Not Used Minimum Length = 6 ITC_CODABAR_DECODING ITC_CODABAR_CLSI ITC_CODABAR_START_STOP ITC_CODABAR_CHECK_DIGIT 0x00`0xFE ITC_BC_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE Codabar Enumerations

// Default

// Default

// a,b,c,d

// A,B,C,D

// a,b,c,d / t,n,*,e

// DC1,DC2,DC3,DC4

// Default

// Default typedef enum tagCodabarDecoding

ITC_CODABAR_NOTACTIVE = 0, ITC_CODABAR_ACTIVE = 1, ITC_CODABAR_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_CODABAR_DECODING;

typedef enum tagCodabarStartStop

ITC_CODABAR_SS_NOTXMIT, ITC_CODABAR_SS_LOWERABCD, ITC_CODABAR_SS_UPPERABCD, ITC_CODABAR_SS_LOWERABCDTN, ITC_CODABAR_SS_DC1TODC4, ITC_CODABAR_SS_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_CODABAR_START_STOP;

typedef enum tagCodabarClsi

ITC_CODABAR_CLSI_NOTACTIVE = 0, ITC_CODABAR_CLSI_ACTIVE = 1, ITC_CODABAR_CLSI_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_CODABAR_CLSI;

typedef enum tagCodabarCheckDigit

ITC_CODABAR_CHECK_NOTUSED, ITC_CODABAR_CHECK_XMIT, ITC_CODABAR_CHECK_NOTXMIT, ITC_CODABAR_CHECK_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_CODABAR_CHECK_DIGIT;

typedef enum tagBarcodeLengthId

ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH = 0, ITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH, ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH_ID;

700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 175 Chapter 6 Scanner Support IS9CConfig::GetCode39 This function retrieves the current settings of Code 39. Syntax HRESULT IS9Cconfig::GetCode39( ITC_CODE39_DECODING*

peDecode, ITC_CODE39_FORMAT* peFormat, ITC_CODE39_START_STOP* peSS,ITC_CODE39_SS_CHARS* peSSChars, ITC_CODE39_CHECK_DIGIT* peCheck, DWORD* pwLength );

Parameters peDecode

[out]

peFormat

[out]

peSS

[out]

peSSChars

[out]

peCheck

[out]

pwLength

[out]

Pointer to the ITC_CODE39_DECODING location to receive the decoding for Code 39. Pointer to the ITC_CODE39_FORMAT location to receive the Code 39 format. Pointer to the ITC_CODE39_START_STOP location to receive the Code 39 start/stop. Pointer to the ITC_CODE39_SS_CHARS location to receive the Start/Stop character. Pointer to the ITC_CODE39_CHECK_DIGIT location to receive the check digit. Pointer to the DWORD location to receive the bar code length. Return Values HRESULT that indicates success or failure. Remarks None. See Also None. 176 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Scanner Support IS9CConfig::SetCode39 This function updates the Code 39 settings with new values. Syntax HRESULT IS9CConfig::SetCode39( ITC_CODE39_DECODING eDecode,ITC_CODE39_FORMAT eFormat, ITC_CODE39_START_STOP eSS,ITC_CODE39_SS_CHARS eSSChars, ITC_CODE39_CHECK_DIGIT eCheck, DWORD dwLength );

Parameters eDecode eFormat eSS eSSChars eCheck dwLength

[in]

[in]

[in]

[in]

[in]

[in]

Identifies the decoding for Code 39. Identifies the Code 39 Format. Identifies the Start/Stop option. Identifies the Start/Stop character. Identifies the Check digit. Identifies the bar code length. Return Values HRESULT that indicates success or failure. Remarks None. See Also None. Code 39 Default Settings Parameter Default Valid Range Decoding Format Start/Stop Accepted Start/stop Characters Check Digit Bar Code Length Active Standard 43 Character Not Transmitted

* only Not Used Any Bar Code Length ITC_CODE39_DECODING ITC_CODE39_FORMAT ITC_CODE39_START_STOP ITC_CODE39_SS_CHARS ITC_CODE39_CHECK_DIGIT 0x00`0xFE ITC_BC_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 177 Chapter 6 Scanner Support Code 39 Enumerations typedef enum tagCode39Decoding

ITC_CODE39_NOTACTIVE = 0, ITC_CODE39_ACTIVE = 1, ITC_CODE39_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_CODE39_DECODING;

typedef enum tagCode39Format

ITC_CODE39_FORMAT_STANDARD43, ITC_CODE39_FORMAT_FULLASCII, ITC_CODE39_FORMAT_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_CODE39_FORMAT;

typedef enum tagCode39StartStop

ITC_CODE39_SS_NOTXMIT, ITC_CODE39_SS_XMIT, ITC_CODE39_SS_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_CODE39_START_STOP;

typedef enum tagCode39StartStopChars

ITC_CODE39_SS_CHARS_DOLLARSIGN, ITC_CODE39_SS_CHARS_ASTERISK, ITC_CODE39_SS_CHARS_BOTH, ITC_CODE39_SS_CHARS_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_CODE39_SS_CHARS;

typedef enum tagCode39CheckDigit

ITC_CODE39_CHECK_NOTUSED, ITC_CODE39_CHECK_MOD43_XMIT, ITC_CODE39_CHECK_MOD43_NOTXMIT, ITC_CODE39_CHECK_FRENCH_CIP_XMIT, ITC_CODE39_CHECK_FRENCH_CIP_NOTXMIT, ITC_CODE39_CHECK_ITALIAN_CPI_XMIT, ITC_CODE39_CHECK_ITALIAN_CPI_NOTXMIT, ITC_CODE39_CHECK_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_CODE39_CHECK_DIGIT;

// Default

// Default

// Default

// Default

// Default 178 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Scanner Support IS9CConfig::GetCode93 This function retrieves the current settings of Code 93. Syntax HRESULT IS9CConfig::GetCode93( ITC_CODE93_DECODING*

peDecode, DWORD* pdwLength );

Parameters peDecode

[out]

pdwLength

[out]

Pointer to the ITC_CODE93_DECODING location to receive the decoding for Code 93 symbology. Pointer to the DWORD location to receive a value for bar code length. Return Values HRESULT that indicates success or failure. Remarks None. See Also None. IS9CConfig::SetCode93 This function updates the Code 93 settings with new values. Syntax HRESULT IS9CConfig::SetCode93( ITC_CODE93_DECODING eDecode,DWORD dwLength );

Parameters eDecode dwLength

[in]

[in]

Identifies the decoding for Code93 Symbology. Identifies the bar code length. Return Values HRESULT that indicates success or failure. Remarks None. See Also None. Code 93 Default Settings Parameter Default Valid Range Decoding Bar Code Length Not Active Any Bar Code Length ITC_CODE93_DECODING 0x00`0xFE ITC_BC_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 179 Chapter 6 Scanner Support Code 93 Enumerations Use this when the bar code length does not require any change. typedef enum tagCode93Decoding

ITC_CODE93_NOTACTIVE = 0, ITC_CODE93_ACTIVE = 1, ITC_CODE93_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_CODE93_DECODING;

#define ITC_BC_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE 255.

// Default IS9CConfig::GetCode128 This function retrieves the current settings of Code 128 symbology. Syntax HRESULT IS9Cconfig::GetCode128( ITC_CODE128_DECODING*

peDecode, ITC_EAN128_IDENTIFIER* peEan128Ident, ITC_CODE128_CIP128 peCip128State, BYTE* pbyFNC1, DWORD*

pdwLength );

Parameters peDecode

[out]

peEan128Ident

[out]

peCip128State

[out]

pbyFNC1 pdwLength

[out]

[out]

Pointer to the ITC_CODE128_DECODING location to receive the decoding for Code 128 symbology. Pointer to the ITC_EAN128_IDENTIFIER location to receive the EAN 128 identifier. Pointer to the ITC_CODE128_CIP128 location to receive the CIP 128. Pointer to the BYTE location to receive the FNC1 separator character. Pointer to the DWORD location to receive a value for bar code length. Return Values HRESULT that indicates success or failure. Remarks None. See Also None. 180 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Scanner Support IS9CConfig::SetCode128 This function updates the Code 128 settings with new values. Syntax HRESULT IS9CConfig::SetCode128( ITC_CODE128_DECODING eDecode, ITC_EAN128_IDENTIFIER eEan128Ident, ITC_CODE128_CIP128 eCip128State, BYTE byFNC1, DWORD dwLength

Parameters eDecode eEan128Ident eCip128State byFNC1 dwLength

[in]

[in]

[in]

[in]

[in]

Identifies the decoding for Code 128 symbology. Identifies the EAN 128 identifier. Identifies the CIP 128. Identifies the FNC1 separator character, usually any ASCII value. Identifies the bar code length. Return Values HRESULT that indicates success or failure. Remarks None. See Also None. Code 128/EAN 128 Default Settings Parameter Decoding EAN 128 Identifier CIP 128 French Pharmaceutical Codes FNC1 Separator Character (EAN 128 norms) Bar Code Length Default Not Active Include ]C1 Not Active Valid Range ITC_CODE128_DECODING ITC_EAN128_IDENTIFIER ITC_CODE128_CIP128 GS function Char ASCII 29 or 0x1D Any Bar Code Length 0x00`0xFE ITC_CODE128_FNC1_NO_CHANGE 0x00`0xFE ITC_BC_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 181

 

 

Exhibit L: User Manual - Part 2 of 2 FCC ID: HN22011B-2 Chapter 6 Scanner Support Code 128 Enumerations typedef enum tagCode128Decoding

ITC_CODE128_NOTACTIVE = 0, // Default ITC_CODE128_ACTIVE = 1, ITC_CODE128_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_CODE128_DECODING;

typedef enum tagEan128Identifier

ITC_EAN128_ID_REMOVE, ITC_EAN128_ID_INCLUDE, // Default ITC_EAN128_ID_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_EAN128_IDENTIFIER;

typedef enum tagCode128Cip128

ITC_CODE128_CIP128_NOTACTIVE = 0, // Default ITC_CODE128_CIP128_ACTIVE = 1, ITC_CODE128_CIP128_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_CODE128_CIP128;

#define ITC_CODE128_FNC1_NO_CHANGE 255. This definition can be used when the Code128 FNC1 does not require any change.

#define ITC_BC_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE 255. This definition can be used when the bar code length does not require any change. The table below shows what to be expected for EAN 128 labels for various symbology identifier transmit configurations and EAN 128 Identifier op-

tions. Setup EAN 128 ]C1 ID Symbology ID option Applications Expected Result EAN 128 Label Other Labels Include ]C1 Remove ]C1 Include ]C1 Remove ]C1 Include ]C1 Remove ]C1 1 2 3 4 5 6 where X is the symbology identifier, Y is the modifier character, and Z is the 1-byte symbology identifier. Disabled Disabled AIM ID Transmitted AID ID Transmitted Custom ID Transmitted Custom ID Transmitted

<data>

<data>

]C1<data>

]C1<data>

Z]C1<data>

Z<data>

<data>

<data>

]XY<data>

]XY<data>

Z<data>

Z<data>

182 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Scanner Support IS9CConfig::GetI2of5 This function retrieves the current settings of Interleaved 2 of 5. Syntax HRESULT IS9CConfig::GetI2of5( ITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_DECODING*

peDecode, ITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_CHECK_DIGIT* peCheck, ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH_ID* peLengthId, BYTE rbgLengthBuff[], DWORD* pdwNumBytes );

Parameters peDecode

[out]

peCheck

[out]

peLengthId

[out]

Pointer to the ITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_DECODING location to receive the decoding for Interleaved 2 of 5 symbology. Pointer to the ITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_CHECK_DIGIT location to receive the check digit. Pointer to the ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH_ID location to receive an indicator of either ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH or ITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH. rgbLengthBuff

[out,size_is(3)]

pdwNumBytes

[out]

An array of bytes to receives 1 byte of data for ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH or 3 bytes of data for ITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH. Pointer to the DWORD location to receive a number indicating number of bytes in rbgLengthBuff[]: 1 byte for ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH or 3 bytes for ITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH. Return Values HRESULT that indicates success or failure. Remarks None. See Also None. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 183 Chapter 6 Scanner Support IS9CConfig::SetI2of5 This function updates the Interleaved 2 of 5 settings with new values. Syntax HRESULT IS9CConfig::SetI2of5( ITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_DECODING eDecode, ITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_CHECK_DIGIT eCheck, ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH_ID eLengthId, BYTE rgbLengthBuff[], DWORD dwNumBytes );

Parameters eDecode

[in]

eCheck eLengthId

[in]

[in] Use Identifies the decoding for Interleaved 2 of 5 symbology. Identifies the check digit. ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE to indicate no change for bar code length. Use ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH for any length and minimum length, and set rgbLengthBuff[0] to a valid length value. Use ITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH to compose 1 or 2 or 3 fixed lengths, and set 3 bytes:

rgbLengthBuff[0], rgbLengthBuff[1], rgbLengthBuff[2] with valid values. rgbLengthBuff dwNumBytes

[in,size_is(dwNumBytes)]

Contains bar code lengths when eLengthId =

Use ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH or Use ITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH.

[in] Number of bytes in rbgLengthBuff[]. For S9C, this value is 1 when eLengthId =

ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH or 3 when eLengthId

= ITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH. Return Values HRESULT that indicates success or failure. Remarks None. See Also None. Interleaved 2 of 5 Default Settings Parameter Decoding Check Digit Bar Code Length Default Valid Range Not Active Not Used Minimum Length = 6 ITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_DECODING ITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_CHECK_DIGIT 0x00`0xFE ITC_BC_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE 184 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Scanner Support Interleaved 2 of 5 Enumerations

// Default

// Default typedef enum tagInterleaved2of5Decoding

ITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_NOTACTIVE = 0, ITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_ACTIVE = 1, ITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_DECODING;

typedef enum tagInterleaved2of5CheckDigit

ITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_CHECK_NOTUSED, ITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_CHECK_MOD10_XMIT, ITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_CHECK_MOD10_NOTXMIT, ITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_CHECK_FRENCH_CIP_XMIT, ITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_CHECK_FRENCH_CIP_NOTXMIT, ITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_CHECK_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_INTERLEAVED2OF5_CHECK_DIGIT;

typedef enum tagBarcodeLengthId

ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH = 0, ITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH, ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH_ID;

IS9CConfig::GetMatrix2of5 This function retrieves the current settings of Matrix 2 of 5. Syntax HRESULT IS9CConfig::GetMatrix2of5( ITC_MATRIX2OF5_DECODING*

peDecode, DWORD* pdwLength );

Parameters peDecode

[out]

pdwLength

[out]

Pointer to the ITC_MATRIX2OF5_DECODING location to receive the decoding for Matrix 2 of 5 symbology. Pointer to the DWORD location to receive a value for the bar code length. Return Values HRESULT that indicates success or failure. Remarks None. See Also None. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 185 Chapter 6 Scanner Support IS9CConfig::SetMatrix2of5 This function updates the Matrix 2 of 5 settings with new values. Syntax HRESULT IS9CConfig::SetMatrix2of5( ITC_MATRIX2OF5_DECODING eDecode, DWORD dwLength );

Parameters eDecode dwLength

[in]

[in]

Identifies the decoding for Matrix 2 of 5 symbology. Identifies the bar code length. Return Values HRESULT that indicates success or failure. Remarks None. See Also None. Matrix 2 of 5 Default Settings Parameter Decoding Bar Code Length Default Valid Range Not Active Minimum Length = 6 ITC_MATRIX2OF5_DECODING 0x00`0xFE ITC_BC_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE Matrix 2 of 5 Enumerations typedef enum tagMatrix2of5Decoding

ITC_MATRIX2OF5_NOTACTIVE = 0, // Default ITC_MATRIX2OF5_ACTIVE = 1, ITC_MATRIX2OF5_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_MATRIX2OF5_DECODING;

#define ITC_BC_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE 255. This definition can be used when the bar code length does not require any change. 186 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Scanner Support IS9CConfig::GetMSI This function retrieves the current MSI settings. Syntax HRESULT IS9CConfig::GetMSI( ITC_MSI_DECODING* peDecode, ITC_MSI_CHECK_DIGIT* peCheck, DWORD* pdwLength );

Parameters peDecode

[out]

peCheck

[out]

pdwLength

[out]

Pointer to the ITC_MSI_DECODING location to receive the decoding for MSI symbology. Pointer to the ITC_MSI_CHECK_DIGIT location to receive the check digit. Pointer to the DWORD location to receive the bar code length. Return Values HRESULT that indicates success or failure. Remarks None. See Also None. IS9CConfig::SetMSI This function updates the MSI settings with new values. Syntax HRESULT IS9CConfig::SetMSI( ITC_MSI_DECODING eDecode, ITC_MSI_CHECK_DIGIT eCheck, DWORD dwLength );

Parameters eDecode eCheck dwLength Return Values HRESULT that indicates success or failure. Remarks None. See Also None. MSI Default Settings Identifies the decoding for MSI symbology. Identifies the check digit. Identifies the bar code length.

[in]

[in]

[in]

Parameter Default Valid Range Decoding Check Digit Bar Code Length Not Active MOD 10 checked and transmitted Minimum Length = 6 ITC_MSI_DECODING ITC_MSI_CHECK_DIGIT 0x00`0xFE ITC_BC_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 187 Chapter 6 Scanner Support MSI Enumerations typedef enum tagMsiDecoding

ITC_MSI_NOTACTIVE = 0, // Default ITC_MSI_ACTIVE = 1, ITC_MSI_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_MSI_DECODING;

typedef enum tagMsiCheckDigit

ITC_MSI_CHECK_MOD10_XMIT, // Default ITC_MSI_CHECK_MOD10_NOTXMIT, ITC_MSI_CHECK_DOUBLEMOD10_XMIT, ITC_MSI_CHECK_DOUBLEMOD10_NOTXMIT, ITC_MSI_CHECK_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_MSI_CHECK_DIGIT;

#define ITC_BC_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE 255. This definition can be used when the bar code length does not require any change. IS9CConfig::GetPDF417 This function retrieves the current PDF417 settings. Syntax HRESULT IS9CConfig::GetPDF417( ITC_PDF417_DECODING*

pePdf417Decode, ITC_PDF417_MACRO_PDF* peMacroPdf, ITC_PDF417_CTRL_HEADER* pePdfControlHeader, ITC_PDF417_FILE_NAME* pePdfFileName, ITC_PDF417_SEGMENT_COUNT* pePdfSegmentCount, ITC_PDF417_TIME_STAMP* pePdfTimeStamp, ITC_PDF417_SENDER*

pePdfSender, ITC_PDF417_ADDRESSEE* pePdfAddressee, ITC_PDF417_FILE_SIZE* pePdfFileSize, ITC_PDF417_CHECKSUM*

pePdfChecksum );

Parameters pePdf417Decode

[out]

peMacroPdf

[out]

pePdfControlHeader

[out]

pePdfFileName

[out]

pePdfSegmentCount

[out]

pePdfTimeStamp

[out]

Pointer to the ITC_PDF417_DECODING location to receive the decoding for PDF417 symbology. Pointer to the ITC_PDF417_MACRO_PDF location to receive the Macro PDF. Pointer to the ITC_PDF417_CTRL_HEADER location to receive the control header. Pointer to the ITC_PDF417_FILE_NAME location to receive the file name. Pointer to the ITC_PDF417_SEGMENT_COUNT location to receive the segment count. Pointer to the ITC_PDF417_TIME_STAMP location to receive the time stamp. 188 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Scanner Support pePdfSender pePdfAddressee pePdfFileSize pePdfChecksum

[out]

[out]

[out]

[out]

Pointer to the ITC_PDF417_SENDER location to receive the sender. Pointer to the ITC_PDF417_ADDRESSEE location to receive the addressee. Pointer to the ITC_PDF417_FILE_SIZE location to receive the file size. Pointer to the ITC_PDF417_CHECKSUM location to receive the checksum. Return Values HRESULT that indicates success or failure. Remarks None. See Also None. IS9CConfig::SetPDF417 This function updates the PDF417 settings with new values. Syntax HRESULT IS9CConfig::SetPDF417( ITC_PDF417_DECODING ePdf417Decode, ITC_PDF417_MACRO_PDF eMacroPdf, ITC_PDF417_CTRL_HEADER ePdfControlHeader, ITC_PDF417_FILE_NAME ePdfFileName, ITC_PDF417_SEGMENT_COUNT ePdfSegmentCount, ITC_PDF417_TIME_STAMP ePdfTimeStamp, ITC_PDF417_SENDER ePdfSender, ITC_PDF417_ADDRESSEE ePdfAddressee, ITC_PDF417_FILE_SIZE ePdfFileSize, ITC_PDF417_CHECKSUM ePdfChecksum );

Parameters ePdf417Decode eMacroPdf ePdfControlHeader ePdfFileName ePdfSegmentCount ePdfTimeStamp ePdfSender ePdfAddressee ePdfFileSize ePdfChecksum Identifies the decoding for PDF417 symbology. Identifies the Macro PDF. Identifies the control header. Identifies the file name. Identifies the segment count. Identifies the time stamp. Identifies the sender. Identifies the addressee. Identifies the file size. Identifies the checksum.

[in]

[in]

[in]

[in]

[in]

[in]

[in]

[in]

[in]

[in]

Return Values HRESULT that indicates success or failure. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 189 Chapter 6 Scanner Support Remarks None. See Also None. PDF 417 Default Settings Parameter Decoding Macro PDF Control Header

*File Name

*Segment Count

*Time Stamp

*Sender

*Address

*File Size

*Check Sum Default Not Active Macro PDF Buffered Not Transmitted Not Transmitted Not Transmitted Not Transmitted Not Transmitted Not Transmitted Not Transmitted Not Transmitted

* These are Macro PDF Optional Fields. Valid Range ITC_PDF417_DECODING ITC_PDF417_MACRO_PDF ITC_PDF417_CTRL_HEADER ITC_PDF417_FILE_NAME ITC_PDF417_SEGMENT_COUNT ITC_PDF417_TIME_STAMP ITC_PDF417_SENDER ITC_PDF417_ADDRESSEE ITC_PDF417_FILE_SIZE ITC_PDF417_CHECKSUM PDF 417 Enumerations

// Default

// Default typedef enum tagPdf417Decoding

ITC_PDF417_NOTACTIVE = 0, ITC_PDF417_ACTIVE = 1, ITC_PDF417_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_PDF417_DECODING;

typedef enum tagPdf417MacroPdf

ITC_PDF417_MACRO_UNBUFFERED = 0, ITC_PDF417_MACRO_BUFFERED = 1, ITC_PDF417_MACRO_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_PDF417_MACRO_PDF;

typedef enum tagPdf417ControlHeader

ITC_PDF417_CTRL_HEADER_NOTXMIT = 0, ITC_PDF417_CTRL_HEADER_XMIT = 1, ITC_PDF417_CTRL_HEADER_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_PDF417_CTRL_HEADER;

typedef enum tagPdf417FileName

ITC_PDF417_FILE_NAME_NOTXMIT = 0, ITC_PDF417_FILE_NAME_XMIT = 1, ITC_PDF417_FILE_NAME_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_PDF417_FILE_NAME;

typedef enum tagPdf417SegmentCount

ITC_PDF417_SEGMENT_COUNT_NOTXMIT = 0,// Default ITC_PDF417_SEGMENT_COUNT_XMIT = 1,

// Default

// Default 190 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Scanner Support ITC_PDF417_SEGMENT_COUNT_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_PDF417_SEGMENT_COUNT;

typedef enum tagPdf417TimeStamp

ITC_PDF417_TIME_STAMP_NOTXMIT = 0, ITC_PDF417_TIME_STAMP_XMIT = 1, ITC_PDF417_TIME_STAMP_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_PDF417_TIME_STAMP;

typedef enum tagPdf417Sender

ITC_PDF417_SENDER_NOTXMIT = 0, ITC_PDF417_SENDER_XMIT = 1, ITC_PDF417_SENDER_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_PDF417_SENDER;

typedef enum tagPdf417Addressee

ITC_PDF417_ADDRESSEE_NOTXMIT = 0, ITC_PDF417_ADDRESSEE_XMIT = 1, ITC_PDF417_ADDRESSEE_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_PDF417_ADDRESSEE;

typedef enum tagPdf417FileSize

ITC_PDF417_FILE_SIZE_NOTXMIT = 0, ITC_PDF417_FILE_SIZE_XMIT = 1, ITC_PDF417_FILE_SIZE_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_PDF417_FILE_SIZE;

typedef enum tagPdf417Checksum

ITC_PDF417_CHECKSUM_NOTXMIT = 0, ITC_PDF417_CHECKSUM_XMIT = 1, ITC_PDF417_CHECKSUM_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_PDF417_CHECKSUM;

// Default

// Default

// Default

// Default

// Default 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 191 Chapter 6 Scanner Support IS9CConfig::GetPlessey This function retrieves the current Plessey settings. Syntax HRESULT IS9CConfig::GetPlessey( ITC_PLESSEY_DECODING*

peDecode, ITC_PLESSEY_CHECK_DIGIT* peCheck, DWORD* pdwLength

Parameters peDecode

[out]

peCheck

[out]

pdwLength

[out]

Pointer to the ITC_PLESSEY_DECODING location to receive the decoding for Plessey symbology. Pointer to the ITC_PLESSEY_CHECK_DIGIT location to receive the check digit. Pointer to the DWORD location to receive the bar code length. Return Values HRESULT that indicates success or failure. Remarks None. See Also None. IS9CConfig::SetPlessey This function updates the Plessey settings with new values. Syntax HRESULT IS9CConfig::SetPlessey( ITC_PLESSEY_DECODING eDecode, ITC_PLESSEY_CHECK_DIGIT eCheck, DWORD dwLength );

Parameters eDecode eCheck dwLength

[in]

[in]

[in]

Identifies the decoding for Plessey symbology. Identifies the check digit. Identifies the bar code length. Return Values HRESULT that indicates success or failure. Remarks None. See Also None. 192 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Scanner Support Plessey Default Settings Parameter Default Valid Range Decoding Check Digit Bar Code Length Not Active Not Transmitted Any Bar Code Length ITC_PLESSEY_DECODING ITC_PLESSEY_CHECK_DIGIT 0x00`0xFE ITC_BC_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE Plessey Enumerations

// Default typedef enum tagPlesseyDecoding

ITC_PLESSEY_NOTACTIVE = 0, ITC_PLESSEY_ACTIVE = 1, ITC_PLESSEY_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_PLESSEY_DECODING;

typedef enum tagPlesseyCheckDigit

ITC_PLESSEY_CHECK_NOTXMIT = 0, ITC_PLESSEY_CHECK_XMIT = 1, ITC_PLESSEY_CHECK_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_PLESSEY_CHECK_DIGIT;

#define ITC_BC_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE 255. This definition can be used when the bar code length does not require any change.

// Default 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 193 Chapter 6 Scanner Support IS9CConfig::GetStandard2of5 This function retrieves the current Standard 2 of 5 settings. Syntax HRESULT IS9CConfig::GetStandard2of5(

ITC_STANDARD2OF5_DECODING* peDecode, ITC_STANDARD2OF5_FORMAT* peFormat, ITC_STANDARD2OF5_CHECK_DIGIT* peCheck, ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH_ID* peLengthId, BYTE rgbLengthBuff, DWORD* pdwNumBytes );

Parameters peDecode

[out]

peFormat

[out]

peCheck

[out]

peLengthId

[out]

Pointer to the ITC_STANDARD2OF5_DECODING location to receive the decoding for Standard 2 of 5 symbology. Pointer to the ITC_STANDARD2OF5_FORMAT location to receive the format. Pointer to the ITC_STANDARD2OF5_CHECK_DIGIT location to receive Modulo 10 check digit. Pointer to the ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH_ID location to receive an indicator of either ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH or ITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH. rgbLengthBuff

[out,size_is(3)]

pdwNumBytes

[out]

An array of bytes to receives 1 byte of data for ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH, or 3 bytes of data for ITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH. Pointer to the DWORD location to receive a number indicating number of bytes in rbgLengthBuff[]: 1 byte for ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH or 3 bytes for ITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH. Return Values HRESULT that indicates success or failure. Remarks None. See Also None. 194 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Scanner Support IS9CConfig::SetStandard2of5 This function updates the Standard 2 of 5 settings with new values. Syntax HRESULT IS9CConfig::SetStandard2of5(

ITC_STANDARD2OF5_DECODING eDecode, ITC_STANDARD2OF5_FORMAT eFormat, ITC_STANDARD2OF5_CHECK_DIGIT eCheck, ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH_ID eLengthId, BYTE rgbLengthBuff[], DWORD dwNumBytes );

Parameters eDecode

[in]

eFormat eCheck eLengthId

[in]

[in]

[in] Use Identifies the decoding for Standard 2 of 5 symbology. Identifies the format. Identifies the Modulo 10 check digit. ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE to indicate no change for bar code length. Use ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH for any length and minimum length, and set rgbLengthBuff[0] to a valid length value. Use ITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH to compose 1 or 2 or 3 fixed lengths, and set 3 bytes:

rgbLengthBuff[0], rgbLengthBuff[1], rgbLengthBuff[2] with valid values. rgbLengthBuff dwNumBytes

[in,size_is(dwNumBytes)]

An array of bytes containing bar code lengths when eLengthId = ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH or ITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH.

[in] Number of bytes in rbgLengthBuff[]. For S9C, this value is 1 when eLengthId =

ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH or 3 when eLengthId

= ITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH. Return Values HRESULT that indicates success or failure. Remarks None. See Also None. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 195 Chapter 6 Scanner Support Standard 2 of 5 Default Settings Parameter Default Valid Range Decoding Format Check Digit Bar Code Length Not Active Identicon (6 Start/Stop bars) Not Used Minimum Length = 6 ITC_STANDARD2OF5_DECODING ITC_STANDARD2OF5_FORMAT ITC_STANDARD2OF5_CHECK_DIGIT 0x00-0xFE ITC_BC_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE Standard 2 of 5 Enumerations typedef enum tagStandard2of5Decoding

ITC_STANDARD2OF5_NOTACTIVE = 0, // Default ITC_STANDARD2OF5_ACTIVE = 1, ITC_STANDARD2OF5_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_STANDARD2OF5_DECODING;

typedef enum tagStandard2of5Format

ITC_STANDARD2OF5_FORMAT_IDENTICON, // Default ITC_STANDARD2OF5_FORMAT_COMPUTER_IDENTICS, ITC_STANDARD2OF5_FORMAT_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_STANDARD2OF5_FORMAT;

typedef enum tagStandard2of5CheckDigit

ITC_STANDARD2OF5_CHECK_NOTUSED, // Default ITC_STANDARD2OF5_CHECK_XMIT, ITC_STANDARD2OF5_CHECK_NOTXMIT, ITC_STANDARD2OF5_CHECK_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_STANDARD2OF5_CHECK_DIGIT;

typedef enum tagBarcodeLengthId

ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH = 0, ITC_BARCODE_FIXED_LENGTH, ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_BARCODE_LENGTH_ID;

196 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Scanner Support IS9CConfig::GetTelepen This function retrieves the current Telepen settings. Syntax HRESULT IS9CConfig::GetTelepen( ITC_TELEPEN_DECODING*

peDecode, ITC_TELEPEN_FORMAT* peFormat );

Parameters peDecode

[out]

peFormat

[out]

Pointer to the ITC_TELEPEN_DECODING location to receive the decoding for TELEPEN symbology. Pointer to the ITC_TELEPEN_FORMAT location to receive the format. Return Values HRESULT that indicates success or failure. Remarks None. See Also None. IS9CConfig::SetTelepen This function updates the Telepen settings with new values. Syntax HRESULT IS9CConfig::SetTelepen( ITC_TELEPEN_DECODING*

eDecode, ITC_TELEPEN_FORMAT* eFormat );

Parameters eDecode eFormat

[in]

[in]

Identifies the decoding for Telepen symbology. Identifies the format. Return Values HRESULT that indicates success or failure. Remarks None. See Also None. Telepen Default Settings Parameter Decoding Format Default Not Active ASCII Valid Range ITC_TELEPEN_DECODING ITC_TELEPEN_FORMAT 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 197 Chapter 6 Scanner Support Telepen Enumerations typedef enum tagTelepenDecoding

ITC_TELEPEN_NOTACTIVE = 0, // Default ITC_TELEPEN_ACTIVE = 1, ITC_TELEPEN_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_TELEPEN_DECODING;

typedef enum tagTelepenDecoding

ITC_TELEPEN_FORMAT_ASCII, // Default ITC_TELEPEN_FORMAT_NUMERIC, ITC_TELEPEN_FORMAT_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_TELEPEN_FORMAT;

IS9CConfig::GetUpcEan This function retrieves the current UPC/EAN settings. Syntax HRESULT IS9CConfig::GetUpcEan( ITC_UPCEAN_DECODING*

upceanDecode, ITC_UPCA_SELECT* upcASelect, ITC_UPCE_SELECT*

upcESelect, ITC_EAN8_SELECT* ean8Select, ITC_EAN13_SELECT*

ean13Select, ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_DIGITS* upcAddOnDigits, ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_TWO* upcAddOn2, ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_FIVE*

upcAddOn5, ITC_UPCA_CHECK_DIGIT* upcACheck, ITC_UPCE_CHECK_DIGIT* upcECheck, ITC_EAN8_CHECK_DIGIT*

ean8Check, ITC_EAN13_CHECK_DIGIT* ean13Check, ITC_UPCA_NUMBER_SYSTEM* upcANumSystem, ITC_UPCE_NUMBER_SYSTEM* upcENumSystem, ITC_UPCA_REENCODE*

upcAReencode, ITC_UPCE_REENCODE* upcEReencode, ITC_EAN8_REENCODE* ean8Reencode );

Parameters upceanDecode

[out]

upcASelect upcESelect ean8Select

[out]

[out]

[out]

ean13Select

[out]

upcAddOnDigits [out]

upcAddOn2

[out]

upcAddOn5

[out]

Pointer to the ITC_UPCEAN_DECODING location to receive the decoding for UPC/EAN symbology. Pointer to the ITC_UPCA_SELECT location to receive the UPC-A selection state. Pointer to the ITC_UPCE_SELECT location to receive the UPC-E selection state. Pointer to the ITC_EAN8_SELECT location to receive the EAN-8 selection state. Pointer to the ITC_EAN13_SELECT location to receive the EAN-13 selection state. Pointer to the ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_DIGITS location to receive the add-on digits. Pointer to the ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_TWO location to receive the add-on 2 digits. Pointer to the ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_FIVE location to receive the add-on 5 digits. 198 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Scanner Support upcACheck upcECheck ean8Check

[out]

[out]

[out]

ean13Check

[out]

upcANumSystem [out]

upcENumSystem [out]

upcAReencode

[out]

upcEReencode

[out]

ean8Reencode

[out]

Pointer to the ITC_UPCA_CHECK_DIGIT location to receive the UPC-A check digit. Pointer to the ITC_UPCE_CHECK_DIGIT location to receive the UPC-E check digit. Pointer to the ITC_EAN8_CHECK_DIGIT location to receive the EAN-8 check digit. Pointer to the ITC_EAN13_CHECK_DIGIT location to receive the EAN-13 check digit. Pointer to the ITC_UPCA_NUMBER_SYSTEM location to receive the UPC-A number system. Pointer to the ITC_UPCE_NUMBER_SYSTEM location to receive the UPC-E number system. Pointer to the ITC_UPCA_REENCODE location to receive the UPC-A reencoding. Pointer to the ITC_UPCE_REENCODE location to receive the UPC-E reencoding. Pointer to the ITC_EAN8_REENCODE location to receive the EAN-8 reencoding. Return Values HRESULT that indicates success or failure. Remarks None. See Also None. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 199 Chapter 6 Scanner Support IS9CConfig::SetUpcEan This function updates the UPC/EAN settings with new values. Syntax HRESULT IS9CConfig::SetUpcEan( ITC_UPCEAN_DECODING upceanDecode, ITC_UPCA_SELECT upcASelect, ITC_UPCE_SELECT upcESelect, ITC_EAN8_SELECT ean8Select, ITC_EAN13_SELECT ean13Select, ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_DIGITS upcAddOnDigits, ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_TWO upcAddOn2, ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_FIVE upcAddOn5, ITC_UPCA_CHECK_DIGIT upcACheck, ITC_UPCE_CHECK_DIGIT upcECheck, ITC_EAN8_CHECK_DIGIT ean8Check, ITC_EAN13_CHECK_DIGIT ean13Check, ITC_UPCA_NUMBER_SYSTEM upcANumSystem, ITC_UPCE_NUMBER_SYSTEM upcENumSystem, ITC_UPCA_REENCODE upcAReencode, ITC_UPCE_REENCODE upcEReencode, ITC_EAN8_REENCODE ean8Reencode );

Parameters upceanDecode

[in]

upcASelect

[in]

upcESelect

[in]

ean8Select

[in]

ean13Select

[in]

upcAddOnDigits [in]

upcAddOn2

[in]

upcAddOn5

[in]

upcACheck

[in]

upcECheck

[in]

ean8Check

[in]

ean13Check

[in]

upcANumSystem [in]

upcENumSystem [in]

upcAReencode

[in]

upcEReencode

[in]

ean8Reencode

[in]

Identifies the decoding for UPC/EAN symbology. Identifies the UPC-A selection state. Identifies the UPC-E selection state. Identifies the EAN-8 selection state. Identifies the EAN-13 selection state. Identifies the Add-on digits. Identifies the Add-on 2 digits. Identifies the Add-on 5 digits. Identifies the UPC-A check digit. Identifies the UPC-E check digit. Identifies the EAN-8 check digit. Identifies the EAN-13 check digit. Identifies the UPC-A number system. Identifies the UPC-E number system. Identifies the UPC-A reencoding. Identifies the UPC-E reencoding. Identifies the EAN-8 reencoding. Return Values HRESULT that indicates success or failure. Remarks None. See Also None. 200 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Scanner Support UPC/EAN Default Settings Parameter Default Valid Range ITC_UPCEAN_NO_CHANGE This parameter is no longer used, set it to this value. Decoding Active UPC-A Active UPC-E Active EAN-8 Active EAN-13 Not Required Add On Digits Not Active Add On 2 Digits Not Active Add On 5 Digits Transmitted UPC-A Check Digit Transmitted UPC-E Check Digit Transmitted EAN-8 Check Digit EAN-13 Check Digit Transmitted UPC-A Number System Transmitted UPC-E Number System Transmitted Reencode UPC-A Reencode UPC-E Reencode EAN-8 ITC_UPCA_SELECT ITC_UPCE_SELECT ITC_EAN8_SELECT ITC_EAN13_SELECT ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_DIGITS ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_TWO ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_FIVE ITC_UPCA_CHECK_DIGIT ITC_UPCE_CHECK_DIGIT ITC_EAN8_CHECK_DIGIT ITC_EAN13_CHECK_DIGIT ITC_UPCA_NUMBER_SYSTEM ITC_UPCE_NUMBER_SYSTEM ITC_UPCA_REENCODE ITC_UPCE_REENCODE ITC_EAN8_REENCODE UPC-A transmitted as EAN-13 UPC-E transmitted as UPC-E EAN-8 transmitted as EAN-8 UPC/EAN Enumerations typedef enum tagUpcEanDecoding

ITC_UPCEAN_NOTACTIVE = 0, ITC_UPCEAN_ACTIVE = 1, ITC_UPCEAN_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_UPCEAN_DECODING;

typedef enum tagUpcASelect

ITC_UPCA_DEACTIVATE, ITC_UPCA_ACTIVATE, ITC_UPCA_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_UPCA_SELECT;

typedef enum tagUpcESelect

ITC_UPCE_DEACTIVATE, ITC_UPCE_ACTIVATE, ITC_UPCE_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_UPCE_SELECT;

typedef enum tagEan8Select

ITC_EAN8_DEACTIVATE, ITC_EAN8_ACTIVATE, ITC_EAN8_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_EAN8_SELECT;

typedef enum tagEan13Select

ITC_EAN13_DEACTIVATE,

// Default

// Default

// Default

// Default 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 201 Chapter 6 Scanner Support ITC_EAN13_ACTIVATE, ITC_EAN13_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_EAN13_SELECT;

typedef enum tagUpcEanAddonDigits

ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_NOT_REQUIRED, ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_REQUIRED, ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_DIGITS;

typedef enum tagUpcEanAddonTwo

ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_TWO_NOTACTIVE = 0, ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_TWO_ACTIVE = 1, ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_TWO_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_TWO;

typedef enum tagUpcEanAddonFive

ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_FIVE_NOTACTIVE = 0, ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_FIVE_ACTIVE = 1, ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_FIVE_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_UPCEAN_ADDON_FIVE;

typedef enum tagUpcACheckDigit

ITC_UPCA_CHECK_NOTXMIT = 0, ITC_UPCA_CHECK_XMIT = 1, ITC_UPCA_CHECK_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_UPCA_CHECK_DIGIT;

typedef enum tagUpcECheckDigit

ITC_UPCE_CHECK_NOTXMIT = 0, ITC_UPCE_CHECK_XMIT = 1, ITC_UPCE_CHECK_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_UPCE_CHECK_DIGIT;

typedef enum tagEan8CheckDigit

ITC_EAN8_CHECK_NOTXMIT = 0, ITC_EAN8_CHECK_XMIT = 1, ITC_EAN8_CHECK_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_EAN8_CHECK_DIGIT;

typedef enum tagEan13CheckDigit

ITC_EAN13_CHECK_NOTXMIT = 0, ITC_EAN13_CHECK_XMIT = 1, ITC_EAN13_CHECK_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_EAN13_CHECK_DIGIT;

typedef enum tagUpcANumberSystem

ITC_UPCA_NUM_SYS_NOTXMIT = 0, ITC_UPCA_NUM_SYS_XMIT = 1, ITC_UPCA_NUM_SYS_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_UPCA_NUMBER_SYSTEM;

typedef enum tagUpcENumberSystem

ITC_UPCE_NUM_SYS_NOTXMIT = 0, ITC_UPCE_NUM_SYS_XMIT = 1, ITC_UPCE_NUM_SYS_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_UPCE_NUMBER_SYSTEM;

typedef enum tagUpcAReencode

// Default

// Default

// Default

// Default

// Default

// Default

// Default

// Default

// Default

// Default 202 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Scanner Support ITC_UPCA_XMIT_AS_EAN13, ITC_UPCA_XMIT_AS_UPCA, ITC_UPCA_XMIT_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_UPCA_REENCODE;

typedef enum tagUpcEReencode

ITC_UPCE_XMIT_AS_UPCE, ITC_UPCE_XMIT_AS_UPCA, ITC_UPCE_XMIT_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_UPCE_REENCODE;

typedef enum tagEan8Reencode

ITC_EAN8_XMIT_AS_EAN8, ITC_EAN8_XMIT_AS_EAN13, ITC_EAN8_XMIT_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_EAN8_REENCODE;

// Default

// Default

//Default 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 203 Chapter 6 Scanner Support IS9CConfig2 Functions This interface is derived from the IS9CConfig interface and provides addi-

tional methods that can be used to set and retrieve the 700 Series Comput-

er s bar code configuration. All supported symbologies are initialized to their defaults when the S9C firmware is loaded. GET/SET functions use enumerations as their parameters. In most enu-

merations, there is an enumerator xx_NO_CHANGE (such as ITC_CODE39_NO_CHANGE), where xx refers to a particular enum-

eration. This enumerator can be used during a call to a SET to indicate that no change is to be made to that particular parameter. This prevents the called function from having to format the same S9C command and send it down to the scanner. To specify a bar code length of any length, use a value of 0 for the bar code length argument. IS9CConfig2 functions are the following. IS9CCONFIG.H is the header file and ITCUUID.LIB contains the IID_IADC Interface GUID value used to obtain the interface. S IS9CConfig2::GetCode11 (page 205) S IS9CConfig2::SetCode11 (page 205) S IS9CConfig2::GetCustomSymIds (page 207) S IS9CConfig2::SetCustomSymIds (page 208) S IS9CConfig2::GetGlobalAmble (page 211) S IS9CConfig2::SetGlobalAmble (page 212) S IS9CConfig2::GetPDF417Ext (page 213) S IS9CConfig2::SetPDF417Ext (page 213) S IS9CConfig2::GetSymIdXmit (page 214) S IS9CConfig2::SetSymIdXmit (page 214) 204 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Scanner Support IS9CConfig2::GetCode11 This function retrieves the current settings for Code 11. Syntax HRESULT GetCode11( ITC_CODE11_DECODING* peDecode, ITC_CODE11_CHECK_DIGIT* peCheck, ITC_CODE11_CHECK_VERIFICATION* peVer );

Parameters peDecode

[out]

peCheck

[out]

peVer

[out]

Pointer to ITC_CODE11_DECODING location to receive Code 11 decoding. Pointer to ITC_CODE11_CHECK_DIGIT location to receive the check digit option. Pointer to ITC_CODE11_CHECK_VERIFICATION location to receive the check verification option. Return Values HRESULT that indicates success or failure. Remarks None. See Also None. IS9CConfig2::SetCode11 This function updates the current setting of Code 11 symbology. Syntax HRESULT SetCode11( ITC_CODE11_DECODING eDecode, ITC_CODE11_CHECK_DIGIT eCheck, ITC_CODE11_CHECK_VERIFICATION eVer );

Parameters eDecode

[in] An enumeration that identifies decoding option for Code 11. eCheck eVer

[in] An enumeration that identifies the check digit option.

[in] An enumeration that identifies check verification option. Return Values HRESULT that indicates success or failure. Remarks None. See Also None. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 205 Chapter 6 Scanner Support Code 11 Default Settings Parameter Decoding Check Verification Check Digit Default Not Active 1 Digit Enable Valid Range ITC_CODE11_DECODING ITC_CODE11_CHECK_VERIFICATION ITC_CODE11_CHECK_DIGIT Code 11 Enumerations typedef enum tagCode11Decoding

ITC_CODE11_NOTACTIVE = 0, ITC_CODE11_ACTIVE = 1, // Default ITC_CODE11_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_CODE11_DECODING;

typedef enum tagCode11CheckVerification

ITC_CODE11_CHK_VERIFY_ONEDIGIT = 1, ITC_CODE11_CHK_VERIFY_TWODIGIT = 2, // Default ITC_CODE11_CHK_VERIFY_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_CODE11_CHECK_VERIFICATION;

typedef enum tagCode11CheckDigit

ITC_CODE11_CHECK_NOTXMIT = 0, // Default ITC_CODE11_CHECK_XMIT = 1, ITC_CODE11_CHECK_NO_CHANGE = 255

} ITC_CODE11_CHECK_DIGIT;

206 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Scanner Support IS9CConfig2::GetCustomSymIds This function retrieves all the custom symbology identifiers defined for the currently supported symbologies. This is not supported when using an imag-

er on the 700 Series Computer. Syntax HRESULT GetCustomSymIds( ITC_CUST_SYM_ID_PAIR*

pStructSymIdPair,DWORD dwMaxNumElement, DWORD* pdwNumElement

Parameters pStructSymIdPair

[out]

dwMaxNumElement

[in]

pdwNumElement

[out]

Pointer to ITC_CUST_SYM_ID_PAIR location to receive the current defined symbology identifiers for the supported symbologies. The caller must preallocate this buffer with dwMaxNumElement elements. Maximum number of elements allocated for the pStructSymIdPair buffer which should always be equal to the last defined enumeration constant + 1 of the enumeration ITC_CUSTOM_ID. In this case, it is ITC_CUSTOMID_LAST_ELEMENT. Pointer to DWORD location to receive the actual number of elements returned in the pStructSymIdPair buffer, which should be the same as dwMaxNumElement. Return Values HRESULT that indicates success or failure. Remarks None. See Also S Custom Identifier Assignments (page 209) S Custom Identifier Example (page 210) S Custom Identifier Default Settings (page 210) 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 207 Chapter 6 Scanner Support IS9CConfig2::SetCustomSymIds This function updates the symbology identifiers (any ASCII values) for the currently supported symbologies. This is not supported when using an imag-

er on the 700 Series Computer. Syntax HRESULT SetCustomSymIds( ITC_CUST_SYM_ID_PAIR*

pStructSymIdPair, DWORD dwNumElement );

Parameters pStructSymIdPair dwNumElement

[in] Pointer to ITC_CUST_SYM_ID_PAIR location, containing the new symbology identifiers for any supported symbologies to update. Identifies the number of symbology identifiers to update in the pStructSymIdPair buffer.

[in]

Return Values HRESULT that indicates success or failure. Remarks None. See Also None. 208 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Scanner Support Custom Identifier Assignments Each custom identifier is a one byte ASCII value within the range from 0x00 to 0xff. The enumerations in the ITC_CUSTOM_ID enumerator can be used as symbology identifications in the GetCustomSymIds() and SetCustomSymIds() functions. Identifies the Codabar symbology Identifies the Code 39 symbology Identifies the Code 93 symbology Identifies the Code 128 symbology Identifies the EAN-8 symbology Identifies the EAN-13 symbology Identifies the Interleaved 2 of 5 symbology Identifies the Matrix 2 of 5 symbology Identifies the MSI symbology Identifies the PDF 417 symbology Identifies the Plessey symbology Identifies the Standard 2 of 5 symbology Identifies the Telepen symbology Identifies the UPC-A symbology Identifies the UPC-E symbology Identifies the Code 11 symbology Identifies the last element. Use to preallocate typedef enum tagCustomId

ITC_CUSTOMID_CODABAR = 0 ITC_CUSTOMID_CODE39 ITC_CUSTOMID_CODE93 ITC_CUSTOMID_CODE128_EAN_128 ITC_CUSTOMID_EAN8 ITC_CUSTOMID_EAN13 ITC_CUSTOMID_I2OF5 ITC_CUSTOMID_MATRIX2OF5 ITC_CUSTOMID_MSI ITC_CUSTOMID_PDF417 ITC_CUSTOMID_PLESSEY ITC_CUSTOMID_CODE2OF5 ITC_CUSTOMID_TELEPEN ITC_CUSTOMID_UPCA ITC_CUSTOMID_UPCE ITC_CUSTOMID_CODE11 ITC_CUSTOMID_LAST_ELEMENT the buffer on GetCustomSymIds

}ITC_CUSTOM_ID;

typedef struct tagCustSymbIdPair

ITC_CUSTOM_ID eSymbology;

BYTE byteId;

ASCII value (1 byte within the range0x00 0xf)

}ITC_CUST_SYM_ID_PAIR;

Identifies the symbology of interest 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 209 Chapter 6 Scanner Support Custom Identifier Default Settings Symbology Default Valid Range Codabar Code 11 Code 39 Code 93 Code128/EAN 128 EAN-8 EAN-13 Interleaved 2 of 5 Matrix 2 of 5 MSI PDF 417 Plessey Standard 2 of 5 Telepen UPC-A UPC-E D

D D 0xFF F I D D

D D

A E 0x00-0xFF 0x00-0xFF 0x00-0xFF 0x00-0xFF 0x00-0xFF 0x00-0xFF 0x00-0xFF 0x00-0xFF 0x00-0xFF 0x00-0xFF 0x00-0xFF 0x00-0xFF 0x00-0xFF 0x00-0xFF 0x00-0xFF 0x00-0xFF Custom Identifier Example The following code segment is an example of updating the UPC-E and UPC-A symbology identifiers with new values, and then retrieving the currently defined symbology identifiers for all the supported symbologies:

ITC_CUST_SYM_ID_PAIR oStructSymIdPair [ITC_CUSTOMID_LAST_ELEMENT];

oStructSymIdPair[0].eSymbology = ITC_CUSTOMID_UPCE;

oStructSymIdPair[0].byteId = 0x41;

oStructSymIdPair[1].eSymbology = ITC_CUSTOMID_UPCA;

oStructSymIdPair[1].byteId = 0x42;

HRESULT hr = pIS9CConfig2->SetCustomSymIds(&oStructSymIdPair[0], 2];

DWORD dwNum = 0;

HRESULT hr = pIS9CConfig2->GetCustomSymIds(&oStructSymIdPair[0], ITC_CUSTOMID_LAST_ELEMENT, &dwNum);

// ASCII char A

// ASCII char B 210 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Scanner Support IS9CConfig2::GetGlobalAmble This retrieves the scanner s current preamble or postamble setting. Syntax HRESULT GetGlobalAmble( ITC_GLOBAL_AMBLE_ID eAmbleId, BYTE rgbBuffer[], DWORD dwBufferSize, DWORD* pdwBufferSize );

Parameters eAmbleId

[in]

rgbBuffer

[in]

dwBufferSize

[in]

pdwBufferSize

[out]

An enumeration of type ITC_GLOBAL_AMBLE_ID identifies whether the preamble or postamble setting is to be retrieved. Only one setting can be queried at a time. Contains the buffer for the postamble or preamble setting to be queried. The maximum number of bytes that rgbBuffer can store. Must be at least ITC_GLOBAL_AMBLE_MAX_CHARS bytes. A pointer to DWORD location to store the actual number of returned bytes in rgbBuffer. Return Values HRESULT that indicates success or failure. Remarks None. See Also None. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 211 Chapter 6 Scanner Support IS9CConfig2::SetGlobalAmble This function updates the scanner s current preamble or postamble setting depending on the input parameters. Syntax HRESULT SetGlobalAmble( ITC_GLOBAL_AMBLE_ID eAmbleId, BYTE rgbBuffer[], DWORD dwBufferSize );

Parameters eAmbleId rgbBuffer

[in] An enumeration of type ITC_GLOBAL_AMBLE_ID identifies whether the preamble or postamble setting is to be updated. Only one setting can be updated at a time.

[in] Contains the buffer for the postamble or preamble dwBufferSize

[in]

setting to be updated. Identifies number of bytes in rgbBuffer. Return Values HRESULT that indicates success or failure. Remarks None. See Also None. Postamble and Preamble Defaults Parameter Preamble Postamble Default Null Null Valid Range 0 to 20 ASCII characters 0 to 20 ASCII characters 212 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Scanner Support IS9CConfig2::GetPDF417Ext This function is an extended function for retrieving the PDF 417 settings not included in the IS9CConfig::GetPDF417. Syntax HRESULT GetPDF417Ext( ITC_MICRO_PDF417_DECODING* peDecode, ITC_MICRO_PDF417_CODE128_EMULATION* peCode128 );

Parameters peDecode

[out]

peCode128

[out]

Pointer to ITC_MICRO_PDF417_DECODING location to receive the Micro PDF 417 decoding. Pointer to ITC_MICRO_PDF417_CODE128_EMULATION*

location to receive the Micro PDF 417 Code 128 emulation option. Return Values HRESULT that indicates success or failure. Remarks None. See Also None. IS9CConfig2::SetPDF417Ext This function is an extended function for updating the additional PDF 417 settings not included in IS9CConfig::SetPDF417. Syntax HRESULT SetPDF417Ext( ITC_MICRO_PDF417_DECODING eDecode, ITC_MICRO_PDF417_CODE128_EMULATION eCode128 );

Parameters eDecode

[in] An enumeration that identifies decoding option for the Micro PDF 417. eCode128 [in] An enumeration that identifies the Code 128 emulation option for the Micro PDF 417. Return Values HRESULT that indicates success or failure. Remarks None. See Also None. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 213 Chapter 6 Scanner Support PDF 417 Extended: Micro PDF 417 Default Settings Parameter Default Valid Range Decoding Not Active Code 128 Emulation Not Active

* These are Micro PDF 417 parameters. ITC_MICRO_PDF417_DECODING ITC_MICRO_PDF417_CODE128_EMULATION IS9CConfig2::GetSymIdXmit This function retrieves the current symbology ID transmission option as described on the next page. Syntax HRESULT GetSymIdXmit( ITC_SYMBOLOGY_ID_XMIT* peSymIdXmit );

Parameters peSymIdXmit

[out]

Pointer to ITC_SYMBOLOGY_ID_XMIT location to receive the current symbology identifier transmission option. Return Values HRESULT that indicates success or failure. Remarks None. See Also None. IS9CConfig2::SetSymIdXmit This updates the symbology ID transmission option shown next page. Syntax HRESULT SetSymIdXmit( ITC_SYMBOLOGY_ID_XMIT eSymIdXmit );

Parameters eSymIdXmit

[in]

Identifies the symbology identifier transmission option to update. Return Values HRESULT that indicates success or failure. Remarks None. See Also None. 214 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Scanner Support Symbology ID Transmission Option The symbology identifier (or code mark) concept provides a standardized way for a device receiving data from a bar code reader to differentiate be-

tween the symbologies. The following symbology ID transmission option specifies whether or not the symbology ID should be transmitted as part of the scanned bar code label to all the connected data collection applications. Options for trans-

mission are: do not transmit, transmit the standard AIM identifiers, or transmit the one byte custom defined identifiers. AIM and custom identi-

fiers cannot be selected to be transmitted at the same time; only the last selected option will be active. typedef enum tagSymbologyIdXmit

ITC_ID_XMIT_DISABLE = 0 Symbology identifier will not be transmitted as part of the label. This is the default setting. ITC_ID_XMIT_CUSTOM = 1 ITC_ID_XMIT_AIM = 2

}ITC_SYMBOLOGY_ID_XMIT;

Activate custom symbology identifier transmission for all symbologies. Example of the transmitted label:

[preamble] [Custom ID] <data> [postamble]

Activate AIM symbology identifier transmission for all symbologies. Example of the transmitted label:

[preamble] [AIM symbology ID] <data> [postamble]

700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 215 Chapter 6 Scanner Support IS9CConfig3 Functions The IS9CConfig3 interface provides generic methods for retrieving and setting configuration using ISCP commands. ISCP Commands An ISCP Command is composed of three or more bytes formatted as

<SG><FID><parameters> where:

S SG S FID S parameters One or more configuration value bytes depending on the Setup group. Function ID. configuration. ISCP commands include the following:

Imager Settings This dictates the start and end column positions for the image dimension. SG 0x7B 0x7B Description Start column position. End column position. Parameter Value [0..639]

Value [0..639]

FID 80 81 Trigger Settings This sets the duration of the aiming beam before acquiring images to be decoded. SG 0x70 Description Number of milliseconds. Parameter Value [0..65535]

FID 81 QRCode Symbology This enables or disables the QRCode symbology. SG 0x55 0x55 Parameter 0 1 FID 40 40 Description Disable this symbology. Enable this symbology. Data Matrix Symbology This enables or disables the Data Matrix symbology. SG 0x54 0x54 Parameter 0 1 Description Disable this symbology. Enable this symbology. FID 40 40 216 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Scanner Support ISCP::GetConfig This retrieves configurations using the ISCP commands format. Syntax HRESULT ISCPGetConfig( BYTE rgbCommandBuff[], DWORD dwCommandBuffSize, BYTE rgbReplyBuff[], DWORD dwReplyBuffMaxSize, DWORD *pdwReplyBuffSize );

Parameters rgbCommandBuff

[in, size_is]

dwCommandBuffSize

[in]

rgbReplyBuff

[in, out, size_is]

dwReplyBuffMaxSize pdwReplyBuffSize

[in]

[in, out]

Contains ISCP commands in array of bytes. Number of bytes in rgbCommandBuff. Results of query in array of bytes. Maximum size of rgdReplyBuff. Number of bytes placed in rbfReplyBuff. Return Values None. Remarks None. See Also None. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 217 Chapter 6 Scanner Support ISCP::SetConfig This updates configurations using the ISCP commands format. Syntax HRESULT ISCPSetConfig( BYTE rgbCommandBuff[], DWORD dwCommandBuffSize, BYTE rgbReplyBuff[], DWORD dwReplyBuffMaxSize, DWORD *pdwReplyBuffSize );

Parameters rgbCommandBuff

[in, size_is]

dwCommandBuffSize

[in]

rgbReplyBuff

[in, out, size_is]

dwReplyBuffMaxSize pdwReplyBuffSize

[in]

[in, out]

Contains ISCP commands in array of bytes. Number of bytes in rgbCommandBuff. Results of request in array of bytes. Maximum size of rgbReplyBuff. Number of bytes placed in rgbReplyBuff. Return Values None. Remarks None. See Also None. 218 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual AIM Symbology ID Defaults Chapter 6 Scanner Support Symbology Codabar Code 11 Code 39 Code 93 Code128 Refer to the official AIM documentation on symbology identifiers for full information on the different processing options supported. ID Character Modifier Characters F H A G C 0 1 Standard Codabar symbol. No special processing. ABC Codabar (American Blood commission) concatenate/message append performed. Reader has validated the check character. 2 Reader has stripped the check character before transmission. 4 Single modulo 11 check character validated and transmitted. 0 1 Two modulo 11 check characters validated and transmitted. 3 Check characters validated but not transmitted. 0 No check character validation nor full ASCII processing. All data transmitted as decoded. 7 5 1 Modulo 43 check character validated and transmitted. 3 Modulo 43 check character validated but not transmitted. 4 Full ASCII character conversion performed. No check character validation. Full ASCII character conversion performed. Modulo 43 check character validated and transmitted. Full ASCII character conversion performed. Modulo 43 check character validated but not transmitted. 0 No options specified. Always transmit 0. 0 Standard data packet. No FNC1 in first or second symbol character position after start character. EAN/UCC-128 data packet. FNC1 in first symbol character position after start character. FNC1 in second symbol character position after start character. 2 4 Concatenation according to International Society for Blood 1 Interleaved 2 of 5 I Matrix 2 of 5 X0`F MSI M Transfusion specifications was performed. Concatenated data follows. 0 No check character validation. 1 Modulo 10 symbol check character validated and transmitted 3 Modulo 10 symbol check character validated but not transmitted. For symbologies or symbology options not listed, a code character with the value 0-F may be assigned by the decoder manufacturer to identify those symbologies and options implemented in the reader. 0 Modulo 10 symbol check character validated and transmitted. 1 Modulo 10 symbol check character validated but not transmitted. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 219 Chapter 6 Scanner Support Symbology (continued) ID Character Modifier Characters PDF 417/

Micro PDF 417 Plessey Standard 2 of 5

(2-bar start/stop) Standard 2 of 5

(3-bar start/stop) Telepen UPC/EAN L P R S B E 0 1 2 Reader set to conform with protocol defined in 1994 PDF 417 specifications. Reader set to follow protocol of ENV 12925 for Extended Channel Interpretation (all data characters 92 doubled). Reader set to follow protocol of ENV 12925 for Basic Channel Interpretation (data characters 92 are not doubled). 3 Code 128 emulation: implied FNC1 in first position. 4 Code 128 emulation: implied FNC1 after initial letter or pair of digits. 5 Code 128 emulation: no implied FNC1. 0 No options specified. Always transmit 0. 0 No check character validation. 1 Modulo 7 check character validated and transmitted. 3 Modulo 7 check character validated but not transmitted. 0 No options specified. Always transmit 0. Full ASCII mode 0 1 Double density numeric only mode 2 Double density numeric followed by full ASCII 4 Full ASCII followed by double density numeric Consider UPC/EAN symbols with supplements as two separate sym-

bols. The first symbol is the main data packet, and the second symbol is the 2 or 5 digit supplement. Transmit these two symbols separately, each with its own symbology identifier. Provision is made for the op-

tion of transmitting both symbols as a single data packet. 0 Standard data packet in full EAN format (13 digits for EAN-13, UPC-A, and UPC-E; does not include add-on data). 1 Two digit add-on data only. 2 Five digit add-on data only. 3 Combined data packet comprising 13 digits from EAN-13, UPC-A, or UPC-E symbol and 2 or 5 digits from add-on symbol. EAN-8 data packet 4 IMPORTANT: The symbology_id character letter must be uppercase for the above definitions. 220 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual IImage Interface Chapter 6 Scanner Support The IImage interface gives the application the capability to acquire images. The image acquired can be either a raw image as captured by the digital camera or it can be normalized. A normalized image is presented the same as if the picture were taken at right angles to the image and at the same distance. The normalized image is commonly used for signature capture applications. S IImage::ReadSigCapBuffer (page 221) S IImage::ReadSigCapFile (page 224) S IImage::ReadImage (page 225) S IImage::CancelReadImage (page 226) S IImage::Start (page 226) S IImage::Stop (page 227) S IImage::Open (page 227) S IImage::Close (page 228) IImage::ReadSigCapBuffer Syntax HRESULT IImage::ReadSigCapBuffer( ITC_SIGCAP_SPEC

*pSigCapSpec, ITC_IMAGE_SPEC *pImgBuffer, DWORD nMaxBuffSize

Parameters Parameters:

pSigCapSpec

[in] Pointer to the structure that identifies the signature capture region. This structure is defined as follows:

typedef struct tagITCSigCapSpec

DWORD dwStructSize;

INT iAspectRatio;

INT iOffsetX;

INT iOffsetY;

UINT uiWidth;

UINT uiHeight;

INT iResolution;

ITCFileFormat eFormat;

DWORD eDepth;

} ITC_SIGCAP_SPEC;

where:

S dwStructSize S iAspectRatio S iOffsetX Size, in bytes, of this struct. This is for version control. Ratio of the bar code height (linear bar codes) or row height (2D bar codes) to the narrow element width. Offset in X direction, relative to barcode center. Positive values are right of the bar code, negative values to the left. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 221 Chapter 6 Scanner Support S iOffsetY S uiWidth S uiHeight S iResolution S eFormat ITC_FILE_KIM =

ITC_FILE_TIFF_BIN =

ITC_FILE_TIFF_BIN_GROUP4 =

ITC_FILE_TIFF_GRAY_SCALE =

ITC_FILE_RAW =

ITC_FILE_JPEG =

0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, Offset in Y direction, relative to barcode center. Positive values are higher than the bar code, negative values lower. Width of signature capture image region in intelligent bar code units. Height of the signature capture image region in intelligent bar code units. Number of pixels per intelligent bar code unit. Format of the image buffer returned as follows. Currently, only ITC_FILE_RAW is supported.

// Returns data a KIM file

// TIFF Binary file

// TIFF Binary Group 4 compressed

// TIFF Gray Scale

// Raw image

// JPEG image S eDepth Number of bits per pixel. Currently, only one

(monochrome) or eight (gray-scale) are supported. Pointer to the buffer in which the signature capture image will be put. pImgBuffer

[out]

typedef struct tagITCImageSpec

DWORD dwStructSize;

LONG biWidth;

LONG biHeight;

WORD biBitCount;

ITC_FILE_FORMAT eFormat;

DWORD biActualImageSize;

DWORD biMaxImageBytes;

BYTE rgbImageData[1];

} ITC_IMAGE_SPEC;

where:

S dwStructSize Size, in bytes, of this struct. This is for version control. The width of each row in pixels. The number of rows in the image data. The number of bits per pixel. Identifies the image format. Total bytes of image data returned. S biWidth S biHeight S biBitCount S eFormat S biActualImageSize S biMaxImageBytes Maximum bytes that can be stored in S rgbImageData rgbImageData[]. Buffer containing the actual data, for example a 640x480 uses a 307200-byte buffer. The array size of this buffer is arbitrary so do not use this structure directly to reserve memory. The actual dimension of the buffer is identified by biMaxImageBytes. 222 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Scanner Support Return Values HRESULT identifying success or error. On error, the following codes will be returned:

S S_OK Image successfully returned. S ITC_RESULT_ERR_BADREGION_E The specified region is not in the image. S ITC_RESULT_NO_BC_DECODED_E A bar code has not yet been decoded or the last bar code decoded was not a signature capture symbology. S ITC_IMGBUFF_TOO_SMALL_E pImgBuffer is too small to contain the signature captured image. S ITC_INV_PARAMETER_E One of the parameters is invalid. S S_DEVICE_NOT_OPENED_E The device had not been opened. Remarks ReadSigCapBuffer() will return the image from the last decoded label with dimensions identified by the calling parameter. This signature capture region must include the signature capture bar code. The supported bar codes for signature capture are: PDF 417, Code 128, and Code 39. The caller specifies the width, height, and center of the image to be retrieved. This image is independent of any rotation of the bar code relative to the imager. Thus, if the bar code is decoded with the code itself upside down to the imager, the retrieved image will still be right side up. However, if the specified image is outside the field of view a result code of ITC_RESULT_ERR_BADREGION_E will be returned. This function uses the dimensions of the last decoded bar code as its coor-

dinate system. Thus, all the parameters describing the image size and posi-

tion are in units called Intelligent Bar Code Units. An Intelligent Bar Code Unit is equivalent to the narrow element width of the bar code. The dimensions of the resulting image can be calculated with this formula:

Resulting Width = Specified Width * Specified Resolution Resulting Height = Specified Height * Specified Resolution See Also None. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 223 Chapter 6 Scanner Support IImage::ReadSigCapFile Note: This has not been implemented as of this publication. Syntax HRESULT IImage::ReadSigCapFile( ITC_SIGCAP_SPEC

*pSigCapSpec, LPCTSTR pszFileName );

Parameters pSigCapSpec

[in] Pointer to the structure that identifies the signature capture region. See ReadSigCapFile (page 221) for a description of this structure. pszFileName

[in] Name of the file in which to copy the image. Return Values HRESULT identifying success or error. On error, the following codes will be returned:

S S_OK Image successfully returned. S ITC_RESULT_ERR_BADREGION_E The specified region is not in the image. S ITC_RESULT_NO_BC_DECODED_E A bar code has not yet been decoded or the last bar code decoded was not a signature capture symbology. S ITC_FILE_OPEN_E The file could not be opened. S ITC_INV_PARAMETER_E One of the parameters is invalid. S S_DEVICE_NOT_OPENED_E The device had not been opened. Remarks ReadSigCapFile() will write the image from the last decoded label with di-

mensions identified by the calling parameter. If the file already exists, its contents will be overwritten. This signature capture region must include the signature capture bar code. The supported bar codes for signature capture are: PDF 417, Code 128, and Code 39. The caller specifies the width, height, and center of the image to be retrieved. This image is independent of any rotation of the bar code relative to the imager. Thus, if the bar code is decoded with the code itself upside down to the imager, the retrieved image will still be right side up. However, if the specified image is outside the field of view a result code of ITC_RESULT_ERR_BADREGION_E will be returned. This function uses the dimensions of the last decoded bar code as its coor-

dinate system. Thus, all the parameters describing the image size and posi-

tion are in units called Intelligent Bar Code Units. An Intelligent Bar Code Unit is equivalent to the narrow element width of the bar code. 224 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Scanner Support The dimensions of the resulting image can be calculated with this formula:

Resulting Width = Specified Width * Specified Resolution Resulting Height = Specified Height * Specified Resolution See Also None. IImage::ReadImage Syntax HRESULT IImage::Read( ITCFileFormat eFormat, DWORD nDepth, ITC_IMAGE_SPEC *pImgBuffer, DWORD dwTimeout );

Parameters eFormat

[in]

Format of the image buffer returned as follows. Currently, only ITC_FILE_RAW is supported. ITC_FILE_KIM =

0, ITC_FILE_TIFF_BIN =

1, ITC_FILE_TIFF_BIN_GROUP4 = 2, ITC_FILE_TIFF_GRAY_SCALE = 3, 4, ITC_FILE_RAW =

ITC_FILE_JPEG =

5,

// Returns data a KIM file

// TIFF Binary file

// TIFF Binary Group 4 compressed

// TIFF Gray Scale

// Raw image

// JPEG image nDepth

[in]

Number of bits per pixel. Currently, only eight

(gray-scale) are supported. pImgBuffer dwTimeout

[in/out] Pointer to the buffer containing the image.

[in]

Milliseconds to wait for the image to be returned. Return Values HRESULT identifying success or error. On error, these will be returned:

S S_OK S ITC_IMGBUFF_TOO_SMALL_E pImgBuffer is too small to contain Image successfully returned. S ITC_TIMEOUT_E S ITC_INV_PARAMETER_E S S_DEVICE_NOT_OPENED_E the signature captured image. Timeout. One of the parameters is invalid. The device had not been opened. Remarks The image is returned in pImgBuffer in the caller specified format. See Also None. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 225 Chapter 6 Scanner Support IImage::CancelReadImage Syntax HRESULT IImage::CancelReadImage( );

Parameters None. Return Values Status code indicating success or failure as follows:

S S_OK S S_DEVICE_NOT_OPENED_E Imager closed. The device had not been opened. Remarks This function causes a pending image read of IImage::ReadImage() to re-

turn immediately with an error status. The purpose of this function is to allow the application to release a thread blocked on the ReadImage() call. See Also None. IImage::Start Syntax HRESULT IImage::Start( );

Parameters None. Return Values Status code indicating success or failure as follows:

S S_OK S S_DEVICE_NOT_OPENED_E Imager started. The device had not been opened. Remarks This function starts the image continuously capturing images. See Also None. 226 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Scanner Support IImage::Stop Syntax HRESULT IImage::Stop( );

Parameters None. Return Values Status code indicating success or failure as follows:

S S_OK S S_IMG_NOT_PRESENT_E S S_DEVICE_NOT_OPENED_E Imager started. Unit does not contain an imager. Device had not been opened. Remarks This function stops the image continuously capturing images. See Also None. IImage::Open Syntax HRESULT IImage::Open( BOOL fSigCapEnable );

Parameters fSigCapEnable

[in] When TRUE, signature capture is enabled. When FALSE, it is disabled. Bar code labels are decoded and images (via IImage::ReadImage) the same. Return Values Status code indicating success or failure as follows:

S S_OK S S_IMG_NOT_PRESENT_E S S_DEVICE_CONTENTION_E Imager opened. Unit does not contain an imager. Device has already been opened. Remarks This function exclusively allocates the imager device so that the other IIm-

age methods can be safely called. See Also None. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 227 Chapter 6 Scanner Support IImage::Close Syntax HRESULT IImage::Close( );

Parameters None. Return Values Status code indicating success or failure as follows:

S S_OK S S_DEVICE_NOT_OPENED_E Imager closed. The device had not been opened. Remarks This function releases the imager device so that other applications can open it. An IImage::Release() will also close the imager device. See Also None. 228 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Data Collection Configuration Chapter 6 Scanner Support Scanner settings for the 700 Series Computer can be configured via the Data Collection control panel applet. From the 700 Series Computer, tap Start Settings the System tab the Data Collection icon. See Ap-

pendix A, Control Panel Applets for more information about the following parameters. Note that these are in alphabetical order. S Codabar (page 292) S Code 11 (page 306) S Code 128 (page 295) S Code 128 Options (page 296) S Code 128 FNC1 Character (page 297) S Code 39 (page 290) S Code 93 (page 294) S Code 93 Length (page 294) S Data Matrix (page 308) S Interleaved 2 of 5 (page 303) S Matrix 2 of 5 (page 304) S MSI (page 299) S PDF 417 (page 300) S Macro PDF (page 300) S Micro PDF 417 (page 302) S Plessey (page 298) S QR Code (page 307) S Standard 2 of 5 (page 291) S Telepen (page 305) S UPC/EAN (page 293) 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 229 Chapter 6 Scanner Support Tethered Scanner The Intermec Tethered Scanner feature accepts data from the COM1 port wedges it to the keyboard interface, and allows some ADC. This feature can be enabled or disabled from the Today Screen on the 700 Series Com-

puter. Enabling and Disabling On the 700 Series Computer, tap Start Today. Tap the bar code scan-

ner icon in the System Tray (circled in the following illustration). Initially, the bar code scanner icon indicates that this feature is disabled (shown to the left). S Select Comm Port Wedge to send any data, coming into the 700 Series Computer through the COM1 port from an external input device, as keyboard data to an application on the desktop. For example, if you have Pocket Word running on your 700 Series Computer desktop, information scanned with a scanner connected to the COM1 port will appear in the Word document. If another data collection application is running and is active on the 700 Series Com-

puter, the scanned information will appear in that application. Note: When Comm Port Wedge is selected, regardless of the data sent by the external input device, you cannot control the device or the data format using any of the Intermec scanner control or data transfer APIs from the SDK or the internal Data Collection software. The external input device is governed by what software it has onboard to tell it how to scan, take pic-

tures, or send the data elsewhere. 230 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Scanner Support S Select 1551/1553 to enable the Sabre 1551E or 1553 Tethered Scanner to scan, then send data as keyboard data. The 1551/1553 Tethered Scanner has software onboard that translates scanned data into charac-

ters, so the running/active application does not need to know how to do that. All the scanner control and data transfer APIs will work with the 1551/1553 Tethered Scanner, so you can control the device. S Select Disable All to disable this feature and use the COM1 port for another application, such as ActiveSync. An error message will result if this option were not selected, but this action was attempted. Similarly, if ActiveSync is using the COM1 port, and you select Comm Port Wedge or 1551/1553, an error message will result. See Error Message on page 232 for more information. Changing Comm Settings Tap Change Comm Settings to configure the settings for the COM1 port. Current settings are restored after a warm-boot, but are lost after a cold-

boot. When these settings have not been changed, the OK button is dis-

abled (grayed out). When changes are made, tap OK after it is enabled to accept these changes. S Baud Rate:

1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 7 or 8 None, Odd, Even, Mark, Space 1 or 2 S Data Bits:

S Parity:

S Stop Bits:

S Flow Control: None or Hardware Tethered Scanner The default settings for the Tethered Scanner are shown in the following illustration:

700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 231 Chapter 6 Scanner Support Sabre 1551E or 1553 Tethered Scanner The default communication configuration for the Sabre 1551E or 1553 Tethered Scanner is shown in the following illustration. Scan the EasySet Reset Factory Defaults label to set the Sabre 1551E or 1553 tethered scan-

ner communications settings to this configuration. The COM1 port con-

figuration settings must also match those of the scanner to scan labels. Error Message Welch Allyn 1470 Imager Settings The Welch Allyn 1470 Imager can be set to this configuration by scanning the Factory Default Settings label. If the COM1 port is used by another application, such as ActiveSync, nei-

ther the Comm Port Wedge nor the 1551/1553 Tethered Scanner can be enabled. As a result, the following message may appear. Note that this mes-

sage is for the Comm Port Wedge. You must disable that application to free up the COM1 port before you can enable either the wedge or the scanner. Scanner Cabling A null modem cable is required for the Welch Allyn 1470 Imager to com-

municate with the 700 Series Computer when using the 700 Series Serial Cable (P/N: 226-999-001). The Sabre 1551E / 1553 Cable connects directly to the Model 700 Comm Port. 232 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Limitations and Capabilities Chapter 6 Scanner Support The Tethered Scanner has the following limitations:

S No auto detection of a scanner s physical connection to COM1 port. User needs to ensure the communication settings of COM1 port matched the settings of the device. S The Pocket PC Pocket Office applications misbehave when control characters such as carriage return are wedged. This is a known Pocket PC problem, which is being worked with Microsoft and for which a work around is being developed. S Communications port is COM1 and cannot be changed. S A complete bar code label is detected when the time between bytes (the inter-byte gap) exceeds 100 ms. This allows that data could be concate-

nated if two labels were received while the Comm Port Wedge or the 1551/1553 Tethered Scanner was not performing a read. That is, it could be wedging data just read or the read thread could be preempted. Also, the labels could appear concatenated if the scanner itself were to buffer the labels before transmitting them. When enabled, the Comm Port Wedge menu option has the following limitation:

S There is no bar code API to get bar code data from the bar code scan-

ner. The Comm Port Wedge transmits the data through the keyboard interface only. When enabled, the 1551/1553 menu option has the following capabilities:

S Grid Data Editing is available. S The source of the symbology configurations is only available via the Easy Set command labels. Only the Virtual Wedge configurations can be configured via the Data Collection Control Panel Applet Virtual Wedge page. See Appendix A, Control Panel Applets, for more information. S May transmit the data through the keyboard interface (via the Virtual Wedge). 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 233 Chapter 6 Scanner Support S The bar code APIs, defined in the IADC interface, are available to get bar code data from the bar code scanner. The following example shows how to programmatically collects bar code data:

#include IADC.h

#include ITCAdcMgmt.h IADC* pIADC;

HRESULT hrStatus = S_OK;

// Linked with ITCUUID.LIB

// Linked with ITCAdcDevMgmt.lib

// Create a ADC COM interface to collect bar code data from the 1551E/1553

// when the 1551/1553 menu option is enabled. hrStatus =

ITCDeviceOpen(TEXT(ExtScanner), IID_IADC, ITC_DHDEVFLAG_READAHEAD,

(LPVOID *) &pIADC);

if( SUCCEEDED(hrStatus) ) HRESULT hr = pIDC->Read(

BYTE byteBuffer[MAX_LABEL_SIZE];

DWORD dwLength = 0;

byteBuffer, MAX_LABEL_SIZE,

&dwLength, NULL, INFINITE

// Name of the ADC device.

// COM interface to return

// Devices Flags

// the returned interface

// Buffer to put the ADC data.

// Size of pDataBuffer in bytes.

// Number bytes returned.

// Time stamp of the received data. NULL.

// Number of milliseconds to wait.

ITCDeviceClose( (IUnknown **) pIADC);

when done using this COM interface, delete it:

234 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Programming 7 The following programming information pertains to the 700 Series Color Mobile Computer:

S Creating CAB Files (page 236) S FTP Server (page 251) S Full Screen (page 262) S Kernel I/O control functions (page 264) S Reboot Functions (page 280) S Remapping the Keypad (page 281) 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 235 Chapter 7 Programming Creating CAB Files The Windows CE operating system uses a .CAB file to install an applica-

tion on a Windows CE-based device. A .CAB file is composed of multiple files that are compressed into one file. Compressing multiple files into one file provides the following benefits:

S All application files are present. S A partial installation is prevented. S The application can be installed from several sources, such as a desktop computer or a Web site. Use the CAB Wizard application (CABWIZ.EXE) to generate a .CAB file for your application. Creating Device-Specific CAB Files Do the following to create a device-specific .CAB file for an application, in the order provided:

1 Create an .INF file with Windows CE-specific modifications (page 236). 2 Optional Create a SETUP.DLL file to provide custom control of the installation process (page 248). 3 Use the CAB Wizard to create the .CAB file, using the .INF file, the optional SETUP.DLL file, and the device-specific application files as parameters (page 249). Creating an .INF File An .INF file specifies information about an application for the CAB Wi-

zard. Below are the sections of an .INF file:

[Version]

This specifies the creator of the file, version, and other relevant informa-

tion. Required? Yes S Signature:

signature_name Must be $Windows NT$ as Windows CE is not available on Win-

dows 95. S Provider:

INF_creator The company name of the application, such as Microsoft. S CESignature:

$Windows CE$

EXAMPLE:

[Version]

Signature = $Windows NT$

Provider = Microsoft CESignature = $Windows CE$

236 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Programming

[CEStrings]

This specifies string substitutions for the application name and the default installation directory. Required? Yes S AppName:

app_name Name of the application. Other instances of %AppName% in the .INF file will be replaced with this string value, such as RP32. S InstallDir:

default_install_dir Default installation directory on the device. Other instances of %Install-

Dir% in the .INF file will be replaced with this string value. Example:

\storage_card\%AppName%

EXAMPLE:

[CEStrings]

AppName=Game Pack InstallDir=%CE1%\%AppName%

[Strings]

This section is optional and defines one or more string keys. A string key represents a string of printable characters. Required? No S string_key:

value String consisting of letters, digits, or other printable characters. Enclose value in double quotation marks if the corresponding string key is used in an item that requires double quotation marks. No string_keys is okay. EXAMPLE:

[Strings]

reg_path = Software\Microsoft\My Test App 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 237 Chapter 7 Programming

[CEDevice]

Describes the platform for the targeted application. All keys in this section are optional. If a key is nonexistent or has no data, Windows CE does not perform any checking with the exception being UnsupportedPlatforms. If the UnsupportedPlatforms key exists but no data, the previous value is not overridden. Required? Yes S ProcessorType :

processor_type The value that is returned by SYSTEMINFO.dwProcessorType. For example, the value for the SH3 CPU is 10003 and the MIPS CPU is 4000. S UnsupportedPlatforms: platform_family_name This lists known unsupported platform family names. If the name specified in the [CEDevice.xxx] section is different from that in the

[CEDevice] section, both platform_family_name values are unsupported for the microprocessor specified by xxx. That is, the list of unsupported platform family names is appended to the previous list of unsupported names. Application Manager will not display the application for an unsupported platform. Also, a user will be warned during the setup process if the .CAB file is copied to an unsupported device. EXAMPLE:

[CEDevice]

UnsupportedPlatforms = pltfrm1 ; pltfrm1 is unsupported

[CEDevice.SH3]

UnsupportedPlatforms = ; pltfrm1 is still unsupported S VersionMin:

minor_version Numeric value returned by OSVERSIONINFO.dwVersionMinor. The

.CAB file is valid for the currently connected device if the version of this device is greater than or equal to VersionMin. For Windows CE Japa-

nese language devices, set this to 2.01 S VersionMax:

major_version Numeric value returned by OSVERSIONINFO.dwVersionMajor. The

.CAB file is valid for the currently connected device if the version of this device is less than or equal to VersionMax. For Windows CE Japanese language devices, set this to 2.01 Note: Supported Windows CE operating system versions include 1.0, 1.01, 2.0, 2.01, and 2.10. When using these numbers, be sure to include all significant digits. S BuildMin:

build_number Numeric value returned by OSVERSIONINFO.dwBuildNumber. The

.CAB file is valid for the currently connected device if the version of this device is greater than or equal to BuildMin. S BuildMax:

build_number Numeric value returned by OSVERSIONINFO.dwBuildNumber. The

.CAB file is valid for the currently connected device if the version of this device is less than or equal to BuildMax. 238 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Programming EXAMPLE:

The following code example shows three [CEDevice] sections: one that gives basic information for any CPU and two that are specific to the SH3 and the MIPS microprocessors.

; A template for all platforms

[CEDevice]

UnsupportedPlatforms = pltfrm1 ; Does not support pltfrm1

; The following specifies version 1.0 devices only. VersionMin = 1.0 VersionMax = 1.0

[CEDevice.SH3]

; This will create a .CAB file specific to SH3 devices. ProcessorType = 10003 UnsupportedPlatforms =

; The following overrides the version settings so that no version checking is performed. VersionMin =

VersionMax =

[CEDevice.MIPS]

; This will create a .CAB file specific to MIPS devices. ProcessorType = 4000 UnsupportedPlatforms =pltfrm2

; Inherits all [CEDevice] settings

; SH3 .cab file is valid for SH3 microprocessors.

; pltfrm1 is still unsupported

; Inherits all [CEDevice] settings

; MIPS .CAB file is valid for MIPS microprocessor.

; pltfrm1, pltfrm2 unsupported for MIPs .CAB file. Note: To create the two CPU-specific .CAB files for the SETUP.INF file in the previous example, run the CAB Wizard with the /cpu sh3 mips parameter. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 239 Chapter 7 Programming

[DefaultInstall]

This describes the default installation of your application. Note that under this section, you will list items expanded upon later in this description. Required? Yes S Copyfiles:

copyfile_list_section Maps to files defined later in the .INF file, such as Files.App, Files.Font, and Files.Bitmaps. S AddReg:

add_registry_section Example: RegSettings.All S CEShortcuts:

shortcut_list_section String that identifies one more section that defines shortcuts to a file, as defined in the [CEShortcuts] section. S CESetupDLL:

setup_DLL Optimal string that specifies a SETUP.DLL file. It is written by the In-

dependent Software Vendor (ISV) and contains customized functions for operations during installation and removal of the application. The file must be specified in the [SourceDisksFiles] section. S CESelfRegister:

self_reg_DLL_filename String that identifies files that self-register by exporting the DllRegister-

Server and DllUnregisterServer Component Object Model (COM) functions. Specify these files in the [SourceDiskFiles] section. During installation, if installation on the device fails to call the file s exported DllRegisterServer function, the file s exported DllUnregisterServer function will not be called during removal. EXAMPLE:

[DefaultInstall]

AddReg = RegSettings.All CEShortcuts = Shortcuts.All

[SourceDiskNames]

This section describes the name and path of the disk on which your ap-

plication resides. Required? Yes S disk_ordinal:

disk_label,,path 1=,App files , C:\Appsoft\RP32\... 2=,Font files,,C:\RpTools\... 3=,CE Tools ,,C:\windows ce tools... S CESignature:

$Windows CE$

Example

[SourceDisksNames]

1 = ,Common files,,C:\app\common

[SourceDisksNames.SH3]

2 = ,SH3 files,,sh3

[SourceDisksNames.MIPS]

2 = ,MIPS files,,mips

; Required section

; Using an absolute path

; Using a relative path

; Using a relative path 240 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Programming

[SourceDiskFiles]

This describes the name and path of the files in which your application resides. Required? Yes S filename:

disk_number[,subdir]

RPM.EXE = 1,c:\appsoft\... WCESTART.INI = 1 RPMCE212.INI = 1 TAHOMA.TTF = 2 Note: [,subdir] is relative to the location of the INF file. Example

; Required section

[SourceDisksFiles]

begin.wav = 1 end.wav = 1 sample.hlp = 1

[SourceDisksFiles.SH3]

sample.exe = 2

[SourceDisksFiles.MIPS]

sample.exe = 2

; Uses the SourceDisksNames.SH3 identification of 2.

; Uses the SourceDisksNames.MIPS identification of 2. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 241 Chapter 7 Programming

[DestinationDirs]

This describes the names and paths of the destination directories for the application on the target device. Note Windows CE does not support directory identifiers. Required? Yes S file_list_section:

0,subdir String that identifies the destination directory. The following list shows the string substitutions supported by Windows CE. These can be used only for the beginning of the path. \

%CE1% \Program Files

%CE2% \Windows

%CE3% \My Documents

%CE4% \Windows\Startup

%CE5% \My Documents

%CE6% \Program Files\Accessories

%CE7% \Program Files\Communication

%CE8% \Program Files\Games

%CE9% \Program Files\Pocket Outlook

%CE10% \Program Files\Office

%CE11% \Windows\Start Menu\Programs

%CE12% \Windows\Start Menu\Programs\Accessories

%CE13% \Windows\Start Menu\Programs\Communications

%CE14% \Windows\Start Menu\Programs\Games

%CE15% \Windows\Fonts

%CE16% \Windows\Recent

%CE17% \Windows\Start Menu

%InstallDir%

Contains the path to the target directory selected during installation. It is declared in the [CEStrings] section

%AppName%

Contains the application name defined in the [CEStrings] section. Example

[DestinationDirs]

Files.Common = 0,%CE1%\My Subdir Files.Shared = 0,%CE2%

; \Program Files\My Subdir

; \Windows 242 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Programming

[CopyFiles]

This section, under the [DefaultInstall] section, describes the default files to copy to the target device. Within the [DefaultInstall] section, files were listed that must be defined elsewhere in the INF file. This section identi-

fies that mapping and may contain flags. Required? Yes S copyfile_list_section:

destination_filename,[source_filename]

The source_filename parameter is optional if it is the same as destina-

tion_filename. S copyfile_list_section:

flags The numeric value that specifies an action to be done while copying fi-

les. The following table shows values supported by Windows CE. Flag Value Description COPYFLG_WARN_IF_SKIP COPYFLG_NOSKIP COPYFLG_NO_OVERWRITE COPYFLG_REPLACEONLY 0x00000001 Warn user if skipping a file is attempted after error. 0x00000002 Do not allow a user to skip copying a file. 0x00000010 Do not overwrite files in destination directory. 0x00000400 Copy the source file to the destination directory only if the file is already in the destination directory. CE_COPYFLG_NO_DATE_DIALOG 0x20000000 Do not copy files if the target file is newer. CE_COPYFLG_NODATECHECK CE_COPYFLG_SHARED 0x40000000 Ignore date while overwriting the target file. 0x80000000 Create a reference when a shared DLL is counted. Example

[DefaultInstall.SH3]

CopyFiles = Files.Common, Files.SH3

[DefaultInstall.MIPS]

CopyFiles = Files.Common, Files.MIPS 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 243 Chapter 7 Programming

[AddReg]

This section, under the [DefaultInstall] section, is optional and describes the keys and values that the .CAB file adds to the device registry. Within the [DefaultInstall] section, a reference may have been made to this section, such as AddReg=RegSettings.All. This section defines the options for that setting. Required? No S add_registry_section: registry_root_string String that specifies the registry root location. The following list shows the values supported by Windows CE. S HKCR Same as HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT S HKCU Same as HKEY_CURRENT_USER S HKLM Same as HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE S add_registry_section: value_name Registry value name. If empty, the default registry value name is used. S add_registry_section:

flags Numeric value that specifies information about the registry key. The following table shows the values that are supported by Window CE. Flag Value Description FLG_ADDREG_NOCLOBBER 0x00000002 If the registry key exists, do not overwrite it. Can be used with any of the other flags in this table. FLG_ADDREG_TYPE_SZ FLG_ADDREG_TYPE_MULTI_SZ 0x00010000 REG_MULTI_SZ registry data type. Value field that follows 0x00000000 REG_SZ registry data type. FLG_ADDREG_TYPE_BINARY can be a list of strings separated by commas. 0x00000001 REG_BINARY registry data type. Value field that follows must be a list of numeric values separated by commas, one byte per field, and must not use the 0x hexadecimal prefix. FLG_ADDREG_TYPE_DWORD 0x00010001 REG_DWORD data type. The noncompatible format in the Win32 Setup .INF documentation is supported. Example AddReg = RegSettings.All

[RegSettings.All]

HKLM,%reg_path%,,0x00000000,alpha HKLM,%reg_path%,test,0x00010001,3 HKLM,%reg_path%\new,another,0x00010001,6

; <default> = alpha

; Test = 3

; New\another = 6 244 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Programming

[CEShortCuts]

This section, a Windows CE-specific section under the [DefaultInstall]

section, is optional and describes the shortcuts that the installation applica-

tion creates on the device. Within the [DefaultInstall] section, a reference may have been made to this section, such as ShortCuts.All. This section defines the options for that setting. Required? No S shortcut_list_section:

shortcut_filename String that identifies the shortcut name. It does not require the .LNK extension. S shortcut_list_section:

shortcut_type_flag Numeric value. Zero or empty represents a shortcut to a file; any non-

zero numeric value represents a shortcut to a folder. S shortcut_list_section:

target_file_path String value that specifies the destination location. Use the target file name for a file, such as MyApp.exe, that must be defined in a file copy list. For a path, use a file_list_section name defined in the [Destination-

Dirs] section, such as DefaultDestDir, or the %InstallDir% string. S shortcut_list_section:

standard_destination_path Optional string value. A standard %CEx% path or %InstallDir%. If no value is specified, the shortcut_list_section name of the current section or the DefaultDestDir value from the [DestinationDirs] section is used. Example CEShortcuts = Shortcuts.All

[Shortcuts.All]

Sample App,0,sample.exe App,0,sample.exe,%InstallDir%

; Uses the path in DestinationDirs. Sample

; The path is explicitly specified. Sample .INF File

; Required section

; Required section

[Version]

Signature = $Windows NT$

Provider = Intermec Technologies Corporation CESignature = $Windows CE$

;[CEDevice]

;ProcessorType =

[DefaultInstall]

CopyFiles = Files.App, Files.Fonts, Files.BitMaps, Files.Intl, Files.TelecomNcsCE, Files.Windows, Files.Import, Files.Export, Files.Work, Files.Database, Files.WinCE AddReg = RegSettings.All ;CEShortcuts =

Shortcuts.All

[SourceDisksNames] ; Required section 1 = ,App files ,,c:\appsoft\... 2 = ,Font files ,,c:\WinNT\Fonts 3 = ,CE Tools ,,c:\windows ce tools\wce212\6110ie\mfc\lib\x86

[SourceDisksFiles] ; Required section rpm.exe wcestart.ini = 1

= 1,C:\Appsoft\program\wce212\WCEX86Rel6110 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 245 Chapter 7 Programming rpmce212.ini = 1 intermec.bmp = 1 rpmlogo.bmp = 1 rpmname.bmp = 1 import.bmp = 1 export.bmp = 1 clock.bmp = 1 printer.bmp = 1 filecopy.bmp = 1 readme.txt = 1 lang_eng.bin = 1 rpmdata.dbd = 1,database\wce1 tahoma.ttf = 2 mfcce212.dll = 3 olece212.dll = 3 olece211.dll = 1,c:\windows ce tools\wce211\NMSD61102.11\mfc\lib\x86 rdm45wce.dll = 1,c:\rptools\rdm45wce\4_50\lib\wce212\wcex86rel picfmt.dll = 1,c:\rptools\picfmt\1_00\wce212\wcex86rel6110 fmtctrl.dll = 1,c:\rptools\fmtctrl\1_00\wce212\wcex86rel6110 ugrid.dll = 1,c:\rptools\ugrid\1_00\wce212\wcex86rel6110 simple.dll = 1,c:\rptools\pspbm0c\1_00\wce211\wcex86rel psink.dll = 1,c:\rptools\psink\1_00\wce211\WCEX86RelMinDependency pslpwce.dll =1,c:\rptools\pslpm0c\1_00\wce211\WCEX86RelMinDependency npcpport.dll = 1,c:\rptools\cedk\212_03\installable drivers\printer\npcp

;dexcom.dll = 1,c:\rptools\psdxm0c\1_00\x86 ncsce.exe = 1,c:\rptools\ncsce\1_04 nrinet.dll = 1,c:\rptools\ncsce\1_04

[DestinationDirs] ; Required section

;Shortcuts.All = 0,%CE3% ; \Windows\Desktop Files.App

= 0,%InstallDir%\DataBase Files.DataBase Files.BitMaps

= 0,%InstallDir%\Bitmaps Files.Fonts

= 0,%InstallDir%\Fonts

= 0,%InstallDir%\Intl Files.Intl Files.TelecomNcsCE = 0,%InstallDir%\Telecom\NcsCE Files.Windows

= 0,%InstallDir%\Windows Files.Import

= 0,%InstallDir%\Import

= 0,%InstallDir%\Export Files.Export Files.Work

= 0,%InstallDir%\Work Files.WinCE

= 0,\storage_card\wince

[CEStrings]

; Required section AppName = Rp32 InstallDir = \storage_card\%AppName%

[Strings]

;[Shortcuts.All]

;Sample App,0,sample.exe

;Sample App,0,sample.exe,%InstallDir%

[Files.App]

rpm.exe,,,0 rpm.ini,rpmce212.ini,,0 mfcce212.dll,,,0 olece212.dll,,,0 olece211.dll,,,0 rdm45wce.dll,,,0 picfmt.dll,,,0

; Optional section

= 0,%InstallDir%

; Uses the path in DestinationDirs.

; The path is explicitly specified. 246 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Programming fmtctrl.dll,,,0 ugrid.dll,,,0 simple.dll,,,0 psink.dll,,,0 pslpwce.dll,,,0 npcpport.dll,,,0

;dexcom.dll,,,0

[Files.DataBase]

rpmdata.dbd,,,0

[Files.Fonts]

tahoma.ttf,,,0

[Files.BitMaps]

intermec.bmp,,,0 rpmlogo.bmp,,,0 rpmname.bmp,,,0 import.bmp,,,0 export.bmp,,,0 clock.bmp,,,0 printer.bmp,,,0 filecopy.bmp,,,0

[Files.Intl]

lang_eng.bin,,,0

[Files.TelecomNcsCE]

ncsce.exe,,,0 nrinet.dll,,,0

[Files.Windows]

readme.txt,,,0

[Files.Import]

readme.txt,,,0

[Files.Export]

readme.txt,,,0

[Files.Work]

readme.txt,,,0

[Files.WinCE]

wcestart.ini,,,0

[RegSettings.All]

HKLM,SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Shell\AutoHide,,0x00010001,1

; Autohide the taskbar HKLM,SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Shell\OnTop,,0x00010001,0

; Clock is not on taskbar

; Shell is not on top HKLM,SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Clock,SHOW_CLOCK,0x00010001,0 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 247 Chapter 7 Programming Using Installation Functions in SETUP.DLL SETUP.DLL is an optional file that enables you to perform custom opera-

tions during installation and removal of your application. The following list shows the functions that are exported by SETUP.DLL. S Install_Init Called before installation begins. Use this function to check the applica-

tion version when reinstalling an application and to determine if a de-

pendent application is present. S Install_Exit Called after installation is complete. Use this function to handle errors that occur during application installation. S Uninstall_Init Called before the removal process begins. Use this function to close the application, if the application is running. S Uninstall_Exit Called after the removal process is complete. Use this function to save database information to a file and delete the database and to tell the user where the user data files are stored and how to reinstall the application. Note; Use [DefaultInstall] CESelfRegister (page 240) in the .INF file to point to SETUP.DLL. After the CAB File Extraction Cab files that need to cause a warm reset after cab extraction will need to create the __RESETMEPLEASE__.TXT file in the \Windows directory. The preferred method to create this file is within the DllMain portion of the SETUP.DLL file. It looks like this:

BOOL APIENTRY DllMain( HANDLE hModule, DWORD ul_reason_for_call, LPVOID lpReserved )

switch (ul_reason_for_call)

case DLL_PROCESS_ATTACH:

case DLL_THREAD_ATTACH:

case DLL_THREAD_DETACH:

case DLL_PROCESS_DETACH:

break;

break;

break;

if (bInstallSuccessful) {

HANDLE h;

h = CreateFile(L\\Windows\\__resetmeplease__.txt, GENERIC_READ|GENERIC_WRITE, 0, NULL, CREATE_ALWAYS, FILE_ATTRIBUTE_HIDDEN, NULL);

if (h != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE) CloseHandle(h);

break;

return TRUE;

248 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Programming The system software looks for the following directory structure and files on the installed media card whether it be an SD card or CF card or embedded flash file system. No other folders need exist.

\2577\autorun.exe

\2577\autorun.dat

\2577\autocab.exe

\2577\autocab.dat

\cabfiles\*.cab Creating CAB Files with CAB Wizard After you create the .INF file and the optional SETUP.DLL file, use the CAB Wizard to create the .CAB file. The command-line syntax for the CAB Wizard is as follows:

cabwiz.exe inf_file [/dest dest_directory] [/err error_file] [/cpu cpu_type

[cpu_type]]

A batch file, located in <program> directory, with the following com-

mands, works well:

cd\Windows CE Tools\WCE211\MS HPC Pro\support\appinst\bin cabwiz.exe c:\appsoft\<program>\<inf_file_name>

cd \appsoft\<program>

S inf_file The SETUP.INF file path. S dest_directory The destination directory for the .CAB files. If no directory is specified, the .CAB files are created in the inf_file directory. S error_file The file name for a log file that contains all warnings and errors that are encountered when the .CAB files are compiled. If no file name is speci-

fied, errors are displayed in message boxes. If a file name is used, the CAB Wizard runs without the user interface (UI); this is useful for au-

tomated builds. S cpu_type Creates a .CAB file for each specified microprocessor tag. A micropro-

cessor tag is a label used in the Win32 SETUP.INF file to differentiate between different microprocessor types. The /cpu parameter, followed by multiple cpu_type values, must be the last qualifier in the command line. Example This example creates .CAB files for the SH3 and MIPS microprocessors, assuming that the Win32 SETUP.INF file contains the SH3 and MIPS tags:

cabwiz.exe c:\myfile.inf /err myfile.err /cpu sh3 mips Note: CABWIZ.EXE, MAKECAB.EXE, and CABWIZ.DDF (Windows CE files available on the Windows CE Toolkit) must be installed in the same directory on the desktop computer. Call CABWIZ.EXE using its full path for the CAB Wizard application to run correctly. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 249 Chapter 7 Programming Troubleshooting the CAB Wizard To identify and avoid problems that might occur when using the CAB Wizard, follow these guidelines:

S Use %% for a percent sign (%) character when using this character in an .INF file string, as specified in Win32 documentation. This will not work under the [Strings] section. S Do not use .INF or .CAB files created for Windows CE to install ap-

plications on Windows-based desktop platforms. S Ensure the MAKECAB.EXE and CABWIZ.DDF files, included with Windows CE, are in the same directory as CABWIZ.EXE. S Use the full path to call CABWIZ.EXE. S Do not create a .CAB file with the MAKECAB.EXE file included with Windows CE. You must use CABWIZ.EXE, which uses MAKE-

CAB.EXE to generate the .CAB files for Windows CE. S Do not set the read-only attribute for .CAB files. 250 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual FTP Server Chapter 7 Programming FTP support is provided through the FTP Server application FTPDCE.EXE (MS Windows CE Versions) which is provided as part the base system. FTPDCE is the Internet File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server process. The server can be invoked from an application or command line. Besides ser-

vicing FTP client requests the FTP Server also send a network announce-

ment to notify prospective clients of server availability. Synopsis ftpdce [ options ]

Options S -Aaddr Sets the single target address to which to send the network announce-

ment. Default is broadcast. S -Bbyte Sets the FTP data block size. Smaller sizes may be useful over slower links. Default is 65536. S -Cname Sets the device name. Used by Intermec management software. S -Fvalue Disables the default Intermec account. A value of 0 disables the ac-

count. Default is 1. Note: Disabling the default account without providing a working access control list on the server will result in a device that will not accept any FTP connections. S -Hsec Sets the interval between network announcements in seconds.A value of 0 turns the network announcement off. Default is 30 seconds. S -Iip Sets the preferred 6920 Communications Server (optional). S -Llog Sets the state of logging. Default is 0 (disabled). S -Nsec Specifies the number of seconds to wait before starting FTP server ser-

vices. S -Pport Sets the UDP port on which the network announcement will be sent. Default port is 52401. S -Qport Sets the port on which the FTP Server will listen for connections. Default port is 21. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 251 Chapter 7 Programming S -Rdir Sets the FTP mount point to this directory. Default is the rootdirectory of the drive from which the FTP Server program was executed. S -Tscript Sets the script name for the 6920 Communications Server to process. S -Uurl Sets the default URL for this device. S -Zparms Sets extended parameters to be included in the network announcement. Configurable Parameters Via the Registry Editor The following parameters receive default values during the installation of the Intermec FTP Server components. A few of the parameters are visible in the registry by default, but most must be created in order to modify the default behavior of the FTP server. BlockSize Setting this parameter forces the Intermec FTP Server to transmit and re-

ceive Ethernet packets using the specified data block size. By default, the FTP server transmits and receives data using a 64K data block size. Adjust-

ing this value may be useful in certain wireless TCP/IP installations. Key HKLM\Software\Intermec\IFTP Value Type REG_DWORD - data block size, in bytes. Valid Range 0x100-0x10000 (256-65536 decimal). Default 65536 252 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Programming DeviceName This parameter forces the Intermec FTP Server to include the specified device name in the Intermec Device Network Announcement (IDNA). Adjusting this value may be useful in assigning a symbolic name to this device for asset tracking. Key HKLM\Software\Intermec\IFTP Value Type REG_SZ Valid Range None. Default None. DeviceURL This parameter forces the Intermec FTP Server to transmit the specified URL in the IDNA. This can be used by Intermec management software for asset management. Key HKLM\Software\Intermec\IFTP Value Type REG_SZ Valid Range None. Default None. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 253 Chapter 7 Programming IDNATarget This parameter forces the Intermec FTP Server to transmit the IDNA to a specific destination instead of a general UDP broadcast. This parameter is useful on networks that do not allow UDP broadcasts to be routed be-

tween subnets. The use of this parameter will restrict the reception of the IDNA to the target destination only. Key HKLM\Software\Intermec\IFTP Value Type REG_SZ Valid Range None. Default None. ManifestName This parameter forces the Intermec FTP Server to transmit the specified manifest name in the IDNA. This parameter is used by the Intermec 6920 Communications Server for communication transactions. See the 6920 Communications Server documentation for proper use of this parameter. Key HKLM\Software\Intermec\IFTP Value Type REG_SZ Valid Range None. Default iftp.ini 254 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Programming PauseAtStartup This parameter forces the Intermec FTP Server to sleep for the specified number of seconds before making the FTP service available on the device. Key HKLM\Software\Intermec\IFTP Value Type REG_DWORD - stored in seconds. Valid Range None. Default 0 Root This parameter forces the Intermec FTP Server to set the root of the FTP mount point to the specified value. Note that this must map to an existing directory or you will not be able to log into the FTP Server. Key HKLM\Software\Intermec\IFTP Value Type REG_SZ Valid Range None. Default

700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 255 Chapter 7 Programming Transferring Files Over TCP/IP Networks The File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server transfers files over TCP/IP net-

works. The FTPDCE.EXE program is a version that does not display a window, but can run in the background. FTPDCE is the Internet File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server process. The server can be invoked from an application or command line. Besides ser-

vicing FTP client requests, the FTP Server also sends a network an-

nouncement to notify prospective clients of server availability. Remarks The FTP Server currently supports the following FTP requests:

S CDUP Changes to the parent directory of the current working directory. S CWD Changes working directory. S DELE Deletes a file. S HELP Gives help information. S LIST (This FTP request is the same as the ls -lgA command). Gives list files in a directory. S MKD Makes a directory. S MODE (Always Uses Binary). Specifies data transfer mode. S NLST Gives a name list of files in directory (this FTP request is the same as the ls command). S NOOP Does nothing. S PASS Specifies a password. S PWD Prints the current working directory. S QUIT Terminates session. S RETR Retrieves a file. S RMD Removes a directory. S RNFR Specifies rename-from file name. 256 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Programming S RNTO Specifies rename-to file name. S STOR Stores a file. S SYST Shows the operating system type of server system. S TYPE (Binary transfers only.) Specifies the data transfer type with the Type parameter. S USER Specifies user name. S XCUP (Not Normally Used) Changes the parent directory of the current working directory. S XCWD (Not Normally Used) Changes the current directory. S XMKD (Not Normally Used) Creates a directory. S XPWD (Not Normally Used) Prints the current working directory. S XRMD (Not Normally Used) Removes a directory. S SITE The following nonstandard or operating system (OS)-specific com-

mands are supported by the SITE request. For Microsoft FTP clients, you can send site commands by preceding the command with quote such as quote site status. S ATTRIB Gets or sets the attributes of a given file. (SITE ATTRIB) Usage:

QUOTE SITE ATTRIB [+R | -R] [+A | -A ] [+S | -S]

[+H | -H] [[path] filename]

Sets an attribute.

Clears an attribute. R Read-only file attribute. A Archive file attribute. S System file attribute. H Hidden file attribute. To retrieve the attributes of a file, only specify the file. The server re-

sponse will be: 200-AD SHRCEIX filename If the flag exists in its position shown above, it is set. Also, in addition to the values defined above, there is also defined:

C E I X Compressed file attribute. Encrypted file attribute. INROM file attribute. XIP file attribute (execute in ROM, not shadowed in RAM). 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 257 Chapter 7 Programming S BOOT Reboots the server OS. This will cause the system on which the serv-

er is executing to reboot. The FTP Server will shut down cleanly be-

fore reboot. All client connections will be terminated. Cold boot is default except for the PocketPC build in which the default is warm boot.

(SITE BOOT) Usage:

S COPY QUOTE SITE BOOT [WARM | COLD]

Copies a file from one location to another. (SITE COPY) Usage:

QUOTE SITE COPY [source] [destination]

Example QUOTE SITE COPY \Storage Card\one.dat \Storage Card\two.dat S EXIT Exits the FTP Server. This command will shut down the FTP Server thus terminating all client connections. (SITE EXIT) Usage:

S HELP QUOTE SITE EXIT Gives site command help information. (SITE HELP) Usage:

S KILL QUOTE SITE HELP [command]

Terminates a running program. (SITE KILL) Usage:

S LOG QUOTE SITE KILL [program | pid]

Opens or closes the program log. (SITE LOG) Usage:

S PLIST QUOTE SITE LOG [open [filename]| close]

Lists the running processes (not supported on all platforms).

(SITE PLIST) Usage:

S RUN QUOTE SITE PLIST Starts a program running. If the program to run has spaces in path or filename, wrapping the name with single quotes is required. Usage:

QUOTE SITE RUN [program]

Example QUOTE SITE RUN \Storage Card\app.exe 258 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Programming S STATUS Returns the current settings of the FTP Server. MAC, serial number, model, IP address, network announcement information as well as OS memory usage are returned. (SITE STATUS) Usage:

QUOTE SITE STATUS S TIMEOUT Toggles idle timeout between 120 to 1200 seconds (2 to 20 minutes). If this timer expires with no activity between the client and the server, the client connection will be disconnected. If the optional seconds argument is supplied, the server will set the connection timeout to the number of seconds specified. Default is 120 seconds or 2 minutes.

(SITE TIMEOUT) Usage:

QUOTE SITE TIMEOUT [seconds]

The remaining FTP requests specified in RFC 959 are recognized, but not implemented. The banner returned in the parenthetical portion of its greeting shows the version number of the FTP Server as well as the MAC address, serial num-

ber and OS of the machine hosting the server. The FTP Server supports browsing from the latest Netscape and Microsoft web browsers. Drag-and-drop capability is available using this environ-

ment. The FTPDCMDS subdirectory contains commands that can be used from the web browser. S Click EXITME.BIN to execute a SITE EXIT command. S Click REBOOTME.BIN to execute SITE BOOT command. S Use the GET command on these files to have the FTP Server execute these commands. S Security:

A customer configurable access control list may be installed on the 700 Series Computer. This list will allow customers to restrict access via the FTP Server to the users they wish. This is in addition to the default Intermec account which can be disabled using the -F0 option at runtime. The access control list is named FTPDCE.TXT and is placed in the same directory on the 700 Series Computer as the FTPDCE.EXE server. The FTP Server will encrypt this file to keep the information safe from unauthorized users. This file is encrypted when the FTP Server is started so a file that is placed onto the 700 Series Computer after the FTP Server starts will require a restart of the FTP Server to take effect. The format of the FTPDCE.TXT is as follows:

FTPDCE:user1!passwd1<cr><lf>user2!passwd2<cr><lf>user3!passw d3<cr><lf>... 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 259 Chapter 7 Programming Note: The user accounts and passwords are case sensitive. Once the access control list is encrypted on the 700 Series Computer, the FTP Server will hide this file from users. Once an access control list has been installed on the 700 Series Computer, a new one will not be accepted by the FTP Server until the previous one is removed. Encrypted access control lists are not portable between 700 Series Com-

puters. Stopping the FTP Server from Your Application To allow application programmers the ability to programmatically shut down the FTP Server, the FTP Server periodically tests to see if a named event is signaled. The name for this event is ITC_IFTP_STOP (no quotes). For examples on how to use this event, consult the Microsoft Developer Network Library at http://www.msdn.com. The MSDN Library is an essen-

tial resource for developers using Microsoft tools, products, and technolo-

gies. It contains a bounty of technical programming information, includ-

ing sample code, documentation, technical articles, and reference guides. This automatically starts the FTP Server (FTPDCE.EXE) when the 700 Series Computer is powered on. This is provided with the NDISTRAY program, which displays the popup menu that currently allows you to load and unload the network drivers. Tap the antenna icon in the System Tray of the Today screen (a sample antenna icon is circled below) to get this pop-

up menu. Autostart FTP 260 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Programming The default is to start the FTP Server at boot time, unless the following registry entry is defined and set to 0 which disables AutoFTP. 1 enables the AutoFTP. The entry can be set from the NDISTRAY pop-up menu by selecting either AutoFTP On or AutoFTP Off. HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Intermec\Ndistray\StartupIFTP These new entries are located below the selections to load the network drivers. If the StartupIFTP registry key is not defined, the FTP Server is loaded by default, to provide out-of-the-box capability for customers who want to begin loading files to the 700 Series Computer without any prior configuration. Note: If a network driver is unloaded using the NDISTRAY popup menu, and the FTP Server is running, the FTP Server is stopped. On a resume, if AutoFTP is enabled and the FTP Server is running, it is stopped and restarted. NDISTRAY uses a helper application named RESE-

TIFTP to implement the restart on resume feature. To do an AutoFTP Installation Check:

1 Ensure the FTP Server is running out-of-the-box the first time. 2 Tap Start Today to access the Today screen, then tap the antenna icon in the System Tray to bring up the NDISTRAY pop-up menu. Select AutoFTP Off to disable AutoFTP. Do a warm boot and confirm the FTP Server is not running. 3 Tap Start Today to access the Today screen, then tap the antenna icon in the System Tray to bring up the NDISTRAY pop-up menu. Select AutoFTP On to enable AutoFTP, reboot and confirm it is running. 4 Unload the network driver when the FTP Server is running and confirm that it is not running any more. 5 Load the FTP Server, establish a connection, then suspend and resume. The server should still be running, but the FTP connection to the client should be dropped. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 261 Chapter 7 Programming Full Screen Pocket PC is a hardware specification created by Microsoft Corporation. Devices that wish to carry the Pocket PC logo must meet the minimum hardware requirements set in the Pocket PC specification. Manufacturers are free to add extra hardware functionality. Pocket PC 2002 devices also use a specialized version of the CE operating system. This OS is built from Windows CE 3.0 but contains customiza-

tions, most notably the lack of a desktop and the addition of the Today Screen. To carry the Pocket PC logo, all devices must be tested at an Independent Test Laboratory. The ITL testing is done based on Microsoft requirements. The test lab then reports the findings back to Microsoft Corporation and Intermec Technologies. If the 700 Series Computer passed all tests, Inter-

mec is allowed to ship the device with the Pocket PC logo. Each time the operating system is modified, Intermec must resubmit to ITL testing. This means we cannot change the operating system much and still be a Pocket PC device. For example, if we remove Word from the Start menu, the device would fail ITL testing and we would not be able to ship devices with the Pocket PC logo. Although many customers want a Pocket PC device, some customers would prefer that their users not have access to all of the Pocket PC featu-

res. Intermec cannot customize the operating system in any way but a cus-

tom application can:

S Delete items from the Start menu, and Programs folder. These items are just shortcuts in the file system so the application is not really being deleted. Cold booting the device will bring these items back so the ap-

plication will need to be run on every cold boot. S Use the RegFlushKey() API to save a copy of the registry to a storage device. See the Recovery CD Help for more information on how to do this. Saving a copy of the registry will allow most system settings to be restored in a cold boot situation. S Use the SHFullScreen() API in conjunction with other APIs to make the application take up the entire display and prevent the start menu from being available. S Remap keys and disable keys on the keypad. S Create a custom SIP. S Make changes to the registry to configure the device. 262 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Programming Should you want your 700 Series Computer to display a full screen, keep in mind that your computer is Pocket-PC certified by Microsoft Corpora-

tion. Check out resources on programming for the Pocket PC, using the following links. These instructions give full instructions on how to display full screen. S Instructions on how to create a full screen application for eVC++ ap-

plications using an SHFullScreen() API:

http://support.microsoft.com/support/kb/articles/Q266/2/44.ASP S Instructions on how to create a full screen application for eVB applica-

tions also using the SHFullScreen() API:

http://support.microsoft.com/support/kb/articles/Q265/4/51.ASP 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 263 Chapter 7 Programming Kernel I/O Controls This describes the KernelIoControl() functions available to application programmers. Most C++ applications will need to prototype the function as the following to avoid link and compile errors. extern C BOOL KernelIoControl(DWORD dwIoControlCode, LPVOID lpInBuf, DWORD nInBufSize, LPVOID lpOutBuf, DWORD nOutBufSize, LPDWORD lpBytesReturned);

IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICE_INFO This IOCTL returns either the platform type or the OEMPLATFORM name based on an input value. Syntax BOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICE_INFO, LPVOID lpInBuf, DWORD nInBufSize, LPVOID lpOutBuf, DWORD nOutBufSize, LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );

Parameters lpInBuf lpInBufSize lpOutBuf nOutBufSize Points to a DWORD containing either the SPI_GETPLATFORMTYPE or SPI_GETOEMINFO value. Must be set to sizeof(DWORD). Must point to a buffer large enough to hold the return data of the function. If SPI_GETPLATFORMTYPE is specified in lpInBuf, then the PocketPC\0 Unicode string is returned. If SPI_GETOEMINFO is specified in lpInBuf, then the Intermec 700\0 Unicode string is returned. The size of lpOutBuf in bytes. Must be large enough to hold the string returned. lpBytesReturned The actual number of bytes returned by the function for the data requested. Return Values Returns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails. GetLastError() may be used to get the extended error value. 264 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Programming IOCTL_HAL_ITC_READ_PARM Usage

#include oemioctl.h Syntax BOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_ITC_READ_PARM,LPVOID lpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORD nOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );

Points to this structure. See ID Field Values below. Parameters lpInBuf struct PARMS {

BYTE id;

BYTE ClassId;

nInBufSize lpOutBuf Must be set to the size of the PARMS structure. Must point to a buffer large enough to hold the return data of the function. If this field is set to NULL and nOutBufSize is set to zero when the function is called the function will return the number bytes required by the buffer. The size of lpOutBuf in bytes. nOutBufSize lpBytesReturned The number of bytes returned by the function for the data requested. Return Values Returns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails. GetLastError() may be used to get the error value. Either ERROR_INVALID_PARAMETER or ERROR_INSUFFICIENT_BUFFER may be returned when this function is used to get the error. ID Field Values The id field of the PARMS structure may be one of the following values:

S ITC_NVPARM_ETHERNET_ID This IOCTL returns the Ethernet 802.11 MAC Address. Six bytes are returned in the buffer pointed to by the lpOutBuffer parameter. S ITC_NVPARM_SERIAL_NUM This IOCTL returns the serial number of the device in BCD format. Six bytes are returned in the buffer pointed to by the lpOutBuffer pa-

rameter. S ITC_NVPARM_MANF_DATE This IOCTL returns the device date of manufacture in the BCD YYYY/MM/DD format. Four bytes are returned in the buffer pointed to by the lpOutBuffer parameter. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 265 Chapter 7 Programming S ITC_NVPARM_SERVICE_DATE This IOCTL returns the device s date of last service in BCD YYYY/

MM/DD format. Four bytes are returned in the buffer pointed to by the lpOutBuffer parameter. S ITC_NVPARM_DISPLAY_TYPE This IOCTL returns the device s display type. One byte is returned in the buffer pointed to by the lpOutBuffer parameter. S ITC_NVPARM_EDG_IP This IOCTL returns the device Ethernet debug IP address. Four bytes are returned in the buffer pointed to by the lpOutBuffer parameter. S ITC_NVPARM_EDBG_SUBNET This IOCTL returns the device Ethernet debug subnet mask. Four by-

tes are returned in the buffer pointed to by the lpOutBuffer parameter. S ITC_NVPARM_ECN This IOCTL returns ECNs applied to the device in a bit array format. Four bytes are returned in the buffer pointed to by the lpOutBuffer pa-

rameter. S ITC_NVPARM_CONTRAST This IOCTL returns the device default contrast setting. Two bytes are returned in the buffer pointed to by the lpOutBuffer parameter. S ITC_NVPARM_MCODE This IOCTL returns the manufacturing configuration code for the de-

vice. Sixteen bytes are returned in the buffer pointed to by the lpOut-

Buffer parameter. S ITC_NVPARM_VERSION_NUMBER This IOCTL returns the firmware version for various system compo-

nents. These values for the ClassId field of the PARMS structure are al-

lowed when ITC_NVPARM_VERSION_NUMBER is used in the id field:

S VN_CLASS_KBD Returns a five-byte string, including null terminator, that contains an ASCII value which represents the keyboard microprocessor version in the system. The format of the string is x.xx with a terminating null character. S VN_CLASS_ASIC Returns a five-byte string, including null terminator, that contains an ASCII value which represents the version of the FPGA firmware in the system. The format of the string is x.xx with a terminating null character. S VN_CLASS_BOOTSTRAP Returns a five-byte string, including null terminator, that contains an ASCII value which represents the version of the Bootstrap Loader firmware in the system. The format of the string is x.xx with a termi-

nating null character. 266 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Programming S ITC_NVPARM_INTERMEC_SOFTWARE_CONTENT This IOCTL reads the manufacturing flag bits from the non-volatile data store that dictates certain software parameters. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by lpOutBuffer that indi-

cates if Intermec Content is enabled in the XIP regions. TRUE indicates that it is enabled. FALSE indicates that it is not enabled. S ITC_NVPARM_ANTENNA_DIVERSITY This IOCTL reads the state of the antenna diversity flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by lpOutBuffer that indi-

cates if there is a diversity antenna installed. TRUE indicates that it is installed. FALSE indicates that it is not installed. S ITC_NVPARM_WAN_RI This IOCTL reads the state of the WAN ring indicator flag. A BOOL-

EAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by lpOutBuffer that indicates the polarity of the WAN RI signal. TRUE indicates active high. FALSE indicates active low. S ITC_NVPARM_RTC_RESTORE This IOCTL reads the state of the real-time clock restore flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by lpOutBuf-

fer. TRUE indicates that the RTC will be restored upon a cold boot. FALSE indicates that the RTC will not be restored. S ITC_NVPARM_INTERMEC_DATACOLLECTION_SW This IOCTL reads the state of the data collection software enabled flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointer to by lpOut-

Buffer that indicates the data collection software is to be installed at boot time. FALSE indicates the data collection software should not be installed. S ITC_NVPARM_INTERMEC_DATACOLLECTION_HW This IOCTL reads the data collection hardware flags. A BYTE is re-

turned in the buffer pointer to by lpOutBuffer that indicates the type of data collection hardware installed. The maximum possible value re-

turned is ITC_DEVID_SCANHW_MAX. S ITC_DEVID_SCANHW_NONE No scanner hardware is installed. S ITC_DEVID_OEM2D_IMAGER OEM 2D imager is installed. S ITC_DEVID_INTERMEC2D_IMAGER Intermec 2D imager is installed. S ITC_DEVID_SE900_LASER SE900 laser is installed. S ITC_DEVID_SE900HS_LASER SE900HS laser is installed. The high bit indicates whether the S6 scanning engine is installed. The bit mask for this is ITC_DEVID_S6ENGINE_MASK. A non-zero val-

ue indicates that the S6 scanning engine is installed. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 267 Chapter 7 Programming S ITC_NVPARM_WAN_INSTALLED This IOCTL reads the state of the WAN radio installed flag. A BOOL-

EAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by lpOutBuffer. TRUE indicates that the WAN radio is installed. FALSE indicates that no WAN radio is installed. S ITC_NVPARM_WAN_FREQUENCY This IOCTL reads the state of the WAN radio frequency flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by lpOutBuf-

fer. TRUE indicates that the WAN radio frequency is United States. FALSE indicates that the WAN radio frequency is European. S ITC_NVPARM_WAN_RADIOTYPE This IOCTL reads the WAN radio ID installed by manufacturing. A BYTE is returned in the buffer pointer to by lpOutBuffer which indi-

cates the type of WAN radio hardware installed. The maximum possible value returned is ITC_DEVID_WANRADIO_MAX. The current defi-

nitions are:

S ITC_DEVID_WANRADIO_NONE No WAN radio installed. S ITC_DEVID_WANRADIO_SIERRA_SB555 CDMA Sierra Wireless radio. S ITC_DEVID_WANRADIO_XIRCOM_GEM3503 GSM/GPRS Intel (Xircom) radio. S ITC_DEVID_WANRADIO_SIEMENS_MC45 GSM/GPRS Siemens radio. S ITC_NVPARM_80211_INSTALLED This IOCTL reads the state of the 802.11b radio installed flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by lpOutBuf-

fer. TRUE indicates that the 802.11b radio is installed. FALSE indicates that no 802.11b radio is installed. S ITC_NVPARM_80211_RADIOTYPE This IOCTL reads the 802.11b radio ID installed by manufacturing. A BYTE is returned in the buffer pointer to by lpOutBuffer that indicates the type of 802.11b radio hardware installed. The maximum possible value returned is ITC_DEVID_80211RADIO_MAX. The current defi-

nitions are:

S ITC_DEVID_80211RADIO_NONE No 802.11b radio installed. S ITC_DEVID_80211RADIO_INTEL_2011B Intel 2011B radio installed. S ITC_NVPARM_BLUETOOTH_INSTALLED This IOCTL reads the state of the Bluetooth radio installed flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by lpOutBuf-

fer. TRUE indicates that the Bluetooth radio is installed. FALSE indi-

cates that no Bluetooth radio is installed. 268 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Programming S ITC_NVPARM_SERIAL2_INSTALLED This IOCTL reads the state of the serial 2 (COM2) device installed flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by lpOutBuffer. TRUE indicates that the serial 2 device is installed. FALSE indicates that no serial 2 device is installed. S ITC_NVPARM_VIBRATE_INSTALLED This IOCTL reads the state of the vibrate device installed flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by lpOutBuf-

fer. TRUE indicates that the vibrate device is installed. FALSE indicates that no vibrate device is installed. S ITC_NVPARM_LAN9000_INSTALLED This IOCTL reads the state of the Ethernet device installed flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by lpOutBuf-

fer. TRUE indicates that the Ethernet device is installed. FALSE indi-

cates that no Ethernet device is installed. S ITC_NVPARM_SIM_PROTECT_HW_INSTALLED This IOCTL reads the state of the SIM card protection hardware installed flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by lpOutBuffer. TRUE indicates that the SIM card protection hard-

ware is installed. FALSE indicates that no SIM card protection hardware is installed. S ITC_NVPARM_SIM_PROTECT_SW_INSTALLED This IOCTL reads the state of the SIM card protection software installed flag. A BOOLEAN DWORD is returned in the buffer pointed to by lpOutBuffer. TRUE indicates that the SIM card protection soft-

ware is installed. FALSE indicates that no SIM card protection software is installed. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 269 Chapter 7 Programming IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM Describes and enables the registry save location. Usage

#include oemioctl.h Syntax BOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM,LPVOID lpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize, LPVOID lpOutBuf, DWORD nOutBufSize, LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );

Parameters lpInBuf A single byte that may be one of the id values. See ID Field Values below. Must be set to the size of the lpInBuf in bytes. Must point to a buffer large enough to hold the data to be written to the non-volatile data store. The size of lpOutBuf in bytes. nOutBufSize lpBytesReturned The number of bytes returned by the function. nInBufSize lpOutBuf Return Values Returns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails. GetLastError() may be used to get the error value. Either ERROR_INVALID_PARAMETER or ERROR_INSUFFICIENT_BUFFER may be returned when this function is used to get the error. ID Field Values The id field of lpInBuf may be one of the following values:

S ITC_REGISTRY_LOCATION This IOCTL sets the default location for where to write the registry when RegFlushKey() is called by an application. The registry may be saved to Flash, a CompactFlash storage card or a SecureDigital storage card. lpOutBuf must point to a buffer that contains a byte value of 1 for the CompactFlash card or 2 for the SecureDigital card to specify the location. S ITC_REGISTRY_SAVE_ENABLE This function enables or disables the save registry to non-volatile media feature of the RegFlushKey() function. lpOutBuf must be set to zero

(FALSE) if the feature is to be disabled or one (TRUE) if the feature is to be enabled. S ITC_ DOCK_SWITCH This IOCTL sets a position of the dock switch. The dock switch may be set to either modem or serial positions. lpOutBuf must point to a buffer that contains a byte value of either DOCK_MODEM or DOCK_SERIAL as defined in OEMIOCTL.H; the value specifies the position the switch is to be set. 270 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Programming S ITC_ WAKEUP_MASK This IOCTL sets a bit mask that represents the mask for the five pro-

grammable wakeup keys. The I/O key is not a programmable wakeup key. By default it is always the system resume key and all other keys are set to disable key wakeup. A zero in a bit position masks the wakeup for that key. A one in a bit position enables wakeup for that key. lpOutBuf must point to a buffer that contains a byte value of a wakeup mask con-

sisting of the OR ed constants as defined in OEMIOCTL.H. Only the following keys are programmable as wakeup events.

#define

#define

#define

#define

#define SCANNER_TRIGGER1 SCANNER_LEFT 2 SCANNER_RIGHT 4 GOLD_A1 8 0x10 GOLD_A2 S ITC_AMBIENT_KEYBOARD This IOCTL sets the threshold for the keyboard ambient sensor. This can be a value from 0 (always off ) to 255 (always on). lpOutBuf must point to a buffer that contains a byte value of the desired setting. S ITC_AMBIENT_FRONTLIGHT This IOCTL sets the threshold for the frontlight ambient sensor. This can be a value from 0 (always off ) to 255. lpOutBuf must point to a buffer that contains a byte value of the desired setting. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 271 Chapter 7 Programming IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICEID This IOCTL returns the device ID. There are two types of device IDs sup-

ported, which are differentiated based on the size of the output buffer. The UUID is returned if the buffer size is set to sizeof(UNIQUE_DEVICEID), otherwise the oldstyle device ID is returned. Usage

#include pkfuncs.h

#include deviceid.h Syntax BOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICEID,LPVOID lpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORD nOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );

Parameters lpInBuf lpInBufSize lpOutBuf nOutBufSize Should be set to NULL. STRICT_ID settings are not supported. Should be set to zero. Must point to a UNIQUE_DEVICEID structure as defined by DEVICEID.H if the UUID is to be returned. The size of the UNIQUE_DEVICEID in bytes if the UUID is to be returned. A DEVICE_ID as defined by PKFUNCS.H is returned if the size in bytes is greater than or equal to sizeof(DEVICE_ID). lpBytesReturned The number of bytes returned by the function. Return Values Returns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails. GetLastError() may be used to get the extended error value. 272 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Programming IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO Returns the HAL version information of the Pocket PC image. Usage

#include oemioctl.h Syntax BOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO,LPVOID lpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORD nOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );

Parameters lpInBuf lpInBufSize lpOutBuf Should be set to NULL. Should be set to zero. Must point to a VERSIONINFO structure as defined by OEMIOCTL.H. The fields should have these values:

S cboemverinfo S verinfover S sig;

S id;

S tgtcustomer S tgtplat S tgtplatversion S tgtcputype[8];

S tgtcpu S tgtcoreversion S date S time The size of VERSIONINFO in bytes. sizeof (tagOemVerInfo);

1 ITC\0 N SeaRay Current build version number Intel\0 PXA250\0;

Build time Build date nOutBufSize lpBytesReturned Returns sizeof(PVERSIONINFO). Return Values Returns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails. GetLastError() may be used to get the extended error value. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 273 Chapter 7 Programming IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOTLOADER_VERINFO Returns the HAL version information of the Pocket PC image. Usage

#include oemioctl.h Syntax BOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO,LPVOID lpInBuf, DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORD nOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );

Parameters lpInBuf lpInBufSize lpOutBuf Should be set to NULL. Should be set to zero. Must point to a VERSIONINFO structure as defined by OEMIOCTL.H. The fields should have these values:

S cboemverinfo S verinfover S sig;

S id;

S tgtcustomer S tgtplat S tgtplatversion Current build version number of Sizeof (tagOemVerInfo);

1 ITC\0 B SeaRay S tgtcputype[8];

S tgtcpu S tgtcoreversion S date S time the bootstrap loader Intel\0;

PXA250\0 Build time Build date nOutBufSize lpBytesReturned The number of bytes returned to lpOutBuf. The size of VERSIONINFO in bytes. Return Values Returns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails. GetLastError() may be used to get the extended error value. 274 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Programming IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT Causes the system to perform a warm-boot. The object store is retained. Usage

#include oemioctl.h Syntax BOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT,LPVOID lpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORD nOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );

Parameters lpInBuf lpInBufSize lpOutBuf nOutBufSize Should be zero. Should be set to NULL. Should be set to zero. Should be NULL. Return Values None. IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT Causes the system to perform a cold-boot. The object store is cleared. Usage

#include oemioctl.h Syntax BOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT,LPVOID lpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORD nOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );

Parameters lpInBuf lpInBufSize lpOutBuf nOutBufSize Should be zero. Should be set to NULL. Should be set to zero. Should be NULL. Return Values None. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 275 Chapter 7 Programming IOCTL_HAL_GET_RESET_INFO This IOCTL code allows software to check the type of the most recent re-

set. Usage

#include oemioctl.h Syntax BOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_GET_RESET_INFO,LPVOID lpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORD nOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );

Parameters lpInBuf lpInBufSize lpOutBuf Should be set to NULL. Should be set to zero. Must point to a HAL_RESET_INFO structure:

typedef struct {

DWORD ResetReason;

DWORD ObjectStoreState;

} HAL_RESET_INFO, * PHAL_RESET_INFO;

// Reset reason types

#define HAL_RESET_TYPE_UNKNOWN

#define HAL_RESET_REASON_HARDWARE

#define HAL_RESET_REASON_SOFTWARE

#define HAL_RESET_REASON_WATCHDOG

#define HAL_RESET_BATT_FAULT

#define HAL_RESET_VDD_FAULT

// Object store state flags

#define HAL_OBJECT_STORE_STATE_UNKNOWN

#define HAL_OBJECT_STORE_STATE_CLEAR

// most recent reset type

// state of object store 0 1 // cold 2 // suspend 4 8 // power fail 16 // warm boot 0 1 nOutBufSize lpBytesReturned The number of bytes returned by the function. The size of HAL_RESET_INFO in bytes. Return Values Returns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails. GetLastError() may be used to get the extended error value. 276 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOT_DEVICE This IOCTL code allows software to check which device CE booted from. Chapter 7 Programming Usage

#include oemioctl.h Syntax BOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOT_DEVICE,LPVOID lpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORD nOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );

Parameters lpInBuf lpInBufSize lpOutBuf Should be set to NULL. Should be set to zero. Must point to a buffer large enough to hold a DWORD

(4 bytes) that contains the boot device. The following boot devices are supported:

0

#define HAL_BOOT_DEVICE_UNKNOWN 1

#define HAL_BOOT_DEVICE_ROM_XIP

#define HAL_BOOT_DEVICE_ROM 2 3

#define HAL_BOOT_DEVICE_PCMCIA_ATA

#define HAL_BOOT_DEVICE_PCMCIA_LINEAR 4

#define HAL_BOOT_DEVICE_IDE_ATA 5

#define HAL_BOOT_DEVICE_IDE_ATAPI 6 nOutBufSize lpBytesReturned The number of bytes returned by the function. The size of lpOutBuf in bytes (4). Return Values Returns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails. GetLastError() may be used to get the extended error value. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 277 Chapter 7 Programming IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT Causes the system to perform a warm-boot. The object store is retained. Usage

#include oemioctl.h Syntax BOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT,LPVOID lpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORD nOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );

Parameters lpInBuf lpInBufSize lpOutBuf nOutBufSize Return Values None. Should be set to NULL. Should be set to zero. Should be NULL. Should be zero. 278 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Programming IOCTL_PROCESSOR_INFORMATION Returns processor information. Usage

#include pkfuncs.h Syntax BOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_PROCESSOR_INFORMATION,LPVOID lpInBuf,DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORD nOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );

Parameters Parameters:

lpInBuf lpInBufSize lpOutBuf Should be set to NULL. Should be set to zero. Should be a pointer to the PROCESSOR_INFO structure. The PROCESSOR_INFO structure stores information that describes the CPU more descriptively. typedef __PROCESSOR_INFO {

// Set to value 1 wVersion;

WORD

// ARM\0 szProcessorCore[40];

WCHAR

// 4 WORD wCoreRevision;

// PXA250\0 WCHAR szProcessorName[40];

// 0 wProcessorRevision;

WORD szCatalogNumber[100]; // 0 WCAHR

// Intel Corporation\0 szVendor[100];

WCHAR DWORD dwInstructionSet;

// 0 DWORD dwClockSpeed;

// 400

nOutBufSize lpBytesReturned Returns sizeof(PROCESSOR_INFO);

Should be set to sizeof(PROCESSOR_INFO) in bytes. Return Values Returns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails. GetLastError() may be used to get the extended error value. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 279 Chapter 7 Programming IOCTL_GET_CPU_ID Returns Xscale processor ID. Usage

#include oemioctl.h Syntax BOOL KernelIoControl( IOCTL_GET_CPU_ID,LPVOID lpInBuf, DWORD nInBufSize,LPVOID lpOutBuf,DWORD nOutBufSize,LPDWORD lpBytesReturned );

Parameters lpInBuf Should point to a CPUIdInfo structure defined in OEMIOCTL.H. Should be sizeof(CPUIdInfo). Should be NULL. Should be set to 0. lpInBufSize lpOutBuf nOutBufSize lpBytesReturned Returns sizeof(PROCESSOR_INFO);

Return Values Returns TRUE if function succeeds. Returns FALSE if the function fails. GetLastError() may be used to get the extended error value. Reboot Functions There are several methods, via Kernel I/O Control functions, that an ap-

plication program can use to force the 700 Series Computer to reboot. IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT performs a warm-boot. See page 278. IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT Invoking the KernelIOControl function with IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT forces a cold reboot. This resets the 700 Series Computer and reloads Windows CE as if a power-up had been performed. The contents of the Windows CE RAM-based object store are discarded. See page 275. IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT This function is supported on the 700 Series Computers. It performs a warm boot of the system, preserving the object store. See page 275. 280 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Remapping the Keypad Chapter 7 Programming Note; Use caution when remapping the keypad. Improper remapping may render the keypad unusable. Data within the 700 Series Computer could also be lost, should any problems occur. Applications have the ability to remap keys on the 700 Color Keypad. This will allow applications to enable keys that would otherwise not be availa-

ble, such as the [F1] function key. Also, to disable keys that should not be available, such as the alpha key because no alpha entry is required. Care should be exercised when attempting to remap the keypad because im-

proper remapping may cause the keypad to become unusable. This can be corrected by cold booting the device which will cause the default keymap to be loaded again. Note that remapping the keys in this way affects the key mapping for the entire system, not just for the application that does the remapping. There are three planes supported for the 740 Keypad. Keys that are to be used in more than one shift plane must be described in each plane. The unshifted plane contains values from the keypad when not pressed with other keys, such as the following:

S [1]

S [5]

S [9]

1 5 9 The gold plane contains values from the keypad when a key is simulta-

neously pressed with the [Gold] key, such as the following:

S [Gold] + [1]

S [Gold] + [5]

S [Gold] + [9]

Send A3 PageDown The alpha plane contains values from the keypad when the keypad has been placed in alpha mode by pressing the blue alpha key, such as the fol-

lowing:

S [Alpha] + [1]

S [Alpha] + [5]

S [Alpha] + [9]

Caps JKL WXYZ Unshifted Plane Gold Plane Alpha Plane 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 281 Chapter 7 Programming Key Values Key values for each plane are stored in the registry. All units ship with a default key mapping already loaded in the registry. Applications that wish to change the default mapping need to read the appropriate key from the registry into an array of Words, modify the values required and then write the updated values back into the registry. The registry access can be done with standard Microsoft API calls, such as RegOpenKeyEx(), RegQuery-

ValueEx(), and RegSetValueEx(). S The unshifted plane mapping can be found in the registry at:

HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\HARDWARE\DEVICEMAP\KEYBD\Vkey S The gold plane mapping can be found in the registry at:

HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\HARDWARE\DEVICEMAP\KEYBD\VkeyGold S The alpha plane mapping can be found in the registry at:

HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\HARDWARE\DEVICEMAP\KEYBD\VkeyAlpha How Key Values Are Stored in Registry To know which fields to update in the registry, you must know what Scan Codes are assigned to each physical key (see the table below). The Scan Code is used at the lowest level of the system to let the keypad driver know which physical key has been pressed. The keypad driver takes that scan code and looks it up in a table (a copy of the one stored in the registry) to determine which values to pass on to the operating system. Each registry key is just an array that describes to the keypad driver what value needs to be passed for each physical key. The key values are indexed by the scan code, this is a zero-based index. For example in the unshifted plane, the [4] key has a scan code of 0x06. This means that the seventh word under the Vkey registry key will have the value for the [4] key. Taking a sample of the Vkey registry key shows the following values:

00,00,0B,05,02,03,C1,07,04,03,BE,00,34,00,00,00,. The value is 34,00. The values are in reverse byte order because that is the way the processor handles data. When writing an application, nothing needs to be done to swap the bytes, as this will happen automatically when the data is read into a byte value. This is something you just need to be aware of this when looking at the registry. Knowing this, we can see that the value that the keypad driver will pass to the system is a hex 34. Look-

ing that up on an UNICODE character chart, we see that it maps to a 4. If you wanted the key, labeled 4, to output the letter A instead, you would need to change the seventh word to 41 (the hexadecimal represen-

tation of A from the UNICODE chart), then put the key back into the registry. Note: Do not remap scan codes 0x01, 0x41, 0x42, 0x43, 0x44. Remap-

ping these scan codes could render your 700 Series Computer unusable until a cold-boot is performed. If you wish to disable a certain key, remap its scan code to 0x00. 282 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Programming Change Notification Just changing the registry keys will not immediately change the key mappings. To notify the keypad driver that the registry has been updated, signal the ITC_KEYBOARD_CHANGE named event using the CreateEvent() API. Advanced Keypad Remapping It is also possible to map multiple key presses to one button and to map named system events to a button. The multiple key press option could be useful to cut down on the number of keys needed to press in a given situa-

tion or to remap which key behaves like the action key. Mapping events to a button could be useful to change which buttons will fire the scanner, control volume, and allow for suspending and resuming the device. If you need help performing one of these advanced topics please contact Intermec Technical Support. Scan Codes At the lowest driver level, the 740 Keypad identifies keys as scan codes. These scan codes are sent via the keypad microcontroller, and cannot be changed without modifying the keypad firmware. Key/Meaning Reserved I/O Button Scanner Trigger Scanner Left Scanner Right

. 4 None Left Arrow None Backspace Gold Key None ESC Down Arrow 1 7 Alpha Key None Up Arrow Right Arrow 2 8 0 5 None Scancode 0x00 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x04 0x05 0x06 0x07 0x08 0x09 0x0A 0x0B 0x0C 0x0D 0x0E 0x0F 0x10 0x11 0x12 0x13 0x14 0x15 0x16 0x17 0x18 0x19 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 283 Chapter 7 Programming Key/Meaning Action Key 3 9 ENTER 6 None Charge Detect Scancode 0x1A 0x1B 0x1C 0x1D 0x1E 0x1F-0x40 0x41 LCD Frontlight Ambient Light Threshold Crossed Headset Detected Keypad Backlight Ambient Light Threshold Crossed 0x42 0x42 0x42 0x43 0x44 0x44 0x44 Sample View of Registry Keys The following is a sample view of the current default key mapping. See the registry on your device for the latest key mappings.

[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\HARDWARE\DEVICEMAP\KEYBD]

ResumeMask=dword:7 Vkey=hex: 00,00,0B,05,02,03,C1,07,04,03,BE,00,34,00,00,00,\

25,00,00,00,08,00,03,02,00,00,1B,00,28,00,31,00,\

37,00,01,02,00,00,26,00,27,00,32,00,38,00,30,00,\

35,00,00,00,01,03,33,00,39,00,0D,00,36,00,00,00,\

00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\

00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\

00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\

00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\

00,00,07,05,01,05,03,05,02,05 VkeyGold=hex: 00,00,0B,05,02,03,C1,07,04,03,BE,00,34,00,00,00,\

09,01,00,00,BF,00,03,02,00,00,BD,00,75,00,72,00,\

21,00,01,02,00,00,76,00,09,00,73,00,38,01,5B,00,\

35,00,00,00,BB,01,09,05,22,00,32,01,36,00,00,00,\

00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\

00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\

00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\

00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\

00,00,07,05,01,05,03,05,02,05 VkeyAlpha=hex: 00,00,0B,05,02,03,C1,07,04,03,BE,00,47,00,00,00,\

25,00,00,00,08,00,03,02,00,00,1B,00,28,00,02,02,\

50,00,01,02,00,00,26,00,27,00,41,00,54,00,20,00,\

4A,00,00,00,01,03,44,00,57,00,0D,00,4D,00,00,00,\

00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\

00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\

00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\

00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,00,\

00,00,07,05,01,05,03,05,02,05 284 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Control Panel Applets A This appendix contains information about the Data Collection, SNMP, and User Information Control Panel applets that may be on your 700 Se-

ries Color Mobile Computer. SNMP and Data Collection settings that can appear under Settings are dependent on what hardware configuration is done for each 700 Series Computer at the time of shipment. These settings will currently only ap-

pear if a scanner or an imager option is present. Likewise, other control panel applets that are specifically related to the 802.11b radio module will appear when a 802.11b radio module is installed in a 700 Series Computer. Control panel applets that are specific for Wireless Printing, CDMA/1xRTT, and GSM/GPRS radio modules will only appear when each respective hardware configuration is done on the 700 Series Computer. See Chapter 4, Network Support, for more infor-

mation about the radio modules or the wireless printing. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 285 Appendix A Control Panel Applets Configuration Parameters A configuration parameter changes the way the 700 Series Color (700C) Mobile Computer operates, such as configuring a parameter to have the 700 Series Computer emit a very loud beep in a noisy environment. Use any of the following methods to execute configuration parameters:

S Change Data Collection and SNMP parameters via control panel ap-

plets later in this appendix. S Access the 700 Series Computer via the Unit Manager through a web browser on your desktop PC via the SRDEVMGMT.CAB file. To use the Unit Manager, install this CAB file from the 700 Color Software Tools CD-ROM. Unit Manager applications are available on the 700 Series Color Unit Manager CD-ROM. For more information, consult your Intermec sales representative. S Send parameters from an SNMP management station. See SNMP Con-

figuration starting on page 123. S Scan EasySet bar codes. You can use the EasySet bar code creation soft-

ware from Intermec Technologies Corporation to print configuration labels. Scan the labels to change the scanner configuration and data transfer settings. Changing a Parameter Setting Menus of available parameters for each group are listed. Use the scroll bars to go through the list. Expand each menu (+) to view its parameter set-

tings. Tap a parameter to select, or expand a parameter (+) to view its sub-

parameters. Note that each parameter or subparameter is shown with its default setting or current setting in (< >) brackets. Tap a parameter or subparameter to select that parameter, then do any of the following to change its setting:

Tap Apply to apply any changes. Note that these illustrations are from a Symbologies parameter. S Typing a new value in an entry field. S Choosing a new value from the drop-down list. S Selecting a different option. The selected option contains a bullet. S Tap Defaults, then Apply to restore factory-default settings. Tap Yes when you are prompted to verify this action. 286 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Control Panel Applets S Tap Refresh to discard changes and start again. Tap Yes when you are prompted to verify this action. About Configuration Parameters You can find the following information about each configuration parame-

ter:

S Name and Purpose:

Describes the parameter and its function. S Action:

Describes what to do with a parameter once that parameter is selected. S SNMP OID:

Lists the SNMP OID for the parameter. S Syntax or Options:

Syntax lists the two-character code for the parameter, if the parameter is configurable by scanning a bar code or by sending parameters through a network. Both Syntax and Options list acceptable values for the para-

meter. Default settings are noted in italic. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 287 Appendix A Control Panel Applets Data Collection Control Panel Applet See Scanner Control and Data Transfer in the Intermec Windows CE/Pocket PC Software Developer s Kit (SDK) User s Manual shipped with the Soft-

ware Developer s Kit (SDK) for information about data collection func-

tions. Note: Icons are shown to the left. To access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start Settings the System tab the Data Collection icon to access its control panel applet. Use the left and right arrows to scroll through the tabs along the bottom of the control panel applet, then tap a tab to access its menus. These tabs rep-

resent the following groups of settings or parameters:

S Symbologies S Symbology Options (starting on page 309) S Beeper/LED (starting on page 317) S Imager (starting on page 323) S Virtual Wedge (starting on page 325) 288 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Symbologies Appendix A Control Panel Applets You can change bar code symbology parameter settings in your 700 Series Computer via the Data Collection control panel applet. The following parameters are for bar code symbologies. Additional information about the more common bar code symbologies are in Appendix C, Bar Code Symbologies. Note that these parameters are listed in the order of their appearance within this tab. Most of these symbologies apply to both the imager and the laser scanner tools. However, when using an imager, the Macro PDF (page 300), Micro PDF 417 (page 302), Matrix 2 of 5 (page 304), Telepen (page 305), and Code 11 (page 306) symbologies are not supported. Likewise, when using a laser scanner, the QR Code (page 307) and Data Matrix (page 308) symbologies are not supported. The following table shows which bar code symbologies are supported ei-

ther by an imager or by a laser scanner. Bar Code Symbology Imager Laser Scanner Code 39 Interleaved 2 of 5 Standard 2 of 5 Matrix 2 of 5 Code 128 Code 93 Codabar MSI Plessey UPC EAN/EAN 128 Code 11 PDF 417 Micro PDF 417 Telepen Data Matrix QR Code X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 289 Appendix A Control Panel Applets Code 39 Code 39 is a discrete, self-checking, variable length symbology. The char-

acter set is uppercase A-Z, 0-9, dollar sign ($), period (.), slash (/), percent

(%), space ( ), plus (+), and minus (-). Action Tap (+) to expand the Code 39 parameter, select the setting to be changed, then tap an option to change this setting or select an option from the drop-down list. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.3.1 Start/Stop characters (Not supported when using an imager):

Options Decoding Format Start/Stop Check digit Bar code length 0 1 0 1 0 1 Not active Active (default) Standard 43 characters (default) Full ASCII Not transmitted (default) Transmitted 0 1 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 000-254 Minimum length 1-254 (6)

$ (dollar sign) only

* (asterisk) only (default)

& and * (dollar sign and asterisk) Not used (default) Mod 43 transmitted Mod 43 not transmitted French CIP transmitted French CIP not transmitted Italian CPI transmitted Italian CPI not transmitted Any length (default) Minimum length Minimum length Note: If Bar code length = 1 then Minimum length is entered. 290 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Control Panel Applets Standard 2 of 5 Standard 2 of 5 is a discrete and self-checking symbology that uses the bars to encode information and the spaces to separate the individual bars. Action Tap (+) to expand the Standard 2 of 5 parameter, select the setting to be changed, then tap an option to change this setting or select an option from the drop-down list. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.4.1 Options Decoding Format Check digit Bar code length Minimum length Fixed length 1 Fixed length 2 Fixed length 3 Not active (default) Active Identicon, 6 start/stop bars (default) Computer Identics, 4 start/stop Not used (default) Mod 10 transmitted Mod 10 not transmitted Any length Minimum length (default) Fixed lengths 0 1 0 1 0 1 2 0 1 2 001-254 Minimum length 1-254 (6) 000-254 000-254 000-254 Fixed bar code length 0-254 (0) Fixed bar code length 0-254 (0) Fixed bar code length 0-254 (0) Note: If Bar code length = 1 then Minimum length is entered. If Bar code length = 2 then Fixed length 1, Fixed length 2, or Fixed length 3 is entered. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 291 Appendix A Control Panel Applets Codabar Codabar is a self-checking, discrete symbology. Action Tap (+) to expand the Codabar parameter, select a setting to be changed, then select an option from the drop-down list to change this setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.5.1 Options Decoding Start/Stop 0 1 0 1 2 3 4 Not active (default) Active Not transmitted (default) abcd transmitted ABCD transmitted abcd/tn*e transmitted DC1`DC4 transmitted Check digit Bar code length CLSI library system (Not supported when using an imager):

Not active (default) Active Not used (default) Transmitted Not transmitted Any length Minimum length (default) Fixed lengths 0 1 0 1 2 0 1 2 003-254 Minimum length 3-254 (6) 000-254 000-254 000-254 Minimum length Fixed length 1 Fixed length 2 Fixed length 3 Note: If Bar code length = 1 then Minimum length is entered. If Bar code length = 2 then Fixed length 1, Fixed length 2, or Fixed length 3 is entered. Fixed length 0-254 (0) Fixed length 0-254 (0) Fixed length 0-254 (0) 292 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Control Panel Applets UPC/EAN UPC/EAN are fixed-length, numeric, continuous symbologies that use four element widths. Action Tap (+) to expand the UPC/EAN parameter, select the setting to be changed, then select an option to change this setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.6.1 Add-on 5 digits (Not supported when using an imager):

Options UPC A UPC E EAN 8 EAN 13 Add-on digits Add-on 2 digits UPC A check digit UPC E check digit EAN 8 check digit EAN 13 check digit UPC A number system UPC E number system UPC A re-encoding UPC E re-encoding EAN 8 re-encoding 0 Not active 1 Active (default) 0 Not active 1 Active (default) 0 Not active 1 Active (default) 0 Not active 1 Active (default) 0 Not required (default) 1 Required 0 Not active (default) 1 Active 0 Not active (default) 1 Active 0 Not transmitted 1 Transmitted (default) 0 Not transmitted 1 Transmitted (default) 0 Not transmitted 1 Transmitted (default) 0 Not transmitted 1 Transmitted (default) 0 Not transmitted 1 Transmitted (default) 0 Not transmitted 1 Transmitted (default) 0 UPC A transmitted as EAN 13 (default) 1 UPC A transmitted as UPC A 0 UPC E transmitted as UPC E (default) 1 UPC E transmitted as UPC A 0 EAN 8 transmitted as EAN 8 (default) 1 EAN 8 transmitted as EAN 13 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 293 Appendix A Control Panel Applets Code 93 Code 93 is a variable length, continuous symbology that uses four element widths. Action Tap the Code 93 parameter, then select an option to change this parameter setting. Tap (+) to access the Code 93 Lengths parameter. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.7.1 Options 0 1 Not active (default) Active Code 93 Length Sets the Code 93 bar code length. Action Tap (+) to expand the Code 93 parameter, then tap (+) to expand the Code 93 Lengths parameter. Tap the setting to be changed, then tap an option to change this setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.19.1 Options Bar code length 0 1 001-254 Minimum length 1-254 (6) Any length (default) Minimum length Minimum length Note: If Bar code length = 1 then Minimum length is entered. 294 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Control Panel Applets Code 128 Code 128 is a variable-length, continuous, high-density, alphanumeric symbology that uses multiple element widths and supports the extended ASCII character set. Action Tap the Code 128 parameter, then select an option to change this parame-

ter setting. The following illustration is for a 700 Series Computer using a la-

ser scanner. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.9.1 Options 0 1 Not active (default) Active 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 295 Appendix A Control Panel Applets Code 128 Options Set the following for the Code 128 parameter. Note that the EAN 128 ]C1 and CIP 128 French Pharmaceutical options are not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer. Action Tap (+) to expand the Code 128 Options parameter, select a setting, then select an option to change this setting. SNMP OID None. Options EAN 128 ]C1 Identifier (disabled when using an imager) 0 1 Remove Include (default) CIP 128 French Pharmaceutical (disabled when using an imager) Bar code length Minimum length 0 1 0 1 001-254 Minimum length 1-254 (6) Not active (default) Active Any length (default) Minimum length 296 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Control Panel Applets Code 128 FNC1 Character The Code 128 FNC1 character (EAN 128 norms) can be any ASCII char-

acter and is used as a separator when multiple identifiers and their fields are concatenated. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer. Non-printable ASCII characters can be entered using the following syntax where HH is the hexadecimal value of the character.

\xHH For example, the GS character, whose hexadecimal value is 1D, would be entered as \x1D. In addition,the following characters have their own iden-

tifiers:

S BEL \a

\b S BS S FF

\f

\n S LF S CR

\r S HT \t S VT

\v Action Tap (+) to expand the Code 128 parameter, then type the ASCII charac-

ters to be set for the Code 128 FNC1 character parameter. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.21.1 Options Any ASCII character (default is the GS function character - ID hex) 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 297 Appendix A Control Panel Applets Plessey Plessey is a pulse-width modulated symbology like most other bar codes. It includes a start character, data characters, an eight-bit cyclic check digit, and a termination bar. The code is continuous and not self-checking. You need to configure two parameters for Plessey code: Start Code and Check Digit. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer. Action Tap (+) to expand the Plessey parameter, select the setting to be changed, then select an option to change this setting or select an option from the drop-down list. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.10.1 Options Decoding Check digit Bar code length 0 1 0 1 0 1 001-254 Minimum bar code length 1-254 (6) Not active (default) Active Not transmitted (default) Transmitted Any length (default) Minimum length Minimum length Note: If Bar code length = 1 then Minimum length is entered. 298 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Control Panel Applets MSI MSI is a symbology similar to Plessey code (page 298) that includes a start pattern, data characters, one or two check digits, and a stop pattern. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Com-

puter. Action Tap (+) to expand the MSI parameter, select the setting to be changed, then select an option to change this setting or select an option from the drop-down list. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.15.1 Options Decoding Check digit Not active (default) 0 Active 1 Mod 10 transmitted (default) 0 Mod 10 Not transmitted 1 Double Mod 10 transmitted 2 Double Mod 10 not transmitted 3 Any length 0 Minimum length (default) 1 001-254 Minimum length 1-254 (6) Minimum length Note: If Bar code length = 1 then Minimum length is entered. Bar code length 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 299 Appendix A Control Panel Applets PDF 417 PDF 417 is a stacked two-dimensional symbology that provides the ability to scan across rows of code. Each row consists of start/stop characters, row identifiers, and symbol characters, which consist of four bars and four spaces each and contain the actual data. This symbology uses error correc-

tion symbol characters appended at the end to recover loss of data. Because the virtual wedge translates incoming data into keypad input, the size of the keypad buffer limits the effective length of the label to 128 characters. Longer labels may be truncated. For PDF 417 labels of more than 128 characters, you can develop an application that bypasses the key-

pad buffer. Action Tap the PDF 417 parameter, then select an option to change this parame-

ter setting. Tap (+) to access either the Macro PDF options parameter or the Micro PDF 417 parameter. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.17.1 Options 0 1 Not active Active (default) Macro PDF options Macro PDF is used when a long message requires more than one PDF 417 label. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer. S Select Buffered to store a multi-label PDF 417 message in the Sabre buffer, thus transmitting the entire message when all labels have been read. 300 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Control Panel Applets S Select Unbuffered for multi-label PDF 417 messages that are too long for the Sabre buffer (memory overflow). Each part of the PDF 417 label is transmitted separately, and the host application must then assemble the message using the macro PDF control header transmitted with each label. Control Header is only present in macro PDF codes and is always transmitted with unbuffered option. Action Tap (+) to expand the PDF 417 parameter, tap (+) to expand the Macro PDF parameter, select a setting to be changed, then select an option to change this setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.22.1 Options Macro PDF Control header File name Segment count Time stamp Sender Addressee File size Checksum 0 Unbuffered 1 Buffered (default) 0 Not transmitted (default) 1 Transmitted 0 Not transmitted (default) 1 Transmitted 0 Not transmitted (default) 1 Transmitted 0 Not transmitted (default) 1 Transmitted 0 Not transmitted (default) 1 Transmitted 0 Not transmitted (default) 1 Transmitted 0 Not transmitted (default) 1 Transmitted 0 Not transmitted (default) 1 Transmitted 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 301 Appendix A Control Panel Applets Micro PDF 417 Micro PDF 417 is a multi-row symbology derived from and closely based on PDF 417 (page 300). A limited set of symbology sizes is available, to-

gether with a fixed level of error correction for each symbology size. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Com-

puter. Action Tap (+) to expand the PDF 417 parameter, tap (+) to expand the Micro PDF 417 parameter, select a setting to be changed, then select an option to change this setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.27.1 Options Decoding Code 128 Emulation 0 1 0 1 Not active (default) Active Not active (default) Active 302 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Control Panel Applets Interleaved 2 of 5 Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5) is a high-density, self-checking, continuous, numeric symbology used mainly in inventory distribution and the auto-

mobile industry. Note: An Interleaved 2 of 5 bar code label must be at least three characters long for the 700 Series Computer to scan and decode correctly. Action Tap (+) to expand the Interleaved 2 of 5 parameter, select the setting to be changed, then tap an option to change this setting or select an option from the drop-down list. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.23.1 Options Decoding Check digit Bar code length Not active (default) Active Not used (default) Mod 10 transmitted Mod 10 not transmitted French CIP transmitted French CIP not transmitted Any length Minimum length (default) Fixed lengths 0 1 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 003-254 Minimum length 3-254 (6) 003-254 003-254 003-254 Minimum length Fixed length 1 Fixed length 2 Fixed length 3 Note: If Bar code length = 1 then Minimum length is entered. If Bar code length =2 then Fixed length 1, Fixed length 2, or Fixed length 3 is entered. Fixed length 3-254 (0) Fixed length 3-254 (0) Fixed length 3-254 (0) 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 303 Appendix A Control Panel Applets Matrix 2 of 5 Matrix 2 of 5 is a numerical symbology. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer. Action Tap (+) to expand the Matrix 2 of 5 parameter, select the setting to be changed, then tap an option to change this setting or select an option from the drop-down list. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.24.1 Options Decoding Bar code length Not active (default) 0 Active 1 Any length 0 Minimum length (default) 1 001-254 Minimum length 1-254 (6) Minimum length Note: If Bar code length = 1 then Minimum length is entered. 304 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Control Panel Applets Telepen Telepen is an alphanumeric, case-sensitive, full ASCII symbology. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer. Action Tap (+) to expand the Telepen parameter, select the setting to be changed, then tap an option to change this setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.25.1 Options Decoding Format 0 Not active (default) 1 Active 0 ASCII (default) 1 Numeric 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 305 Appendix A Control Panel Applets Code 11 Code 11 is a high density, discrete numeric symbology that is extensively used in labeling telecommunications components and equipment. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Com-

puter. Action Tap (+) to expand the Code 11 parameter, select the setting to be changed, then tap an option to change this setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.26.1 Options Decoding 0 1 Check digit verification 1 2 0 1 Check digit transmit Not active (default) Active 1 digit (default) 2 digits Disable (default) Enable 306 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Control Panel Applets QR Code QR Code (Quick Response Code) is a two-dimensional matrix symbology containing dark and light square data modules. It has position detection patterns on three of its four corners and features direct encodation of the Japanese Kana-Kanji character set. It can encode up to 2509 numeric or 1520 alphanumeric characters and offers three levels of error detection. Note that this is not available when you use a laser scanner with your 700 Se-

ries Computer. Action Tap (+) to expand the QR Code parameter, select the setting to be changed, then tap an option to change this setting or select an option from the drop-down list. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.35.1 Options Decoding 0 Not active 1 Active (default) 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 307 Appendix A Control Panel Applets Data Matrix A two-dimensional matrix symbology, which is made of square modules arranged within a perimeter finder pattern. The symbology utilizes Error Checking and Correcting (ECC) algorithm with selectable levels for data error recovery and Cyclic Redundancy Check algorithm to validate the da-

ta. The character set includes either 128 characters conforming to ISO 646 (ANSI X3.4 - 1986) or 256 extended character set. Maximum capac-

ity of a symbol is 2335 alphanumeric characters, 1556 8-bit byte charac-

ters or 3116 numeric digits. Note that this is not available when you use a laser scanner with your 700 Series Computer. Action Tap (+) to expand the Data Matrix parameter, select the setting to be changed, then tap an option to change this setting or select an option from the drop-down list. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.1.1.34.1 Options Decoding 0 Not active 1 Active (default) 308 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Symbology Options Appendix A Control Panel Applets To access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start Settings the System tab the Data Collection icon to access its control panel applet. Use the right and left arrows to scroll to the Symbology Options tab, then tap this tab to access its parameters. The following are parameters for bar code symbology options. Note that these are listed in the order of their appearance within the Symbology Options tab. Symbology ID Identifies the bar code symbology in which data has been encoded by pre-

pending a user-specified symbology identifier to the data. You can prepend one of these types of character strings to identify the symbology:

S User-defined ASCII Character (Option 1):

A user-defined symbology identifier is a single ASCII character. You can assign a custom identifier character to each bar code symbology. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer. S AIM ISO/IEC Standard (Option 2 - Required to define symbology IDs):

The AIM Standard has a three-character structure which indicates the symbology and optional features. See the AIM ISO/IEC Standard for more information. Action Select Symbology ID, then select an option to change this parameter set-

ting. Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, then select any of the user ID parameters listed. See the top of the next page for a sample screen of the Code 39 user ID. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.22.1 Options 0 1 2 Disable (default) User defined (disabled when using an imager) ISO/IEC Standard 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 309 Appendix A Control Panel Applets Code 39 User ID If 1 was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own ASCII character to identify Code 39 bar code data. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer. Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Code 39 user ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.3.1 Options:

x where x is a single ASCII character. Default is asterisk (*). Code 128 User ID If 1 was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own ASCII character to identify Code 128 bar code data. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer. Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Code 128 user ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.5.1 Options:

x where x is a single ASCII character. Default is asterisk (*). Codabar User ID If 1 was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own ASCII character to identify Codabar bar code data. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer. Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Codabar user ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.2.1 Options:

x where x is a single ASCII character. Default is D. 310 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Control Panel Applets Code 93 User ID If 1 was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own ASCII character to identify Code 93 bar code data. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer. Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Code 93 user ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.4.1 Options:

x where x is a single ASCII character. Default is asterisk (*). Interleaved 2 of 5 User ID If 1 was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own ASCII character to identify Interleaved 2 of 5 bar code data. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer. Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Interleaved 2 of 5 user ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parame-

ter setting. SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.10.1 Options:

x where x is a single ASCII character. Default is I (not lowercase L). PDF-417 User ID If 1 was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own ASCII character to identify PDF 417 bar code data. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer. Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the PDF 417 user ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.12.1 Options:

x where x is a single ASCII character. Default is an asterisk (*). MSI User ID If 1 was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own ASCII character to identify MSI bar code data. Note that this is not avail-

able when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer. Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the MSI user ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.11.1 Options:

x where x is a single ASCII character. Default is D. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 311 Appendix A Control Panel Applets Plessey User ID If 1 was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own ASCII character to identify Plessey bar code data. Note that this is not avail-

able when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer. Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Plessey user ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.13.1 Options:

x where x is a single ASCII character. Default is D. Standard 2 of 5 User ID If 1 was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own ASCII character to identify Standard 2 of 5 bar code data. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer. Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Standard 2 of 5 user ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.23.1 Options:

x where x is a single ASCII character. Default is D. UPC A User ID If 1 was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own ASCII character to identify UPC-A (Universal Product Code) bar code data. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer. Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the UPC A user ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.6.1 Options:

x where x is a single ASCII character. Default is A. UPC E User ID If 1 was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own ASCII character to identify UPC-E bar code data. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer. Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the UPC E user ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.7.1 Options:

x where x is a single ASCII character. Default is E. 312 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Control Panel Applets EAN 8 User ID If 1 was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own ASCII character to identify EAN-8 bar code data. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer. Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the EAN 8 user ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.8.1 Options:

x where x is a single ASCII character. Default is \xFF. EAN 13 User ID If 1 was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own ASCII character to identify EAN-13 (European Article Numbering) bar code data. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer. Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the EAN 13 user ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.9.1 Options:

x where x is a single ASCII character. Default is F. Matrix 2 of 5 User ID If 1 was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own ASCII character to identify Matrix 2 of 5 bar code data. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer. Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Matrix 2 of 5 user ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.24.1 Options:

x where x is a single ASCII character. Default is D. Telepen User ID If 1 was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own ASCII character to identify Telepen bar code data. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer. Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Telepen user ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.25.1 Options:

x where x is a single ASCII character. Default is an asterisk (*). 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 313 Appendix A Control Panel Applets Code 11 User ID If 1 was selected in the Symbology ID parameter, you can set your own ASCII character to identify Code 11 bar code data. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer. Action: Tap (+) to expand the Symbology ID parameter, select the Code 11 user ID parameter, then enter a user ID value to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.16.1 Options:

x where x is a single ASCII character. Default is asterisk (*). 314 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Control Panel Applets Prefix Prepends a string of up to 20 ASCII characters to all scanned data. Action Tap the Prefix parameter, then enter a prefix value to change this parame-

ter setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.29.1 Options Acceptable values are up to 20 ASCII characters. Embedded null (<NUL >) characters are not allowed. Default is no characters (disabled). 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 315 Appendix A Control Panel Applets Suffix Appends a string of up to 20 ASCII characters to all scanned data. Action Tap the Suffix parameter, then enter a suffix value to change this parame-

ter setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.4.1.30.1 Options Acceptable values are up to 20 ASCII characters. Embedded null (<NUL

>) characters are not allowed. Default is no characters (disabled). 316 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Beeper/LED Appendix A Control Panel Applets To access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start Settings the System tab the Data Collection icon to access its control panel applet. Use the right and left arrows to scroll to the Beeper/LED tab, then tap this tab to access its parameters. Most of these functions are not available when using an imager. The following table shows which functions are supported either by an imager or by a laser scanner. Beeper Function Beeper Volume Beeper Frequency Good Read Beeps Good Read Beep Duration Imager Laser Scanner X X X X X The following are parameters for features on the 700 Series Computer. Note that these are listed in the order of their appearance. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 317 Appendix A Control Panel Applets Beeper Volume Sets the volume for the good read beep. Action Tap the Beeper volume parameter, then select an option to change this pa-

rameter setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.1.4.1.6.1 Low High (default) Laser Scanner Options 0 1 2 Medium 3 4 Off Vibrate 318 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Control Panel Applets Imager Options 1 4 Beeper (default) Vibrate Silencing the Beeper Volume To turn the beeper off, tap Start Settings the Personal tab Sounds and Notifications the Volume tab, drag the System volume slider bar to the left Silent position, then tap ok to exit this applet. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 319 Appendix A Control Panel Applets Beeper Frequency Sets the frequency for the good read beep. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer. Action Tap the Beeper frequency parameter, then enter a frequency value to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.1.4.1.7.1 Options 1000-4095 (default is 2090) 320 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Control Panel Applets Good Read Beeps Sets the number of good read beeps. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer. Action Tap the Good read beeps parameter, then select an option to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.1.4.1.8.1 Options 0 1 2 No beeps One beep (default) Two beeps 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 321 Appendix A Control Panel Applets Good Read Beep Duration Sets the duration of the good read beep. Note that this is not available when you use an imager with your 700 Series Computer. Action Tap the Good read beep duration parameter, then enter a duration value to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.1.4.1.9.1 Options 0`2550 Beep duration in milliseconds. (default is 80) 322 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Imager Appendix A Control Panel Applets To access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start Settings the System tab the Data Collection icon to access its control panel applet. Use the right and left arrows to scroll to the Imager tab, then tap this tab to access its parameters. The following are parameters for the imager. Note that these are listed in the order of their appearance within the Imager tab. Aimer LED duration The Aimer LED duration controls the time the Aimer LED is turned on when the scan button is pressed. After this time, images are captured for decoding. The purpose is to position the Aimer LED on the bar code sym-

bol before attempting to decode the bar code. Note that this is not available when you use a laser scanner with your 700 Series Computer. Action Tap the Aimer LED duration parameter, then enter a value to change this setting. Note that values must be in 50 ms increments, such as 500, 650, or 32500. Values not entered in 50 ms increments will be rounded down. For example, 2489 ms would be rounded down to 2450 ms, 149 ms would be rounded down to 100 ms, etc.. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.3.1.1.21.1 Options 0-65500 ms (Default is 0) 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 323 Appendix A Control Panel Applets Image Dimension The image dimensions control the horizontal size of the image for decod-

ing. This can restrict the image to one bar code when otherwise, there might be more than one bar code in the image to be decoded. Note that this is not available when you use a laser scanner with your 700 Series Com-

puter. Action Tap the Image dimension parameter, select the position to be changed, then tap an option or enter a value to change this position. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.3.3.1.1.22.1 Options Left position Right position Top position Bottom position 0 0 0-478 0-479 Not supported Not supported Position in pixels (0) Position in pixels (479) 324 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Virtual Wedge Appendix A Control Panel Applets To access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start Settings the System tab the Data Collection icon to access its control panel applet. Use the right and left arrows to scroll to the Virtual Wedge tab, then tap this tab to access its parameters. The following are parameters for the virtual wedge scanner. Note that these are listed in the order of their appearance within the Virtual Wedge tab. Virtual Wedge Enables or disables the virtual wedge for the internal scanner. The virtual wedge retrieves scanned Automatic Data Collection (ADC) data and sends it to the keypad driver so that the 700 Series Computer can receive and interpret the data as keypad input. Because the virtual wedge translates incoming data into keypad input, the size of the keypad buffer limits the effective length of the label to 128 characters. Longer labels may be truncated. For labels of more than 128 characters, you need to develop an application that bypasses the keypad buffer. Action Tap the Virtual Wedge parameter, then tap an option to change this pa-

rameter setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.2.1.1.2.1 Options 0 1 Disable Enable (default) 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 325 Appendix A Control Panel Applets Preamble Sets the preamble that precedes any data you scan with the 700 Series Computer. Common preambles include a data location number or an op-

erator number. Action Tap the Preamble parameter, then enter a preamble value to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.2.1.1.3.1 Syntax ADdata where data is acceptable values up to 31 ASCII characters. Embedded null

(<NUL >) characters are not allowed. Default is no characters (disabled). Note: When you enter the AD command without data, the preamble is disabled. If you want to use quotation marks or the following combina-

tions of characters as part of the appended data, separate those characters from the AD command with quotes. If you do not use quotes as described here, the 700 Series Computer will interpret the characters as another con-

figuration command:

AD AE AF KC BV EX DF EXAMPLE:

To use the two-character string BV as a preamble, scan this command (as a Code 39 label) or send this command through the network: $+ADBV 326 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Control Panel Applets Postamble Sets the postamble that is appended to any data you scan with the 700 Se-

ries Computer. Common postambles include cursor controls, such as tabs or carriage return line feeds. Action Tap the Postamble parameter, then enter a postamble value to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.2.1.1.4.1 Syntax AEdata where data is any acceptable values up to 31 ASCII characters. Embedded null (<NUL >) characters are not allowed. Default is the tab character (\t). Note: When you enter the AE command without data, the postamble is disabled. If you want to use quotation marks or the following combina-

tions of characters as part of the appended data, separate those characters from the AE command with quotes. If you do not use quotes as described here, the 700 Series Computer will interpret the characters as another con-

figuration command. AD AE AF KC BV EX DF EXAMPLE:

To use the two-character string BV as a postamble, scan this command (as a Code 39 label) or send this command through the network: $+AEBV 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 327 Appendix A Control Panel Applets Grid Sets the virtual wedge grid, which filters the data coming from this 700 Series Computer. The data server supports data filtering, which allows you to selectively send scanned data. The virtual wedge grid is similar to the format argument of the C Runtime Library scan function. Action Tap the Grid parameter, then enter a grid value to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.2.1.1.5.1 Syntax AF<symID> filter-expression= > editing-expression where:

S <symID>

The AIM symbology ID. S filter-expression Any character string that includes valid filter expression values, and edit-

ing-expression is any character string that includes valid editing expres-

sion values. S <width>

Any positive integer or NULL. A NULL width means that the field type

(defined next) applies all the way to the end of the data string. A non-

NULL width means that the field applies to that many characters of da-

ta. The grid can be up to 240 characters in length. Default is NULL. 328 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Control Panel Applets Code Page Sets the virtual wedge code page. The code page controls the translation from the character set of the raw collected data to Unicode, which is the character set expected by Windows CE applications. The default code page is 1252, which is the Windows Latin 1 (ANSI) character set. Action Tap the Code Page parameter, then select an option to change this param-

eter setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.2.1.1.6.1 Options The only acceptable value for the code page parameter is 1252, which is the default. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 329 Appendix A Control Panel Applets SNMP Control Panel Applet Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) parameters include iden-

tification information, security encryption, security community strings, and traps. To access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start Settings the System tab the SNMP icon to access its control panel applet. Tap a tab to access its menus. These tabs represent three groups of settings or parameters:

S Security (starting on the next page) S Traps (starting on page 336) S Identification (starting on page 338) 330 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Security Appendix A Control Panel Applets To access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start Settings the System tab the SNMP icon the Security tab to access its parameters. The following are parameters that affect encryption and community strings. Note that these are listed in the order of their appearance within the Security tab. Read Only Community Sets the read-only community string for this 700 Series Computer, which is required for processing of SNMP get and get next requests. Action Tap the Read Only Community parameter, then enter a community string to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.10.5.1.2.0 Options The read-only community string can be up to 128 ASCII characters. De-

fault is Public. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 331 Appendix A Control Panel Applets Read/Write Community Sets the read/write community string, which is required for processing of SNMP set requests by this 700 Series Computer. An SNMP packet with this name as the community string will also process SNMP get and next requests. Action Tap the Read/Write Community parameter, then enter a community string to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.10.5.1.3.0 Options The read/write community string can be up to 128 ASCII characters. De-

fault is Private. 332 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Control Panel Applets Read Encryption Sets the packet-level mode of security for SNMP read-only requests. If you enable read encryption, all received SNMP get and get next packets have to be encrypted or the packet will not be authorized. If encryption is en-

abled, you can only use software provided by Intermec Technologies. Note: To enable security encryption, you also need to set the Security En-

cryption Key (page 335). Action Tap the Read Encryption parameter, then select an option to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.10.5.1.4.0 Options 1 2 On SNMP get and get next packets must be encrypted Off SNMP packets do not have to be encrypted (default) 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 333 Appendix A Control Panel Applets Write Encryption Sets the packet-level mode of security for SNMP read/write requests. If you enable write encryption, all SNMP packets that are received with the read/write community string have to be encrypted or the packet will not be authorized. You need to use software from Intermec Technologies that supports encryption. Note: To enable security encryption, you also need to set the Security En-

cryption Key (page 335). Action Tap the Write Encryption parameter, then select an option to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.10.5.1.5.0 Options 1 2 On SNMP packets must be encrypted Off SNMP packets do not have to be encrypted (default) 334 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Control Panel Applets Encryption Key Identifies the key that this 700 Series Computer uses to encrypt or deci-

pher SNMP packets. Encryption is used only by software provided by In-

termec Technologies. If encryption is enabled, SNMP management plat-

forms will not be able to communicate with the 700 Series Computer. The encryption key is returned encrypted. Action Tap the Encryption Key parameter, then enter a security encryption key value to change this parameter setting. Note: You also need to set either Read Encryption (page 333) or Write Encryption (page 334) or both. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.10.5.1.6.0 Options The encryption key can be from 4 to 20 ASCII characters. Default is NULL. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 335 Appendix A Control Panel Applets Traps To access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start Settings the System tab the SNMP icon the Traps tab to access its parameters. The following are authentication and threshold parameters for traps. Note that these are listed in the order of their appearance within the Traps tab. Authentication Determines whether to send authentication traps. When trap authentica-

tion is enabled, an authentication trap is sent if an SNMP packet is re-

ceived by the master agent with an invalid community string. Action Tap the Authentication parameter, then select an option to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.10.5.2.2.0 Options 1 2 On (default) Off 336 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Control Panel Applets Threshold Determines the maximum number of traps per second that the master agent generates. If the threshold is reached, the trap will not be sent. Action Tap the Threshold parameter, then enter a threshold value to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.10.5.2.3.0 Options Any positive integer value. Default is 10. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 337 Appendix A Control Panel Applets Identification To access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start Settings the System tab the SNMP icon the Identification tab to access its parameters. The following are parameters for contact, location, and name information for support purposes. Note that these are listed in the order of their appear-

ance within the Identification tab. Contact Sets the contact information for the person responsible for this 700 Series Computer. Action Tap the Contact parameter, then enter the name of your contact represen-

tative to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.4.0 Options The identification contact may be up to 255 ASCII characters. Default is no characters or blank. 338 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Control Panel Applets Name Sets the assigned name for this 700 Series Computer. Action Tap the Name parameter, then enter the name of your 700 Series Com-

puter to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.5.0 Options The identification name may be up to 255 ASCII characters. Default is no characters or blank. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 339 Appendix A Control Panel Applets Location Sets the identification location for this 700 Series Computer, such as Shipping. Action Tap the Location parameter, then enter the location of where your 700 Series Computer to change this parameter setting. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.6.0 Options The identification location may be up to 255 ASCII characters. Default is no characters or blank. 340 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Unit Information Control Panel Applet Appendix A Control Panel Applets Unit Information is a read-only control panel applet that provides informa-

tion about your 700 Series Computer, such as software version builds, available CAB files, and the internal battery status. This control panel applet is only available in the 700 Series Computer if Intermec Content is enabled, the Plus region is enabled and installed, and a laser scanner is installed. To access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start Settings the System tab the Unit Information icon to access its control panel applet. Tap a tab to access its menus. These tabs represent three groups of settings or parameters:

S Versions (starting on the next page) S Battery Status (starting on page 343) S CAB Files (starting on page 344) 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 341 Appendix A Control Panel Applets Versions You can view the latest software build version on your 700 Series Computer by accessing the Unit Information control panel applet. To access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start Settings the System tab the Unit Information icon the Versions tab to view the latest software build version. Tap ok to exit this information. Below are some of the software applications you may find on this screen:

S 700 Platform Build:

Shows the latest development or released version of the software build for the 700 Series Computer. S S9C:

Provides the name and version of the scanner file built into this 700 Se-

ries Computer, along with the current CPU version. S DataCollection Build:

Shows the latest development or released version of the software build for the Data Collection control panel applet. 342 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Battery Status Appendix A Control Panel Applets You can view the battery status for your 700 Series Computer by accessing the Unit Information control panel applet. Unit Manager applications are available on the 700 Series Color Unit Manager CD-ROM. For more information, consult your Intermec sales representative. To access the settings from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start Settings the System tab the Unit Information icon the Battery Status tab to view the current status. Tap ok to exit this information. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 343 Appendix A Control Panel Applets CAB Files You can view the latest developer or released version of each CAB file from Intermec Technologies Corporation that are installed in your 700 Series Computer via the Unit Information control panel applet. Custom CAB files are not displayed in this applet. See the Software Tools User s Manual for more information about these files. To access the information from the 700 Series Computer, tap Start Settings the System tab the Unit Information icon the CAB Files tab to view the current CAB file versions. Tap ok to exit this information. When a CAB file is built, a registry entry is created with a build number for that file. This CAB Files control panel applet looks for a registry key for each CAB file installed. When the registry entry is found, the CAB file name and version number information are displayed. If a CAB file has not been installed, then its information is not displayed. Below is a list of CAB files from Intermec Technologies that are available for your 700 Series Computer with their latest developer or released ver-

sion of the software build. Should you need to add any of these to your 700 Series Computer, contact an Intermec representative. S BtMainStack:

Installation of the Main Bluetooth Stack is handled automatically as part of the operating system boot-up procedure. See Chapter 4, Network Support, for more information about Bluetooth wireless printing. S Comm Port Wedge:

The software build for the Comm Port Wedge. Note that the Comm Port Wedge CAB file is available on the 700C Tools CD. S NPCPTest:

This installs a Norand Portable Communications Protocol (NPCP) Printing test application which will print to an Intermec 4815, 4820, or 6820 Printer. See Chapter 5, Printer Support, for more information. 344 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Control Panel Applets S PDWPM0C:

This is the installer for the Wireless Printing Demo application. To run this demonstration, tap Start Programs the Wireless Printing Demo icon. Press Help in the demo application for more information. S S9C Upgrade:

Installs the files needed to upgrade the S9C scanner firmware. See the Recovery CD Help for more information about upgrading the firmware. S SDK:

Installs the Intermec Software Developer s Kit (SDK). See the SDK User s Manual for more information. S Unit Manager:

Installs the Unit Manager application which provides tools for remotely managing the 700 Series Computer. Unit Manager applications are available on the 700 Series Color Unit Manager CD-ROM. For more in-

formation, consult your Intermec sales representative. S Unit Manager Help:

Installs the online help for the Unit Manager application. S WinCfg:

Configures the NRINET.INI file, launches the NRINet client, and loads and unloads the LAN and WLAN device drivers. See the Windows 95 and Windows CE Configuration Utilities Reference Manual (P/N:

978-054-010) for more information. S Wireless Printing Sample:

Installs a sample application that developers can use for reference when they are developing their own Wireless Printing applications. The source code for this application is included as part of the Wireless Printing SDK on the 700C Tools CD. See the SDK User s Manual for more infor-

mation. S ActiveX Control Tools:

This lists some of the CAB files that may be available with which to install ActiveX Control Tools. See the SDK Online Help for more informa-

tion. S AXCommunication:

Communication controls that transmit or receive messages from in-

put connections. S AXFileTransfer:

File transfer controls that transmit and receive files using the Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP). S AXReaderCommand:

Reader command functions that modify and retrieve configuration information from your 700 Series Computer. S AXVWedge:

The virtual wedge control that retrieves scanned ADC data and sends it to the keyboard driver to interpret data as keyboard input. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 345 Appendix A Control Panel Applets 346 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Unit Manager B Configuration parameters are also configurable using a Unit Manager ap-

plication which accesses the 700 Series Computer through a web browser on your desktop PC via the SRDEVMGMT.CAB file. Unit Manager applications are available on the 700 Series Color Unit Manager CD-ROM. For more information, consult your Intermec sales representative. Note: Parameter information, such as SNMP OID and options, is detailed in Appendix A, Control Panel Applets. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 347 Appendix B Unit Manager Data Collection Symbologies Within the Unit Manager, click Configuration from the left navigation bar, then click the Data Collection icon to access any of these tabs:

Symbologies, Symbology ID, Beeper/LED, or Virtual Wedge. Within the Unit Manager, select Configuration Management Data Collection, then click the Symbologies tab to access the following parame-

ters. Options for these parameters are listed on the page provided. These are listed in alphabetical order. S Codabar (page 292) S Code 11 (page 306) S Code 128 (page 295) S Code 128 Options (page 296) S Code 128 FNC1 Character (page 297) S Code 39 (page 290) S Code 93 (page 294) S Code 93 Length (page 294) S Data Matrix (page 308) S Interleaved 2 of 5 (page 303) S Matrix 2 of 5 (page 304) S MSI (page 299) S PDF 417 (page 300) S Macro PDF (page 300) S Micro PDF 417 (page 302) S Plessey (page 298) S QR Code (page 307) S Standard 2 of 5 (page 291) S Telepen (page 305) S UPC/EAN (page 293) 348 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Symbology ID Appendix B Unit Manager Within the Unit Manager, select Configuration Management Data Collection, then click the Symbology ID tab to access the following parameters. Options for these parameters are listed on the page provided. These are listed in alphabetical order. S Prefix (page 315) S Suffix (page 316) S Symbology ID (page 309) S Codabar user ID (page 310) S Code 11 user ID (page 314) S Code 128 user ID (page 310) S Code 39 user ID (page 310) S Code 93 user ID (page 311) S EAN-13 user ID (page 313) S EAN-8 user ID (page 313) S Interleaved 2 of 5 user ID (page 311) S Matrix 2 of 5 user ID (page 313) S MSI user ID (page 311) S PDF 417 user ID (page 311) S Plessey user ID (page 312) S Standard 2 of 5 user ID (page 312) S Telepen user ID (page 313) S UPC-A user ID (page 312) S UPC-E user ID (page 312) Beeper/LED Within the Unit Manager, select Configuration Management Data Collection, then click the Beeper/LED tab to access the following parameters. Options for these parameters are listed on the page provided. These are listed in alphabetical order. S Beeper Frequency (page 320) S Beeper Volume (page 318) S Good Read Beep Duration (page 322) S Good Read Beeps (page 321) 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 349 Appendix B Unit Manager Imager Virtual Wedge SNMP Security Within the Unit Manager, select Configuration Management Data Collection, then click the Imager tab to access the following parameters. Options for these parameters are listed on the page provided. These are listed in alphabetical order. S Aimer LED Duration (page 323) S Image Dimension (page 324) Within the Unit Manager, select Configuration Management Data Collection, then click the Virtual Wedge tab to access the following parameters. Options for these parameters are listed on the page provided. These are listed in alphabetical order. S Code Page (page 329) S Grid (page 328) S Postamble (page 327) S Preamble (page 326) S Virtual Wedge (page 325) Within the Unit Manager, click Configuration from the left navigation bar, then click the SNMP icon to access any of these tabs: Security, Traps, or Identification. Within the Unit Manager, select Configuration Management SNMP, then click the Security tab to access the following parameters. Options for these parameters are listed on the page provided. These are listed in alpha-

betical order. S Encryption Key (page 335) S Read Encryption (page 333) S Read Only Community (page 331) S Read/Write Community (page 332) S Write Encryption (page 334) 350 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Traps Identification Appendix B Unit Manager Within the Unit Manager, select Configuration Management SNMP, then click the Traps tab to access the following parameters. Options for these parameters are listed on the page provided. These are listed in alpha-

betical order. S Authentication (page 336) S Threshold (page 337) Within the Unit Manager, select Configuration Management SNMP, then click the Identification tab to access the following parameters. Op-

tions for these parameters are listed on the page provided. These are listed in alphabetical order. S Contact (page 338) S Location (page 340) S Name (page 339) 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 351 Appendix B Unit Manager Unit Date/Time Within the Unit Manager, click Configuration from the left navigation bar, then click the Unit icon to access any of these tabs: Date/Time, Dis-

play, Keypad, Power Management, or Speaker. Sets the current date and time. Action Click the Date/Time tab, then select Date or Time and make changes in the entry field, or tap (+) to expand either the Date or Time parameter, select the setting to be changed, then select a value from the drop-down list or enter a new value to change this setting. SNMP OID Date:

Time:

1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.501.2.1.0 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.501.2.2.0 Options Date Time

(1999) 0000`999 Year Month 1-12 (6) 1-31 (1) Day 0-23 (0) Hour Minute 0-59 (00) Second 0-59 (00) 352 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix B Unit Manager Backlight Timeout Sets the length of time that the display backlight remains on. If you set a longer timeout value, you use the battery power at a faster rate. Action Click the Display tab, then select an option from the Backlight timeout drop-down list. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.13.1.0 Syntax DFdata where data is any of the following:

10 30 60 120 180 240 300 10 seconds 30 seconds 1 minute (default) 2 minutes 3 minutes 4 minutes 5 minutes 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 353 Appendix B Unit Manager Key Clicks Enables or disables the keypad clicks. The 700 Series Computer emits a click each time you press a key or decode a row of a two-dimensional symbology. Action Click the Keypad tab, then select an option from the Key clicks drop-

down list. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.12.1.0 Syntax KCdata where data is any of the following:

0 1 2 Disable clicks Enable soft key clicks Enable loud key clicks (default) 354 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix B Unit Manager Automatic Shutoff Sets the length of time the 700 Series Computer remains on when there is no activity. When you turn on the 700 Computer, it either resumes exactly where it was when you turned it off or boots and restarts your application. Action Click the Power Management tab, then select an option from the Auto-

matic shutoff drop-down list. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.11.3.0 Syntax EZdata where data is any of the following:

1 2 3 4 5 1 minute 2 minutes 3 minutes (default) 4 minutes 5 minutes 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 355 Appendix B Unit Manager Volume Changes the volume of all audio signals. Action Click the Speaker tab, then select an option from the Volume drop-down list. SNMP OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1963.15.3.1.3.0 Syntax BVdata where data is any of the following:

0 1 2 3 4 5 Off Very quiet Quiet Normal (default) Loud Very loud 356 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix B Unit Manager Using Reader Commands After the 700 Series Computer is connected to your network, you can send the 700 Series Computer a reader command from an application to per-

form a task, such as changing the time and date. Some reader commands temporarily override the configuration settings and some change the con-

figuration settings. Change Configuration The Change Configuration command must precede any configuration command. If you enter a valid string, the 700 Series Computer configura-

tion is modified and the computer emits a high beep. To send the Change Configuration command through the network, use the $+ [command]

syntax where command is the two-letter command syntax for the configu-

ration command followed by the value to be set for that command. You can also make changes to several different commands by using the

$+ [command]...[command n] syntax. There are seven configuration command settings that can be changed in this way. See each command for information on respective acceptable data values. Command Audio Volume Automatic Shutoff Backlight Timeout Key Clicks Virtual Wedge Grid Virtual Wedge Postamble Virtual Wedge Preamble Syntax BVdata EZdata DFdata KCdata AFdata AEdata ADdata Note: See Appendix A, Control Panel Applets for more information about the Virtual Wedge Postamble and Virtual Wedge Preamble commands. Example 1 To change the Beep Volume to Off, you can send this string to the 700 Series Computer through the network:

where:

BV 0 Indicates Change Configuration. Specifies the Audio Volume parameter. Specifies a value of Off.

$+BV0 Example 2 To change the Beep Volume to Very Quiet and the Virtual Wedge Grid to 123: $+BV1AF123 where:

BV1 AF123 Indicates Change Configuration Specifies Audio Volume, set to Very Quiet (1) Specifies Virtual Wedge Grid, set to a value of 123. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 357 Appendix B Unit Manager Set Time and Date This command sets the date and time on the 700 Series Computer. The default date and time is June 1, 1999 at 12:00 AM. From the network, send the following:

/+ yyyymmddhhmmss where acceptable values for the date are:

yyyy mm dd hh mm ss 0000-9999 Year 01-12 01-31 00-23 00-59 00-59 Month of the year Day of the month Hour Minutes Seconds You can also set the time and date by using Configuration Management in Unit Manager, or by using the Clock control panel applet in the Settings menu. To access this control panel applet, tap Start Settings the System tab the Clock icon to access its control panel applet. 358 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Bar Codes C This appendix contains a brief explanation of some of the bar code symbologies that the 700 Series Color (700C) Mobile Computer decodes and explains some of the general characteristics and uses of these bar code types. It also includes several bar code labels that can be scanned into your 700 Series Computer. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 359 Appendix C Bar Codes Bar Code Symbologies Specific bar code algorithms can be enabled using the setup menus or the host computer. Once the computer correctly decodes a bar code, the com-

puter encodes data with descriptive information about the symbol. Re-

sponse time is improved by limiting the computer to the bar codes being used. Bar Code Data String Formats Data Bar Code Type Data Format UPC short (UPC-E) EAN short (EAN-8) UPC long (UPC-A) EAN long (EAN-13) UPC short add-on 2 EAN short add-on 2 UPC long add-on 2 EAN long add-on 2 UPC short add-on 5 EAN short add-on 5 UPC long add-on 5 EAN long add-on 5 Interleaved 2 of 5 Standard 2 of 5 Plessey Codabar Code 11 Code 39 Extended Code 39 Code 93 Code 128 nddddddc fndddddc nddddddddddc fnddddddddddc nddddddcaa fndddddcaa nddddddddddcaa fnddddddddddcaa nddddddcaaaaa fndddddcaaaaa nddddddddddcaaaaa fnddddddddddcaaaaa d......d d......d d......dc sd....ds d......d d......d d......d d......d d......d Data Length 8 8 12 13 10 10 14 15 13 13 17 18 Scan device dependent Scan device dependent Scan device dependent Scan device dependent Scan device dependent Scan device dependent Scan device dependent Scan device dependent Scan device dependent Note: These bar code data definitions apply to the Data Format column in the previous table a Add-on code digits c Check digits d Bar code digits f EAN flag 1 characters n Number system digits s Start and stop digits If MOD 10 or MOD 11 check digits are enabled, the digit falls at the end of a bar code data string. Each check digit enabled extends the bar code data string length by one character. 360 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix C Bar Codes The 700 Series Computer recognizes eleven of the most widely used bar code symbologies. With bar code symbologies, like languages, there are many different types. A bar code symbology provides the required flexibil-

ity for a particular inventory tracking system. A symbology may be for particular industries, such as food and beverage, automotive, railroad, or aircraft. Some of these industries have established their own bar code symbology because other symbologies did not meet their needs. Without going into great detail on the bar code structure, note that no two products use the same bar code. Each product gets a unique bar code. Industries that use a particular type of bar code symbology have formed regulating committees or are members of national institutes that issue and keep track of bar codes. This ensures that each organization that contrib-

utes to a particular industry conforms to its standard. Without some form of governing body, bar coding would not work. S UPC (Universal Product Code) with/without add-ons S EAN (European Article Numbering Code) with/without add-ons S Codabar S C11 (Code 11) S C39 (Code 39) S C93 (Code 93) S C128 (Code 128) S I 2 of 5 (Interleaved 2 of 5 Code) S S 2 of 5 (Standard 2 of 5) S Plessey S MSI (a variant of Plessey) 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 361 Appendix C Bar Codes UPC EAN Codabar The UPC (Universal Product Code) is the symbology used throughout the grocery and retail industries. This bar code symbology contains two pieces of numerical information encoded on the bar code, producer identifica-

tion, and product identification information. The UPC symbol is 12 characters long. The first character of the UPC symbol is a number system character, such as 0 for grocery items and 3 for drug- and health-related items. The UPC symbology is for retail environments such as grocery stores, con-

venience stores, and general merchandise stores. Some retail items are so small that a standard UPC bar code cannot fit on the packaging. When this occurs there is a permitted shorter version of the UPC symbology, referred to as UPC-E. UPC-E is six characters long (eight including number system and check digit), approximately half the size of a standard UPC bar code. EAN (European Article Numbering) symbology is similar to UPC symbol-

ogy, except that it contains 13 characters and uses the first two to identify countries. The EAN symbology is used in the retail environment throughout most of Europe. Though similar to UPC symbology, these are not interchangeable. Codabar was for retail price-labeling systems. Today it is widely accepted by libraries, medical industries, and photo finishing services. Codabar is a discrete, self-checking code with each character represented by a stand-alone group of four bars and three intervening spaces. Four different start or stop characters get defined and designated a, b, c, and d. These start and stop characters are constructed using one wide bar and two wide spaces. A complete Codabar symbol begins with one of the start or stop characters followed by some number of data char-

acters and ending in one of the start or stop characters. Any of the start or stop characters may be used on either end of the sym-

bol. It is possible to use the 16 unique start or stop combinations to identi-

fy label type or other information. Since Codabar is variable-length, discrete, and self-checking, it is a versatile symbology. The width of space between characters is not critical and may vary significantly within the same symbol. The character set consists of 0 through 9, -, $, :, /, ., and +. The specific dimensions for bars and spaces in Codabar optimize perfor-

mance of certain early printing and reading equipment. Codabar has 18 different dimensions for bar and space widths. So many different dimen-

sions often result in labels printed out of specification and cause Codabar printing equipment to be more expensive. 362 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Code 11 Code 39 Appendix C Bar Codes Code 11 satisfies the requirements for a very high density, discrete numeric bar code. The name Code 11 derives from 11 different data characters that can be represented, in addition to a start or stop character. The character set includes the 10 digits and the dash symbol. Each charac-

ter is represented by a stand-alone group of three bars and two intervening spaces. Although Code 11 is discrete, it is not self-checking. A single print-

ing defect can transpose one character into another valid character. One or two check digits obtain data security. The specifications for Code 11 suggest that this code should have a narrow element width of 7.5 mils. This results in an information density of 15 characters per inch. Code 39 (C39) is the most widely used symbology among the industrial bar codes. Most major companies, trade associations, and the federal gov-

ernment find this code to fit their needs. The main feature of this symbol-

ogy is the ability to encode messages using the full alphanumeric character set, seven special characters, and ASCII characters. Programming for this symbology can be for any length that the application requires. The application program for the 700 Series Computer handles symbology at least one character but no more than 32 characters in length. When programming the computer for Code 39, it is important to set the symbology limit as close as possible (minimum and maximum bar code lengths being scanned). Doing so keeps the computer bar code processing time to a minimum and conserves battery power. Bar code readers can respond to Uniform Symbology Specification symbols in non-standard ways for particular applications. These methods are not for general applications, because of the extra programming required. Code 39 Full ASCII is one example of non-standard code. Note: See page 368 to scan several Code 39 bar code labels available to change settings on your 700 Series Computer. Encoded Code 39 (Concatenation) If the first data character of a symbol is a space, the reader may be pro-

grammed to append the information contained in the remainder of the symbol to a storage buffer. This operation continues for all successive sym-

bols that contain a leading space, with messages being added to the end of previously stored ones. When a message is read which does not contain a leading space, the contents are appended to the buffer, the entire buffer is transmitted, and the buffer is cleared. Encoded Code 39 (Full ASCII) If the bar code reader is programmed for the task, the entire ASCII charac-

ter set (128 characters) could be coded using two character sequences: a symbol ($,.,%,/) followed by a letter of the alphabet. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 363 Appendix C Bar Codes Code 93 Code 128 The introduction of Code 93 provided a higher density alphanumeric symbology designed to supplement Code 39. The set of data characters in Code 93 is identical with that offered with Code 39. Each character con-

sists of nine modules arranged into three bars and three spaces. Code 93 uses 48 of the 56 possible combinations. One of these characters, represented by a square, is reserved for a start or stop character, four are used for control characters, and the remaining 43 data characters coincide with the Code 39 character set. An additional single module termination bar after the stop character concludes the final space. Code 93 is a variable length, continuous code that is not self-checking. Bar and spaces widths may be one, two, three, or four modules wide. Its struc-

ture uses edge-to-similar-edge decoding. This makes the bar code immune to uniform ink spread, which allows liberal bar width tolerances. Code 93 uses two check characters. Its supporters believes this makes it the highest density alphanumeric bar code. The dual check digit scheme pro-

vides for high data integrity. All substitution errors in a single character are detected for any message length. Code 128 (C128) is one of the newest symbologies used by the retail and manufacturing industries. It responds to the need for a compact alphanu-

meric bar code symbol that could encode complex product identification. The fundamental requirement called for a symbology capable of being printed by existing data processing printers (primarily dot-matrix printers) that produce daily, work-in-progress, job, and product traceability docu-

ments. The ability to print identification messages between 10 and 32 characters long, on existing forms and labels deemed an important require-

ment. Code 128 uniquely addresses this need as the most compact, complete, alphanumeric symbology available. Additionally, the Code 128 design with geometric features, improves scan-

ner read performance, does self-checking, and provides data message man-

agement function codes. Code 128 encodes the complete set of 128 ASCII characters without ad-

ding extra symbol elements. Code 128 contains a variable-length symbolo-

gy and the ability to link one message to another for composite message transmission. Code 128, being a double-density field, provides two numer-

ic values in a single character. Code 128 follows the general bar code format of start zone, data, check digit, stop code, and quiet zone. An absolute minimum bar or space di-

mension of nine mils (0.010 inch minimum nominal 0.001 inch toler-

ance) must be maintained. Characters in Code 128 consist of three bars and three spaces so that the total character set includes three different start characters and a stop char-

acter. 364 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix C Bar Codes UCC/EAN-128 Shipping Container Labeling is a versatile tool that can ease movement of products and information. The Shipping Container La-

beling bar code can take any form and usually has meaning only within the company or facility where applied. Because this random data can get mistaken later for an industry standard code format, the UCC and EAN chose a symbology uniquely identified from these other bar codes. This standard is for maximum flexibility, to handle the diversity of distribution in global markets by cost efficiency. The UCC/EAN-128 Container Labeling specification calls for a FUNC1 to immediately follow the bar code s start character. FUNC1 also follows any variable-length application field. The specification also calls for the computer to send ]C1 for the first FUNC1. The specification requires that the computer send a <GS> (hex 1D) for subsequent FUNC1 codes in the bar code. Because <GS> is not compatible with computer emulation data streams, the Uniform Code Council has been asked to change the specification. This change is made to send the same three character sequence ]C1 to identify the embedded FUNC1 codes. This implementation should provide for clean application coding by iden-

tifying the same sequences for the same scanned codes. If the communica-

tion of Norand bar code types is enabled, the Shipping Container Label codes precede with a J. These strings will appear on the computer dis-

play. The application may have to allow for strings longer than 48 charac-

ters (maximum length indicated in the specification). Actual length vari-

ance depends on the number of variable-length data fields. Allowing for 60 characters should be sufficient. Within the Code 128 specification, the computer can link bar codes together. If this is to happen, allow for more characters (computer limit is 100 characters). The Application Identifier Standard, that is part of the UCC/EAN Ship-

ping Label concept, complements, rather than replaces, other UCC/EAN standards. Most UCC/EAN standards primarily identify products. Several industries expressed the need to standardize more than product identification. The UCC/EAN Code 128 Application Identifier Standard supplies this tool. The standard adds versatility for inter-enterprise ex-

changes of perishability dating, lot and batch identification, units of use measure, location codes, and several other information attributes. For more detailed information on Code 128 UCC/EAN Shipping Label bar code and Application Identifier Standard, refer to the UCC/EAN-128 Application Identifier Standard specification. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 365 Appendix C Bar Codes I 2 of 5 (Interleaved) I 2 of 5 (Interleaved 2 of 5 Code) is an all-numeric symbology, widely used for warehouse and heavy industrial applications. Its use has been particu-

larly prevalent in the automobile industry. The I 2 of 5 symbology can be placed on smaller labels than what the standard UPC symbology requires. I 2 of 5 also provides a little more flexibility on the type of material it can print on. Interleaved 2 of 5 Code has its name because of the way the bar code is configured. I 2 of 5 bars and spaces both carry information. The bars represent the odd number position digits, while spaces represent the even number posi-

tion digits. The two characters are interleaved as one. Messages encoded with this symbology have to use an even number of characters since two numeric characters always get interleaved together. S 2 of 5 (Standard 2 of 5) The code S 2 of 5 (Standard 2 of 5 Code) is designed primarily for:

S Warehouse inventory handling S Identification of photo finishing envelopes S Airline tickets S Baggage and cargo handling The code S 2 of 5 is simple and straightforward. All information is con-

tained in the widths of the bars, with the spaces serving only to separate the individual bars. Bars can either be wide or narrow, and the wide bars are usually three times the widths of the narrow bars. Spaces may be any reasonable width but are typically equal to the narrow bars. Narrow bars are identified as zero bits and wide bars as one bits. Remember the code structure by associating the bar positions from left to right with weighting factors 1, 2, 4, 7, and parity. Exceptions to this rule are zero, start, and stop. This code is a discrete code, since the white spaces between the characters are not part of the code. Because the white spaces carry no information, their dimensions are not critical. The S 2 of 5 code is self-checking, meaning a scanner passing through a printing void would detect the proper ratio of wide bars to total bars. When the scanner spots an error, a non-read will occur. 366 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Plessey Appendix C Bar Codes Plessey finds its origin in the pulse width modulated (PWM) code devel-

oped in England. It is widely used for shelf markings in grocery stores. Pulse width modulated codes represent each bit of information by a bar and space pair. A zero bit consists of a narrow bar followed by a wide space, while a one bit consists of a wide bar followed by a narrow space. It is mainly a numeric symbology (0-9) with six extra characters available for assigning any symbol or letter desired. Plessey codes are not self-checking and employ a variety of check charac-

ters. Plessey employs a polynomial-based Cyclic Redundancy Check

(CRC). For start and stop characters, Plessey employs a 1101 and previous-

ly used a 0101. This symbology is very limited about what information can be encoded. It is not considered for new applications. MSI Code (Variant of Plessey) In addition to Plessey characteristics, the MSI Code employs a Modulus 10 Check. For start and stop checks, MSI employs a single bit pair of 1 as a start symbol and a single bit pair of 0 as a stop symbol. MSI reverses the 1-2-4-8 BCD pattern for bit pair weighting to 8-6-2-1. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 367 Appendix C Bar Codes Bar Code Labels You can change some settings on your 700 Series Computer by scanning the following Code 39 bar code labels. S You can use the Unit Manager application to set the Automatic Shutoff, Volume, Backlight Timer, or Key Clicks parameters (starting on page 352). S You can use the Unit Manager application or the Data Collection con-

trol panel to set the three Virtual Wedge parameters (starting on page 325). Note: When you use a bar code creation utility to make a scannable bar code label, the utility probably adds opening and closing asterisks automat-

ically. Asterisks are included here for translation purposes. Audio Volume Note: The Audio Volume parameter information is on page 356. Turn Audio Off

*$+BV0*

*$+BV0*

Set Audio Volume to very quiet

*$+BV1*

*$+VB1*

Set Audio Volume to quiet

*$+BV2*

*$+BV2*

Set Audio Volume to normal (default)

*$+BV3*

*$+BV3*

Set Audio Volume to loud

*$+BV4*

*$+BV4*

Set Audio Volume to very loud

*$+BV5*

*$+BV5*

368 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Automatic Shutoff Note: The Automatic Shutoff parameter information is on page 355. Appendix C Bar Codes Set Automatic Shutoff to 1 minute

*$+EZ1*

*$+EZ1*

Set Automatic Shutoff to 2 minutes

*$+EZ2*

*$+EZ2*

Set Automatic Shutoff to 3 minutes (default)

*$+EZ3*

*$+EZ3*

Set Automatic Shutoff to 4 minutes

*$+EZ4*

*$+EZ4*

Set Automatic Shutoff to 5 minutes

*$+EZ5*

*$+EZ5*

Backlight Timeout Note: The Backlight Timeout parameter information is on page 353. Backlight Timeout 10 seconds

*$+DF10*

*$+DF10*

Backlight Timeout 30 seconds

*$+DF30*

*$+DF30*

Backlight Timeout 1 minute (default)

*$+DF60*

*$+DF60*

700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 369 Appendix C Bar Codes Backlight Timeout 2 minutes

*$+DF120*

*$+DF120*

Backlight Timeout 3 minutes

*$+DF180*

*$+DF180*

Backlight Timeout 4 minutes

*$+DF240*

*$+DF240*

Backlight Timeout 5 minutes

*$+DF300*

*$+DF300*

Key Clicks Note: The Key Clicks parameter information is on page 354. Disable key clicks

*$+KC0*

*$+KC0*

Enable soft key clicks

*$+KC1*

*$+KC1*

Enable loud key clicks (default)

*$+KC2*

*$+KC2*

370 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Virtual Wedge Grid, Preamble, Postamble Appendix C Bar Codes The following parameters are user-configurable strings. Refer to a full ASCII chart for more information. Grid For Virtual Wedge Grid, the first part of the bar code would be the follow-

ing, which can include a string of up to 240 characters. Parameter informa-

tion starts on page 328.

*$+AF

*$+AF Preamble For Virtual Wedge Preamble, the first part of the bar code would be below, followed by a string of up to 31 characters (no <NUL>) and an asterisk. Default is no characters. Parameter information is on page 326.

*$+AD

*$+AD Postamble For Virtual Wedge Postamble, the first part of the bar code would be be-

low, followed by a string of up to 31 characters (no <NUL>) and an aster-

isk. Default is no characters. Parameter information is on page 327.

*$+AE

*$+AE 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 371 Appendix C Bar Codes 372 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Index I The Classes and Functions Index covers classes and functions for the 700 Series Color Mobile Computer. The General Index covers all topics. Those in italics are figures, those in bold are tables. The Files Index is to assist you in locating descriptions for device drivers, applica-

tions, utilities, batch files, or other files within this publication. 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 373 Index Classes and Functions A add_registry_section, [AddReg]

flags, 244 registry_root_string, 244 value_name, 244 AddReg, [DefaultInstall], 240

[AddReg], add_registry_section flags, 244 registry_root_string, 244 value_name, 244 AddWep(), 103 AppName, [CEStrings], 237 B BuildMax, [CEDevice], 238 BuildMin, [CEDevice], 238 C CancelReadImage, IImage, 226 CancelReadRequest IADC, 152 IBarCodeReaderControl, 160

[CEDevice]

BuildMax, 238 BuildMin, 238 ProcessorType, 238 UnsupportedPlatforms, 238 VersionMax, 238 VersionMin, 238 CESelfRegister, [DefaultInstall], 240 CESetupDLL, [DefaultInstall], 240 CEShortcuts, [DefaultInstall], 240

[CEShortcuts], shortcut_list_section shortcut_filename, 245 shortcut_type_flag, 245 target_file/path, 245 target_file_path, 245 CESignature

[SourceDiskNames], 240

[Version], 236

[CEStrings]

AppName, 237 InstallDir, 237 Close, IImage, 228 CloseHandle() DTR printing, 134, 135 IrDA printing, 128 NPCP printing, 129, 130 ConfigureProfile(), 106 ControlLED, IBarCodeReaderControl, 161 Copyfiles, [DefaultInstall], 240

[CopyFiles], file_list_section destination_filename, 243 flags, 243 source_filename, 243 create/delete ADC COM objects, 149 CreateEvent(), 283 CreateFile() DTR printing, 134, 135 IrDA printing, 128 NPCP printing, 129, 130 D

[DefaultInstall]

AddReg, 240 CESelfRegister, 240 CESetupDLL, 240 CEShortcuts, 240 Copyfiles, 240 DeregisterDevice(), 129 DTR printing, 134

[DestinationDirs], file_list_section, 242 DeviceIOControl(), 98 DTR printing, 134 NPCP printing, 129 DeviceIoControl(), NPCP printing, 130, 131 disk_ordinal, [SourceDiskNames], 240 DllRegisterServer, 240 DllUnregisterServer, 240 E EnableWep(), 105 EncryptWepKeyForRegistry(), 106 F file_list_section

[CopyFiles]

destination_filename, 243 flags, 243 source_filename, 243

[DestinationDirs], 242 filename, [SourceDiskFiles], 241 G GetAssociationStatus(), 104 GetAuthenticationMode(), 104 GetBSSID(), 101 GetCodabar, IS9CConfig, 173 GetCode11, IS9CConfig2, 205 GetCode128, IS9CConfig, 180 GetCode39, IS9CConfig, 176, 200 GetCode93, IS9CConfig, 179 GetConfig, ISCP, 217 GetCustomSymIds, IS9CConfig2, 207 GetGlobalAmble, IS9CConfig2, 211 GetI2of5, IS9CConfig, 183 GetLinkSpeed(), 102 GetMac(), 101 GetMatrix2of5, IS9CConfig, 185 GetMSI, IS9CConfig, 187 GetNetworkMode(), 103 GetNetworkType(), 102 GetPDF417, IS9CConfig, 188 GetPDF417Ext, IS9CConfig2, 213 GetPlessey, IS9CConfig, 192 GetPowerMode(), 105 GetRSSI(), 103 GetRTSThreshold(), 106 GetSSID(), 101 374 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual IBARCODEREADER.H, IBarCodeReaderControl func-

GetStandard2of5, IS9CConfig, 194 GetSymIdXmit, IS9CConfig2, 214 GetTelepen, IS9CConfig, 197 GetTXPower(), 102 GetUpcEan, IS9CConfig, 198 GetWepStatus(), 104 I IADC, 151 CancelReadRequest, 152 Initialize, 153 QueryAttribute, 154 QueryData, 155 Read, 156 SetAttribute, 157 tions, 159 IBarCodeReaderControl, 159 CancelReadRequest, 160 ControlLED, 161 Initialize, 162 IssueBeep, 163 QueryAttribute, 164 Read, 165 SetAttribute, 167 TriggerScanner, 171 IImage CancelReadImage, 226 Close, 228 Open, 227 ReadImage, 225 ReadSigCapBuffer, 221 ReadSigCapFile, 224 Start, 226 Stop, 227 Imager, settings, IS9CConfig3, 216 Initialize IADC, 153 IBarCodeReaderControl, 162 InstallDir, [CEStrings], 237 IS9CConfig, 172 GetCodabar, 173 GetCode128, 180 GetCode39, 176, 200 GetCode93, 179 GetI2of5, 183 GetMatrix2of5, 185 GetMSI, 187 GetPDF417, 188 GetPlessey, 192 GetStandard2of5, 194 GetTelepen, 197 GetUpcEan, 198 SetCodabar, 174 SetCode128, 181 SetCode39, 177 SetCode93, 179 SetI2of5, 184 SetMatrix2of5, 186 Index SetMSI, 187 SetPDF417, 189 SetPlessey, 192 SetStandard2of5, 195 SetTelepen, 197 IS9CConfig2, 204 GetCode11, 205 GetCustomSymIds, 207 GetGlobalAmble, 211 GetPDF417Ext, 213 GetSymIdXmit, 214 SetCode11, 205 SetCustomSymIds, 208 SetGlobalAmble, 212 SetPDF417Ext, 213 SetSymIdXmit, 214 IS9CConfig3, 216 ISCP GetConfig, 217 SetConfig, 218 isOrinoco(), 106 IssueBeep, IBarCodeReaderControl, 163 ITCDeviceClose, 150 ITCDeviceOpen, 140, 149 ITCUUID.LIB, IBarCodeReaderControl functions, 159 K KernelIoControl(), 264 O Open, IImage, 227 OSVERSIONINFO.dwBuildNumber, 238 OSVERSIONINFO.dwVersionMajor, 238 OSVERSIONINFO.dwVersionMinor, 238 P ProcessorType, [CEDevice], 238 Provider, [Version], 236 Q QueryAttribute IADC, 154 IBarCodeReaderControl, 164 QueryData, IADC, 155 R RadioConnect(), 101 RadioDisconnect(), 101 Read, 140 IADC, 156 IBarCodeReaderControl, 165 ReadFile(), NPCP printing, 129 ReadImage, IImage, 225 ReadSigCapBuffer, IImage, 221 ReadSigCapFile, IImage, 224 RegFlushKey(), 81, 262, 270 RegisterDevice(), 129 DTR printing, 134 RegOpenKeyEx(), 282 RegQueryValueEx(), 282 RegSetValueEx(), 282 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 375 Index S SetAttribute IADC, 157 IBarCodeReaderControl, 167 SetAuthenticationMode(), 104 SetChannel(), 105 SetCodabar, IS9CConfig, 174 SetCode11, IS9CConfig2, 205 SetCode128, IS9CConfig, 181 SetCode39, IS9CConfig, 177 SetCode93, IS9CConfig, 179 SetConfig, ISCP, 218 SetCustomSymIds, IS9CConfig2, 208 SetGlobalAmble, IS9CConfig2, 212 SetI2of5, IS9CConfig, 184 SetMatrix2of5, IS9CConfig, 186 SetMSI, IS9CConfig, 187 SetNetworkMode(), 103 SetPDF417, IS9CConfig, 189 SetPDF417Ext, IS9CConfig2, 213 SetPlessey, IS9CConfig, 192 SetRTSThreshold(), 106 SetSSID(), 105 SetStandard2of5, IS9CConfig, 195 SetSymIdXmit, IS9CConfig2, 214 SetTelepen, IS9CConfig, 197 SHFullScreen(), 262, 263 shortcut_list_section, [CEShortcuts]

shortcut_filename, 245 shortcut_type_flag, 245 target_file/path, 245 target_file_path, 245 Signature, [Version], 236

[SourceDiskFiles], filename, 241

[SourceDiskNames]

CESignature, 240 disk_ordinal, 240 SourceDisksNames.MIPS, 241 SourceDisksNames.SH3, 241 Start, IImage, 226 StartScanList(), 107 Stop, IImage, 227 string_key, [Strings], 237

[Strings], string_key, 237 SYSTEMINFO.dwProcessorType, 238 T Trigger settings, IS9CConfig3, 216 TriggerScanner, IBarCodeReaderControl, 171 U UnsupportedPlatforms, [CEDevice], 238 V

[Version]

CESignature, 236 Provider, 236 Signature, 236 VersionMax, [CEDevice], 238 VersionMin, [CEDevice], 238 W WriteFile() DTR printing, 134, 135 IrDA printing, 128 NPCP printing, 129, 130 376 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual General Index Numbers 1470 Imager. See Imager 1551/1553 Tethered Scanner. See Tethered scanner 1D laser scanner, about, 137 2D Imager about, 137 data collection features, 146 aimer LED, 146 scaled illumination LED, 146 window size and position, 146 image acquisition features, 147 overview, 146 4820 printer, NPCP driver, 129 6804DM printer DTR driver, 134 IrDA driver, 128 6804T printer DTR driver, 134 IrDA driver, 128 6805A printer DTR driver, 134 IrDA driver, 128 6806 printer DTR driver, 134 IrDA driver, 128 6808 printer DTR driver, 134 IrDA driver, 128 printer support, 127 681T printer, DTR driver, 134 6820 printer IrDA driver, 128 NPCP driver, 129 printer support, 127 6920 Communications Server, ManifestName parameter, 254 700 Platform Build, version number, 342 740 Color Computer, 281 781 printers DTR driver, 134 printer support, 127 782T printer, printer support, 127 802.11 CR radio CORE module, 107 802.11 WEP Encryption, profile security information, 91 802.11b antenna color code, 85 API, 100 channel, 89 communications setup, 87 configuration profiles, 100 CORE module, 107 network type, 89 profiles, 87 basic information, 89 certificates, 95 exporting, 96 Index import/export, 96 importing, 97 read-only, 94 scan list, 97, 98 security information, 90 selected, 97 SSID (network name), 89 WEP encryption, 91 802.1x TLS, profile security information, 92 802.1x TTLS, profile security information, 93 A Abstract Syntax Notation.1. See ASN.1 ActiveSync ActiveSync Help, 30 adding programs, 26 adding programs to Start menu, 28 Folder behavior connected to e-mail server, 46 installing applications, 77 Microsoft Reader, 58 Pocket Internet Explorer ActiveX control tools, unit information control panel, CAB favorite links, 62 Mobile Favorites folder, 62 Pocket PC, 29 Pocket PC icon, 13 Pocket PC status icons, 12 URL, 29 files, 345 AD command, with/without data, 326 ADC COM interfaces, 138 functions create/delete objects, 149 IADC, 151 IBarCodeReaderControl, 159 IS9CConfig, 172 IS9CConfig2, 204 IS9CConfig3, 216 Adding a profile, 88 Adding bookmarks, Microsoft Reader, 61 Adding drawings to text, Microsoft Reader, 61 Adding programs ActiveSync, 26 Pocket Internet Explorer, 27 Pocket PC, 26 to the Start menu, 28 via ActiveSync, 28 via File Explorer, 28 Adjusting settings, Pocket PC, 26 Adobe Acrobat Reader, URL, 116 AE command, with/without data, 327 Aimer LED duration, configuration parameter, 323 Alpha plane on keypad, 281 Annotations index, Microsoft Reader, 61 Antenna, radio type, 85 APIs 802.11b, 100 AT command interface, 115 IrSock, 128 Appointments, via Calendar, 31 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 377 Index APS linear imager, about, 137 ASCII printing, 128 printing to a port, port print method, 128 raw text to printer, 128 ASN.1, 125 Asset management, DeviceURL parameter, 253 AT command interface, 115 terminal application, 114 testing, 117 Attaching notes to text, Microsoft Reader, 61 Audio files, Windows Media Player, 57 Audio system external headset jack, 2 internal microphone, 2 speaker, 2 AutoCab, command line syntax, 82 AutoFTP, 260 AutoIP, 122 Automatic Data Collection. See ADC COM interfaces Automatic Private IP. See AutoIP Automatic shutoff bar code configuration, 369 configuration parameter, 355 Autostart FTP, 260 AvantGo channels, Pocket Internet Explorer, 64 AXCommunication, 345 AXFileTransfer, 345 AXReaderCommand, 345 AXVWedge, 345 B Backlight timeout bar code configuration, 369 configuration parameter, 353 Bar Code scanning labels, 368 supported symbologies, 147, 289 symbologies, 360 Codabar, 362 Code 11, 363 Code 128, 364 Code 39, 363 Code 39 concatenation, 363 Code 39 full ASCII, 363 Code 93, 364 data string formats, 360 EAN, 362 I 2 of 5, 366 MSI code, 367 Plessey, 367 S 2 of 5, 366 UPC, 362 Bar code configuration audio volume, 368 automatic shutoff, 369 BARCODE_DATA_TYPE_ASCII, IBarCodeReaderCon-

BARCODE_DATA_TYPE_UNICODE, IBarCodeReader-

BARCODE_DATA_TYPE_UNKNOWN, IBarCodeRead-

backlight timeout, 369 Code 39, 368 key clicks, 370 trol::Read, 165 Control::Read, 165 erControl::Read, 165 Battery low battery conditions, 3 Pocket PC status icons, 12 status, 2 Battery status, unit information control panel applet, 343 Beeper configuration parameter frequency, 320 volume, 318 silencing the volume, 319 supported functions, 317 Unit Manager, 349 when not available beeper frequency, 320 good read beep duration, 322 good read beeps, 321 biActualImageSize, pImgBuffer, IImage::ReadSigCapBuffer, biBitCount, pImgBuffer, IImage::ReadSigCapBuffer, 222 biHeight, pImgBuffer, IImage::ReadSigCapBuffer, 222 biMaxImageBytes, pImgBuffer, IImage::ReadSigCapBuffer, 222 222 biWidth, pImgBuffer, IImage::ReadSigCapBuffer, 222 Block recognizer, Pocket PC input panel, 17 BlockSize, FTP Server, 252 Bluealps CORE module, 120 Bluetooth CORE module, 120 unit information control panel, main stack CAB file, 344 Bluetooth compatibility, network support, 120 Bluetooth Device Manager, documentation, 120 Books, Microsoft Reader adding bookmarks, 61 adding drawings, 61 annotations index, 61 attaching notes, 61 copying, 61 downloading, 58 highlighting, 61 reading, 60 removing, 61 searching, 61 Browing the Internet, Pocket Internet Explorer, 66 BTctrl program, documentation, 120 Build information, 5 byFNC1, IS9CConfig::SetCode128, 181 378 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual C CAB files after the extraction, 248 creating, 236 INF files, 236 with CAB Wizard, 249 information regarding, 4 installation functions, SETUP.DLL, 248 placing files onto storage card, 80 unit information control panel applet, 344 Cabinet Wizard creating CAB files, 249 troubleshooting, 250 using the application, 236 Cabling, scanner, 232 Calendar creating an appointment, 32 meeting requests, 33 Pocket Outlook, 31 Pocket PC icon, 13 scheduling a meeting, 33 using the summary screen, 33 Capacitor, internal super, 3 Capturing thoughts and ideas, via Notes, 40 Card support CompactFlash cards, 5 modems, 4 MultiMediaCards, 5 radios, 4 SecureDigital cards, 5 CDMA/1xRTT, 110 antenna color code, 85 AT command set, 116 CORE module, 111 CEImager location of the executable file, 80 migrating AUTORUN.DAT files, 80 Channel, 802.11 radio module, 89 ClassID field values VN_CLASS_ASIC, 266 VN_CLASS_BOOTSTRAP, 266 VN_CLASS_KBD, 266 Clock Pocket PC settings, 26 setting date and time, 358 Closing drivers, NPCP, 130 CMIP, 123 Codabar, 362 configuration parameter, 292 user ID, 310 default S9C settings, 175 enumerations, 175 IS9CConfig::GetCodabar, 173 IS9CConfig::SetCodabar, 174 modifier characters, 219 Code 11, 363 configuration parameter, 306 user ID, 314 Index Code 128, 364 default S9C settings, 206 enumerations, 206 IS9CConfig2::GetCode11, 205 IS9CConfig2::SetCode11, 205 modifier characters, 219 configuration parameter, 295 FNC1 character, 297 user ID, 310 default S9C settings, 181 enumerations, 182 IImage::ReadSigCapBuffer, 223 IImage::ReadSigCapFile, 224 IS9CConfig::GetCode128, 180 IS9CConfig::SetCode128, 181 modifier characters, 219 configuration parameter, 290 user ID, 310 default S9C settings, 177 enumerations, 178 IImage::ReadSigCapBuffer, 223 IImage::ReadSigCapFile, 224 IS9CConfig::GetCode39, 176 IS9CConfig::SetCode39, 177 modifier characters, 219 Code 39, 363 Code 93, 364 configuration parameter, 294 length, 294 user ID, 311 default S9C settings, 179 enumerations, 180 IS9CConfig::GetCode93, 179 IS9CConfig::SetCode93, 179 modifier characters, 219 11, 363 128, 364 39, 363 39 concatenation, 363 39 full ASCII, 363 93, 364 Code Division Multiple Access. See CDMA/1xRTT Codes Cold boot, IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT, 275 COM port configuration, 231 wedge settings, 231 COM1, NPCP parameter, 129 COM1 port, 128 Comm port wedge disabling, 231 enabling, 230 error messages, 232 limitations, 233 settings, 231 unit information control panel, 344 Command line syntax, AutoCab, 82 Common Object Resource Environment. See CORE 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 379 Index Communications DTR, 135 NPCP, 132 Communications options, 83 CompactFlash cards card support, 5 installing applications, 78 Composing Messages, via Inbox, 45 Computer shutdown, 3 Concatenation, 363 Configuration Management. See Unit Manager Configuration parameters aimer LED duration, 323 automatic shutoff, 355 backlight timeout, 353 beeper FNC1 character, 297 user ID, 310 frequency, 320 volume, 318 codabar, 292 user ID, 310 code 11, 306 user ID, 314 code 128, 295 code 39, 290 user ID, 310 code 93, 294 length, 294 user ID, 311 data matrix, 308 date/time, 352 EAN 13 user ID, 313 8 user ID, 313 good read beep duration, 322 beeps, 321 identification contact, 338 location, 340 name, 339 image dimension, 324 interleaved 2 of 5, 303 user ID, 311 key clicks, 354 macro PDF, 300 matrix 2 of 5, 304 user ID, 313 micro PDF 417, 302 MSI, 299 user ID, 311 PDF 417, 300 user ID, 311 plessey, 298 user ID, 312 prefix, 315 QR code, 307 security encryption key, 335 read encryption, 333 read-only community string, 331 read/write community string, 332 write encryption, 334 SNMP, security subnet mask, 309 standard 2 of 5, 291 user ID, 312 suffix, 316 telepen, 305 user ID, 313 trap UPC authentication, 336 threshold, 337 A user ID, 312 E user ID, 312 UPC/EAN, 293 virtual wedge, 325 code page, 329 grid, 328 postamble, 327 preamble, 326 volume, 356 Connecting directly to e-mail server, via Inbox, 42 Connecting to an ISP, 68 e-mail server, 72 work, 70 Connections See also Getting connected directly to e-mail server, 72 ending, 72 setting up an e-mail service, 73 status icon, 12 to an ISP, 68 via Ethernet, 69 via modem, 68 to work, 70 via Ethernet, 71 via modem, 70 via Ethernet to an ISP, 69 to work, 71 via modem to an ISP, 68 to work, 70 Contacts creating a contact, 34 finding a contact, 35 MSN Messenger chatting with, 55 working with, 54 Pocket Outlook, 34 Pocket PC icon, 13 using the summary screen, 36 380 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Control panel applets configuration parameters Index clock, 358 data collection, 288 beeper/LED, 317 imager, 323 symbologies, 289 symbology options, 309 virtual wedge, 325 power, battery status, 2 SNMP, 330 identification, 338 security, 331 traps, 336 system, wireless network, 87 unit information, 341 battery status, 3, 343 CAB files, 344 versions, 6, 342 utilities, 81 Converting writing to text, 20 Copying text, Microsoft Reader, 61 CORE, 84 802.11b radio module, 107 details, 109 general, 107 accessing from Programs panel, 84 Today screen, 84 Bluealps module, 120 Bluetooth, 120 module for 802.11b NIC, 100 WAN radio module, 111 details, 113 general, 111 Creating a modem connection an Ethernet connection to an ISP, 68 to work, 70 to an ISP, 69 to work, 71 appointment via Calendar, 32 CAB files, 236 with CAB Wizard, 249 contact via Contacts, 34 document via Pocket Word, 47 drawing via Notes, 22 INF files, 236 meeting requests, 33 note via Notes, 41 recording via Notes, 23 task via Tasks, 38 workbook via Pocket Excel, 52 Customer Support, xviii D Data collection 2D imager features, 146 ADC COM interfaces, 138 build version number, 342 aimer LED duration, 323 beeper frequency, 320 beeper volume, 318 codabar, 292 codabar user ID, 310 code 11, 306 code 11 user ID, 314 code 128, 295 code 128 FNC1 character, 297 code 128 user ID, 310 code 39, 290 code 39 user ID, 310 code 93, 294 code 93 length, 294 code 93 user ID, 311 data matrix, 308 EAN-13 user ID, 313 EAN-8 user ID, 313 good read beep duration, 322 good read beeps, 321 image dimension, 324 interleaved 2 of 5, 303 interleaved 2 of 5 user ID, 311 macro PDF, 300 matrix 2 of 5, 304 matrix 2 of 5 user ID, 313 micro PDF 417, 302 MSI, 299 MSI user ID, 311 PDF 417, 300 PDF 417 user ID, 311 plessey, 298 plessey user ID, 312 prefix, 315 QR code, 307 standard 2 of 5, 291 standard 2 of 5 user ID, 312 suffix, 316 telepen, 305 telepen user ID, 313 UPC-E user ID, 312 UPC-A user ID, 312 UPC/EAN, 293 virtual wedge, 325 virtual wedge code page, 329 virtual wedge grid, 328 virtual wedge postamble, 327 virtual wedge preamble, 326 functions create/delete ADC COM objects, 149 IADC, 151 IBarCodeReaderControl, 159 IS9CConfig, 172 IS9CConfig2, 204 IS9CConfig3, 216 initialization, 138 Unit Manager, 348 Data filtering, virtual wedge grid, 141 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 381 Index Data Matrix configuration parameter, 308 IS9CConfig3 function, 216 Date, setting, 358 Date/Time, configuration parameter, 352 Deleting a profile, 88 DeviceName, FTP Server, 253 DeviceURL, FTP Server, 253 DHCP, 122 Display full screen, 263 Docks, modem support, 4 DRAM, low battery shutdown, 3 Drawing mode, Pocket Word, 51 Drawing on the screen See also Notes Pocket Word, 51 Drivers DTR NPCP communications, 135 installing, 134 opening, 135 removing, 134 writing to, 135 closing, 130 communications, 132 I/O controls, 131 installing, 129 opening, 130 reading from, 130 removing, 129 writing to, 130 O Neil. See DTR printing DTR printing, 134 closing driver, 135 communications, 135 opening driver, 135 removing driver, 134 writing to driver, 135 dwAttrBufferSize IBarCodeReaderControl::QueryAttribute, 164 IBarCodeReaderControl::SetAttribute, 169 dwBufferSize IADC::QueryAttribute, 154 IS9CConfig2::GetGlobalAmble, 211 IS9CConfig2::SetGlobalAmble, 212 dwCommandBuffSize ISCP::GetConfig, 217 ISCP::SetConfig, 218 dwDataBufferSize IADC::Read, 156 IBarCodeReaderControl::Read, 165 dwLength IS9CConfig::SetCode128, 181 IS9CConfig::SetCode39, 177 IS9CConfig::SetCode93, 179 IS9CConfig::SetMatrix2of5, 186 IS9CConfig::SetMSI, 187 IS9CConfig::SetPlessey, 192 dwMaxNumElement, IS9CConfig2::GetCustomSymIds, dwNextMessageSize, IADC::QueryData, 155 dwNumberOfBeeps, IBarCodeReaderControl::IssueBeep, 207 163 dwNumBytes IS9CConfig::SetCodabar, 174 IS9CConfig::SetI2of5, 184 IS9CConfig::SetStandard2of5, 195 dwNumElement, IS9CConfig2::SetCustomSymIds, 208 dwReplyBuffMaxSize ISCP::GetConfig, 217 ISCP::SetConfig, 218 dwStructSize pImgBuffer, IImage::ReadSigCapBuffer, 222 pSigCapSpec, IImage::ReadSigCapBuffer, 221 dwTimeout IADC::Read, 156 IBarCodeReaderControl::Read, 166 IImage::ReadImage, 225 dwTotalBufferedBytes, IADC::QueryData, 155 E E-mail server getting connected, 72 setting up a service, 73 eAmbleId EAN, 362 IS9CConfig2::GetGlobalAmble, 211 IS9CConfig2::SetGlobalAmble, 212 configuration parameter, 293 13 user ID, 313 8 user ID, 313 default S9C settings, 181, 201 enumerations, 201 IS9CConfig::GetUpcEan, 198 IS9CConfig::SetUpcEan, 200 modifier characters, 220 ean13Check IS9CConfig::GetUpcEan, 199 IS9CConfig::SetUpcEan, 200 ean13Select ean8Check IS9CConfig::GetUpcEan, 198 IS9CConfig::SetUpcEan, 200 IS9CConfig::GetUpcEan, 199 IS9CConfig::SetUpcEan, 200 ean8Reencode IS9CConfig::GetUpcEan, 199 IS9CConfig::SetUpcEan, 200 IS9CConfig::GetUpcEan, 198 IS9CConfig::SetUpcEan, 200 ean8Select eAttr eAttribID IADC::QueryAttribute, 154 IADC::SetAttribute, 157 IBarCodeReaderControl::QueryAttribute, 164 IBarCodeReaderControl::SetAttribute, 167 382 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual eDepth, pSigCapSpec, IImage::ReadSigCapBuffer, 222 eDeviceFlags IS9CConfig::SetCodabar, 174 IS9CConfig::SetCode39, 177 eCheck IS9CConfig::SetCodabar, 174 IS9CConfig::SetI2of5, 184 IS9CConfig::SetMSI, 187 IS9CConfig::SetPlessey, 192 IS9CConfig::SetStandard2of5, 195 IS9CConfig2::SetCode11, 205 eCip128State, IS9CConfig::SetCode128, 181 eCLSI, IS9CConfig::SetCodabar, 174 eCode128, IS9CConfig2::SetPDF417Ext, 213 eDataType, IBarCodeReaderControl::Read, 165 eDecode IS9CConfig::SetCodabar, 174 IS9CConfig::SetCode128, 181 IS9CConfig::SetCode39, 177 IS9CConfig::SetCode93, 179 IS9CConfig::SetI2of5, 184 IS9CConfig::SetMatrix2of5, 186 IS9CConfig::SetMSI, 187 IS9CConfig::SetPlessey, 192 IS9CConfig::SetStandard2of5, 195 IS9CConfig::SetTelepen, 197 IS9CConfig2::SetCode11, 205 IS9CConfig2::SetPDF417Ext, 213 IADC::Initialize, 153 IBarCodeReaderControl::Initialize, 162 ITCDeviceOpen, 149 Editing a profile, 88 Edition information, 8 eEan128Ident, IS9CConfig::SetCode128, 181 eFormat IImage::ReadImage, 225 IS9CConfig::SetCode39, 177 IS9CConfig::SetStandard2of5, 195 IS9CConfig::SetTelepen, 197 pImgBuffer, IImage::ReadSigCapBuffer, 222 pSigCapSpec, IImage::ReadSigCapBuffer, 222 eLED, IBarCodeReaderControl::ControlLED, 161 eLengthId IS9CConfig::SetCodabar, 174 IS9CConfig::SetI2of5, 184 IS9CConfig::SetStandard2of5, 195 eMacroPdf, IS9CConfig::SetPDF417, 189 Embedded modules, SB555, 110 Encoded Code 39 concatenation, 363 full ASCII, 363 Ending a connection, 72 Enumerations Codabar, 175 Code 11, 206 Code 128, 182 Code 39, 178 Code 93, 180 Interleaved 2 of 5, 185 Matrix 2 of 5, 186 MSI, 188 PDF 417, 190 Index Plessey, 193 Standard 2 of 5, 196 Telepen, 198 UPC/EAN, 201 ePdf417Decode, IS9CConfig::SetPDF417, 189 ePdfAddressee, IS9CConfig::SetPDF417, 189 ePdfChecksum, IS9CConfig::SetPDF417, 189 ePdfControlHeader, IS9CConfig::SetPDF417, 189 ePdfFileName, IS9CConfig::SetPDF417, 189 ePdfFileSize, IS9CConfig::SetPDF417, 189 ePdfSegmentCount, IS9CConfig::SetPDF417, 189 ePdfSender, IS9CConfig::SetPDF417, 189 ePdfTimeStamp, IS9CConfig::SetPDF417, 189 Epson Escape Sequences, 128 Error messages comm port wedge, 232 tethered scanner, 232 ERROR_INSUFFICIENT_BUFFER IOCTL_HAL_ITC_READ_PARM, 265 IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM, 270 ERROR_INVALID_PARAMETER IOCTL_HAL_ITC_READ_PARM, 265 IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM, 270 eSS eSSChars, IS9CConfig::SetCode39, 177 eSymbology, IBarCodeReaderControl::Read, 165 eSymIdXmit, IS9CConfig2::SetSymIdXmit, 214 Ethernet communications setup, 86 creating a connection to an ISP, 69 to work, 71 ETSI GSM 07.05 interface specifications, 115 ETSI GSM 07.07 interface specifications, 115 European Article Numbering code. See EAN eVer, IS9CConfig2::SetCode11, 205 Excel. See Pocket Excel Exporting a profile, 802.11 radio module, 96 F Factory repair, xviii Favorite links, Pocket Internet Explorer, 62 File Explorer adding programs to Start menu, 28 Pocket PC, 25 removing programs, 28 File Transfer Protocol. See FTP Filter expression values, virtual wedge grid, 142 Find feature, Pocket PC, 25 fLedOn, IBarCodeReaderControl::ControlLED, 161 FlushBufferedData IADC::CancelReadRequest, 152 IBarCodeReaderControl::CancelReadRequest, 160 Folder behavior connected to e-mail server ActiveSync, 46 IMAP4, 46 POP3, 46 SMS, 46 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 383 Index FRAME_NOT_ACKED, 131 fScannerOn, IBarCodeReaderControl::TriggerScanner, 171 fSigCapEnable, IImage::Open, 227 FTP client, 256 configurable parameters, 252 BlockSize, 252 DeviceName, 253 DeviceURL, 253 IDNATarget, 254 ManifestName, 254 PauseAtStartup, 255 Root, 255 FTPDCMDS subdirectory, 259 heartbeat, 256 RTC 959, 259 server, 256 installing applications, 78 server requests CDUP, 256 CWD, 256 DELE, 256 HELP, 256 LIST, 256 MKD, 256 MODE, 256 NLST, 256 NOOP, 256 PASS, 256 PWD, 256 QUIT, 256 RETR, 256 RMD, 256 RNFR, 256 RNTO, 257 SITE, 257 SITE ATTRIB, 257 SITE BOOT, 258 SITE COPY, 258 SITE EXIT, 258 SITE HELP, 258 SITE KILL, 258 SITE LOG, 258 SITE PLIST, 258 SITE RUN, 258 SITE STATUS, 259 SITE TIMEOUT, 259 STOR, 257 SYST, 257 TYPE, 257 USER, 257 XCUP, 257 XCWD, 257 XMKD, 257 XPWD, 257 XRMD, 257 support, 256 web browsers, 259 FTPDCMDS subdirectory, FTP support, 259 Full screen display, 263 G GDI approach, 128 General Packet Radio Service. See GSM/GPRS Getting connected directly to an e-mail server, 72 infrared (IR) port, 67 ISP, 67 Pocket PC, 67 setting up an e-mail service, 73 to an ISP, 68 creating a modem connection, 68 creating an Ethernet connection, 69 to work, 70 creating a modem connection, 70 creating an Ethernet connection, 71 transfer items using infrared, 67 Global services and support center, xviii Gold plane on keypad, 281 Good read, configuration parameter beep duration, 322 beeps, 321 Grid data configuration parameter, 328 filtering, 141 GSM/GPRS, 110 antenna color code, 85 AT command set GEM350X, 116 MC45, 116 CORE module, 111 H HAL, verion of Pocket PC IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOTLOADER_VERINFO, 274 Header files IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO, 273 IADC.H, IADC functions, 151 IBARCODEREADER.H, IBarCodeReaderControl functions, 159 IS9CCONFIG.H IS9CConfig functions, 172 IS9CConfig2 functions, 204 ITCDEVMGMT.H, 149 Headset jack, external, 2 Highlighting text, Microsoft Reader, 61 Hotmail account, 53 I I 2 of 5. See Interleaved 2 of 5 I/O controls, NPCP driver, 131 iAspectRatio, pSigCapSpec, IImage::ReadSigCapBuffer, stopping server from application, 260 221 384 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual ID field values IOCTL_HAL_ITC_READ_PARM ITC_NVPARM_80211_INSTALLED, 268 ITC_NVPARM_80211_RADIOTYPE, 268 ITC_NVPARM_ANTENNA_DIVERSITY, 267 ITC_NVPARM_BLUETOOTH_INSTALLED, 268 ITC_NVPARM_CONTRAST, 266 ITC_NVPARM_DISPLAY_TYPE, 266 ITC_NVPARM_ECN, 266 ITC_NVPARM_EDBG_SUBNET, 266 ITC_NVPARM_EDG_IP, 266 ITC_NVPARM_ETHERNET_ID, 265 ITC_NVPARM_INTERMEC_DATACOLLEC-

ITC_NVPARM_INTERMEC_DATACOLLEC-

ITC_NVPARM_INTERMEC_SOFTWARE_CON-

TION_HW, 267 TION_SW, 267 TENT, 267 ITC_NVPARM_LAN9000_INSTALLED, 269 ITC_NVPARM_MANF_DATE, 265 ITC_NVPARM_MCODE, 266 ITC_NVPARM_RTC_RESTORE, 267 ITC_NVPARM_SERIAL_NUM, 265 ITC_NVPARM_SERIAL2_INSTALLED, 269 ITC_NVPARM_SERVICE_DATE, 266 ITC_NVPARM_SIM_PRO-

TECT_HW_INSTALLED, 269 ITC_NVPARM_SIM_PRO-

TECT_SW_INSTALLED, 269 ITC_NVPARM_VERSION_NUMBER, 266 ITC_NVPARM_VIBRATE_INSTALLED, 269 ITC_NVPARM_WAN_FREQUENCY, 268 ITC_NVPARM_WAN_INSTALLED, 268 ITC_NVPARM_WAN_RADIOTYPE, 268 ITC_NVPARM_WAN_RI, 267 IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM ITC_ DOCK_SWITCH, 270 ITC_ WAKEUP_MASK, 271 ITC_AMBIENT_FRONTLIGHT, 271 ITC_AMBIENT_KEYBOARD, 271 ITC_REGISTRY_LOCATION, 270 ITC_REGISTRY_SAVE_ENABLE, 270 Identification configuration parameter IDNA contact, 338 location, 340 name, 339 Unit Manager, 351 DeviceName, 253 DeviceURL, 253 IDNATarget, 254 ManifestName, 254 IDNATarget, FTP Server, 254 iid, ITCDeviceOpen, 149 IImage interface, 221 Index Image, acquisition features, 147 Image dimension, configuration parameter, 324 Imager beeper functions not available beeper frequency, 320 good read beep duration, 322 good read beeps, 321 control panel appet, data collection, 323 data collection parameters aimer LED duration, 323 data matrix, 308 image dimension, 324 QR code, 307 settings, 232 supported beeper functions, 317 functions, 323 symbologies, 289 supported symbologies, 147 symbologies not available CIP 128 French Pharmaceutical, 296 Code 11, 306 Code 128 FNC1 character, 297 EAN 128 ]C1, 296 Macro PDF, 300 Matrix 2 of 5, 304 Micro PDF 417, 302 Telepen, 305 symbology user IDs not available Codabar, 310 Code 11, 314 Code 128, 310 Code 39, 310 Code 93, 311 EAN 13, 313 EAN 8, 313 Interleaved 2 of 5, 311 Matrix 2 of 5, 313 MSI, 311 PDF 417, 311 Plessey, 312 Standard 2 of 5, 312 Telepen, 313 UPC A, 312 UPC E, 312 Unit Manager, 350 IMAP4, Folder behavior connected to e-mail server, 46 Import libraries ITCDEVMGMT.LIB, 149 ITCUUID.LIB IADC functions, 151 IBarCodeReaderControl functions, 159 IS9CConfig functions, 172 IS9CConfig2 functions, 204 Importing a profile, 802.11 radio module, 97 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 385 Index Inbox composing messages, 45 connecting directly to e-mail server, 42 Folder behavior connected to e-mail server, 46 getting connected, 67 managing e-mail messages and folders, 46 Pocket Outlook, 42 Pocket PC icon, 13 synchronizing e-mail messages, 42 using a message list, 43 using My Text, 24 INF files, creating, 236 Infrared (IR) port Pocket PC, 67 transfer items using, 67 receiving information, 67 sending information, 67 Input panel block recognizer, 17 keyboard, 17 letter recognizer, 18 methods available, 16 Pocket PC, 14 Pocket Word, 49 selecting typed text, 18 transcriber, 18 word suggestions, 17 Installation, site, xviii Installation functions, SETUP.DLL, 248 Installing applications using a storage card, 78 using CompactFlash cards, 78 using SecureDigital cards, 79 with ActiveSync, 77 with Application Manager, 78 with FTP Server, 78 Installing drivers DTR, 134 NPCP, 129 Instant messaging, 53 Pocket PC icon, 12 Intelliget Bar Code Unit IImage::ReadSigCapBuffer, 223 IImage::ReadSigCapFile, 224 Interface specifications, ETSI GSM 07.0x, 115 Interleaved 2 of 5, 366 configuration parameter, 303 user ID, 311 default S9C settings, 184 enumerations, 185 IS9CConfig::GetI2of5, 183 IS9CConfig::SetI2of5, 184 modifier characters, 219 Intermec Device Network Announcement. See IDNA Internet Explorer. See Pocket Internet Explorer Internet explorer Pocket PC 2002 edition, 8 software build version, 5 Internet Service Provider. See ISP IOCTL_GET_CPU_ID, 280 IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT, 275, 280 IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOT_DEVICE, 277 IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOTLOADER_VERINFO, 274 IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICE_INFO, 264 IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICEID, 272 IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO, 273 IOCTL_HAL_GET_RESET_INFO, 276 IOCTL_HAL_ITC_READ_PARM, 265 IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM, 270 IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT, 278, 280 IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT, 275, 280 IOCTL_LOAD_NDIS_MINIPORT, 98 IOCTL_NPCP_BIND, 131 IOCTL_NPCP_CANCEL, 131 IOCTL_NPCP_CLOSE, 131 IOCTL_NPCP_ERROR, 131 IOCTL_NPCP_FLUSH, 131 IOCTL_PROCESSOR_INFORMATION, 279 IOCTL_UNLOAD_NDIS_MINIPORT, 98 iOffsetX, pSigCapSpec, IImage::ReadSigCapBuffer, 221 iOffsetY, pSigCapSpec, IImage::ReadSigCapBuffer, 222 IrDA printing, 128 iResolution, pSigCapSpec, IImage::ReadSigCapBuffer, 222 IS9CConfig3 Data Matrix symbology, 216 imager settings, 216 QRCode symbology, 216 trigger settings, 216 ISP connecting to via Pocket PC, 68 creating a modem connection, 68 an Ethernet connection, 69 Pocket Internet Explorer, 62 Pocket PC, 67 ITC_ DOCK_SWITCH, 270 ITC_ WAKEUP_MASK, 271 ITC_AMBIENT_FRONTLIGHT, 271 ITC_AMBIENT_KEYBOARD, 271 ITC_BARCODE_LASER_GOOD_READ_LED, IBar-

CodeReaderControl::ControlLED, 161 ITC_DEVID_80211RADIO_INTEL_2011B, 268 ITC_DEVID_80211RADIO_MAX values ITC_DEVID_80211RADIO_INTEL_2011B, 268 ITC_DEVID_80211RADIO_NONE, 268 ITC_DEVID_80211RADIO_NONE, 268 ITC_DEVID_INTERMEC2D_IMAGER, 267 ITC_DEVID_OEM2D_IMAGER, 267 ITC_DEVID_SCANHW_MAX values ITC_DEVID_INTERMEC2D_IMAGER, 267 ITC_DEVID_OEM2D_IMAGER, 267 ITC_DEVID_SCANHW_NONE, 267 ITC_DEVID_SE900_LASER, 267 ITC_DEVID_SE900HS_LASER, 267 ITC_DEVID_SCANHW_NONE, 267 ITC_DEVID_SE900_LASER, 267 ITC_DEVID_SE900HS_LASER, 267 ITC_DEVID_WANRADIO_NONE, 268 ITC_DEVID_WANRADIO_SIEMENS_MC45, 268 ITC_DEVID_WANRADIO_SIERRA_SB555, 268 386 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual ITC_DEVID_WANRADIO_XIRCOM_GEM3503, 268 ITC_DHATTR_READFILTER IADC::SetAttribute, rgbData, 157 IBarCodeReaderControl::SetAttribute, 167 ITC_DHDEVFLAG_NODATA, ITCDeviceOpen, 149 ITC_DHDEVFLAG_READAHEAD IADC::Initialize, 153 IBarCodeReaderControl::Initialize, 162 ITCDeviceOpen, 149 ITC_FILE_OPEN_E, IImage::ReadSigCapFile, 224 ITC_IFTP_STOP, 260 ITC_IMGBUFF_TOO_SMALL_E IImage::ReadImage, 225 IImage::ReadSigCapBuffer, 223 ITC_INV_PARAMETER_E IImage::ReadImage, 225 IImage::ReadSigCapBuffer, 223 IImage::ReadSigCapFile, 224 ITC_KEYBOARD_CHANGE, CreateEvent(), 283 ITC_MAXFILTER_CHARS, IBarCodeReaderControl::Se-

ITC_MULTICLIENT_ENABLE, IADC::SetAttribute tAttribute, 167 eAttribID, 157 rgbData, 157 ITC_NVPARM_80211_INSTALLED, 268 ITC_NVPARM_80211_RADIOTYPE, 268 ITC_NVPARM_ANTENNA_DIVERSITY, 267 ITC_NVPARM_BLUETOOTH_INSTALLED, 268 ITC_NVPARM_CONTRAST, 266 ITC_NVPARM_DISPLAY_TYPE, 266 ITC_NVPARM_ECN, 266 ITC_NVPARM_EDBG_SUBNET, 266 ITC_NVPARM_EDG_IP, 266 ITC_NVPARM_ETHERNET_ID, 265 ITC_NVPARM_INTERMEC_DATACOLLEC-

ITC_NVPARM_INTERMEC_DATACOLLEC-

ITC_NVPARM_INTERMEC_SOFTWARE_CON-

TION_HW, 267 TION_SW, 267 TENT, 267 ITC_NVPARM_LAN9000_INSTALLED, 269 ITC_NVPARM_MANF_DATE, 265 ITC_NVPARM_MCODE, 266 ITC_NVPARM_RTC_RESTORE, 267 ITC_NVPARM_SERIAL_NUM, 265 ITC_NVPARM_SERIAL2_INSTALLED, 269 ITC_NVPARM_SERVICE_DATE, 266 ITC_NVPARM_SIM_PROTECT_HW_INSTALLED, ITC_NVPARM_SIM_PROTECT_SW_INSTALLED, 269 269 ITC_NVPARM_VERSION_NUMBER, 266 ITC_NVPARM_VIBRATE_INSTALLED, 269 ITC_NVPARM_WAN_FREQUENCY, 268 ITC_NVPARM_WAN_INSTALLED, 268 ITC_NVPARM_WAN_RADIOTYPE, 268 Index ITC_NVPARM_WAN_RI, 267 ITC_RDRATTR_GOOD_READ_BEEP_DURATION, IBarCodeReaderControl::SetAttribute, 167 ITC_RDRATTR_GOOD_READ_BEEPS_NUMBER, IBarCodeReaderControl::SetAttribute, 167 ITC_RDRATTR_GOOD_READ_LED_ENABLE, IBar-

CodeReaderControl::SetAttribute, 167 ITC_RDRATTR_SCANNER_ENABLE, IBarCodeRead-

erControl::SetAttribute, 167 ITC_RDRATTR_TONE_ENABLE, IBarCodeReader-

Control::SetAttribute, 167 ITC_RDRATTR_TONE_FREQUENCY, IBarCodeRead-

erControl::SetAttribute, 167 ITC_RDRATTR_VOLUME_LEVEL, IBarCodeReader-

Control::SetAttribute, 167 ITC_REGISTRY_LOCATION, 270 ITC_REGISTRY_SAVE_ENABLE, 270 ITC_RESULT_ERR_BADREGION_E IImage::ReadSigCapBuffer, 223 IImage::ReadSigCapFile, 224 ITC_RESULT_NO_BC_DECODED_E IImage::ReadSigCapBuffer, 223 IImage::ReadSigCapFile, 224 ITC_TIMEOUT_E, IImage::ReadImage, 225 ITU-T interface specifications, 115 K Keeping a to-do list, via Tasks, 37 KernelIoControl IOCTL_GET_CPU_ID, 280 IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT, 275, 280 IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOT_DEVICE, 277 IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOTLOADER_VERINFO, 274 IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICE_INFO, 264 IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICEID, 272 IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO, 273 IOCTL_HAL_GET_RESET_INFO, 276 IOCTL_HAL_ITC_READ_PARM, 265 IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM, 270 IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT, 278, 280 IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT, 275, 280 IOCTL_PROCESSOR_INFORMATION, 279 Key clicks bar code configuration, 370 configuration parameter, 354 Keyboard, Pocket PC input panel, 17 Keypad advanced remapping, 283 change notification, 283 driver registry settings, 282 planes, 281 remapping, 281 sample registry keys, 284 Knowledge Central, xviii 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 387 Index L Laser scanner configuration parameters, 286 data collection parameters beeper frequency, 320 beeper volume, 318 codabar, 292 codabar user ID, 310 code 11, 306 code 11 user ID, 314 code 128, 295 code 128 FNC1 character, 297 code 128 user ID, 310 code 39, 290 code 39 user ID, 310 code 93, 294 code 93 length, 294 code 93 user ID, 311 EAN-13 user ID, 313 EAN-8 user ID, 313 good read beep duration, 322 good read beeps, 321 interleaved 2 of 5, 303 interleaved 2 of 5 user ID, 311 macro PDF, 300 matrix 2 of 5, 304 matrix 2 of 5 user ID, 313 micro PDF 417, 302 MSI, 299 MSI user ID, 311 PDF 417, 300 PDF 417 user ID, 311 plessey, 298 plessey user ID, 312 prefix, 315 standard 2 of 5, 291 standard 2 of 5 user ID, 312 suffix, 316 telepen, 305 telepen user ID, 313 UPC-E user ID, 312 UPC-A user ID, 312 UPC/EAN, 293 virtual wedge, 325 virtual wedge code page, 329 virtual wedge grid, 328 virtual wedge postamble, 327 virtual wedge preamble, 326 SNMP configuration parameters identification contact, 338 identification location, 340 identification name, 339 security encryption key, 335 security read encryption, 333 security read-only community string, 331 security read/write community string, 332 security subnet mask, 309 security write encryption, 334 trap authentication, 336 trap threshold, 337 supported beeper functions, 317 symbologies, 289 supported symbologies, 147 symbologies not available data matrix, 308 Datamatrix, 307 LEAP, 802.1x profile, security information, 93 Letter recognizer, Pocket PC input panel, 18 Library, Microsoft Reader, 59 Line printing, 128 lpBytesReturned lpInBuf IOCTL_GET_CPU_ID, 280 IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOT_DEVICE, 277 IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOTLOADER_VERINFO, 274 IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICE_INFO, 264 IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICEID, 272 IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO, 273 IOCTL_HAL_GET_RESET_INFO, 276 IOCTL_HAL_ITC_READ_PARM, 265 IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM, 270 IOCTL_PROCESSOR_INFORMATION, 279 IOCTL_GET_CPU_ID, 280 IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT, 275 IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOT_DEVICE, 277 IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOTLOADER_VERINFO, 274 IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICE_INFO, 264 IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICEID, 272 IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO, 273 IOCTL_HAL_GET_RESET_INFO, 276 IOCTL_HAL_ITC_READ_PARM, 265 IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM, 270 IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT, 278 IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT, 275 IOCTL_PROCESSOR_INFORMATION, 279 IOCTL_GET_CPU_ID, 280 IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT, 275 IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOT_DEVICE, 277 IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOTLOADER_VERINFO, 274 IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICE_INFO, 264 IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICEID, 272 IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO, 273 IOCTL_HAL_GET_RESET_INFO, 276 IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT, 278 IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT, 275 IOCTL_PROCESSOR_INFORMATION, 279 lpInBufSize 388 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual lpOutBuf IOCTL_GET_CPU_ID, 280 IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT, 275 IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOT_DEVICE, 277 IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOTLOADER_VERINFO, 274 IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICE_INFO, 264 IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICEID, 272 IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO, 273 IOCTL_HAL_GET_RESET_INFO, 276 IOCTL_HAL_ITC_READ_PARM, 265 IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM, 270 IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT, 278 IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT, 275 IOCTL_PROCESSOR_INFORMATION, 279 LPT9 printer device, 129 M Macro PDF, configuration parameter, 300 Managing e-mail messages and folders, via Inbox, 46 ManifestName, FTP Server, 254 Matrix 2 of 5 configuration parameter, 304 user ID, 313 default S9C settings, 186 enumerations, 186 IS9CConfig::GetMatrix2of5, 185 IS9CConfig::SetMatrix2of5, 186 modifier characters, 219 Meetings, via Calendar, 31 Menus, Pocket PC settings, 26 MIBs ASN.1, 125 files, 125 object identifier, 126 OIDs, 126 Micro PDF 417, configuration parameter, 302 Microphone, internal, 2 Microsoft Developer Network Library. See MSDN library Microsoft Exchange e-mail account, 53 Microsoft Passport account, 53 Microsoft Reader books downloading, 58 reading, 60 removing, 61 features, 61 adding bookmarks, 61 adding drawings, 61 annotations index, 61 attaching notes, 61 copying text, 61 highlighting text, 61 searching for text, 61 Pocket PC, 58 using the library, 59 Microsoft Word. See Pocket Word Migrating applications, 80 Mini-Landline modems, 4 Mobile Favorites folder, Pocket Internet Explorer, 62 Index Modems card support, 4 creating a connection to an ISP, 68 to work, 70 MP3 files, Windows Media Player, 57 MSDN library, 260 MSI, 367 configuration parameter, 299 user ID, 311 default S9C settings, 187 enumerations, 188 IS9CConfig::GetMSI, 187 IS9CConfig::SetMSI, 187 modifier characters, 219 MSN account, 53 MSN Messenger about, 53 accounts Hotmail, 53 Microsoft Exchange e-mail, 53 Microsoft Passport, 53 MSN, 53 contacts chatting with, 55 working with, 54 Pocket PC icon, 13 setting up, 54 using My Text, 24 MultiMediaCards, card support, 5 103 103 102 102 104 N nBufferSize, IADC::SetAttribute, 157 nDepth, IImage::ReadImage, 225 NDIS_NET_AUTO_UNKNOWN, GetNetworkMode(), NDIS_NET_MODE_ESS, GetNetworkMode(), 103 NDIS_NET_MODE_IBSS, GetNetworkMode(), 103 NDIS_NET_MODE_UNKNOWN, GetNetworkMode(), NDIS_NET_TYPE_DS, GetNetworkType(), 102 NDIS_NET_TYPE_FH, GetNetworkType(), 102 NDIS_NET_TYPE_UNDEFINED, GetNetworkType(), NDIS_POWER_LEVEL_1, GetTXPower(), 102 NDIS_POWER_LEVEL_15, GetTXPower(), 102 NDIS_POWER_LEVEL_30, GetTXPower(), 102 NDIS_POWER_LEVEL_5, GetTXPower(), 102 NDIS_POWER_LEVEL_63, GetTXPower(), 102 NDIS_POWER_LEVEL_UNKNOWN, GetTXPower(), NDIS_RADIO_ASSOCIATED, GetAssocationStatus(), NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_AUTO, GetAuthentica-

NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_ERROR, GetAuthentic-

NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_OPEN, GetAuthentica-

tionMode(), 104 ationMode(), 104 tionMode(), 104 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 389 Index NDIS_RADIO_AUTH_MODE_SHARED, GetAuthen-

ticationMode(), 104 IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT, 275 IOCTL_PROCESSOR_INFORMATION, 279 NDIS_RADIO_POWER_MODE_CAM, GetPower-

NPCP printing, 129 Mode(), 105 Mode(), 105 105 Mode(), 105 NDIS_RADIO_POWER_MODE_MAX, GetPower-

NDIS_RADIO_POWER_MODE_PSP, GetPowerMode(), NDIS_RADIO_POWER_UNKNOWN, GetPower-

NDIS_RADIO_SCANNING, GetAssociationStatus(), 104 NDIS_RADIO_WEP_ABSENT, GetWepStatus, 104 NDIS_RADIO_WEP_DISABLED, GetWepStatus(), 104 NDIS_RADIO_WEP_ENABLED, GetWepStatus(), 104 NDIS_RADIO_WEP_NOT_SUPPORTED, GetWepSta-

about, 129 closing driver, 130 COM1 parameters, 129 communications, 132 driver I/O controls, 131 installation, 129 LPT9, 129 opening driver, 130 reading from driver, 130 removal, 129 sample code, 132 unit information control panel, NPCPTEST CAB file, tus(), 104 Network adapters 802.11b, 87 antenna color code, 85 Ethernet communications, 86 wireless printing, 120 WWAN radio options, 110 Network management. See SNMP Network type, 802.11 radio module, 89 nFilterChars IADC::SetAttribute, 157 IBarCodeReaderControl::SetAttribute, 167 nInBufSize Notes IOCTL_HAL_ITC_READ_PARM, 265 IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM, 270 creating a note, 41 drawing on the screen, 22 creating a drawing, 22 selecting a drawing, 22 Pocket Outlook, 40 Pocket PC icon, 13 recording a message, 23 creating a recording, 23 writing on the screen, 19 alternate writing, 21 converting writing to text, 20 selecting the writing, 19 tips for good recognition, 21 nOutBufSize IOCTL_GET_CPU_ID, 280 IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT, 275 IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOT_DEVICE, 277 IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOTLOADER_VERINFO, 274 IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICE_INFO, 264 IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICEID, 272 IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO, 273 IOCTL_HAL_GET_RESET_INFO, 276 IOCTL_HAL_ITC_READ_PARM, 265 IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM, 270 IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT, 278 344 writing to driver, 130 O O Neil printing See also DTR printer installing driver, 134 Object store Oldstyle device ID, 272 Onsite repair, xviii Opening drivers DTR, 135 NPCP, 130 IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT, 275 IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT, 278 IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT, 275 Operators, virtual wedge grid, 144 Other publications, xviii Owner information, Pocket PC settings, 26 P Page format printing, 128 Password Pocket Excel, 53 Pocket PC settings, 26 PauseAtStartup, FTP Server, 255 pBarCodeDataDetails, IBarCodeReaderControl::Read, 165 pbyFNC1, IS9CConfig::GetCode128, 180 PDF 417 about the laser scanner, 137 configuration parameter, 300 user ID, 311 default S9C settings, 190 enumerations, 190 extensions IS9CConfig2::GetPDF417ext, 213 IS9CConfig2::SetPDF417ext, 213 IImage::ReadSigCapBuffer, 223 IImage::ReadSigCapFile, 224 IS9CConfig::GetPDF417, 188 IS9CConfig::SetPDF417, 189 modifier characters, 220 pdwBufferSize, IS9CConfig2::GetGlobalAmble, 211 390 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Index pdwLength IS9CConfig::GetCode128, 180 IS9CConfig::GetCode93, 179 IS9CConfig::GetMatrix2of5, 185 IS9CConfig::GetMSI, 187 IS9CConfig::GetPlessey, 192 pdwNumBytes IS9CConfig::GetCodabar, 173 IS9CConfig::GetI2of5, 183 IS9CConfig::GetStandard2of5, 194 pePdf417Decode, IS9CConfig::GetPDF417, 188 pePdfAddressee, IS9CConfig::GetPDF417, 189 pePdfChecksum, IS9CConfig::GetPDF417, 189 pePdfControlHeader, IS9CConfig::GetPDF417, 188 pePdfFileName, IS9CConfig::GetPDF417, 188 pePdfFileSize, IS9CConfig::GetPDF417, 189 pePdfSegmentCount, IS9CConfig::GetPDF417, 188 pePdfSender, IS9CConfig::GetPDF417, 189 pePdfTimeStamp, IS9CConfig::GetPDF417, 188 peSS pdwNumElement, IS9CConfig2::GetCustomSymIds, 207 pdwReplyBuffSize IS9CConfig::GetCodabar, 173 IS9CConfig::GetCode39, 176 ISCP::GetConfig, 217 ISCP::SetConfig, 218 pdwTotalDiscardedBytes, IADC::CancelReadRequest, 152 peCheck peSSChars, IS9CConfig::GetCode39, 176 peSymIdXmit, IS9CConfig2::GetSymIdXmit, 214 peVer, IS9CConfig2::GetCode11, 205 pImgBuffer IS9CConfig::GetCodabar, 173 IS9CConfig::GetCode39, 176 IS9CConfig::GetI2of5, 183 IS9CConfig::GetMSI, 187 IS9CConfig::GetPlessey, 192 IS9CConfig::GetStandard2of5, 194 IS9CConfig2::GetCode11, 205 peCip128State, IS9CConfig::GetCode128, 180 peCLSI, IS9CConfig::GetCodabar, 173 peCode128, IS9CConfig2::GetPDF417Ext, 213 peDecode IS9CConfig::GetCodabar, 173 IS9CConfig::GetCode128, 180 IS9CConfig::GetCode39, 176 IS9CConfig::GetCode93, 179 IS9CConfig::GetI2of5, 183 IS9CConfig::GetMatrix2of5, 185 IS9CConfig::GetMSI, 187 IS9CConfig::GetPlessey, 192 IS9CConfig::GetStandard2of5, 194 IS9CConfig::GetTelepen, 197 IS9CConfig2::GetCode11, 205 IS9CConfig2::GetPDF417Ext, 213 peEan128Ident, IS9CConfig::GetCode128, 180 peFormat IS9CConfig::GetCode39, 176 IS9CConfig::GetStandard2of5, 194 IS9CConfig::GetTelepen, 197 peLengthId IS9CConfig::GetCodabar, 173 IS9CConfig::GetI2of5, 183 IS9CConfig::GetStandard2of5, 194 peMacroPdf, IS9CConfig::GetPDF417, 188 IImage::ReadImage, 225 IImage::ReadSigCapBuffer, 222 Planes, keypad, 281 Plessey, 367 configuration parameter, 298 user ID, 312 default S9C settings, 193 enumerations, 193 IS9CConfig::GetPlessey, 192 IS9CConfig::SetPlessey, 192 modifier characters, 220 pnBufferData, IADC::QueryAttribute, 154 pnBytesReturned IADC::Read, 156 IBarCodeReaderControl::Read, 165 Pocket Excel about, 52 creating a workbook, 52 Pocket PC icon, 13 Pocket Internet Explorer about, 62 adding programs, 27 AvantGo channels, 64 browing the Internet, 66 favorite links, 62 getting connected, 67 Mobile Favorites folder, 62 Pocket PC icon, 13 software build, 5 viewing mobile favorites and channels, 66 Pocket Outlook, 31 Calendar, 31 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 391 Index Pocket PC about, 8 ActiveSync, 29 basic skills, 11 Calendar, 31 command bar, 14 Contacts, 34 edition information, 8 getting connected, 67 Inbox, 42 input panel. See Input panel IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOTLOADER_VERINFO, 274 IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO, 273 MSN Messenger, 53 navigation bar, 14 Notes, 40 notifications, 15 status icon, 12 Pocket Excel, 52 Pocket Word, 47 pop-up menus, 15 programs, 13 status icons, 12 support URLs, 10 Tasks, 37 Today screen, 11 where to find information, 10 Windows Media Player, 57 writing on the screen, 19 Pocket Word about, 47 creating a document, 47 drawing mode, 51 Pocket PC icon, 13 recording mode, 51 tips, 53 typing mode, 49 writing mode, 50 POP3, Folder behavior connected to e-mail server, 46 Postamble configuration parameter, 327 with/without data, 327 Power control panel, battery status, 2 Pocket PC settings, 26 ppvObject ITCDeviceClose, 150 ITCDeviceOpen, 149 Preamble configuration parameter, 326 with/without data, 326 Prefix, configuration parameter, user ID, 315 Printer support, 128 IrDA printer driver, 128 NPCP printer driver, 129 O Neil printer driver, 134 Processor information, IOCTL_PROCESSOR_IN-

FORMATION, 279 Profiles 802.11 radio module, 87 basic information, 89 certificates, 95 import/export, 96 read-only, 94 scan list, 97 security information, 90 adding to unit, 88 deleting, 88 editing, 88 Programs, adding or removing, Pocket PC, 26 pSigCapSpec IImage::ReadSigCapBuffer, 221 IImage::ReadSigCapFile, 224 pStructSymIdPair IS9CConfig2::GetCustomSymIds, 207 IS9CConfig2::SetCustomSymIds, 208 pSystemTime, IADC::Read, 156 pszDevice, ITCDeviceOpen, 149 pszDeviceName IADC::Initialize, 153 IBarCodeReaderControl::Initialize, 162 pszFileName, IImage::ReadSigCapFile, 224 pwLength, IS9CConfig::GetCode39, 176 pwTotalDiscardedBytes, IBarCodeReaderControl::Cancel-

ReadRequest, 160 pwTotalDiscardedMessages IADC::CancelReadRequest, 152 IBarCodeReaderControl::CancelReadRequest, 160 Q QR code configuration parameter, 307 IS9CConfig3 function, 216 Quick Response code. See QR code R Radios See also Network adapters card support, 4 Reader commands, 357 configuration change, 357 date and time settings, 358 Reading from drivers, NPCP, 130 Reboot methods IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT, 280 IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT, 280 IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT, 280 Record button, recording a message, 23 Recording a message See also Notes Pocket Word, 51 Recording mode, Pocket Word, 51 392 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Recovery CD AutoCab method, 82 AutoRun system, 76 AUTOUSER.DAT file, 81 part numbers, xviii RegFlushKey() API, 262 S9C upgrade, 345 updating the system software, 79 RegFlush utility, 81 Registry FTP Server parameters, 252 keypad remapping, 282 sample view of key mapping, 284 save location, IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM, 270 writing to a storage card, 81 Registry settings AutoCfg, 122 AutoFTP, 261 AutoInterval, 122 AutoIP/DHCP, 122 DhcpMaxRetry, 122 DhcpRetryDialogue, 122 EnableDHCP, 122 keypad driver, 282 keypad planes alpha, 282 gold, 282 unshifted, 282 Related publications, xviii Removeable card support, 5 Removing drivers DTR, 134 NPCP, 129 Removing programs, Pocket PC, 26, 28 RFC 959, 259 rgbAttrBuffer IBarCodeReaderControl::QueryAttribute, 164 IBarCodeReaderControl::SetAttribute, 168 rgbBuffer IADC::QueryAttribute, 154 IS9CConfig2::GetGlobalAmble, 211 IS9CConfig2::SetGlobalAmble, 212 rgbCommandBuff ISCP::GetConfig, 217 ISCP::SetConfig, 218 rgbData, IADC::SetAttribute, 157 rgbDataBuffer IADC::Read, 156 IBarCodeReaderControl::Read, 165 Index IS9CConfig::SetI2of5, 184 IS9CConfig::SetStandard2of5, 195 rgbReplyBuff ISCP::GetConfig, 217 ISCP::SetConfig, 218 Root, FTP Server, 255 S S 2 of 5. See Standard 2 of 5 S_DEVICE_CONTENTION_E, IImage::Open, 227 S_DEVICE_NOT_OPENED_E IImage::CancelReadImage, 226 IImage::Close, 228 IImage::ReadImage, 225 IImage::ReadSigCapBuffer, 223 IImage::ReadSigCapFile, 224 IImage::Start, 226 IImage::Stop, 227 S_IMG_NOT_PRESENT_E IImage::Open, 227 IImage::Stop, 227 S_OK IImage::CancelReadImage, 226 IImage::Close, 228 IImage::Open, 227 IImage::ReadImage, 225 IImage::ReadSigCapBuffer, 223 IImage::ReadSigCapFile, 224 IImage::Start, 226 IImage::Stop, 227 S9C initialization, 138 IS9CConfig functions, 172 IS9CConfig2 functions, 204 IS9CConfig3 functions, 216 unit information control panel, upgrade files, 345 version number, 342 Sabre 1551E or 1553 See also Tethered scanner cabling, 232 settings, 232 Sample code, NPCP printing, 132 SB555 radio, 110 Scan list of profiles, 802.11 radio module, 98 Scanner, unit configuration parameters automatic shutoff, 355 backlight timeout, 353 date/time, 352 key clicks, 354 volume, 356 rgBeepRequests, IBarCodeReaderControl::IssueBeep, 163 rgbImageData, pImgBuffer, IImage::ReadSigCapBuffer, 222 rgbLengthBuff IS9CConfig::GetCodabar, 173 IS9CConfig::GetI2of5, 183 IS9CConfig::GetStandard2of5, 194 IS9CConfig::SetCodabar, 174 Scanner cabling, 232 Scheduling appointments and meetings, via Calendar, 31 SDK, unit information control panel, 345 SDMMC Disk, 80 Searching for text, Microsoft Reader, 61 SecureDigital cards card support, 5 installing applications, 78, 79 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 393 Index Security configuration parameter encryption key, 335 read encryption, 333 read-only community string, 331 read/write community string, 332 subnet mask, 309 write encryption, 334 Unit Manager, 350 Selected profile, 802.11 radio module, 97 Selecting, drawing via Notes, 22 Sending and receiving messages, via Inbox, 42 Serial port, modem support, 4 Service contract status, xviii Setting date and time, 358 Setting up an e-mail service, 73 SETUP.DLL, installation functions, 248 Signature capture IImage interface, 221 IImage::CancelReadImage, 226 IImage::Close, 228 IImage::Open, 227 IImage::ReadImage, 225 IImage::ReadSigCapBuffer, 221 IImage::ReadSigCapFile, 224 IImage::Start, 226 IImage::Stop, 227 Simple Network Management Protocol. See SNMP Site installations, xviii Site surveys, xviii SMS, Folder behavior connected to e-mail server, 46 SNMP, 125 about SNMP, 123 CMIP, 123 configuration parameters identification contact, 338 identification location, 340 identification name, 339 security encryption key, 335 security read encryption, 333 security read-only community string, 331 security read/write community string, 332 security subnet mask, 309 security write encryption, 334 trap authentication, 336 trap threshold, 337 control primitives, 123 multiple retrievals, 124 retrieval, 124 Unit Manager, 350 using the protocol, 123 SNMP OIDs aimer LED duration, 323 automatic shutoff, 355 backlight timeout, 353 beeper frequency, 320 volume, 318 codabar, 292 user ID, 310 code 11, 306 user ID, 314 code 128, 295 FNC1 character, 297 user ID, 310 code 39, 290 user ID, 310 code 93, 294 length, 294 user ID, 311 data matrix, 308 date/time, 352 default S9C settings, 210 EAN 13 user ID, 313 8 user ID, 313 good read beep duration, 322 beeps, 321 identification contact, 338 location, 340 name, 339 image dimension, 324 interleaved 2 of 5, 303 user ID, 311 IS9CConfig2::GetCustomSymIds, 207 IS9CConfig2::GetSymIdXmit, 214 IS9CConfig2::SetCustomSymIds, 208 IS9CConfig2::SetSymIdXmit, 214 key clicks, 354 macro PDF, 300 matrix 2 of 5, 304 user ID, 313 micro PDF 417, 302 MSI, 299 user ID, 311 PDF 417, 300 user ID, 311 plessey, 298 user ID, 312 prefix, 315 QR code, 307 security encryption key, 335 read encryption, 333 read-only community string, 331 read/write community string, 332 write encryption, 334 security subnet mask, 309 standard 2 of 5, 291 user ID, 312 suffix, 316 telepen, 305 user ID, 313 transmission option, 215 trap authentication, 336 threshold, 337 394 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual UPC A user ID, 312 E user ID, 312 UPC/EAN, 293 virtual wedge, 325 code page, 329 grid, 328 postamble, 327 preamble, 326 volume, 356 Symbology ID defaults, 219 Software Developer s Kit. See SDK Software Tools CD. See Tools CD Software versions, 6, 342 700 Series Computer, 5 unit information control panel applet, 342, 344 Speaker, 2 SSID (network name), 802.11 radio module, 89 Standard 2 of 5, 366 configuration parameter, 291 user ID, 312 default S9C settings, 196 enumerations, 196 IS9CConfig::GetStandard2of5, 194 IS9CConfig::SetStandard2of5, 195 modifier characters, 220 Start Menu, adding programs, 28 via ActiveSync, 28 via File Explorer, 28 Status icons, Pocket PC, 12 Stream device driver NPCPPORT.DLL, 129 ONEIL.DLL, 134 stTimeStamp, IBarCodeReaderControl::Read, 165 Suffix, configuration parameter, 316 Summary screen Calendar, 33 Contacts, 36 Tasks, 39 Support global services and support center, xviii web, xviii Symbologies, 360 scanning labels, 368 Unit Manager, 348 user IDs Codabar, 310 Code 11, 314 Code 128, 310 Code 39, 310 Code 93, 311 EAN 13, 313 EAN 8, 313 Interleaved 2 of 5, 311 Matrix 2 of 5, 313 MSI, 311 PDF 417, 311 Plessey, 312 Standard 2 of 5, 312 Telepen, 313 Index UPC A, 312 UPC E, 312 when not available imager, 298, 299, 300, 302, 304, 305, 306 laser scanner, 307, 308 Symbology ID, Unit Manager, 349 Synchronizing e-mail messages, via Inbox, 42 System status maintained, 4 szDest, EncryptWepKeyForRegistry(), 106 szFilter IADC::SetAttribute, 157 IBarCodeReaderControl::SetAttribute, 167 szSource, EncrypWepKeyForRegistry(), 106 T Tasks creating a task, 38 Pocket Outlook, 37 Pocket PC icon, 13 using the summary screen, 39 TCP/IP client, DHCP server, 122 Technical support, xviii Telepen configuration parameter, 305 user ID, 313 default S9C settings, 197 enumerations, 198 IS9CConfig::GetTelepen, 197 IS9CConfig::SetTelepen, 197 modifier characters, 220 Telephone numbers, xviii Testing AT commands, 117 Tethered scanner capabilities, 233 disabling, 231 enabling, 231 error messages, 232 limitations, 233 settings, 231 Text messages, Pocket PC, 24 Time, setting, 358 Tips for working, Pocket Excel, 53 TLS, 802.1x profile, 92 Today, Pocket PC settings, 26 Today screen, Pocket PC, 11 Tools CD base operating system files, 78 Bluetooth documentation, 120 CAB files, 4, 78, 344 CE Imager, 80 Comm Port Wedge CAB file, 344 management tools installed on desktop, 77 MIB files, 125 part number, xviii sample NPCP code, 132 SRDEVMGMT.CAB file, 286 Unit Manager CAB file, 347 Wireless Printing Development Guide, 120 wireless printing sample, 345 wireless printing SDK, 120 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 395 UDP broadcasts, IDNATarget parameter, 254 uiHeight, pSigCapSpec, IImage::ReadSigCapBuffer, 222 uiWidth, pSigCapSpec, IImage::ReadSigCapBuffer, 222 Unit, configuration parameters Index Tracking people, via Contacts, 34 Transcriber, Pocket PC input panel, 18 Transfer items using infrared getting connected, 67 receiving information, 67 sending information, 67 Trap configuration parameters authentication, 336 threshold, 337 Traps control panel appet, SNMP, 336 Unit Manager, 351 Troubleshooting, CAB Wizard, 250 TTLS, 802.1x profile, 93 Typing mode, Pocket Word, 49 Typing on the screen, Pocket Word, 49 U UDP FTPDCE, 256 within SNMP, 123 automatic shutoff, 355 backlight timeout, 353 date/time, 352 key clicks, 354 volume, 356 Unit information battery status, 343 CAB files, 344 ActiveX control tools, 345 Bluetooth stack, 344 Comm Port Wedge, 344 NPCP printer, 344 S9C Upgrade, 345 SDK, 345 Unit Manager, 345 Unit Manager help, 345 Windows configuration, 345 wireless printing demo, 345 wireless printing sample, 345 versions, 6, 342 700 Platform Build, 342 DataCollection Build, 342 S9C, 342 Unit Manager automatic shutoff, 355 backlight timeout, 353 data collection, 348 beeper/LED, 349 imager, 350 symbologies, 348 symbology ID, 349 virtual wedge, 350 date/time, 352 documentation, 347 key clicks, 354 reader commands, 357 changing configuration, 357 setting time and date, 358 SNMP, 350 identification, 351 security, 350 traps, 351 volume, 356 Unit manager installing applications, 78 unit information control panel, 345 help files, 345 Universal Product Code. See UPC Unshifted plane on keypad, 281 UPC, 362 configuration parameter, 293 A user ID, 312 E user ID, 312 default S9C settings, 201 enumerations, 201 IS9CConfig::GetUpcEan, 198 IS9CConfig::SetUpcEan, 200 modifier characters, 220 upcACheck IS9CConfig::GetUpcEan, 199 IS9CConfig::SetUpcEan, 200 upcAddOn2 IS9CConfig::GetUpcEan, 198 IS9CConfig::SetUpcEan, 200 upcAddOn5 IS9CConfig::GetUpcEan, 198 IS9CConfig::SetUpcEan, 200 upcAddOnDigits IS9CConfig::GetUpcEan, 198 IS9CConfig::SetUpcEan, 200 upcANumSystem IS9CConfig::GetUpcEan, 199 IS9CConfig::SetUpcEan, 200 upcAReencode IS9CConfig::GetUpcEan, 199 IS9CConfig::SetUpcEan, 200 upcASelect IS9CConfig::GetUpcEan, 198 IS9CConfig::SetUpcEan, 200 upceanDecode IS9CConfig::GetUpcEan, 198 IS9CConfig::SetUpcEan, 200 upcECheck IS9CConfig::GetUpcEan, 199 IS9CConfig::SetUpcEan, 200 upcENumSystem IS9CConfig::GetUpcEan, 199 IS9CConfig::SetUpcEan, 200 upcEReencode IS9CConfig::GetUpcEan, 199 IS9CConfig::SetUpcEan, 200 upcESelect IS9CConfig::GetUpcEan, 198 IS9CConfig::SetUpcEan, 200 Updating, bootloader, 77 396 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual URLs ActiveSync, 29 Adobe Acrobat Reader, 116 AT command interface CDMA/1xRTT SB555, 116 GPRS/GSM GEM350X, 116 GPRS/GSM MC45, 116 customer support, xviii full screen display, 263 Knowledge Central, xviii MIBs, 125 Microsoft Exchange e-mail account, 53 Microsoft Passport account, 53 Microsoft support, 10 MSDN library, 260 Pocket PC, 10 Pocket PC support, 10 web support, xviii User Datagram Protocol. See UDP Using a message list, via Inbox, 43 UUID, 272 V Video files, Windows Media Player, 57 Viewing mobile favorites and channels, Pocket Internet Explorer, 66 Virtual wedge bar code configuration grid, 371 postamble, 371 preamble, 371 configuration parameter, 325 code page, 329 grid, 328 postamble, 327 preamble, 326 data filtering, 141 filter expression values, 142 global amble operators, 144 Unit Manager, 350 VN_CLASS_ASIC, 266 VN_CLASS_BOOTSTRAP, 266 VN_CLASS_KBD, 266 Volume bar code configuration, 368 configuration parameter, 356 W WAN radio CORE module, 111 WAN radio IDs IS9CConfig2::GetGlobalAmble, 211 IS9CConfig2::SetGlobalAmble, 212 Index terminal application, 114 WAP pages, 62 connecting to an ISP, 68 Warm boot IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT, 278 IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT, 275 Web addresses. See URLs Web browsers, FTP support, 259 Web pages, 62 connecting to an ISP, 68 Web support, xviii Welch Allyn 1470 Imager cabling, 232 settings, 232 WEP encryption, 802.11 radio module, 91 Windows configuration, unit information control panel, WinCfg CAB file, 345 Windows Media files, Windows Media Player, 57 Windows Media Player, Pocket PC, 57 Wireless Application Protocol. See WAP pages Wireless network, 87 Wireless printing Bluetooth compatible module, 120 unit information control panel PDWPM0C CAB file, 345 WP_SAMPLE.CAB file, 345 Wireless TCP/IP installations, BlockSize parameter, 252 Wireless WAN AT command interface CDMA/1xRTT SB555, 116 GPRS/GSM GEM350X, 116 GPRS/GSM MC45, 116 CDMA/1xRTT, 110 GEM350x, 110 GSM/GPRS, 110 SB555, 110 testing AT commands, 117 wNumberOfMessages, IADC::QueryData, 155 Word documents. See Pocket Word Work creating a modem connection, 70 an Ethernet connection, 71 getting connected, 70 Writing mode, Pocket Word, 50 Writing on the screen See also Notes Pocket Word, 50 Writing to drivers DTR, 135 NPCP, 130 ITC_DEVID_WANRADIO_NONE, 268 ITC_DEVID_WANRADIO_SIEMENS_MC45, 268 ITC_DEVID_WANRADIO_SIERRA_SB555, 268 WAN rado CORE module phone application, 115 wStructSize, IBarCodeReaderControl::Read, 165 WWAN. See Wireless WAN X Xscale processor ID, IOCTL_GET_CPU_ID, 280 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual 397 Index Files Index Numbers 80211API.DLL, 100 80211CONF.EXE, 100 80211SCAN.EXE, 100 A AUTOUSER.DAT, 79 C CABWIZ.DDF, 249 CABWIZ.EXE, 236, 249 CEIMAGER.EXE, 80 CPL802.CPL, 100 D DEVICEID.H, 272 E EXITME.BIN, 259 F FTPDCE.EXE, 256, 259 AutoFTP, 261 FTP Server, 251 FTPDCE.TXT, 259 I IADC.H, IADC functions, 151 IADCDEVICE.H IADC::SetAttribute, 157 IBarCodeReaderControl::SetAttribute, 167 INTERMEC.MIB, 125 IS9CCONFIG.H IS9CConfig functions, 172 IS9CConfig2 functions, 204 ITCADC.MIB, 125 ITCDEVMGMT.H, 149 ITCDEVMGMT.LIB, 149 ITCSNMP.MIB, 125 ITCTERMINAL.MIB, 125 ITCUUID.LIB IADC functions, 151 IS9CConfig functions, 172 IS9CConfig2 functions, 204 M MAKECAB.EXE, 249 MOD80211.DLL, 100 N NETWLAN.DLL, 100 NPCPPORT.DLL, 129 NRINET.INI, 345 O OEMIOCTL.H IOCTL_GET_CPU_ID, 280 IOCTL_HAL_COLDBOOT, 275 IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOT_DEVICE, 277 IOCTL_HAL_GET_BOOTLOADER_VERINFO, 274 IOCTL_HAL_GET_OAL_VERINFO, 273 IOCTL_HAL_GET_RESET_INFO, 276 IOCTL_HAL_ITC_READ_PARM, 265 IOCTL_HAL_ITC_WRITE_SYSPARM, 270 IOCTL_HAL_REBOOT, 278 IOCTL_HAL_WARMBOOT, 275 ONEIL.DLL, 134 P PKFUNCS.H IOCTL_HAL_GET_DEVICEID, 272 IOCTL_PROCESSOR_INFORMATION, 279 R REBOOTME.BIN, 259 __RESETMEPLEASE__.T XT, 248 RPM.EXE, 241 RPMCE212.INI, 241 S SETUP.DLL, 240, 248 DllMain, 248 SRDEVMGMT.CAB, 286 T TAHOMA.TTF, 241 W WCESTART.INI, 241 398 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual Corporate Headquarters 6001 36th Avenue West Everett, Washington 98203 tel 425.348.2600 fax 425.355.9551 www.intermec.com 700 Series Color Mobile Computer Users Manual - November 2002

*961054031*

*961054031* REV B